JP2019024582A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characterized by its performance means, concerning a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed type game machine, or a reel type game machine (slot machine).SOLUTION: A decorative pattern display device 208 of a pachinko machine 100 is capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern and a change performance display. In the changer performance display, a holding icon is sometimes changed to a display of a different mode. In the change performance display, continuous variable displays of the decorative pattern a plurality of times are sometimes displayed a plurality of times. The change performance display is a display that includes a character display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 209

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, some of these game tables are provided with directing means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in production means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in the production means.

The above purpose is
Display means;
Hold means capable of storing start information as hold;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
The display means is means capable of displaying a change effect display,
The change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The change effect display is a display that may be displayed a plurality of times in a continuous display of the variation of the decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The change effect display is a display including a character display,
In the first case, the character display includes the change effect display (hereinafter referred to as “first change effect display”) and the next change effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect display”). May not be erased between,
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the production means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which entangled the operation means. It is a figure showing the movable accessory arrange | positioned in the back side rather than the 1st decorative design display apparatus 208L. It is the figure which showed the flow of an example from the pseudo | simulation rendition effect to the big hit without performing a transmission effect in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the transmission effect in steps. It is the figure which showed an example in which a transmission effect is performed in the state where the 1st movable accessory 251 exists in a 2nd position after a pseudo | simulation continuous effect is started. It is the figure which showed the example in which a permeation | transmission effect is performed in the state which has the 1st movable accessory 251 in a 1st position in steps. It is the figure which showed in steps the example when the transmission effect was performed even in the state which has the 1st movable accessory 251 in the state which was in the 2nd position after the transmission effect was performed in the 1st position. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect using the 1st movable accessory 251 and the 4th movable accessory 254 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example and modification which continue from FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example which continues from the same condition as FIG.20 (m) in steps. It is a figure which shows the example and modification which continue from FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in which the production | presentation using the 1st movable accessory 251 and the production | presentation of a timer notice were combined in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production | presentation shown in FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure which shows the further modification of the example shown in FIG.25 (b ')-the same figure (i'). It is a figure showing a plurality of examples of other productions using the fourth movable accessory 254. It is a figure which shows an example etc. which combined the transmission effect and the effect using a sub window in steps. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a transmission effect and various displays. It is the figure which put together the representative example of the production demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the modification of a structure of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows the structure of the production apparatus 206 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the transmission effect using the production | presentation apparatus 206 of 2nd Embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the transmission effect demonstrated using FIGS. It is a figure which shows the further modification etc. of the modification in the right column of FIG. It is a figure shown about the modification of the production | presentation of light-guide plate IL. It is a figure which shows the structure of the production | presentation apparatus 206 of 3rd Embodiment, and the structure of the modification. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the production apparatus of 3rd Embodiment, and its modification. It is a figure which shows the structure of the presentation apparatus 206 of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the production apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the presentation apparatus 206 of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of embodiment described so far. It is a figure which shows the example by which the different accessory from the past is arrange | positioned at the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated striking effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the description display applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows an example of meter production in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 80 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which performs a meter production | presentation and makes a big hit in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 82 in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production | presentation by the change ball icon cI demonstrated using FIG. 82 in steps. It is a figure for explaining in detail various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank improvement effect which tells whether a meter display changes stepwise. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 86 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the rank improvement effect shown in FIG. 87 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the re-lottery which may continue from FIG. 88 (41) in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini game which tells whether the meter display appears step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which a big hit is decided by the said fluctuation | variation when a meter display will be in a full tank state. It is a figure which shows the example in which a meter display is displayed in a holding frame in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which acquires and stocks a mini item when the meter of a meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which several items are stocked in one full tank of a meter display in steps. It is a figure which shows the example in which the meter display of a full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example which is digested without being stocked even if an item appears when the meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one side disappears. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 98 in stages. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which a display is started in the state which accumulated the meter display of the increase type to the middle. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter production | presentation by the meter display which shows a numerical value in steps. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 101 changes in accordance with the operation of the operating means. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect different from the meter effect demonstrated so far in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an error generate | occur | produces during the display of a meter display in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of error display ER1 shown in FIG. 104 in steps. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. (A) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on process, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process. It is a flowchart of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of special drawing related lottery processing, and (b) is a flowchart of lottery processing per special drawing. It is a flowchart of the process during symbol variation. It is a flowchart of a special figure display confirmation weight process. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start wait process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special power release process. It is a flowchart of a special power combination operation process. It is a flowchart of a special power combination control process. (A) is a figure explaining the content of the special electric power role operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of the special electric power role operation | movement data table. It is a flowchart of a special electric role remaining sphere detection process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power operation end process. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and 2 for special figures. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of direction device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of direction device 206. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 135 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 136 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition figure of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 142. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 143. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation using the fluctuation | variation icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 159 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 151. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM, and the change effect of a fluctuation icon. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 154, a modification, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect that a reservation frame becomes temporarily invisible. It is a figure which shows an example of the production where a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the production icon display area DIS. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a modification example and the like shown in FIG. 157. An effect example in which the navigation character YM is accompanied by the effect of the button hold icon is shown. It is a figure which shows an example with the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example with another period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of an effect in which a normal decoration pattern is entwined with a navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example by which a change notice display is displayed on standby. It is a figure which shows the example of production using the holding frame different from the holding frame demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure chest which has been used as an icon of a change notice notice so far appears as a hold icon. An effect example in which a meter effect is entangled with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. An effect example in which a telop effect is entangled with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 shown in FIG.133 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the other effect which entwined the navigation character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 shown in FIG.133 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the further another effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 shown in FIG.133 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 by which the 2nd display apparatus was provided below the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 (1st display apparatus). It is a figure showing an example when other productions are performed during execution of the production selected by the player. 175 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 175. FIG. It is the table | surface which put together about the music which can be output from the speaker. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example in which music selection described with reference to FIG. 177 is performed. FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 178. FIG. FIG. 133 shows an example of effects produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 180. It is a figure which shows the example in which the holding frame which the player selected is changed. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 182; It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine set to the setting in auto button mode. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 184 and the like. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 184. It is a figure explaining the overlap relationship with the display of the ball removal notification notified by generation | occurrence | production of a dish full tank error, and the other display of each brightness | luminance adjustment window. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a ball removal notification. It is a figure which shows the example in which a multiple types of error display is displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the payout control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the error alerting | reporting by the pachinko machine. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 3 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 4 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Examples 5-7 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Examples 7 and 8 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 9 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 10 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 11 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 12 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of an effect in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of an effect in Example 13 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of an effect in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of an effect in Example 14 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Examples 15-17 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Example 18 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in the modification of Example 19 and Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the modification of Example 19 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in Example 20 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and its modification in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in Examples 21 and 22 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of production in Example 22 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding change effect. It is a figure which shows the example in which a hold change 2nd effect is performed with a hold change 1st effect. The left half shows an example in which the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect are combined, and the right half shows an example of the hold change third effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the character BC of the head length of a reserve change 3rd effect appears. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a continuation of the right half example of FIG. 232 and a diagram showing a pending change fourth effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a pending | holding change 5th effect. It is a figure which shows the example in which a hold change 1st effect is performed with a hold change 5th effect. It is a figure which shows the other example in which a hold change 1st effect is performed with a hold change 5th effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of the hold change 4th effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which a hold change 5th effect is performed with a hold change 4th effect, and the example of a hold change 6th effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a pending | holding change 6th effect. It is a figure which shows the example in which the hold change 1st effect is performed in the state in which the curtain effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the other example which combined the curtain effect and the hold change 1st effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of a curtain effect and a pending | holding change effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of curtain production. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of direction device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of direction device 206. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decoration symbol performed in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the change effect containing a holding | maintenance icon change effect. (4) -2 shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 246, and (11) -1 and subsequent figures show examples of changing effects including timer notice effects. It is a figure which shows an example which combined the production | presentation and change production which used the timer display. FIG. 257 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example illustrated in FIG. 248 in which the effect using the timer display and the change effect are combined. It is a figure which shows the example performed in the aspect from which the change production using the character NJ of a ninja differs. It is the figure which showed the example in which an operation means display is displayed ranging over the continuous symbol fluctuation | variation display. It is the figure which showed the example in which the operation means display following FIG. 251 is displayed in steps. FIG. 262 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an operation means display is displayed step by step following FIG. 252; FIG. 196 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in a pachinko machine having a game board having a configuration different from the configuration of the game board shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 254 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which changes from 1st operation means display Od1 to 3rd operation means display Od3, and also changes from 3rd operation means display Od3 to 2nd operation means display Od2. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which has a period when two types of operation means displays are displayed simultaneously. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a modification of the example shown in FIG. 256, in which there is a period in which displays simulating operating means are simultaneously displayed. It is a figure which shows the example in which the operation means display is displayed on each of the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 208M and the 3rd decoration symbol display apparatus 208N in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case production differs before and after the change of an operation means display in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an effect is the same before and after the change of an operation means display in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which operated the chance button 136 stepwise during execution of the fluctuation | variation display of the 3rd symbol pd3 performed at the timing when the holding | maintenance increased. 263 is a diagram showing an example in a case where the operation of the chance button is delayed in the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which the operation means display after the chance button 136 is operated once disappears in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method of an operation means display. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail. Note that the enclosed type here means an enclosed type gaming machine or the like that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inside of the front frame door 106 can be opened. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door open sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable unit, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. The ball is paid out to the person.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In this game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are only required to be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end portion of 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position separated from the left side toward the left). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position distant from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the direction of contacting and separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Furthermore, there is no limitation on the number of decorative symbol display devices, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one, or may be a pachinko machine having only two. It may be a pachinko machine provided with two or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device as used herein means that at least a part of the display screen (may be only part or all) may be in a transmissive state, that is, transparent. It is a possible device. In other words, the device can change the light transmission amount in at least a part of the display screen. As a specific configuration, a known configuration may be used. For example, a liquid crystal cell, a shutter (adjusting means), and a light source are sequentially arranged from the front side. In a liquid crystal cell, a liquid crystal substance is filled between two transparent glass substrates provided with transparent electrodes that are opposed to each other with a gap, and light passes through the liquid crystal by changing the alignment state of the liquid crystal by applying a voltage to the transparent electrode. It changes the state. The liquid crystal cell is driven and controlled according to the acquired image data to display an image. The shutter is configured to be switchable between a closed state in which it becomes cloudy and an open state in which it becomes transparent. As this shutter, for example, a so-called liquid crystal shutter can be used. That is, the shutter is configured by two-dimensionally arranging elements that transmit (open state) and block (closed) light by causing an alignment change of liquid crystal molecules by applying or removing an electric field to the liquid crystal substance. The closed state of the shutter is a state in which the light source functions as a backlight of the liquid crystal cell, and the open state of the shutter is a front side through the liquid crystal cell for an accessory disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is a state which can be visually recognized from. The accessory arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described later. The shutter is controlled so that only an arbitrary part can be opened, but may be controlled so that only a predetermined part can be opened. It is also possible to open the entire surface. In addition, the liquid crystal cell and the shutter are shared to create a partially transmissive state and a non-transmissive state, and an image can be displayed (reproduced) in the non-transmissive portion, and an image cannot be displayed (reproduced) in the transmissive portion. It is good.

  Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be transmissive liquid crystal display devices, or only one of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a lens cut in the transmission region. An irradiating means (light emitting body) such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position in the vicinity of the side edge of the light guide plate, and the light radiated from the irradiating means is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region is predetermined. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. For example, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut that is shaped like a character's face or a lens cut that simulates an effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable prize winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in a non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N described above are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize part or all of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative design to the extent that the player can identify the game. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield everything. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both the shielding means and the effect moving means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of executing the advance / retreat operation and the transmission part 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect moving means.

  Furthermore, a family crest member 224E (see FIG. 46, etc.) (not shown) is prepared as the effect moving means. The family crest member 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the operation starts, the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as control means, or the main control part 300 can be regarded as the first control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative design. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and , A detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, and a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit 181. From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the A VDP 434 (video display) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.・ Processor) is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, an eight-story role 224Fa, a general role 224Fb, and a family crest role 224E). Based on a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E, and detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to N, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, 224 E may be controlled, or any one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, referring to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are provided. The types of special maps and general maps to be stopped will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started. The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the fixed display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 5A shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in a special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, the “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” are in the same state as the “special drawing F”, but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different from each other. The special interest G, “special H” and “special F” are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the right In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Switch the display with to “decorative pattern change display”. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbols change at a high speed for each symbol display area (scrolled). When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  Further, among the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a single decorative symbol display device or a plurality of decorative symbol display devices has a fifth symbol. It may be displayed. The fifth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative design shown in FIG. 5B may be reduced, or may be a number having a display form different from the display form of the decorative design shown in FIG. When the fifth symbol is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N also displays the symbol. It is a kind of means. When the 5th symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the 5th symbol is displayed in an area outside the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M. The 4th symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is changing or being stopped.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes, for each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, a counter for generating a big hit special figure determining random number counter initial value, a big hit special figure determining random number counter, and a small hitting time. Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, initial value setting, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer numbers for special drawings and for universal maps, and these counters determine timer numbers that can take values ranging from 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice after the absence of the detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving unit. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is finished, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again by using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the determination in advance is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 5A is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Here, the determination result of the special figure is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a pre-read information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a pre-read information temporary storage part for special figure 2 similarly divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure predetermination result (also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). Pre-determination based on the started information is not performed, and notification (pre-reading notice) of the pre-determination result is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 6B, the common figure related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as a general figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in any one of the display modes (common figure B shown in FIG. 5C). In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 A special figure 2 in operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit Production in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period during which the image for informing the player of the end of the game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Information indicating the waiting period is set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting region) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In the special symbol determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table the special bonus 2 special random number value belongs to, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in a very shortened special figure fluctuation time. Timer 2 will have a special figure fluctuation stop period of 5 seconds, resulting in a reduced special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure variation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Normal reach is generally a stop display (strictly a temporary stop) of decorative symbols in which two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are equal (first stop and second stop are performed). ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of holds, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of holds shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for determining the timer number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a round number designation command, information representing the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like an image for notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit game is to end. And the jackpot game ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom pan full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening / closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special diagram display device 212, the second special diagram display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. Before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving the operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operating means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and for the movable means control, the second sub control unit 500 reads the effect read here. A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is an operation command (movement command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309. The control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  The above description is the image reproduction processing for the transmissive liquid crystal display device. However, the CPU 404 controls the transmissive liquid crystal display device to increase the light transmission amount only partially or entirely on the display screen. Also do. If this control is not performed, the transmissive liquid crystal display device is in an initial state where an image is displayed (reproduced) on the display screen. On the other hand, in the region where the amount of light transmission is increased by performing this control, the accessory or the like arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is easily visible from the front side over the region. However, without performing this control, depending on the color (for example, yellow, white, etc.) of the image reproduced on the display screen, the accessory placed on the back side may be visible.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing advancing and retreating operation, transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, and eight-position movable object that can be moved up and down are provided from the first sub-control unit 400. When a control command relating to 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which is also a family crest character 224E that can be moved up and down, is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E are performed. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following figures unless otherwise noted). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In FIG. 9, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided at the center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is located to the right of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. Four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variation icon c is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9B. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or the change icon is expressed as moving. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Note that, as described above, the hold icon or the fluctuation icon corresponds to the icon related to the symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special symbol 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that. These fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative symbols.

  In addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, FIG. 9 includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. It is shown.

  In addition, FIG. 9 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, the white display indicates the white lighting state or the non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Represents the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lit” is used here, it may be “flashing” (the same applies hereinafter).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of the castle town. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 9 (a), both the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 display a stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a random pattern. A certain “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1” is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle holding icons, which are the holding indications in FIG. Thus, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 9B, the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also started. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is updated (varied display) continuously in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Only, and a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. Up to now, the decorative symbol variation display that has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c has been reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An arrow display 136b and a character display “push” as a prompt display for prompting (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid Are displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9D starts to light in red and prompts to be pressed.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. 9 (h). doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (h), the character “super reach A” is displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. Further, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “unfortunate” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 11 (h ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol “Lack of decoration 3” − “Decoration 1” − “Decoration 3” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The combination is stopped. Even if “unfortunately” is displayed, there may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control for accepting only the acceptance period may be performed.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission part 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 10A shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission portion 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state where it is inclined forward as shown in FIG. 10B, it can vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmission part 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 10C shows a state in which the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 10 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated. It should be noted that only one type of examples among the plurality of types of operation means listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  Further, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is larger than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operation means B is inferior in the number of functions than the operation means A.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

  The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “liquid crystal”, the operation data in the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb, and the family crest character 224E is “movable means”, and the audio output data from the speaker 120 is “ “Sound”, frame lamp 122, LED, and light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and vibration data of operation means A is displayed as “vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in No. 2 becomes the production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in FIG. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data after the operation of the operation means B can be used for the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED”. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the production No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C, “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, a notification that prompts the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation valid state, but the operation means B related effects are started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation valid state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effects” may be effects that always start even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A related effects” may also be effects that always start even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation effective state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Also, as described with reference to FIG. 12A, when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. An arrow in each of FIGS. 13A to 13C represents a vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (a) is an example during the variation display of the decorative symbol. While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, a judgment effect is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge effect here is a judge effect for a big hit, and corresponds to an example of a first effect. This first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). The first effect is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation variation display. Eventually, the fluctuation variation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, and therefore the fluctuation variation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Thus, the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), an effect such as vibration of the operating means A is ended before notifying the result related to the player's profit, such as a confirmation display, so that the player can concentrate on notifying the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and a judgment effect is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is notified that the specific winning mouth (for example, the V winning mouth) is aimed at the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning mouth (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (b), if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, so the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (c) is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and at the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is started. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the pseudo continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

  The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit is made in the variation display during the variation display of the decorative pattern, or a judge showing the end in the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example, the period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as effective, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. The Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, and the vibration of the operation unit A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are the same, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A vibrates can be secured for a certain period. The final judge effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  Next, the accessory disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a movable accessory arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 14A, the left diagonal front is the front side, and the right diagonal back side is the back side. A first movable accessory 251 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Characters “Chance” are displayed on the first movable combination 251 and an LED is built in. The first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 14A is in a second display mode (for example, a blue display mode). Lights up. A plurality of types of lighting modes and flashing modes are prepared for this LED. The first movable accessory 251 is a kind of production means, and is also a moving means that can move from the initial position to the first position via the second position.

  Here, for example, the first display mode corresponds to a white display mode, the second display mode corresponds to a blue display mode, the third display mode corresponds to a green display mode, and the fourth display mode is It corresponds to a red display mode, the fifth display mode corresponds to a gold display mode, and the sixth display mode corresponds to a rainbow color display mode. Various LEDs, various icons, and various displays can be displayed in the first display mode to the sixth display mode. Among the display modes of the first display mode to the sixth display mode, the display mode having a larger number is a display mode that is more advantageous to the player. For example, a display mode with a larger number may indicate that the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit is higher or that a certain effect is likely to be started. What has been described here is the same for each subsequent production example. For example, the second display mode is blue lighting or light emission, and the fourth display mode is red lighting or light emission.

  A fourth movable accessory 254 is disposed further on the back side than the first movable accessory 251. The fourth movable combination 254 is provided with LEDs 2541 to 2543 in the upper, middle, and lower stages, respectively. In the fourth movable combination 254 shown in FIG. 14A, any LED 2541 to 2543 is lit in the second display mode. doing. Note that the upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543 can be individually turned on, turned off, or blinked, and a plurality of types of lighting modes and blinking modes are prepared for each of these three LEDs 2541 to 2543. A lighting mode and a flashing mode are also prepared. In the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14A, any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 is lit in the second display mode. The fourth movable accessory 254 is also a kind of effect means, and is also a moving means that can move from the initial position. However, the fourth movable accessory 254 may be fixedly arranged without moving. In addition, since the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 are arranged so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction, they do not collide even if both move simultaneously, but both 251 and 254 are moved in the front-rear direction. You may arrange them. In this case, the movement may be controlled so that the two 251 and 254 do not interfere with each other, or the movable areas may not be overlapped in the first place. Alternatively, the effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 may not be executed simultaneously. That is, when the first movable accessory 251 is in a visually recognizable state, the fourth movable accessory 254 is in an invisible state and is turned off. Note that the fourth movable accessory 254 may be moved as long as it is not visible, or may remain stationary. When the fourth movable combination 254 is in a visually recognizable state, the first movable combination 251 is turned off. Note that the first movable accessory 251 may be moved as long as it is invisible, or may remain stationary.

  FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the first movable accessory 251 moves. In FIG. 14B, a first movable accessory 251 indicated by a solid line represents the first movable accessory in the initial position. The initial position of the first movable accessory 251 is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (a position on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the first movable accessory 251 is its initial position. Can be moved to the second position and the first position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second position is on the back side of the upper part of the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first position is on the back side of the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Become. In FIG. 14B, the first movable combination 251 in the second position is represented by a dotted line, and the first movable combination 251 in the first position is represented by a one-dot chain line.

  The first movable accessory 251 can be stopped at any position between the initial position and the first position, but may be stopped only at the second position. Further, it may be possible to move beyond the first position to the upper back side of the left symbol display area 208a.

  In a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before reach, etc.), the first movable accessory 251 The effect of the first notice is easier to execute in the first position than in the second position. The details of the effect of the first notice here will be described later. For example, an effect of a notice (so-called normal notice) regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed, such as a pseudo-ream effect, a super reach effect, It may be a change effect of the display mode of the fluctuation icon. However, the effect of the first notice may be an effect of prefetching notice. Further, in a certain state (for example, the state before the special symbol confirmation display (during symbol variation display), the state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, the state before reach, etc.), the first movable accessory 251 In the case of being in the first position, it may be easier to finally determine and display the big hit symbol form than in the case of being in the second position. That is, the expectation degree (reliability) of the big hit may be high. Furthermore, even if the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, the first notice effect may be executed, and the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. However, when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, the first notice effect may not be executed at all, and the jackpot symbol form may be finally displayed. There is no need.

  It should be noted that the first movable accessory 251 may move or emit light even in a big hit game start effect or the like.

  FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating a state in which the fourth movable accessory 254 moves. In FIG. 14C, a fourth movable accessory 254 indicated by a solid line represents the fourth movable accessory in the initial position. The initial position of the fourth movable accessory 254 is also a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the initial position is a position on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth movable accessory 254 is movable from the initial position to the seventh position, the eighth position, and the ninth position that overlap the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The seventh position is on the back side of the left symbol display area 208a in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eighth position is on the back side of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position is on the back side of the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 14C, the fourth movable accessory 254 at the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, the fourth movable accessory 254 at the eighth position is indicated by a one-dot chain line, and the fourth movable accessory at the ninth position. 254 is represented by a two-dot chain line.

  The fourth movable accessory 254 can be stopped at any position between the initial position and the ninth position, but may be stopped only at the seventh position and the eighth position. Further, the fourth movable accessory 254 may be movable in addition to the position described with reference to FIG.

  In a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before reach, etc.), the fourth movable accessory 254 is The first notice effect is easier to execute in the 8th position than in the 7th position, and the 9th position is more in the 9th position than in the 8th position. It is easy to produce 1 notice. Further, in a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before reach, etc.), the fourth movable accessory 254 In the case of the eighth position, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than in the case of the seventh position, and the case of the ninth position is in the eighth position. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the case. In addition, the variation of the decoration pattern in which only the effect using the first movable accessory 251 out of the effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 is performed is fourth. The variation display of the decorative symbol in which the effect using the movable accessory 254 is performed may be easier to display the final display of the big hit symbol mode. In other words, it is a relationship of the degree of expectation of the big hit, and only the effect using the first movable accessory 251 of the effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 was performed. Rather than the decorative symbol change, the decorative symbol variation in which only the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 out of the effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the fourth movable accessory 254 is performed. It may be easier to display the final display of the big hit symbol mode. Alternatively, the relationship between the degree of expectation of jackpots is the reverse of the relationship described here (the direction using the fourth movable accessory 254 is easier to hit), the direction using the first movable accessory 251 May be a big hit).

  It should be noted that the fourth movable accessory 254 may also move or emit light in the start effect or the like of the big hit game.

  As described above, the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 described with reference to FIG. 14 are effects examples in which these movable actors are not shown among the example effects described below. Applicable. For example, the first example, the second position, and the seventh position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the example shown in FIGS. 33 to 38, the example shown in FIG. 40, and the example shown in FIG. The region corresponding to the ninth position may be partially made transparent, and the first movable accessory 251 and / or the fourth movable accessory 254 may be moved to each position.

  As one of the characteristic effects in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, an effect (hereinafter referred to as a transmission effect) performed by increasing the amount of light transmission in a part of the display screen of the first decorative display device 208 </ b> L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Said).

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the flow from the pseudo-continuous effect to the big hit without performing the transmission effect in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 15, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Further, in order to distinguish between the state where the transmission effect is performed and the state where the transmission effect is not performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmission liquid crystal display device, a normal state where the transmission effect is not performed (light In a state where the amount of transmission is low), the entire display screen is displayed in gray, and the region where the transmission effect is performed (the region where the amount of transmitted light is increased) is displayed in white. Hereinafter, these are the same up to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a change icon at the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. In this hold icon display area, one hold icon is displayed on each pedestal. At the timing shown in FIG. 15A, three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, and a first hold icon h11, a second hold icon h12, and a third hold icon h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Has been. Note that the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are all in the default display mode (first display mode: white circular display mode). On the other hand, only the first hold icon h11 is in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information regarding games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. Although nothing is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 15A, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, and may display a notice display or a demonstration effect display. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15A, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the clear sky background display. This “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” combination of decorative symbols is a combination of loses, but is also a chance eye combination. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by stopping and displaying the combination of chances. Although the variation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 15A, the variation icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Furthermore, the state of the 4th symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2 is shown in the upper right of each figure, and the 4th symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special Fig. 1 is a square, and the fluctuation of the special Fig. 1 is shown. Lights white during display, and lights up in a lost lighting mode (in this case, a gray lighting mode) or a jackpot lighting mode (in this case, a black lighting mode) during the stop display in FIG. Moreover, the special figure 2 4th symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 is circular, and lights in white during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, and during the stop display of the special figure 2, the losing lighting mode ( Here, the light is turned on in a gray lighting mode) or a jackpot lighting mode (here, a black lighting mode). Below that, the state of the chance button 136 is also shown. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 15A is lit in the first display mode.

  In FIG. 15B, the variable display of special figure 1 has been started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. High speed fluctuation of the decorative design is performed in each region 208c. Further, in FIG. 15A, the first hold icon h11, which is the second display mode that is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, is displayed as the variation icon h0 in FIG. 15B. In FIG. 5B, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also the second display mode, and is displayed in the normal preview display mode. When the variation icon h0 is displayed in the normal notice display mode, the transmission effect is easier to perform than in the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. I will not. Further, the hold icon is shifted by one shift, and in FIG. 15B, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which are the default display modes, are displayed.

  In FIG. 15D, the “continuation” decorative symbol which is a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display of the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol is a display indicating that the pseudo continuous effect is started. Note that “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation) in the left symbol display area 208a, and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation) in the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 15E, re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and a character display “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-continuous times is displayed on the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b. Note that the greater the number of pseudo-continuations, the higher the degree of expectation (big hit reliability) for the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. That is, the character display representing the pseudo-continuous number “× 3” has a higher expectation than the character display representing the pseudo-continuous number “× 2”.

  In FIG. 15 (g), the decorative symbol “continuation”, which is a pseudo-continuous symbol, is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation) again in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a character display of “× 3” representing the number of pseudo consecutive times is displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (i), the pseudo-continuous effect is ended and the super reach effect is started. The super reach production here is a swordsman reach production. In addition to the super reach production, there are an okake reach production and a princess discovery reach production, which will be described later, but the swordsman reach production has a higher expectation of the big hit than the okake reach production. In addition, the princess discovery reach production has a higher expectation of the big hit than the trick reach production. In the swordsman reach production and the princess discovery reach production, the swordsman reach production may have a higher expectation of jackpot, or vice versa. As shown in FIG. 15 (i), when the swordsman reach production is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears. Instead, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, when the swordsman reach production is started, the UI unit UI3 disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, and only the change icon h0 continues to be displayed. Furthermore, since the hold icons h11 and h12 are not displayed, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this hold number display, the number on the left (here “2”) represents the number of holds in FIG. 1, and the number on the right (here “0”) represents the number of holds in FIG. In addition, the background display changes in the swordsman reach production.

  In FIG. 15 (j), the main character Tono YM and the enemy swordsman KG confront each other. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The later state, that is, the state after winning the game by pulling out the swords, is displayed, but it is still unclear which side won.

  In FIG. 15 (l), the button effect is started. The button production here corresponds to the final judge production which displays which of Tonosama YM and swordsman KG has won. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136 that has been lit in the first display mode is changed to the fourth display mode. Further, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (l), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode, and an operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. An arrow display 136b as a prompting display for prompting, a character display of “blow”, and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed. . A part (both ends) of the remaining period meter display 136c overlaps a part of each of Tonosama YM and swordsman KG.

  An effect related to the chance button 136 is referred to as a button effect. The button effect refers to an effect related to operation means other than the chance button 136 (for example, the transmission unit 191, the second chance button, and an operation lever). The same applies to the following description.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (l), the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m), the button images 136a-c disappear. The scene where Tonosama YM fell is displayed. That is, the enemy swordsman KG wins, and the current symbol change display is lost. In the fifth symbol pd5 displayed on the upper right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m), the combination of loss (“6”-“7”-“6”) fluctuates. When the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting in the first display mode.

  Next, an example of a big hit will be described. In FIG. 15 (l), which is a modified example of FIG. 15 (l-1), the button effect is also started, but in this button effect, the button image 136a is displayed large, and a part of the button image 136a is displayed. However, it overlaps with each part of Tonosama YM and swordsman KG. Thus, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the display (operation promotion display) displayed in the button effect, and depending on the display mode, the success rate of the effect (here, the probability that Tonosama YM wins) and the jackpot Expectation may change.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (l-1), the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. ˜c disappears, and the display is temporarily switched to the background display in which the characters “celebration” are displayed on the upper left. In the fifth symbol pd5 displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of jackpots (“6” − “ 6 "-" 6 ") have begun to swing. It should be noted that the background display in which the characters “celebration” are displayed on the upper left may be a background display that notifies that Tonosama YM will win, or may be a background display that notifies the jackpot confirmation. Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (m ′), a scene in which the swordsman KG falls is displayed. That is, Tono-sama YM wins and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (n), the decorative symbol display is restored in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Then, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is fixedly displayed. In addition, the stop display is also performed on the fifth symbol pd5. Even if the confirmation display is performed, the display of the UI unit UI3 is not resumed (return display). However, when the confirmation display is performed, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be resumed, or the confirmation display of the big hit In such a case, the return display may not be displayed.

  As described above, the effect example described with reference to FIG. 15 is an effect example in which the transmission effect is not performed. However, if the change icon is a normal notice display mode, the transmission effect is always performed. Alternatively, in the case of a big hit, a transmission effect may be always performed. Further, even in the case of a loss, a transmission effect may be performed. Alternatively, there may be a case where a big hit is made without the transmission effect.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the transmission effect in stages.

  In the following, the description will be focused on the difference from the example from the pseudo-continuous effect to the big hit without performing the transmission effect described with reference to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 16A, the combination of lost decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” that is a combination of chance eyes is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a second display mode that is one of the display modes of the prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 16B, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this stage, the first movable accessory 251 is in an initial position removed from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 16C, the first movable accessory 251 that was in the initial position moves to the second position. In FIG. 16C, the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is represented by a dotted line. The first movable accessory 251 represented by this dotted line is in the extinguished state. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is in a normal state where the transmission effect is not performed as a whole (a state where the amount of light transmission is low), and the unlit first movable accessory 251 that has moved to the second position is the front surface. Visible from the side. Depending on the color of the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the normal state, the first movable accessory 251 on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be visually recognized although it is difficult to visually recognize. There are cases where it is possible. Also in the following description, the inability to visually recognize may include difficulty in visual recognition. The second position may be the initial position of the first movable accessory 251.

  In FIG. 16D, the transmission effect is started. Of the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 16 (d), the first including the area overlapping the first movable accessory 251 in the second position from the front side. Only the 2 display area 208-2 is changed to a state in which the amount of transmitted light is increased. In other words, all of the first movable combination 251 in the second position overlaps the second display area 208-2 from the front side. The second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 16D is in a transparent state, but may not be in a completely transparent state. Hereinafter, a state in which the amount of transmitted light is relatively increased even if it is not completely transparent is not limited to the second display area 208-2, and is referred to as a transparent state for convenience. In the following description, even if the state is uniformly transparent, the transparency (transparency) may be different. In this example, only the second display area 208-2 is changed to a state in which the light transmission amount is increased. However, the light transmission amount is also increased in a region other than the second display area 208-2. It may be changed to a given state. That is, the amount of light transmission is increased in areas other than the display area, which is located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device and includes an area overlapping from the front side to the rendering means such as a movable accessory or a fixed accessory. The same applies to each of the following production examples. However, when there are multiple regions that change to a state in which the amount of transmitted light is increased, it overlaps from the front side to the rendering means such as a movable accessory or a fixed accessory located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device. The display area including the active area may be an area where the amount of light transmission is the highest, or any area may have the same amount of light transmission.

  The second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 16D is an area larger than the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, but is the same size as the first movable accessory 251. Also good. The second display area 208-2 is an area that overlaps the entire first movable combination 251 at the second position, but is an area that overlaps only a part of the first movable combination 251 at the second position. May be. That is, the area may be smaller than the first movable accessory 251 in the second position, or may be an area shifted from the front side of the first movable accessory 251. In FIG. 16D, the unlit first movable accessory 251 in the second position is easily visible through the second display area 208-2 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In this example, after the first movable combination 251 has moved to the second position, the second display area 208-2 has changed to a transparent state, but the first movable combination 251 is positioned at the second position. At the same time, the second display area 208-2 may change to a transparent state. In some cases, the region corresponding to the second display area 208-2 may be in a transparent state before the first movable accessory 251 is positioned at the second position. Furthermore, the second display area 208-2 may change to a transparent state as part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on, or may be in a transparent state in part or all of the big hit game. It may change. That is, the first display area 208-2 may change to a transparent state before the transmission effect here, or may change to a transparent state after the transmission effect here. There may be. Further, during the period of changing to the transparent state, the transmission effect here may be the longest, or the case where it is longer than the transmission effect here may be in another state, or the transmission effect here May be the shortest, or it may be shorter than the transmission effect here.

  The first movable accessory 251 can be lit in a display mode other than the second display mode, and can be driven in a plurality of types such as blinking. Such a plurality of display modes (including a mode in which the first movable accessory 251 is not turned on) in the first movable accessory 251 is an execution of an effect (for example, a pseudo-ream effect, a super reach effect, a judge effect, etc.) executed thereafter. It may represent a probability or an expectation level (reliability) for a big hit. In this example, after the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, as shown in FIG. 16 (e), the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the second display mode. At the same time as the area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, it may be lit in the second display mode. In addition, the first movable accessory 251 may be lit in the second display mode before the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state.

  In FIG. 16 (f), the first movable accessory 251 is turned off, and in FIG. 16 (g), the transmission effect is finished, and the second display area 208-2 is returned to a state where the light transmission amount is low. In addition, although the transparent state is continuous from FIG. 16D to FIG. 16F, it may be intermittently transparent, may be intermittently transparent, or only when it is continuous. It may be. Even in each of the following production examples, even if the transparent state is continuous over a plurality of stages, it may be intermittently transparent, may be intermittently transparent, or continuous. You may only do it. As described above, the intermittent or continuous transparent state described here may be applied to all transmission effects, but may be applied only to a certain transmission effect.

  In addition, in the state of FIG. 16 (c), the button effect is started, and the button image or / or is displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And the operation promotion display is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated while the button effect display is displayed, the transmission effect is started in response to the operation, that is, the movable accessory located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device Alternatively, the display area including the area overlapping from the front side with the rendering means such as a fixed accessory may be changed to a transparent state. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the size of the display area that becomes transparent changes (for example, enlarges or reduces) in accordance with the repeated operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136. It should be noted that a long press operation or the like may be used instead of the continuous hitting operation, and any operation mode different from a normal single press operation may be used. In this case, the display area may be changed to a certain size, and the first announcement effect may be started. For example, if the size of the display area is enlarged to a certain size, it is successful. In the case of failure, the display area is enlarged to a certain extent (before being enlarged to a certain size) and then returns to the non-transparent state. (Disappearing) aspect may be sufficient. The various button effects described here can also be applied to the following effects examples.

  The second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 16G is in a state where light transmission is completely blocked in this example, but it may not be in a state where light transmission is completely blocked. Hereinafter, even if the light transmission is not completely blocked, a state in which the amount of light transmission is relatively low is not limited to the second display area 208-2, but is referred to as an opaque state for convenience. In the following description, even if the state is uniformly opaque, the state changes depending on the color of the image displayed in the second display area 208-2. For example, if an image having a yellow hue or a white hue is displayed, the back side may be visible to some extent even in an opaque state. The opaque state is the initial state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but in some cases, the transparent state may be the initial state.

  In this example, after the first movable combination 251 is turned off, the second display area 208-2 is returned to the opaque state, but at the same time as the first movable combination 251 is turned off, the second display area 208-2 may return to an opaque state. In some cases, the second display area 208-2 may return to the opaque state while the first movable accessory 251 is lit.

  In FIG. 16 (h), the first movable accessory 251 that has been in the second position until then has returned to the initial position that is out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, it can be seen that after the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, the first movable accessory 251 moves from the second position to the initial position, and the first movable accessory 251 moves. In some cases, the first movable accessory 251 may start moving toward the initial position when the second display area 208-2 is in a transparent state. The moving first movable accessory 251 may be in an extinguished state, or may be lit or blinked in the second display mode or the like.

  In the example shown in FIG. 16, since the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, compared to the case where the transmission effect is executed in the state of the first position, Although the continuous effect (first notice effect) is difficult to be executed and the pseudo-continuous effect may be started, in this example, the pseudo-continuous effect is not started, and as shown in FIG. On the decorative symbol display device 208L, the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing (“decoration 6”-“decoration 8”-“decoration 7”) is confirmed and displayed. According to the example shown in FIG. 16, it can be said that the notice of the variable icon in the normal notice display mode was a fake notice. Moreover, even if a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, it may be lost, but it can also be said that the transmission effect in FIGS. 16D to 16F is also a false notice.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a transmission effect is executed step by step in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position after the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

  Hereinafter, descriptions overlapping with those using FIG. 16 may be omitted.

  In FIG. 17B, the “continuation” decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a pseudo-continuous effect is started. In FIG. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a character display of “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-continuations is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, during the first re-variation of the pseudo-continuous production, the first movable accessory 251 moves to the second position ((d) in the figure), and the second display area 208-2 is transparent. Then, the state is changed ((e) in the figure), and then the first movable accessory 251 is turned on in the second display mode at the second position ((f) in the figure). Thereafter, while the first re-variation continues, the first movable accessory 251 is turned off (FIG. 17G), and then the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state (FIG. 17H). After entering the opaque state, the first movable accessory 251 returns to the initial position ((i) in the figure). In the pseudo-continuous production, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous times, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit, but in this example, the second temporary stop is not performed, and the number of pseudo-continuous times is not three, and FIG. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (2), the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern ("decoration 6"-"decoration 8"-"decoration 7") is confirmed and displayed. Note that the pseudo-continuous production may continue up to the third time.

  As described above, even after the pseudo-continuous effect is started, the transmission effect may be started, and the continuity (development level) of the pseudo-continuous effect is determined depending on the place where the transmission effect is started. be able to. That is, when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the effect of the first notice is more likely to be continued than when it is in the second position. Here, the first notice effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, but may be a step-up notice effect or a development effect from normal reach to super reach.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example in which a transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position.

  In FIG. 18B, the “continuation” decorative symbol that is a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a pseudo-continuous effect is started. In FIG. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a character display of “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-continuations is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the first movable accessory 251 moves from the initial position to the first position via the second position during the first re-variation of the pseudo-continuous production ((d) in FIG. 18). . The first movable accessory 251 may temporarily stop at the second position, or may move at a stroke to the first position. Since the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is entirely opaque, it is difficult or impossible to see the first movable accessory 251 moving.

  In FIG. 18 (e), the transmission effect is started. Of the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18 (e), the first including the area overlapping the first movable accessory 251 at the first position from the front side. Only one display area 208-1 has changed to a transparent state. In other words, all of the first movable combination 251 in the first position overlaps the transparent first display area 208-1 from the front side. The first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 18 (e) is an area larger than the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, but is the same size as the first movable accessory 251. Also good. The first display area 208-1 is an area that overlaps the entire first movable combination 251 at the first position, but is an area that overlaps only a part of the first movable combination 251 at the first position. May be. That is, the area may be smaller than the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, or may be an area shifted from the front side of the first movable accessory 251. In FIG. 18 (e), the unlit first movable accessory 251 at the first position is easily visible through the first display area 208-1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In this example, after the first movable combination 251 has moved to the first position, the first display area 208-1 has changed to a transparent state, but the first movable combination 251 is positioned at the first position. At the same time, the first display area 208-1 may change to a transparent state. In some cases, the region corresponding to the first display area 208-1 may be transparent before the first movable accessory 251 is positioned at the first position. Furthermore, the first display area 208-1 may change to a transparent state as part of the initial operation immediately after the power is turned on. It may change. That is, the first display area 208-1 may change to a transparent state before the transmission effect here, or may change to a transparent state after the transmission effect here. There may be. Further, during the period of changing to the transparent state, the transmission effect here may be the longest, or the case where it is longer than the transmission effect here may be in another state, or the transmission effect here May be the shortest, or it may be shorter than the transmission effect here.

  In FIG. 18 (f), the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the second display mode, but at the same time as the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, it is lit in the second display mode. Also good. In addition, the first movable accessory 251 may be lit in the second display mode before the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. Furthermore, as described above, the first movable accessory 251 can be lit in a display mode other than the second display mode even in the first position, and can be driven in a plurality of types such as blinking.

  Thereafter, while the first re-variation continues, the first movable accessory 251 is turned off (FIG. 18G), and then the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state (FIG. 18H). After entering the opaque state, the first movable accessory 251 returns to the initial position ((i) in the figure).

  In FIG. 18 (k), the decorative symbol “continuation” which is a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) again in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 18, since the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the transmission effect is executed in the state of the second position (shown in FIG. 17). Compared to the example), the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect of the first notice) is likely to continue (develop), and in FIG. 18 (l), the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is started again, and is displayed above the middle symbol display area 208b. Is displayed with a character display of “× 3” representing the number of pseudo-continuous operations.

  Then, in FIG. 18 (m), the pseudo-rendition production is finished, and the super reach production of the swordsman reach is started. In FIG. 18 (n), the main character Tono YM and the enemy swordsman KG confront each other. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (o), the state after Tonosama YM and the swordsman KG perform the slashing, that is, the state after winning the game by pulling out the swords, is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (1), a scene in which the swordsman KG falls is displayed. That is, Tonosama YM wins and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18 (q) confirms the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6"). Has been. Note that even if the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, or even if the number of times of pseudo-continuous has been extended to three times, it may be lost. However, if the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, it may be a big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18, the button effect shown in FIG. 15 (l) or FIG. ). Further, when the button effect is started, it may be a big hit, or conversely, it may be lost.

  Further, the fact that the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position may be a notice about the continuation of the pseudo-continuous effect (second temporary stop), or a super reach effect. (For example, a swordsman reach) may be a notice of the start.

  FIG. 18 (m ′) is a modification of FIG. 18 (m). In the modification shown in FIG. 18 (m ′), the transmission effect is not executed during the pseudo-continuous effect, and the transmission effect is executed during the super reach of the swordsman reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 18 (m ′), a part of the character display of the swordsman reach start effect (“swordsman reach”) and a part of the first display area 208-1 overlap. . The entire first display area 208-1 may partially or entirely overlap with the character display of “Swordsman Reach”, or the character display of “Swordsman Reach” may be reduced, or the first display area 208 may be displayed. -1 may be increased, and the entire character display of “Swordsman Reach” may overlap part or all of the first display area 208-1. As shown in FIG. 18 (m), when the character display of “Swordsman Reach” and the first display area 208-1 overlap, a part of the character display of “Swordsman Reach” becomes invisible. That is, a part of the character display of “Swordsman Reach” is in a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 is visible on the back side of the transparent part. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 18 (m ′) is lit in the second display mode.

  Note that a part of the character display of “Swordsman Reach” also overlaps a part of the second display area 208-2, and when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, “Swordsman Reach” The second display area 208-2 may be in a transparent state while the character display is displayed.

  Further, if the first position of the first movable accessory 251 is changed from the position above the middle symbol display area 208b to the position below, at least a part of the notice display by the change icon h0 of the display form of the normal notice, At least a part of the first display area 208-1 overlaps, a part of the fluctuation icon h 0 is cut out, and the first movable accessory 251 can be seen in the back. In this case, even if the second position of the first movable accessory 251 is also changed from the position above the right symbol display area 208b to the position below, at least a part of the notice display by the change icon h0 of the display form of the normal notice is displayed. Then, at least a part of the second display area 208-2 does not overlap, and only the first display area 208-1 overlaps the area where the change icon h0 of the display mode of the normal notice is displayed.

  In addition, when it develops to swordsman reach through the re-variation (Fig. 18 (l)) in which the number of pseudo reams is the third time, the re-variation (Figs. 18 (c) to (k) in which the pseudo reams number is the second. ) Immediately before) and the re-variation (FIG. 18 (l)) where the number of pseudo-continuations is the third time may be executed, or only one of them may be executed. Good. That is, when a certain reach effect (for example, a super reach effect) is started through a plurality of re-variations in the pseudo-continuous effect, the transmission effect is executed with at least one re-variation among the plurality of re-variations. It may be a configuration.

  FIG. 19 is a step-by-step example of a case where the transmission effect is executed even when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position and then the transmission effect is executed even in the second position. It is.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 19A, the combination of lost decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” that is a combination of chance eyes is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a second display mode that is one of the display modes of the prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 19 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 19 (c), the first movable accessory 251 moves from the initial position to the first position and is located in the unlit state at the first position. ing. In FIG.19 (d), the 1st display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state, and the 1st movable accessory 251 lights in a 2nd display mode in a 1st position then (FIG.19 (e)). Thereafter, before the pseudo-continuous effect is started, the first movable accessory 251 is turned off (FIG. 19 (f)), and then the first display area 208-1 is returned to an opaque state ((g) in FIG. 19). The transmission effect ends. After the transmission effect in the first display area 208-1 is finished, in FIG. 19 (j), the “continuation” decorative symbol which is a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in the middle symbol display area 208 b, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. In the same figure (k), re-variation in the pseudo-continuous production is started, and a character display “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-continuous displays is displayed in the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  During the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the second display mode at the second position becomes visible (FIG. 19). (M)). In FIG. 19G, after the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state, the first movable accessory 251 becomes invisible or difficult to view, and once returned to the initial position, In some cases, it moves to the second position, stays in the first position, and in some cases moves to the second position by the timing of FIG. 19 (m), or as soon as the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state. In some cases, it may move to the second position. In this example, the second temporary stop is not performed, and the number of pseudo consecutive times is not three. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. (Decoration 6 "-" decoration 8 "-" decoration 7 ") is fixedly displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 19 (m ′) shows an example different from FIG. 19 (m), and the first display area 208-1 changes again to the transparent state during the re-variation of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the first position The first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the second display mode is visible. In FIG. 19 (m ′), since the transmission effect is executed again with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the second temporary stop is also performed. Specifically, this is the same as the example shown in FIGS. 18 (g) to (q).

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the first movable combination 251 and the fourth movable combination 254 step by step.

  FIGS. 20A to 20H are the same as FIGS. 16A to 16H, and the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position. . That is, in FIG. 20D to FIG. 20F, the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is visible.

  As described above, the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position. In this example, the pseudo-continuous effect is started. That is, in FIG. 20 (j), the decorative symbol “continuation” which is a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in FIG. 20 (k), re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect starts. In the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a character display “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-continuations is displayed. Even in the case where the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state as in the example here, the first notice effect (in this case, the pseudo-continuous effect) may be started. However, it may be configured such that the effect of the first notice is started only when the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state.

  Then, the darkening effect is started during the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect. In the darkening effect, the entire front screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes darker than before the darkening effect is started. Depending on the hue of the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the opaque state (for example, yellowish hue or white hue), the first movable accessory on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 may be visible although it is difficult to visually recognize, but when the darkening effect is started, even on the back side of the area where the yellowish or whiteish shade is displayed Even if it exists, it is easy to become invisible.

  When the darkening effect is started, the decorative symbol variation display performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, and instead, the first decorative symbol display device 208L Display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right. Further, the UI part UI3 disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, and the change icon h0 is also hidden. Further, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 20 (n), the fourth movable accessory 254 that has been in the initial position so far moves to the seventh position. In FIG. 20 (n), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line. In FIG. 20 (n), any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 indicated by a dotted line is in an extinguished state.

  In FIG. 20 (o), the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position starts to light in the second display mode. Although the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is entirely opaque, and a darkening effect is performed, the light from the upper LED 2541 passes through the first decorative symbol display device 208L and from the front side. , You can see how light is emitted. Note that the lighting is not limited to the lighting by the second display mode, but may be lighting by another display mode or may be blinking. In FIG. 20 (p), the upper LED 2541 is turned off.

  The position of the upper LED 2541 in the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position corresponds to a certain position. Moreover, it overlaps from the front side to LED2541 of the upper stage in a certain position among the display screens (entire display area) of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L shown in FIG.20 (n)-the figure (p). The fourth display area 208-4 including the area that is present is different from other areas (the second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 20D, the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 19D, etc.). It also remains opaque. As described above, in FIG. 20 (o), the fourth display area 208-4 is in an opaque state, but the upper LED 2541 emits light. The fourth display area 208-4 is indicated by a one-dot chain line, but all of the upper LEDs 2541 at a certain position overlap the fourth display area 208-4 from the front side. The fourth display area 208-4 is a larger area than the upper LED 2541 at a certain position, but may be an area having the same size as the LED 2541. Further, the fourth display area 208-4 is an area that overlaps the entire upper LED 2541 at a certain position, but may be an area that overlaps only a part of the upper LED 2541 at a certain position. That is, the area may be smaller than the upper LED 2541 at a certain position, or may be an area shifted from the front side of the upper LED 2541.

  The fourth display area 208-4 is an area different from the second display area 208-2 shown in FIG. 20D, and is an area different from the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. is there. However, since the fourth display area 208-4 is an area immediately to the left of the first display area 208-1, the fourth movable combination in the seventh position while the fourth display area 208-4 remains opaque. When the upper LED 2541 of the object 254 is turned on, the upper LED 2541 itself and the fourth movable accessory 254 cannot be seen due to the fact that the darkening effect is being performed. In addition, the player may be moved to a position where the first notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is more likely to be executed, causing the player to think that the light is emitted.

  In FIG. 20 (q), the fourth movable accessory 254 returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 20 (r), the darkening effect is finished.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example and a modification example following FIG. 20 step by step.

  An example continued from FIG. 20 is shown in the left column of FIG. The fourth movable combination in the seventh position in a certain state (for example, the state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during the symbol variation display), the state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, the state before the reach, etc.) When the upper LED 2541 of the object 254 is lit, the first notice effect is more easily executed than when the upper LED 2541 is not lit. The production of the first notice here is a super reach production based on the trick reach production, which has a lower expectation of jackpot than the swordsman reach production. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), even in the super reach effect by the trick reach effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears. Instead, the display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the UI part UI3 disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, and only the change icon h0 continues to be displayed. Further, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the background display changes in the trick reach production.

  In FIG. 21 (b), Tonosama YM is running toward the merchant EG who runs away with a lot of oval, and in FIG. 21 (c), Tosama YM approaches the merchant EG considerably. Then, the merchant EG was missed, and the reach reach production ended in failure. Although the subsequent figures are omitted, the combination of lost decorative symbols is fixedly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The middle row in FIG. 21 shows an example when the trick reach production is successful. As in FIG. 21 (c), in the same figure (c ′), Tono-sama YM approaches the merchant EG considerably, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. In the fifth symbol pd5 displayed in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display is temporarily switched to the background display in which the characters “Holiday” are displayed in the upper left, and the combination of big hits (“6”-“6”-“6 ") Has started to fluctuate. The background display in which the characters “celebration” are displayed on the upper left may be a background display in which Tonosama YM catches the merchant EG, or may be a background display in which the jackpot is confirmed. Then, in FIG. 21 (d '), Tono-sama YM has captured the merchant EG, the trick reach production has succeeded, and the display of the change icon h0 has been restored. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 21E following FIG. 21D ', a scene in which the swordsman KG falls is displayed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (n), the combination of the big hit decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is confirmed and displayed.

  In the right column of FIG. 21, an example in which the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 at the seventh position is not lit is shown. FIG. 21 (m) shows the same situation as FIG. 20 (m), and a darkening effect is started. In the following FIG. 21 (n), the fourth movable accessory 254 that has been in the initial position so far moves to the seventh position. Also in FIG. 21 (n), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, and any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 is in an extinguished state.

  In FIG. 21 (q), as in FIG. 20 (q), the fourth movable accessory 254 is returned to the initial position. Therefore, in this example, the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is not lit.

  In FIG. 21 (r), the darkening effect is ended as in FIG. 20 (r), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Decoration 8 "-" Decoration 7 ") is fixedly displayed. In the example in the right column where the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is not lit, the first notice effect (the super reach effect of the top reach effect) is not started, The combination of decorative symbols is displayed. Even when the upper LED 2541 is not turned on, the first notice effect (the super reach effect of the top reach effect) may be started. However, if the upper LED 2541 is not lit, the first notice effect (super-reaching effect of the hook reach effect) may not be started.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example that continues from the same situation as FIG.

  FIG.22 (b) is the same situation as FIG.20 (m), and the darkening effect is started during the re-variable display in a pseudo | simulation continuous effect. In the following FIG. 22C, the fourth movable accessory 254 that has been in the initial position so far moves to the seventh position. 22C, the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, and any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the off state.

  In the fourth movable accessory 254 that is provided with the upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543 and is movable to the seventh position, the eighth position, and the ninth position, a certain state (for example, confirmation of a special figure) In the state before the display (during symbol variation display), the state in which the decorative symbol variation display is being performed, the state before reach, etc.), the upper LED 2542 (second light emitter) is lit. The effect of the first notice is easier to execute than when the LED 2541 (first light emitter) is turned on, and when the lower LED 2543 (third light emitter) is turned on, the middle LED 2542 (second light emitter) is turned on. The effect of the first notice is easier to execute than when the illuminant is turned on. That is, the more the LED below is lit, the more easily the first notice effect is executed. Further, as described above, the fourth movable in a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before reach, etc.). When the accessory 254 is in the eighth position, the first notice effect is more easily executed than in the seventh position, and the case where the accessory 254 is in the ninth position is in the eighth position. It is easier to execute the effect of the first notice. When these are combined, in the state where only one LED is emitting light, the state in which the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position emits light is the first notice effect. Is most difficult to execute, and the state in which the lower LED 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position emits light is most likely to produce the effect of the first notice. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 20 described above, a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during the symbol variation display), a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before the reach Etc.), when the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the seventh position and only the upper LED 2541 is lit (hereinafter referred to as a weak expectation state), the first notice effect is most difficult to execute. The expected weak state is most likely to appear. Therefore, the expected weak state, the state in which the effect of the first notice is more likely to be executed than the expected weak state (for example, a state (for example, a state before the special figure is confirmed and displayed) In the state before the reach, the state before the reach, etc.), the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the eighth position and only the upper LED 2541 is lit (hereinafter referred to as an expected strong state)). If it can, the expected weak state has a higher appearance frequency than the expected strong state, so that the player can be grateful even in the expected weak state without getting bored and entertain the game.

  Further, in a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before reach, etc.), the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 Among them, when two LEDs are lit, the first notice is more easily produced than when only one LED is lit, and when two LEDs are lit, there are two LEDs. The effect of the first notice is easier to execute than when only the light is on.

  In FIG. 22D, only the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position starts to light in the second display mode. It can be seen that the light from the upper LED 2541 is transmitted through the first decorative symbol display device 208L and emitted from the front side. Note that the lighting is not limited to the lighting by the second display mode, but may be lighting by another display mode or may be blinking.

  The fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the eighth position while only the upper LED 2541 is lit in the second display mode. In FIG. 22E, the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position and stops. ing. In the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 22 (f), at the eighth position, the middle LED 2542 also starts lighting in the second display mode, and the two LEDs 2541 and 2542 are lit. Next, the fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the ninth position with these two LEDs 2541 and 2542 lit in the second display mode, and in FIG. Reached and stopped. Note that the fourth movable accessory 254 may be moved while the LED is turned off or the light emission mode is changed during the movement. In this example, the fourth movable accessory 254 is temporarily stopped at the eighth position, but is not temporarily stopped but moved (for example, when passing through the eighth position), the middle LED 2542 is moved to the first position. You may make it start lighting by 2 display modes.

  In the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 22 (h), at the ninth position, the lower LEDs 2543 also start lighting in the second display mode, and all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit. The state in which all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit in the ninth position is the state in which the effect of the first notice is most easily executed. In this way, when the effect of the first notice is most easily executed, the display mode of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 changes (for example, changes to the red display mode) or the drive mode (light emission mode) changes. It may change (for example, it may change to blinking). When the first notice effect is most likely to be executed, the LEDs 2541, 2542, and 2543 are not lit in the second display mode, but have a special drive mode (for example, red lighting or blinking) in advance. You may make it light-emit. Furthermore, the light emission mode of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 may be changed not only in the state in which the first notice effect is most easily executed, but also in a state in which the first notice effect has a very high probability or is necessarily executed. Even in the case where the effect of the first notice is a fairly high probability or a state where it is surely executed, the LEDs 2541, 2542, 2543 may emit light in a special light emission mode in advance.

  In FIG. 22 (i), the transmission effect is started. Of the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (i), the first including the area overlapping the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position from the front side. Only the 5 display area 208-5 has changed to a transparent state. That is, all the fourth movable accessories 254 in the ninth position are overlapped with the fifth display area 208-5 from the front side. The fifth display area 208-5 shown in FIG. 22 (i) is an area larger than the fourth movable accessory 254 at the ninth position, but is the same size as the fourth movable accessory 254. Also good. The fifth display area 208-5 is an area that overlaps the entire fourth movable accessory 254 at the ninth position, but is an area that overlaps only a part of the fourth movable accessory 254 at the ninth position. May be. That is, the area may be smaller than the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position, or may be an area shifted from the front side of the fourth movable accessory 254. In the back of the fifth display area 208-5 changed to the transparent state, three LEDs 2541 to 2543 that are lit in the second display mode can be visually recognized. As described above, the fifth display area 208-5 changes to the transparent state when the first notice effect is most likely to be executed, or when the first notice effect is considerably high or It may be limited to the case where it is surely executed, but may be in other cases. For example, although only the upper LED 2541 is lit, the fourth movable combination 254 is moved to the ninth position, the lower LED 2543 is lit regardless of the position of the fourth movable combination 254, or the fourth movable combination Even when all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit regardless of the position of the object 254, the fifth display area 208-5 may change to a transparent state.

In FIG. 22 (j), the fifth display area 208-5 returns to an opaque state. Subsequently, in FIG. 22 (k), all the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are turned off. The fifth display area 208-5 may return to the opaque state and the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 may all turn off at the same timing, or may turn off and return to the opaque state. . In addition, the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 may be turned off at the same time, or may be turned off at the same time, or turned off in the order in which lighting was started. May be.
Further, the change of the fifth display area 208-5 to the opaque state may be caused by the entire fifth display area 208-5 changing to the opaque state at once, or partially changing gradually to the opaque state. Also good.

  In FIG. 22 (l), the fourth movable accessory 254, which has been in the ninth position so far, returns to the initial position off the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. doing. When the dark turn effect ends, as the first notice effect, here, the princess discovery reach effect is started as the super reach effect. As described above, the princess discovery reach production is a production with a higher degree of expectation of a big hit than the trick reach production. In addition, the octopus reach production may be started, but only the princess discovery reach production may be started, or only the princess discovery reach production may be surely started.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (n), even in the princess discovery reach effect, the decorative symbol variation display performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears. Display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the UI part UI3 disappears, the hold icons h11 and h12 are hidden, and only the change icon h0 continues to be displayed. Further, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the background display also changes in the princess discovery reach production.

  In FIG. 22 (o), Tonosama YM appears, and in FIG. 22 (p), Tosama YM arrives in front of the pass. Although the heel is closed, in FIG. 22 (q), it appears that the heel has started to open and something is behind the heel.

  In FIG. 22 (r), the button effect is started. The button production here is equivalent to the final judge production that reveals whether or not a princess appears from the back of the kite. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136 that has been lit in the first display mode is changed to the fourth display mode. Further, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (r), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode, and an operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. An arrow display 136b as a prompting display for prompting, a character display of “blow”, and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed. . It should be noted that these button images 136a to 136c overlap with the bag image.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example and a modification example following FIG. 22 step by step.

  In the left column of FIG. 23, examples continuing from FIG. 22 are shown. In this example, the chance button 136 is not operated (pressed) within the operation effective period. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 23 (a), the button images 136a to 136c disappear and a state in which no one is present is displayed in the back of the bag. That is, the princess discovery reach production has failed. In FIG. 23C, the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”) is fixedly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Even when the chance button 136 is operated (pressed) within the operation valid period, the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the same as the display in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c). is there.

  In the right column of FIG. 23, an example in which a princess appears from the back of a spear is shown. In FIG. 23 (r-1), which is a modified example of FIG. 22 (r), the button effect is started. In the button effect here, the button image 136a is displayed large. In this way, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the display (operation promotion display) displayed in the button effect, and depending on the display mode, the success rate of the effect (here, the success rate of the princess discovery) and the jackpot Expectation may change. Again, the chance button 136 was not operated (pressed) within the operation effective period, but in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 23 (r-2), the button images 136a to 136c disappear and the upper left is displayed. In the fifth symbol pd5 displayed at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display is switched to the background display in which the characters “Holiday” are displayed. Has started to fluctuate. The background display in which the characters “celebration” are displayed on the upper left may be a background display for notifying the discovery of the princess or a background display for notifying the jackpot confirmation. Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (a '), the princess HM appears from the back of the kite, and the princess discovery reach production is successful. In FIG. 23 (b '), the combination of the big winning decorative symbols ("decoration 6"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 6") is confirmed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) overlaps the character image of the princess HM.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example in which the transmission effect and the timer notice effect are combined step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24A, the combination of lost decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” that is a combination of chance eyes is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a second display mode that is one of the display modes of the prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 24B, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this stage, the first movable accessory 251 is in an initial position removed from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24B, an effect of timer notice is started. In the timer notice effect here, a timer notice display TM1 that displays a countdown time until the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (remaining time) is displayed. This timer notice display TM1 is a display of the third display mode. In the timer notice effect here, the timer notice display TM1 that counts down the remaining time is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous effect may start after the remaining time runs out, but may not start. This timer notice display TM1 is a display of the third display mode.

  In FIG. 24C, the first movable accessory 251 that was in the initial position moves to the second position. In FIG. 24C, the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is represented by a dotted line. In FIG. 24D, the transmission effect is started in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, and the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state. The transmission effect here is also an effect of notifying the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. Therefore, whether it is a timer notice effect or a transparent effect, it is a notice related to the pseudo-continuous effect, in other words, a notice related to the currently displayed symbol variation display. As is clear from FIG. 24D, a part of the second display area 208-2 and a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlap each other. The size of the second display area 208-2 is smaller than the size of the timer notice display TM1. It should be noted that all of the timer notice display TM1 and part or all of the second display area 208-2 may overlap, or the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced or the second display area 208-2 may be enlarged. The whole second display area 208-2 and a part or all of the timer notice display TM1 may overlap. Further, as shown in FIG. 24D, when the second display area 208-2 and the timer notice display TM1 overlap, a part of the timer notice display TM1 is missing and cannot be seen. That is, a part of the timer notice display TM1 is in a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 is visible on the back side of the transparent part. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 24C is in an extinguished state.

  In this example, the timer announcement effect is started before the transmission effect, but the transmission effect may be started before the timer notification effect, or both are started simultaneously. May be.

  In FIG. 24 (e), the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the second display mode, and the back side of the part where the part of the timer notice display TM1 is in the transparent state is lit in the second display mode. The first movable accessory 251 is visible.

  In FIG. 24F, a part of the second display area 208-2 changes to an opaque state. That is, in the second display area 208-2, the portion that overlaps the timer notice display TM1 changes to an opaque state, and the missing part of the timer notice display TM1 is restored and the entire timer notice display TM1 is visible. become. On the other hand, a part of the first movable accessory 251 that overlaps the timer notice display TM1 becomes invisible.

  In FIG. 24G, after the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state and becomes opaque, the first movable accessory 251 returns to the initial position (FIG. 24H). Further, after the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00” indicating that the remaining time has expired. The timing at which the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00” may be the same as when the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state, or the second display area 208-2 returns to the opaque state. It may be before. After the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, in this example, as shown in FIG. 24 (i), the character indication “Go!” Is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and the pseudo-continuous effect starts. Is done. In FIG. 24 (k), the “success” decorative symbol which is a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a pseudo-continuous effect is started. As described above, the pseudo-continuous effect is less likely to start when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position than when it is in the first position, but the timer notice effect has also been performed. The probability that the pseudo-continuous production is started is increased, and in this example, the pseudo-continuous production is started. In addition, when the transmission effect and the timer notice effect are performed, the pseudo-continuous effect may be surely started.

  In FIG. 24L, re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and a character display “× 2” representing the number of pseudo-continuous times is displayed on the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  Here, the timer notice effect is related to the pseudo-continuous effect, but it may be related to whether or not the hold icon is changed to the pre-read notice display mode. That is, it may relate to a prefetch notice.

  Also, in the timer notice effect, the pseudo notice effect and the pre-read notice are started when the timer notice display TM1 is the display of the fourth display mode rather than the display of the third display form as in this example. Cheap. Accordingly, when the transmission effect is started in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, and then the timer notice display TM1 in the fourth display mode is started, the timer notice display in the third display form is started. As compared with the case where TM1 is started, the pseudo-continuous effect or the pre-reading notice may be easily started. When the timer notice display TM1 is started, the pseudo-continuous effect or the prefetch notice may be surely started.

  Further, in the above description, the description is related to the start probability of the pseudo-continuous production (normal notice) and the prefetch notice, but may be related to the expectation degree (reliability) of the jackpot. For example, even if the transmission effect is started in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, the big hit confirmation may be made as long as the timer notice display TM1 is also executed.

  In the right column in FIG. 24, a modification of FIG. 24E is shown.

  In FIG. 24 (e-1), the transmission effect is performed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, and the entire timer notice display TM1 can be seen and the first display area 208-1 in the transparent state is passed. In addition, the entire first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the second display mode is also visible. That is, the first display area 208-1 and the timer notice display TM1 are completely shifted and are not overlapped. Compared with the example shown in FIG. 24 (e), when the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position where the transmission effect is difficult to start, it overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 and the transmission effect is easy to start. When in the position, it does not overlap with the timer notice display TM1. This relationship may be reversed, and when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position where the transmission effect is likely to start, it overlaps with the timer notice display, and the second position is difficult to start the transmission effect. In some cases, it may not overlap the timer notice display.

  FIG. 24 (e-2) shows an example in which the timer advance notice TM1 is displayed at a position immediately above the tutorial display section TT1. In this example, the timer notice display TM1 and the second display area 208-2 are separated from each other and do not overlap.

  On the other hand, FIG. 24 (e-3) shows an example in which a second timer notice display TM2 different from that is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 displayed at a position immediately above the tutorial display section TT1. is there. The second timer notice display TM2 is a display related to an effect (for example, a button effect) different from the timer notice display TM1, but the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. The display has not started yet, and the character being prepared is displayed. A part of the second timer notice display TM2 and a part of the second display area 208-2 are overlapped, and a part of the second timer notice display TM2 is in a transparent state. The first movable accessory 251 is visible on the back side. As shown in FIG. 24 (e-2), if only one timer notice display is displayed, it does not overlap the second display area 208-2, but if a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, the second display It will overlap with area 208-2. That is, it overlaps with the second display area 208-2 only when there are a plurality of timer notice displays.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing stepwise variations of the effects shown in FIG.

  As in FIG. 22B, in FIG. 25B, the darkening effect is started during the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect. However, in the example shown in FIG. 25, even when the darkening effect is started, the UI unit UI3 does not disappear, and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 are continuously displayed. In FIG. 25C, the fourth movable accessory 254 that has been in the initial position moves to the seventh position. Also in FIG. 25C, the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, and any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 is in an extinguished state. In FIG. 25 (d), only the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. As described above, this state is an expected weak state. The light from the upper LED 2541 in the expected weak state does not overlap any of the UI unit UI3, the hold icons h11 and h12, and the variation icon h0.

  In FIG. 25E, the fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the eighth position while only the upper LED 2541 is lit in the second display mode. In this example, the fourth movable accessory in a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, the state before reach, etc.) As 254 goes to the right side, the effect of the first notice becomes easier to execute. In addition, the hold indicated by the hold icon displayed on the right side is digested earlier. Therefore, the direction in which the effect of the first notice is likely to be executed coincides with the direction in which the hold icons representing the reservation order of the hold are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (f), the number of LEDs that are lit increases while the fourth movable accessory 254 moves. That is, before the fourth movable accessory 254 moves to the eighth position, the middle LED 2542 also starts to light in the second display mode. Eventually, the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position (FIG. 25 (g)). Neither the light from the upper LED 2541 nor the light from the middle LED 2542 in the eighth position overlaps any of the UI unit UI3, the hold icons h11, h12, and the variation icon h0.

  In FIG. 25 (h), the lower LED 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 stopped at the eighth position also starts to light in the second display mode. The light from the lower LED 2543 overlaps with the fluctuation icon h0 that is the display mode of the normal notice, overlaps with the first hold icon h11 that is the default display mode, and also overlaps with a part of the UI unit UI3. As a result, at least the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are more difficult to see than before the lower LED 2543 is lit. However, the light of the lower LED 2543 is blue, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 25 (h) is white, and depending on the relationship between the color of light from the LED and the color of the icon, the LED from the back side In some cases, the icons are illuminated by light, making them easier to see.

  Note that light from the lower LED 2543 may overlap only the variation icon of the variation icon and the hold icon, or may overlap only the hold icon. Further, the lower LED 2543 may be lit only when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the display mode of the normal notice.

  In FIG. 25 (i), the transmission effect is started. Of the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 25 (i), the first including the area overlapping the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position from the front side. Only the 6 display area 208-6 has changed to a transparent state. That is, all the fourth movable accessories 254 in the eighth position are overlapped with the sixth display area 208-6 from the front side. The sixth display area 208-6 shown in FIG. 25 (i) is an area larger than the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position, but is the same size as the fourth movable accessory 254. Also good. The sixth display area 208-6 is an area that overlaps the entire fourth movable accessory 254 at the eighth position, but is an area that overlaps only a part of the fourth movable accessory 254 at the eighth position. May be. That is, the area may be smaller than the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position, or may be an area shifted from the front side of the fourth movable accessory 254. In the back of the sixth display area 208-6 that has changed to the transparent state, three LEDs 2541 to 2543 that are lit in the second display mode are visible. On the other hand, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are disappeared. In a certain state shown in FIG. 25 (i) (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before reach, etc.) A certain state (for example, confirmation display of special figure) shown in FIG. 22 (i) before the state in which all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position are lit. In the previous state (in which the symbol variation is being displayed), in which the decorative symbol variation is being displayed, the state prior to reach, etc.), all the LEDs 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position In the state where is lit, the effect of the first notice is more easily executed.

  Note that the sixth display area 208-6 may overlap only the variation icon of the variation icon and the hold icon, or may overlap only the hold icon. Further, the sixth display area 208-6 may be in a transparent state only when the display mode of the variation icon h0 is the display mode of the normal notice.

  Next, another modification will be described.

  In FIG. 25 (b ′) as in FIG. 25 (b), the darkening effect is started during the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, the UI part UI3 does not disappear, and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 Continue to display. Also in FIG. 25 (c ′), as in FIG. 25 (c), the fourth movable accessory 254, which has been in the initial position until then, moves to the seventh position while being extinguished. Also in FIG. 25 (c ′), the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, and any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 is in an extinguished state. In FIG. 25 (d ′), only the lower LED 2543 in the lower stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position starts lighting in the second display mode. As described above, the lower LED 2543 is lit in a certain state (for example, the state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during the symbol variation display), the state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, the state before the reach, etc.). In this case, the effect of the first notice is more easily executed than when the upper LED 2541 is lit. As described above, the light from the lower LED 2543 in which the effect of the first notice is easily performed overlaps with the second hold icon h12 when the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the seventh position. The position of the LED 2543 in the lower stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position is a position where the fourth movable accessory 254 overlaps the hold icon displayed closest to the initial position of the fourth movable accessory 254. Note that the second hold icon h12 is a default display mode, but the lower LED 2543 may be lit only when the display mode of the hold icon is the display mode of the pre-read notice.

  In FIG. 25 (e '), the fourth movable accessory 254 starts moving toward the eighth position while only the lower LED 2543 is lit in the second display mode. The light from the lower LED 2543 of the moving fourth movable accessory 254 overlaps the first hold icon h11 in addition to the second hold icon h12, and further starts to overlap the fluctuation icon h0. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (f ′), the number of LEDs that are lit increases while the fourth movable accessory 254 moves. That is, before the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position, the middle LED 2542 also starts to light in the second display mode. Eventually, the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position (FIG. 25 (g ′)). The light from the lower LED 2543 in the eighth position overlaps a part of the fluctuation icon h0, a part of the first hold icon h11, and a part of the UI part UI3.

  In FIG. 25 (h ′), the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 stopped at the eighth position also starts to light in the second display mode, and all three LEDs 2541 to 2543 are lit. become. This state is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 25 (i ′), the same transmission effect as in FIG. 25 (i) is started, and behind the sixth display area 208-6 that has changed to the transparent state, three LEDs 2541 that are lit in the second display mode. ˜2543 is visible. On the other hand, the fluctuation icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are disappeared.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a further modification of the example shown in FIGS. 25 (b ′) to (i ′).

  26 (b) to 26 (e) are the same as FIG. 25 (b ′) to FIG. 25 (e ′), and the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the lower stage during the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect. Only the LED 2543 moves toward the eighth position while being lit in the second display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the fourth movable accessory 254 moves only the lower LED 2543 in which the effect of the first notice is easily performed in the second display mode without increasing the number of LEDs to be lit while moving. The 8th position is reached with the state kept (FIG. 26 (f)). The light from the lower LED 2543 in the eighth position overlaps a part of the fluctuation icon h0, a part of the first hold icon h11, and a part of the UI part UI3. Even when the fourth movable accessory 254 reaches the eighth position, the transmission effect is started without increasing the number of LEDs to be lit. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26 (g), only the lower LED 2543 of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 is lit in the second display mode in the back of the sixth display area 208-6 that has changed to the transparent state. Yes. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 disappear. In this example, the transmission effect is executed regardless of the number of lighted LEDs. However, since the lower LED 2543 in which the effect of the first notice is easily executed is lit, the transmission effect is executed, and only the upper LED 2541 in which the effect of the first notice is difficult to be executed is lit. The production may not be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (i ′), the transmission effect may be executed only when all the LEDs are lit, or only when a plurality of LEDs are lit. A transmission effect may be executed.

  FIG. 26 (f ′) is the same state as FIG. (F), and the fourth movable accessory 254 lights only the lower LED 2543 at the eighth position during the re-variable display in the pseudo continuous effect. Yes. In the eighth position, only the lower LED 2543 is lit. The position of the lower LED 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the eighth position corresponds to a certain position.

  In FIG. 26 (g ′), the seventh display including an area overlapping the lower LED 2543 at a certain position from the front side in the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Only the area 208-7 is changed to a transparent state, and the regions overlapping the LEDs 2541 and 2542 that have been extinguished from the front side remain opaque. As described above, in the transmission effect, only the region overlapping the lit LED from the front side may be changed to the transparent state. Furthermore, you may change only the area | region which overlaps with the LED lighted with a certain light emission mode from the front side to a transparent state. As shown in FIG. 26 (g), the horizontal width of the seventh display area 208-7 is wider than the horizontal width of the fourth movable accessory 254.

  FIG. 26 (c ′) shows the same state as FIG. 26 (c), and the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the seventh position during the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect, and any of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 is turned off. State. In addition, two hold icons are displayed, which is the default display mode (white display mode) regardless of whether the first hold icon h11 or the second hold icon h12. Here, the position of the lower LED 2543 in the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position corresponds to a certain position.

  In FIG. 26 (d′-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L includes a display screen (entire display region) including a region that overlaps the lower LED 2543 at a certain position from the front side. Only the 8 display area 208-8 changes to a transparent state. As a result, a part of the second hold icon h12 that is the display mode of the default is missing and becomes transparent, and the lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode is behind the eighth display area 208-8. appear. As shown in FIG. 26 (d′-1), the horizontal width of the eighth display area 208-8 is the same length as the horizontal width of the fourth movable accessory 254, and the eighth width shown in FIG. 26 (g ′). 7 is narrower than the horizontal width of the display area 208-7.

  In FIG. 26 (d′-2), the first hold icon h11 is the default display mode (first display mode), while the second hold icon h12 is the pre-read notice display mode (second display mode). Here, as in FIG. 26 (d'-1), only the eighth display area 208-8 changes to a transparent state. As a result, a part of the second hold icon h12 that is the display mode of the pre-reading notice is missing and becomes transparent, and the lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode is behind the eighth display area 208-8. Can be seen.

  In FIG. 26 (d′-3), the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode (first display mode), while the first hold icon h11 is the pre-read notice display mode (second display mode). Here, as in FIG. 26 (d′-1), only the eighth display area 208-8 changes to a transparent state, and a part of the second hold icon h12, which is the default display mode, is missing and becomes a transparent state. In the back of the eighth display area 208-8, a lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode is visible.

  In FIG. 26 (d ″), the position of the LED 2542 in the middle stage of the fourth movable accessory 254 at the seventh position corresponds to a certain position, and the display screen (entire display area) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Of these, only the ninth display area 208-9 including a region overlapping the middle LED 2542 at a certain position from the front side changes to a transparent state. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 26 (d ″), a cut-in notice display CIY, which is a kind of normal notice, is displayed from the left symbol display area 208a to the right symbol display area 208c. ing. The ninth display area 208-9 overlaps the cut-in notice display CIY, and a part of the cut-in notice display CIY is cut off to become transparent, and in the back of the ninth display area 208-9, The lower LED 2543 lit in the second display mode can be seen. Note that the display of the cut-in notice may be a kind of prefetch notice. On the other hand, the 9th display area 208-9 does not overlap with the 2nd hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice shown in Drawing 26 (d ''), and the 2nd hold icon h12 can be seen entirely. Yes.

  Note that the cut-in notice display CIY shown in FIG. 26 (d ″) may be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136, or may not be displayed unless operated. Alternatively, the display may be displayed when the operation effective period in the button effect elapses without being operated.

  Further, in this example, since the fourth movable accessory 254 can be positioned at the seventh position to the ninth position, the three LEDs, the upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543, respectively. The display area of the location can be changed to a transparent state. As described above, when a plurality of display areas can be changed to a transparent state, a selection effect (for example, a roulette effect) may be performed to determine whether any one display area is changed to a transparent state. . For example, at a certain position among the seventh position to the ninth position, the display area from the upper stage to the lower stage is sequentially changed to the transparent state at every predetermined time, and then only the certain display area is changed to the transparent state. The LED corresponding to the display area may be caused to emit light. In other words, depending on the position of the light emitting means to be issued, if the execution probability of the first notice effect changes or the expectation (reliability) that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is changed, which issuing means issues Alternatively, an effect of indirectly speaking using the transmission of the area on the near side of the light emitting means may be executed.

  Furthermore, if the number of lighting of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 is large, the execution probability of the effect of the first notice is high, or the expectation (reliability) that the big hit symbol is finally displayed is high. Depending on the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136 (for example, continuous hitting operation or long press operation), the size of the display area that becomes transparent is changed (for example, enlarged or reduced), and finally the display area The number of lighting LEDs may be determined according to the size. In addition, if no operation of the operation means (for example, continuous hitting operation or long press operation) is performed, no LED emits light, or the display region that becomes transparent after the button operation effective time ends is expanded at a stretch, A configuration may be employed in which only one or a plurality of LEDs located on the far side of the enlarged display area are lit.

  In addition, depending on the LED display mode, the execution probability of the first notice effect may change, or the expectation (reliability) that the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed may be changed.

  When the timing at which the display area changes to the transparent state is earlier than the timing at which lighting of the LED located on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device described above is started, the display area itself changes to the transparent state, This is equivalent to an effect that is conscious of the lighting of the LED, and corresponds to an indirect effect. In other words, since the change of the display area to the transparent state is used as a precursor of the notice effect, for the player who knows that the LED that is the notice effect starts to be turned on after the display area is changed to the transparent state. , You can tell the timing when you should have a big expectation.

  Further, in a normal liquid crystal display device that does not transmit, the light emitting means emits light after being turned on by the display on the display screen, and the player needs to move the line of sight from the display screen to the light emitting means, or until the display screen Although it is necessary to move the light emitting means, there is a risk that other indications may be hidden by the light emitting means and visibility may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the display area is turned into a transparent state, the light emitting means on the back side emits light, and the player does not have to move the line of sight, and the light emitting means is displayed on the display screen. Without hiding, there is an advantageous effect as compared with the effect using a normal liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a plurality of examples of other effects using the fourth movable accessory 254.

  The left column of FIG. 27 shows an example in which the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, is displayed, and the explanation of the swordsman reach is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1 in the UI part UI3. ing. In FIG. 27 (b), the fourth movable accessory 254 is located at the seventh position during the re-variation display in the pseudo-continuous effect. The positions of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position correspond to a certain position, and are in a certain position on the display screen (all display areas) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Three areas including the areas overlapping each LED 2541 to 2543 from the front side (fourth display area 208-4 shown in FIG. 20 (n) (area corresponding to the upper LED 2541), FIG. 26 (d ′) 9) transparent display area 208-9 (area corresponding to the middle LED 2542) and eighth display area 208-8 (area corresponding to the lower LED 2543) shown in FIG. Change to state. In addition, a part of the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 27B is partly lost and becomes transparent, and in the second display mode at the back of the eighth display area 208-8. The lower LED 2543 that is lit can be seen.

  The fourth movable accessory 254 that was in the seventh position at the timing in FIG. 27B starts to move toward the ninth position. When the movement of the fourth movable accessory 254 is started, the transmission effect is once ended.

  The fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 27D has reached the ninth position via the eighth position. The positions of the LEDs 2541 to 2543 of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the ninth position correspond to a certain position, and are in a certain position on the display screen (all display areas) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Three display areas 208-10 to 208-12 including each region overlapping each LED 2541 to 2543 from the front side change to a transparent state. As a result, a part of the explanation display of the swordsman reach in the tutorial display portion TT1 is lost and becomes transparent, and the lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode is visible in the back.

  Note that the fourth movable combination 254 may continue the transmission effect during movement, and the region that becomes transparent may move to the right side in accordance with the movement of the fourth movable combination 254. However, if it is a movable accessory that moves on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, if it is overlapped with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and you look into it, even if it overlaps, Although it can be seen, if the area that becomes transparent moves to the right side, the display itself of the part is not displayed, and there is a problem that it is not enjoyable. Further, it may be technically difficult to move the region to be transparent in accordance with the movement of the movable accessory moving on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In the center column of FIG. 27, the second hold icon h12 that is a display mode of the pre-reading notice is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3 is not an explanation display of the effect, such as “Intense heat”. An example is shown in which a notice display (normal notice display) regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display is displayed. In this example, when the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the seventh position, it is the same as the example shown in the left column, but when the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the ninth position, the lower LED 2543 When the corresponding display area 208-12 changes to the transparent state, a part of the notice display in the tutorial display portion TT1 is lost and becomes the transparent state, and in the back, the lower LED 2543 that is lit in the second display mode. Can be seen.

  In the case where the notice display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the lower LED 2543 is easier to move to the back side and the transmission effect is more likely to overlap than when the explanation display of the effect is displayed. Or, conversely, when the explanation display of the effect is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the lower LED 2543 is easier to move to the back side and the transmission effect is more likely to overlap than when the notice display is displayed. Good.

  In the column on the right side of FIG. 27, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 disappears and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 are not displayed. In FIG. 27 (b ″), the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the initial position. In FIG. 27 (b ″) following FIG. 27 (b ″), an animation in which three arrows are driven in a vertical row is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 27C ″, the fourth movable accessory 254 is in the initial position. However, when this animation is displayed, the fourth movable accessory 254 moves to the eighth position, and the first decorative symbol display device is displayed. All of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 start lighting in the second display mode while the entire 208L display screen remains opaque. Note that the fourth movable accessory 254 may be in the eighth position before the animation is displayed. In this example, the start of lighting of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 is suggested in advance by displaying an animation. In the conventional movable accessory effect, the player can sense the movement of the movable accessory while moving to the effect position of the movable accessory, and can enjoy the effect performed there from the beginning, but the first decorative symbol display In the movable accessory (the fourth movable accessory 254 in this case) that moves on the back side of the device 208L, it is difficult for the player to notice the movement of the movable accessory, and thus an advance suggestion is made by displaying an animation or the like. And although the transmission effect is not performed, the full lighting of the three LEDs 2541 to 2543 in the eighth position corresponds to an effect in which the effect of the first notice is easily executed to some extent. Therefore, starting from the pre-suggestion animation, the light emitting effect on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L using the fourth movable accessory 254 is executed, and then the first notice effect is executed, and finally Whether or not you hit a big hit, the interest of the game will improve.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which a transmission effect and an effect using a sub window are combined.

  The UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28B, two hold icons h11 and h12, and a variation icon h0 are displayed. The left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area In each of 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode, whereas the change icon h0 is the display mode for the normal notice.

  In FIG. 28 (c), a whispering effect is started as a certain effect, a character display “reach by finding an enemy” is displayed, and an animation in which Tosama YM is searching for an enemy is displayed. When this roaring effect is started, the decorative symbol variation display performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, and instead, the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right side of. Further, the UI part UI3 disappears, and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 are not displayed. In addition, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the left side of the fifth symbol pd5. Furthermore, the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L until then is displayed in the sub window SW provided below the fifth symbol pd5.

  In FIG. 28 (e), the transmission effect is executed, the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is lit in the second display mode. A part of the second display area 208-2 and a part of the sub window SW overlap each other, and a part of the sub window SW is also made transparent by changing the second display area 208-2 to a transparent state. . However, the change icon h0 representing the normal notice in the sub window SW and the hold icons h11 and h12 which are the default display form and may represent the prefetch notice are visible. The second display area 208-2 may overlap with these icons h0, h11, h12 of the sub window SW.

  Further, in this example, when the transmission effect is performed, it is easier to succeed in the roaring effect (Tonosama YM finds the enemy) than when the transmission effect is not performed. Furthermore, when the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the transmission effect is more successful than when the transmission effect is executed with the second position in the second position. It becomes easy to do.

  In FIG. 28 (g), the transmission effect is finished, and Tonosama YM is displayed slightly larger. In FIG. 28 (h), a merchant EG who escapes with an enemy's oval is found, and the roaring production is successful. A part of the character display of the merchant EG overlaps a part of the sub window SW, but various icons h0, h11, h12 are visible. However, the various icons h0, h11, h12 may overlap so as to be hidden.

  When the roaring effect is successful, the reach effect (an example of the effect of the first notice) is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (i), the reach state is started.

  The roaring effect may be an effect of discovering a target character for super reach. In other words, when the merchant EG is found, it develops to the reach reach described with reference to FIG. Alternatively, the discovered character and the type of reach may not be related at all. For example, even when a merchant EG is discovered, the swordsman reach described with reference to FIG.

  It can be said that the roaring production described above is a kind of mini game. Next, an example in which another mini game and a transparent effect are combined will be described.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28A, the pseudo-continuous symbols are re-varied after two temporary stops (fluctuation fluctuations), and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. In the meantime, the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This in-preparation image RDY is a display of the third display mode.

  In FIG. 28A, the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is lit in the second display mode. A part of the first display area 208-1 and a part of the image RDY under preparation overlap each other, and a part of the image RDY under preparation is also made transparent by changing the first display area 208-1 to the transparent state. ing. As described above, when the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the swordsman reach is started in FIG. In addition, a part of the image RDY in preparation overlaps a part of the character display (“swordsman reach”) of the start effect of the swordsman reach.

  In FIG. 28D, the mini game is started in the area where the image being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts rotating with the horizontal axis as a rotation axis (not shown). A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. Also, in the direction of Swordsman Reach, the main character Tono-sama YM and the enemy swordsman KG are facing each other.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (o), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol on which the characters "Intense heat" are derived is derived, suggesting that there is a high possibility of being a big hit. Yes. That is, a notice is usually given by deriving the characters “Intense Heat” from the drum DRM. In addition, in the direction of Swordsman Reach, the state after Tonama YM and swordsman KG played each other, that is, the state after winning the game by pulling out the swords from each other, is still unknown. There is no state.

  In FIG. 28 (f), the mini-game display (drum DRM display) disappears, and the button effect is started. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (f), a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is displayed in a large manner, as in FIG. 15 (l-1). ing. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136 that has been lit in the first display mode is changed to the fourth display mode.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the transmission effect and various displays.

  The left column of FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the transmission effect and the display of the ball removal notification that is notified when a dish full tank error occurs. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29 (a), while the decorative symbol variation display is being executed, a pan full error has occurred, and a ball removal notification display ("please remove the ball" Is displayed from the left symbol display area 208a to the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the dish full tank error is not eliminated until the end, and the display of the ball removal notification is continuously displayed until the end. The first movable accessory 251 moves to the second position (FIG. 29B), a transmission effect is performed, the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state (FIG. 29C), and then Thus, in the second position, the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the second display mode ((d) in the figure). The second display area 208-2 overlaps the display of the ball removal notification, and when the transmission effect is performed, a part of the ball removal notification display is lost and becomes transparent. In the back, the first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the second display mode can be seen.

  In FIG. 29 (d ′), a transmission effect is performed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the first display area 208-1 is changed to a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position. It is a figure which shows a mode that it is lighted by 2 display modes. As shown in this figure, even when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, when the first display area 208-1 overlaps the display of the ball removal notification and a transmission effect is performed, the ball removal notification is performed. A part of the display is made transparent.

  FIG. 29 (d ″) shows a state in which a ball removal notification is displayed, a cut-in notification display CIY ′, which is a type of normal notification, is displayed, and a transparent effect is performed. It is a figure which shows a mode that the 1st movable accessory 251 in is lighting in the 2nd display mode. The second display area 208-2 changed to the transparent state and the cut-in notice display CIY ′ are also overlapped, and a part of the cut-in notice display CIY ′ is made transparent and invisible. Note that the ball removal notification display overlaps with the cut-in notice display CIY ′, but overlaps with the second display area 208-2 that has changed to a transparent state, and thus a part of the ball removal notification display is also transparent. It has become invisible. The cut-in notice display CIY ′ may be displayed at the same time as the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, or may be displayed before the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state. It may be displayed after changing to a state.

  Here, the display of the ball removal notification has been described as an example, but the same applies to the display related to other errors and the display related to warnings. As other error-related displays, as errors related to the main control unit 300, magnetic (magnet) detection error display, external clock abnormality error display, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error display, switch level abnormality error display, Switch unconnected error display, shock error error display, winning rate error error display, winning prize outlet excess error display, winning prize outlet excess error display, solenoid error error (large winning opening error error) display Etc. can be listed. Furthermore, an error display such as “The door is open” or a warning message such as “Please close the door” is displayed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be displayed as other error indications. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Further, the warning / error display regarding the first sub-control unit 400 and / or the second sub-control unit 500 can include a shock warning display, a strike warning display, a movable accessory error display, and the like. However, here too, all of the above-listed ones may be used, and some of the above-listed ones may not be applied.

  In the center column of FIG. 29, the relationship between the transmission effect and the display of the button effect is shown. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29A, decorative symbol variation display is executed, and button effects are started. When the button effect is started, a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode and a promotion display that prompts the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are displayed above the middle symbol display area 208b. As shown, an arrow display 136b and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid (operation effective period) are displayed. In addition, a princess Chibi SH appears in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, a habit character appears if the button production is successful, and no habit character appears if the button production is unsuccessful. In addition, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, a samurai character may appear after the operation effective period elapses.

  The first movable accessory 251 moves to the first position (FIG. 29B), a transmission effect is performed, the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state (FIG. 29C), and then Thus, in the first position, the first movable accessory 251 is lit in the second display mode ((D) in the figure). The first display area 208-1 overlaps most of the remaining period meter display 136c and slightly overlaps the button image 136a. When the transmission effect is performed, the remaining period meter display 136c is in a transparent state leaving both ends, and in the back of the first display area 208-1, the first movable accessory that is lit in the second display mode. 251 is visible.

  It should be noted that the button image 136a shown here does not overlap the second display area 208-2, but overlaps only when the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position where the first notice effect is likely to be executed. become. However, if the large button image 136a and the remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. 28 (f) are overlapped with the second display area 208-2, the large button is displayed when the transparent effect of the second display area 208-2 is performed. A part of the image 136a and the remaining period meter display 136c is made transparent.

  In FIG. 29 (D), the remaining time of the remaining period meter display 136c is unknown, but the chance button 136 is operated, and in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The character appeared, and the button production was successful. In FIG. 29 (E), although the transmission effect is continued, the display of the character of や GI and the display of the dialogue are displayed at positions away from the first display area 208-1, and the first display area It does not overlap with 208-1.

  The right column in FIG. 29 shows the relationship between the transmission effect and the display of the mini character (mini character). On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29A, a change icon h0 and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed. The display mode is the default display mode regardless of whether it is the fluctuation icon h0 or the two hold icons h11 and h12. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 29A, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and a display of a ninja NJA mini character is displayed near the right symbol display area 208c. Yes. In FIG. 29 (a), a roaring effect that may change the display mode of the hold icon is started. That is, the mini character of the ninja NJA throws a shuriken toward one of the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed here. Further, the first movable accessory 251 moves to the second position.

  In FIG. 29C, the shuriken hits the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 is covered with the effect image EFG and is not visible. In addition, a transmission effect is performed, and the second display area 208-2 changes to a transparent state. Note that the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is in an extinguished state. The second display area 208-2 overlaps the display of the ninja NJA mini character, and when a transmission effect is performed, a part of the ninja NJA mini character display (just the face portion) becomes transparent.

  In FIG. 29D, the effect image EFG that has covered the second hold icon h12 disappears, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode (for example, the second display mode) of the prefetch notice. The second hold icon h12 that has been changed to the display form of the prefetch notice continues to be displayed in the display form of the prefetch notice until the second hold is consumed, and the prefetch notice is continued. The Ninja NJA mini character can also be seen as the character that appears at the beginning of the on-hold change animation, and corresponds to a part of the pre-reading notice effect (more specifically, the on-hold change effect). Note that the shuriken may not hit the hold icon and nothing will happen. Also, just because the shuriken hits the hold icon, the hit hold icon is not necessarily covered with the effect image EFG, and the display mode of the hold icon may end without any change, Although it is covered with the effect image EFG, the display mode of the hold icon may not change at all. When the display mode of the hold icon does not change, the hold change effect has failed.

  In addition, although the display mode of the hold icon has changed here, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may change. That is, the shuriken thrown by the ninja NJA mini character hits the change icon h0 of the default display mode, and then the display mode of the change icon h0 changes to the display mode of the normal notice (for example, the second display mode). In some cases. In this case, the mini character of the ninja NJA corresponds to a part of the normal notice effect. In the above description, the icon of the default display mode changes, but the icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice or the normal notice may change to a display form with a higher expectation degree (reliability) of jackpot.

  In addition, in FIG. 29D, the first movable accessory 251 in the second position starts to light in the second display mode, and the state can be seen through the second display area 208-2 that has changed to the transparent state. . The Ninja NJA mini character has changed the display mode of the hold icon, but is still displayed, the face portion is not visible, and in the back, the first movable accessory 251 that starts lighting in the second display mode Is visible. The display of the ninja NJA mini character may be a display that is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays. Alternatively, the display may be displayed during a part or all of the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, it may be a display that is displayed before the start of the reach effect or before the development of the super reach effect. Further, the display of the ninja NJA mini character may disappear when the display mode of the hold icon changes.

  FIG. 29 (D ') shows a modified example, the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 at the first position is lit in the second display mode. doing. It is displayed in the vicinity of the symbol display area 208b corresponding to a part of the pre-reading notice effect. The first display area 208-1 overlaps with the display of the ninja NJA mini character. When the transmission effect is performed, the face portion of the ninja NJA mini character becomes transparent, and the second display is displayed in the back. The 1st movable accessory 251 which lights in a mode is visible. That is, a part of the area in which the pre-reading notice effect is displayed overlaps with a part of the first display area 208-1, and the display of the pre-reading notice effect (here, the display of the ninja NJA mini character) is displayed. The first display area 208-1 is in a transparent state. In this modification, only the first display area 208-1 may overlap the display of the ninja NJA mini character, and other display areas such as the second display area 208-2 may display the ninja NJA mini character. There is no overlap. However, other display areas may overlap with the display of the ninja NJA mini character.

  Note that the display of the ninja NJA mini character is not only the display of the pre-reading notice effect, but may be the display of the normal notice effect, or whether a certain effect such as a super reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect is started. There may be cases where the display is a presentation of a fortune-telling or a display used for a tutorial (description description), or a dedicated display for each of these displays (for example, a dedicated look-ahead announcement effect) Display).

  As described above, a number of examples of presentation in the game machine (pachinko machine 100) including the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 described with reference to FIG. 14 have been described. The example will be explained once again.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram summarizing representative examples of the effects described so far.

  FIGS. 30A to 30D show an example in which the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the second position, which has been described with reference to FIG. That is, in FIG. 30B, the transmission effect is executed, the second display area 208-2 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the second position is lit in the second display mode. . In this example, after the transmission effect, the execution of the first notice effect such as the pseudo-continuous effect or the reach effect is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. Yes.

  30A to FIG. 30E, the pseudo-continuous effect is started after the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position described with reference to FIG. An example is shown. That is, in FIG. 30B, the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is lit in the second display mode. . When the transmission effect is executed in the state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the execution of the first notice effect is executed compared to the case where the transmission effect is executed in the state where it is in the second position. In FIG. 30 (D), the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect starts, and in the following FIG. 30 (E), re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect starts, and in the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b, A character display “× 2” representing the number of times is displayed.

  In FIG. 30A to FIG. 30D, after the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 in the first position described with reference to FIG. 18, the pseudo-continuous effect continues. An example in which a super reach production is started is shown. That is, in FIG. 30A, the transmission effect is executed during the re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous effect, the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position. Is lit in the second display mode. When the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, the first notice effect (for example, for example, compared to the case where the transmission effect is executed in the state of the second position (for example, The pseudo-continuous effect) is likely to continue, or the first notice effect (for example, the super reach effect) is likely to be started. In FIG. 30D, execution of the swordsman reach production, which is one of the super reach productions, is started.

  FIGS. 30A to 30E show examples of effects using the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 described with reference to FIGS. That is, although not shown here, as in FIG. 30B, the transmission effect is executed, the second display area 208-2 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory in the second position After 251 is lit in the second display mode, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and a darkening effect is further started. Then, during execution of the darkening effect, as shown in FIG. 30 (i), the upper part of the fourth movable accessory 254 in the seventh position while the entire display area including the fourth display area 208-4 remains opaque. Only the LED 2541 lights up in the second display mode. Such a lighting state of only the upper LED 2541 in the seventh position is an expected weak state when the execution of the first notice effect is expected, but the darkening effect is ended, and FIG. In (e), an octopus reach production which is one of the productions of the first notice is started.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the configuration of the movable accessory. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals used.

  The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31A is different from the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 14 in the initial position and movement range. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31A is located on the upper right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves along the diagonal line of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it can move from the upper right of the initial position toward the diagonally lower left, and the position in the right symbol display area 208c (the position on the back side of the upper part of the right symbol display area 208c) is the tenth position. The position in the display area 208b (the position on the back side at the center in the vertical direction of the middle symbol display area 208b) is the second position, and the position in the left symbol display area 208a (the position on the back side below the left symbol display area 208a) ) Becomes the first position. In FIG. 31A, the first movable combination 251 in the tenth position is represented by a dotted line, the first movable combination 251 in the second position is represented by a two-dot chain line, and the first movable combination in the first position. The object 251 is represented by a one-dot chain line. The first position is a position farthest from the initial position. Note that the tenth position may be the initial position. In a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before reach, etc.), the first movable accessory 251 The first notice is easier to execute in the first position than in the second position, and the first notice is more effective in the second position than in the tenth position. The production is easy to be executed.

  In FIG. 31 (b-1), the transmission effect is executed with the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) in the tenth position, and the first movable accessory 251 is in the second display mode. It is a figure which shows a mode that it has lighted. Of the display screen (all display areas) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the area overlapping the first movable accessory 251 at the 10th position from the front side is the UI part UI3, the hold icon, It does not overlap with the fluctuation icon.

  In FIG. 31 (b-2), the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (a) is in the first position, and the first movable accessory 251 is in the second display mode. FIG. Here, the first display area 208-1 overlaps a part of the second hold icon h12, and the first display area 208-1 becomes transparent due to the transparent effect, so that one of the second hold icons h12 is displayed. The first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the second display mode is visible on the back side of the transparent part.

  FIG. 31B-3 shows that the transmission effect is executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31A is in the first position, and the first movable accessory 251 is in the fourth display mode. It is a figure which shows a mode that it has lighted. Also in this example, a part of the second hold icon h12 is in a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the fourth display mode is visible on the back side of the transparent part. Note that, in a certain state (for example, a state before the fixed display of the special symbol (during symbol variation display), a state where the decorative symbol variation display is performed, a state before reach, etc.), the first movable accessory 251 In the case of the fourth display mode, the first notice effect is more easily executed than in the case of the second display mode.

  In the modification example here, only the first display area 208-1 may overlap the display of the hold icon, which may be the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-read notice, and the other display such as the second display area 208-2. The display area does not overlap the display of the hold icon.

  The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31A is the same as the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 14, but the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. It is different from the fourth movable accessory 254 shown. Here, a combination of the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 31A and the fourth movable combination 254 shown in FIG. 31B will be described.

  In FIG. 31B, a fourth movable accessory 254 indicated by a solid line represents the fourth movable accessory in the initial position. The initial position of the fourth movable accessory 254 is a position on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth movable accessory 254 is movable from the initial position to the seventh position and the eighth position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The seventh position is on the back side of the left symbol display area 208a in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the eighth position is on the back side of the middle symbol display area 208b in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 31 (B), the fourth movable accessory 254 at the seventh position is indicated by a dotted line, and the fourth movable accessory 254 at the eighth position is indicated by a one-dot chain line. Note that the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31B is different from the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14 in that the eighth position is the maximum movement position from the initial position and the ninth position is reached. Do not move.

  The fourth movable accessory 254 is provided with LEDs on the top and bottom. In the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31B, an LED corresponding to the middle LED 2542 provided in the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14 is provided on the upper side. An LED corresponding to the lower LED 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 14 is provided below, referred to as the middle LED 2542, and this lower LED is hereinafter referred to as a lower LED 2543. Further, the LED built in the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31A can serve as the upper LED 2541 provided in the fourth movable accessory 254.

  The fourth movable accessory 254 and the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (B) described above are arranged in the front-rear direction, but the moving regions do not overlap and both interfere with each other. Absent.

  When the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31 (A) is in the first position and the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31 (B) is in the eighth position, the first movable accessory 251 is built in. The LED that plays the role of the upper LED 2541 and the two LEDs 2542 and 2543 provided on the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. 31B can be lit in a straight line. This state is the state in which the first notice effect is most easily executed.

  Of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, only the area in front of each LED may be made transparent by the transmission effect, or the entire fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. The area on the front side may be transparent. However, in the state where the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 31A is in the first position and the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. Since the separation of the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 can be seen if this is made transparent, in this state, the entire LED is turned on in an opaque state without making it transparent. An effect may be executed.

  In the case of a conventional production device, the movable accessory can be moved to the front of the display screen to focus on a specific display, but other displays other than the specific display can be brought to the target position. There may be a problem that it is obstructed by the arm of the movable accessory before moving. On the other hand, according to the first embodiment described so far, since the movable accessory moves on the back side, such inconvenience does not occur, and the display itself is partially transmitted (substantially erased). Therefore, there is a case where the display can be emphasized more, or a part of the display can be permeated so that the back side can be visually recognized. In other words, when a part of the light is transmitted, the surrounding area is inevitably reached and the display can be emphasized. In addition, the display is two-dimensional, but when a sense of depth comes out, it becomes possible to produce a three-dimensional effect that was difficult to reproduce with only the display, and you might be worried about what is behind the display. There are cases where it is possible.

  Then, the structure of the presentation apparatus of 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals used.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the rendering device 206 according to the second embodiment.

  In FIG. 32A, the left diagonal front is the front side, and the right diagonal back side is the back side. Similar to the effect device 206 of the first embodiment, a family crest member 224E is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. However, the initial position of the family crest member 224E of the second embodiment is a position above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 32B is in the initial position. When the crest character 224E starts operation, the crest character 224E descends from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the front side (player side) appears on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the third position. ). In FIG. 32B, the family crest character 224E in the third position is represented by a black solid line. The family crest member 224E is further lowered from the third position and can move to the sixth position. In FIG. 32 (b), the crest character 224E in the sixth position is represented by a gray solid line. In the sixth position, the crest character 224E overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side at about 3/4 from the top, and the lower side about 1/4 is below the display screen. Will be located. The crest character 224E is in a state in which it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize in the state in the initial position than in the state in the third position. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. The family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 32 is lit in the second display mode.

  A first movable accessory 251 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The first movable accessory 251 has a structure in which a ring-shaped accessory is divided into left and right parts, and includes a left arc portion 2511 and a right arc portion 2512. Each of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32 (c) is in the initial position. That is, the left arc portion 2511 has an initial position on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right arc portion 2512 has an initial position on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the first movable accessory 251 starts operating, the left arc portion 2511 moves from the initial position to the right side, the right arc portion 2512 moves from the initial position to the left side, and both of them are the family crest accessory 224E. Are combined so as to surround a circular region S3 ′ on the back side of the third position, that is, on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this way, the position of the first movable accessory 251 that is merged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and has a ring shape becomes the first position. In FIG. 32C, the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is indicated by a dotted line. A region inside the first movable accessory 251 represented by a dotted line is a circular region S3 '.

  FIG. 32D shows a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, with the crest character 224E in the third position and the first movable accessory 251 in the first position. The first display area 208-1 including the area overlapping the first movable accessory 251 at the first position from the front side in the entire display area) is changed to the transparent state by the transmission effect. It is a figure which shows a mode. Although there is a difference in position in the front-rear direction (depth direction), the family crest character 224E on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has the first movable accessory 251 on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Surrounded by That is, in the circular family crest member 224E, the left arc portion 2511 is located on the outer peripheral portion of the left half, and the right arc portion 2512 is located on the outer peripheral portion of the right half. Here, the first movable combination 251 is lit in the second display mode, and the player is given the family crest combination 224E that is lit in the second display mode and the first movable combination 251 that is also lit in the second display mode. However, they appear to be combined three-dimensionally. That is, a luxurious three-dimensional structure of a family crest has been completed. The first movable accessory 251 on the back side is a Japanese drum accessory, a bee accessory appears instead of the front crest accessory 224, and the Japanese drum accessory and the bee accessory are combined. You may be able to complete the Japanese drum being played. That is, the combination of the back side and the front side may be combined to form a certain thing (a new thing that has never existed before).

  Further, a third movable accessory 253 is disposed on the back side of the first movable accessory 251 instead of the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment. The third movable accessory 253 is an accessory on which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn. The initial position of the third movable accessory 253 is a position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e) is in the initial position (fourth position). When the operation starts, the third movable accessory 253 moves up from the initial position, and can move to the fifth position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 32 (e), the third movable accessory 253 in the fifth position is indicated by a dotted line. Although the fifth position of the third movable accessory 253 and the first position of the first movable accessory 251 are shifted in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), they are substantially the same in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. In position. The effect using the first movable accessory 251 and the effect using the third movable accessory 253 may not be executed simultaneously. That is, when the first movable combination 251 is in the first position, the third movable combination 253 is overlapped with the first movable combination 251 even if the third movable combination 253 is in the fifth position. An effect using the first movable accessory 251 that is not visible and is in the first position is executed. When the first movable accessory 251 is at the initial position, an effect using the third movable accessory 253 at the fifth position can be executed.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the family crest member 224E, and the player can display the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. The state is visible. In the light guide plate IL according to the second embodiment, a lens cut having a pattern shaped like the face of the Tono-sama character is applied to the transmission region. The light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 32A is in a state in which the light irradiated from the side is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, and a pattern shaped like the face of the Tono-sama character emits light. looks like.

  In FIG. 32 (f), the crest character 224E and the first movable accessory 251 are both in the initial position, the third movable accessory 253 is in the fifth position, and the light guide plate IL emits light. The third display area 208-3 including the area overlapping the third movable accessory 253 in the fifth position from the front side in the display screen of the one decorative design display device 208L is in a transparent state by the transmission effect. It is a figure which shows a mode when it changes to. The pattern of the face of the Tono-like character drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the face of the Tono-like character that emits light with the light guide plate IL have the same size and are in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction). Although there is a difference in position, they match in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction and appear to overlap.

  Note that the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the first movable accessory 251 and the third movable accessory 253 of the second embodiment. Good.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a transmission effect using the effect device 206 of the second embodiment in stages, FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 33, and FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33A, the combination of lost decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” that is a combination of chance eyes is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a second display mode that is one of the display modes of the prefetch notice. The dotted line shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L represents the upper end portion of the third movable accessory 253 at the initial position (fourth position).

  In FIG. 33 (b), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the second display mode which is one of the display modes of the normal notice.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (c), the entire display screen is as dark as a darkening effect, or to a certain degree of darkness if not so dark. This is to make the light emission of the light guide plate IL more visible. In FIG. 33C, a pattern appears on the transparent light guide plate IL disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the light guide plate shown in FIG. 33 (c) appears to emit light in the second display mode that is shaped like the face of the Tono-sama character. The timing at which the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes dark and the timing at which the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL may be simultaneous, or the timing at which the darkness comes first may be earlier, Alternatively, the darkening timing may be later. The appearance of the pattern on the light guide plate IL is an opportunity, and the first notice effect starts when the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL than when the pattern does not appear on the light guide plate IL. Easy to be. It should be noted that when the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the execution of the first notice may always be started, or the execution of the first notice may not be started even if the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL. If the pattern does not appear, the execution of the first notice effect may not be started.

  In FIG. 33 (e), a pseudo-continuous effect is started as the effect of the first notice. Note that the transmission effect may be executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 32 is in the first position at the timing of FIG. The pseudo-continuous effect started here may be an effect due to execution of the transmission effect, and the effect of the light guide plate IL may be a notice effect that the transmission effect is performed. An effect completely unrelated to the transmission effect and the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect of the first notice) may be used. In FIG. 33 (f), re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

  In FIG. 33 (g), the effect by the light guide plate IL is performed again during the re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, and the face of the Tono-sama character is formed in front of the dark display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A pattern that appears. The pattern here appears to emit light in the third display mode. The appearance of the pattern again on the light guide plate IL is an opportunity, and when the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL again, the effect of the first notice continues compared to the case where the pattern does not appear on the light guide plate IL. Easy to develop. It should be noted that when the pattern appears again on the light guide plate IL, the first notice effect may always continue (develop), and even if the pattern appears on the light guide plate IL, the first notice effect may not continue. If the pattern does not appear, the first notice may not be continued.

  In FIG. 33 (i), the pseudo continuous effect is continued and the second temporary stop is performed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 33 (h), the transmission effect may be executed in a state where the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position, and the continuation of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed when the transmission effect is executed. It may be a production by. In addition, the effect of the light guide plate IL in FIG. 33 (g) may be a notice effect that a transmission effect is performed after that, or is completely unrelated to the transmission effect and the pseudo-continuous effect (first notice effect). It may be a production. In FIG. 33 (j), the second re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

  In FIG. 33 (k), during the second re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect by the light guide plate IL is performed three times, and in front of the darkened display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, A pattern that is shaped like a face appears. The pattern here appears to emit light in the fourth display mode.

  Eventually, the pseudo-rendition production ends, and the production (skill production) for encouraging the development to super reach is started. When the roaring effect is started, the decorative symbol variation display performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c disappears, and instead of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display of the fifth symbol pd5 is started on the upper right. Further, the UI part UI3 disappears, and the hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 are not displayed. In addition, a hold number display is additionally displayed on the left side of the fifth symbol pd5. Furthermore, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes dark. In addition, this display screen may be continuously dark from the time when the effect by the light guide plate IL is performed. When the display screen becomes dark, the movement of the movable accessory arranged on the back side of the display screen becomes difficult to see compared to before the darkness, which is suitable for the preparation movement.

  In FIG. 33 (m), the crest character 224E arranged on the front side of the display screen starts to move from the initial position. The crest character 224E that has started moving is lit in the fourth display mode. In FIG. 33 (n), the family crest member 224E reaches the third position, and on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first movable accessory 251 starts moving from the initial position. The first movable accessory 251 starts moving in a state where the family crest accessory 224E is not at least at the initial position. Although the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, the back side may be visible depending on the color of the displayed image, but the display screen is dark, and the player Becomes aware of the crest role 224E that appears in front of the user, and is less likely to notice the movement of the first movable role 251 on the back side. In FIG. 33 (o), the first movable accessory 251 reaches the first position. That is, the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 are combined so as to surround the circular region S3 'shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 33 (p), the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 is visible in the back of the first display area 208-1. At this stage, the first movable accessory 251 is in a light-off state. In FIG. 33 (q), the first movable combination 251 is lit in the fourth display mode, and the player is given the family crest combination 224E lit in the fourth display mode and the first lit in the fourth display mode. The movable accessory 251 appears to be three-dimensionally combined. Such a collaborative effect by the first movable character 251 and the family crest character 224E is a kind of a normal notice effect, and is executed even in an effect other than the effect of the sword effect (the effect before the development to the super reach). (For example, the case where it is performed in the final judge production in the super reach described later) may be present, or may be performed only in the turn production. In addition, when this collaborative effect is executed, it is easier to develop a super reach than when it is not executed. In addition, the term “easily developed” here includes a case where it always develops. Further, even if this collaborative effect is executed, it may not be developed, but may not be developed unless this collaborative effect is executed. Further, when the collaborative effect is executed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when it is not executed. Note that the phrase “determined and easy to display” here includes the case where the display is always fixed. Further, even if this collaborative effect is executed, it may be lost, but as long as this collaborative effect is not executed, it may not be a big hit.

  Further, the display modes of the first movable combination 251 and the family crest combination 224E may be different, but both may be the same as in the fourth display mode, as in the example here. Further, each of the first movable combination 251 and the family crest combination 224E can be displayed in the first display mode to the sixth display mode described above, and a display mode with a larger number is easier to develop into super reach, Or expectation degree (reliability) of jackpot may be high.

  In FIG. 33 (r), the first movable accessory 251 is turned off, and in FIG. 34 (a) following FIG. 33 (r), the transmission effect ends and the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state. In FIG. 34 (b), the first movable accessory 251 starts returning to the initial position on the back side, and in FIG. 34 (c), the family crest accessory 224E is now lit in the fourth display mode. The return operation to the initial position is started. In FIG. 34 (d), the crest character 224E disappears from the front of the display screen, but the display screen remains dark.

  In FIG. 34 (e), the display screen becomes brighter and develops into a swordsman reach, which is one of the super reach. When the swordsman reach is started, only the change icon h0 is returned and displayed.

  During the swordsman reach, a button effect is executed in the same way as in the example shown in FIG. 15 (l-1). As shown in FIG. 34 (g), the button image 136a Is displayed in a large size, and an arrow display 136b, a character display of "one blow", and a remaining period meter display 136c are also displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (g), the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is pressed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the button image 136a, etc. disappears, and the character display of Tonosama YM and swordsman KG disappears, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33 (m) to FIG. 33 (r), the same effects as the collaborative effects by the first movable accessory 251 and the family crest actor 224E (at least positional relationship) Are performed again). However, the collaborative effect here is to emit light in the sixth display mode from the time when the crest character 224E starts moving, and finally the first movable accessory 251 also emits light in the sixth display mode. As shown in FIG. 34 (l), the family crest character 224E lit in the sixth display mode and the first movable combination 251 similarly lit in the sixth display mode appear to be combined in a three-dimensional manner. It should be noted that the background display with the characters “celebration” displayed in the upper left may be a background display for notifying that Tonosama YM will win or a background display for notifying the jackpot confirmation. The character “celebration” in the upper left is displayed while the first movable accessory 251 is moving or while the first display area 208-1 is in an opaque state. The timing of FIG. 34 (j) when the object 251 reaches the first position, the timing of FIG. 34 (k) when the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state (timing when the transmission effect is started), or the first The one movable combination 251 may disappear at the timing of FIG. Since the character “celebration” is a display related to the big hit, it is easy to attract the attention of the player. On the other hand, even in an opaque state, the movement of the first movable accessory 251 may be visible if the eyes are closed. However, if the first movable combination 251 is moved while paying attention to the characters “celebration”, the movement of the first movable combination 251 is hardly noticed. The first movable accessory 251 that has been lit in the sixth display mode is turned off at the timing of FIG. 34 (m), and in FIG. 34 (n), the transmission effect ends and the first display area 208-1 is displayed. Return to the opaque state. Although the character “celebration” in the upper left continues to be displayed, it may disappear at the timing of FIG. 34 (m) when the first movable accessory 251 is turned off, or the transmission effect ends in FIG. 34 (n). It may disappear at the timing. When the transmission effect ends, the family crest character 224E that has been in the third position until then starts moving toward the sixth position. In other words, unlike the case of the roaring effect, the family crest character 224E does not return to the initial position. It can be said that the family crest character 224E has the third position as the production position, and the production role has already been finished. In FIG. 34 (p), the family crest character 224E reaches the sixth position, and a part of the family crest character 224E is applied to the upper end portion of the third movable accessory 253 at the initial position (fourth position) from the front side. It overlaps. It should be noted that all of the family crest role 224E may overlap a part or all of the third movable role 253 from the front side.

  The third movable accessory 253 starts to rise from the initial position (fourth position) while the family crest accessory 224E remains at the sixth position. The third movable accessory 253 is hidden between the initial position (fourth position) and the first decorative symbol display device 208L by the family crest accessory 224E that remains in the sixth position while emitting light in the sixth display mode. The movement of the third movable accessory 253 is made difficult to notice. In FIG. 34 (q), the third movable accessory 253 is rising toward the sixth position, and has already been raised to the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 34 (r), the third movable accessory 253 reaches the sixth position and stops at the sixth position. Even if the third movable combination 253 reaches the sixth position, the family crest combination 224E remains in the sixth position while emitting light in the sixth display mode. It should be noted that, as the first movable combination 251 can emit light, the third movable combination 253 can also emit light, and even if the third display area 208-3 is in an opaque state, When a certain third movable accessory 253 emits light, the light passes through the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is similar to the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. You can see how it emits light from the front side.

  In FIG. 35 (a) following FIG. 34 (r), a transmission effect is executed, the third display area 208-3 changes to a transparent state, and the character of the character is displayed in the back of the third display area 208-3. A third movable accessory 253 on which a face is drawn is located. In the state in which the transmission effect is executed, the effect by the light guide plate IL is started. In FIG. 35B, the face of the character drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the light emitted from the light guide plate IL are displayed. The pattern that shaped the character's face appears to overlap. That is, a collaborative effect by the light guide plate IL and the third movable accessory 253 is executed.

  Eventually, the effect by the light guide plate IL is once ended, the pattern of the light guide plate IL disappears, and the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn passes through the transparent third display area 208-3. It becomes visible (FIG. 35 (d)). Then, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started again, and in FIG. 35D, the face of the Tono-like character drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the face of the Tono-like character that emits light by the light guide plate IL are formed. It looks like overlapped patterns overlap again. Such effects can be easily realized by repeatedly turning on / off an irradiating means (light emitting body) such as an LED that irradiates light to the light guide plate.

  Eventually, in FIG. 35 (f), the transmission effect ends, the third display area 208-3 returns to the opaque state, and the third movable accessory 253 becomes invisible. In FIG. 35 (g), the crest character 224E that has remained in the sixth position until then starts to rise toward the initial position while emitting light in the sixth display mode, and the third movable accessory 253 On the back side of the decorative symbol display device 208L, the descent starts toward the initial position (fourth position). In FIG. 35 (h), the third movable accessory 253 has returned to the initial position (fourth position), but the family crest accessory 224E continues to rise, and in FIG. Return to the initial position.

  As described above, the collaborative effect by the first movable accessory 251 and the family crest accessory 224E and the transmission effect in which the third display area 208-3 changes to the transparent state performed after the chance button 136 is pressed, It is a part of the final judge production, and it can also be said that it is a turn production.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (j), a scene in which the swordsman KG falls is displayed as a result of the final judgment effect. That is, Tonosama YM wins, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (k) confirms and displays a combination of jackpot decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 6”). ing.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the pattern of the face of the Tono-like character drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the face of the Tono-like character that emits light with the light guide plate IL are the same size. Although the third display area 208-3 is slightly larger, there is a case where a sense of depth can be easily understood by increasing the size of the third display area 208-3. In the example shown in FIG. 35A, the light emitting pattern on the light guide plate IL is the pattern of the contour of the face of the Tono-like character drawn on the third movable accessory 253, and has the largest size. The third display area 208-3 was made slightly smaller than the contour pattern so as to be inside the pattern. The face of the Tono-sama character drawn on the third movable accessory 253 is made slightly smaller than the third display area 208-3 so as to be inside the area. By doing so, it may be easy to understand that the light guide plate IL is on the front side, the transmissive liquid crystal display device is on the back side, and the third movable accessory 253 is on the back side.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the transmission effect described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

(B-1) in the left column of FIG. 36 is the same state as FIG. 33 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 33, when the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is darkened. In this example, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started. Before, darkening effect is started (FIG. 36 (b-2)). The darkening effect is a sign effect of the light guide plate IL effect, a notice effect, a sign effect of the transmission effect (a collaborative effect by the first movable accessory 251 and the crest character 224E), the notice effect, or the light guide plate IL. It may be a warning effect or a notice effect of a collaborative effect by the third movable accessory 253. By using the darkening effect as a precursor effect or a notice effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the subsequent execution of the effect, and the effect may be effective even when the effect is actually executed. In the light guide plate shown in FIG. 36 (c), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and a pattern shaped like the face of the Tono-sama character appears to emit light in the sixth display mode.
36 (b′-1) to FIG. 36 (b′-2) in the middle row in FIG. 36 are the same as FIG. 36 (b-1) to FIG. 36 (b-2), and FIG. In '-2), the darkening effect is started. In FIG. 36 (c-1), the effect of the light guide plate IL is not started, and on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first movable accessory 251 starts moving from the initial position. Has stopped at a different first position. That is, in this example, for the left arc portion 2511, the back side of the left symbol display area 208a is in the first position (hereinafter referred to as “left first position”), and for the right arc portion 2512, the right symbol display. The back side of the region 208a is the first position (hereinafter referred to as the “right first position”). In FIG. 36 (d-1), it overlaps from the front side on the left arc portion 2511 in the first position on the left side of the display screen on which the darkening effect of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed. The first display area 208-1L on the left side including the area and the first display area 208-1R on the right side including the area overlapping the right arc portion 2512 in the first position on the right side from the front side are both transmitted. It changes to a transparent state depending on the effect, and the left arc portion 2511 in the unlit state is visible on the back side of the left first display area 208-1L, and the unlit right side is on the back side of the right first display area 208-1R. An arc portion 2512 is visible. Note that the first display area 208-1L on the left side and the first display area 208-1R on the right side are semicircular regions.

  In FIG. 36 (e-1), both the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 emit light in the sixth display mode.

  In the modification in the middle row of FIG. 36 described above, the transmission effect is executed in a state where the left arc portion 2511 is in the first position on the left side and the right arc portion 2512 is in the first position on the right side. This transmission effect is an effect that notifies the start of the first notice effect such as the pseudo-continuous effect thereafter.

  The first position on the left side may be the second position on the left side with respect to the first position described with reference to FIG. 32C, and the first position on the right side is similarly used with reference to FIG. The second position on the right side of the first position described may be used.

  36 (b ″ -1) to FIG. 36 (b ″ -2) in the right column of FIG. 36 are the same as FIG. 36 (b-1) to FIG. 36 (b-2). In (b ″ -2), a darkening effect is started. In FIG. 36 (c′-1), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and it looks as if the pattern that shaped the face of the Tono-sama character is emitted in the second display mode. In addition, during the production of the light guide plate IL, the third movable accessory 253 arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to move from the initial position (fourth position) to the fifth position. It is rising. In this example, the pattern of the light guide plate IL is easy to see due to the darkening effect, and the movement of the third movable accessory 253 is difficult to see. As described above, the darkening effect functions as a sign effect or a notice effect, but in this example, it also has a function of hiding the preparation operation for the effect that will be started later. In FIG. 36 (d′-1), the third movable accessory 253 reaches the fifth position, and in FIG. 36 (e′-1), the third display is performed in a state where the effect of the light guide plate IL is continued. The area 208-3 changes to a transparent state, and the pattern of the face of the Tono-like character drawn on the third movable accessory 253 and the face of the Tono-like character that emits light with the light guide plate IL appear to overlap. . In other words, a collaborative effect is performed by the light guide plate IL and the third movable accessory 253, and this collaborative effect notifies the start of the first notice effect such as the pseudo-continuous effect thereafter. Production.

  In the modified example in the right column of FIG. 36 described above, the darkening effect makes it easy to see the pattern of the light guide plate IL, and the cooperative effect is started without realizing the movement of the third movable accessory 253.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a further modification of the modification in the right column of FIG.

  The example in the left column of FIG. 37 corresponds to a further modification of the modification in the right column of FIG. Hereinafter, differences will be mainly described, and duplicate descriptions may be omitted.

  FIG. 37 (b-1) to FIG. 37 (b-2) are the same as FIG. 36 (b ″ -1) to FIG. 37 (b ″ -2). In FIG. Production has started. In FIG. 37 (c-1), before the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, the third movable accessory 253 arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to move to the initial position ( 4th position) to 5th position. That is, in this example, unlike the modified example in the right column of FIG. 36, the third movable accessory 253 starts moving after the start of the darkening effect and before the start of the effect of the light guide plate IL. In FIG. 37 (d-1), the third movable accessory 253 has reached the fifth position. In addition, the production of the light guide plate IL is started, and it appears that the pattern that shaped the face of the Tono-sama character is emitting light in the second display mode. The effect of the light guide plate IL may be started at the same time when the third movable accessory 253 reaches the fifth position, or may be started after the third movable accessory 253 reaches the fifth position. Alternatively, it may be started before the third movable accessory 253 reaches the fifth position. In FIG. 37 (e-1), the third display area 208-3 changes to a transparent state in the state where the effect of the light guide plate IL is continued, and the character-like character drawn on the third movable accessory 253 is displayed. A pattern shaped like the face and the face of the Tono-sama character that emits light from the light guide plate IL appears to overlap.

  37 shows an example in which the operation of the first movable accessory shown in FIG. 32 is different from that in the middle from the middle to the right column.

  In FIG. 37 (b′-1), the left arc portion 2511 constituting the first movable accessory 251 is in the first position on the left side described with reference to FIG. 36 (c-1), and the first movable accessory The right arc portion 2512 constituting 251 is in the first position on the right side described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 37 (b'-2), the darkening effect is started in this state. When the darkening effect is started, the left arc portion 2511 rotates around the left vertical axis (not shown) at the left first position, and the right arc portion 2512 is not shown at the right first position. Rotate around the right vertical axis of In FIG. 37 (c′-1), the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 after rotation are indicated by dotted lines, respectively. Since the darkening effect is executed, the rotation operations of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 are hardly noticed. When the rotation of each of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 is finished, as shown in FIG. 37 (d′-1), the effect of the light guide plate IL is started, and the pattern that imitates the face of the Tono-sama character It seems to emit light in two display modes. Next, in FIG. 37 (e′-1), the left arc portion 2511 rotated at the first position on the left side of the display screen on which the darkening effect of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed is overlaid from the front side. The left first display area 208-1L ′ including the overlapping area and the right first display area 208 including the area overlapping the right arc portion 2512 rotated at the first position on the right side from the front side. -1R ′ changes to a transparent state due to the transmission effect, and the rotated left circular arc portion 2511 is seen on the back side of the left first display area 208-1L ′, and the right first display area 208-1R ′. A rotated right arc portion 2512 can be seen on the back side. It should be noted that in both the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512, an LED is built in the surface (front surface) that was on the front side before the rotation, but it becomes the front side after the rotation. However, in this example, LEDs are built in both the front surface and the back surface, and in FIG. 37 (e'-1) In the same figure (f′-1), both the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 emit light in the fourth display mode.

  As described above, in this example, each of the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 performs the rotation operation, but the player is not aware of the rotation operation by the darkening effect. Since the chance button 136 vibrates or the transmission part 191 vibrates, the rotating operation may be performed while attracting the player's attention by these vibrating operations. It is also possible to respond to the rotation operation only by darkening effect.

  Note that the position of the left arc portion 2511 rotated at the left first position may be the second position on the left side, and the area overlapping from the front side may be the second display area on the left side. The position of the right arc portion 2512 rotated at the first position may be the second position on the right side, and the area overlapping from the front side may be the second display area on the right side.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the effect of the light guide plate IL.

  FIG. 38B shows the same situation as FIG. 33M, but in FIG. 38B, the darkening effect has not yet started. Also, the family crest character 224E remains in the initial position. In FIG. 38C, a darkening effect is started, and in FIG. The crest character 224E that has started to move is also lit in the fourth display mode. In FIG. 38 (e), the family crest member 224E has reached the third position, and on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first movable accessory 251 starts moving from the initial position. Even when the first movable accessory 251 is moving, the effect of the light guide plate IL is not started, and the preparation operation of the first movable accessory 251 is not noticed only by the darkening effect. In FIG. 38 (f), the first movable accessory 251 reaches the first position. That is, the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 are combined so as to surround the circular region S3 'shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 38 (g), the transmission effect is executed, the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state, and the first movable accessory 251 in the unlit state is visible in the back of the first display area 208-1. . Then, the effect of the light guide plate IL is started at the timing of FIG. In the production of the light guide plate IL here, the pattern imitating the effect image appears to emit light in the fourth display mode. Then, after the production of the light guide plate IL is started, the first movable accessory 251 in the first position once emits light in the fourth display mode, and then turns off (FIG. 38 (j)).

  In FIG. 38 (k), the transmission effect ends and the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state, but the effect of the light guide plate IL continues. In FIG. 38 (l), the first movable accessory 251 starts returning to the initial position on the back side. The effect of the light guide plate IL continues at least until the first movable accessory 251 returns completely to the initial position so that the player is not aware of the return operation of the first movable accessory 251.

  In the column on the right side of FIG. 38, an example is shown in which light amount adjustment is performed for LEDs incorporated in the family crest member 224E, LEDs incorporated in the first movable accessory 251, and the like.

  When the symbol is stopped or the demonstration is displayed, the menu screen is called by operating the chance button 136 or the OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181. During the demonstration display, the menu screen may be automatically switched. Further, even during the symbol variation display, the menu screen may be called by performing a calling operation. A menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. On this menu screen, various adjustments, customization, etc. can be performed, selection operation (cursor movement) is performed using the up key or down key of the cross key 181a of the operation key unit 181, and the determination operation is performed by pressing the OK button 181b. Can be done. FIG. 38A shows a state in which the light amount adjustment is selected. When the OK button 181b is pressed in this state, the screen is switched to the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. In this light amount adjustment screen, an indicator showing the amount of light is displayed. The amount of light is determined by increasing or decreasing the level of the indicator using the left key or right key of the cross key 181a and pressing the OK button 181b. To do. In the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (B), it is level 6, but in the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (C), one level is lowered to level 5.

  On the other hand, FIG. 38E shows an example of a display screen when the menu screen shown in FIG. 38A is called and the light amount adjustment is selected in a state where the transmission effect is actually executed. That is, the light amount adjustment screen during production is displayed. The state in which the transmission effect is actually executed is also a state in which the symbol variation display is performed. In FIG. 38 (E), there is a family crest member 224E at the third position on the front side of the display screen. Furthermore, since the first display area 208-1 in the display screen is in a transparent state, Although the indicator indicating the size is hardly visible, on the contrary, the LED itself that adjusts the light intensity is clearly visible. That is, the crest character 224E that is lit in the fourth display mode and the first movable combination 251 that is also lit in the fourth display mode are clearly visible. Therefore, it is possible to perform adjustment while confirming the actual light amount of the LED by operating the left key or the right key of the cross key 181a. However, in FIG. 38F, it is not known whether the indicator level is 3 level, 4 level or 5 level.

  In the light amount adjustment screen shown in FIG. 38 (B), since the indicator level is clearly visible, the light amount of the LED that is located at the initial position or the like and is not actually visible can be confirmed. You can't, but you can rely on the indicator level to adjust it. However, the light amount adjustment screen illustrated in FIG. 38B may be limited to a screen capable of adjusting the light amount only to the LEDs that can be visually recognized.

  Then, the structure of the presentation apparatus of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals used.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the configuration of the rendering device 206 of the third embodiment and the configuration of a modification thereof.

  In FIG. 39A, the left diagonal front is the front side, and the right diagonal back side is the back side. On the rear side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. This accessory has the same configuration as the third movable accessory 253 in the effect device 20 of the second embodiment, but was the first movable accessory 251 in the effect device 206 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. It is arrange | positioned in the position of an accessory, and is hereafter called the 1st movable accessory 251. FIG. In addition, a fixed accessory 255 is arranged on the back side of the first movable accessory 251. The fixed character 255 is a character on which the face of the frog character is drawn, and is a fixed character that is not movable. The fixed combination 255 is fixedly arranged at the fifth position of the combination that was the third movable combination 253 in the effect device 206 of the second embodiment.

  The initial position of the first movable accessory 251 in the third embodiment is a position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39B is in the initial position. When the operation starts, the first movable accessory 251 moves up from the initial position, and can move to the first position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 39 (b), the first movable accessory 251 in the first position is represented by a dotted line. The first position of the first movable accessory 251 and the position where the fixed accessory 255 is fixedly arranged are shifted in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), but are substantially the same in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. is there. Therefore, the fixed accessory 255 is located behind the circle represented by the dotted line in FIG.

  Note that the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the first movable accessory 251 and the fixed accessory 255 of the third embodiment. In addition, the first movable combination 251 (the left circular arc portion 2511 and the right circular arc portion 2512) of the second embodiment is provided at a position that does not interfere with each of the first movable combination 251 and the fixed combination 255 of the third embodiment. May be. Further, the family crest member 224E and the light guide plate IL arranged on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in the effect device 206 of the third embodiment. However, in the rendering device 206 of the third embodiment, the family crest member 224E may be omitted, or the light guide plate IL may be omitted.

  FIG.39 (c) is a figure which shows the modification of the presentation apparatus 206 of 3rd Embodiment shown to Fig.39 (a).

  Also in FIG. 39 (c), the front left side is the front side, and the rear right side is the back side. On the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (c), the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn upward, and the face of the frog character is drawn downward. An object 251 is arranged. In this modification, the first movable accessory 251 can move up and down. That is, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), the first movable member is between the position where the first movable member 251 is located above and the position where the first movable member 251 is located below. The accessory 251 is movable. The position where the first movable accessory 251 is located above is the initial position (second position) of the first movable accessory 251 and the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located below is The first position may be the first position. Conversely, the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located below is the initial position (second position) of the first movable accessory 251, and The position where the movable accessory 251 is located above may be the first position. The dotted circle shown in FIG. 39 (d) is a part of the first movable accessory 251 that overlaps the first display area 208-1 that becomes transparent due to the transmission effect from the front side. That is, in the first embodiment, the first movable combination 251 displayed as “Chance” may be used, or in the second embodiment, the first movable combination 251 including the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 may be used. Even in the first movable actor 251 in which the face of the Tono-sama character in the third embodiment is drawn, all of it is overlapped with the first display area 208-1 from the front side. Then, only a part of the first movable accessory 251 is overlapped. In addition, the lower half of the first movable accessory 251 can be regarded as first effect means, and the upper half of the first movable accessory 251 can be regarded as second effect means. In this case, the effect using the first effect means in which the face of the samurai character is drawn and the effect using the second effect means in which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn are not executed simultaneously. become. Further, the face of the frog character may emit light, or the face of the Tono-sama character may emit light. In this case, even when the first display area 208-1 is in an opaque state, the light of the character located on the back side of the first display area 208-1 emits light, and the light is emitted from the first decorative pattern. It can be seen that light is transmitted through the display device 208L and emitted from the front side as in the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG. Further, when the face of the Tono-sama character is displayed, the confirmation display of the big hit symbol pattern may be easier to display than when the face of the spear character is displayed.

  Note that the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the first movable accessory 251 of this modification. Moreover, you may provide the 1st movable combination 251 (left circular arc part 2511 and right circular arc part 2512) of 2nd Embodiment in the position which does not interfere with the 1st movable combination 251 of this modification. Furthermore, the family crest character 224E and the light guide plate IL arranged on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in this modified example. However, the family crest member 224E may be omitted, or the light guide plate IL may be omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an effect example of the effect device according to the third embodiment and a modification thereof.

  The example shown in the left column of FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the effect device of the third embodiment shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b).

  In FIG. 40 (b), a variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Moreover, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 40B is displayed in the second display mode that is one of the display modes of the normal notice. The first movable accessory 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 40B represents the upper end portion of the first movable accessory 251 in the initial position. ing.

  In FIG. 40C, the transmission effect is started, and the display area 208-13 including the area overlapping the fixed accessory 255 from the front side in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transparent. Change to state. As described above, the fixed accessory 255 is fixedly arranged at the fifth position of the accessory that was the third movable accessory 253 in the rendering device of the second embodiment, so this display area 208-13. Is the same display area as the third display area, and is also the same display area as the first display area 208-1 corresponding to the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, which is indicated by a dotted line in FIG. . Hereinafter, this display area 208-13 is referred to as a common display area 208-13. The common display area 208-13 may be slightly shifted from the third display area, may be slightly different in size, may be slightly shifted from the first display area, and may be slightly different in size. Good. That is, the common display area 208-13 only needs to overlap at least partly with the third display area, and at least partly overlap with the first display area, and only partly overlaps with the third display area. The first display area may partially overlap, the third display area may entirely overlap, and the first display area may entirely overlap. In the back of the common display area 208-13, which is in a transparent state, a fixed accessory 255 on which the face of the frog character is drawn is visible. Even when the transmission effect is started, the first movable accessory 251 remains in the initial position.

  In FIG. 40 (d), the transmission effect is once ended, and the fixed accessory 255 becomes invisible. Once the transmission effect is finished, the first movable accessory 251 that has remained at the initial position (second position) starts to rise toward the first position, and in FIG. 251 has reached the first position. Although the darkening effect is not started here, the darkening effect may be started before the first movable accessory 251 starts moving from the initial position or at the same time as the movement starts.

  When the first movable accessory 251 reaches the first position, as shown in FIG. 40 (f), the transmission effect is started again, and the common display area 208-13 becomes transparent again. The fixed movable object 255 is overlapped from the front side by the first movable combination 251 in the first position, and the face of the Tono-like character is drawn from the front side over the common display area 208-13. The movable accessory 251 is easier to visually recognize than the fixed accessory 255. That is, the phrase “easy to see” here includes that the fixed accessory 255 is completely invisible and the first movable accessory 251 is visible.

  When the first movable actor 251 with the face of the Tono-sama character arranged on the front side of the fixed actor 255 on which the face of the samurai character is drawn appears as a transparent effect, The production of the first notice is easier to start than when the fixed object 255 on which the face is drawn is visible. In addition, the big hit symbol may be finalized and displayed easily. As described above, in the effect device according to the third embodiment, the movable accessory having a high expectation level (reliability) is reduced to the expected level (reliability level) after narrowing the viewable area of the common display area 208-13 to one place. ) Is placed closer to the player (on the front side) than a movable accessory with a low) so that it looks larger.

  The example shown in the middle column of FIG. 40 is a modification of the example shown in the left column.

  As in FIG. 40 (b), in the same figure (b ′) in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the first movable accessory 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown in FIG. The upper end part of the 1st movable accessory 251 in the position is represented.

  In FIG. 40 (c ′), the transmission effect is started and the common display area 208-13 is changed to the transparent state. In this modified example, at the same time as the transmission effect is started, the first movable accessory 251 that has remained at the initial position until then starts moving toward the first position, and thereafter, in the left column of FIG. It is the same as the example shown. Note that the first movable accessory 251 may start moving toward the first position before the transmission effect is started. Alternatively, after this, the transmission effect is temporarily ended, but the first movable accessory 251 may start moving toward the first position after the transmission effect is ended, after the transmission effect is ended. By doing this, switching from the fixed role 255 to the first movable role 251, that is, once the face of the character with a low expectation appears, and to the face of the character with a high expectation Promotional effects such as switching can be performed quickly.

  The example shown in the right column of FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect in the modification of the effect device of the third embodiment illustrated in FIG.

  In FIG. 40 (B), the decorative symbol variation display is performed. In addition, the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 40B is displayed in a second display mode that is one of the display modes of the normal notice. In addition, here, the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located above is the initial position of the first movable accessory 251 and the position where the first movable accessory 251 is located below is the first position. Suppose you are in one position. 40B, the first movable accessory 251 is in the initial position, and the dotted line shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 40B is the first movable accessory 251 in the initial position. The lower end portion of the portion 251Y in which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn is shown.

  In FIG. 40C, the transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to the transparent state. In the first movable accessory 251 in the initial position, the portion overlapped with the first display area 208-1 is a portion 251G in which the face of the frog character is drawn. In FIG. The face of the samurai character can be seen in the back of the first display area 208-1 that has changed to.

  In FIG. 40 (D), the transmission effect is once ended, and the face of the habit character becomes invisible. Once the transmission effect is finished, the first movable accessory 251 that has remained at the initial position until then starts to descend toward the first position, and in FIG. Has reached. Although the darkening effect is not started here, the darkening effect may be started before the first movable accessory 251 starts moving from the initial position or at the same time as the movement starts.

  When the first movable accessory 251 reaches the first position, as shown in FIG. 40F, the transmission effect is started again, and the first display area 208-1 becomes transparent again. In the first movable accessory 251 in the first position, the portion overlapped with the first display area 208-1 is a portion 251Y in which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn. In FIG. The face of the Tono-sama character can be seen in the back of the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the state. In FIG. 40F, the dotted line shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the portion 251G of the first movable accessory 251 in the first position where the face of the frog character is drawn. Represents the upper end.

  Then, the structure of the presentation apparatus of 4th Embodiment is demonstrated. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals used.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the rendering device 206 according to the fourth embodiment.

  In FIG. 41 (a), the left diagonal front is the front side, and the right diagonal back side is the back side. A fixed accessory 255 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The fixed combination 255 in the fourth embodiment is a combination in which the face of the Tono-like character is drawn on the upper side and the face of the spear character is drawn on the lower side, and is a fixed arrangement that is not movable. The face of the Tono-sama character and the face of the samurai character drawn on the fixed role 255 appear by the transparent effect. However, when the face of the Tono-sama character appears, the face of the samurai character appears. However, it is easy to start the production of the first notice. In addition, the big hit symbol may be finalized and displayed easily.

  On the other hand, the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance is further arranged on the front side. Has been placed.

  The second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect is a pot accessory that constitutes the bowl, and the initial position of the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Become position. The second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance shown in FIG. 41 (b) is in the initial position. When the movement starts, the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance descends from the initial position, and covers the position of the fixed accessory 255 that seems to have covered the head of the Tono-sama character, and the head of the frog character. Stop at the position where it looks like.

  The second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance is an accessory other than a bowl (for example, roller, blowback, eyebrow, bowl shape, etc.) constituting the basket, and the second movable accessory for strong presentation. The initial position of 2522 is also a position above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance shown in FIG. 41 (c) is in the initial position. When the movement starts, the second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance descends from the initial position, and is positioned at a position on the fixed accessory 255 that matches the face of the lord character and a position that matches the face of the frog character. Stop.

  In addition, although both the moving directions from the initial position of the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance and the second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance are both descending directions, the movement directions of both may be different. For example, the initial position of the second movable accessory 2522 for strong effect is set to a position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second movable accessory 2522 for strong effect is raised from the initial position. It may be. Alternatively, the initial position of the weak movable second movable accessory 2521 is set to a position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that the weak movable second movable accessory 2521 is raised from the initial position. Also good.

  Although the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance and the second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance are misaligned in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction), they match in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. As shown in FIG. 41 (d), the second movable combination 2521 for weak performance and the second movable combination 2522 for strong performance combine to form a bag when viewed from the front side. In both FIG. 41 (b) and FIG. 41 (c), the circle represented by the upper dotted line appears to cover the head of the character-like character with the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance, When the second movable role 2522 for strong performance matches the face of the character's character and the second movable role 2521 for weak performance and the second movable role 2522 for strong performance are combined, the weak performance The positions of the second movable combination 2521 for use and the second movable combination 2522 for strong performance are represented. Further, in both FIG. 41 (b) and FIG. 41 (c), the circle represented by the lower dotted line seems to cover the head of the samurai character with the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance. At the same time, the second movable role 2522 for strong performance matches the face of the character of the samurai, and the second movable role 2521 for weak performance and the second movable role 2522 for strong performance are combined. The positions of the second movable combination 2521 for weak performance and the second movable combination 2522 for strong performance are represented.

  In FIG. 41 (e), it seems that the second movable role 2521 for weak performance is covered on the head of the character of Tono-sama of the fixed role 255, and the second movable role 2522 for strong performance on the face. Are combined, and the second movable combination 2521 for weak performance and the second movable combination 2522 for strong performance are combined to show that the Tono-sama character appears to be wearing a spear.

  According to the fourth embodiment, a pattern (hereinafter referred to as a “first pattern”) in which the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance appears to be covered on the head of each character, and for strong performance. A pattern in which the second movable accessory 2522 matches the face of each character (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern”) and a second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance are placed on the head of each character. In addition, the second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance can be executed in three patterns with a pattern (hereinafter referred to as “third pattern”) that is in a position that matches the face of each character. is there. The larger the number, the easier the start of the first notice effect. In addition, the big hit symbol may be finalized and displayed easily. Note that the second pattern may not be executed.

  In addition, when the character is prioritized and the first pattern is executed, and the Tono-sama character appears to be wearing the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance, the third pattern is executed. It is easier to start the effect of the first notice than when the frog character appears to be wearing a heel. In addition, the big hit symbol may be finalized and displayed easily. Or, conversely, when the second movable combination is given priority and the third pattern is executed and the character appears to be wearing a spear, the first pattern is executed, The effect of the first notice may be easier to start than the case where it seems that the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect is put on the head, or the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed finally.

  In addition, when the first pattern is executed with the face of the Tono-sama character appearing, the effect of the first notice is performed when the third pattern is executed with the face of the samurai character appearing. Easy to start. In addition, the big hit symbol may be finalized and displayed easily.

  Note that the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 of the first embodiment may be provided at positions that do not interfere with the fixed accessory 255 of the fourth embodiment. In addition, the first movable combination 251 (the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512) of the second embodiment may be provided at a position that does not interfere with the fixed combination 255 of the fourth embodiment. Further, the family crest member 224E and the light guide plate IL arranged on the front side in the second embodiment are also provided in the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment. However, in the rendering device 206 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the lens cut with a pattern that imitates the face of the Tono-sama character, the lens cut with a pattern imitating an effect image is applied to the light guide plate IL as described later. ing. In the rendering device 206 of the fourth embodiment, the family crest character 224E may be omitted. Further, the first movable combination 251 and the fixed combination 255 in the third embodiment may be provided instead of the fixed combination 255 in the fourth embodiment, or the first movable combination in the modification of the third embodiment. The accessory 251 may be provided in place of the fixed accessory 255 of the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the effect device according to the fourth embodiment. The circle represented by the upper dotted line shown in FIG. 42B or the like represents the position where the face of the lord-like character is drawn on the fixed role 255, and the circle represented by the lower dotted line represents the 爺 in the fixed role 255. Represents the position where the face of the character is drawn.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (b), the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed on the upper right, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the example shown in FIG. 42, a darkening effect is performed. As described above, although the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, the back side may be visible depending on the color of the displayed image, but the display screen is dark. The face of the Tono-sama character and the face of the samurai character drawn on the fixed role 255 are likely to be invisible.

  In FIG. 42 (c), the effect of the first pattern is executed, and the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect is lowered from the initial position to a position where it appears as if it covers the head of the samurai character. . However, the transmission effect has not been started, and the frog character is not visible.

  In FIG. 42 (d), the transmission effect is started, and the lower display area 208-U that overlaps the face of the spear character in the fixed accessory 255 in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It becomes transparent, and the face of the samurai character in the fixed role 255 is seen in the back of the lower display area 208-U, and the second movable actor 2521 for weak performance is on the head of the samurai character. Looks like it was covered.

  In FIG. 42 (e), the transmission effect ends, and the face of the habit character disappears, but the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect remains as it is. In FIG. 42F, the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance starts to rise toward the initial position, and in FIG. 42G, the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance is in the initial position. Returning once to (h) in the figure, the weak movable second movable actor 2521 starts to descend again from the initial position, and this time, it has descended to a position that appears to cover the head of the Tono-sama character. . Note that the second movable accessory 2521 for the weak effect may start to rise simultaneously with the end of the transmission effect, and a position that appears to have covered the head of the Tono-sama character without returning to the initial position. You may stop at that position when you go up.

  In FIG. 42 (i), the second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance descends from the initial position to a position that matches the face of the Tono-sama character, and the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance and the strong representation for strong performance. The second movable accessory 2522 is combined to form a bag when viewed from the front side. That is, the effect of the third pattern is executed.

  In FIG. 42 (j), the transparent effect is started again, and this time, the upper display area 208- that overlaps the face of the Tonori character in the fixed accessory 255 in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. H becomes transparent, and in the back of the upper display area 208-H, the face of the Tono-like character in the fixed role 255 can be seen, and the Tono-like character is stronger than the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance. It looks as if a bag combined with the second movable accessory 2522 for production is attached. That is, an effect in which the effect of the first notice is most easily started is executed. In some cases, it may be considered that an effect that is most likely to finally display the jackpot symbol is being executed.

  In FIG. 42 (k), the rendering of the light guide plate IL is started in a state where the Tono-sama character appears to be wearing a heel over the transparent upper display area 208-H. In the production of the light guide plate IL here, the pattern imitating the effect image appears to emit light in the fourth display mode at the position in front of the lower display area 208-U in the opaque state. The lower display area 208-U is not transparent and is darkly displayed, so the effect of the light guide plate IL can be further emphasized, and the effect can be given a flashy appearance. It is possible to appeal the high degree of expectation for the effect of the first notice or the big hit of the effect that appears to be.

  In this example, after the second movable accessory moves to the effect position first, the transmission effect is executed, and the face of each character appears. After the appearance, the second movable accessory may move to the effect position. Alternatively, the timing at which each character's face appears and the timing at which the effect position of the second movable accessory is reached may be the same.

  Further, the effect start timing of the light guide plate IL may be before FIG. 42 (i), may be before or simultaneously with the completion of the basket, or may be before or simultaneously with the start of the transmission effect.

  42 (d-1) shown in the upper part of the right column in FIG. 42 is another effect example continued from FIG. 42 (d). The second movable accessory 2522 for strong effect is The character moves down to a position matching the face of the character, and it appears that the character of the heel is wearing a heel over the transparent lower display area 208-U.

  FIG. 42J shown below the right column in FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram, and the fixed accessory 255 is omitted for the sake of clarity. In FIG. 42 (j), the entire upper display region 208-H is in a transparent state due to the transmission effect, but here, a part of the upper display region 208-H is also in the transparent state due to the transmission effect. In other words, as shown in FIG. 42J, a star display st is performed as an example of the decorative display, and the surrounding area is in a transparent state. The decoration display is not limited to the star display st, and the position and size of the decoration display are not limited, and the decoration display is variable according to the production and the situation. When the decoration display (star display st) is displayed, the decisive display of the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed than when it is not displayed. That is, the expectation degree of jackpot in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed when the decoration display is displayed increases. Alternatively, the decoration display may be a pre-reading notice. In FIG. 42 (j ′) shown below FIG. 42 (J), the star display st is located in front of the eyes of the face of the Tono-like character drawn on the fixed role 255, and is viewed from the front side. The star display st overlaps the eyes of Tono-sama's character. Note that when the face of the Tono-sama character is displayed, the final display of the big hit symbol pattern may be easier to display than when the face of the Samurai character is displayed. Of these characters, the decoration display (star display st) may be displayed only on the Tono-like character with a relatively high expectation of the big hit. Further, instead of the fixed combination 255, the first movable combination 251 of the modified example of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c) may be used, and furthermore, the family crest combination shown in FIG. 32 (b). An object 224E may be provided. In addition, the display of the big hit symbol pattern may be easier to display when the face of the Tono-sama character is displayed than when the face of the spider character is displayed. In this case, a decorative display (star display) The display timing of st) may be before the character's face is displayed. In addition to the expectation of which character's face is displayed in the first movable accessory 251 of the modified example of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39 (c), a decorative display (star display st) is displayed before that. By being displayed, even in a period before the character's face is displayed, the player can have a sense of expectation and be entertained. In the effect shown in FIG. 42 (j ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, the effect means (fixed accessory 255) disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first The effect means (2nd movable actor 2521,2522) arrange | positioned in the front side rather than 1 decoration symbol display apparatus 208L and the light guide plate IL are carried out. In particular, in addition to the effect means arranged on the back side and the effect means arranged on the front side overlapping, there is an advantage that the decorative display can be changed by the transmissive liquid crystal display device between them.

  According to the production device 206 of the fourth embodiment described above, the production means (fixed accessory 255) that cannot change the production position can be produced by the production means (upper display area 208-H) that can change the production position. With the help of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) that can change the effect position with the lower display area 208-U, the width of the number of effect patterns can be expanded. In the effect device 206 of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of display areas (upper display area 208-H, lower display area 208-U) and a plurality of effect means arranged on the front side of the effect display means. It is one of the different points from the production that has been described so far that the production is a combination of the (second movable combination 2521, 2522). Note that the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 and the like and the first movable accessory 251 in the second embodiment shown in FIG. The third movable combination 253 on which the character's face is drawn may be combined, or the family crest combination 224E arranged on the front side may be combined. Further, the first movable combination 251 and the fourth movable combination 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 and the like and the first movable combination 251 of the modification of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39C are combined. May be. Further, the first movable accessory 251 and the fourth movable accessory 254 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance arranged on the front side shown in FIG. You may combine the 2nd movable accessory 2522 for production. Alternatively, the first movable accessory 251 in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 32, the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn, and the family crest accessory 224E arranged on the front side, and FIG. The first movable combination 251 of the modification of the third embodiment shown in (c) may be combined, or the second movable combination 2521 for weak production and the strong production arranged on the front side shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 2522 may be combined. Alternatively, the first movable combination 251 of the modified example of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 39C, the second movable combination 2521 for weak performance arranged on the front side shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 2522 may be combined. Moreover, three embodiments among the first to fourth embodiments may be combined, or all four embodiments may be combined.

  Next, the configuration of the rendering device according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals used.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the rendering device 206 according to the fifth embodiment.

  In FIG. 43A, the left diagonal front is the front side, and the right diagonal back side is the back side. The effect device according to the fifth embodiment includes a movable accessory 256 that can move in the front-rear direction (Z-axis direction). That is, the movable accessory 256 is movable across the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. In the state shown on the left side of FIG. Is also on the back side, and in the state shown on the right side thereof, is on the front side with respect to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The movable accessory 256 is a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display, and is sometimes called a versatile writer. More specifically, the movable accessory 256 includes a single LED array 2561, a rotary shaft 2562 extending in the front-rear direction at the longitudinal center portion of the LED array 2561, and a lifting arm (not shown). The LED array 2561 has a plurality of LEDs arranged in the longitudinal direction. The LED array 2561 rotates around a rotation axis 2562, and afterimages of light are generated on the rotation trajectories of the plurality of LEDs, thereby displaying a picture. Further, the LED array 2561 is attached to a tip portion of a lifting arm (not shown). The elevating arm performs an elevating operation by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion.

  The initial position of the LED array 2561 is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, on the front side or the rear side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the LED array 2561 is located on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The elevator moves down to the position overlapping the display screen (hereinafter referred to as “effect position”) and rotates at the effect position (first position). The LED array 2561 shown on the left side of FIG. 43 (a) is rotated at the effect position on the back side, and the LED array 2561 shown on the right side is rotated at the effect position on the front side.

  In the upper part of FIG. 43 (b), views of the rendering device 206 of the fifth embodiment viewed from the front side are shown stepwise from the left to the right. A view is shown. In the view from the side, the right side is the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left side is the front side, and the player's eyes are shown on the left side.

  In the effect device 206 shown at the left end of FIG. 43 (b), the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the effect position on the back side relative to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and on the back side, the pattern due to the afterimage effect of light. Is formed. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device, does not perform a transmissive effect, and the entire display screen is in a non-transmissive state. However, there is no darkening effect, an image of a white color is displayed, and the pattern due to the afterimage effect of light formed on the back side can be seen faintly over the display screen even from the front side. In the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, there may be a case where a region overlapping the rotation region of the LED array 2561 is made transparent.

  In the rendering device 206 shown second from the left in FIG. 43B, the LED array 2561 that has been rotating at a constant speed on the back side stops rotating and is in the horizontal posture, which is the initial posture. For this reason, the pattern by the afterimage effect of light has disappeared. In addition, the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array 2561 are all turned off, and no light emission on the back side can be seen from the front side.

  In the rendering device 206 shown third from the left in FIG. 43 (b), when the lifting arm (not shown) rises, the LED array 2561 returns to the initial position on the back side with the initial posture. It is preferable that the display screen is darkened until the LED array 2561 in the initial posture is difficult to see until the LED array 2561 stops rotating and returns to the initial position. Alternatively, the display screen may be darkened at the timing when the lifting arm starts to rise, that is, the timing when the LED array 2561 starts to move, so that it is difficult to see the LED array 2561 moving.

  In the effect device 206 shown third from the right in FIG. 43B, the LED array 2561 is moved from the initial position on the back side to the initial position on the front side. It should be noted that the LED array 2561 is not visible from the front side, but may be visible at the initial position on the back side or the initial position on the front side.

  In the rendering device 206 shown in the second from the right in FIG. 43 (b), when the lifting arm (not shown) is lowered, the LED array 2561 that was in the initial position on the front side remains in the initial posture and the first decorative design. It has moved to the effect position on the front side of the display device 208L.

  In the effect device 206 shown at the right end of FIG. 43, the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the effect position on the front side, and a pattern due to the afterimage effect of light is formed on the front side and formed on the back side. Unlikely, it looks clearly.

  When the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the back side production position, a region that overlaps the back side production position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is made transparent. You may make it visible the pattern by the afterimage effect of the light formed in the back side over an area | region. In addition, when the LED array 2561 rotates at a constant speed at the front-side production position, the background is darkened by darkening the display screen, and the pattern due to the afterimage effect of light formed on the front side is made easier to see. Also good.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a modification of the embodiment described so far. In addition, the modification example here may be an example in the case of replacing the embodiment described so far, or may be an example performed in addition to the embodiment described so far.

  44 (b) to (e) shown at the left end of FIG. 44 are modifications of the examples shown in FIGS. 40 (B) to 40 (F).

  In FIG. 44 (b), a variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 44B is displayed in the second display mode, which is one of the display modes for the normal notice. Furthermore, in FIG. 44 (b), a button effect is started. The button effect here corresponds to a judge effect that determines whether the face of the Tono-sama character or the face of the samurai character appears. When the face of the Tono-sama character appears, it is easier to finally determine and display the big hit symbol pattern by the currently displayed variation display of the decorative symbols than when the face of the spear character appears. When the face of Tono-sama's character appears, the big hit symbol pattern may be definitely displayed. Alternatively, when the Tono-sama character's face appears, a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect, a pseudo-ream effect, etc.) may be easier to start than when the face of a samurai character appears. May be started. When the button effect is started, the display mode of the chance button 136 that has been lit in the first display mode is changed to the fourth display mode. In addition, in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44B, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode, and the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. An arrow display 136b as a prompting display and a character display of “press”, and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed. . These button images 136a-c, etc. correspond to the operation promotion display. It should be noted that the button images 136a-c, etc. overlap with a part of the decorative symbols that are changing at high speed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  The remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. 44 (b) is reduced by 1/5 or more. At this timing, the chance button 136 that is lit in the fourth display mode is pressed, and the remaining time meter display 136c shown in FIG. 44 (c) is displayed. In the one decorative symbol display device 208L, the button images 136a to 136c disappear, a transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state. On the far side of the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the transparent state, a portion 251 </ b> G in which the face of the samurai character is drawn is located, and the face of the samurai character appears. Even in FIG. 44 (c) where the face of the samurai character has appeared, the decorative symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed, and when the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting in the first display mode.

  In FIG. 44 (d), the transmission effect is finished and the button effect is started again. That is, the first display area 208-1 returns to the opaque state, and the face of the frog character is not visible. Instead, the button images 136a to 136c are displayed again, and the remaining period meter display 136c shown in FIG. 44 (d) is reduced by 1/5 or more. At this timing, the display is turned on in the fourth display mode. The present chance button 136 is pressed again.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (e), the button images 136a to 136c disappear, the second transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 changes to a transparent state. On the far side of the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the transparent state, a portion 251 </ b> Y where the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn is located, and the face of the Tono-sama character appears. While the button effect shown in FIG. 44 (d) is being performed, that is, while the button images 136a to 136c are being displayed, the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) moves. A portion 251Y in which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn is located on the back side of the first display area 208-1. Even in FIG. 44 (e) where the face of the Tono-sama character appears, the decorative symbols continue to fluctuate at high speed, and when the chance button 136 is operated, it returns to lighting in the first display mode.

  In the example described above, the button effect is performed twice in one decoration symbol variation display, but the button effect may be performed only once in one decoration symbol variation display. Good. That is, the button images etc. 136a to 136c are displayed before the effect that the face of the samurai character appears, and the button images 136a to 136c are displayed before the effect that the face of the Todoroki character appears. The button images 136a to 136c may be displayed only in either case. In this case, if the face of one of the faces of the Tono-sama character or the face of the samurai character appears once, the face of the character is confirmed. In other words, in the example shown in FIGS. 44 (b) to 44 (e), after the face of a spear character having a low jackpot expectation appears, the face of a Tono-sama character having a high jackpot expectation appears. It corresponds to a step-up notice. In addition, when the face of the Tono-sama character with high expectation level of the big hit appears first, the second button effect may not be performed, and the second button effect may be performed. There may be a case where the face is demoted to the face of a samurai character and a case where the face of a character in a light-emitting mode (for example, a rainbow-colored light-emitting mode) representing jackpot determination or a face of a different character is promoted.

  Further, when there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the transmission effect may not be started. That is, no character's face appears. Or, conversely, even if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the transparent effect is started after the operation effective period has elapsed (at the time of elapse or after), and the character May appear. In other words, an effect in which the face of the Tonosama character appears is an effect that may be started only when there is an operation within the operation effective period.

  Further, the means for rendering the face of the frog character and the face of the lord-like character provided on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal is not limited to the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. The rendered directing means and the directing means may be directing means in which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn separately. In this case, of the two rendering means, both rendering means may be movable means, or only one of them may be movable means. In the case where both the rendering means are movable means, the number of driving sources may be one, or each may have a different driving source. When only one of them is a movable means, a rendering means that is fixed on the back side (back side) of the first display area 208-1 is arranged and fixed to the first display area 208-1. A movable effect means is arranged between the effect means, and the fixed effect means becomes invisible when overlapped by the movable effect means. Even in the case of the directing means in which the face of the samurai character is drawn and the directing means in which the face of the character of the lord is drawn separately from the directing means, the first movable role shown in FIG. Even in the case of the object 251, the effect that the face of the samurai character appears and the effect that the face of the Todoroki character appear are not executed at the same time.

  Furthermore, both effect means of two effect means may have a light emission means (for example, LED). Alternatively, only one of the rendering means may have a light emitting means. That is, only the production means on which the face of the samurai character is drawn may be the production means including the light emitting means (for example, the LED is built in or arranged in the surroundings), or the face of the Tono-sama character is Only the drawn effect means may include effect means including light emitting means (for example, an LED is built in or arranged in the vicinity).

  Furthermore, in a certain effect, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of options including at least an effect in which the face of a samurai character appears and an effect in which a face of a Todoroki character appears are alternatively executed. In addition, before the start of the production in which the face of Tono-sama appears, the large button image 136a shown in FIG. 15 (l-1) may be displayed, or the large button image 136a is always displayed. May be. In other words, a plurality of display modes are prepared for the display (operation promotion display) displayed in the button effect, and the success rate of the effect (execution of the effect in which the face of the Tono-sama character appears here) depends on the display mode. Or the expectation of jackpot may change.

  In addition, the effect that the face of the samurai character appears and the effect that the face of the Tono-sama character appears are performed by changing the first display area 208-1 to the transparent state. Alternatively, it may be performed in an opaque state so that the outline of the image can be understood. In this case, only one of the characters may be performed in an opaque state, and when the first display area 208-1 is changed to a transparent state, it is a big hit rather than in an opaque state. The expectation level at which a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect, a pseudo-ream effect, etc.) is started may be high.

  32 may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, instead of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 34 (p) to FIG. 34 (r), the face of the upper half-like character of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. The drawn part and the directing means for the face of the Tono-sama character may be arranged.

  44 (A) to (C) shown in the center of FIG. 44 are a second movable accessory 2521 for weak performance and a second movable accessory 2522 for strong performance shown in FIG. In this example, the combination is sometimes simply referred to as a second movable combination 252.) is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 44A, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is entirely opaque, and the second movable accessory 252 disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is indicated by a dotted line. Has been. The second movable combination 252 indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 44A is a first display area 208-in a state where the second movable combination 2521 for weak performance and the second movable combination 2522 for strong performance are combined. 1 is located on the back side. The second movable combination 252 is a combination of the second movable combination 2521 for weak production and the second movable combination 2522 for strong production, or the second movable combination 2521 for weak production and the strong production. The second movable combination 2522 can be separated from the second movable combination 2522 and may be an integrated combination that cannot be separated from the first combination. The second movable accessory 252 is an accessory that is movable from the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the position behind the first display area 208-1.

  In FIG. 44B, the transmission effect is started, and the first display area 208-1 is changed to the transparent state. On the back side of the first display area 208-1 that has changed to the transparent state, the face-like character rendering means 2510 </ b> Y is located, and the face of the Tono-sama character appears. The ton character-like face rendering means 2510Y is also an accessory arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second movable accessory 252 is disposed between the first display area 208-1 and the face rendering means 2510Y of the Tono-sama character. In other words, the second movable accessory 252 is arranged in front of the face effect means 2510Y of the Tono-sama character, and is located at the initial position in FIG. Both the ton character's face directing means 2510Y and the second movable accessory 252 may be movable means. In this case, there may be one drive source or a separate drive source. May be.

  It should be noted that in addition to Tono-sama character face directing means 2510Y, a face character directing means may be provided. Also, the size of the face of the Tono-sama character in the example shown in the center of FIG. 44 is smaller than that of the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44, but the face size may be the same. It may replace with and may provide the 1st movable accessory 251 shown in FIG.39 (c). That is, the example shown at the center of FIG. 44 may be an example that replaces the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44, or may be an example that is performed together with the example shown at the left end of FIG. Here, even in the case of the ton character's face directing means 2510Y and the face character's directing means, or in the case of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. The effect that the character's face appears and the effect that the Tonosama character's face appear are not executed at the same time.

  In FIG. 44 (C), the transmission effect is also executed. In this transmission effect, the facial expression means 2510Y of the Tono-sama character and the second movable accessory 252 are combined. That is, the second movable accessory 252 is disposed between the first display area 208-1 and the ton-like character face directing means 2510 Y, and the ton-like character face directing means 2510 Y and the second movable accessory 252. By working together, Tono-sama appears to be wearing a bag.

  The ton character's face directing means 2510Y is fixedly arranged at a position on the back side of the first display area 208-1, and the second movable accessory 252 is moved from the initial position to the first display area 208-1. You may make it move between the directing means 2510Y of the face of Tono-sama character. In this case, expectation of big hit or The degree of expectation that an effect (for example, a super reach effect or a pseudo-ream effect) is started may be high.

  Furthermore, both of the facial expression means 2510Y of the Tono-sama character and the second movable accessory 252 may have light emitting means, or only one of them may have light emitting means. When the first display area 208-1 is in a transparent state and the light emitting means emits light, the expectation of a big hit or a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc.) is more effective than the case where no light is emitted. The degree of expectation that is started may be high. In addition, in the case where the character character directing means is also provided, the character character directing means may also have light emitting means, or the character character directing means is the light emitting means. May not be included.

  44A is a diagram showing shutter accessories 246L and 246R, which are shielding means, arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 44 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not shown, but on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the face rendering means 2510G of the frog character, or the lower half. A first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39C on which the face of the frog character is drawn is also arranged. The shutter accessories 246L and 246R are disposed between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the face rendering means 2510G or the first movable accessory 251 of the frog character. In other words, it is arranged on the front side of the face production means 2510G or the first movable accessory 251 of the frog character. The shutter actors 246L and 246M can be opened and closed, and in the fully closed state, even if the first display area 208-1 is in a transparent state, the face of the habit character cannot be seen at all. On the other hand, when the shutter features 246L and 246M are fully opened, the shutter features 246L and 246M are not visible at all if the first display area 208-1 is transparent in the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The face of the samurai character is visible on the back side of the first display area 208-1 (see FIG. 44C). The shutter actors 246L and 246M shown in FIG. 44 (a) are in a slightly open state, and a part of the face of the samurai character is visible between the left shutter accessory 246L and the right shutter accessory 246L. ing. According to the combination with the example shown at the left end of FIG. 44, the shutter actors 246L and 246M can be used for the effect of the appearance of the face of the samurai character and the effect of the appearance of the face of the character of Tono. In other words, the effect that the face of the samurai character appears and the effect that the face of the Tono-sama character do not appear at the same time, but any effect using the shutter actors 246L and 246M. May be executed simultaneously. In addition, according to the combination with the example shown in the center of FIG. 44, the shutter actors 246L and 246M can be used to determine whether or not a spear character appears wearing a spear.

  The first display area 208-1 is in a transparent state, the shutter actors 246L and 246M begin to open from the fully closed state, and the face of the frog character is placed between the left shutter accessory 246L and the right shutter accessory 246L. When the part begins to be visible, in the state immediately before the shutter actors 246L and 246M start to open (the shutter actors 246L and 246M are fully closed), the shutter accessory is placed at a position that overlaps all of the face rendering means 2510G of the frog character. 246L and 246M are located. In addition, when windows are provided in the shutter characters 246L and 246M, the shutter characters 246L and 246M are positioned at positions that overlap with a part of the face rendering means 2510G of the character of the habit.

  Furthermore, the shutters 246L and 246R shown in FIG. 44 (a) are combinations (for example, the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment and their functions) arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device described so far. It is an accessory that can be arranged between the accessory in the modification) and the transmissive liquid crystal display device. For example, the fully-closed shutter actors 246L and 246R can hide a movable accessory that moves on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device, making the movement less noticeable, or starting a transmission effect. Until then, the existence of the movable accessory itself can be made difficult to notice.

  44A is an example in which an image of a bag is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. This example may be an example that replaces the example shown in FIG. 44A or an example that is performed together with the example shown in FIG. In other words, on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, there is a Tono-sama character face effect means 2510Y and a spear character face effect means 2510G, or the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c). Has been placed.

  A full-closed eyelid image is displayed on the full display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (a). In FIG. 44 (a), a transmission effect is performed. That is, an animation in which the image of the eyelid in the fully closed state is opened little by little is displayed, and the portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L where the eyelid image is opened becomes transparent, A part of the face of the samurai character drawn on the rendering means 2510G or the first movable accessory 251 is visible.

  In addition, a fully closed eyelid image is also displayed on the full display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. FIG. 44 (c) may be a state where the eyelids are closed from FIG. 44 (a), or after the image of the eyelids in the fully open state is once displayed (for example, after all the faces of the character of the eyelids are visible) ) May be closed. Also in FIG. 44D, the transmission effect is performed. That is, an animation in which the image of the heel in the fully closed state opens little by little is displayed, and the portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L where the heel image is opened becomes transparent, A part of the face of the character-like character drawn on the production means 2510Y or the first movable accessory 251 is visible. While the full-closed eyelid image shown in FIG. 44 (c) is being displayed, the rendering means 2510Y or the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) moves and moves the face of the Tono-sama character. Located in the center.

  In this example as well, a part of the character's face can be seen to produce a squealing effect. In particular, if the face of the character that is visible in the back changes repeatedly or the face of the character disappears even in the half-open state, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, when the face of the Tono-sama character appears rather than when the face of the samurai character appears, the expectation of a big hit or a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect or a pseudo-ream effect) is started. Expectation may be high. Alternatively, the greater the number of repetitions of the fully closed state and the half-opened state, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots or the expectation that a certain effect will be started. Furthermore, the opening / closing speed may change, and the degree of opening may also change (1/5 open or 1/3 open).

  Here, the effect that the face of the samurai character appears and the effect that the face of the Tono-sama character do not appear at the same time, but in any effect, the effect that displays the image of the samurai May be executed at the same time.

  32 may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, instead of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 34 (p) to FIG. 34 (r), a ton-like character face rendering means 2510Y may be arranged.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a different accessory is arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  The example shown at the left end of FIG. 45 is an example in which a ring-shaped accessory 251R is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. This ring-shaped accessory 251R is used for changing icon change effects. That is, it is used for one variable icon change effect among a plurality of types of variable icon change effects.

  In FIG. 45A, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is entirely opaque, and the ring-shaped accessory 251R arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is indicated by a dotted line. Has been. The ring-shaped accessory 251R is a movable means, but may be fixedly arranged.

  In FIG. 45 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is performed. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 45 (b) is displayed in the second display mode that is one of the display modes for the normal notice. On the other hand, both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

  In FIG. 45 (c), the ring-shaped region 208-R surrounding the change icon h0 in the second display mode is changed to a transparent state. This ring-shaped area 208-R covers a part of the display area of the first hold icon h11, and a part of the first hold icon h11 is not visible. In the state shown in FIG. 45C, nothing can be seen in the back of the ring-shaped region 208-R, but in the subsequent state shown in FIG. 45D, the fourth in the back of the ring-shaped region 208-R. A ring-shaped accessory 251R is visible in the display mode. That is, the ring-shaped accessory 251R, which has been located in the state shown in FIG. 45C, in a region outside the region on the back side of the ring-shaped region 208-R starts to move, and the ring-shaped region It is located in the area | region which becomes the back | inner side of 208-R in FIG.45 (d). The size of the ring-shaped region 208-R corresponds to the size of the ring-shaped accessory 251R. In FIG. 45D, the ring-shaped accessory 251R emitting light in the fourth display mode is displayed. Inside, the fluctuation icon h0 of the 2nd display mode is displayed. The position of the circular area inside the ring-shaped accessory 251R shown in FIG. 45 (d) and the position of the display area of the change icon h0 are shifted in the depth direction (front-rear direction), but one in the up-down, left-right direction. I'm doing it.

  In FIG. 45E, the variation icon h0 in the second display mode is changed to the fourth display mode that is the same as the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light. The ring-shaped accessory 251R may continue to emit light in the fourth display mode until the fluctuation icon h0 disappears (the state of FIG. 45 (e) may be continued), or fluctuates after the fluctuation icon h0 changes. Before the icon h0 disappears, the transmission effect may end and the ring-shaped accessory 251R may not be visible. Alternatively, the transmission effect may end before the change icon h0 changes, and the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light in the fourth display mode may not be visible.

  In this variation icon change effect, the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light suggests the display mode of the variation icon h0 after the change before the display mode of the variation icon h0 changes. The change icon h0 does not necessarily change to the same display mode as the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light, and may or may not change to a different display mode. Good. However, the change icon h0 may be changed to the same display mode as that of the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light, or the display mode of the ring-shaped accessory 251R is a certain display mode (for example, the sixth mode In the case of the display mode or the display mode of the fourth display mode or higher), the display mode may be changed to the same display mode.

  In addition, in the state where the ring-shaped accessory 251R is not located on the back side of the ring-shaped region 208-R, as shown in FIG. 45C, the ring-shaped region 208-R changes to the transmissive state. There may be no such thing.

  In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may change simultaneously with the timing when the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light appears, or the variation icon h0 before the timing when the ring-shaped accessory 251R that emits light appears. The display mode may be changed. In other words, there may be a period in which the change icon h0 and the ring-shaped accessory 251R are in the same display mode.

  Further, the change icon h0 and the ring-shaped accessory 251R may not be in the same display mode, but may be in a corresponding or related display mode. For example, one of the fluctuation icon h0 and the ring-shaped accessory 251R blinks in a certain color (red), and the other is lit in the same color (red), or the other is lit in a certain color. The other color may be lighted with a certain color.

  Also, between FIGS. 45C and 45D, the ring-shaped accessory 251R once emits light in the same display mode as the display mode before the change of the variation icon h0 or a corresponding display mode. You may make it light-emit in the display mode corresponding to the display mode after a change, or a corresponding display mode. That is, in the case of this example, the ring-shaped accessory 251R may emit light once in the second display mode and then emit light in the fourth display mode.

  In addition, there may be a failure pattern, and the ring-shaped accessory 251R may emit light in the same display mode as the display mode before the change of the change icon h0 or a corresponding display mode, and the display mode may not change. Alternatively, the display mode may be lowered (for example, when the display mode is changed to the first display mode) or may be turned off. The ring-shaped accessory 251R may emit light in the first display mode from the beginning or may not emit light at all from the beginning.

  The example shown from the center to the right end of FIG. 45 is an example in which a circular accessory 251C larger than the variation icon h0 is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. This circular accessory 251C is also used for the changing icon change effect. That is, it is used for one variable icon change effect among a plurality of types of variable icon change effects. In the variation icon change effect in which the circular accessory 251C is used, it is expressed that the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed only by the circular role 251C, or that the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed. .

  In FIG. 45A, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is entirely opaque, and a circular accessory 251C arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is indicated by a dotted line. ing. The circular accessory 251C is a movable means, but may be fixedly arranged.

  In FIG. 45 (B), the variation display of the decorative design is performed. Also, the fluctuation icon h0 shown in FIG. 45B is displayed in the second display mode that is one of the display modes of the normal notice. On the other hand, both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

  In FIG. 45C, an animation is displayed in which the fluctuation icon h0 that has been placed on the pedestal so far rises from the pedestal and rises. In addition, a text display of “Dodeca pending change” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1, which has not been displayed until then.

  In FIG. 45 (D), a circular central region 208-C that completely includes a decorative symbol that changes at high speed in the medium symbol display region 208b that changes at high speed changes to a transparent state. Since the circular central region 208-C has changed to a transparent state, the fluctuation icon h0 that has risen from the pedestal and has risen cannot be seen. That is, it appears that the fluctuation icon h0 that has risen from the pedestal and disappeared once disappeared. In the state shown in FIG. 45D, nothing is visible behind the circular central region 208-C, but in the subsequent state shown in FIG. 45E, it disappears behind the circular central region 208-C. A circular accessory 251 </ b> C that emits light in the same second display manner as the previous variation icon h <b> 0 is visible. That is, the circular accessory 251 </ b> C that has been positioned in the state shown in FIG. 45D in a region outside the region behind the circular central region 208 -C starts to move, and the circular central region 208. In FIG. 45E, it is located in the region on the back side of -C. The size of the circular central region 208-C corresponds to the size of the circular accessory 251C. The position of the circular accessory 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E) and the position of the circular central region 208-C are shifted in the depth direction (front-rear direction), but coincide with each other in the vertical and horizontal directions. In the state of FIG. 45 (E), it appears that the fluctuation icon h0 once disappeared is enlarged and displayed on the back side.

  In FIG. 45F, the circular accessory 251C that has emitted light in the second display mode is changed, and light is emitted in the fourth display mode. This seems as if the display mode of the enlarged fluctuation icon h0 has changed to the fourth display mode.

  In FIG. 45G, the transmission effect ends, the circular central region 208-C returns to the opaque state, and the circular central region 208-C that has been transparent until now has a variation icon of the fourth display mode. h0 is displayed. It seems as if the fluctuation icon h0 that has been enlarged and changed to the fourth display mode has returned to its original size. However, the change icon h0 changed to the fourth display mode is still floating from the pedestal, and a descending animation is displayed.

  In FIG. 45 (H), the variation icon h0 of the fourth display mode returns to the pedestal and is placed on the pedestal. Although the character display “dodeca hold change” is still displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the character display “dodeca hold change” may disappear even when the circular accessory 251C changes to the fourth display mode. Alternatively, it may disappear when the transmission effect ends, or may disappear when the variation icon h0 of the fourth display mode returns to the pedestal.

  In the example described above, after the fluctuation icon h0 has moved to a certain position, the area including at least the area to which the fluctuation icon h0 has moved (circular central area 208-C) changes to a transparent state, and the transparent state Through this region (circular central region 208-C), a circular accessory 251C is visible. Even if the region (circular central region 208-C) is not in a transparent state but remains in an opaque state, if the circular accessory 251C emits light, the light is transmitted to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. May be configured so that the appearance (light emission mode) of the circular accessory 251 </ b> C emitting light from the front side can be seen. That is, even in the opaque state, if the light emission mode of the circular accessory 251C is changed, it is known that the change has occurred, and it is notified that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, or as if the fluctuation icon h0. It is only necessary to express a change in the. Then, after the circular accessory 251C emits light in a certain light emission mode, the display state as shown in FIG. 45 (H) is obtained through a predetermined effect operation.

  32 may be provided on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, instead of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIGS. 34 (p) to (r), a circular accessory 251C shown in FIG. 45 (E) or the like may be arranged.

  45 (a) to FIG. 45 (e), and a variable icon change effect using a ring-shaped accessory 251R and a circular accessory 251C shown in FIG. 45 (A) to FIG. 45 (H) are used. The fluctuation icon change effect that has been performed is not executed at the same time. In addition, in any example of production, the fluctuation icon h0 is changed to the fourth display mode, but either one of the fluctuation icon change effects is larger than the other of the fluctuation icon change effects. Expectation may be high. For example, the expectation of a big hit may be higher in the change icon change effect using the circular accessory 251C than in the change icon change effect using the ring-like accessory 251R.

  The example shown in FIG. 45 (1) is an example in which the display means 251D is disposed on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The display unit 251D is a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, or the like, which is movable, but may be fixedly arranged. In FIG. 45 (1), the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is entirely opaque, and the display means 251D arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is indicated by a dotted line. .

  The display means 251D shown in FIG. 45 (1) may be used for a timer notice effect. For example, it is used for a strong timer notice effect with a relatively high probability of jackpot, or when the remaining time reaches a certain time (for example, 3 seconds remaining) when the timer notice effect is used for a final judge effect. . That is, the transmission effect is started, and the rectangular area including the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes transparent. The display means 251D is located in the back of the screen and displays a number representing the remaining time.

  When the display means 251D is an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, the face-like character production means 2510Y shown in FIG. 44 (B) or the face of the frog character shown in FIG. The display means 251D can be used instead of the production means 2510G, the first movable combination 251 shown in FIG. 39C, and the second movable combination 252 shown in FIG. In this case, even if the display means 251D is fixedly arranged, the face of the Tono-sama character or the image of the frog can be moved by displaying the moving animation. Further, not only the ton character's face directing means 2510Y, etc., but also an accessory (for example, the first to fifth embodiments and their modifications) arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device described so far. The display means 251D can be used instead of the accessory in the example.

  The example shown in FIG. 45 (α) and FIG. 45 (β) is an example in which the movable means 251W is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The movable means 251W is movable as a whole, and the eight generations 251W1 and the generals 251W2 constituting the movable means 251W are individually movable. In other words, the movable means 251W is movable as a whole in the first direction (here, the upper limit direction), and the eight-story object 251W1 is independently movable in the second direction (here, the left direction). 251W2 can move independently in the 32nd direction (here, the right direction).

  In FIG. 45 (α), the transmission effect is started, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as in the example of FIG. 45 (1). The rectangular area 208-S including the area 208c becomes transparent. The movable means 251W is located in the back of the rectangular region 208-S that has become transparent. The movable means 251W shown in FIG. 45 (α) is located at the first position on the upper side of the region on the back side of the rectangular region 208-S, and the eight-generation role 251W1 and the general role 251W2 are in contact with each other. Yes.

  In FIG. 45 (β), the movable means 251W is lowered to the second position on the lower side of the region on the back side of the rectangular region 208-S. In addition, the movable means 251W has the second position where the eight generations 251W1 moves in the second direction (left direction), the general combination 251W2 moves in the third direction (third direction), and the eight generations 251W1. A space between the generals 251W2 is open, and a super-function 251W3 appears between them. In FIG. 45 (α), this super-object 251W3 is located behind the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2, and was not visible, but the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 opened. By this, it advances from the back side, is over the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2, and is located in front of the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2. In other words, the super character 251W3 is disposed between the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro character 251W1, and the general character 251W2. The Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 may start moving in the lateral direction after reaching the second position (when reaching or after reaching). Alternatively, the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 may start moving in the horizontal direction while moving toward the second position, or move in the horizontal direction before moving toward the second position. May start.

  Note that the position in the front-rear direction of the superhero 251W3 may be the same position as the eight generations 251W1 and the generals 251W2, or the position behind the eight generations 251W1 and the generals 251W2. Also good. The super character 251W3 is also movable in the vertical direction, and when the space between the eight generations 251W1 and the general character 251W2 is opened, it is above or below the region on the back side of the rectangular region 208-S. It is located in the position, and is not visible to the player, and after opening, it may move between the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2.

  In addition, the Yatsushiro character 251W1, the general character 251W2, and the super character 251W3 can emit light, and each of them emits light in different display modes, or they can emit light in the same display mode. Alternatively, the Yatsushiro character 251W1 and the general character 251W2 may emit light in the same display mode, and only the super character 251W3 may emit light in different display modes.

  Further, in each of the above effects, the display displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol together with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be displayed on the display device 208N, or may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N instead of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. May be. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be transmissive liquid crystal display devices, or only one of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be a transmissive liquid crystal display device, and the transmission effect may be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device. The display may be performed with three decorative symbol display devices, the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 79. Moreover, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far. That is, each effect shown in FIGS. 46 to 79 is an effect that is performed when the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and can be executed by each effect shown in FIGS. 46 to 79. In the pachinko machine 100, the effect entangled with the transmission effect and the effect means on the back side is the effect described with reference to FIGS.

  46-79 is a figure which shows the modification of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment in steps. 46 to 79, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 is not shown. 46 to 79 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices. However, all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. . In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 46 to 79, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 46 to 79 show the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 have a rectangular shape. It blinks during the fluctuation display of FIG. 1, and lights up in the lighting mode of loss or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of FIG. Further, the special figure 2 4th symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, and lights up the losing state during the stop display of the special figure 2. Or it lights in the lighting mode of jackpot. 46 to 79 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a change icon at the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information regarding games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 46A, “Panda is a Tono-sama teacher” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the Tono-sama character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may not be displayed. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about the character that appears, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. Note that the jackpot expectation degree may be notified according to a display mode of the tutorial display (for example, displayed in blue or displayed in red). In this case, this tutorial display may be a notice display of a position in the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the displayed display is described as a tutorial display. That is, it can be said that the tutorial display part TT1 in this effect example is an area for displaying something. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the display of the decorative symbols in a variable manner and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that configures the hold icon display region, the variable icon display region, and the tutorial display unit TT1. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46A is a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying the stage name and reach name currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 46A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 46A, the “remaining 0 times” character string image reception count display 850 is displayed, and the effect button 136 operation reception count is zero. A stock button image 852 simulating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception count display 850. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 46A, all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. This Tono-sama character may be called a navigation character. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of Tono-sama may be configured to be a display included in the UI part UI3, or to be displayed so that at least a part thereof overlaps the front side of the UI part UI3.

  Further, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can move in the vertical direction and rotate according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by a shutter image. In other words, a display (shutter image display) before another display (display of “in preparation”) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (c), the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a pre-preparation image preview display that is displayed before the display of the pre-preparation image RDY, which will be described later, is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed when the notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes so that the big hit expectation varies depending on the display mode of the shutter image. The display mode of the shutter image may be displayed in only one type. It may be configured not to show the big hit expectation degree only.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (d), the state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preparing image RDY on which characters “preparing” are displayed. In other words, the image RDY in preparation is displayed so as to overlap the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1, and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 46D, the background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, that is, the display mode of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 46D is the default display mode. . Note that the image RDY being prepared can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even when the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the image RDY being prepared It may be possible to change to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. In the case where the shutter image described above can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image being prepared RDY. For example, when the shutter image is red, a red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easy to be displayed). This effect example is configured such that a certain effect (for example, a timer notice, a mini game, or the like) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46E, the UI unit UI3 is shown changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this effect example, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon is easily changed by setting the display mode of the UI unit UI3 to the golden display mode. That is, the UI part UI3 in the golden display mode functions as a pre-reading notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. Note that the UI part UI3 in the gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, or function as a direct pre-read notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. There may be cases. Further, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be in a default mode before the hold icon (pre-read target hold icon) whose display mode has changed is digested, or whether or not the pre-read target change has been determined. It may be configured so as to be in a default mode after a display (for example, display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (f), a ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right part of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. Therefore, when the image RDY being prepared and the character NJ4 of the ninja can be noted. There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (g), the hold change animation has started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first hold icon h11. A state of hitting the hold icon h11 is shown. At this time, the entire first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect EF4, and is in a state of difficulty in visual recognition as compared with a state where the effect EF4 is not covered. The effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46 (g), the effect EF4 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change prior effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from when the display of the hold icon is changed after the display of the ninja character NJ4 is started. May be used as a pending change prior effect display. Moreover, it is good also as a pending | holding change prior effect display only with the display of ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change prior effect display. Note that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Moreover, the structure by which the display of the image RDY in preparation is started after the effect display regarding Ninja character NJ4 may be sufficient. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the image RDY being prepared. Moreover, it may be configured such that the image RDY being prepared is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the pre-read mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, the state in which the hold icon has changed after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 can be expected to appear in the image RDY being prepared. It may function as a prior notification of a different object, such as an icon change and a ready image RDY, or a subject change different from the pre-reading notice and the notice.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (h) shows a state in which the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed with the display mode changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 46 (h) has been changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the crest character 224E may be emitted in red after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in red, or the first crest icon 224E may be emitted in red. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the crest character 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending change animation ends and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. This “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” combination of decorative symbols is a combination of loses, but is also a chance eye combination. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by deriving and displaying the combination of chances. Opportunities are easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the pre-read display mode, but the chances are displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be. Further, it may be configured such that when the chance eyes are displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the chance eyes are not displayed. It should be noted that after the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbol stop display may be performed sequentially, or after the decorative symbol sequential stop display is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be erased. Further, the decorative symbols may be sequentially stopped and displayed at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is deleted. Note that the variation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (i), but the variation icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the display of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (j), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, the Tono-sama character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (k) shows a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The “decoration 4” displayed on the left and right are respectively swaying fluctuations, and the middle symbols are variably displayed at high speed. Note that the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden. However, until the super reach is started, the UI unit UI3 is basically It is not hidden.

  Thereafter, FIG. 46 (l) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Note that the operation of the crest character 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the crest character 224E is started. The operation of the family crest character 224E may be started at the timing when the reach shift display is started. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this effect example, when shifting to a specific super reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, and at least the hold icon is hidden. Moreover, the structure which displays the reach name (title) of SP reach may be sufficient, and you may comprise so that UI part UI3 may be non-displayed in the state in which the reach name of SP reach is displayed at least. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image being prepared RDY, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI part UI3 after the super reach transition is different depending on whether or not the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured to be able to specify a certain notice display or a certain aspect of the effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 may not be hidden even when the swordsman reach is reached.

  FIG. 46 (m) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, only the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the image RDY in preparation, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same position. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the crestman 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the swordsman reach, the swordsman reach may start after the crestman 224E returns to the initial position, or the crestman 224E. The swordsman reach may be started at the timing when returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, and it can also be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Furthermore, in this effect example, it can also be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed (hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (o), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This mini game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, but the mini game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display of the image being prepared RDY is ended and the mini game is started. However, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be ended and the timer notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the determination of success / failure may be displayed suddenly, for example, the characters “iron plate” are displayed without the mini game or the timer notice effect. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is configured by an area divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the effect example shown in FIG. 46 (o)) is the winning area. The hit area is hit with an arrow, and a reliable announcement of the jackpot is made. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area. In a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini games and timer notices, a certain type of mini game and timer notice may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both Configuration 1 and Configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (p), the state where the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown. In addition, you may comprise so that the display which shows the result of a mini game may be displayed by the cut different from the cut shown in FIG.46 (p). It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display part of the mini game may be a certain effect. In the case where a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of “iron plate” may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (q), the characters “iron plate” are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted about 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. . This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display according to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, another notice display according to the result of the notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes zero. In addition, when a timer notice effect is performed, another notice display may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the start of another notice immediately before it reaches 0).

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that at least one example of a plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may be omitted. The same applies to the following drawings.

  FIG. 47 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 46 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, it is illustrated as a continuation of the example of the effect of FIG. 46, but may be an effect performed in another scene, or an effect performed only as a continuation of the example of the effect of FIG. Also good. The same applies to the following drawings. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 47 (a1) to (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (o) and will not be described.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (a4), it is shown that the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 deviates from the target TGT and flies to a different area from the target TGT. That is, a state in which the mini-game as the notice display has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not display the iron plate image TP, and shows that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between failure or success of the mini game is made, it is easier to finally determine and display the jackpot symbol when the mini game is successful. In addition, a timer notice effect may be performed instead of a mini game, for example, a false timer notice effect that displays nothing even when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0 may be displayed. When the countdown is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, a character “chance” is displayed somewhere small) may be performed.

  FIG. 47 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 46 (l). 47 (b1) to FIG. 47 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (b4), the arrow emitted by Tono-sama mini character MC1 hits the target TGT, but shows a state where it is stuck in the non-contact area. In other words, this production example shows that the mini-game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a princess cut-in image HCI on which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed on a background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this production example, if you compare the success of the mini game or the great success, it will be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when it is a great success than when it is a success. .

  FIG. 47 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 46 (l). 47 (c1) to FIG. 47 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (c3), a mini-game different from the mini-game shown in FIG. 46 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is also an example of a notice display that starts after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, the mini game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is started more easily than the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o). The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. In addition, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the mini game shown in FIG. 47 (c3) is started than when the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) is started. However, the mini-game shown in FIG. 46 (o) may be configured such that the big hit symbol is likely to be finally displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol on which the characters “iron plate” are displayed is derived, and a state in which the mini-game is very successful is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and a state in which a notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed is shown.

  46, the mini-game is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 46. In the effect example shown in FIG. 47, the timer notice effect may be performed, or vice versa. . In addition, both timer notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the countdown time may be different.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 48 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 46 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. In FIG. 48 (a1), the change icon h0 is in a red display mode, and accordingly, the family crest character 224E is also in a red light emission mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a2), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. This effect example shows a state in which the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a3), the state where the arrow released by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (a4), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

  As described above, in this production example, the example in which the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY in preparation is shown, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be executed not only during the super reach, but may be configured to be executed even during the super reach. In addition, after the third display is finished in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state. Also good. In addition, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display is finished in the first state may extend over the next change. And after a 3rd display is complete | finished in a 2nd state, a certain notice display (especially a certain production | presentation) may start at least in this 2nd state, and may be complete | finished.

  FIG. 48 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 46 (l). 48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b3), a state in which the timer notice effect is started instead of the mini game is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This timer notice effect is also an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 48 (b3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed when the timer notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, or it may be easier than when the timer notice effect is started. In the event that is started, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily. Note that the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is a certain effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after “0:00” indicating 0 second is obtained as a result of the countdown. , The iron plate image TP) is performed, but after “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, another effect display (for example, “iron plate” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed). Display in a display area that is different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after performing a display capable of specifying a certain effect display or a display related to a certain effect display such as “chance”. You may comprise so that effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Further, the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of the countdown, but displays up to “1” indicating 1 second, or , “00:01” may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a certain effect display such as “iron plate” can be specified in the display area where the timer display has been performed, or “chance” is displayed. After performing such a display related to a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed ( Here, the countdown display may be until “1” is displayed, until just before another effect display is displayed, or until another effect display is displayed. ). The time from when “1” is displayed until the display of another effect display is started is the same (substantially the same) as the time from when “2” is displayed until the display of “1” is started. (That is, it is displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”) or may be different. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as a certain effect display, a display indicating “NEXT” or “continuation” may be displayed as another effect display. In addition, a timer display (for example, “10:00”) is displayed immediately after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, but after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, another display is displayed. (For example, a display indicating that the timer display is counted up from 0 or a display related to the timer display such as “until the next chance increases, after”) is displayed. You may comprise so that another display may not be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b4), as a result of the countdown being performed, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (b5), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect is a notice display of displaying the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In each effect example shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIG. 48 (c1) to FIG. 48 (c3) are effects following FIG. 48 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (c1), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 48 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to gradually become shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed is shown by the display by numbers in the timer display and the display in a display mode other than the numbers. Note that only a decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is first performed, and for example, when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds, a countdown by a timer display may be started. In this case, the decrease rate of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. In addition, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided, each of which may be displayed in a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decrease rate of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decrease rate of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the decreasing speeds thereof are different.

  Further, in this effect example, an effect of extending the execution time of the timer notice effect may be performed. For example, when the effect is extended, the number 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the timer notice time. Moreover, the decreasing speed of the meter may not be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of a certain meter is long. For example, the rate of decrease may be increased from the middle, so that it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Moreover, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant. For example, the rate of decrease may be faster or slower in a state where numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a preliminary announcement effect that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 49 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 46 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. Then, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 49 (a2) to (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. A pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the united animation may be referred to as button production introduction animation or fade-in animation (IN animation). This semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started by being combined. Here, the introduction animation may be included in the button notice effect. The pair of semi-transparent button images 136q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example, the example in which the two translucent button images 136q are combined has been described. For example, an effect in which the four translucent button images 136q are combined may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are displayed. The button image 136a is instantiated and the button notice effect is more easily started when the effect that the four translucent button images 136q are combined is performed than when the effect that the image 136q is combined is performed. It may be. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation. In addition, when a deca button image 136aL, which will be described later, is displayed and a button notice effect is started, a merge animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or by a translucent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL. A coalesced animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (a5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are shown closer together.

  When the combined animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 49 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, a character “press” is displayed together with an animation indicating that the button image 136a is pressed, and the button image 136a is further left below. A time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. The effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button notice effect may be started after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation reception period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button notice effect is started.

  49 (b1) to FIG. 49 (b6) show modifications of the effects shown in FIG. 48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b5). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 48 (b1) to (b3), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 (b4) shows a state in which the above-described combined animation starts when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect has been announced. In addition, even if the timer notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the timer display may be counted down in accordance with the start of the combined animation. According to this, there is a case where the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed can be easily specified. In addition, during the display of the combined animation, the display of the image being prepared RDY may be terminated and the timer notice effect may be started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (b5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be “0:00” after the merge animation is completed, or the timer display may be “0:00” at the timing when the merge animation is completed.

  FIG. 49 (b6) shows a state in which the union animation has succeeded, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, the button notice effect is started, and the operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca button image 136aL is more easily displayed when both the timer notice effect and the united animation are performed than when only one of the timer notice effect and the united animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (c1) is a modification of the effects shown in FIG. 49 (b3) to FIG. 49 (b6). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 49 (b3) to (b4), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 49 (c3), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  If the combined animation is successful, the button notice effect by the big button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 49 (c4). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 49 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 49 (b6), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 49 is also shown for an example in which the image RDY being prepared ends during execution of super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the preparing image RDY ends and the timer notice starts while the introductory animation is displayed.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 50 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 50 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. In this preparing image RDY, the background color is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 50A is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 50A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a red light emission mode is set in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50B, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY in preparation is started. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation other than the super reach is finished.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50 (c), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 (that is, the region where the image RDY being prepared is displayed). ing. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 50C, “90:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. The background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, a state in which the timer notice production is started before the super reach is developed is shown. The timer display that is displayed when the timer notice effect is started is a long time of “90:00”, and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, so that the expectation for the big hit may be improved. Thus, in this effect example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as “90:00”, the time is relatively short such as “10:00”. It is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed with (short time). In this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is likely to be started in a long time in the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 50 (d) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. For this reason, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to visually recognize because the family crest member 224E is overlapped. Also, the family crest character 224E overlaps with a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 50D, the timer display is “30:00”.

  FIG. 50 (e) shows a state in which the above-described coalescence animation is started when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Again, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect is forewarned.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50 (f), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. In this production example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. Note that the reliability of the jackpot may be the same when the timer notice display is the default background color and when the timer background display color is the red background color.

  FIG. 50 (g) shows a state in which the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized and the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed to start the operation acceptance state. Yes. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it is to win.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 51 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a1). This preparing image RDY has a green background and is in a default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 51A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 51 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a3), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is made up of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the winning region. High notice is being made. In this production example, a state in which a mini game is being performed before the transition to super reach is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a4), the state where the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a5), since the mini game has been very successful, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the change icon h0. The notice by is ranked up. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Note that the crest character 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the family crest character 224E emits red light. The change icon h0 may change from a red display mode to a gold display mode after changing to a mode or a gold light emission mode, or the timing at which the change icon h0 changes from a red display mode to a gold display mode Thus, the family crest character 224E may be changed from a red light emission mode to a gold light emission mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation using the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini game is shifted to a state where it cannot be visually recognized using the shutter image. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variation icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at a timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game. However, the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a6), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a7), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state in which no display is performed. Note that when the shutter image is released, the tutorial display may be started, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini-game may be started. Alternatively, a grayed-out display may be performed after the shutter image is released.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 (b1) to 51 (b8), an example will be described in which a mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b1), since one variable display of Special Figure 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is in a red display mode and is displayed as a notice. The hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord of the character is described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 51B1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b2), the state where the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image is shown. Thereby, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b3), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display that is displayed before the display of a mini-game to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, a mini game is started on the tutorial display section TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which the mini game starts is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini game starts without displaying the image RDY in preparation. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 51 (b4) to (b8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 51 (b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 51 (a3) to (a7), and thus the description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that after the mini game is over, explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or grayed out display may be performed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing stepwise display examples in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 52 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (a1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 52 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 52 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 52 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that display (shutter image display) before another display (preliminary display) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain region (tutorial display section TT1). . Note that at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a3), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display that is displayed before the notice display described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a4), a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display made up of the characters “Intense heat” is displayed instead of the image RDY being prepared, the mini game, and the timer notice effect. The notice display of “Intense heat” may be displayed as a result of a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, if the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed as a result, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed. Good. In addition, the notice display of “extreme heat” may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform an effect of closing the tutorial display portion TT1 with a shutter image before performing a notice display such as “Intense heat”.

  52 (b1) to FIG. 52 (b8) show an effect example showing the appearance of the notice icon in the tutorial display section TT1. The effects shown in FIG. 52 (b1) to FIG. 52 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 52 (a1) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 shows a state in which a timer notice notice icon I81 appears to notify that the timer notice effect is performed when the shutter image is released. Thereby, it is foretold that the timer notice effect will be performed. Other notice icons may appear.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out of the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b6), the closing operation using the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b7), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1. In this production example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the state in which the timer notice notice icon I81 is displayed is informed that the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. The image may be deleted when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b8), a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display portion TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 displays a ready image RDY when the shutter image is released. At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (b8), the image RDY in preparation is in a default display mode. This in-preparation image RDY is displayed when the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer notice effect is notified by displaying the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display mode of the image being prepared RDY for notifying the start of the timer preview effect is the same as the display mode of the image RDY being prepared for notifying the start of the mini game. It may be. In addition, a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started without displaying the in-preparation image RDY.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timing of a certain notice display, and the start and end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state It may be the same state.

  FIG. 53 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 46 (l). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 47A1 is the same as the effect shown in FIG. In the effect shown in FIG. 53 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has been developed to super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a2), the duel scene animation continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman. A combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is still displayed. In other words, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is being made. In order to congratulate that it is a big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display manner that emits light in multiple colors.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the timer notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 53 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed, and a notice effect is started. Yes. The display of the character “Go” may or may not be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a8), a state where the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer notice effect is not performed, the jackpot symbol promotion effect may not be started, and when the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. The mode button image 136a may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer notice effect. Further, even when the timer notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (a9), the jackpot of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is obtained from the combination of the ornamental symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. It is notified that the probabilistic big hit has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  53 (b1) to 53 (b4) show a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is started while the duel scene animation is continued in the super reach.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b1) shows that the duel scene animation continues. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b1), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display, and then the countdown is started. Note that the time when the countdown is started may be before the development of super reach, after the development of super reach, or at the timing of development of super reach. It may be before the transition to the state, or after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b2), a button notice effect has been started, and a state in which the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT is shown. . That is, a state in which the final judge effect is started is shown. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b2), the timer display shows “9:00”. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is performed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is shown. Here, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is longer than the length of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 53 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b4), the protagonist wins the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continued, that is, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol may be performed after that. In this effect example, the timer display is not set to “0:00” even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect. This is because, for example, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Conversely, the count may be zero when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a timer notice effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 54A is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (b), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the ready image RDY is shown. In the preparation example image RDY in this effect example, only one type of display mode is prepared, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or a certain effect is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (c), a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the preparatory image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to the timer preview display is shown. . In this effect example, one of the background colors in the timer notice display is selected from a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 54 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In addition, before or after the timer display countdown starts, an effect may be performed in which the background color of the timer notice display changes and the reliability is improved in the middle.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (d), the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. It should be noted that the reach state may be reached after the timer display becomes “0:00”, the timer display may become “0:00” after the reach state is reached, or the timer display is “ The reach state may be reached at the time of “0:00”. In this production example, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a corresponding relationship with the display indicating that the timer display is developed to super reach, and the display always develops to super reach.

  When the timer display countdown is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (e), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a notice display is displayed. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display section TT1 may be in a non-display state after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display portion TT1 is in a non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, there is a case where the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 54 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 54 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (k) shows a state in which the cut-in image HCI of the princess is displayed. This princess cut-in image HCI is displayed suddenly without going through the button notice effect, timer notice effect, or mini-game, and has low reliability, but the button notice effect or timer notice effect or You may make it display as a result of having played the mini game. Further, instead of the princess cut-in image HCI, for example, an iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIG. 55A to FIG. 55C are the same as those in FIG. 54A to FIG.

  FIG. 55D shows a state in which an animation in which a character of Tono-sama as a navigation character throws a bomb is performed. Specifically, the character of Tono-sama displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while screaming “not yet”, and this bomb is displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the first decorative symbol display. Move across device 208L. Then, this bomb heads to the tutorial display portion TT1 where the timer display is being counted down, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display portion TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (e), the state in which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the image RDY in preparation is displayed again is shown. At the time when the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is “10:00”, and the timing at which the button notice effect is started is notified, but when the timer notice effect is interrupted, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is performed than when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is not performed. When an effect that interrupts the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time until the timer counts up by extending the timer display time instead of displaying the image RDY in preparation may be extended. Good or the countdown speed may be slow. In addition, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the future is determined by the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (that is, the start timing of the timer notice). There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (f), a state in which the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 55 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 55 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden.

  FIG. 55 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (k), a state in which the timer notice display is switched from the image RDY in preparation to the timer notice display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display after the restart is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 55 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, the start timing of the timer notice effect is set to an appropriate timing. For example, before the start of super reach, after the start of super reach, before reaching the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the super reach starts. May also be started at the previous timing. In addition, the timer display when the timer notice effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and may be started from “9:00” indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 54, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not developed to super reach, but the timer notice effect is extended, and as a result, a cut-in image displayed during super reach. As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is “0:00” at a good location in super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. In addition, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher as the end timing of the image RDY in preparation (start timing of a certain notice display) is later in a certain fluctuation.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 56A are the same as those in FIG.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b) shows a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the ready image RDY. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed, indicating that the timer notice effect is performed twice. The display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image being prepared RDY, or may be displayed after the image being prepared RDY is displayed. You may make it produce that it is performed twice, thinking that it will be performed once. Instead of displaying “TIMER × 2”, for example, two images RDY in preparation may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (c), a state in which the timer notice display is started by switching from the image RDY being prepared displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to the timer notice display is shown. . The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which has a low reliability. Here, the default display mode in which the background color of the timer notice display is green may be used. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer preview display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (d), the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been consumed and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Further, the display of “TIMER × 2” may be left without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of preparation displays are displayed, a state in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed may be provided.

  When the timer display countdown is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (e), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a notice display is displayed. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative design. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock for the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing. At this time, the ready image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started. However, when the ready image RDY is displayed again, the first ready image RDY is displayed. It is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the decorative design may be overlapped by the preparing image RDY. In this way, there is a case where the image RDY being prepared is temporarily hidden and further overlapped, thereby causing more attention.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 56 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. Display is made and it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the family crest member 224E overlaps with a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is more difficult to see than a state where it is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E. Note that the image RDY in preparation may be overlapped with the family crest actor 224E only when it is enlarged and not overlapped when it is not enlarged. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 56 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. Since the image RDY in preparation is enlarged and displayed, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the swordsman character in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the preparation-in-progress image RDY that is enlarged may be displayed even during execution of super reach. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (k), a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the ready image RDY to the timer preview display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 56 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “3:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown starts. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer preview display is set to be the same as the size of the preparatory image RDY that is displayed in an enlarged manner. The symbols are easy to confirm. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Moreover, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be displayed enlarged. Also, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer notice effect is more reliable than the first timer notice effect, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the timer display time may be longer for the second timer notice effect than for the first timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (l) shows that the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (m) displays the character “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, there may be a case where it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by informing in advance that the timer notice effect will be performed twice.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed as the number of clothes, when one image RDY is digested, all the images RDY being prepared are displayed in the same symbol variation display. Shown to be digested.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (a1) to (a2) are the same as those in FIGS. 53 (a1) to (a2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a3), a state is shown in which the display of the long press effect by the long press effect display is started. In the long press effect display, an area where the Tono-sama character is drawn is arranged above, and an area where the swordsman character is drawn below is arranged. According to the operation amount of the long press operation of the effect button 136 , The size of both areas is displayed so as to change relatively. The ready image RDY is also displayed when the long press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is not started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a4), a state in which acceptance of a long press operation by a long press effect is started is shown. That is, a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started is shown. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the ready image RDY to the timer preview display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display is changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. In FIG. 57 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “5:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been. That is, in this effect example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display coincide. Note that they do not have to match completely. The timer notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state in which a long press operation of the effect button 136 by the player is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is “4:00”.

  FIG. 57 (a6) shows a state in which the player has continued to press the effect button 136 for a long time. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is reduced accordingly, This character is shown to be dominant. This has been suggested to tend to produce advantageous results. At the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a7), the timer display is “0:00”, the countdown is completed, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of “Go” is displayed during the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Also, in the effect display for long press, the area where the Tono-sama character arranged above is further expanded, and the area where the swordsman character arranged below is further reduced, It has been shown that Tonosama's character is by far the dominant. The long press effect may be ended after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, or “Go” may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the character “is displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, or “Go” may be displayed. The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a8), the characters “one blow” are displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button notice effect is started, and the operation is effective. It shows how the period has been set again. That is, this button notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that a plurality (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the set operation valid period may be set again after the operation valid period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously after the operation valid period in the long press effect. May be.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a10), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light-emitting manner so as to congratulate them on the big hit.

  Thus, in this production example, the long-press part finishes the preparation display and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long-press part and the next part or at the end of the long-press part. Thus, “0:00” is shown, and an example in which the button effect performed in the next part is good is shown.

  FIGS. 57 (b1) to (b5) show a state in which a long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but a timer notice effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b1), after the long press effect is displayed by the long press effect display, reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is displayed. A state in which a long press operation is performed is shown. In this example, the timer notice effect is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long press, a Tono-like character arranged above is drawn. The area is reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn is enlarged, indicating that Tono-sama's character is inferior (adversary character swordsman character dominance) . This suggests that it is difficult to achieve advantageous results.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b3), the character “Blow” is displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, thereby providing a button notice effect. It is shown that the operation valid period has been set again. As described above, when the timer notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL is not easily displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is easily displayed. In addition, when the long notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b5), the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4- The combination of the decorative pattern of the decoration “decoration 5—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. Note that the flow may be a case where it does not go through the mini game or the timer notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the button hit effect that can be applied to this embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (a), the button continuous striking effect has been started, and the description “Please turn the meter to MAX within the time by button striking” is performed. A button image 136a is displayed together with the letters “preparation”, and an operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a), before the start of accepting continuous operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period, the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is a display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button striking effect). When the button repeated striking effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been subjected to the variable display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 58A is in a default display form displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (b), a state in which the acceptance of the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started is shown. Specifically, the character “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is changed to the character “start”, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, so that the operation effective period is started. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can also be said that the button repeated effect (the main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed in accordance with the passage of time from the operation effective period, and on the right side of the button image 136a, A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (c), “5” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. When the countdown in the countdown display is completed, there is a possibility that a certain notice effect is performed. Therefore, it can be said that the countdown effect by the countdown display corresponds to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 58 (d) shows a state in which the player has started a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (d), “4” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there are four seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 58 (e), the player continuously operates the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the operation amount meter MT11 has one red memory according to the number of repeated operations. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (e), “3” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there are three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 58 (f) shows that the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L shows a state where three memories of the operation amount meter MT <b> 11 are displayed in red. Has been. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (f), “1” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that one second is left until the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 58 (g) shows a state in which the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “0”, the operation valid period ends, and the player performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red three, that is, it is indicated that the button striking effect has failed. The effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, but the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation effective period ends, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button repeated strike effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (h) displays "Sorry ..." to notify that the button repeated strike effect has failed. In this example, in a pachinko machine that can execute a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 59 (a), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 59 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 59 (a), a first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The function of the first image RDY being prepared is the same as that of the image RDY being prepared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 59A is in a default display mode displayed in blue. In this example, the second image RDY is displayed above the first image RDY1, and a plurality of images are displayed at the same time. The first preparation image RDY1 and the second preparation image RDY2 are each provided with a corresponding effect (such as a timer notice effect or a mini game). These images in preparation (the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2) function as pre-reading notices. In addition, any of the images being prepared has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed after the other image is displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 59 (a), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 59B shows a state in which the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 59A is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. To do. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols has been started. Note that the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these images being prepared are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (c), the first preliminary image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. Note that the background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display is “5:00”, and it is reported that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this effect example, when one of a plurality of images in preparation is activated (digested) and the effect is started, all other images in preparation are digested. Note that the images in preparation are all digested in one symbol variation display, but the notice icon may be carried over until the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 59D shows a state in which the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the characters “Go” are displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (f), the characters “Go” are deleted together with the display area, and the second image RDY2 being slid downward is moved to the position of the tutorial display section TT1. Image moving animation is being made in preparation. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon described above with reference to FIG. It may be a character. In addition, in this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may start after the preceding start notice effect starts, or the advance start notice effect may start after the image moving animation in preparation starts, The image moving animation in preparation may start at the timing when the preceding start notice effect starts. Further, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 59 (f) overlaps the second image RDY2 being prepared, but may be overlapped with the second image RDY2 being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. Has been. At this time, the entire variation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the state is difficult to visually recognize compared to the state where the effect EF4 is not covered.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display form to a red display form, and the change notice is started.

  FIG. 59 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and after reaching the reach state, the state shifts to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the second image RDY2 in preparation. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  FIG. 59 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is continuously maintained. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (k), the second preliminary image RDY2 is switched to the timer warning display, and the timer warning effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 59 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. Note that the timer notice display is a default display mode at the start of display, and there is a case where a promotion display such as a change to a golden background color is performed after the display is started (for example, after the countdown is started). Also good.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (m) displays the character “Go” instead of the timer display and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (n), an iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of effects by explanation display applicable to the present embodiment in stages. The effect shown in FIG. 60 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 46 (a), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is Tono-sama's master” to “Tosama is Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched, the above-described opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanation displays. In this effect example, in one symbol variation display, when the explanation display is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed.

  60 (b1) to 60 (b3) illustrate a state in which opening / closing display using a shutter image is performed when the explanation display is switched. The effects shown in FIGS. 60 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (b), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display portion TT1 based on the shutter image is completely closed, and an explanation display of “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed. The state of being done is shown. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preview display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. Although it was expected that the notice display would be started by such an effect, the display of the shutter image could be opened and closed by disappointing the player because the explanation display was made without the notice display being started. You may be able to have expectations.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIGS. 61 (a1) to (a3) show another example of effects following FIG. 46 (e). The effects shown in FIGS. 61 (a1) to (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to (g), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (a3), the effect EF4 is deleted, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains the default display mode. . In this way, a failure effect in which the display mode does not change even when the pending change animation described above with reference to FIG. 46 is performed may be performed. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the pending change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the pending icon changes varies depending on the characters appearing in the pending change animation.

  In the above-described pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI part UI3. The portion UI3 may not overlap. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a1), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 62A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 62 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a2), a state in which a roulette effect as a mini game is started is shown. In this roulette effect, a circular roulette wheel RR is divided into three equal sections. A cocoon region is arranged above the three sections, a princess region is arranged at the lower left, and a little princess region is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, each region is displayed in a flashing manner by blinking in red, and a notice display corresponding to the region that is finally lit in red is prepared. It should be noted that the symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation-in-progress display or the like ends may be the same or different. In a configuration in which a display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed may be the same as the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, a state in which all areas are lit in red is shown. That is, it is informed that a notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, a notice display corresponding to the princess character, and a notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character are prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a4), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when a preparatory image is displayed, the character is displayed at a position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a5), the Chibi princess character CHM moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that a certain notice display overlaps with another notice display. Thereby, it is informed that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Chibi princess starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a6), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the princess Chibi character CHM casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH is a notice display by changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a7), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a8), display is started in such a manner that the frog character GII vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a9) shows that the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the spear character GII is displayed. Has been. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol with the characters “Intense heat” is derived, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit. Yes. In other words, the change notice is made by deriving the characters “Intense Heat” from the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect that changes the display mode of something, but an effect that makes a big hit announcement.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a11), display is started in such a manner that the princess character HME vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME starts. Since the princess character HME is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3, the display of the UI part UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a12), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the region where the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed in the area where the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. When the result of the countdown is “0:00”, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 62 (a12), “30:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 to notify that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that an effect similar to the display of “Go” shown in FIG. 59 (m) is performed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a14), a super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Although not shown, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach. However, at least one image may be digested after the development of super reach. For example, an iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini game or a timer notice effect may be performed.

  FIG. 62 (b1) shows a state in which only the eyelid area of the three areas is lit in red in the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 62 (a2). In other words, only the notice display corresponding to the frog character is prepared among the notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character. Informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the heel is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only a mini game by the drum DRM is performed.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 63 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a3), but “× 2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and below the third preparing image RDY3, two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed. Note that when a plurality of effects by the samurai character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed on one image being prepared. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, this can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess characters HME. Conversely, a single character may be used to display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a3), one of the two Chibi princess characters CHM1 moves upward and appears in the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. The overlapping state is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the princess Chibi character CHM1 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a4), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the Princess Chibi character CHM1 casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display is started due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of the princess Chibi.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a5), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a6), the other Chibi princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It shows how it overlaps with the part. Thereby, it is informed that the second notice display corresponding to Princess Chibi character CHM2 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a7), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the Princess Chibi character CHM2 casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variation icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variation icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH2.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a8), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display form of the gold notice, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIG. 63 (b1) to FIG. 63 (b4) show another effect example following FIG. 63 (a3). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 63 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 63 (a4), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (b2), after the object cast by the princess Chibi character CHM1 reaches the variation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the dark display BL in which the entire display screen is darkened is displayed. The portion where the effect EF7 was displayed shines in white, and the display in such a manner that the light extends horizontally from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkness of the display screen. It may be. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some images in preparation are temporarily hidden. You may make it do. As described above, the state where the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. In this production example, the first state where the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state where the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 are referred to as the first state. From the state to the fourth state, it may be the second state after becoming the first state again, may be the second state from the first state, There may be a case where the first state changes to the fourth state and then the second state.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (b3), the state where the light of the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Thereafter, when the dark display is completed, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 63 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 63 (a5), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 63 (c1) to FIG. 63 (c3) show another effect example following FIG. 62 (a6). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 63 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a7), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (c2), display is started in a manner in which the character GII of the heel vibrates, and “Go” is displayed in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed. A character is displayed to notify that a mini game is started. It should be noted that the display of “Go” may start after the heel character GII starts vibrating, or the heel character GII may start vibrating after the display of “Go” starts. The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the samurai character GII starts to vibrate. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (c3), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the frog character GII is displayed. Has been. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the region where the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed is enlarged and moved to the approximate center of the display screen, and the effect due to the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area where the image being prepared is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after “Go” is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without displaying “Go”. . Further, it may be more likely that the mini game will be a big hit than the case where the mini game is enlarged and displayed. Note that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same region, the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand. There may be an effect.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on the right effect display may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be made on the display device 2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64A, the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 64 (a). In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 64A is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 64A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into left and right parts, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, “Chibi princess is in SP reach with annihilation” is displayed, and Chibi princess Musou directing is performed with the mission of annihilating a large number of children. In the display area CUR, “Tono is going to SP reach with victory” is displayed, and the drinking comparison is performed between the niece and Tono-sama and the mission is that Ton-sama wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, it is configured to shift to Super Reach when at least one of the missions in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the drinking comparison production is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. Has been. In addition, after the Chibi Hime Musou production is started, the drinking comparison production may be started, after the Drinking Comparison production is started, the Chibi Hime Musou production may be started, or both productions start simultaneously May be. Further, in this production example, when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, it may be a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (c), a state in which the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 is shown during the execution of both the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect. Yes. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (d), a state where an arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the characters “chance” are displayed in the left-hand notice display area CUL in which the Chibi princess Musou effect is performed is displayed. Thus, it is notified that the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed has been easily achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area in which the notice display is performed do not coincide with each other, and it may be possible to improve the interest by giving the player a sense of incongruity. . The chance up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance is increased in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. A cut-in image WUI may be displayed. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed when the mini game is completed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (f), the state is shown in which the child is completely annihilated and the mission is achieved in the Chibi Hime Musou effect displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (g), the character “completely annihilated” is displayed along with the indication of Princess Chibi in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the Princess Chibi Musou effect has been achieved. Is informed. In the right notice display area CUR, the drinking comparison effect continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (h), the state that the lord won the bowl and the mission was achieved in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right notice display area CUR is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (i), the word “Victory” is displayed together with the display of Tono-sama in the right notice display area CUR, informing that the mission in the drinking comparison effect has been achieved. Has been.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (j), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was achieved, and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production was achieved, so Princess Chibi appeared as a friend of Tonama. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production fails, it shifts to Swordsman Reach, but Princess Chibi does not appear, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production is achieved, and the drinking comparison production If you fail to complete the mission, move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect, the contents of the effect to be developed afterwards differ depending on the success or failure of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes in which the characters “chance” and the princess character are displayed. As a result, although the reliability of the jackpot is improved, it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not a notice display started via a mini-game or timer notice effect that was started from the image RDY being prepared. ing.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 in stages. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 65A to 65B are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 64A to 64B, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (c), a state is shown in which both effects of the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect are performed. In this effect example, the display of the image RDY in preparation is continued, and the mini game has not yet started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 65 (c) to FIG. 65 (e). In FIG. 65 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 65 (f) to FIG. 65 (j) are performed. 65 (f) to FIG. 65 (j) are different from the effects shown in FIG. 64 (f) to FIG. 64 (j) in that the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Since it is the same except for it, explanation is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (k), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared is terminated, and a notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that it will start.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (l), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (m), a state in which the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 66 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 62 (a1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a2), a “reach when caught” display is performed, and a state in which a chase effect is started in which Tono-sama catches Echigoya is started. Yes. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a3), the state that Tono-sama is close to Echigoya is shown. On the other hand, in the sub-window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a4), Tono-sama captured Echigo-ya and the mission was achieved. Thereby, it will be notified that it will reach. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that the reach is being prepared. Thereby, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display occurs.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the chasing effect is ended, and the main display displayed in the sub-window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the “decoration 4” is reached. The situation is shown. In this production example, it is indicated that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase production. In addition, when displaying the main display in full screen, it may be performed by enlarging the subwindow WP3 (wipe display), or may be switched and displayed. Further, when the main display becomes a full screen display, the image RDY in preparation may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  66 (b1) to FIG. 66 (b2) show another example of effects related to the display of the subwindow during the execution of the chasing effects shown in FIGS. 66 (a1) to (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has the variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1), a first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. Further, the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 66 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 64A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (b2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 of the two images RDY1 and RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3 in the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is prepared. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, there are cases where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this effect example, the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions that do not overlap each other, but the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3. You may make it overlap.

  66 (c1) to 66 (c2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 66 (b1) to 66 (b2). The effect shown in FIG. 66 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 66 (b1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (c2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 66 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, among the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the subwindow WP3 as the main display is displayed in the subwindow WP3, and the first image RDY1 displayed at the position where it has been displayed is deleted.

  FIG. 66 (d1) to FIG. 66 (d2) show the display mode of the image being prepared when the background display is displayed with an inclination. The effect example shown in FIG. 66 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4 and a shake vision effect is performed in which the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees counterclockwise. The situation is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 67 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and a character “A” indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a3), a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini-game is started, “Striking” is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display indicating that the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is performed. In other words, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a4), a state in which the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball toward the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a6), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  67 (b1) to 67 (b8) describe another example of the step-up notice. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 67 (a1) to (a2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and raises the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. In this way, the display is shown. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter “B” indicating the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this production example, it is easier for the mission to succeed when the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini game is played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, when the mini game succeeds in the second step-up display unit SUB, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed, rather than in the case where the mini game succeeds in the first step-up display unit SUA.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b4), a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini game is started, the message “Cup in” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of Tono is putting is performed. In other words, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a pad.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b5), the state where the Tono-sama character puts and the golf ball moves toward the cup is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b6), the golf ball is cupped in and the state where the mission is achieved is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . It is reported that the image RDY in preparation has a red background color and high reliability of the big hit.

  When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, the example of success in the bowling chance game and the golf game has been described. For example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins have not collapsed is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a mission failure may be notified by displaying a state in which the player has not cuped in. Also, in this production example, the Tono-sama character appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when a princess character appears, the Tono-sama character appeared. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 67 (a1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. That is, in this effect example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain item in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be deleted after the first step-up display unit SUA starts displaying, the first step-up display unit SUA may be displayed after the explanation display is erased, The explanation display may be deleted at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA starts to be displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 68 (a3) to (a5) are performed. 68 (a3) to FIG. 68 (a5) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 67 (a3) to FIG. 67 (a5), and no explanation is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and The description is omitted because it is the same except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a6), it is continuously shown that the mission has been achieved.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. Note that the explanation display and the change icon h0 remain hidden.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a8), the change icon h0 is displayed again in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the change notice and redisplayed. Note that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be routed through a mini game, a timer notice effect, or the like.

  68 (b1) to 68 (b3) show other display modes of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 68 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a1), but differs in that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (b2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed in spite of the hold icon h11 moving upward in the UI part UI3. Therefore, the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display part SUA. The situation is shown. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move even if the UI unit UI3 moves.

  In FIG. 68 (b3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of “Make Strike” is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 69 (a). Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 69A has a default display mode displayed in blue. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a), the state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 69 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 69B shows a state in which the family crest member 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (c), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 frames out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 69D to 69F, the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the change icon h0 is not out of frame with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 69 (f).

  FIG. 69 (g) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (h), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (i), a state in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (j), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and faces the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (l), a notification is made that the image RDY being prepared appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is done. Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Further, FIG. 69 (l) shows a state where the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame. At this time, the image RDY in preparation overlaps with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 69 (m), at least one image is displayed until the frame out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), a first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 70A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue. Moreover, in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L shown to FIG. 70 (a1), a mode that it transfers to a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. In this production example, an example is shown in which the first in-preparation image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 70 (a2) shows a state in which the crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a3), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 frames out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a4) to (a6), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the change icon h0 and the first image RDY1 in preparation are not out of frame with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 70 (a6), the display state of the change icon h0 is lowered. The first display image RDY1 is maintained, and the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  FIG. 70 (a7) shows that the swordsman reach has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a8), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted up and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed without overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. Note that the first image RDY1 in preparation may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be lifted, and the first preparing image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a9) shows a state in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first image RDY1 being prepared, and is more difficult to see than when not overlapped. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a10), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and faces the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of images in preparation are displayed in a certain area and a new image in preparation is displayed, the new image in preparation is displayed in another area. Can do. Note that the third preparatory image RDY3 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a12) to (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame.

  FIG. 70 (b1) to FIG. 70 (b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 70 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 70 (a3). Also, the effect shown in FIG. 66 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 70 (a4), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 70 (b2), a state in which the swordsman reach is started after the UI part FO animation is completed is shown. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the change icon h0 is placed is maintained in a state where the display position is lowered. That is, even if the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a pseudo-continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 71A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 64A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, with “decoration 6” on the left symbol and “decoration 7” on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. Note that the middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a3), the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed, and the pseudo continuous symbol composed of Tono-sama's symbols is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a4), a state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a5), the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation that produces whether or not the pseudo-ream starts is started. When the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI part UI3 leaves the frame by the UI part FO animation, leaving the change icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol design is started. The UI part FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. Moreover, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is completed. As described above, in this production example, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo-continuous production or when a pseudo-series is established. When the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol expands in the horizontal direction as shown in FIGS. 71 (a5) to (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol further expands, overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to visually recognize. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 71 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbols are further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Is displayed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part thereof is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. The pseudo-continuous symbols are also overlapped with the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It is also overlapped with the Tono-sama character displayed at 208N and the second reserved number display. At this time, the family crest character 224E starts to rise and overlaps a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (a8), the family crest member 224E rotates, and a sound “don” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed.

  FIG. 71 (a9) shows a state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been. It should be noted that the UI part FI animation may be started after the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation has ended, the UI part FI animation may be started before the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation. The UI part FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. Note that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to fluctuations in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-pseudo-continuous symbols-decoration 7”, and then the second variation of the decorative symbols is displayed by the pseudo-ream. The

  71 (b1) to 71 (b3) show an example of display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Since the effect shown in FIG. 71 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 71 (a1), the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 71 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are darkly displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It shows a state in which the approximate center shines and light rays extend from there to the left and right. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this effect example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during the dark display by the stechen effect. In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the image RDY being prepared is not displayed in the dark display by the stechen effect is also shown. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may end and a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started.

  FIG. 71 (b3) shows a state in which the stechen effect is finished. In this effect example, after the stechen effect is ended, the same display as before the start of the stechen effect is performed. That is, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen effect in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of button notice effects applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (a), the UI part UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part UI3. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. A tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 72A has a notice display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (a) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. This production example shows an example in which the UI part UI3 is displayed even during execution of the swordsman reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are deleted, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (b), a united animation is started, and a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right sides of the display screen. Is moving. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 72 (c), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. FIG. 72 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. It should be noted that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, or the effect at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 72 (d), the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed to indicate the operation acceptance state. It shows how it started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during a period in which the button notice effect is performed by at least the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the variation icon h0, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 73 (a1), “Panda is a master of lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a1), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. Stopped display with a combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the special figure 1 4th pattern 284a1 is also lit in a display mode of loss. In addition, UI part UI3 shown to FIG. 71 (a1) is set as the notification display aspect displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 64A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 73 (a2) shows a state in which the symbol is being stopped and displayed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI decorative wipe display unit WP4 that covers the entire UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a3). The Tono-sama character riding on the motorcycle enters the frame from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 73 (a3) to (a5), is shown to sprint toward the right end. . That is, in this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the preview display mode to the default display mode, and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 displays the production. In some cases, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 can be naturally changed. For example, when the display is lost due to the super reach effect and the display is returned to the original display, the entire display screen may be covered with the wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed on the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (a6), a state is shown in which the effect of the Tono-sama character in the UI part wipe display part WP4 has been completed and the UI part wipe display part WP4 has been deleted. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is deleted and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the base on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes h1 and becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed, and the explanation display is changed before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In this example, the UI part wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the UI wipe display unit WP4 is displayed while the image RDY being prepared is displayed, the image RDY being prepared is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the image RDY being prepared is displayed soon. The mini-game or timer notice effect may be started after finishing.

  FIG. 73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b4) show examples of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 73 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is displayed in gold and is in the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 is in the default display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 73 (b1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 73 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 73 (b1), “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 73 (b2) to (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, the swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves his line of sight from the top of the head to the feet. It shows how the swordsman character is scrolled. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (b4), after the swordsman character's feet are displayed, the swordsman character is scroll-displayed in such a manner that the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the top of the head. That is, a continuous scroll display between the top of the swordsman character and the feet is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 shows an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling.

  In this production example, for example, when the explanation display is not resumed or when only the hold icon is hidden (the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display using the UI unit UI3 is used. It can be said that an example of performing is shown.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing step by step another example of effects that can be applied to this embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 to which the example of production shown in FIG. 74 can be applied can be assigned, for example, to a first special figure start opening and a second special figure start opening per start opening, and in a normal gaming state There are so-called MAX 8 machines (sometimes referred to as 8 storage order machines) that can hold 8 variable displays. Here, a description will be given using a MAX8 machine as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 74 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. Four hold icons are arranged in front and back in a staggered arrangement so that eight hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (a1), a total of seven variable displays in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are held, and therefore seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 74 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is provided. It has been broken. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 74A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 74 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

  In addition, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 74 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port, and there are a total of eight suspensions of special figures 1 and 2. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon h0 that are already displayed. It is shown that the display mode is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the heel imitating the face of the heel. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to a special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “pong” to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, an example of an effect that changes the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 all at once when the reserve is full is shown. In this example effect, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the bag may be notified.

  FIG. 74 (b1) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 74 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed. According to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (b1). It is informed that four are reserved and three special figures 2 are reserved.

  FIG. 74 (b2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port and a total of eight special figure 1 and special figure 2 holds have been put on hold. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held, four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120. Will output a voice “Pong” to notify that the hold is full.

  FIG. 74 (b3) shows a situation where the super reach is lost and the swordsman reach is finished, and the display returns to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the swordsman reach became full during the performance of the swordsman reach, the UI part UI3 was changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the change icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the bag. In this production example, when the UI unit UI3 is hidden by the super reach, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed. The example of the effect which changes a display mode is shown.

  FIG. 74 (c1) to FIG. 74 (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. 74 (b1) to FIG. 74 (b3). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (b1) to (b2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 74 (c3) shows a situation in which the super reach is lost, the swordsman reach is finished, and the display returns to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Moreover, in this production example, while the execution of the production of the swordsman reach has become full, the display of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full fill is achieved. A character “MAX” indicating that it has been displayed is displayed above the change icon h0. Thereafter, the symbols are fixedly displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are not changed.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 74 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and changes. All of the icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed from the default display mode to the bag display mode. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 74 (c4), the decorative symbol variable display is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and the explanation is displayed.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing step by step another example of effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

  75 (a1) to FIG. 75 (a3) and FIG. 75 (b1) to FIG. 75 (b2), the UI part UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display part TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrally displayed on the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 75 (a1) has a reserved icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit UI4. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 75 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage, and performs various actions in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224F and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (a2) shows a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (a3), the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth image RDY4 being prepared. The fourth preparatory image RDY4 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Thus, in this effect example, an example in which an image in preparation is displayed in each of a plurality of explanation display portions is shown.

  FIG. 75 (b1) to FIG. 75 (b2) are diagrams illustrating another effect example following FIG. 75 (a1). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 75 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 75 (a2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display apparatus 208L shown in FIG. 75 (b2), the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed on the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is continuously displayed. A state of being displayed at a position shifted upward is shown. That is, a state where the image being prepared overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed is shown. Such a display mode can also be applied to the tutorial display unit TT4.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (c1), in response to the line display by Princess Chibi's character CH1, the line display “here is” is displayed in the balloon portion TT3, and the conversation notice continues. Here, the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 may be overlapped by the first decorative symbol. Further, the frog character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol. The spear character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or after the spear character GY1 is displayed, the balloon part TT3 may be displayed, or the balloon part TT3 is displayed. A spear character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the spear character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the spear character GY1 is displayed. Also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the frog character GY1 is displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c2), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the crest character 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after movement, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest actor 224E. A state of appearing above is shown. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT2 and overlaps the balloon part TT2, but does not overlap the balloon part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the speech notice (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended hold display frame FL1 may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, but the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands in stages.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper portion of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is more difficult to view than when the crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

  FIG. 75 (c5) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 75 (c6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, and the effect EF2 is displayed in which a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 explodes. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. Thereby, a notice may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and the player may have a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 75 (c7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . This in-preparation image RDY has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY in preparation, a timer notice display may be displayed and the timer notice effect may be started, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. .

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icons h11 to fourth hold icons h14. The hold icon h12 is a display mode of a pre-reading notice (for example, a display mode that lights up in blue), and the other hold icons are set as default display modes. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT7 displays the image RDY in preparation. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display section ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the family crest character 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (a2), the hold icon display area is shown in an enlarged manner. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is outside the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the image RDY being prepared displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display part TT7 is separated and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the image RDY in preparation may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a3), the emission color of the family crest member 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase a sense of expectation for the big hit for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the ready image RDY is displayed in a manner in which it is accommodated in the tutorial display portion TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

  FIGS. 76 (b1) to (b2) show other forms of the production examples shown in FIGS. 76 (a1) to (a5). Since the effect shown in FIG. 76 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 76 (a1), the description thereof is omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 76 (b2) shows a state in which the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 76 (a2). At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 76 (b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 76 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  Next, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 79 shows a display example of a ball removal error display. FIG. The display position of the warning message for the ball removal error (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal error display”) is a fixed location, but it is possible to appropriately set which position is the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. Note that this ball removal error display is erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated and the lower pan full state is eliminated and the ball removal error is eliminated. Moreover, although the example of an effect shown below shows about the example of a ball removal error display, it is applicable also to the door open error etc. which generate | occur | produce when the front frame door 106 is opened, for example. Further, when a ball removal error display is being performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  77 (a1) to FIG. 77 (a2) show examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIGS. 46 (c) to 46 (d), for example. Has been. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (a1) shows a state in which a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 that is closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed, and it is urged to produce a game ball stored in the lower plate and cancel the full state of the lower plate.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the image RDY in preparation is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball removal display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image RDY in preparation are simultaneously viewed and the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 77 (b1) to (b2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 48 (c1) to (c2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (b1), a state in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the remaining time display meter MT4 is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display becomes shorter, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4 is easily visible. Thereby, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 are viewed at the same time, the display of the remaining time meter MT4 may be finished to give a chance to remove the ball.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 77 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 49 (b4) to (b5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the enemy swordsman character, but does not overlap the translucent button image 136q related to the combined animation. No appearance is shown. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the combined animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q comes close, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the united animation by looking at the display without the ball. In some cases, it is possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation are viewed at the same time, and when the combined animation is displayed, a chance to remove the ball is given.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 77 (d1) to (d2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 56 (f) to (g). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (d2), the ready image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started, but the ready image RDY is displayed again. Sometimes, the enlarged image RDY is displayed compared to when the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the preparatory image RDY is overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped the tutorial display portion TT1 until now. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the enlarged image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed, a chance to remove the ball may be given.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 77 (e1) to (e2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 57 (a5) to (a6). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn, but the Tono-like character is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (e2), as a result of the player's long pressing operation of the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the character is drawn. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character who see the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by observing the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the superiority and inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character are simultaneously observed. May be possible.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 77 (f1) to (f2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 59 (e) to (f). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (f1), a state where a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the second image RDY2 being prepared is shown. On the other hand, there is no overlap with the display area in which the characters “Go” are displayed (the display area in which the first image RDY being prepared is displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (f2), the character “Go” is erased together with the display area, the second image RDY2 being slid down, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. An image moving animation is being prepared. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second image being prepared RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 may not overlap the ninja character NJ4. Accordingly, it may be possible to notice the display of the second ready image RDY2 and the display of the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1, the second image RDY2 being prepared, and the ninja character NJ4 can be seen simultaneously, and when the second image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 are displayed, a chance to remove the ball can be given. There is a case.

  78 (a1) to FIG. 78 (a2) show, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 62 (a3) to FIG. 62 (a4). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the princess Chibi character CHM. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps a part of the plurality of images in preparation. Thereby, it may be possible to notice at least one of a plurality of images in preparation (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at a plurality of images in preparation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images in preparation are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image in preparation is finished, a ball removal is given.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 78 (b1) to (b2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 62 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the spider is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. In this case, unlike the example of the effect shown in FIG. 78 (a2), the image being prepared corresponding to a certain effect (Princess Chibi's character CHM) is not displayed. There is no overlap.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 78 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 (b) to (e). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (c1), a state in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the approximate center of the left notice display area CUL in the effect shown in FIG. 64 (b) is shown. Yes. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 64 (e), the mini game is executed based on the image RDY being prepared displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result of the success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut-in image WCI. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished, the ball removal is given.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 78 (d1) to (d2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 66 (b1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (d2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, a sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 78 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 of the two images RDY1 and RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3 in the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is prepared. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 78 (e1) to (e2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 (d1) to (d2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (e1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen in the effect example shown in FIG. 66 (d1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (e2), the background display is reduced to about ¾, and the reduced background image is tilted about 10 degrees counterclockwise, and a shake vision effect is performed. The state of being broken is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display position or tilting even when the shake vision effect is performed. At this time, since the background image is inclined, the blank portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the sphere removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with this blank portion. For example, when the sphere removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the blank portion, and a part thereof It may be difficult to see.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 78 (f1) to (f2) are, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 67 (a1) to (a2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (f1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display portion TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 67 (a1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 78 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised from below the UI unit UI3, and is displayed as being lifted up from the UI unit UI3. Has been. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI part UI3 is enlarged, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part UI3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by watching the UI unit UI3 rise. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  79 (a1) to FIG. 79 (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIGS. 69 (d) to 69 (e). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 69 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, before the UI part UI3 is out of frame by the UI part FO animation, the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the UI part UI3.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (a2), the UI unit UI3 is shown out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. In this effect example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 to the UI part UI3 is canceled while the UI part UI3 is out of the frame by the UI part FO animation.

  79 (b1) to FIG. 79 (b2) show an example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the example shown in FIGS. 73 (a3) to (a5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 73 (a3), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part wipe display part WP4. It is shown. At this time, the character does not overlap the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI part wipe display part WP4.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (b2), a state where the character on the motorcycle moves to the right end portion of the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is shown. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI part wipe display part WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 can be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI portion wipe display portion WP3. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball display error display ERR1 and the effect display on the UI part wipe display unit WP3 are simultaneously viewed and the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is finished.

  79 (c1) to FIG. 79 (c2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 76 (b1) to FIG. 76 (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen in the effect example shown in FIG. The wrapping is shown. Note that there is no overlap with other displays.

  Thereafter, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 79 (c2) shows a state in which the hold icon display area is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 79 (c2), the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 79 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the sub-window WP3, and the other part overlaps the hold icon display area. Note that the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the display position is maintained. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged by viewing the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area change effect in the hold icon display area are simultaneously viewed, and when the change effect of the hold icon display form in the hold icon display area is finished, an opportunity to remove the ball is given. May be possible.

  The production examples shown in FIG. 79 (d1) to FIG. 79 (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d1) is a display mode in which the display “Please remove the ball” is surrounded by a square frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d2) is the same as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 79 (d2), and the display of “Please remove the ball” is outlined on the black background. It is set as the aspect represented by these.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described. Needless to say, even the pachinko machine 100 having only one is applicable. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, for example, an encapsulated pachinko machine shown in FIG. 266 described later and a slot machine shown in FIG. 267.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One display among the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a change effect display (hold change) of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to (g). Etc.)
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a holding icon in a red display mode shown in FIG.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a ready image RDY shown in FIG. 46 (d),
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (p)],
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to (h), a ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by
The third display may be started in the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (d), preparation is being performed in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed. The display of the image RDY has started, etc.]
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (d) to FIG. 46 (n), the UI The preparation-in-progress image RDY that has been displayed in the state in which the part UI3 is displayed has been displayed in the state in which the UI part UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIG. 46 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q)] may be started [for example, FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed],
The certain effect is a notice relating to the symbol change display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q) is a notice display informing that the jackpot is confirmed, etc.]
The first state may be followed by the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (l) to FIG. 46 (m), when the shift to the swordsman reach is displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.]
The first state is one of states where a hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed. Icon is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping the third display [for example, FIG. 46 ( As shown in d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display part TT1 in the UI part UI3, etc.]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 46 (d) And the display position of the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 46 (m) are the same],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [e.g., a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 46 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the big hit symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be fixed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of prefetching]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [e.g., a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 46 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is easy to start [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46 (e) is displayed in a gold display mode, a red display mode hold icon is easily displayed. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, “at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

“The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap. [For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI part UI3. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, super reach (swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (q)). The state before) is started]
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG. 46 (q) is being executed or the like]. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (p)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q), etc.]
The certain notice display is a notice for notifying that the certain effect is started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. Etc. foreseeing the display of the iron plate image TP by piercing the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain notice display may be for notifying only that a certain effect is started, or may be for notifying that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain notice display may be a notice that a certain effect is started, or may not be a notice that a certain effect is started.

  Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

  In addition, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 46 ( i) to the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 46 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be deleted only before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display may be displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The first display that is started may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display that is started. In addition, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display starts in a certain symbol variation display. The displayed first display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, “the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a4), the characters“ hot ”in the tutorial display portion TT1. Etc.) may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [for example, a big button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is prepared. The middle image RDY is displayed after the display is started, etc.]
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. Image TP is displayed]
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY in preparation Is displayed before the display of the big button image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 49 (b4) to FIG. 49 (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b4) to FIG. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, a variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 56 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), there are cases where two images RDY1 and RDY2 being prepared are displayed, etc.]
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other is changed [for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the image RDY in preparation is displayed in an enlarged manner. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display [For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the enlarged image RDY in preparation overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is completed in one symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 56 (b) to FIG. As shown, the two images in preparation RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display [for example,“ Panda is a master of the panda ”displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 46 (a)”. Explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 46D, the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [characters related to the change icon display mode of the hold icon display (hold change prior effect display), for example, FIG. 46 (f) to FIG. 46 (g). Ninja character NJ4 etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, for example, a hold icon in the red display mode shown in FIG. 46 (h),
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [preparing display, for example, an image RDY being prepared shown in FIG.
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the mini game display shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (p), or FIG. 48 (b3) to FIG. 48 (b4). Is a display indicating that it is waiting for the start of display of the timer notice effect, etc.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [the hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in a pre-read notice display mode. For example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to 46 (h), the first hold icon is displayed after the hold change prior effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.]
The third display may be started in the first state. [Preparation display starts in the state where the hold icon is displayed. For example, FIG. 46 (d) As shown, the display of the image RDY in preparation is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed]
The third display that has started displaying in the first state is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state in which the hold icon is displayed. The display is completed when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 46D to 46N, the display is started when the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The ready image RDY has been displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the preparation display is completed in the display state, a mini-game or a timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (n) to (o), the preparation image RDY is displayed. After finishing, the mini-game display is started with the UI unit UI3 being hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 48 (b1) to 48 (b4), the image RDY being prepared is displayed. After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (c4), etc.] [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice starts, for example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (o) to (q) As shown in FIG. 49, when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 49 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button announcement effect by deca button 136aL is started],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The second state may be entered after the first state [the transition from the state where the hold icon can be displayed to the state where the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. 46. As shown in (l) to (m) in the figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon can be displayed to the hidden state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed (for example, the state where the UI unit UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed),
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states where the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states where the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, “the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the third state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  Further, the first state may include a state in which the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine is configured such that a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed. ]
It may be.

  A certain notice display is not limited to a true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  The character is not limited to a person but may be a mini-item display such as a notice item.

  Further, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is “the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started”. In some cases, the display for starting the display of “is sometimes made”. Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. The second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Further, “it is configured to be in the second state after the first state” means “may be in the second state following the first state” It may be configured as described above.

  Further, there may be a case where the first state is followed by the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through another state (for example, a 3rd state or a 3rd state) after a 1st state, you may transfer to a 2nd state. Moreover, in the state where one symbol variation display is made, the first state may be shifted to the second state.

  In addition, a certain effect may fade in while a certain notice display fades out.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a reserved icon display area, for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG.
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon is configured to be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed [the hold icon is enabled to be displayed in a state where an image including a hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed. For example, FIG. ), The hold icon is not displayed when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern being changed.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, a part of the display different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative design. May be.

  The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a holding icon.

  The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed [the hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed overlapping the preparation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 46D, the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. Etc. displayed on the display unit TT1]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [the display of the ready display in the state where the hold icon is displayed The position and the display position of the preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same. For example, the display position of the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 46D and the preparation image shown in FIG. The display position of RDY is the same, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 46 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect [preliminary notice or pre-read notice display form, for example, a golden display form shown in FIG. 46 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be easier to start [the display of the hold icon than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetching notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the prefetching notice is more easily displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. If it is displayed in a golden display mode, a red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that display of the second display is easier to start ”means that in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 46 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect [preliminary notice or pre-read notice display form, for example, a golden display form shown in FIG. 46 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed more easily [the hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, it is more likely to be a big hit, for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 46E is displayed in the gold display mode The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the big hit symbol is easily displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon to be prefetched. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display ”means“ in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode. The case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is configured so that the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth mode is not changed. It may be.

Further, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display [at least a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. It is overlapped with the character related to the change effect display of the hold icon display mode (hold change prior effect display). For example, as shown in FIG. Wrapped etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that it may be overlapped and displayed also on displays other than a 1st display. Further, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that it may be overlapped with one display and not displayed.

  In addition, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or other than at least a part of the sixth display. The display may be configured to be overlapped with the first display.

  Further, a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be changed to the first display. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed by overlapping.

  Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In the state where both the configured image [character including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display of the hold icon display mode (hold change prior effect display) are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b1), the UI part UI3 is overlapped with the ninja character NJ4, which is not overlapped with the character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the hold icon. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. Or, in the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the display other than the first display. May be configured. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without necessarily overlapping the first display, In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In addition, when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. May be. Further, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. In addition, even in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. It may be configured.

  In addition, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [specific super reach production, for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 46 (m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect [the state before the specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. The state before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, the super reach (swordsman shown in FIGS. 46 (m) to (q)). Reach) is being executed etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

  Note that the first state may be a reach state before developing to SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state during execution of SP reach in the certain change.

  In addition, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain fluctuation and further reaches a reach state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, display of a timer notice effect shown in FIG. 49 (b3) to FIG. 49 (b5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, a certain kind of timer notice display may be used.

In addition, the certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, display of a mini game shown in FIG. 46 (o) to FIG. 46 (q)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini-games, it may be a certain type of mini-game.

In addition, one of the plural types of displays is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, a button notice effect display by the big button 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6), etc.]
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 46 (q), etc.],
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be displayed more easily than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed.

In addition, when the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, it is displayed only when at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is a certain mode There may be.

Further, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [Preparation display in which display is started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. In addition, the image RDY in preparation is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next symbol variation display to be started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon that has been displayed in the variable display is deleted before the next symbol variable display is started. For example, FIG. ) To Ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be deleted only before the next symbol variation display to be started, The first display that has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the first display that is started in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, In the display, the first display that has started to be displayed may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

In addition, “in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [the notice is executed in the area where the display in preparation is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a4), there may be a case where a warning display made up of characters of “hot” may be displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 where the image RDY being prepared is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, it comprises “operating means [buttons and levers, for example, production buttons 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player
One of the plural types of displays is a seventh display [display of images of buttons and levers, for example, a decabutton image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [the display of images of buttons and levers is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b1) to FIG. 49 (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is displayed after the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed.
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [When the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 49 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate image TP is displayed.
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [Preparation display is completed before the button or lever image is displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY being prepared is displayed before the display of the decabutton image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

  The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the case where the big button image is displayed may make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color of the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, the special color button image is displayed more easily when the big hit symbol is more easily displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed is the jackpot symbol. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 49 (b4) to FIG. 49 (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b4) to FIG. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The gaming table according to claim 3, wherein the third display is a display that is ended during the display of the eighth display. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, a variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 56 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed [two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 59A, two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes, and after the display of one of the two preparation displays is finished, the other display is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the image RDY under preparation is enlarged and displayed]
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [the preparation display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the fluctuation icon, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (g). The displayed image RDY being prepared overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

In addition, “when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is completed in one symbol variation display [two displays in preparation are displayed. In the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 (b) to (k), the two images RDY in preparation are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display [explanation display, for example,“ panda is a master of the panda ”displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. Displayed explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [the explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [the preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which an explanation display is displayed. For example, FIG. The ready image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 where the explanation display is displayed as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting” is “character display being prepared [for example,“ preparing ”in the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. Character display etc.] ”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eleventh display [ball-free display, such as a ball-free error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 77 (a1)],
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to discharge the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display “Please remove the ball” prompts removal of the ball, etc.]
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. In the state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display is overlapped with the ball removal display, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a2) In addition, the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to discharge the game ball, or may be a display prompting anything other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to discharge the game ball, or a display that may not prompt the user to discharge the game ball.

  In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that prompts the player to discharge only the game ball, or a display that prompts the player to discharge other than the game ball.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap only the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display overlaps with the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, only in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the entire display of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

Further, in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the mini game and timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and timer notice is overlapped with the ball removal display. 77 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. And may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is surely overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, “the game stand is a pachinko machine [a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a slot machine [rotating-type game machine].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is being held, but this can be realized according to this game machine.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
First movable means [for example, the first movable member 251 in which the characters “Chance” shown in FIG. 14 are displayed and the LED is built-in, from the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, etc. The first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39, the first movable accessory 251 on which the face of the Tono-sama character is drawn, and the movable accessory 256] that is the POV display shown in FIG.
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The first movable means has a first position [e.g., a first position that is a position on the back side of the upper part of the middle symbol display area 208b (FIG. 18D, FIG. 19C, FIG. 24E- 1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (B), FIG. 29 (d ′), and FIG. 30 (B)), at the position on the back side at the bottom of the left symbol display area 208a. A first position (see FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. 31 (b-3)), a first position (see FIG. 32 (c)) which is a position on the back side surrounding the circular region S3 ′, and a first position on the left side. One position and a first position on the right side (see FIG. 36 (c-1) and FIG. 37 (e′-1)), a first position (FIG. 40 (e) )), A movable means that can be moved to an effect position on the back side (see FIG. 43A),
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is a first display area of the display area of the display means [for example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. (E-1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. -3), first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p), left first display area 208-1L and right first display area 208-1R in FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. The left first display area 208-1L ′ and the right first display area 208-1R ′ in “−1), the common display area 208-13 in FIG. 40F, and the rotation region of the LED array 2561 overlap. Area] from the front side,
The first display region is configured to be in a first visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it may not be completely opaque and a light transmission amount is relatively low)]. And
The first display region may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it may not be completely transparent and a light transmission amount is relatively increased)]. Configured,
The second viewing state is configured to make it easier to visually recognize the back side of the display area of the display means through the first display area than the first viewing state [for example, FIG. e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. 24 (e-1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. 33 (b-3), FIG. 33 (p), FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. 37 (e′-1), FIG. 40 (f)],
In one state in which the first display area is in the second visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as “first state”), the first movable unit is configured to be in the first position. [For example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. 24 (e-1), FIG. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2), FIG. 33 (b-3), FIG. 33 (p), FIG. 36 (d-1), FIG. 37 (e′-1), FIG. ]], A game table characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, as an example of the state that does not enter the second visual recognition state, a decorative symbol temporarily stopped state, a decorative symbol fixed display state, a decorative symbol stopped state (including a pseudo-continuous symbol temporary stopped state), and a decorative symbol are State disclosed change, state where reach production was started, state where reach production was executed, state when developed to super reach production, state where super reach production was executed, electric support state (short time state) , Non-electric support state (non-time-short state), probability variation state, non-probability variation state, jackpot gaming state, demo display state, state where various setting screens are displayed, state where a specific performance is being executed (for example, final judge The state in which the effect is being executed), the state in which the specific display is displayed (for example, the state in which the judgment result in the final judge effect is displayed), and the like can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the state in which the second visual recognition state is not achieved. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. In other words, the above-listed items may include the state of entering the second viewing state, and the state of entering the second viewing state is the total of those listed above. It may be a part or a part.

  As an example of the state in which the second visual recognition state is set, a decorative display variation display state, a state where a specific effect is executed (for example, a state where a darkening effect is executed, a state where a pseudo-continuous effect is executed) , Button effect execution state, timer notice execution state, specific reach effect execution state), specific display display state (for example, a dark background display is displayed) Displayed, partially dark image displayed, button design displayed, ball removal notification displayed, hold icon displayed, variable icon displayed State, state displaying mini character), state where light guide plate is emitting light, and the like. That is, all of the above-described enumerations may be used as the state of the second visual recognition state. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. In other words, the above-listed items may include a state that does not enter the second viewing state, and the state that does not enter the second viewing state is the total of those listed above. It may be a part or a part.

  Further, at least a part of the first movable means that is not in the first position may be configured not to overlap the first display area from the front side. The first viewing state may be configured so that the back side of the display area of the display unit is less visible through the first display area than the second viewing state. In a state different from the first state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the first position, or may be configured not to be in the first position. Good.

  When the first movable means is in the first position, the first state may or may not be the first state.

  When the first movable means is in the first position, it may be configured to be always in the first state.

  “The first movable means can be moved to the first position” means that the first movable means can be moved from the initial position, or can be moved from the second position. It may be. Note that the second position may be an initial position.

  In addition, said 1st visual recognition state may be one state in the state which can visually recognize the back side of the said display means through said 1st display area. The second viewing state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display unit is visible through the first display area. The first viewing state may be a state in which the back side of the display means is less visible through the first display area than the second viewing state. The first movable means is in the first position before entering the first state, and the first movable means is in the first position after changing from the first state to another state. In this case, in the first state, the first movable means is always in the first position. The first movable means may be in the first state before reaching the first position, and the first movable means may be in the first state before the first state is changed to another state. The movement may be started at a position different from the one position. Or, conversely, the first movable means does not enter the first state until the first movable means reaches the first position, and the first movable means does not change from the first state to another state. May not start to move to a position different from the first position.

  The first movable unit may be a unit that always moves to the first position. Only a part of the first movable means at the first position is configured to overlap a part or all of the first display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. Alternatively, all of the first movable means at the first position may be overlapped from the front side in part or all of the first display area of the display area of the display means. It may be configured. The first display area may be configured to be always in the first visual recognition state. Moreover, you may be comprised so that said 1st display area may necessarily be in a 2nd visual recognition state. In the first viewing state, the back side of the display means may not be visible through the first display area, and the display is performed through the first display area in the first viewing state. You may be comprised so that the back side of a means can be visually recognized. The first viewing state and the second viewing state have different light transmission amounts, and the second viewing state has a larger light transmission amount than the first viewing state. It may be. In the first state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the first position.

  An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the first display area in the first visual recognition state, and an image cannot be displayed (reproduced) in the first display area in the second visual recognition state. It may be.

  The first movable means may be a movable means having a plurality of movable bodies.

Also,
“The first movable means has a second position [for example, a second position that is a position on the back side of the upper portion of the right symbol display area 208c (FIG. 16C, FIG. 17D, FIG. 19M ), FIG. 20 (c), FIG. 24 (c), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (b), FIG. 29 (b), FIG. 30 (b)), the middle symbol display area 208b in the center in the vertical direction. Movable means movable to a second position (see FIG. 31 (a)), which is a position on the back side, and a second position (see FIG. 40 (c)), which is a position where the face of the frog character is on the center back side. And
The second position is a position different from the first position,
At least a part of the first movable means at the second position is a second display area of the display area of the display means [for example, FIG. 16 (d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. (M), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 (c), and FIG. 40 (c) is configured to overlap the common display area 208-13] from the front side,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The second display area may be in a third visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it may not be completely opaque, and a light transmission amount is relatively low)]. And
The second display area may be in a fourth viewing state [for example, a transparent state (however, it may not be completely transparent and a light transmission amount is relatively increased)]. Configured,
In the fourth viewing state, the rear side of the display area of the display means is more easily visible through the second display area than in the third viewing state [for example, FIG. d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. 19 (m), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. FIG. 40 (c)],
In one state (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) in which the second display region is in the fourth visual recognition state, the first movable unit is configured to be in the second position. [For example, FIG. 16 (d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. 19 (m), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. C), FIG. 30 (b), FIG. 40 (c)],
In the first state, the second display area is configured to be in the third visual state [for example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 19 (d), FIG. 24 (e-1)]. 28 (a), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C), FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 30 (B), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG.
In the second state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visual state [for example, FIG. 16 (d), FIG. 17 (e), FIG. 19 (m), FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 24 (d), FIG. 28 (e), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 29 (c), FIG. 30 (b)],
After reaching the first state, execution of the first notice effect [for example, the first notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect, reach effect, super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), pre-reading notice) is started. [For example, be sure to start] [for example, FIG. 19 (j), FIG. 28 (c), FIG. 30 (D)],
After the second state is reached, the execution of the first notice effect may be started [for example, it may not be started but may be started] [for example, 20 (j), FIG. 24 (j), FIG. 28 (i)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, at least a part of the first movable means not in the second position may be configured not to overlap the second display area from the front side. The third viewing state may be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the back side of the display area of the display unit through the second display area than the fourth viewing state. In a state where the second display area is not in the fourth visual recognition state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the second position, or the first movable means may be It may be configured not to be in the first position. In a state different from the first state, the second display region may be configured to be in the third viewing state, and the second display region may be in the third viewing state. You may be comprised so that it may not become. In a state different from the second state, the first display area may be configured to be in the first visual state or configured not to be in the first visual state. May be. Before the first state, the execution of the first notice effect may be started, and before the first state, the first notice effect is executed. It may be configured not to start. It may be configured that the execution of the first notice effect may be started before the second state, or before the second state, You may be comprised so that execution of a notice effect may not be started.

  When the first movable means is in the second position, the second state may or may not be the second state.

  When the first movable means is in the second position, it may be configured to be in the second state. When the second display area is in the third visual recognition state, the second display area may be configured to be in the first state. When the first display area is in the first visual recognition state, the first display area may be configured to be in the second state.

  “The first movable means can be moved to the second position” means that the first movable means can be moved from the initial position, or can be moved from the first position. It may be.

  You may transfer to said 2nd state through said 1st state. Transitioning to the second state through the first state may correspond to a demote effect. On the contrary, you may transfer to said 1st state through said 2nd state. Transitioning to the first state through the second state may correspond to a promotion effect. In a single symbol variation display, only one state can be taken, and there may be a case where the state transition is performed after the next symbol variation display is started. Alternatively, the state transition may be performed within one symbol variation display.

  Note that the first state and the second state may be configured to have different probabilities of executing the first notice effect. The fourth viewing state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means is visible through the second display area. The third viewing state may be a state in which the back side of the display means is less visible through the second display area than the fourth viewing state. The third viewing state may be an opaque state, and the first viewing state may also be an opaque state. Further, the third viewing state and the first viewing state may be in a state where the amount of transmitted light is the same. Further, the fourth viewing state and the second viewing state may be the same light transmission amount. The first movable means is in the second position before entering the second state, and the first movable means is in the second position after changing from the second state to another state. In this case, in the second state, the first movable means is always in the second position. The first movable means may be in the second state before reaching the second position, and the first movable means may be in the second state before the second state is changed to another state. The movement may be started at a position different from the second position. Alternatively, on the contrary, the second movable state does not enter the second state until the first movable unit reaches the second position, and the first movable unit is not changed from the second state to another state. May not start to move to a position different from the second position. The second position may be an initial position of the first movable means, and the first movable means is movable from the second position to the first position, and It may return from the first position to the second position. In addition to the second position and the first position, there may be an initial position of the first movable means. The case where the execution of the first notice effect is started may mean that the execution of the first notice effect may be started in the second state. The first state may be entered after entering the first state, and execution of the first notice effect is started in the first state when the first state is entered. Good. In addition, the meaning including both the former and the latter may be sufficient, the meaning only of the former may be sufficient, and the meaning only of the latter may be sufficient.

  The first movable unit may be a unit that always moves to the second position. Only a part of the first movable means at the second position is configured to overlap a part or all of the second display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. Alternatively, all of the first movable means at the second position overlaps part or all of the second display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. It may be configured as follows. The second display area may be configured to be in a third viewing state. The second display area may be configured to be in a fourth visual state. In the third viewing state, the rear side of the display means may not be visible through the second display area. In the third viewing state, the display is performed through the second display area. You may be comprised so that the back side of a means can be visually recognized. The third viewing state and the fourth viewing state have different light transmission amounts, and the fourth viewing state has a larger light transmission amount than the third viewing state. It may be. In the second state, the first movable means may be configured to be in the second position. In the first state, the second display area may be configured to be in the third viewing state or configured to be in the third viewing state. May be. In the second state, the first display area may be configured to be in the first visual state or may be in the first visual state. May be. After the first state is reached, the execution of the first notice effect may be surely started. After the second state, the execution of the first notice effect may or may not be started.

  An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the second display area in the third viewing state, and an image cannot be displayed (reproduced) in the second display area in the fourth viewing state. It may be.

  The first notice effect may be more easily performed in the first state than in the second state. That is, the case where the first movable means is in the first position in the first state is more than the case where the first movable means is in the second position in the second state. The first notice effect is easily executed. Further, the case where the first movable means is in the first position in the first state is more than the case where the first movable means is in the second position in the second state. Finally, the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner [for example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot may be high].

Also,
“It is configured to be able to display the first display [for example, the display of the hold icon by the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the display of the ninja NJA mini character]
The first display is one of the pre-read notice displays,
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (D '), FIG. 31 (b-2). And (b-3) in FIG.
The area where the first display is displayed and the second display area do not overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (D '), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG. )],
In a state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, there may be cases where it does not become possible] [is configured] [ For example, FIG. 29 (D ′), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first display area overlaps the area where the first display is displayed. The area where the first display is displayed is referred to as a “first area”. In addition, at least a part of the first region is referred to as a “first partial region”. Furthermore, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a “first partial display area”.

  At least a part of the area where the first display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be overlapped or may not be overlapped. The area where the first display is not displayed and the second display area may overlap each other. In a state where the first display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state, or may be in the second visual state. You may be comprised so that there may be no case.

  When the first display area is in the second visual recognition state, the first display may be configured to be displayed without fail.

  The timing when the display of the first display ends and the timing when the second viewing state of the first display area ends may be simultaneous, or the display of the first display ends. The timing may be earlier or the timing at which the second viewing state of the first display area ends may be earlier.

  When only a part of the area where the first display is displayed overlaps with a part or all of the first display area, only a part of the first display is displayed. On the other hand, when all of the area where the first display is displayed overlaps with part or all of the first display area, the first display is not displayed (has disappeared). It will be. Further, at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area may or may not overlap. All of the displays are displayed. As a case where both the case where it overlaps and the case where it does not overlap occur, there is a case where the display position of the first display changes. For example, when the first display is the hold icon of the prefetch notice mode, the display position of the hold icon changes (the hold icon shifts) every time the hold is used, so the prefetch notice mode The hold icon may move away from the first display area or approach the first display area.

In addition, at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap,
You may be comprised so that said 2nd display area may be in said 4th visual recognition state in the state where said 1st display is displayed.

  The first display may always be displayed. Only a part of the area where the first display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may overlap, or the whole area where the first display is displayed And part or all of the first display area may overlap each other. In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be always in the second visual state, or the first display area may be the second display area. There may be a case where it is not visible.

Also,
“The first notice effect is one effect among the notice effects related to the fluctuating symbol change [for example, pseudo-ream effect, reach effect, super reach effect (swordsman reach effect)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to display the first display [for example, the display of the hold icon by the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the display of the ninja NJA mini character]
The first display is one of the pre-read notice displays,
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (D '), FIG. 31 (b-2). And (b-3) in FIG.
In a state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, there may be cases where it does not become possible] [is configured] [ For example, FIG. 29 (D ′), FIG. 31 (b-2) and FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap the first area.

  At least a part of the area where the first display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be overlapped or may not be overlapped. When the first display area is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second viewing state, or may not be in the second viewing state. There may be configured to be.

  When the first display area is in the second visual recognition state, the first display may be configured to be displayed without fail.

  The timing when the display of the first display ends and the timing when the second viewing state of the first display area ends may be simultaneous, or the display of the first display ends. The timing may be earlier or the timing at which the second viewing state of the first display area ends may be earlier.

  When only a part of the area where the first display is displayed overlaps with a part or all of the first display area, only a part of the first display is displayed. On the other hand, when all of the area where the first display is displayed overlaps with part or all of the first display area, the first display is not displayed (has disappeared). It will be. Further, at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area may or may not overlap. All of the displays are displayed. As a case where both the case where it overlaps and the case where it does not overlap occur, there is a case where the display position of the first display changes. For example, when the first display is the hold icon of the prefetch notice mode, the display position of the hold icon changes (the hold icon shifts) every time the hold is used, so the prefetch notice mode The hold icon may move away from the first display area or approach the first display area.

In addition, at least a part of the area where the first display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap,
You may be comprised so that said 2nd display area may be in said 4th visual recognition state in the state where said 1st display is displayed.

  The first display may always be displayed. Only a part of the area where the first display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may overlap, or the whole area where the first display is displayed And part or all of the first display area may overlap each other. In the state where the first display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be always in the second visual state, or the first display area may be the second display area. There may be a case where it is not visible.

Also,
"The second display [for example, pseudo-ream production, reach production, super reach production (swordsman reach production), display of variable icons according to the notice display mode]
The second display is a display of one of the notice displays regarding the changing pattern during the change,
At least a part of the area where the second display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap (for example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m ′)),
The area where the second display is displayed and the second display area are configured not to overlap,
In a state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, there may be cases where it may not be, or may be] [ For example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m ′)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first display area overlaps the area where the second display is displayed. The area where the second display is displayed is referred to as a “second area”. Further, at least a part of the second region is referred to as a “second partial region”. Furthermore, at least a part of the second display area is referred to as a “second partial display area”.

  At least a part of the area where the second display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be overlapped or may not be overlapped. The area where the second display is not displayed and the second display area may overlap each other. When the second display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second viewing state, or may not be in the second viewing state. There may be configured to be.

  When the first display area is in the second visual recognition state, the second display may be displayed without fail.

  When the first notice effect is one of the notice effects related to the changing symbol change, the first notice effect and the second display are the same “something” notice. May be. The term “something” here means, in a broad sense, a big hit in a fluctuating symbol change. For example, a certain effect (a certain super reach effect or a certain pseudo-ream effect) is executed. It may be a notice about whether or not, or more specifically, it may be an effect that a certain effect is executed. Alternatively, the first notice effect and the second display may be different “something” notices. For example, one of the first notice effect and the second display may be a certain super reach effect, and the other may be a certain pseudo-continuous effect.

In addition, at least a part of the area where the display of the second display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap,
The second display area may be in the fourth visual recognition state in a state where the display of the second display is displayed.

  Only a part of the area where the second display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may be overlapped, or the whole area where the second display is displayed And part or all of the first display area may overlap each other. In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual recognition state, or the first display area may be the second display area. There may be a case where it is not visible.

  The second display may be a display different from the display by the first notice effect.

Also,
"The second display [for example, pseudo-ream production, reach production, super reach production (swordsman reach production), display of variable icons according to the notice display mode]
The second display is a display of one of the notice displays regarding the changing pattern during the change,
At least a part of the area where the second display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap (for example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m ′)),
In a state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, there may be cases where it may not be, or may be] [ For example, FIG. 18 (e), FIG. 18 (m ′)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap the second area.

  At least a part of the area where the second display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be overlapped or may not be overlapped. When the second display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual recognition state, or in the second visual recognition state. You may be comprised so that there may not be.

  When the first display area is in the second visual recognition state, the second display may be displayed without fail.

  When the first notice effect is one of the notice effects related to the changing symbol change, the first notice effect and the second display are the same “something” notice. May be. The term “something” here means, in a broad sense, a big hit in a fluctuating symbol change. For example, a certain effect (a certain super reach effect or a certain pseudo-ream effect) is executed. It may be a notice about whether or not, or more specifically, it may be an effect that a certain effect is executed. Alternatively, the first notice effect and the second display may be different “something” notices. For example, one of the first notice effect and the second display may be a certain super reach effect, and the other may be a certain pseudo-continuous effect.

In addition, at least a part of the area where the display of the second display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap,
The second display area may be in the fourth visual recognition state in a state where the display of the second display is displayed.

  Only a part of the area where the second display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may be overlapped, or the whole area where the second display is displayed And part or all of the first display area may overlap each other. In the state where the second display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual recognition state, or the first display area may be the second display area. There may be a case where it is not visible.

  The second display may be a display different from the display by the first notice effect.

Also,
[2nd movable means [for example, crest character 224E]
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The second movable means is movable means that can move to a third position [for example, a third position that is a position of the family crest character 224E represented by a solid black line in FIG. 32 (b)]
It is configured to be able to execute the second notice effect,
The second notice effect is a notice effect performed in a state where the first movable means is located at the first position [for example, FIG. 33 (o) to FIG. 33 (r) to FIG. 34 (a). A normal notice effect that is a collaborative effect by the first movable accessory 251 and the crest actor 224E],
The second notice effect is a notice effect performed in a state where the second movable means is located at the third position,
In at least a part of the state in which the first movable means is located at the first position in the second notice effect, the first display area is in the second visual recognition state. [For example, FIG. 33 (p) -FIG. 33 (r)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in at least a part of the state in which the first movable means is not located at the first position in the second notice effect, the first display region is the second display region. You may be comprised so that it may be in a visual recognition state, and you may be comprised so that it may not become said 2nd visual recognition state.

  Even when the first display area is in the second visual recognition state, the first movable means may be necessarily located at the first position in the second notice effect. Good.

  “The second movable means can be moved to the third position” means that the second movable means can be moved from the initial position or can be moved from the sixth position. It may be.

  The second notice effect may include the movement of the first movable means to the first position itself, and the movement itself may not be the second notice effect. In addition, the second moving means may include the second notice effect including the movement to the third position itself, or the movement itself may not be the second notice effect. Good.

  The second notice effect may be a notice effect including an effect in which the first movable means is located at the first position, and the second notice effect may be the second movable means. May be a notice effect including an effect located at the third position.

  The first display region is configured to be in the second visual recognition state in at least a part of the state in which the second movable means is located at the third position. May be. That is, only in a part of the state where the second movable means is located at the third position, or in all the states where the second movable means is located at the third position The first display area may be configured to be in the second visual recognition state. The “state” here can also be regarded as a “period”.

  The first display area may be configured to be in the second visual recognition state in at least a part of the effect in which the first movable means is located at the first position. That is, only in a part of the effect in which the first movable means is located in the first position, or in all the effects in which the first movable means is located in the first position, the first display area. May be configured to be in the second visual recognition state.

  It may be configured to always execute the second notice effect. The second notice effect may be an effect including only an effect in which the first movable means is located at the first position, or the first movable means is located at the first position. It may be an effect including an effect to be performed and other effects. The second notice effect may be an effect including only an effect in which the second movable means is located at the third position, or the second movable means is located at the third position. It may be an effect including an effect to be performed and other effects. In the second notice effect, the first display area is always in the second viewing state in only a part of the state in which the first movable means is located at the first position. The first display area may not be in the second visual recognition state. Alternatively, in the second notice effect, the first display area is necessarily in the second visual recognition state in all states where the first movable means is located at the first position. The first display area may not be in the second viewing state. The “state” here can also be regarded as a “period”.

Also,
“The third movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253] is provided,
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The third movable means moves from the fourth position [for example, the initial position (fourth position) which is the position of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to the fifth position [for example, FIG. (E) movable means movable to a fifth position, which is the position of the third movable accessory 253 represented by a dotted line,
The second movable means is movable means that can move to a sixth position [for example, a sixth position that is the position of the family crest member 224E represented by a gray solid line in FIG. 32 (b)].
At least a part of the third movable means at the fifth position is a third display area of the display area of the display means [for example, the third display area 208-shown in FIG. 3] is configured to overlap from the front side,
It is configured to be able to execute the third notice effect,
The third notice effect is a notice effect [for example, a normal notice effect that is a transmission effect in FIG. 35A] performed in a state where the third movable means is located at the fifth position,
The third notice effect is a notice effect executed after execution of the second notice effect,
At least a part of the state after the execution of the second notice effect and before the execution of the third notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “third state”) [for example, In the state of FIG. 34 (p)], the second movable means is configured to be in the sixth position,
In the third state, the third movable means is configured to be in the fourth position [for example, a third movable accessory 253 indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)],
At least a part of the third movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253 indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)] at the fourth position is the second movable means at the sixth position. Means [for example, the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 34 (p)] is configured to overlap from the front side.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third state may be one of the states after execution of the second notice effect and before execution of the third notice effect is started. In addition, there may be a state different from the third state among the states after the execution of the second notice effect and before the execution of the third notice effect is started. It may be configured as follows. The “another state” here may be a state before the third state or a state after the third state. Furthermore, the “other one state” may be a longer period or a shorter period than the third state.

  At least a part of the third movable means that is not in the fifth position may be configured not to overlap the third display area from the front side. In a state different from the third state, the second movable means may be configured to be in the sixth position, or may be configured not to be in the sixth position. Good. In a state different from the third state, the third movable means may be configured to be in the fourth position, or may be configured not to be in the fourth position. Good. At least a part of the third movable means not in the fourth position may be configured not to overlap the second movable means in the sixth position from the front side.

  When the second movable means is in the sixth position, the third state may or may not be the third state.

  When the third movable means is in the fourth position, the third state may or may not be the third state.

  When the second movable means is in the sixth position, it may be configured to always be in the third state.

  When the third movable means is in the fourth position, it may be configured to be in the third state.

  The fourth position may be an initial position of the third movable means.

  “The second movable means can be moved to the sixth position” means that the second movable means can be moved from the initial position or can be moved from the third position. It may be.

  The third notice effect may include the movement of the third movable means to the fifth position itself, or the movement itself may not be the third notice effect.

  The third notice effect may be an effect including an effect in which the third movable means is located at the fifth position.

The third display area is configured to be in a seventh visual state,
The third display area is configured to be in an eighth visual state,
The eighth viewing state may be configured to make it easier to visually recognize the back side of the display means through the third display area than the seventh viewing state.

  Furthermore, the third movable unit may be configured to be at the fifth position in a state where the third display region is in the eighth visual recognition state.

  The third movable means may be provided on the back side of the first movable means, or may be provided on the front side. Alternatively, the third movable means may be provided at the same longitudinal position as the first movable means.

A light transmitting means having light transparency;
Irradiating means capable of irradiating light to the light transmitting means;
With
The light transmitting means is a means provided on the front side of the second movable means,
The first region in the light transmitting means is a light emitting region,
The light emitting region is a region that can emit light at least toward the front side by the light irradiated from the irradiation unit,
The first area is an area in front of the third display area,
In the state where the third display area is in the eighth visual recognition state, the third movable means is configured to be in the fifth position,
The light emitting region may be configured to emit light when the third display region is in the eighth visual recognition state.

  The third movable unit may be a unit that always moves from the fourth position to the fifth position. The second movable unit may be a unit that always moves to the sixth position. Only a part of the third movable means at the fifth position is configured to overlap from the front side to a part or all of the third display area of the display area of the display means. Alternatively, all of the third movable means in the fifth position is overlapped from the front side with part or all of the third display area of the display area of the display means. It may be configured as follows. It may be configured to always execute the third notice effect. The third notice effect may be an effect including only an effect in which the third movable means is located at the fifth position, and the third notice effect is the third movable means. May be an effect including an effect located at the fifth position and other effects. The third notice effect may be an effect that is always executed after execution of the second notice effect, or may be an effect that may or may not be executed. The third state may be a state of only a part of a state after execution of the second notice effect and before execution of the third notice effect is started, It may be all the states after execution of the second notice effect and before execution of the third notice effect is started. The “state” here can also be regarded as a “period”. In the third state, the second movable means may be configured to be in the sixth position. Only a part of the third movable means in the fourth position is configured to overlap a part or all of the second movable means in the sixth position from the front side. Alternatively, all of the third movable means in the fourth position may be overlapped with a part or all of the second movable means in the sixth position from the front side. It may be configured.

Also,
[First light emitting means [for example, LED incorporated in the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 14 and the like]
A second light emitting means [for example, all of the upper LED 2541, the middle LED 2542, and the lower LED 2543, or any one of these three LEDs 2541 to 2543 shown in FIG.
With
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the first movable means,
The second light emitting means is not provided in the first movable means [for example, provided in the fourth movable accessory 254],
The second light emitting means [for example, the upper LED 2541] at a certain position [for example, the position of the upper LED 2541 of the fourth movable accessory 254 at the seventh position shown in FIG. 20 (n)] The fourth display area of the display means of the display means [for example, the fourth display area 208-4 shown in FIG. 20 (n)] is configured to overlap from the front side,
The fourth display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The fourth display area is a display area different from the second display area,
The fourth display region may be in a fifth visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it may not be completely opaque and a light transmission amount is relatively low)]. And
The fourth display area may be in a sixth visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it may not be completely transparent and a light transmission amount is relatively increased)]. Configured,
The sixth viewing state is configured to make it easier to visually recognize the back side of the display area of the display means through the fourth display area than the fifth viewing state,
In the state where the fourth display region is in the fifth visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as “fourth state”), the second light emitting means may emit light [for example, , FIG. 20 (o)],
In the fourth state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visual state [for example, the entire display screen is in an opaque state as shown in FIG. 20 (o)],
In the fourth state, the second display area is configured to be in the third viewing state [for example, the entire display screen is opaque as shown in FIG. 20 (o)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth state may be one of the states in which the fourth display region is in the fifth visual recognition state. That is, the fourth display area may be in the fifth visual recognition state even in one state different from the fourth state.

  The second light emitting means that is not in a certain position may be configured not to overlap the fourth display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. The fifth viewing state may be configured such that the rear side of the display area of the display unit is less visible through the fourth display area than in the sixth viewing state. In a state different from the fourth state, the second light emitting unit may be configured to emit light or may not be configured to emit light. In a state different from the fourth state, the first display area may be configured to be in the first visual state or configured not to be in the first visual state. May be. In a state different from the fourth state, the second display region may be configured to be in the third visual state, or configured not to be in the third visual state. May be.

  When the second light emitting unit emits light, the fourth state may be necessarily set.

  When the first display area is in the first visual recognition state, the first display area may be configured to be in the fourth state.

  When the second display area is in the third visual recognition state, it may be configured to be in the fourth state.

  The first state may be shifted to the fourth state, or the second state may be shifted to the fourth state. Or, conversely, the first state may be shifted through the fourth state, or the second state may be shifted through the fourth state.

Also,
"It has a third light emitting means
The third light emitting means is not provided in the first movable means,
The third light emitting means at a certain position is configured to overlap from the front side to the eleventh display area of the display area of the display means,
The position of the second light emitting means at the certain position is different from the position of the third light emitting means at the certain position,
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the first display area,
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the second display area,
The eleventh display area is a display area different from the fourth display area,
The eleventh display area is configured to be in a seventh visual state,
The eleventh display area is configured to be in an eighth viewing state,
The eighth viewing state is configured to make it easier to visually recognize the back side of the display area of the display means through the eleventh display area than the seventh viewing state,
The third light emitting means may emit light in a state where the eleventh display area is in the seventh viewing state (hereinafter referred to as “eleventh state”). ,
In the eleventh state, the first display area is configured to be in the first visual state,
In the eleventh state, the second display area is configured to be in the third visual state,
After the fourth state, the execution of a certain effect is started,
You may be comprised so that execution of the said certain effect may be started after becoming the said 11th state. "
Note that the certain effect may be a first reach effect (for example, a trick reach effect).

  If the second reach production (for example, swordsman reach production) has a higher expectation level (reliability) that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed than the first reach production, the first The second reach effect may be configured to start after the first state is reached. Moreover, the first position and the position of the second light emitting means at the certain position are adjacent to each other, close to each other, or in a positional relationship that is easily misunderstood by the player, In the fourth state, when the second light emitting means emits light, the player misunderstands that the first light emitting means emits light, and expects the second reach production to start. In some cases, the interest of the game is improved.

  The second light emitting means may be provided in a movable means different from the first movable means, and the position where the other movable means has moved may be the certain position, When the second light emitting means is not provided in any movable means and is fixed, the fixed position may be the certain position. The fifth viewing state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means is visible through the fourth display area. The sixth viewing state may be one of the states in which the back side of the display means is visible through the fourth display area. The sixth viewing state may be a state in which the back side of the display means is less visible through the fourth display region than in the fifth viewing state. In the fourth state, the first light emitting means may be configured not to emit light.

  Only a part of the second light emitting means at a certain position is configured to overlap a part or all of the fourth display area of the display means from the front side. Alternatively, all of the second light emitting means at a certain position may be configured to overlap a part or all of the fourth display area of the display area of the display means from the front side. It may be. The fourth display area may be configured to be in a fifth visual recognition state. The fourth display area may be configured to be in a sixth visual recognition state. In the fifth viewing state, the back side of the display means may not be visible through the fourth display area, and in the fifth viewing state, the display is performed through the fourth display area. You may be comprised so that the back side of a means can be visually recognized. In the fourth state, the second light emitting means may necessarily be configured to emit light, or the second light emitting means may not emit light. In the fourth state, the first display area may be configured to be always in the first visual state, or the first display area may be in the first visual state. It may be configured to be. In the fourth state, the second display area may be configured to be in the third visual state, or the second display area may be in the third visual state. It may be configured to be. In the fourth state, the first light emitting unit may be configured not to emit light, or the first light emitting unit may be configured to emit light.

  An image can be displayed (reproduced) in the fourth display area in the fifth viewing state, and an image cannot be displayed (reproduced) in the fourth display area in the sixth viewing state. It may be.

Also,
“4th movable means [for example, the fourth movable accessory 254 shown in FIG.
The second light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the fourth movable means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth movable means may be provided on the back side of the display means. The second light emitting means may be a light emitting means having a plurality of light emitters. The moving direction of the fourth movable means and the moving direction of the first movable means may be different or the same. The fourth movable means may be provided on the back side of the first movable means, or may be provided on the front side. Alternatively, the fourth movable means and the first movable means may be provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. In this case, the fourth movable means and the first movable means Move so as not to interfere with each other.

Also,
“Third display [For example,“ Pull out sphere ”shown in FIG. 29A, etc., button image 136a shown in FIG. 29A, etc., arrow display 136b as an operation promotion display, The period meter display 136c] can be displayed,
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate,
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap (for example, FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C)),
The area where the third display is displayed and the second display area are configured not to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (C)],
In the state where the third display is displayed, the first display region may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C ]], A game table characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first display area overlaps the area where the third display is displayed. The area where the third display is displayed is referred to as a “third area”. Further, at least a part of the third region is referred to as a “third partial region”. Further, as described above, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a “first partial display area”.

  At least a part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap each other or may not be overlapped. The area where the third display is not displayed and the second display area may overlap each other. In a state where the third display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state, or may be in the second visual state. You may be comprised so that there may be no case.

  When the first display area is in the second visual recognition state, the third display may be displayed without fail.

Also,
“Third display [For example,“ Pull out sphere ”shown in FIG. 29A, etc., button image 136a shown in FIG. 29A, etc., arrow display 136b as an operation promotion display, The period meter display 136c] can be displayed,
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate,
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap (for example, FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C)),
In the state where the third display is displayed, the first display region may be in the second visual recognition state [for example, FIG. 29 (d ′), FIG. 29 (C ]], A game table characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in addition to the first display area, other display areas such as the second display area may overlap the third area.

  At least a part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap each other or may not be overlapped. In a state where the third display is not displayed, the first display area may be configured to be in the second visual state, or may be in the second visual state. You may be comprised so that there may be no case.

  When the first display area is in the second visual recognition state, the third display may be displayed without fail.

  The third display may be a display prompting a game ball discharge operation or a display prompting an operation of the effect operation means. There may be a case where at least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area do not overlap. Conversely, at least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap, and the third display is displayed in the state where the third display is displayed. You may be comprised so that a 2nd display area may be in the said 4th visual recognition state.

  The third display may be displayed without fail. Only a part of the area where the third display is displayed and a part or all of the first display area may overlap, or the whole area where the third display is displayed And part or all of the first display area may overlap each other. In the state where the third display is displayed, the first display area may be configured to be always in the second visual state, or the first display area may be the second display area. There may be a case where it is not visible.

Also,
“The third display is a display that prompts the player to discharge the game ball [for example, a display of“ Pull out the ball ”shown in FIG. 29A, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“An operation means [for example, a chance button 136] that can be operated by the player,
The third display is a display including an image imitating the appearance of the operation means [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 29A, etc.] 136b and remaining period meter display 136c].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a second operation means (for example, a transmission part 191, a second chance button, an operation lever, etc.) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the third display simulates the appearance of the second operation means. It may be a display including the image.

  Furthermore, the third display is a display that can be displayed in one of a plurality of types of display modes, and one of the plurality of types of display modes is an image imitating the appearance of the operation means. One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode including an image obtained by enlarging the appearance of the operation means, and the third display is the first display mode. The display in the second display mode is more likely to succeed in a certain effect, the start of a certain effect is easier than the display in the first display mode, and the jackpot symbol is finally displayed. It may be easy to be done. In addition, in the area where the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the first display mode when the third display is displayed in the second display mode. May be easily overlapped with the second display area. As described above, the area where the third display is displayed may be easily overlapped or difficult to overlap with the second display area depending on the display mode of the third display, or the overlapping area may be wide or narrow. Or you may.

Also,
“An operation means [for example, a chance button 136] that can be operated by the player,
The third display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 29A, the arrow display 136b as the operation promotion display, and the remaining period meter display 136c] can be displayed.
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate,
The third display is a display including an image imitating the appearance of the operation means [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap (for example, FIG. 29C),
The area where the third display is displayed and the second display area are configured not to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (C)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the first display area overlaps the area where the third display is displayed. As described above, the area where the third display is displayed is referred to as a “third area”. Further, at least a part of the third region is referred to as a “third partial region”. Furthermore, at least a part of the first display area is referred to as a “first partial display area”.

  At least a part of the area where the third display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display area may be configured to overlap each other or may not be overlapped. The area where the third display is not displayed and the second display area may overlap each other.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to display a fourth display [for example, a display of“ pull out the sphere ”shown in FIG.
The fourth display is one of the displays prompting the player to operate,
The fourth display is a display prompting to discharge the game ball,
At least a part of the area where the fourth display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area are configured to overlap [for example, FIG. 29 (d ′)],
At least a part of the area where the fourth display is displayed and at least a part of the second display area are configured to overlap (for example, FIG. 29C),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, at least a part of the region where the fourth display is not displayed and at least a part of the first display region may be configured to overlap each other, or may be configured not to overlap. . At least a part of the area where the fourth display is not displayed and at least a part of the second display area may be overlapped or may not be overlapped.

Also,
In another state different from the second state [eg, a part of the initial operation immediately after power-on, a part or all of the state during the big hit game], the second display area It is configured so that there may be four visual states,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The “another state” mentioned here may be a state immediately after the power is turned on or a part or all of the state during the big hit game. Moreover, the state before the said 2nd state may be sufficient and the state after this 2nd state may be sufficient. Furthermore, “another one state” may be longer than the second state. However, it may be a short period.

Also,
“In another state different from the first state [for example, a part of the initial operation immediately after power-on, a part or all of the state during the big hit game], the first display area is It is configured to be in a second visual state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The “another state” mentioned here may be a state immediately after the power is turned on or a part or all of the state during the big hit game. Further, it may be a state before the first state, or a state after the first state. Furthermore, “another state” may be longer than the first state. However, it may be a short period.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
First movable means [for example, a first movable accessory 251 including a left arc portion 2511 and a right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, etc.]
A second movable means [for example, a family crest member 224E shown in FIG.
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The first movable means is movable means that can move to a first position [for example, a first position that is a position on the back side surrounding the circular region S3 ′ (see FIG. 32 (c))]
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is a first display area of the display area of the display means [for example, the first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p)]. Is configured to overlap from the front side,
The first display region is configured to be in a first visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it may not be completely opaque and a light transmission amount is relatively low)]. And
The first display region may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it may not be completely transparent and a light transmission amount is relatively increased)]. Configured,
The second viewing state is configured to make it easier to visually recognize the back side of the display area of the display means through the first display area than the first viewing state [for example, FIG. p) to (r)],
In one state in which the first display area is in the second visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as “first state”), the first movable unit is configured to be in the first position. [For example, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)],
The second movable means is movable means that can move to a second position [for example, a third position that is the position of the family crest character 224E represented by a solid black line in FIG. 32 (b)]
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be in the second position [for example, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)],
In the first state, the first effect is configured to be executed,
The first effect includes an effect including an effect performed by cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position [for example, 33 (p) to (r) shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The second position is a position in an area that overlaps the first display area from the front side.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'Even if the second movable means is moved to the second position, the first display area is not in the second visual state but remains in the first visual state. In some cases (hereinafter referred to as “some cases”) [for example, “when the first display area is not in the second viewing state” described in paragraph 1313]
In the certain case, the first performance is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The above-mentioned “production performed by the cooperation of the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position” is “the first The first movable means at the position and the second movable means at the second position are certain [for example, an effect representing a family crest with a decorative member arranged on the outer periphery]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The above-mentioned “production performed by the cooperation of the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position” is “the first The first movable means at the position and the second movable means at the second position appear in a three-dimensional combination. ''
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The third movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253] is provided,
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The third movable means moves from the third initial position [for example, the initial position (fourth position) of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to the third position [for example, FIG. ) Is movable means movable to the fifth position which is the position of the third movable accessory 253 represented by a dotted line in FIG.
The second movable means is movable means movable to a fifth position [for example, a sixth position which is the position of the family crest member 224E represented by a gray solid line in FIG. 32 (b)]
At least a part of the third movable means at the third position is a third display area of the display area of the display means [for example, the third display area 208-shown in FIG. 3] is configured to overlap from the front side,
It is configured to be able to execute the second production,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a normal notice effect that is a transmission effect in FIG. 35A] performed in a state where the third movable means is located at the third position,
The second effect is an effect executed after execution of the first effect,
At least a part of the state after the execution of the first effect and before the execution of the second effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, FIG. (P)], the second movable means is configured to be in the fifth position,
In the second state, the third movable means is configured to be in the third initial position [for example, a third movable accessory 253 indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)],
At least a part of the third movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253 indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 34 (p)] at the third initial position is the second position at the fifth position. It is configured to be overlapped from the front side by movable means [for example, the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 34 (p)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[Fourth movable means [for example, the second movable role 2521 for weak performance shown in FIG. 41 and / or the second movable role 2522 for strong performance]
The fourth movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The fourth movable means has a fourth position [for example, a position or / and a figure where the second movable accessory 2521 represented by the upper dotted line in FIG. 41 (c) is a movable means movable to a position where the second movable accessory 2522 represented by the upper dotted line matches the head of the character of Tono-sama]
It is configured to be able to execute the second production,
The second effect is an effect [for example, an effect shown in FIG. 42 (j) to FIG. 42 (k)] using the fourth movable means.
The second effect is an effect executed separately from the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to display the first display [for example, the display of the hold icon by the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the display of the ninja NJA mini character]
The first display is one display of a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"The second display [for example, pseudo-ream production, reach production, super reach production (swordsman reach production), display of variable icons according to the notice display mode]
The second display is one of the notice displays related to the changing pattern during the change,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[Third display [For example, “Pull out sphere” shown in FIG. 29 (a), etc., button image 136a shown in FIG. 34 (g), etc.], arrow display 136b as an operation promotion display, and the rest The period meter display 136c] can be displayed,
The third display is one of the displays prompting the player to perform an operation.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The third display is a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG.
At least a part of an area where the third display is displayed and at least a part of the first display area [for example, the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 34 (k)] overlap each other. Yes,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The third display is a display that prompts the player to discharge the game ball [for example, a display of“ Pull out the ball ”shown in FIG. 29 (a), etc.]
The entire region where the third display is displayed is configured to overlap a part or all of the first display region [for example, description in paragraph 1353],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[The first movable means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 including the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, etc.] Movable means that can move from the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 indicated by solid lines to the first position,
The first initial position is an initial position shifted from an area overlapping with the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L],
The first initial position is an initial position on the back side of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second movable means [for example, the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 32, etc.] is moved from the second initial position [for example, the position of the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 32 (b)] to the second position. Movable means that can be moved to
The second initial position is an initial position shifted from an area overlapping with the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L],
The second initial position is an initial position on the front side of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"The first light emitting means,
The first light emitting means is a light emitting means provided in the first movable means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 that is lit in the fourth display mode in FIG. 33 (q), etc.]
In the first performance, the first light emitting means is configured to emit light [eg, FIG. 33 (q)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'With a second light emitting means,
The second light emitting means is a light emitting means [for example, a light emitting means such as a full color LED described in paragraph 0448] provided in the second movable means,
In the first effect, the second light emitting means is configured to emit light [for example, FIG. 33 (q)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“In another state different from the first state [for example, a part of the initial operation immediately after power-on, a part or all of the state during the big hit game], the first display area is It is configured to be in a second visual state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
First movable means [for example, a first movable accessory 251 including a left arc portion 2511 and a right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, etc.]
A second movable means [for example, a family crest member 224E shown in FIG.
A third movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The first movable means is movable means that can move to a first position [for example, a first position that is a position on the back side surrounding the circular region S3 ′ (see FIG. 32 (c))]
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is a first display area of the display area of the display means [for example, the first display area 208-1 in FIG. 33 (p)]. Is configured to overlap from the front side,
The first display region is configured to be in a first visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it may not be completely opaque and a light transmission amount is relatively low)]. And
The first display region may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it may not be completely transparent and a light transmission amount is relatively increased)]. Configured,
The second viewing state is configured to make it easier to visually recognize the back side of the display area of the display means through the first display area than the first viewing state [for example, FIG. p) to (r)],
In one state in which the first display area is in the second visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as “first state”), the first movable unit is configured to be in the first position. [For example, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)],
The second movable means is movable means that can move to a second position [for example, a third position that is the position of the family crest character 224E represented by a solid black line in FIG. 32 (b)]
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be in the second position [for example, FIG. 33 (p) to FIG. 33 (r)],
In the first state, the first effect is configured to be executed,
The first effect includes an effect including an effect performed by cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position [for example, FIG. 33 (p) to (r) shown in FIG.
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The third movable means moves from the third initial position [for example, the initial position (fourth position) of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 32 (e)] to the third position [for example, FIG. ) Is movable means movable to the fifth position which is the position of the third movable accessory 253 represented by a dotted line in FIG.
The second movable means is movable means movable to a fifth position [for example, a sixth position which is the position of the family crest member 224E represented by a gray solid line in FIG. 32 (b)]
At least a part of the third movable means at the third position is a third display area of the display area of the display means [for example, the third display area 208-shown in FIG. 3] is configured to overlap from the front side,
It is configured to be able to execute the second production,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a normal notice effect that is a transmission effect in FIG. 35A] performed in a state where the third movable means is located at the third position,
The second effect is an effect executed after execution of the first effect,
At least a part of the state after the execution of the first effect and before the execution of the second effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, FIG. (P) to (q) state], the second movable means is configured to be in the fifth position,
In the second state, the third movable means is configured not to reach the third position [for example, a third line indicated by a dotted line in FIGS. 34 (p) to (q)]. Movable accessory 253],
The second state means that at least a part of the third movable means [for example, the third movable accessory 253 indicated by a dotted line in FIGS. 34 (p) to (q)] is the fifth position. The second movable means [for example, the family crest member 224E shown in FIG. 34 (p) to FIG. 34 (q)] is overlapped from the front side.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
First production means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 including the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, the lower half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c), etc. The part where the face of the samurai character is drawn],
Second rendering means [e.g., the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 32 or the like is drawn, or the upper half-like character of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) or the like. The part where the face of is drawn],
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
Multiple types of production can be performed,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect using the first effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 34 (k) to FIG. 34 (m), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (C)],
The second effect is an effect [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (d), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (F)] using the second effect means,
One of the first effects and the second effect may be performed in some cases. ]
Explained.

Also,
“At least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter,“ a display area ”) is in a first visual state [for example, an opaque state (however, it may not be completely opaque, light In a relatively low transmission amount)],
The certain display area may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it may not be completely transparent and a light transmission amount is relatively increased)]
The second viewing state is easier to visually recognize the region on the back side than the display region of the display means through the certain display region than the first viewing state,
The second effect means is movable means [e.g., the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 32 or the like is drawn, the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) or the like. Half of Tonosama character's face]
In the second effect, the second effect means is the second position [for example, the position of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (d), shown in FIG. 40 (F). It is an effect performed in a state at the position of the first movable accessory 251]
The second effect is a display area (hereinafter referred to as “second display area” [for example, the third display area 208-3 shown in FIG. 35, FIG. 40]. Display area 208-13].) Is performed in a certain state in which the second viewing state is achieved [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (d), FIG. 40 (F). The transmission effect shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means is a certain effect display [for example, the star display st shown in FIG. 42 (J),“ celebration on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 34 (h) to 35 (i) ”. Is a means that can display "
A certain state (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) of the state in which the second rendering means is moving toward the second position (for example, FIG. 40D to FIG. In the state of E), the state of FIG. 34 (q)], the second display area is in the first viewing state,
The certain effect display is displayed in the second state [for example, FIG. 42 (J), FIG. 34 (q)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first effect means is a movable means [for example, the first movable combination 251 including the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, the first movable combination shown in FIG. 39 (c), etc. The face of the character of the lower half of the object 251 is drawn],
In the first effect, the first effect means is the first position [for example, the position of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 34 (k) to FIG. 34 (m), shown in FIG. 40 (C). It is an effect performed in a state at the position of the first movable accessory 251]
The first effect is that at least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “first display area” [for example, the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 34, FIG. Display area 208-13].) Is performed in a certain state in which the second viewing state is achieved [for example, transmission effects shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to (m), FIG. 40 (C). The transmission effect shown in FIG.
The variation display of the decorative symbol in which the second effect is performed is more preferable than the variation display of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed. The confirmation display of the big hit symbol mode is easy to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The first position is a position in an area where the first display area overlaps from the front side.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[Equipped with third production means [for example, family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 32, etc.]
The third rendering means is a rendering means provided on the front side of the display means,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
In a state where the second effect means is not in the second position, the third effect means is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the second effect means [for example, FIG. 34 (p)-(q)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The second position is a position in an area where the second display area overlaps from the front side.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“In one variation display of the decorative design, after the production of either one of the first production and the second production, the other production may be performed [for example, FIG. B) to examples shown in FIG. (F), examples shown in FIGS. 34 to 35],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“In the above, the decorative design in which the second effect is performed is displayed rather than the variation display of the decorative design in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed. The variation display makes it easier to display the decisive display of the jackpot symbol. “The variation of the decorative design in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed. The display of the big symbol pattern mode is easier to display in the variation display of the decorative design in which only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed than the display. That is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
First production means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 including the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, the lower half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c), etc. The part on which the face of the samurai character is drawn, the shutter actors 246L and 246R shown in FIG. 44 (a), the face rendering means 2510G of the face of the samurai character shown in FIG. 44 (a), FIG. 45 (d), etc. Ring-shaped accessory 251R],
Second rendering means [e.g., the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 32 or the like is drawn, or the upper half-like character of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) or the like. The face drawing means 2510G of the frog character shown in FIG. 44 (A), the Tono-like character face directing means 2510Y shown in FIG. 44 (D), FIG. 45 (E), etc. A circular accessory 251C] shown in FIG.
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
Multiple types of production can be performed,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect using the first effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to (m), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (C), and FIG. ), A transmission effect shown in FIG. 45 (d) to the transmission effect shown in FIG.
The second effect is an effect using the second effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (d), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (F), and FIG. ), A transmission effect shown in FIGS. 45 (E) to (F)],
The first effect and the second effect are not executed simultaneously,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In this game machine, a plurality of types of effects may be executed without fail. Further, “the first effect and the second effect are not executed simultaneously” means that there is no period in which the first effect and the second effect are executed simultaneously. May be.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
First production means [for example, the first movable accessory 251 including the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, the lower half of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c), etc. The part on which the face of the samurai character is drawn, the shutter actors 246L and 246R shown in FIG. 44 (a), the face rendering means 2510G of the face of the samurai character shown in FIG. 44 (a), FIG. 45 (d), etc. Ring-shaped accessory 251R],
Second rendering means [e.g., the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 32 or the like is drawn, or the upper half-like character of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 39 (c) or the like. The face drawing means 2510G of the frog character shown in FIG. 44 (A), the Tono-like character face directing means 2510Y shown in FIG. 44 (D), FIG. 45 (E), etc. A circular accessory 251C] shown in FIG.
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first effect means is effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second effect means is an effect means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second effect means is an effect means including a light emitting means [for example, LED] [for example, an LED is built in or provided in the periphery]
Multiple types of production can be performed,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect using the first effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to (m), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (C), and FIG. ), A transmission effect shown in FIG. 45 (d) to the transmission effect shown in FIG.
The second effect is an effect using the second effect means [for example, the transmission effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (d), the transmission effect shown in FIG. 40 (F), and FIG. ), A transmission effect shown in FIGS. 45 (E) to (F)],
The first effect and the second effect are not executed simultaneously,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In this game machine, a plurality of types of effects may be executed without fail. Further, “the first effect and the second effect are not executed simultaneously” means that there is no period in which the first effect and the second effect are executed simultaneously. May be.

Also,
“At least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as“ a certain display area ”) is in a first visual state [for example, an opaque state (but not necessarily completely opaque). , The amount of light transmission is relatively low)),
The certain display area may be in a second visual state [for example, a transparent state (however, it may not be completely transparent and a light transmission amount is relatively increased)]
The second viewing state is easier to visually recognize the region on the back side than the display region of the display means through the certain display region than the first viewing state,
The second effect means is movable means [e.g., the third movable accessory 253 on which the face of the Tono-sama character shown in FIG. 32 etc. is drawn, the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. A portion in which the face of the half-like character is drawn, a directing means 2510Y for the face of the noble-like character shown in FIG. 44 (D), and a circular accessory 251C] shown in FIG. 45 (E),
In the second effect, the second effect means is the second position [for example, the position of the third movable accessory 253 shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG. 35 (d), shown in FIG. 40 (F). It is performed in the state of the position of the first movable accessory 251, the position of the face rendering means 2510 </ b> Y shown in FIG. 44D, and the position of the circular accessory 251 </ b> C shown in FIG. Production
The second effect is a display area (hereinafter referred to as “second display area” [for example, the third display area 208-3 shown in FIG. 35, FIG. 40]. The display area 208-13 shown in FIG. 44, the area where the eyelid image shown in FIG. 44 is opened, and the circular center area 208-C shown in FIG. [For example, the transmission effects shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to (d), the transmission effects shown in FIG. 40 (F), the transmission effects shown in FIG. 44 (D), and FIGS. 45 (E) to (F). The transmission effect shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The certain display area may be the entire display area or only a part of the display area of the display means. Further, the certain display area may be necessarily in the second visual recognition state.

  The second display area may also be the entire display area of the display area of the display means or only a part of the display area.

Also,
“The display means is a certain effect display [for example, the star display st shown in FIG. 42 (J), the“ celebration ”on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. , Display of button images 136a to 136c shown in FIG. 44 (d), and display of a fully closed eyelid image shown in FIG. 44 (c)].
A certain state (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) of the state in which the second rendering means is moving toward the second position (for example, FIG. 40D to FIG. In the state of E), the state of FIG. 34 (q), the state of FIG. 44 (d), the state of FIG. 44 (c)], the second display area is in the first viewing state
The certain effect display is displayed in the second state [for example, FIG. 42 (J), FIG. 34 (q), FIG. 44 (d), FIG. 44 (c)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying a certain effect display. In addition, the second state may be a part of the state where the second rendering means is moving toward the second position, or may be a whole state. Good. Furthermore, the certain effect display may be a display that may be displayed in a state other than the second state, or a display that is always displayed in a state other than the second state. May be. Alternatively, the certain effect display may be a display that may be displayed only in the second state, or a display that is always displayed only in the second state. May be.

Also,
The first effect means is a movable means [for example, the first movable combination 251 including the left arc portion 2511 and the right arc portion 2512 shown in FIG. 32, the first movable combination shown in FIG. 39 (c), etc. The part of the lower half of the object 251 where the face of the frog character is drawn, the face character rendering means 2510G shown in FIG. And
In the first effect, the first effect means is the first position [for example, the position of the first movable accessory 251 shown in FIG. 34 (k) to FIG. 34 (m), shown in FIG. 40 (C). In the state of the position of the first movable accessory 251, the position of the face rendering means 2510 G of the frog character shown in FIG. 44 (a), and the position of the ring-shaped accessory 251 R shown in FIG. It is a production to be performed,
The first effect is that at least a part of the display area of the display means (hereinafter referred to as “first display area” [for example, the first display area 208-1 shown in FIG. 34, FIG. The display area 208-13 shown, the part where the wrinkle image shown in FIG. 44 (a) is opened, and the ring-shaped area 208-R shown in FIG. 45 (c), etc.) are in the second viewing state. Production performed in a certain state [for example, transmission production shown in FIGS. 34 (k) to (m), transmission production shown in FIG. 40 (C), transmission production shown in FIG. 44 (a), FIG. 45 (d) ) To the transmission effect shown in FIG.
The variation display of the decorative symbol in which the second effect is performed is more preferable than the variation display of the decorative symbol in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed. The confirmation display of the big hit symbol mode is easy to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect may be an effect that may be performed while the first effect means is in the first position, or may be an effect that is always performed. The first display area may be the entire display area of the display area of the display means, or may be a partial display area. Further, the certain state may be an entire state in which the first display area is in the second visual state or a part of the state.

Also,
`` The first position is a position in an area where the first display area overlaps from the front side.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also,
The first effect means is an effect means provided on the front side of the second effect means [for example, the face effect means 2510G for the frog character shown in FIG. The shutter actors 246L and 246R shown in FIG.
In a certain state [for example, the fully closed state of the shutter actors 246L and 246M] in the state before the second effect is started, the first effect is placed at a position overlapping at least a part of the second effect means. One production means is located,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first effect means may be located at a position that overlaps with all of the second effect means, or the first effect means is located at a position that overlaps only a part of the second effect means. May be located.

Also,
[Equipped with third production means [for example, family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 32, etc.]
The third rendering means is a rendering means provided on the front side of the display means,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
In a state where the second effect means is not in the second position, the third effect means is located at a position overlapping at least a part of the second effect means [for example, FIG. 34 (p)-(q)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third effect means may be located at a position that overlaps all of the second effect means, or the third effect means is located at a position that overlaps only a part of the second effect means. May be located.

Also,
`` The second position is a position in an area where the second display area overlaps from the front side.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[In one variation display of decorative symbols, the other effect may be performed after the effect of either one of the first effect and the second effect is performed [for example, FIG. B) to the example shown in FIG. (F), the example shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 35, the ray shown in FIG. 44 (b) to FIG. 44 (e), and the example shown in FIG. 44 (a) to FIG. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In one variation display of the decorative symbol, the other effect may be always performed after one effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed.

Also,
“In the above, the decorative design in which the second effect is performed is displayed rather than the variation display of the decorative design in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed. The variation display makes it easier to display the decisive display of the jackpot symbol. “The variation of the decorative design in which only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed. The display of the big symbol pattern mode is easier to display in the variation display of the decorative design in which only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is performed than the display. That is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 79].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A notice means capable of executing multiple kinds of notices;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means,
The on-hold display is a display according to the number of operations of the symbol variation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”).
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested,
In a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number larger than the first number than the case where the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons is consumed by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to win if the number of two is digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same form as the notice form,
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one time symbol variation display is executed. It is configured so that is more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A holding display means capable of executing display according to the holding number;
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Pre-fetch notice means that can perform pre-read notice,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
In a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is being executed, the notice icon may be digested to the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon that is digested in the period during which the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number;
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may start as the notice icon,
The first notice icon that has been displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 15 or 16,
As the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During a single symbol variation display, the second number of the first notice icons is digested rather than the first number of the first notice icons being digested. Easy to become,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the digested symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the prefetch effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Providing production control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 27,
Main control means;
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
A first display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying in the hold display area a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the big hit is when the second number digest is larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become,
The second display means displays in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second figure change display”), which is a target of prefetching, is started. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to appendix 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form,
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The game table characterized in that the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means.

(Appendix 34)
A gaming machine according to attachment 33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a holding display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The game stand, wherein the hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.

(Appendix 35)
A gaming machine according to appendix 34,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
In the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be consumed by the fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display according to the number of suspensions is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 38,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
The notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start displaying,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 40,
The hold display area is an area that can display up to a seventh number according to the number of holds,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 41,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 42,
Main control means;
Production control means;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 43,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple notice icons”) may be digested until the end,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In a single symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first number of notice icons”) is digested, so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by showing the number of the notice icons as the symbol fluctuation before the reservation to be prefetched.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or may be three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, an effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, and when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding presentation display B may be performed, or the presentation display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. May be performed.

  In addition, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to appendix 45,
Even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “second number of notice icons”) is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers;
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon including one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol variation display. If the first effect display is not displayed, there may be a case where a player who can see the first effect display can be given a sense of superiority.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be digested without fail.

  In addition, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured such that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to appendix 45 or 46,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  In addition, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
48. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 45 to 47,
In the case where the loss symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”), which is a prefetch target, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed before the end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a case of loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or the case of the loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is the case where the result of the symbol variation display to be prefetched is a big hit or a case of loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the pre-read target is a big hit or a case of a loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game machine, even if a notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 49,
With hold display means,
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on hold (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The on-hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix 51)
The gaming machine according to appendix 50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

(Appendix 52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern appears by applying a lens cut to the light guide plate and irradiating with a light source from the side. , May be constituted by light emitting means such as LED, or may be constituted by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the notice icon being stocked, a display related to the notice icon being digested, or a notice of the notice icon stock. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The gaming machine according to appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  One notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the effect that a notice icon is digested with a 2nd display means.

(Appendix 56)
The game stand according to appendix 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the “display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed” may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “notice icon digest effect”) is performed.
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may also be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means where the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming machine according to appendix 59,
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be cases where the first movable means effect is not performed. Means effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect with a different operation).

  Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be given by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon is digested. Then, the production by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Appendix 61)
The game stand according to appendix 59 or 60,
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed. When the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be performed.

(Appendix 62)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 61,
With operating means,
The movable means is the operating means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operation means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, “change” means to include deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 62,
Comprising a second movable means;
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed. When the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be displayed without fail.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only with one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed with only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine according to appendix 64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the change at which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that a notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
One icon of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of gasses in which the notice icon does not increase.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
Of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display, the twelfth number of the notice icons may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means;
Hold indication means,
A game machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern change display”) to be read ahead is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
In the case where the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming machine according to appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a pre-read display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The game stand according to appendix 68 or 69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth hold display”) of the loss symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth pattern change display”), which is the target of prefetching, is displayed. The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first display may be an explanation display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanation display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and the frequency of occurrence of one notification effect are changed. There are modes to make it happen.

  In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be displayed in advance of the display position of the animation on the way. The icon display position may be closer to the second display area.

  Here, the “notice icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only some of the notice icons, or may be all of the notice icons. The notice icon may be used. Further, the “notice icon” may be only a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of notice icons including a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. The display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon need not be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. In addition, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, and the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display is not performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game stand according to appendix 71 or 72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the current and next symbol change display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give a new expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading notice display is digested.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

  Further, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display.

  The notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may be digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be necessarily digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayed only by a single icon, or may be configured to be able to display a plurality of icons. Here, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 71 to 76,
The second display area is an area partitioned by lines.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
“The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed” as described in Supplementary Note 71. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed. "
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 78,
The number of the notice icons is consumed more in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is lost,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The big hit fluctuation is more digested than the loss fluctuation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to appendix 80, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The game stand according to appendix 81,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 82,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current stage of production,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game stand according to appendix 83, wherein
Even if the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the stage is changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple types of notification icons”) as the notification icon.
One icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first performance,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display;
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 87)
The game stand according to appendix 86,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming machine according to appendix 87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 89,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 90,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming machine according to appendix 91, wherein
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

  The first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the expectation degree of reach for the reach.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the character's jackpot expectation.

  The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first notice display.

(Appendix 93)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first notice icon”),
The second display is a display including a display representing the first notice icon in a large size,
The first display may be made after the second display is made.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged display of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming machine according to appendix 93,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of decorative symbols,
The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The game stand according to appendix 93 or 94,
The third display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 95,
The first display is a display displayed in a hold display frame.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 96,
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.
(Appendix 98)
A gaming machine according to appendix 97,
The second display is a display also performed when the first notice icon is digested.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The game stand according to appendix 97 or 98,
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the already obtained notice icon is enlarged and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
A gaming machine according to attachment 100,
The display of the position among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In the portion expanded from the first display of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “expanded portion”), the fourth display can be displayed.
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
A gaming machine according to appendix 101,
The effect display is a prefetch notice display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
A gaming machine according to appendix 101 or appendix 102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable,
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 100 to 103,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a serif notice,
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to symbol variation display,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design variation display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The game stand according to appendix 105,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In the portion of the second display expanded from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “extended portion”), the fourth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The game stand according to appendix 106,
The effect display is a display of a pre-read notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The game stand according to appendix 106 or appendix 107,
The effect display is a display that changes a display mode of the icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 106 to 108,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 106 to 109,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of lines,
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes 106 to 110,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 111,
The icon is a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
A gaming machine according to attachment 112, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 114,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
Operation means;
The first area,
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The number of times of accepting the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (hereinafter referred to as “the number of times of acceptance”) can be increased or decreased.
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
A display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
In the first button effect, the first display may be displayed when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed,
Even if the number of receptions is 0, the second display may be displayed.
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to appendix a3 or a4,
In the first button effect, the display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”) in the second button effect.
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
When the operation means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a6,
When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a7,
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a8,
With a second region,
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When a game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
The first area,
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
When a game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe display does not overlap the second display,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b3)
The game stand according to appendix b2,
The wipe display is displayed in a partial area of the display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The first display is displayed as a display for changing the display mode of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
The third display is a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The display of the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b6,
When a game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b7,
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,
With a second region,
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the next symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) after the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”). Yes,
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first variation icon”) can be displayed.
The icon displayed as the first variation icon is configured to be displayed as a notice icon in the second symbol variation display,
The area where the notice icon is displayed is an area different from the area where the first variation icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c2)
The game stand according to appendix c1,
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation icon”) can be displayed.
Both the second variation icon and the notice icon are configured to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c3)
The game stand according to appendix c1 or c2,
The icon that was displayed as the hold icon can be displayed as a variable icon,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode,
The notice icon of the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c4)
A game machine according to appendix c3,
The notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c5)
A gaming table according to appendix c3 or c4,
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode,
The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon,
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c5,
The display mode of the notice icon is different from the display mode of the fluctuation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
An animation including movement of the notice icon can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
The display means includes an image display device.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c8,
In the non-electric support state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d2)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned on,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d3)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means for emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that emits light in a second light emitting mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d3,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d4,
The second display is a display that does not start only by a long press of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first display is configured so that the first display can be started as the operation means is repeatedly hit when the operation means is pressed for a long time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d6,
The long press means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d8)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation unit performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode.
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
In the second display, a second number of operations are performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode, compared to a case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode. The display is easier to start,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second number is a number exceeding 1,
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d9)
A game machine according to appendix d8,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that enters a light emitting state,
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that enters a non-light emitting state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d10)
A game machine according to appendix d8,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting mode,
The second light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d11)
A gaming machine according to appendix d9 or d10,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d11,
One of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d12,
The second display is a display that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d13,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d15)
A game machine according to appendix d14,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated in the first number of times in the first operating mode in a pseudo manner. Is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d15,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix d17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d16,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d18)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second effect is that the operation unit performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is a production that is easier to start,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d19)
A game machine according to appendix d18,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d20)
A gaming machine according to appendix d18 or d19,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d21)
A gaming machine according to appendix d20,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as if the operating means was operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. Configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d21,
The second effect is an effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d22,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means to be in a second state in a state where an operation for starting the second effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d24)
A game machine according to appendix d23,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d25)
A game machine according to appendix d23,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d26)
A game machine according to appendix d25,
The first aspect is a first color;
The second aspect is a second color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d27)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d23 to d26,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d28)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d27,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d29)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plural types of displays is a display of a fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”),
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the first number of operations by the operation means is performed in the first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display;
The fourth display is a display that is displayed when one image of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode in the first operation mode more than when the operation unit is operated once in the second operation mode during execution of the fourth display. Is the image that is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d30)
A game machine according to appendix d29,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display different from the first display,
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d31)
A gaming machine according to appendix d29 or d30,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d32)
A gaming machine according to appendix d31,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that enters a light emitting state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d32,
One of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d33,
The first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d34,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d36)
In the game stand described in appendix d35,
When the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time, the operation means is assumed to have been operated the first number of times in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner. One display is configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d36,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d36,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d39)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first selection display,
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode more than when the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed by means
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d40)
A game machine according to appendix d39,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d41)
A game machine according to appendix d39 or d40,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d42)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d41,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d43)
A game machine according to appendix d42,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as if the operating means was operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. Configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d44)
The game stand according to appendix d42 or d43,
During the execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operation means is being operated is maintained for the first time or longer, the operation means has been operated once. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d45)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d44,
The first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d45,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display,
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The second image is an image that can be selected when the operation unit performs the third number of operations in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d47)
A game machine according to appendix d46,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d48)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d47,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second state during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d49)
A game machine according to appendix d48,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d50)
A game machine according to appendix d48,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d51)
A gaming machine according to appendix d50,
The first aspect is a first color;
The second aspect is a second color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d51,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d54)
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may start during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed even when the operation means is pressed and held after the display of the third display is started,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”).
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may start when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operation means once after the display of the fourth display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d55)
A game machine according to appendix d54,
Equipped with light emitting means that can emit light in multiple types of light emission states

The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of light emission states is a first light emission state,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the light emitting means is a means which is in the first light emitting state in a state where the operation of the operating means is accepted.

(Appendix d56)
A game machine according to appendix d55,
One light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state,
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
The light emitting means is in the lighting state, indicating that it is in a state of accepting operation of the operating means,
The light emitting means is in the extinguished state, and represents that the operation means is not accepted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d57)
A game machine according to appendix d55,
One light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state,
The first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode,
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d57,
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d59)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d58,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “selection display”) instructing to select one option from the plurality of options.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display”) displayed when a first option of the plurality of options is selected.
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started,
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d60)
A game machine according to appendix d59,
The fifth display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a first number after the display of the selection display is started,
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d61)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d60,
When the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started, the display of the first display may be started assuming that the operation means is repeatedly hit. A game table characterized by being configured.

(Appendix d62)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d61,
Long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d63)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d62,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d64)
A game machine according to appendix d63,
The first state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the first display is received.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d65)
A gaming machine according to appendix d63 or d64,
The second state is a state of receiving an operation for starting display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d66)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d63 to d65,
The first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since becoming the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d67)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d63 to d66,
The second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since becoming the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d68)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d67,
The second display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a second number after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d69)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d68,
The third display is a display including a first image,
The first image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d70)
A game machine according to appendix d69,
The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d71)
A game machine according to appendix d70,
The second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d72)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d71,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d73)
A first operating means;
A second directing means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d74)
A gaming machine according to appendix d73,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d73 is “effects executed when the second effect means emits light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d75)
A gaming machine according to appendix d73 or d74,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d76)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d73 to d75,
With a third stage,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering means is a means provided in the third rendering means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d77)
A game machine according to appendix d76,
The third rendering means is an image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d78)
A gaming machine according to appendices d73 to d77,
The second rendering means is means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
A gaming machine with a first operating means,
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
A game machine according to appendix d79,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d79 is “effects executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
A gaming machine according to appendix d81,
The second rendering means is means capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
The first light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d82,
With a third stage,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering means is a means provided in the third rendering means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
A game machine according to appendix d83,
With a fourth directing means,
The fourth rendering means is a second image display means,
The fourth presentation means is a means provided in the third presentation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 79 to 84,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may start during display of the symbol variation display,
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d85,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d86,
The “operation in the first operation mode” described in the appendix d79 is “multiple operation”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d87,
The “operation in the second operation mode” described in the appendix d79 is a “long press operation”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d89)
A game machine according to appendix d88,
The long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
A gaming machine with a first operating means,
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second production is a back button production,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
A game machine according to appendix d79,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
A game machine according to appendix d80,
“The effect executed by the first effect means” described in the supplementary note d80 is “the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the first display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
The second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game stand according to appendix 82,
“The effect executed by the first effect means” described in the supplementary note 82 is “the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the second display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
A second directing means,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d85)
A game machine according to appendix d84,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d84 is “effects executed when the second effect means emits light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to execute multiple types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be started,
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second display is not started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
A gaming machine according to appendix d86,
The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
A gaming table according to appendix d86 or d87,
The second display is a display that is displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying mini-games;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display”) includes a display prompting an operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation promotion display”). And
The effect display related to the mini game (hereinafter referred to as “second effect display”) is a display including a display prompting an operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation promotion display”). ,
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in the first period,
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in the second period,
The first display and the second display are periods in which at least a part overlaps (hereinafter referred to as “third period”);
The result of the first effect display is performed as a notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”),
The result of the second effect display is performed as a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter referred to as “second notice”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e2)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
If the operation means is operated during the third period, the first notice corresponding to the second notice is made after the second notice is made,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e3)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
If there is an operation of the operating means in the third period, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is performed,
The first notice may change according to the second notice after the second notice has been made,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e3,
In the third period, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The second effect display is a display including a display of an effective period of the operation means related to the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e5,
The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
In the case where the first notice is performed in the second aspect rather than in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol is configured to be easily displayed in a final manner.
When the mini-game is started, the first notice is more easily performed in the second aspect than in the first aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e7)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
The second notice is configured to be executed in the fourth aspect when the first notice is executed in the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e8)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect rather than in the third aspect, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed.
The first case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finalized and displayed in the first case than the second case,
The second case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed in the second case than the third case,
The third case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed in the third case than the fourth case.
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e9)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect rather than in the third aspect, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed.
In the first case and the second case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the first case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily. Has been
In the second case and the third case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the second case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed. Has been
In the third case and the fourth case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the third case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily. Has been
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9,
The number of times that the operation means required for the result of the first effect display is performed and the number of times the operation means required for the result of the second effect display are operated Is different,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e10,
In the event that the mini-game is performed and the first notice is performed, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finalized more easily than the case where the first notice is performed without the mini-game. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e12)
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of performing decorative symbol variation display,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
Multiple types of mini-games are configured to be executable,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game,
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a certain display area,
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e13)
A gaming machine according to appendix e12,
Provide notice means that can execute multiple notices,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The case where the second notice is made rather than the case where the first notice is made is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily,
One of the results of the first mini-game is a result (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) indicating that the second notice is to be performed.
One of the results of the second mini-game is the second result.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e14)
A gaming table according to appendix e12 or e13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
When the first mini game is performed, the first production is configured more easily than the second production,
When the second mini game is performed, the second effect is more easily performed than the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e14,
The appearance rate of the plurality of types of mini-games differs between the non-electric support state and the electric support state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e12 to e15,
The first mini game is a mini game performed with the first character appearing,
The second mini game is a mini game performed with the first character appearing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e17)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix e13,
The first mini game is a game that may be performed with the first character appearing,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the first character appearing,
The first mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the appearance of a third character,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the appearance of a fourth character,
In the first mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the third character appears than when the first character appears,
In the second mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e12 to e17,
In the certain display area, when the mini game is not displayed, another effect display (hereinafter referred to as “third effect display”) is performed.
When the mini game is started, the third effect display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e18,
The certain display area is partitioned by a frame,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e19,
The certain display area is a preset display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e21)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e20,
The certain display area is formed by enlarging a display area preset in connection with the start of the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
The certain display area is an area provided in the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
Provided with a display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”) different from the display means,
The certain display area is an area provided in the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e24)
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices;
Display means capable of displaying mini-games;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The case where the second notice is performed rather than the first notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed and confirmed easily.
The mini game is a game in which a plurality of results are prepared,
One of the plurality of results is a first result;
One of the plurality of results is a second result;
The notice is a notice executed according to the result of the mini-game,
The second notice is more easily performed when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e25)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix e24,
Before the result of the mini game is derived, the result of the mini game becomes the second result, which suggests that the second notice is likely to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e26)
A game machine according to appendix e24 or e25,
Providing directing means that can execute the first directing,
The effect means is a display means,
The first effect is an effect performed in relation to the decorative symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared,
One of the plurality of performance results is a first performance result,
One of the plurality of performance results is a second performance result,
Before the result of the first effect is derived, it is suggested that the result of the first effect becomes an advantageous development by becoming the second effect result,
Benefits that are more advantageous to the player than the second result is more likely to be given to the player,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e27)
A game machine according to appendix e26,
When the second performance result is derived, a big hit is given,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e28)
The game stand according to appendix e26 or e27,
The mini game is a game that can be executed in the first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed in the second period,
The first period and the second period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e29)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e26 to e28,
In one decorative symbol variation display, the mini game is started before the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e29,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived,
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice is easier to perform than the second notice,
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than the first notice.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e31)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e24 to e30,
Even if the second notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e32)
A gaming machine according to appendix e31,
There is a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e33)
A gaming machine according to appendix e31,
There is a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol is not changed. Changing from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display starting after the change display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e29,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
In the mini game, the same result is derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e34,
The mini-game starts before reaching,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e36)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying a mini game,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means,
The mini game results change depending on the operation status of the operation means,
The result of the mini-game may include a result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) that is not related to the result of the determination of success or failure.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e37)
A gaming machine according to appendix e36,
The mini-game is a game aimed at achieving a certain problem,
Whether or not the certain problem is achieved depends on the operation status of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e38)
The game stand according to appendix e36 or e37,
Decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
The mini-game is a game that may be started in a first period (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended,
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e39)
A gaming machine according to appendix e38,
An automatic operation of the operation means is configured to be executable,
In the mini game in the first case, the auto operation is configured to be impossible to execute,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e40)
The game stand according to appendix e38 or e39,
The mini game may be started in a second period (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The second period is a period including the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game,
In the first case, the first result is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than in the second case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e41)
The game stand according to appendix e40,
The second period is a period not including the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e42)
The game stand according to appendix e40 or e41,
In the second case, a result related to the result of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than in the first case. A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e43)
A gaming machine according to appendix e42,
The second result when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a pre-read notice,
The second result in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a pre-reading notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e40 to e43,
The type of mini game is different between the first case and the second case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e45)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e40 to e44,
In the mini game in the first case, an effective period display (hereinafter referred to as “first effective period display”) of the operating means is configured to be displayed.
In the mini game in the second case, an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second effective period display”) is displayed.
The first effective period display is a meter display,
The second effective period display is a meter display,
The speed at which the meter decreases is different between the first effective period display and the second effective period display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e40 to e45,
In the mini game in the first case, a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation promotion display”) is displayed.
In the mini game in the second case, a display for urging the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation promotion display”) is displayed.
The first operation promotion display includes a first number of display patterns,
The second operation promotion display includes a second number of display patterns,
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e47)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e38 to e46,
In the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e48)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display,
The second effect display is a mini game effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”) may be executed,
The second effect display is an effect display in which a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter referred to as “second notice”) may be derived.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e49)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbols in the pseudo-continuous display will increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e50)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the pseudo continuous display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e51)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbols in the pseudo-continuous display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f1)
A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first production can be started according to the operation of the first operation means,
The second operating means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states in which the first effect is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first effect may be a notice effect. The second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a small operating means.

(Appendix f2)
A game machine according to appendix f1,
The first state is a state in the entire period in which the first effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f3)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix f1 or f2,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
When the second operation means is operated within the second period, the second effect is started, and when the second operation device is operated, the second effect is not started. Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the second period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The second operating means may be an operating means that always vibrates when the second operating means is operated within the second period.

(Appendix f4)
A gaming machine according to appendix f3,
The second operating means is configured to vibrate even in at least a part of the state in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter referred to as “second state”),
The first state is a state where the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
When the first effect is started when the first operation means is operated within the first period, and when the first effect is not started even when the first operation means is operated, Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  That is, even when the first effect is not executed, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate or configured to vibrate without fail.

(Appendix f6)
A gaming machine according to appendix f5,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,
The first notification is a notification prompting the operation of the first operation means,
The first notification is configured to be performed within the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

  That is, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated in a state where the first notification is being executed, It may be an operating means.

(Appendix f7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f6,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
According to the operation of the first operation means, it is configured such that any one of the first effect and the third effect can be started,
In the state where the third effect is being executed, the second operating means is configured not to vibrate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f7,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f8,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine.

(Appendix f10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices f1 to f8,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The first display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display related to the operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is configured such that a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first notice display”) is started in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g2)
The game stand according to appendix g1,
The first notice display is a display including a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g3)
A gaming table according to the appendix g1 or g2,
The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during execution of an effect,
The certain performance is configured to develop after the first notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g4)
A gaming machine according to appendix g3,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display;
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period,
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third notice display”),
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third notice display starts to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g5)
The game stand according to appendix g4,
The third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period,
The first notice display is a display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated,
The first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second notice display”) is performed before the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g7)
The game stand according to appendix g6,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a second display mode,
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fourth display mode,
The case in which the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display form is more in accordance with the third display form than the case in which the second notice display is displayed in the second display form. It ’s designed to make it easier to display the first notice.
When the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g6,
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display;
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed in a sixth display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
The first advance notice according to the third display mode is more effective when the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode. The display is organized to make it easier to see,
When the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices g1 to g8,
The first notice display is a display that is displayed in at least a part of the remaining period of the operation effective period,
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period is a third period,
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the second period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a fourth period.
The second period is longer than the first period;
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g10)
The game stand according to appendix g9,
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same length as the operation effective period, or a length shorter than the operation effective period,
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation effective period, or a length shorter than the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g11)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying the first display;
A game machine equipped with
The first display is a display including a display relating to an operation effective period of the operation means,
The first display is configured so that a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first notice display”) is started in response to the operation means being operated,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first notice display is a display including a display relating to an operation effective period of the operation means.

(Appendix g12)
A gaming machine according to appendix g11,
The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during execution of an effect,
The certain performance is configured to develop after the first notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g13)
A gaming machine according to appendix g12,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display;
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated during the operation effective period,
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third notice display”),
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third notice display starts to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g14)
A gaming machine according to appendix g13,
The third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period,
The first notice display is a display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g14,
The first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated,
The first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”) is performed before the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g16)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g15,
One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display;
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,
The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in the sixth display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode,
In the case where the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode than in the case where the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode, the first display by the third display body sulfur is performed. Is configured to make it easier to display
When the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display form.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g11 to g16,
The first notice display is a display that is displayed in at least a part of the remaining period of the operation effective period,
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the first period has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period is a third period,
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after the second period has elapsed since the start of the operation effective period is a fourth period.
The second period is longer than the first period;
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g18)
A gaming machine according to appendix g17,
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same length as the operation effective period, or a length shorter than the operation effective period,
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same length as the operation effective period, or a length shorter than the operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g19)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The first display is a display related to a certain effect,
The second display is a display related to the certain effect,
The first display is a display that may be temporarily displayed as a display constituting at least part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of the decorative symbols,
The first display and the second display are at least partially different.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g20)
A gaming machine according to appendix g19,
The game table characterized in that the certain effect is an effect that starts after the first display is displayed.

(Appendix g21)
A gaming machine according to appendix g19 or g20,
The first display is a display provided with a first number of patterns,
The second display is a display provided with a second number of patterns,
The second number is greater than the first number;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g22)
The game stand according to appendix g21,
The first number is one;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g23)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g22,
The combination of the decorative designs is three,
The certain effect is an effect that starts when the three first displays are once displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the display modes of the three first displays may be the same, or some or all of them may be different from each other.

(Appendix g24)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g22,
The combination of the decorative designs is three,
The combination of the decorative symbols is configured to be displayed once in sequence,
The certain effect is an effect that starts when the first display is displayed as a decorative symbol that is temporarily displayed once in the combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g25)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g24,
The display means may be a means for displaying a notice display for notifying that the first display may be displayed once during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is configured to be easier to display once when the notice display is displayed than when the notice display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g25,
The decorative symbol variation display is configured so that a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure is confirmed and displayed after the variation of the decorative symbol is started.
The first display is a display that is not fixedly displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g27)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g26,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The certain effect is an effect using the operation means,
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means,
The first display is a display that does not include a display relating to the operation effective period of the operation means,
The second display is a display including a display related to an operation effective period of the operation means in the certain performance.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g28)
A gaming machine according to appendix g27,
The first display is a display that is displayed before the operation effective period of the operation means in the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g19 to g26,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
The operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states,
One of the plurality of states is a first state;
One of the plurality of states is a second state;
The first state and the second state are different states,
The first display is a display having a display pattern corresponding to the operation means in the first state (hereinafter referred to as “first display pattern”),
The second display is a display provided with a display pattern (hereinafter referred to as “second display pattern”) corresponding to the operation means in the second state,
The second display is a display having the first display pattern,
The second display is a display having the second display pattern,
When the second display is displayed in the second display pattern in the certain effect after the first display is displayed in the first display pattern (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). )
The operation means in the first case is configured to be more easily in the second state than in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described so far.

(Appendix h1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain performance is performed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that may notify that the time until the certain effect is started changes,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the “certain effect” may be an effect by display and effect moving means (including image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versatile lighter, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix h2)
A game machine according to appendix h1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Moreover, the display mode of the first display may change only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix h3)
A gaming machine according to appendix h1 or h2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h4)
A game machine according to appendix h3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
The first image display means may be overlapped by the second image display means on which the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h5,
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h6,
If the second display is displayed, it is easier to hit a big hit than if it is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
One type of display of multiple types is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the substitute sign is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h7,
Providing production moving means,
The effect moving means is means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations,
One type of the plurality of types of operations is a production operation,
The certain effect is an effect operation by the effect moving means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, an operation other than the presentation operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the presentation operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect moving means is not limited to that provided on the game board, and may be provided on a frame (front door), for example.

(Appendix h10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h1 to h9,
The case where the certain effect occurs is easier to hit than the case where it does not occur,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h10,
A hot production display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h11,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h1 to h11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h14)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for informing a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Before the first timing, the period display may be erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to reach, but may be during fluctuation or during big hit. Even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Appendix h15)
A game machine according to appendix h14,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third effect display,
The timing at which the third effect display is displayed by the period display may not be notified,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification other than an error such as a prepaid card removal forgetting prevention notification, light emission by an LED, an effect operation by an accessory May be performed. Moreover, you may alert | report the timing when a 3rd display is displayed by a period display. The timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Appendix h16)
A game machine according to appendix h15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation in which the determination result is a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “hit symbol variation”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h17)
A game machine according to appendix h16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation”) in which the result of the determination of success or failure is out of place.
The jackpot symbol variation is configured such that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the loss symbol variation.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h15 to h17,
Providing production moving means,
The effect moving means is a means that may perform an effect operation,
The game stand, wherein the power output movable means may perform the effect operation during display of the third effect display.

(Appendix h19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h18,
After the period display is hidden, the period display is in an easily visible state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h19,
The period display is hidden until a certain period in the reach ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h19,
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period in the reach.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h14 to h21,
The period display is a display for notifying the timing for displaying the second effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second timing”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location where the chance increase is notified may be fixed in correspondence with the reach, such that the chance increase is notified three times when a certain reach occurs and the chance increase is notified twice when another reach occurs. In such a case, the location where the chance up is notified may be changed such that the notification is made three times and the notification is made only once. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timing” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying too much”, or may be easier to miss. Also, the likelihood of being a big hit does not have to vary depending on the number of timing notifications. Also, the larger the number of chance ups, the more likely it will be a big hit, and the smaller the number of chances up, the easier it will be to win.

(Appendix h23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h14 to h22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display;
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation,
There may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h14 to h23,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h25)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The period display is a display that is displayed in a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for informing a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h26)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first display,
As time passes, at least part of the display mode of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second display,
As time passes, at least part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed,
The first speed is different from the second speed;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h27)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h26,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which a display mode of at least a part of the time display changes with the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One of the time displays is the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h28)
A game stand according to appendix h26 or h27,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h29)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h26 to h28,
The first display is a display whose display mode changes until a first time elapses,
The second display is a display whose display mode changes until a second time elapses,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. In addition, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix h30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h26 to h29,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
As the first type of display, there are the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of display.

(Appendix h31)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h30,
The first type of display is a timer notice display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer notice display is a display for notifying the time until the first effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h32)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h30,
With operating means,
The first type of display is an operation valid period display.
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h33)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h30,
The first type of display is a period display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter referred to as “first timing”).
Between the start of the first period and the end thereof, the first timing is notified,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h26 to h33,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h35)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter referred to as “time notification”) may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h36)
A gaming machine according to appendix h35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size.
The second display size is larger than the first display size;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h37)
The game stand according to appendix h35 or h36,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h37,
When the countdown display is displayed, it always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
Rather than being displayed in the first display mode, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 35 to 39,
The countdown display starts and ends within one symbol variation display period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h41)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h35 to h40,
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h42)
A gaming machine according to appendix h41,
The time notification by the countdown display is continued even during the movement of the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h43)
A gaming machine according to appendix h41,
During the movement of the countdown display, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h43,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h45)
A game machine as set forth in appendix h44,
When the time until the certain performance is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h46)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h45,
In some cases, the second display mode does not change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h47)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h46,
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h48)
A gaming machine according to appendix h47,
In some cases, the second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h49)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h48,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h50)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h35 to h48,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h51)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a period display;
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed,
The first display may be erased before the first timing after the first display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h52)
A game machine according to appendix h51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing,
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display starts to be displayed,
During the display of the third display, the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h53)
A game machine as set forth in appendix h52,
The third display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h54)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix h53,
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than when the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h55)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h52 to h54,
Providing production movable means that can perform multiple types of actions,
One of the plurality of types of operations is a first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h56)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h51 to h55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h57)
A gaming machine according to appendices h51 to h55,
The first display is configured not to be displayed until the certain period has elapsed after the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h58)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h51 to h55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again before the certain period elapses.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h59)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h51 to h58,
The certain period is a period during which super reach is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h60)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h51 to h59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h61)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h51 to h60,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h62)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at a timing when a certain effect is performed,
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h63)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h64)
A gaming machine according to appendix h63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size.
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h65)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 62 to 64,
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h66)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h65,
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h67)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h65,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It ’s easier for the jackpot symbol to be finalized.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h68)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h67,
The display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h69)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h68,
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h70)
A game machine as set forth in appendix h69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a gaming table.

(Appendix h71)
A game stand according to appendix h69 or h70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed,
The display position of the first display is changed by the moving display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h72)
A gaming machine according to appendix h71,
While the moving display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h73)
A gaming machine according to appendix h71,
During the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h74)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h73,
The countdown display is a time countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h75)
A gaming machine according to appendix h74,
The timing notification is a notification for notifying that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h76)
A game stand according to appendix h74 or h75,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h77)
A gaming machine according to appendix h76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain performance.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h62 to h77,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h79)
A gaming machine according to appendix h78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h80)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h79,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h81)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h62 to h79,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h82)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a time display,
A certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started,
Even after the display of the timer display is started, the certain effect may not be started,
The certain presentation may be started in response to the timer display being started and the time display having reached a certain time.
When the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed, it is easier to confirm the big hit symbol in the symbol variation display than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h83)
A gaming machine according to appendix h82,
If the time display reaches the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is started.
If the time display does not reach the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is not started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h84)
A game stand according to appendix h82 or h83,
The certain performance is at least one kind of notice among a plurality of kinds of notices,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
One of the plurality of types of notice is a third notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a fourth notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display becomes longer when it is executed than when it is not executed,
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed. Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the first notice may be a pending change notice, a pre-reading mode, or a continuous notice.

  Further, the second notice may be a pseudo-ream or a notice effect by inserting a movie.

  The third notice may be a cut-in notice or the next notice.

  The fourth notice may be a jackpot notification.

(Appendix h85)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h82 to h84,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a mini game,
The time display reaches the certain time according to the display result of the mini game, and the certain effect is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h86)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix h85,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice item,
The notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game,
The advance notice item includes a display suggesting that the timer display starts to be displayed,
After the notice item is displayed, the time display reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started.
When the notice item is not displayed, the time display does not reach the certain time and the certain effect is not started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h87)
A gaming machine according to appendix h85 or h86,
The mini-game display result is derived before the time display change starts and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h88)
A gaming machine according to appendix h85 or h86,
The mini-game display result is derived after the time display change is started and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h89)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h85 to h88,
As a result of displaying the mini game, a result not related to the certain performance may be derived.
The display of the mini game is configured to start before the timer display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h89,
The timer display when the certain performance is not started is configured such that the time display is erased without displaying the certain time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h91)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h90,
The timer display is a display that starts to be displayed in any one of a plurality of aspects,
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
When the timer display is displayed in the second mode, the certain effect is more easily started than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h92)
A gaming machine according to appendix h91,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed.
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the jackpot game that is performed in response to the jackpot symbol being confirmed and displayed, so that an advantageous state is given to the player. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h93)
A gaming machine according to appendix h92,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is configured to be erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h94)
A gaming machine according to appendix h92,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is displayed in a definite manner. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h95)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h92 to h94,
The first aspect is an aspect in which a time display first displayed in the timer display is a first time,
The second aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the second time,
The third aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the third time,
In the first time and the second time, the second time is longer.
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is a time displayed only when the advantageous state is given.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h96)
A gaming machine according to appendix h95,
The time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and can be displayed after the decimal point,
The display of the first time as the time display that is first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is 0,
In the timer display, the display of the second time as the first time display is a time display in which the decimal part is 0,
The display of the third time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal part is other than 0.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h97)
A gaming table according to appendix h95 or h96,
The display of the first time as the time display that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the second time as the time display that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the third time as the time display that is initially displayed in the timer display is a display that is longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display provides a notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h98)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h97,
Providing production display means capable of performing production display,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying the timer display,
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on either one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The first case is configured such that the certain performance may not start,
In the case of the Tsubaki, it is configured so that the certain performance is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h99)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h82 to h98,
The timer display is a display in which the time display is displayed by the source,
The certain time is 0.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h100)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The first display is one of the displays related to the notice,
The second display is a pre-reading notice display performed by displaying a hold icon in a certain mode,
The third display is one display among displays for displaying that execution of the production is started (display indicating that execution of the production is waiting),
The fourth display is a notice display of one of the notice displays different from the second display,
Before the display of the second display starts, the display of the first display may start,
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state,
Configured to be in the second state after the first state,
The first state is one of states in which a hold icon may be displayed,
The game table according to claim 2, wherein the second state is one of states in which a hold icon is not displayed.

(Appendix h101)
A gaming machine according to appendix h100,
In some cases, the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may end in the next symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h102)
A game machine according to appendix h100 or h102,
The position display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a background in the hold icon,
In the first state, the fifth display is configured to be displayable,
The fifth display is configured not to be displayed in the second state,
The first state is a state where a certain reach effect is not executed,
The second state is a state where a certain reach effect is being executed,
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h103)
A gaming machine according to appendix h102,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display performed by displaying the fifth display in a certain manner.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h104)
A gaming machine according to appendix h102 or h103,
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h105)
A gaming machine according to appendix h102 or h103,
The area where the first display is displayed is configured not to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h106)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h100 to h105,
The first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may not be continuously displayed in the next symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h107)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h100 to h105,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h108)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The first display is a display that at least suggests that the second display may be started,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display for notifying that execution of a certain effect is started,
The fourth display is a notice display relating to the symbol variation display being executed,
The fifth display is a display indicating that at least a holding icon is displayed.
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
The display of the third display may be started in the first state,
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state,
The second state may be after the first state,
The first state is a state where a certain reach effect is not executed,
The second state is a state where the certain reach effect is being executed,
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed together with the hold icon,
In the second state, the fifth display is configured not to be displayed together with the hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h109)
A game machine according to appendix h108,
The third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h110)
The game stand according to appendix h108 or h109,
At least a portion of the third display is configured to overlap the fifth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h111)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h110,
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the fifth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the fifth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. A game stand characterized in that, in the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is easily displayed.

(Appendix h112)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h110,
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the fifth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the fifth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easy to start,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h113)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h108 to h112,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the fifth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h114)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h108 to h112,
The first display and the fifth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h115)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h114,
The first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h116)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h115,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the fourth display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h117)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h108 to h115,
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The sixth display is a display whose display is started after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated during display of the sixth display, display of the fourth display is started,
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the sixth display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h118)
A game machine according to appendix h117,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display for notifying that the display of the sixth display is started,
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the seventh display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h119)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h108 to h118,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The third display may be displayed two times,
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes,
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the eighth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h120)
The game stand according to appendix 119,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h121)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h108 to h120,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display,
The ninth display is an explanatory display;
The ninth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed,
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h122)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 108 to h121,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h123)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display,
The fourth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
The third display may be started in the first state,
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state,
After the certain notice display is displayed, an effect may be started.
The second state may be after the first state,
The hold icon can be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed,
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed,
The first state is one of the states in which the sixth display can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the sixth display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h124)
A game machine according to appendix h123,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect is started,
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h125)
The game stand according to appendix h123 or h124,
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach production,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h126)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h125,
The third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h127)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h126,
At least a portion of the third display is configured to overlap the sixth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h128)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h127,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h129)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h127,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easy to start,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h130)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h129,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h131)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 123 to h130,
The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h132)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h131,
The first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h133)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h132,
The certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h134)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h133,
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts displaying after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h135)
A gaming machine according to appendix h134,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h136)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h123 to h135,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The third display may be displayed two times,
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes,
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h137)
A game machine according to appendix h136,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h138)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h123 to h137,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display;
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h139)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h123 to h138,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h140)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display,
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
The third display may be started in the first state,
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state,
After the certain notice display is displayed, an effect may be started.
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The second state may be after the first state,
The first state is one of states where a hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h141)
A game machine according to appendix h140,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed,
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed in a state where the sixth display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h142)
A gaming machine according to appendix h141,
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display is configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner with the third display,
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h143)
The game stand according to appendix h141 or h142,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h144)
The game stand according to appendix h141 or h142,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easy to start,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h145)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h141 to h144,
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h146)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices h141 to h144,
The first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h147)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h146,
It is configured to be able to execute a certain reach production,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h148)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h147,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect is started,
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h149)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices h140 to h148,
The third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h150)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes h140 to h149,
The first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h151)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h150,
The certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h152)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h151,
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that starts displaying after the third display is started,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display that ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h153)
A game machine according to appendix h152,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h154)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h153,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The third display may be displayed two times,
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes,
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h155)
A game machine according to appendix h154,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h156)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h155,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display;
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix h157)
The game stand according to any one of appendices h140 to h156,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-1)
Display means;
A first movable means;
A second movable means;
A third movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a transmissive liquid crystal display device,
The first movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The second movable means is a movable means provided on the front side of the display means,
The first movable means is movable means movable to a first position;
At least a part of the first movable means at the first position is configured to overlap the first display area of the display area of the display means from the front side,
The first display area is configured to be in a first visual state,
The first display area is configured to be in a second visual state,
The second viewing state is configured to make it easier to visually recognize the back side of the display area of the display means through the first display area than the first viewing state,
In one state in which the first display area is in the second visual recognition state (hereinafter referred to as “first state”), the first movable unit is configured to be in the first position. And
The second movable means is a movable means movable to a second position;
In the first state, the second movable means is configured to be in the second position,
In the first state, the first effect is configured to be executed,
The first effect is an effect including an effect performed by cooperation of the first movable means at the first position and the second movable means at the second position;
The third movable means is a movable means provided on the back side of the display means,
The third movable means is a movable means movable from a third initial position to a third position;
The second movable means is a movable means movable to a fifth position;
At least a part of the third movable means at the third position is configured to overlap from the front side to a third display area of the display area of the display means,
It is configured to be able to execute the second production,
The second effect is a notice effect performed in a state where the third movable means is located at the third position,
The second effect is an effect executed after execution of the first effect,
In at least a part of the state after the execution of the first effect and before the execution of the second effect is started (hereinafter referred to as “second state”), the second. The movable means is configured to be in the fifth position,
In the second state, the third movable means is configured not to reach the third position,
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the third movable means is overlapped from the front side with the second movable means in the fifth position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix R0-1,
The second position is a position in an area overlapping the first display area from the front side.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-3)
A game machine according to appendix R0-2,
Even when the second movable means is moved to the second position, the first display area remains in the first visual state without being in the second visual state. (Hereinafter referred to as “some cases”),
In the certain case, the first performance is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-3,
“The effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position” described in the appendix R0-1 An effect that represents something by the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-3,
“The effect performed by the cooperation of the first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position” described in the appendix R0-1 The first movable means in the first position and the second movable means in the second position are productions that appear to be combined three-dimensionally.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-5,
The first movable means is a movable means that is movable from a first initial position to the first position;
The first initial position is an initial position shifted from an area overlapping with the display means,
The first initial position is an initial position on the back side of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-6,
The second movable means is a movable means that is movable from a second initial position to the second position;
The second initial position is an initial position shifted from an area overlapping with the display means,
The second initial position is an initial position on the front side of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-7,
Even in one state different from the first state, the first display area is configured to be in the second visual state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix R0-10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices R0-1 to R0-8,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always to be” or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

  Next, meter production will be described.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the meter effect in stages.

  FIG. 80 (1) shows the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  Further, a family crest member 224E (not shown in FIG. 3) is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest actor 224E shown in FIG. 80 (1) corresponds to the initial position. Note that the family crest character 224E and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N have a front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction), with the crest character 224E being the forefront and the first decorative symbol display device 208L being the most. On the rear side, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest character 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 80, it is executed in a variable display symbol (special drawing) executed in the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 1 etc.) and in the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 1 etc.). The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Also, a variable display symbol (ordinary symbol) executed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 (see FIG. 1 and the like) (not shown) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. In other words, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5B displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol representing the first symbol (not shown) with an enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. As described above, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag is generated for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the sub-control unit 400, 500 side. When the symbol pd3 also starts to be changed and the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. The following description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3. However, the same thing can be said even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

  Further, in FIG. 80, the eight generations 224Fa and the general 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the general character 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display. The square display corresponds to FIG. 1 and the circle display corresponds to FIG. Whether it is a square display or a circle display, the gray display indicates that the stop symbol of the loss is being displayed in the special figure display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates the special figure display device. In (212, 214), the big hit stop symbol is being displayed, and the white display indicates that the symbol variation is being displayed in the special symbol display device (212, 214). This fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208M. It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. In addition, you may distinguish and display during change display and stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of a board surface. Further, on the upper part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, a mini decorative symbol obtained by reducing and displaying the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display pattern of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The 5th symbol pd5 also performs a variable display and a stop display, and, like the 4th symbol pd4, plays a role of clearly indicating the variation display and the stop display of the 3rd symbol pd3. Accordingly, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 correspond to decorative symbols in a broad sense.

  The state shown in FIG. 80 (1) is a stop display of combinations of decorative symbols for both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a gray square display and a gray circle display, and both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are being stopped.

  In addition, a hold frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. The hold frame UI can be viewed as a region icon displayed in the icon display region, and can also be viewed as a user interface that provides various information to the player. The hold frame UI has a variable icon display area in the center, a hold icon display area on the left side, and an effect display area on the right side. In the holding icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of holding balls shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 are prepared, and one holding icon is displayed for each stage. In addition, the stage corresponding to the number (for example, eight) which added the number of reservation balls of special figure 1 and the number of reservation balls of special figure 2 may be prepared. In the variation icon display area, a stage cs that is higher and larger than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variation icon is displayed on the stage cs. Further, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 80 (1) is provided with a base icon UIb extending in the left and right directions with a vertical stripe pattern, and four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the holding icon display area, The stage cs prepared in the variable icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side. Also, a tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. This tutorial display ts can also be viewed as a tutorial icon overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side.

  In the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 80 (1), one hold icon h1 is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the current special figure is one. In other words, the hold icons are displayed for the number of reserved balls in the special figure, and the older the winning timing is, the closer to the center (right side) is displayed. The first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 80 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a red display mode that is a display mode of a prefetch notice. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon, and the expectation level (reliability) of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is displayed for each display mode. Represents. However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is not necessarily a big hit, and there may be a loss. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. In addition, the timing when the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or the default display form and then changes to the pre-reading notice mode is as follows. The winning time can be given.

  In addition, on the stage cs in the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 80 (1), a variation icon c having a white display mode, which is a default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 80 (1), as described above, the 3rd symbol pd3 and the 5th symbol pd5 are both stopped and the 4th symbol pd4 is also being stopped. In FIG. 80 (1), the stopped symbol is being displayed. The change icon c is still left without disappearing. In FIG. 80 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears.

  Also, a numerical value hn of the number of reservations is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. The numerical value display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “1” and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is “0”. Further, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable state or not (so-called constant display), and is displayed across the variable display of the third symbol pd3 multiple times. The In the example shown in FIG. 80, the display of the character cd of the lord who becomes the main character is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the Tono-sama character cd shown in FIG. 80 (1) is an initial posture.

  In addition, an information display unit ST1 is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 80 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 80, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display unit ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, “castle town” is displayed on the information display section ST1, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common behind the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The information display unit ST1 may display an effect mode, a current control state (for example, during probability change), a pre-reading notice, or a currently performed symbol. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 80 (1), the speaker 120 is shown in the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operation means) is also shown in the lower left. A second chance button 137 (corresponding to the second operation means) is also shown on the right side of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be the OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 or may be an operating means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

  Note that the display positions, sizes, and display numbers of the various displays described with reference to FIG. 80 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb overlap with the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 or the second symbol A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 80 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 80 (2). The symbol variation display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 80 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display is also started in the fifth symbol pd5. Note that the third symbol pd3 is a low-speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just started. A thick, short arrow with white outline represents a low-speed fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter). During low-speed fluctuations, it may be possible to recognize the changing symbols. Further, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 80 (2) moves to the stage cs in the fluctuation icon display area, and the red fluctuation icon c is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it has been a hold icon until then matches the display mode (red) of the icon after it has become a variable icon. The display mode of the variation icon represents the expectation degree (reliability) of the big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed. In other words, the normal notice is executed according to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. Even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display during display is not necessarily a big hit and may result in a loss. In FIG. 80 (3), the hold icon disappears, and the numerical value display hn of the number of holds displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side becomes “0” in both FIG. 1 and FIG. Further, in the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 80 (3), the square display corresponding to the special figure 1 is changed from gray to white, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is being displayed. In FIG. 80 (3) where the symbol variation display is started, the display content of the tutorial display ts is not changed.

  The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 80 (4) fluctuates at high speed. White thin and long arrows represent high-speed fluctuations (hereinafter the same). When it becomes high-speed fluctuation, it becomes difficult to recognize the fluctuating symbol. In FIG. 80 (4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, but the display position is not limited to this position. The display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the fluctuation icon c, but the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is not only when the third symbol pd3 becomes a high-speed fluctuation, but also when the symbol fluctuation starts, when the movement of the fluctuation icon c is completed, when a prize is awarded to the special figure starting port (when holding increases), At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect Alternatively, it is possible to enumerate when continuing (at the start of re-variation), when reaching a reach state, when starting a super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter display. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. When the meter display appears, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are changed to display contents related to the meter display. The meter display shown in FIG. 80 (4) has a white meter frame mf, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. This white meter display MW corresponds to an example of a first meter display. The meter display includes an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 80 is of an increasing type, is provided with five scales, and is full at the sixth stage. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 80 (4) is displayed in an empty state (the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

  In FIG. 80 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (6), the left symbol fluctuates further, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 80 (6), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in the same figure (7) following FIG. 80 (6), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, the meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. The meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (hereinafter the same), and the display position of the meter rising item UpI is a decorative pattern that fluctuates (temporarily stops). Although the position overlaps from the front side, the display position is not limited to this position. Moreover, although the display size of the meter rising item UpI is smaller than the decorative design that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped), the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI is the first stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning (when holding increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain production, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous production or continuing Time (at the start of re-variation), start of reach state, start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The meter raising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter. The meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 80 (7) is white, but as will be described later, a plurality of types of meter rising item UpI are prepared, and the rate of increase of the meter differs depending on the type.

  In FIG. 80 (8), the moving animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI displayed at the position overlapping from the front side on the decorative pattern that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped) is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 80 (9), the fluctuation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one scale. The color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the meter frame mf (here, blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the meter increase timing is the second stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning a prize at the starting point (when holding increases), at the start of a pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to a pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain production, and at the pseudo-continuous production, When stopping or continuing (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the timing of meter increase. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  In FIG. 80 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops and starts to fluctuate (second stop), and the second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter raising item UpI is a position overlapping the right symbol from which the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) has started from the front side. In FIG. 80 (11), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 80 (12), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one scale. As a result, the meter of the white meter display MW has been raised to the second scale.

  In FIG. 80 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 80 (14), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 80 (15), a pseudo-continuous effect cut-in display is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the main character, Tono-sama, appears, and the line “Still Still” is displayed, indicating that re-variation is likely to start. In FIG. 80 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped is displayed again and temporarily stopped. A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so as to partially overlap the left pattern. In FIG. 80 (17), re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start high-speed variation. In FIG. 80 (18), the character display of “× 2”, which is the continuous count display, is reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 80 in stages.

  In FIG. 81 (19) continuing from FIG. 80 (18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left starts a notice that a mini item will appear. . That is, a treasure chest icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 81 (20), a closed treasure chest icon I1 is displayed on the information display section ST1. This treasure box icon I1 becomes a notice icon for the appearance of a mini item. In FIG. 81 (21), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and a meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI appears.

  The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 81 (20) is closed without being opened, disappears even when opened, or an item different from the meter rising item UpI (for example, an item with a question mark) Or x-marked items or unfortunate character display items) may appear. In other words, even if the treasure box icon I1 is displayed, there may be a false notice as a notice that a mini item will appear.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 84 (22), the moving meter up item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it appears that the left half of the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs the part of the meter rising item UpI.

  In FIG. 81 (23), the meter rising item UpI is displayed so as to reach the white meter display MW and overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 81 (24), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW further rises by one scale, and the white meter display MW rises to the third scale.

  When the meter rising item UpI is displayed, the meter may always rise, but the meter may not rise. For example, the meter rising item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise even if it reaches.

  In FIG. 81 (25), the left symbol and right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. A “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. In FIG. 81 (27), the change of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and in FIG. The right symbol that has moved to the upper left corner of 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (29), it has developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N remain the background screen of the castle town, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still displays the character cd on the display stage ss. Then, the information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

  In addition, when it develops into a super reach production, the hold frame UI disappears and the tutorial display ts also disappears. Here, no hold icon remains, but if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, only the variation icon c corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is continuously displayed. However, the fluctuation icon c may also disappear together. Alternatively, when the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may be continued. Moreover, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and further, the display of the hold frame UI may be continued.

  In FIG. 81 (30), all the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are switched to the wilderness background, the information display unit ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. The display of the display stage ss and the Tono-sama character cd disappears from the device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical value hn of the number of reservations is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (30), the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are displayed, and a duel scene of two people is started. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top here.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (31), the white meter display MW is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 81 (31) is a state where the meter has accumulated up to three scales (corresponding to an example of the second state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. 81 (32) to FIG. 33 (33), the meter is used, and the white meter display MW decreases, and in FIG. 33 (33), the state is 0 (corresponding to an example of the first state). I'm back. In FIG. 81 (34), the white meter display MW that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the main character's character. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, the green aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the blue aura icon, the red aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the green aura icon, and the golden aura icon has a rich hit The rainbow-colored aura icon that changes into seven colors has the highest expectation level for the jackpot, and corresponds to a level higher than the jackpot concentration (for example, the jackpot determination).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 81 (35), the scene after the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. 36 (36), the scene in which the Tono-sama character was lost. Is displayed, and “decoration 3”, which is different from “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a medium symbol. Thereafter, the symbol variation display is finished, and the third symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is fixedly displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L, and the second ornamental symbol display device is displayed. In 208M, the fifth symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. The super reach production here was the Hazle Supa Reach production.

  The example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 described above is an example in which the white meter display MW does not change from the empty state (the meter is 0 state) to the full state, and the jackpot symbol is not finally displayed. Become.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 80 to 81 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 82 (1), as in the state shown in FIG. 80 (1), both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are the stop display of combinations of the decorative symbols of the loss. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”. Also, a first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 82 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a green display mode that is a display mode of a pre-reading notice. Yes. The green display mode has a lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

  In FIG. 82 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 82 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. The base symbol variation display is started. On the stage cs in the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 82 (3), a variation icon c having a green display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 82 (4), the white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4) is also an increase type, and the display is started in an empty state (a state where the meter is 0).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 82 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono. The display of the line “Ikuzo” corresponds to a notice that a mini item will appear. In FIG. 82 (6), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 82 (7), the Tono-sama character cd throws the change ball icon cI, and the movement animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. 82 (7), the changing ball icon cI has moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 82 (8), the changing ball icon cI is displayed as a white meter display MW. The white meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 82 (8) has a different display mode, and an effect display ed1 is added. In FIG. 82 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 has been added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is in the 0 state). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The effect in which the Tono-sama character cd continues to appear as shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to (8) corresponds to an example of a meter change effect. The red meter display MR corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. The red meter display MR has a higher rank than the white meter display MW (for example, the appearance rate is low), and the meter change effects shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to (8) are a kind of rank-up effects. It corresponds to. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9) is also empty (the meter is 0). Also, a sound effect for notifying the change in meter display is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 82 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (11), the left symbol fluctuates further, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In addition, the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 82 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in FIG. 82 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, as in FIG. 80 (7), the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 82 (13), similarly to FIG. 80 (8), the moving animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the red meter display MR. In FIG. 82 (14), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by three graduations. This means that the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 is easier to accumulate than the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state. It is comprised so that it may become. This is a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter rising item UpI) in the red meter display MR rather than a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter increase item UpI) in the white meter display MW. There will be more. Note that the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the red color of the meter frame mf (blue color here), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the same as the timing described in FIG. In FIG. 82 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 starts to slow down. In FIG. 82 (15), the variation of the right symbol becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration”). 7 ") becomes recognizable, and it will eventually reach the reach state. In FIG. 82 (16), it is a reach state, and the second meter rising item UpI appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. In FIG. 82 (17), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI also moves from the front side to the position overlapping the red meter display MR. In FIG. 82 (18), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by 3 scales again, and the red meter display MR is full. Note that the “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 82 (18) in which the meter rising item UpI has disappeared and the rising effect of the red meter display MR has ended.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the meter effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 83 (19), which continues from FIG. 82 (18), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. The right design that has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative design display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (21), it has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and as in FIG. 80 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding frame UI disappears, and the castle town The screen changes from the background screen to the swordsman Misan screen. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In this super reach production, as shown in FIG. 83 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is switched to the wilderness background, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M still has the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display unit ST1. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord remains. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here. 81 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83. Conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 83 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. It may be.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 83 (23), the full red meter display MR is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. Yes. In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, Tono-sama greatly powers up and wins, that is, the expectation of jackpot increases. 83 (24) to FIG. 25 (25), the meter is used, the red meter display MR decreases, and after passing through the fifth state, in FIG. It corresponds to an example of a state). In FIG. 83 (26), the red meter display MR which has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a gold aura icon OI2 is added behind the main character's character. As described above, the color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to a color that suggests a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It should be noted that the color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a higher level of big hit (for example, big hit determination).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 83 (27), a scene after the swordsman character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 7”, which is the same as “decoration 7” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 83 (29), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 83 (30), the three third symbols pd3 are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 described above is an example in which the red meter display MR changes from the empty state (the meter is 0 state) to the full state, and finally the big hit symbol is finally displayed. become. When the red meter display MR changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the jackpot symbol is finally more than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to the full state. It is easy to confirm. Further, in the red meter display MR, when the state changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the empty state does not change to the full tank state. Also, the super reach effect described with reference to FIG. 83 corresponds to an example of a notice display that is displayed when the red meter display MR changes to the full tank state.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 84 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 82 (1) to (6). In FIG. 84 (7), the Tono-like character cd throws a change ball icon cI and changes. A moving animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 84 (7), the changing ball icon cI moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the changing icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. The icon cI hits the variation icon c, and the variation icon c is displayed so as to partially overlap from the front side. Further, the display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 84 (8) is changed, and an effect display ed2 is added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when hitting the meter display as shown in FIG. 82 (8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 84 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c that has been green so far changes to red. The red variation icon is more likely to win a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display than the green variation icon, and is ranked up here. Note that the rank may be lowered by the change ball icon cI. In the example shown in FIG. 84, the change ball icon cI changes the display mode of the variation icon c, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining various types of meter displays in detail. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 85 is an increase type.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to (f) corresponds to an example of the white meter display MW (first meter display shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 and FIGS. 82 (4) to (8). ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter display MW is a default meter display. Also, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85A is an empty state (a state where the meter is 0), and corresponds to an example of a first state. Further, FIG. 85 (a) also shows a white meter raising item UpI. The meter rising item UpI is an item whose rate of increase of the meter changes depending on the type of meter display, and the white meter rising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter by a first amount.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the meter on the white meter display MW that has been empty is raised by one scale by the white meter raising item UpI shown in FIG. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by one scale with respect to the white meter display MW. Note that the state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85B corresponds to an example of a second state that is a state between the full state and the empty state.

  FIG. 85 (c) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb of the same color as the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased. This blue meter raising item UpIb is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a second amount.

  FIG. 85 (d) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty has been raised by two scales by the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 85 (c). Has been. The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by two scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 85 (e) shows a red meter rising item UpIr. This red meter rising item UpIr is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a third amount.

  FIG. 85 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the meter on the white meter display MW, which is in an empty state, is raised by 4 scales by the red meter rising item UpIr shown in FIG. Has been. The red meter rising item UpIr is an item to be raised by 4 scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In addition, a golden meter rising item may be displayed. The meter of the white meter display MW that was in an empty state is in a state where it has been raised by 5 scales (second state) or a full tank state (in which it has been raised by 6 scales) by the golden meter rising item. . Thus, the rate of increase of the meter is not constant and may vary depending on the lottery result or the like.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 85 (g) to (l) is the red meter display MR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has a greater amount of meter storage than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to the full state, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit. Therefore, the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit is higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. Further, the expectation of winning an advantageous jackpot may be higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The advantageous big hit here is, for example, a big hit with probability variation or a big hit with a large number of rounds with a ball.

  FIG. 85 (g) shows a default white meter rising item UpI, and FIG. 85 (h) shows a red meter display MR meter in an empty state with its white meter rising item. A state (fifth state) is shown that is raised by 3 scales at a time by UpI. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by 3 scales with respect to the red meter display MR.

  FIG. 85 (i) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb, and FIG. 85 (j) shows that the red meter display MR meter in an empty state is displayed by the blue meter rising item UpIb. It shows a state where it has risen by 6 scales at once, that is, a state where the tank is full (sixth state). The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by 6 scales (all scales) with respect to the red meter display MR.

  As described above, in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item UpI is tripled compared to the state where the white meter display MW is displayed.

  FIG. 85 (k) shows a green meter rising item UpIm. The green meter rising item UpIm is an item to be raised by 9 scales with respect to the red meter display MR. In the meter display, when the meter is full, the remaining scale (the overflowed scale) may be invalidated. However, in order to handle the remaining scale effectively, the empty meter display is additionally displayed. Is done. The type of meter display that is additionally displayed may be the same as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 85 (l), a red meter display MR of the same type as the meter display type that is full is additionally displayed below the meter display that is full. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 85 (l), a meter display in which the meter frame mf is a gold meter may be displayed below the red meter display MR that is full. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 85 (l) has risen to three scales corresponding to the remaining scales.

  The meter display shown in FIG. 85 (m) and FIG. 85 (n) is a rainbow meter display MN whose meter frame mf is rainbow color. This rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. In the state in which the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full no matter how many colors of the meter rising item are displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (m), the rainbow meter display MN is empty, and even if the rainbow meter display item UpI is white, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 85 (n). Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, the rainbow meter is always full, and further, the jackpot is confirmed.

  However, in the rainbow meter display MN, even if there is a remaining scale (overflowed scale) when the tank is full, the big hit is confirmed, so a new meter as shown in FIG. The display is not added and the remaining scale is invalidated.

  In addition, when one meter rising item is displayed regardless of a color, you may make it raise only by the same scale (for example, 1 scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the big hit expectation.

  In addition, the appearance timing of the meter rising item has been described above. However, if supplemented here, the meter rising item may be a big hit during symbol variation, long-term variation, pre-reach, super-reach, or temporary It may be easy to appear when stopping.

  The meter display described above may be a jackpot notice (so-called normal notice) in the symbol fluctuation display (the fluctuation) being displayed when the meter display starts to be displayed, or starts after the fluctuation. It may be a jackpot notice (pre-read notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, in the case of the expected degree of jackpot in the above description, the expected degree of jackpot in the fluctuation may be used, or the expected degree of jackpot in the symbol variation display started after that.

  Also, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 85 (a) to (f), the red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 85 (g) to (l), and FIGS. 85 (m) and 85 (n). In addition to the color of the meter frame mf, the rainbow meter display MN shown in) may have different display sizes, and may have different display positions. Further, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the colors of the meters themselves may be different so that all the colors are different.

  Furthermore, when viewed from one meter display, the first state is that the meter frame is white and empty as shown in FIG. 85 (a) and the like, and FIG. 85 (b), FIG. The intermediate state shown in (f) where the meter frame is white and is neither empty nor full is the second state, and the meter frame is white and full is the third state (not shown in FIG. 85). 85 (g) or the like, and the meter frame is red and empty is the fourth state, and the meter frame is red and is neither empty nor full as shown in FIG. 85 (h). Is the fifth state, and the meter frame shown in FIG. 85 (j) is red and full is the sixth state.

  Hereinafter, the description of the meter effect will be continued, but the description of matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes.

  The state shown in FIG. 86 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3”. In this state, there is no special figure hold, and the first symbol pd1 continues to be stopped until it wins the special figure starting port 230,232. Furthermore, a white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 86 (1). The white meter display MW here is empty. The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed from the stage before FIG. 86 (1), and may already be displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 86 (2), there is one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and in FIG. 86 (3), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1. Then, on the stage cs in the variation icon display area, the display of the variation icon c in the white display mode which is the default display mode is started. Further, even when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the empty white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of the empty white meter display MW is displayed. Continues until FIG. 86 (18).

  86 (4) in which the special figure 1 is changing, there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Display of the hold icon (the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 1) in the white display form, which is the default display form, has started. Further, also in FIG. 86 (6), there is one ball entering at the first special figure starting port 230, and the display state of the pre-reading notice is displayed in the second stage hs2 of the hold icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the hold icon in the green display mode (second hold icon h2 in FIG. 1) is started.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 86 (8), “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the period during which the third symbol pd3 is being stopped (including during the fixed display) in FIG. 86 (1) and FIG. 86 (8) to FIG. 86 (9). The meter display may be always displayed. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 86 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The change icon c shown in FIG. 86 (10) is the default display mode, similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 86 (9), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is shifted and shifted to the first display icon h1 in FIG. Yes.

  In FIG. 86 (11), a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes is started, and a change icon I2 gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. In FIG. A change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. The change icon I2 is marked with the characters “weird”.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 86 (13), the Tono-like character cd draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. It has been changed to "if you win."

  In FIG. 86 (14), the Tono-like character cd releases an arrow, and the arrow icon that is released and represents the arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Flying toward the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 86 (15), the flying arrow icon is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the left half of the arrow icon appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half appears to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs and part of the arrow icon is invisible.

  In FIG. 86 (16), the arrow icon hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M brilliantly. In FIG. 86 (17), the hit arrow icon disappears, and the change icon The display mode of I2 is changed, and an effect display ed3 is added. The effect display ed3 here is also an effect display similar to the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 82 (8), but may be a different effect display such as a different color. It should be noted that the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a different posture from the initial posture although the pose has been changed. In FIG. 86 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white icon The meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 87 (19) following FIG. 86 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW is changed to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). It has changed. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 87 (19) is also empty (the meter is 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display has succeeded in raising the rank from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the character cd disappears without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the one with the bow pulled. The icon disappears without hitting the icon, and even if the arrow icon hits, the icon disappears without adding the effect display, or even if the effect display is added, the white meter display MW There may be a case where the icon disappears without moving and the meter display remains the white meter display MW without any change. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the Tono-sama character cd does not draw a bow, the arrow icon does not hit, the effect display is not added, or the white meter display MW does not move. Then, the change icon I2 may disappear, and the meter display may remain unchanged with the white meter display MW. In addition, even if the change icon I2 with the effect display ed3 added or the change icon I2 not added has overlapped with the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself is not ranked up, but the meter may rise. On the contrary, the meter may never rise. Furthermore, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, the red meter display MR changes to the white meter display MW).

  In FIG. 87 (20), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The character cd has returned to the initial posture. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 87 (21), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period in which the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed. Here, the red meter display MR is empty.

  In FIG. 87 (22), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 87 (21) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the meter display. In FIG. 87 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 81, a treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 87 (25), a closed treasure box icon is displayed on the information display unit ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 87 (26), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 87 (27), the moving meter up item UpI is located between the second decorative design display device 208M and the first decorative design display device 208L. In FIG. 87 (28), the meter up item UpI is red. The meter display MR is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 87 (29), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR in which the meter can be stored more easily than the white meter display MW, the meter rises by 3 scales at once.

  In FIG. 87 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. In the following FIG. 87 (32), the left symbol that has fluctuated has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated has also changed to the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. In FIG. 87 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 81, the super-reaching production (swordsman reach production) is developed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L changes from the background screen of the castle town to the screen of the swordsman visit. It has changed. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In FIG. 87 (34), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are all switched to the wilderness background, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character. Duel scene of has started. The red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 87 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated.

  Note that the meter of the white meter display MW may rise between FIGS. 86 (3) to (10) before the meter display changes.

  88 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 87 in stages.

  87 (36) to 88 (37), the meter is used, and the red meter display MR decreases. In FIG. 88 (37), the state is 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state). I'm back. In FIG. 88 (38), the red meter display MR which has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 suggesting a big hit is added behind the main character's character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 88 (39), a scene after the swordsman character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed, and in FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 4” that is the same as “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 88 (41), three 3rd symbols pd3 of “decoration 4” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 4” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with a short time (electric support) is won.

  In the example shown in FIG. 81 and the examples shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, the meter display is in a state where the same three scales are accumulated, but in the example shown in FIG. In this example, which is a red meter display MR, it is a big hit super reach production. In this way, the degree of expectation for jackpots varies depending on the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf) separately from the storage state of the meter. That is, if the meter storage state (including the empty state) is the same, the red meter display MR has a higher expectation level than the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing step by step an example of re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 88 (41).

  In the example shown in FIG. 88, a red meter display MR having a higher expectation of jackpot than the white meter display MW is displayed, and the red meter display MR is not in an empty state but is in a state where three scales are accumulated. . For this reason, the expectation of winning an advantageous big hit is high, and a re-lottery may be performed as shown in FIG. In other words, winning big wins (for example, big hits with probability variation or big hits with many rounds) that are more advantageous when the red meter display MR is stored for 3 scales than the white meter display MW is stored for 3 scales. Expectation to be higher.

  Here, FIG. 89 (42 ′) shows a state in which three third symbols pd3 “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” shown in FIG. As shown, a button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the button effects include a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136. The remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which an operation is accepted as valid (operation valid period) is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. It should be noted that the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button image 136a.

  In FIGS. 89 (43 ') to (44'), the chance button 136 is not pressed, the operation effective period decreases, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (45 '). In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 89 (46 ′), the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“ In the same figure (47 '), the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with probability change has been won. Yes. In other words, it is promoted from jackpot with short time (electric support) to jackpot with probability change.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period elapses, the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is displayed as “decoration 7”-“decoration”. 7 "-" decoration 7 "will change to a shaking display, will be confirmed, and will be promoted to a big hit with certainty.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a mini game that tells whether or not a meter display appears.

  In FIG. 90 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 90 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 90 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 90 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the mini-game such as “If you win over drinking”. In FIG. 90 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 90 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the townscape of the castle town so far changes to the background image of the mini-game compared to drinking between Tono-sama and Sakai. doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 90 (6), an explanation display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L for the mini-game background image to indicate that a sword dance meter (meter display) is displayed when Tono-sama wins the mini-game. In FIG. (7), a mini-game for drinking comparison is started. In FIG. 90 (8), the victory of Tono-sama in the mini-game is notified, and in FIG. 90 (9), it is displayed that a sword dance meter has been acquired.

  90 (10), the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter on the display of the third symbol pd3 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize what color the sword dance meter is displayed by the effect display ed4. In the present specification, the phrase “difficult to visually recognize” means that it is relatively difficult to visually recognize compared to the states before and after that. In FIG. 90 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears and the white meter display MW, which is a sword dance meter, is clearly displayed.

  If Tono-sama is defeated in the mini game, the sword dance meter is not displayed. The effect by the mini game described with reference to FIG. 90 corresponds to the effect of acquiring the meter display.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram showing interstage examples in which a big hit is determined by the change when the meter display becomes full.

  FIGS. 91 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 80 (1) to (9). In FIG. 91 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, Swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and a golden meter rising item UpIg appears. As described above, the golden meter raising item UpIg raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales or 6 scales. In FIG. 91 (10), the white meter display MW stored for one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the golden meter rising item UpIg means that the big hit is determined with the change. That is, when the meter rising item (gold color here or red as shown in FIG. 85 (e)) that the meter is easy to store appears, the big hit is larger than the meter rising item (for example, white) that is difficult to store the meter. Expectation increases. In FIG. 91 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 91 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of an increase of 6 divisions, there is an excess of one division, but since the big hit has been confirmed by the change and the next change will be after the big hit game ends, the remaining one division will continue until the next change. It cannot be carried over and is invalidated. In addition, a voice “congratulations” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. The sound output here corresponds to a jackpot notification sound for notifying that the meter is full and the jackpot is confirmed.

  In FIG. 91 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. In FIG. 91 (14), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” are displayed in a shake manner. In FIG. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIG. 91 described above is an example when the white meter display MW changes from an empty state (a meter is 0 state) to a full tank state, and finally a big hit symbol is finally displayed. When the white meter display MW changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally reached, rather than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to the full tank state. Is easy to confirm. Further, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the state is changed from the empty state to the full state is more than the case where the state is not changed from the empty state to the full state as in the examples shown in FIGS. However, it is easy to finally display the big hit symbol.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame step by step.

  The holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 92 is also provided with a base icon UIb ′ extending left and right with a vertical stripe pattern. The base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 92 is the base icon UIb shown in FIG. Higher than. In addition, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts in the effect display area provided on the right side in the holding frame UI ′ illustrated in FIG. 92. The white meter display MW is completely within the holding frame UI ′ and integrated with the holding frame UI ′ because the base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 92 is high. It suffices if a part of UI ′ is covered. In other words, the meter display only needs to partially or entirely overlap with the holding frame UI ′, and the holding frame UI ′ corresponds to an example of a holding display area in a broad sense, and is also an example of an icon display area. Equivalent to. In the example shown in FIG. 92, the meter display is always displayed in the holding frame UI ′. That is, the meter display is also displayed during the period in which the hold frame UI 'is displayed, and the meter display also disappears when the hold frame UI' disappears. However, the tutorial display ts is always displayed, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only when the meter is produced.

  In FIG. 92 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 92 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third symbol pd3 is displayed, and the variation icon c is disappeared.

  In FIG. 92 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 92 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Then, the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 92 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini-item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 92 (6), a white meter rising item UpI has appeared, and Tono-sama's character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 92 (7), the Tono-like character cd throws the meter rising item UpI, and the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. Note that the meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 92 (7) does not overlap the white meter display MW, but only partially overlaps the base icon UIb ′. You may display so that all may overlap.

  In FIG. 92 (8), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to a state where one scale is accumulated. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 92 (9), a tutorial display such as “Continue when meter is full” is displayed.

  In FIG. 92 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 92 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in FIG. 92 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 92 (13), the moving animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. In FIG. 92 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) to a full tank at once.

  In FIG. 92 (15), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 92 (16), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 92 (17), similarly to FIG. 80 (15), the pseudo-continuous effect cut-in display is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 92 (18), the cut-in display disappears, the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect starts to change again, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start low-speed fluctuation, and part of the left symbol A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so that the two overlap. The white meter display MW that has been in a full state continues to be displayed until re-variation is started, but the white meter display MW returns to an empty state in response to the start of re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-continuous effect continues, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  The pseudo continuous effect described with reference to FIG. 92 is such that the meter display (in this case, the white meter display MW, but other meter display (for example, the red meter display MR)) may be full. This corresponds to an example of a notice display that is displayed when the display changes.

  The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed in a full state until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the full white meter display MW may be displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (start of pseudo-continuous production) in FIG. 92 (16), and may return to an empty state.

  The timing at which the meter display returns to the empty state is the symbol variation display (including the symbol variation display subject to notice when the meter display is a normal notice), or the meter display. If the symbol is a prefetching advance notice, it is the symbol fluctuation display immediately before the symbol change display subject to the prefetching notice, or in the symbol change display subject to the prefetching notice, it is empty when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. You may return to the state. For example, in each of the symbol variation displays described above, the state may be returned to the empty state when the symbol is stopped without being full. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. Further, in the second state or the fifth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or displayed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, it may be configured to always return to an empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. In addition, the meter display may be returned to the empty state and the display of the empty state may be continued only after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the next symbol variation display starts immediately without any subsequent hold. If not, the meter display may disappear, but the display may continue in an empty state. In addition, when there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display is started immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

  Further, the white meter display MW may be changed to the red meter display MR within the holding frame UI ′, or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which a mini item is acquired and stocked when the meter displayed meter is full.

  FIGS. 93 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 80 (1) to (6). In FIG. 93 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, a red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This red meter rising item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 93 (8), the movement animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves from the front side to the position overlapping the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 93 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by 4 scales.

  In FIG. 93 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the reach state is formed or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 93 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps with the white meter display MW stored for four scales. In FIG. 93 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. The golden meter rising item UpIg is an item for raising the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales. If the white meter display MW stored for 4 scales, the scale of 3 scales (overflow) However, in FIG. 93 (12), there is no indication of the remaining scale, and in FIG. 93 (13), the mini item is displayed at the right end of the full white meter display MW. A pseudo-announcement item NI, which is a type, appears, and a character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side on the right symbol or the like temporarily stopped in the third symbol pd3. The pseudo-continuous notice item NI is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 93 (14), the “decoration 7” is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, the character display “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. And it is displayed on the information display part ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, and the pseudo continuous notice item NI is stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 93 (15), the remaining three graduations are added to the empty white meter display MW. In other words, the display of the overflowed state due to the full tank state is started at this timing. The opportunity to raise the white meter display MW continues after this.

  The white meter display MW in FIGS. 93 (12) to (15) described above is not ranked down, but the portion that has become full is replaced with the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the remaining portion. Is displayed again.

  In FIG. 93 (16), the pseudo continuous announcement item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, and the pseudo continuous announcement item NI is digested. In addition, a text display of “Activate” is displayed below the pseudo-continuous notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of “Activation” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-announcement item NI is activated, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started immediately thereafter.

  In FIG. 93 (17), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating (temporarily stopped). The middle symbol here is a pseudo-continuous symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect starts. Is done.

  In the example described above, when the meter display becomes full, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item related to jackpot (for example, a pseudo-announcement item NI), the meter display full state is equivalent to high expectation of jackpot, Eventually, the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in a single full meter display.

  FIGS. 94 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 80 (1) to (6). In FIG. 94 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, two meter rising items, a red meter rising item UpIr and a blue meter rising item UpIb, appear at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, a plurality of meter rising items appear simultaneously.

  In FIG. 94 (8), the movement animation of two meter rising items is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb move from the front side to the position where it overlaps the empty white meter display MW. To do. As described previously with reference to FIG. 85, the meter with the white meter display MW is an item for raising the red meter up item UpIr by 4 scales, and the blue meter rise item UpIb is an item for raising the scale by 2 scales. is there. In FIG. 94 (9), the meter rising item of both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappears, and the white meter display MW meter that has been empty until now is the red meter rising item. Ascending up to 4 scales as UpIr and ascending by 2 scales as blue meter rising item UpIb, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 94 (9) is full.

In FIG. 94 (10), two pseudo-announcement items NI that are a kind of mini-item appear at the right end of the white meter display MW in the full state, and “decoration 7” of the right design temporarily stopped, etc. One character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 93, the white meter display MW is full with one red meter rising item UpIr. In this example, there are two red meter rising items UpIr and blue meter rising item UpIb. White meter display MW is full with meter rising items. Whether the red meter rise item UpIr or the blue meter rise item UpIb, the meter rise rate is higher than the default white meter rise item UpI, and the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb This is an easy-to-store item. From this, it can be said that there is a high possibility that a plurality of items can be stocked when a meter rising item that easily stores the meter appears.
The red meter display MR may be more likely to be able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter display MW.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 94 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display of “GET” disappears. One pseudo continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and two pseudo continuous notice items NI are stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 94 (12), the empty white meter display MW is still displayed, and the opportunity to raise the white meter display MW continues to remain after this. When there is no chance or when the big hit is confirmed, the white meter display MW may be erased when it becomes empty or may be erased after returning to the empty state. Also, one of the two pseudo-continuous notice items NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed. “Activate” is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 94 (12), first, one pseudo-announcement item NI is digested, and the entire third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped and re-variation is started. Then, a second temporary stop and a start of re-variation are performed by the stocked second pseudo-continuous notice item NI.

  Of the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there are items that can be carried over until the next symbol variation display (for example, pre-reading notice items), but they cannot be carried over and are currently being carried out. There is also an item (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice item NI) that is digested during the symbol change display.

  In addition, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 94, there may be a case where a plurality of items are stocked with one full meter, but on the contrary, there are cases where items are not stocked even when the meter is full. May be. For example, when the white meter display MW becomes full due to the white meter rising item UpI, the pseudo continuous notice item NI itself does not appear or is not stocked even if it appears.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display in the full state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

  FIGS. 95 (1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 94 (1) to (8). In FIG. 94 (9), the change in the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 is slow. Thus, the right design (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. Also, the meter rising items of both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappear, and the white meter display MW meter which has been empty so far becomes full even in the example of FIG. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 95 (10), in this example, items such as the pseudo-continuous notice item NI do not appear, and the white meter display MW is kept full. Further, in the third symbol pd3, “decoration 1” different from the left symbol of “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. That is, it does not enter the reach state as in the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 95 (10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the white meter display MW becoming full, and the display content is related to the pre-reading notice such as “next chance”. .

  In FIG. 95 (11), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. In FIG. 95 (12), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” are displayed in a shaking manner. This combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” is a chance eye, and in FIG. 95 (13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in response to the chance eye shaking display (temporary stop). The flash pattern fd emits light with a transparent light guide plate arranged on the front side of the light. Note that the flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the light guide plate.

  In FIG. 95 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 95 (15), the third symbol pd3 of the chance is displayed and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Also, in response to the final display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance item such as “the order of 711”. Even if the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a stopped state or a final display, the full white meter display MW is still displayed. In FIG. 95 (16), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 15 (15), that is, the next symbol fluctuation display is started, and the low speed fluctuation starts in the third symbol pd3. Has been. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the full white state meter display MW continues to be displayed in a full state and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. 95 (9) to (15) in FIG. 95 corresponds to the pre-reading notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 16 (16) corresponds to the normal notice.

  FIG. 96 is a diagram showing step by step an example where the meter display is full and items are digested without being stocked even if items appear.

  FIGS. 96 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 80 (1) to (6). In FIG. 96 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 96 (8), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 96 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is full.

  In FIG. 96 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. At the same time as the reach state is formed, or at the timing before and after the reach state, an operation means notice display icon 136I which is a kind of mini item appears on the right end of the full white meter display MW, and the third symbol pd3 is displayed. Among them, the character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap the temporarily stopped right symbol or the like from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon for notifying that an effect of the operation means notice (for example, button notice) will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display showing that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 96 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs even if the operating means is operated. That is, an effect (for example, a notice effect) according to the operation of the operation means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operation means has not been accepted, or that the operation has been invalidated as accepted. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation unit is not accepted, and that the operation is invalidated as accepted, and the operation of the operation unit is invalid. This color indicates that the operation is invalid.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 96 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display “GET” disappears and continues. In FIG. 12 (12), the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation, and changes the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 96 (13), the button effect is started for the middle symbol. Also in the button effect here, as with the button effect shown in FIG. 89, the button image 136a, the arrow display 136b and the character display “press” as the promotion display, and the remaining period meter display 136c are one set. Is displayed. Further, red is a color that prompts the operation means to operate, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button.

  In FIG. 96 (14), the chance button 136 is not pressed and the operation effective period is reduced. However, the chance button 136 is pressed at the next timing of FIG. In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 96 (16), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This character display corresponds to a normal notice.

  In the example shown in FIG. 96 described above, the item acquired when the meter is full is used immediately. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device that is different from the decorative symbol display device whose display has been started. It is also used during symbol variation display that is being performed when display is started. However, there may be cases where the operation means notice display icon 136I remains white and is stocked until the operation valid period of the operation means arrives, and in some cases, stock until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display may be stocked. Also good.

  Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period has elapsed, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed and the normal notice is executed.

  FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear.

  In FIG. 97 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is terminated, and the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 97 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third symbol pd3 is displayed, and the variation icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 97 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 97 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 97 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, on the upper left of the third symbol pd3) , Corresponding to an example of the first meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the display of the two white meter displays MW is started separately, but the display may be started together.

  In FIG. 97 (7), a red meter rising item UpIr appears in the left pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 8 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed on the left white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 97 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and only the meter on the left white meter display MW is increased by four scales.

  In FIG. 97 (10), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the right pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped, and in FIG. (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the right white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 97 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the meter on the right white meter display MW is increased by 5 scales.

  In FIG. 97 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. 97 (14), the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 97 (15), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol from the front side. Three white meter rising items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 97 (16), two of these three white meter rising items UpI move to the left white meter display MW, and the other one moves to the right white meter display MW.

  In each of the two white meter displays MW shown in FIG. 97 (17), the meter is raised by the meter raising item UpI that has moved. That is, the white meter display MW on the left side rises by two scales and becomes full, and the white meter display MW on the right side rises by one scale and becomes full. Furthermore, when the tank is full, a chance-up item CUI appears on the left white meter display MW and a character display of “GET” is displayed. On the right white meter display MW, the swordsman reach item RI is displayed. A character display of “GET” is displayed as it appears. The chance-up item CUI that appears on the left white meter display MW is an icon indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the current symbol change display has increased, and the swordsman reach item that appeared on the right white meter display MW RI is an icon for notifying that it will develop into a swordsman reach that is a kind of super reach production in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 97 (18), each of the two white meter displays MW that have been filled up disappears, the character display of each “GET” disappears, the chance-up item CUI, the swordsman reach item RI, and the second decorative design It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Note that each of the two white meter displays MW that are full may be changed to an empty state without erasing them. 97 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one of them disappears.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 98 (1), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area.

  In FIG. 98 (3), the change display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 changes to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 98 (3) is the default display mode, similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 98 (2), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the display form of the pre-reading notice is shifted and shifted to the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 98 (3). Yes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (4), after the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the empty white meter display MW (for example, the first symbol pd3 is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3). Equivalent to an example of meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 98 (6), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini-item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 98 (7), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 98 (8), Tono-sama character cd throws a change ball icon cI. In FIG. 98 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the right white meter display MW, and the right white meter display MW It is displayed so as to overlap the right end from the front side. The display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 98 (9) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. The change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added at the right end of the right white meter display MW is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yes. In FIG. 98 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right side changes to the red meter display MR while being empty (the meter is 0). Yes. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display is changed from the first state to the fourth state. A plurality of meter displays MW may change at the same time. That is, according to this example, the white meter display MW on the left side may be changed to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is in the zero state) together with the white meter display MW on the right side.

  In FIG. 98 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 98 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and shake fluctuation starts (first). Stop). In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, one blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of “decoration 7” from the front side.

  In FIG. 98 (13), the split animation of the blue meter rising item UpIb is started, and one blue meter rising item UpIb is split into two, and the white meter display MW in the empty state on the left side and the right side. A blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed on each empty red meter display MR. As described above, the blue meter rising item UpIb is an item that is raised by 2 scales for the white meter display MW and is raised by 6 scales for the red meter display MR. In FIG. 98 (14), the left and right blue meter rising items UpIb disappear and the left white meter display MW meter rises only by two scales, whereas the right red meter display MR meter is It is rising to a full tank at once. In the red meter display MR on the right side that is full, a swordsman reach item RI appears and a character display of “GET” is displayed. It should be noted that no item has appeared in the left white meter display MW that has not reached the full state.

  In FIG. 98 (17), only the red meter display MR on the right side, which is full of two meter displays, disappears, and the character display of “GET” also disappears, and the swordsman reach item RI is the second decorative design. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 98 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 98 (18), the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and the variation icon c disappears. After all, the stock swordsman reach item RI was not used in the symbol change display at the time of appearance. Accordingly, the swordsman reach item RI here corresponds to a pre-reading type icon for notifying the development of the swordsman reach which is a kind of super reach production in the next symbol variation display.

  99 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 98 in stages.

  In FIG. 99 (19) following FIG. 98 (18), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the red first hold icon h1 which is the pre-reading notice mode of FIG. 98 shown in FIG. 98 (18) is started. In the 3 symbol pd3, the low speed fluctuation is started. Note that the fluctuation icon c is also displayed in a red display mode, and functions as a normal notice. Also, the white meter display MW on the left side shown in FIG. 98 (18) accumulated up to two scales is still displayed even after a new symbol variation display is started, and has been carried over to the next symbol variation display. become. That is, a continuous symbol variation display is straddled with the meter accumulated.

  In FIG. 99 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 99 (21), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 99 (22), the variation of the left symbol becomes even slower, the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) becomes recognizable, and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from the high velocity variation to the low velocity variation. Has changed.

  In FIG. 99 (23), the left symbol temporarily stops, and fluctuation fluctuation starts (first stop). In addition, a white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after.

  In FIG. 99 (24), the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 99 (25), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is raised by one scale. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 99 (25), the vehicle enters the reach state, and the sound “reach” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 99 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the swordsman reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the character “invoking”. Is displayed. In FIG. 99 (27), the left symbol that has fluctuated has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated has also changed to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to. The white meter display MW displayed at the upper left also moves to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (28), it has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. From the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 99 (28), the swordsman reach item RI has disappeared. The swordsman reach production started in this way is the same as the swordsman reach production shown in FIG. 83 (22) and after, and detailed explanation is omitted, but here, the white meter display MW has been stored only up to 3 scales. Nevertheless, in FIG. 99 (33), a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the Tono-sama character. In the example shown in FIG. 81, in the power-up from the white meter display MW that has been stored only up to 3 divisions, the green aura icon OI1 is shown in FIG. 81 (34). In the example, if multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol variation display, it is easier to hit big than the case where only one meter display is shown, and the color of the aura icon is also a color with high expectation of big hit It becomes easy to become. Even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, a red meter display MR or the like) is displayed rather than only the default white meter display MW. Is displayed more easily, and the color of the aura icon is likely to be a color with a higher expectation level for the jackpot.

All of the meter displays so far are of the increase type, and the display was started in the empty state (the meter is 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full state. The display may be started in the state (second state or fifth state).

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the display is started in a state where the increase type meter display is accumulated halfway.

  In FIG. 100 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 100 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 100 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 100 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and here, a character string such as “when the meter appears with a little accumulated” scrolls in the tutorial display ts. Displayed.

  In FIG. 100 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and the display is started on the third symbol pd3 while the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 100 (4) is a state where one scale is stored, and corresponds to an example of a second state. In addition, a voice of “chance” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 100 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini item appearance notice is made. In FIG. 100 (6), a golden meter rising item UpIg has appeared, and Tono-sama's character cd carries the golden meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 100 (7), Tono-like character cd throws a golden meter rising item UpIg, and the golden meter rising item UpIg is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 100 (8), the golden meter rising item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 100 (9), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from a state where one scale is accumulated to a full state. Since the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item that raises the meter at least for 5 scales, when the display is started with the meter display accumulated halfway, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, The meter is full.

  In the white meter display MW, the big hit symbol is finally determined when the state of being stored halfway is changed to the full tank state than when the state of being stored halfway is not changed to the full tank state. Easy to display. Furthermore, in the case where the white meter display MW is displayed in the state where it is accumulated halfway, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the display is started in an empty state. The same applies to the red meter display MR.

  In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item is increased. For example, compared with the state where the meter is 0 (first state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item may be doubled.

  So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display showing a numerical value.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of a meter effect by a meter display indicating a numerical value.

  In FIG. 101 (1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and the tutorial display ts has a display content such as “When the meter is red”. On the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 101 (2), a white numerical meter display DW appears, and from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 101 (2), a sound effect (appearance) appears. Sound) is output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and its state is a state where the numerical value is 00%. This state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. Further, in FIG. 101 (2), the tutorial display ts is changed to display contents such as “Meter MAX reached”.

  In FIG. 101 (3), the eight-seen character 224 Fa that is one of the movable means falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L. In response to the operation of the movable means, a white meter rising item UpI appears as shown in FIG. However, the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is located in front of the white meter rising item UpI, and a part of the white meter rising item UpI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 101 (5), the white meter rising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter rising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 101 (6), the eight generations 224Fa rises and returns to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter raising item UpI is started. The white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 101 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 101 (7). The UpI is displayed at a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW. The numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (7) is temporarily difficult to visually recognize due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 101 (8), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW is restored, and the numerical display increases from 00% to 10%. Yes. The state of the white numerical meter display DW performing 10% numerical display shown in FIG. 101 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

  In FIG. 101 (9), the shogunate 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 101 (10), a change ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general character 224Fb in accordance with the movement of the general character 224Fb which is a movable means. A part of the change ball icon cI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 101 (11), the change ball icon cI moves downward, the overlap with the falling general's thing 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the change ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 101 (12), the general character 224Fb moves up and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. doing. In FIG. 101 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical meter display DW until then changes to a red numerical meter display DR (corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display). In other words, the meter display is replaced with a different type. The change of the meter display here is not made by the accumulated numerical value but by a change effect (in this case, an effect using the change ball icon cI). Also, the rate of increase in the numerical value varies depending on the relationship between the color of the numeric meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of numeric meter display and the type of item, as in the description using FIG. To do.

  In FIG. 101 (14), there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Should be displayed. However, in FIG. 101 (15), the green meter rising item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, and it is difficult to confirm the presence of the first hold icon h1. . In FIG. 101 (16), the green meter rising item UpIm moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the red numerical meter display DR, and the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. The presence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. Note that the hold icon may be displayed on the near side of the meter rising item.

  The appearance of the meter rising item here is triggered by winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, but it may be triggered by winning a prize at the usual figure starting port accompanied by a prize ball, or accompanied by a prize ball Regardless of whether or not it is possible to trigger the passing of the game ball at the normal start gate, it may be triggered by winning the second special figure start port 232 (electric Chu), there is only a prize ball A winning at the general winning opening 226 may be used as a trigger, or a ball entering the out-out opening for production may be used as a trigger.

  Further, when the meter display is displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance-up item) can be obtained by winning or entering the special drawing start opening 230, 232, etc., compared to the case where the meter display is not displayed. CUI, swordsman reach item RI, etc.) are likely to appear.

  In FIG. 101 (17), the green meter rising item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR increases from 10% to MAX. This MAX is a display representing 100%, for example. The state of the red numeric meter display DW shown in FIG. 101 (17) corresponds to an example of a sixth state.

  In the meter effect shown in FIG. 101, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 101 (18), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the numerical meter display from the front side. . The character display of “Gekiatsu” may be a display indicating that the big hit in the change is rich or that the big hit is confirmed.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 101 changes in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  In FIG. 102 (1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed. In FIG. 102 (2), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is started. The first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 displayed on the white round icon in red to prompt the operation. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold display mode. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red and prompts the operation. In FIG. 102 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

  In FIG. 102 (5), in response to the chance button 136 being operated, the white numerical meter display DW is changed to a red numerical meter display DR. On the other hand, in the display mode of the first hold icon h1, the button image 136a is eliminated, and only the white round icon, that is, the default display mode is set. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice, even though the first hold icon h1 is in the button hold display mode. The meter display has been replaced with a different type of meter display. This is an effect of notifying the big hit with the change, and in the case of a pre-reading notice for notifying the big hit after the next change, the first hold icon h1 may be changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice. Note that the numerical meter display can also be used as a pre-reading notice (for example, carry over to the next change after the MAX display).

  Thus, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon for the button hold is more likely to be displayed when winning or entering the special figure starting port 230, 232 or the like than when the meter display is not displayed.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of an effect different from the meter effect described so far in stages.

  In FIG. 103, the display showing a certain amount or number is displayed as in the meter display described so far, but here, the appearance number of characters is used instead of the meter. The display using the number of appearances of the character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

  In FIG. 103 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 103 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the lost pattern in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 103 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 103 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is “When a character appears”. In FIG. 103 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 103 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the streets of the castle town so far disappears. The silhouettes of the four characters are displayed in a horizontal row. The state shown in FIG. 103 (5) corresponds to the empty state (the meter is 0 state) in the meter display, that is, the first state or the fourth state, in which no character display is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 103 (6), a princess Chibi character display cd1 appears at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “3 more people”. In FIG. 103 (7), a heel character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “two more”. In FIG. 103 (8), a princess character display cd3 appears to the left of the princess character display cd1, and the character display changes to “one more person”. Each of the state shown in FIG. 103 (6), the state shown in FIG. 103 (7), and the state shown in FIG. 103 (8) corresponds to the second state or the fifth state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 103, when three people are gathered, as shown in FIG. 103 (9), the character display of “failure” is displayed, and the whole group cannot be assembled, and the first decorative design shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is resumed. Then, in FIG. 103 (11), the display of variation of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 103 (12), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  Note that the color of the character's silhouette is usually gray, but when the other person is left, the silhouette of the remaining one character may be displayed in red. In this case, the set of all four persons is confirmed, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. A state in which all four people gather together corresponds to a full tank state on the meter display, that is, a third state or a sixth state. In this example of gathering characters, when all four people are gathered, the expectation level of jackpot is very high, and the level of jackpot may be high, or a level higher than the jackpot density (for example, jackpot confirmation). Moreover, even if all four people do not gather, it does not become “failure”, and a degree of expectation of jackpot may be given to some extent, or even if only three people gather, there may be a big hit due to the change Alternatively, there may be a case where a big hit is caused by a symbol variation display started after the variation.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an error occurs during the meter display.

  104 (1) to FIG. 104 (4) are the same as FIG. 98 (1) to FIG. 98 (4). In FIG. 104 (5), a dish full tank error occurs, and FIG. In the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (just above the third symbol pd3), an error display ER1 such as “please remove the sphere” is displayed. The error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed at the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed overlapping with at least a part (for example, all) of the white meter display MW from the front side. Further, the error display ER1 may be a display having transparency, and may overlap the meter display from the front side or the overlapping part may be seen through.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 104 (6), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. However, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping the part of the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) that is temporarily stopped, from the front side, while the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all) of the decorative symbol from the front side. Thus, the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the meter display and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3.

  Further, in FIG. 104 (7), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side, and in FIG. 104 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed. However, it has moved from the front side to the position where it overlaps the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the red meter rising item UpIr from the front side. In FIG. 104 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears and the meter of the white meter display MW should have risen by 4 scales, but the right half or more of the white meter display MW is hidden by the error display ER1. As a result, it is impossible to confirm how far the meter has risen. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (9), four notes are output here as one note rises by one scale. Note that the meter storage (rising state) is not limited to the output sound from the speaker 120, but can also be notified by the light emission mode of light emitting means such as lamps and frame lamps around the decorative symbol display device.

  In FIG. 104 (10), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes slow, and in FIG. (11), the right symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation starts (second stop), 2 A white meter rising item UpI, which is the first meter rising item, appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. As shown in FIG. 104 (12), the white meter rising item UpI has also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the white meter rising item UpI from the front side. In FIG. 104 (13), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale, but the error display ER1 still overlaps, so how far the meter has increased Although it is not possible to confirm whether or not it has been performed, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (13).

  In FIG. 104 (14), a white meter rising item UpI appears without a mini-item appearance notice shown in FIG. 92 (5) and the like, and the Tono-sama character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 104 (15), Tono-sama character cd throws white meter rising item UpI, and white meter rising item UpI hits white meter display MW and should be displayed on white meter display MW. However, since the error display ER1 overlaps, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 104 (16), the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale by the white meter increase item UpI, but since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter has increased However, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 104 (16). Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partially shown in FIG. 104 (16) is in a full state, and a full notification sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. It is output.

  In FIG. 104 (18), a pseudo-continuous notice item NI, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the full white meter display MW, and at the position of the middle symbol in the third symbol pd3 that continues to fluctuate at high speed. Although the character display of “GET” is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps both the pseudo-continuous notice item NI and the character display of “GET”, and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired. .

  105 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of an example of error display ER1 shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (19) following FIG. 104 (18), the character display of “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (20), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW is continuously displayed in an empty state. In FIG. 105 (21), the pseudo-continuous notice item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI is digested. An error display ER1 overlaps from the front side on the pseudo-continuous notice item NI that has moved to the position of the symbol, making it difficult to view. In FIG. 105 (22), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 105 (23), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 1 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps with the pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”) from the front side, and the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the pseudo continuous symbol.

  In FIG. 105 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed. In this example, the ball removal operation has not been performed until the end. That is, when the ball removal operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as “please remove the ball” is automatically hidden. In other words, if the error is resolved, the error display ER1 automatically disappears.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the player cannot visually confirm the state of the meter display (for example, the degree of accumulation, etc.). May display the error display ER1 superimposed on the meter display so that the ball removal operation can be performed quickly. In addition, since the meter display tends to be good for the player when accumulated, the player's line of sight is likely to gather all the time, and the error display ER1 is displayed on the meter display so that the error display ER1 can be easily noticed. There is also an effect.

  Also, in this example, a prize winning error that is more serious than the dish full tank error occurs, and the display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (24). Thus, an error display ER2 for notifying the occurrence of a winning abnormality error is displayed. This error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 from the front side in addition to the third symbol pd3, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. It may be possible to tell that a serious error has occurred by overlapping another error display ER2 on the error display ER1. It should be noted that the error displays do not necessarily have to overlap with each other, and at least the display size may be larger for a serious error. As an example of the serious error mentioned here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error that cannot be resolved without calling a store clerk, or an error display is automatically displayed even if the error is resolved Errors that are not hidden (cannot be deleted) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as serious errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Alternatively, the more serious the error is described in the list shown in FIG. That is, the most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the other hand, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, an error that can be resolved only by the player, and an error display is displayed when the error is resolved. Errors that automatically disappear (disappear) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as minor errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Further, among minor errors, there may be an error in which the meter display is preferentially displayed or the third symbol pd3 is preferentially displayed.

  Further, the error display in FIGS. 104 and 105 is the same in various error displays described in FIGS. 190 to 192 described later. In particular, the notification content described as “liquid crystal display” in the “mode” in FIG. 192 describing the notification mode of error notification of various errors can be replaced with the error display in FIGS. 104 and 105.

  In the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front” is replaced with the description “at least a part of the display overlaps at least a part of the other display from the front”. All of one display may overlap all of the other displays from the front side, all of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side, The part may overlap all other displays from the front side, or a part of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side. Further, in the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front side” can be read in reverse, that is, “the other display overlaps with a certain display from the front side”.

  In the above description, the meter display is an increase type in which a display indicating a certain amount or number only increases. However, even if the display indicating a certain amount or number increases or decreases, Of course, it may be of a decreasing type in which the display representing a certain quantity or number only decreases.

  The meter display includes a white meter display MW, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW and a red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. Although the display using the number of appearances of the character shown in 103 has been described, the display is not limited to these, and the display may indicate a certain amount or number of hands, or display using the number of figures and symbols. Also good.

  Furthermore, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started independently, instead of the change from the white meter display MW. Alternatively, the red meter display MR may be a meter display that is not displayed unless changed from the white meter display MW.

  Further, the red meter display MR may change when the white meter display MW is stored halfway, and the display of the white meter display MW may be taken over and the display may be started with the halfway stored. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself that has been stored halfway may be started alone. In these cases, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the display is started halfway than when the display is started in an empty state.

  Furthermore, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the red meter display MR is stored halfway than when the white meter display MW is stored halfway.

  In addition, in the above description, it is easy to “definitely display a jackpot symbol in the end”. The statement to that effect is “easy to win a jackpot that is more advantageous than a disadvantageous jackpot”. It can be replaced with a statement to that effect.

  The meter effect using the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 can be combined with the transparency effect described with reference to FIGS. For example, an accessory for displaying a meter display (for example, a liquid crystal display device) is arranged on the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L) as the display means 251D shown in FIG. Then, the meter effect described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 may be executable.

  Or conversely, the meter display is displayed on the transmission liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the meter effect described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 is executed, while FIGS. The permeation effect described above may be executed.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 106 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 106, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 107 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 107), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 107) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted one by one. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  107 is provided with the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 107, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title and the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 107 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical type meter display DR, display using the number of appearances of characters shown in FIG. 103, etc.]
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 85 and the like, and a left meter display shown in FIGS. 97 (4) to (17)]. 98 (4) to (18) in the left meter display, or the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102].
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 85 or the like, and a meter display on the right side shown in FIGS. 97 (5) to (17). 98 (5) to (15) on the right side, red numeric meter display DR shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, or display using the number of characters appearing in FIG. 103. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from a first state [for example, an empty state (a state where the meter is 0)] to a third state (for example, a full state),
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from a fourth state [for example, an empty state (a state where the meter is 0)] to a sixth state (for example, a full state),
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, rather than when the first meter display remains in the first state and does not change to the third state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 91 or the example shown in FIG. 97]
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, rather than when the fourth meter display remains in the fourth state and does not change to the sixth state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 or the example shown in FIG. 98]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the first meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Furthermore, there may be a period in which the first meter display and the fourth meter display are displayed simultaneously. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be a display that is always displayed simultaneously, or may be a display that may be displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displayed separately without the period.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying a plurality of types of meter displays. The first meter display may be a display that always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

Also,
'The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is more than the sixth meter display than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state. The probability of changing to the state of is configured to be higher,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the amount of one state change in the fourth meter display may be larger than the amount of one state change in the first meter display.

  Further, when the fourth meter display is changed from the fourth state to the sixth state, the first meter display is changed from the first state to the third state. Finally, the big hit symbol may be easily displayed.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display in which the display is started in the first state [for example, in the case of FIG. 82 (4)],
The fourth meter display is a display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9)] in which the first meter display in the first state is changed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fourth state, and the fourth meter display from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth state in the fourth state. The meter display may change, or the first meter display in the first state may change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

  In addition, the first meter display in the third state is not changed to the fourth meter display, but the first meter display in the second state is changed to the fourth meter display. You may be there.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always starts display in the fourth state. When the first meter display changes to the fourth meter display, the first meter display in the first state always changes to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the first meter display in the first state may always change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

Also,
“The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to (8). Change production],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, it may be an operation means effect (button effect), and the first meter display may change to the fourth meter display in response to the operation means being operated.

  Note that the fourth effect may always be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed.

  Here, the first meter display is a display in which the display is ended by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display in which the display is started by the fourth effect. Also good. That is, the first meter display disappears, and the display of the fourth meter display is started. For example, the first effect is started in a state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed, and when the first effect ends, the first meter display disappears and the first effect is displayed. You may be comprised so that the display of the four meter display may be started.

Also,
The fourth production is a production using a fourth character.
In the case where the fourth character is displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays by the display means [for example, FIG. 82 (1) and FIG. ] Is a character [for example, Tono-sama character cd],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the “decorative display of the decorative pattern” means that the decorative display of the variable display is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display interposed therebetween. Moreover, it can also be regarded as 1 fluctuation | variation from the start of a fluctuation display to a fixed display. Furthermore, “stretching” means that a decorative symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them. Further, the fourth character may be a character that is continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design, or may be a character that disappears in the middle. Further, the character may be displayed continuously during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be a character that disappears in the middle of the display, or it may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be a character.

  Note that the fourth character may be a character that is displayed without fail over a continuous variation display of the decorative design.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display by the display means [for example, FIG. 86 (1) and FIG. 86 (8) to FIG. ) White meter display MW]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first meter may be a display that may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display is started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may be a display that is continued until the stop display is being displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display.

  Here, the first meter display is a display that may change state during display of the decorative symbol variation display by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbol by the display means. It may be a display in which the state may change during the display of the variable display. The first meter display may be a display that always changes state during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is always displayed during the display of the variation display of the decoration symbol. The display may change in state.

  Further, the fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbols by the display means. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be more easily stopped and displayed than the lost symbol. That is, the display of the fourth meter display is started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol is stopped, rather than during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the loss symbol is stopped. Cheap. When the display is started, the fourth meter display may be a display that is always started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The variation display of the decoration symbol of one of the plurality of decoration symbol variation displays is a variation display of the first decoration symbol [for example, the variation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 86 (1)].
The decorative display of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the second decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 86 (3) to (9)],
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fourth decorative display [for example, the display of FIG. 86 (10) to FIG. 87 (21)].
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fifth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 87 (22) to 88 (42)].
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
The first meter display is in an empty state at the timing of FIG. 86 (1), for example, when the state differs between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decoration symbol variation display. , When the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 86 (7)]
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may vary between the fourth decorative symbol variation display and the fifth decorative symbol variation display [eg, empty at the timing of FIG. 87 (19)]. The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 87 (29) in contrast to the state of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finished, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is finished, the fourth decorative symbol is displayed. After the fourth decorative symbol is displayed, the fifth decorative symbol is displayed. After the fifth decorative symbol is displayed, the sixth decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative display of the decorative pattern may be started. In this case, when the variation display of the fifth decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be stopped. Alternatively, when the variation display of the sixth decorative symbol is finished, the big bonus symbol is stopped. It may be displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display in which the state is necessarily different between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth meter display is The display may always be different between the fourth decorative symbol variation display and the fifth decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display that starts displaying in the fourth state [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9) etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  As described above, the fourth state may be an empty state.

  By doing so, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, the meter is full) from the time the meter appears or changes.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that may start display in the fourth state, or may be a display that always starts display in the fourth state. .

Also,
“The fourth meter display is the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 82 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state accumulated from the third scale shown in FIG. 82 (14)]. The display may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 82 (18)],
The fourth meter display is a display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9), etc.] that may be displayed in the fourth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fifth state,
When the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the fourth meter is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. An aspect may be sufficient.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that does not start in the fifth state, or a display that may start in the fifth state. Also good.

  Further, the fifth state may be a state representing a fifth quantity or number, and the fifth quantity or number is the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number. It may be an amount or number between.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that always starts in the fourth state, or a display that always changes from the fourth state to the fifth state, Furthermore, the display may always change from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display that always starts in the fifth state, or a display that always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. .

Also,
[The first meter display is the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 91 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated from one scale shown in FIG. 91 (9)] The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 91 (12)],
The first meter display is a display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (4), etc.] that may be displayed in the first state.
The first meter display is a display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 100 (4)] that may be displayed in the second state.
The first meter display, when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, it is easier for the first meter display to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. An aspect may be sufficient.

  The first meter display may be a display that does not start in the third state or a display that may start in the third state. Also good.

  Further, the second state may be a state representing a second amount or number, and the second amount or number is the difference between the first amount or number and the third amount or number. It may be an amount or number between.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state, or a display that always changes from the first state to the second state, Furthermore, the display may always change from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display that always starts in the second state, or a display that always changes from the second state to the third state. .

Also,
[The first meter display is the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 91 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated from one scale shown in FIG. 91 (9)] The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 91 (12)],
The fourth meter display changes from the fourth state [e.g., the empty state shown in FIG. 82 (9)] to the fifth state [e.g., the state accumulated from the third scale shown in FIG. 82 (14)]. Is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 82 (18)],
The case where the fourth meter display is in the fifth state is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as a big hit symbol in the end than in the case where the first meter display is in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first meter may be a display that may be started in the first state, and the display of the first meter is started in the second state. The fourth meter display may be a display that may be displayed in the fourth state, or the fourth meter display may be The display may start in the fifth state.

  In addition, when the display of the fourth meter is started in the fifth state, it is finally a big hit than when the display of the first meter is started in the second state. The symbol may be easily displayed.

  Here, the display start patterns of the first meter display are summarized. The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state and may change to the second state, the display is started in the first state, and the second state. The display may change to the third state via the display, the display starts in the first state, the display may change to the third state, and the display is in the second state. Is started and the display may change to the third state, the display is started in the first state, the fourth state is followed by the fifth state, and the sixth state. The display is started in the fourth state, the display may be changed to the fifth state, the display is started in the fourth state, and the sixth state is displayed. The display may change to the state of, the display is started in the fourth state, and the display is started through the fifth state. A display case is to change the state, the display state of said fifth is started, a display that may change the state of said six. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

  Note that the display is started in the fourth state and does not have to change to the first state. Further, the display may be started in the second state and may not be changed to the first state.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
The first meter display is performed by displaying the first icon [for example, the blue meter rising item UpIb icon shown in FIG. 85 (c)] for the first number of times (for example, three times). A display that changes from the first state to the third state;
In the fourth meter display, the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 85 (i)] is displayed for the fourth number of times [for example, once]. A display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The fourth number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, if the state changes in a small number of times, the amount of change in one time is large.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by the first effect [for example, the effect by the mini game shown in FIG. 90].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an acquisition effect of the first meter display.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always started by the first effect.

Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2 etc.] corresponding to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 92]. Means,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Further, for example, the first meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area. There may be.

  The display unit may be a unit that always displays a hold icon corresponding to the number of held balls in the hold display area. The display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when the hold icon is displayed.

Also,
“One of the plural types of meter displays is a seventh meter display [for example, a rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 85 (m) and (n)],
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit may be rich. In addition, if the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, empty state] to the ninth state (for example, full state), even if the big hit symbol is surely displayed finally. Good. Further, the seventh meter display may be a display that always changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

  Further, when the first meter display is changed to the third state, the decorative symbol change display displayed on the display means when the first meter display is changed to the third state. When the big hit symbol is surely displayed and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, the display means is displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. In the variation display of the decorative symbol being displayed, the big hit symbol may be surely finally displayed.

  When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be surely finally displayed.

Also,
'The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 92] that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The notice display is a display [for example, super reach production shown in FIG. 83] that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, as the notice display, the pseudo-continuous effect display, the operation means related display, the notice display about the big hit (the normal notice display or the pre-read notice display), the notice display about the effect (for example, the super reach effect), and the like are listed. Can do. That is, as the notice display, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a pseudo-continuous effect display, and the pseudo-continuous effect display may start when the first meter display changes to the third state. The pseudo-continuous effect display may be a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo continuous effect display may be a display that always starts when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo continuous effect display is the fourth meter display. The display may always be started when the display changes to the sixth state.

  The notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the notice display is the fourth meter display is the sixth display. The display may always be started when the state changes to.

  Here, operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the display means is a means capable of displaying an operation means related display, and the operation means related display is a display related to the operation means. The operation means related display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display. The display may start when the state changes to the sixth state. The display related to the operation means may be a display imitating the operation means, a display prompting to operate the operation means (operation promotion display), or an operation of the operation means. It may be a display relating to the effective period (more specifically, a display of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display)), a display reminiscent of the operation means, or these displays. It may be a combination of the above or a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means related display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display. The display may be started whenever the state changes to the sixth state.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variable display of a decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. Is a notice display for the jackpot in the display, the normal notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state, the normal notice display is The display may be started when the four meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal notice display may be a super reach effect display, for example. In addition, the normal notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the normal notice display is the fourth meter display that is The display may always be started when the state changes to the sixth state.

Also,
The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa)
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [eg, a full state or vice versa)
The fourth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a fourth quantity or number [eg, an empty state or vice versa]
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number [for example, a full state or vice versa)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first amount or number and the third amount or number are different amounts or numbers, and the fourth amount or number and the sixth amount or number are different amounts or numbers. May be.

  Further, the third amount or number is an amount or number smaller than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount smaller than the fourth amount or number or It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display is The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display decreases.

  The third amount or number is an amount or number greater than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount greater than the fourth amount or number. It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display is The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display increases.

  Further, the first state is a full state, the third state is an empty state, the fourth state is a full state, and the sixth state is an empty state. On the contrary, the first state is an empty state, the third state is a full state, the fourth state is an empty state, and the sixth state is The state may be a full tank state.

  Further, the first meter display may change from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full]. Yes, the fourth meter display may change from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full]. is there.

Also,
“The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be partially different (for example, only the meter frame mf) or different in color (for example, white and red, etc.),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different colors. Note that the colors may continue to be different. Alternatively, the colors may be different only for a certain period. That is, the color may change, and the color may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Further, it is only necessary that the colors when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the colors when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  The first meter display includes a frame display and an increase / decrease display that increases / decreases in the frame display, and the fourth meter display increases / decreases in the frame display and the frame display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different only in the color of the frame display, or may be different only in the color of the increase / decrease display. The colors of both the frame display and the increase / decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

  The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different in only part of the colors.

Also,
'The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different sizes (display sizes). The size may be continuously different. Alternatively, the size may be different only for a certain period. That is, the size may vary, and it may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or only different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Moreover, the magnitude | size when a display is mutually started should just differ. Alternatively, the sizes when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

Also,
'The display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different display positions. The display position may be continuously different. Or a display position may differ only for a fixed period. That is, the display position may change, and may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Moreover, the display position when a display is mutually started should just differ. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  “Meter display” in the above description may be replaced with “display indicating a certain amount or number”, “first meter display” is “first display”, and “fourth meter display” is “ It may be replaced with “fourth display”.

In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 86, red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical type meter display DR, display using the number of appearances of characters shown in FIG. 103, etc.]
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 82, 86, etc., the left side shown in FIGS. Meter display, left meter display shown in FIGS. 98 (4) to (18), or white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 101 and 102].
One of the plural types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 86 and the like, and a right meter display shown in FIGS. 97 (5) to (17)]. 98 (5) to (15) on the right side, red numeric meter display DR shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, or display using the number of characters appearing in FIG. 103. ,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full state rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full state [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the example or the example shown in FIG. 97], the jackpot symbol is finally configured and displayed more easily,
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full state rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full state [for example, FIG. 82 and FIG. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 83 or the example shown in FIG.
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is configured to be more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 82 (9)],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have the same size and display position [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 82 (4) and the red meter display MR shown in FIG. ],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partly or entirely different in color.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen [for example, the background of a castle town] [for example, FIG. 82 (4)],
The display means is means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen [for example, FIG. 82 (9)],
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain stage stage [for example, a castle town stage]
If the first meter display is not displayed on the certain stage, the fourth meter display may be displayed [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to 83 (25)]. If the fourth meter display is not displayed, the first meter display may be displayed [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 82 (4) to (8)]. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first meter display in the empty state is changed and the fourth meter display in the empty state may be displayed [for example, FIG. 82 (6) to FIG. (9)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., white meter rising item UpI icon]
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to increase at a first increase rate [for example, an increase rate for one scale],
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to increase at a fourth increase rate [for example, an increase rate of 3 scales],
The fourth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the game ball wins a winning opening [for example, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the general drawing starting opening, the general winning opening 226], the first icon may be displayed. Configured to be,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a blue meter rising item UpIb icon],
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to increase at a second increase rate [for example, an increase rate of two scales]
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to increase at a fifth increase rate [for example, an increase rate of 6 scales],
The fifth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the second increase rate,
The second increase rate [e.g., an increase rate for two scales] is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate [e.g., an increase rate for one scale],
The fifth increase rate [for example, an increase rate for 6 scales] is higher than the fourth increase rate [for example, an increase rate for 3 scales],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` The fourth effect may start with the first meter display being displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth character [e.g. Tono-sama character cd] changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display [e.g., FIG. 82 (6) to FIG. 9) Meter change effect using the change ball icon cI shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The fourth character is a character that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative pattern variation displays [for example, FIG. 82 (1) and FIG. ]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character [for example, the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 92 (6)],
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter on the first meter display [for example, FIG. 92 (8)]
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon relating to the symbol variation display,
The second performance may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect [for example, an example shown in FIG. 84] in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2 etc.] corresponding to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 92]. Means,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a seventh meter display [for example, the rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 86 (m) and (n)],
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed,
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays [for example, various error displays and warning displays]
An error display [e.g., dish full error display] of the plurality of types of error displays is a display that may partially or entirely overlap with a part or all of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The certain error display is a display that may overlap a portion representing the accumulation state of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
`` Equipped with a storage tray that can store game balls,
The certain error display is a dish full error display,
The dish full tank error display is a display [for example, a character display such as “please remove the ball”] that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage dish.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display by the display means [for example, FIG. 86 (1) and FIG. 86 (8) to FIG. ) White meter display MW]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a display of the first decorative display [for example, the variable display stopped in FIG. 86 (1)]
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a variable display of the second decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 86 (3) to (9)],
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fourth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 86 (10) to 87 (21)].
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fifth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 87 (22) to 88 (42)].
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
The first meter display is in an empty state at the timing of FIG. 86 (1), for example, when the state differs between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decoration symbol variation display. , When the meter rises at the timing of FIG. 86 (7)]
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may vary between the fourth decorative symbol variation display and the fifth decorative symbol variation display [eg, empty at the timing of FIG. 87 (19)]. The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 87 (29) in contrast to the state of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by the first effect [for example, the effect by the mini game shown in FIG. 90].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
'The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 92] that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to a full tank state.
The notice display is a display [for example, super reach production shown in FIG. 83] that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to a full tank state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 2-1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. The expectation of jackpot is high,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. High expectations for jackpots,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-2)
In the game machine described in appendix 2-1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-1 or 2-2,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative design is stopped.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-3,
The fourth meter display is a display that starts to be displayed in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-4,
One state of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
When the first meter display is started in the second state, the expectation of jackpot is higher than when the display is started in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state when the first icon is displayed a first time,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state when the first icon is displayed a second time.
The second number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-6,
One display of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display,
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the sixth state is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-8)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-7,
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed,
If the fifth state is displayed than the second state, the jackpot display is more likely to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-8,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-9,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes 2-1 to 2-10,
The display means can display a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a certain effect,
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state, it is finally a big hit rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is easy to confirm and display,
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank, it is finally a big hit rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank. The design is easy to confirm and display,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is configured to be more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-2)
A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix A2-1,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have the same size and display position,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partly or entirely different in color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-3)
The game stand according to appendix A2-1 or A2-2,
The display means is means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen,
The display means is means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen,
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain stage.
If the first meter display is not displayed at the certain stage, the fourth meter display may be displayed. If the fourth meter display is not displayed, the first meter display may be displayed. The display is configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-3,
The first meter display in the empty state is changed, and the fourth meter display in the empty state may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-4,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at a first rate of increase,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at a fourth rate of increase,
The fourth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-6)
A gaming machine according to appendix A2-5,
The first icon may be displayed when a game ball wins a winning opening.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-7)
A gaming machine according to appendix A2-5 or A2-6,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise at a second rate of increase,
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise at a fifth rate of increase,
The fifth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the second increase rate,
The second increase rate is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate,
The fifth rate of increase is a rate of increase higher than the fourth rate of increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-8)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-5 to A2-7,
The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-9)
A gaming machine according to appendix A2-8,
The fourth character is a character that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative pattern variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-10)
The game stand according to appendix A2-8 or A2-9,
The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character,
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the first meter display,
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-8 to A2-10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon related to the symbol variation display,
The second performance may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of held balls in a hold display area,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-12,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a seventh meter display,
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed,
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-13,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error indications,
A certain error display of the plurality of types of error displays is a display in which part or all of the error display may overlap part or all of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-15)
A gaming machine according to appendix A2-14,
The certain error display is a display that may overlap a portion representing the accumulation state of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-16)
A gaming table according to appendix A2-14 or A2-15,
It has a storage tray that can store game balls,
The certain error display is a dish full error display,
The dish full tank error display is a display that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage dish.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-16,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed during display of a stop display of decorative symbols by the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-17,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is the first decorative display of the decorative pattern,
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the multiple displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the second decorative pattern,
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the multiple displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the fourth decorative pattern.
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fifth decorative display of the decorative pattern.
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
The first meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the first decoration symbol and the variation display of the second decoration symbol,
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-18,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by the first effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A2-20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2-1 to A2-19,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to a full state,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to a full state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix AA2-1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state, it is finally a big hit rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is easy to confirm and display,
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank, it is finally a big hit rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank. The design is easy to confirm and display,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise by a first amount,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fourth amount,
The fourth amount is greater than the first amount;
The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which a fourth display (for example, character display, icon display, character display, symbol display, etc.) changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

  Hereinafter, other game machines (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reference numerals shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 192 are used only for the explanation using FIG. 108 to FIG. 192 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 192, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

  As the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 108 to 192 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 105 and 193 to 265, and vice versa. The technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 105 and FIGS. 193 to 265 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 108 to 192. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs low sound) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is stored in the outer frame 102, the outer frame 102 is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102. A pair of floating connectors is provided, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other). Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high-frequency speaker that outputs high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. It has been. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, a light source that uses an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and may be referred to as a lamp if it emits light, such as a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, and the like. It corresponds to.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player Built in the ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the presentation mode of various presentation devices 206 (see FIG. 110) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 The chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the player's A return operation button 142 for instructing a balance return and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 108 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In the operation key unit 137, as the cross key, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged, and a determination key is arranged at the center of the cross key. Yes. A cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not include the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

  The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the door 108 with a ball storage tray) is open with respect to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the rendering means provided in the front frame door 106 (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) Button lamp 138. Production by production movable body is included in front frame door 106 (including production movable body), ball rental display section display, chance button 136, ball rental operation button 140, return operation button 142, and The operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower pan full detection sensor can be detected.

  In the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) The game board 200 may include a door 108), and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. The ball launching handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that disables the launching (injection) of the game ball due to the operation of the ball launching handle 134 by the player's operation, and the player touches the ball launching handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launching handle 134 has been operated from a state in which the ball launching handle 134 has not been operated while the demonstration screen is displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, an effect display by the display means, an effect sound by the sound output means, a light emission effect by various decoration LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on the game board or frame) can be mentioned. The effect may be performed by four types of effect means, and may be performed by one or more types of effect means. Further, even with the same type of effect means, there may be effect means for performing an exclusive effect and effect means for not performing it. (For example, the effect moving body of the frame performs a dedicated effect, but the effect moving body of the game board does not perform the dedicated effect, or the effect moving body A of the game board performs the dedicated effect, but the effect moving body B of the game board. (For example, this is also applicable to other production means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 108, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 109 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 108 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball that passes through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball and drops to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is detachable from the main body 104. When the payout device 152 is mounted at a predetermined position, the payout device 152 is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing for the entire game, and the processing information generated by the main control unit 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 111) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 111) that performs control processing relating to the launch of a sphere, and a power supply control section 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines (see FIG. 111). And a power supply board 182 that includes a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by an operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A substrate case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. , A payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power supply having a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180. A power supply board case 184 that houses the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 110 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 109 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three start openings, two first special figure start openings may be provided, one second special figure start opening may be provided, and conversely, one first special figure start opening may be provided. There may be provided two second special figure starting ports. Moreover, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more start ports may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 110 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning ports are provided, the other variable winning port is always closed while one of the first variable winning port and the second variable winning port is opened. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Further, three or more variable prize winning openings may be provided.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), and a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special figure starting opening 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out mouth. In addition, the sensor comprised so that detection of only one part among a winning opening, a starting port, and an out port may be sufficient.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 108, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 110 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit includes two counters), It is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Note that the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, but may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower plate full tank sensor. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the second 2 a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of a special figure holding lamp 216, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like; Driving members, for example, driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 as a normal electric accessory, driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 included is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured not to transmit a command signal to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, and the like, and button sensors 426 that detect pressing of various buttons constituting the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. A detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and the CPU 504. A VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is equipped. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout controller 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on signals such as commands transmitted from the main controller 300, and also wins or rents balls based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. If the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, using FIGS. 112A to 112D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start-up sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been shot. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 112 (a), nine types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 112 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 112A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 112 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. In FIG. 112 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown, of which five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 112 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 112 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol pattern. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 112 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

  Next, the main control unit power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 (a) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, FIG. 113 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 113 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, a stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

  Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (this value). In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the process waits until the voltage value of the power source becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value, and when the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S102: Yes), Proceed to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initial setting, the WDT 314 is activated, the access permission to the RAM 308, the numerical value that determines the execution period of the main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is set in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the main control unit 300 After initial processing of serial communication between the control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 and processing such as setting the maximum value of hardware random numbers, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process goes to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power interruption. Execute startup processing. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (No at Step S106), the process goes to Step S108 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed.

  Here, the return activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initial setting at the time of return activation is performed. Specifically, a process for setting information indicating “return start” in the power status information, a process for setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (an error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Processing for clearing, processing for clearing the previous device error status, processing for clearing the device error status for security signals, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, in step S202, the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 is set as an address for starting RAM clearing, and then the return activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (mainly set) to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in a timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, an initial activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial activation process is started, initial setting of soft random numbers is performed in step S301. Specifically, an initial setting of soft random numbers used in special drawing or ordinary drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the addresses after the storage area that was initially set in step S301 are set as addresses for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of prohibition of interrupt, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, as with the power recovery command. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 113A, after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, a RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, a sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting an initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, design data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, universal signal, normal electric accessory (second special figure starting port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy winning status signal, special signal per special signal, special signal small hit signal (limited to models equipped with small hits), special signal changing signal, special signal variable time reduction status signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Mouth 234, Attacker) In-operation signal, Condition device in-operation signal, Continuing action device in-operation signal, Big prize opening solenoid signal, Ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, Symbol LED data, External terminal board signal, etc. are set Set the output port. Moreover, after finishing the process of this step S111, it transfers to the main control part main loop process. Here, the winning easy state may indicate a power support state.

  Next, the main control unit main loop process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process.

  When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above main control power-on process, the main control unit main loop process starts to execute the main control unit main loop process. After setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, a basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and an initial value of the general figure determining random number counter is updated. The initial value generation random number counter can be updated by, for example, obtaining a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and adding 1 to the obtained value when the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0-20. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting interrupt permission, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If there is a command to be transmitted, a process for transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, it progresses to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the normal diagram variation time determination random number is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop process, and if it is less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to “suspend”. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms). The main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S502 and step S503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated). If the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). In the case (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519, and when the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, the interrupt function is limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, the first If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in the present embodiment) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is counted for the time for displaying the symbol on the first symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), general map starting port 228, and out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of input of signals relating to switches such as the variable prize opening (attacker) 234 and the prize winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning at the start opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area as being invalid is deleted.

  In step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning award winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in the above-described step S507, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. Note that if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it may be determined that there has been a prize.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S507, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228.

  For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning opening counter updating process is also performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning at the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this winning acceptance process, whether the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234 are won matches the winning determination pattern information. The determination result is used. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. In addition, when the random number of a special figure is acquired, special figure prefetching processing (presence / absence judgment, symbol, prefetch lottery of variation time) is also performed. The special figure prefetch process will be described in detail later.

  In step S509, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process for setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for production.

  In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. In addition, as a command which the main control part 300 transmits to the payout control part 600, the communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control part 600) transmitted after progress of the starting waiting time of the 1st sub control part 400 after power activation is passed. And a command for notifying the starting method of the main control unit 300 (initial start and return start), and a prize ball number command for instructing payout of game balls for designated prize balls.

  The command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 includes a communication confirmation return command (response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test test signal Commands that contain information on the occurrence of commands (prize ball signal output request), information on the occurrence of payout errors (including no errors), and prize ball payout operation status commands (whether or not award balls are being paid out) And a command indicating that the payout is in progress (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED).

  Next, in step S512, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure process state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S513, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the off symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid 332 of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S514.

  In step S513, a general drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and if a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in transmission information to be transmitted. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In the external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400 are made. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a change stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included. In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, a large winning opening winning command is set.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is selected by the 15R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game being held, etc. is set.

  In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game table frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game being held, etc. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S516, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S517, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as “Number of reserved balls, combination of symbols”, status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing to set data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or LED, a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S519, a sub control activation waiting wait process is performed. In this sub-control activation wait process, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, the sub-control activation wait counter is decremented by 1, and this activation wait counter becomes 0. If so, preparations for transmitting a predetermined command are made. Note that the predetermined command includes one or more commands such as a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been canceled, a lower pan full error) A command indicating that there is a payout ball shortage error, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error There are a command indicating that is generated, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

  In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 117 (a), the process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 118, and the special figure shown in FIG. The display confirmation weight process, the hit start weight process shown in FIG. 120 (a), the special electric charge operation process shown in FIG. 121, the special electric charge remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 124, the special electric charge operation end process shown in FIG. One of the hit end display weight processing shown is executed.

  In step S603, the easy winning status is set to ON. In step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined. In the next step S605, the presence / absence of the state change of the special figure processing state (change in the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined. When there is no state change (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update process is terminated, and there is a change in the special figure processing state. If this is the case (if the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “waiting for change” state. If applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S606). : No), the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “hit start display wait state”. If applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608. Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

  In step S608, a sub-command transmission request is set (in this embodiment, after setting a transmission request for a gaming state command including a special drawing and a normal gaming state, a firing position including information on whether or not the player is in a right-handed state. After the command transmission request is set), the special figure state update process is terminated. The order of sub-command transmission requests is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or a plurality of command transmission requests may be collectively performed in one process.

  Next, the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

  This special figure related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “waiting for change” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process.

  In step S701 of the special figure related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball number is 0. In the case of (when there is no special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when other than 0 (when there is special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S702: No), the process proceeds to step S705 to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

  In step S703, the special figure 1 reserved ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved ball number is 0. When there is no variable game hold (step S704: Yes), the special drawing related lottery process is terminated, and when it is other than 0 (when there is special figure 1 variable game hold) (step S704: No). In order to execute the processing relating to the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the value of the number of reserved special figure 2 balls stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. When the process related to special figure 1 is executed, the process is executed in the RAM 308. The stored special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one. In step S706, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the reservations 2 to 4 in special figure 2 is stored in 3 is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to 3, and when the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. The random number value stored in the random number storage area to be shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 in FIG. 1 and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. 1 is cleared. Thus, the game machine (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. In addition, each of FIG. 2 and FIG. 1 can store up to 4 holds.

  In step S707, a lottery process per special figure is performed. Although details will be described later, in this special drawing lottery process, whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or special figure 1 variable game) is successful is determined. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In the display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and the second special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery processing per special symbol in step S707 and the random number value. The lottery of the special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is performed.

  FIG. 128A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 128B is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is determined in the display symbol lottery process of step S708, the special symbol 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128A is referred to, and the special symbol by the special symbol lottery process of step S707 is referred to. Based on the result of the determination in FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value, the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  Further, when the display symbol data of the special figure 2 is determined in the display symbol lottery process in the step S708, the special symbol lottery process in the step S707 is referred to with reference to the special symbol 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 128 (b). On the basis of the result of the determination of special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number, the display symbol data of special figure 2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, symbol data to be displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display device display setting process (step S517) in the main control unit timer interrupt process, and is controlled to be displayed on the special figure display device. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined. If the symbol data is lost, the process ends.

  When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a big hit or a small hit symbol, a process for setting data to be set at the end of the hit (data setting process after the hit is completed) is performed. The after-hit data setting process is a process for setting a gaming state set after the win according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 117 (a), in step S709, a special figure variation time lottery process is performed. In this special figure variation time lottery process, a variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the result of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the lottery process per special figure in step S707 and the numerical value range of the random number value. Then, after selecting the special figure variation time timer, the special figure related lottery process is terminated.

<Lottery processing per special figure>
Next, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), the special drawing lottery process (step S707) will be described. FIG. 117B is a flowchart of the lottery process per special figure (step S707) in the special figure-related lottery process.

  In step S801 of the special figure lottery process, the lottery per special figure is performed with reference to the determination table. In the present embodiment, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are used for the lottery per special figure using the same success / failure determination table, but separate special determination tables for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are provided. You may make it prepare.

  FIG. 127A is a diagram illustrating an example of a high probability table for determination of success / failure, and FIG. 127B is a diagram illustrating an example of a low probability table for determination of success / failure. In the lottery process per special figure in step S801, if the special figure 1 is determined to be successful, if it is in the special figure high probability state, the special determination high probability table shown in FIG. In the case of the low-probability state, the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. 127B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, the big hit, the small hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, when determining whether or not the special figure 2 is determined in the lottery processing per special figure in step S801, if the special figure is in a high probability state, refer to the high probability table for determining whether or not it is shown in FIG. 127 (a). In the case of the special figure low probability state, the failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. 127B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Returning to FIG. 117 (b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the determination result of lottery per special drawing (lottery result) in step S801 is other than “big hit”. If it is not “big hit” (step S802). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of “big hit” (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, a special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 127C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery process in step S803, the special figure small hitting determination table is referred to by referring to the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 127 (c), and based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hitting determination table and the acquired random number value. Select the result of whether or not to win a small lottery. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Referring back to FIG. 117 (b), in step S804, the RAM 308 is selected based on the determination result of lottery per special drawing (lottery result) in step S801 and the determination result of lottery (lottery result) in special drawing small lottery in step S803. Is set to any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lack”. In the next step S805, information indicating “special figure changing” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special symbol state update process, the symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 118 is called and executed.

  In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared. In the next step S807, a subcommand (special figure change start command) transmission request is set. In the next step S808, the special figure is displayed. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the change is in progress (2) (or special figure 1), the lottery process per special figure is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the process during symbol variation executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the process during symbol change executed in the special figure state update process. This symbol changing process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “special figure changing” in step 602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S901 of the process during symbol variation, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the update target RAM is calculated according to this special figure operation type. .

  In step S902, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901, the special figure fluctuation time timer set in step S709 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired, and whether the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 or not. Determine whether or not. As a result of the determination, when the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is not 0 (set special figure fluctuation time) If (No has passed) (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the special symbol display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the symbol variation processing is terminated, and if it is the update timing (step S903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, after the special symbol display symbol data is updated, the symbol variation processing is terminated.

  By this special figure display symbol data updating process, in the case of special figure 1, the first special figure display device 212 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. In the case of Special Figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Change display of special figure 2" is performed.

  In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. To do. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure display confirmation wait process shown in FIG. 119 is called and executed.

  In step S907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S908, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S909, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, so that the symbol determination frequency information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

  In step S910, a transmission request for a subcommand (special figure variation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, the symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (the symbol of special figure 1 shown in FIG. 112 (a), or 112 (b) is acquired, and after setting the special figure display confirmation timer indicating the time for maintaining the special figure stop display based on this symbol type information, End the process during fluctuation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This special figure display confirmation weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special figure display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. It is.

  In step S1001 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S911 of the symbol changing process is larger than 0. If it has not elapsed (step S1001: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weighting process is terminated. If not (the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 Proceed to

  In step S1002, the symbol determination number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol variation processing is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special symbol variation time shortening status at the time of symbol stop (special symbol variation game) (In this embodiment, a status indicating any one of the normal gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state, and the short-time gaming state) is saved in the RAM 308 as a saved special figure variation time reduction status described later.

  In step S1004, the success / failure determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired. In the next step S1005, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “big hit”. As a result of this determination, if the success / failure determination type is “big hit” (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the correct / failure determination type is other than “big hit” (step S1005: No), the process proceeds to step S1006. Then, the number of time reductions in the special figure stored in the RAM 308 is updated (one time reduction number is subtracted).

  In step S1007, the success / failure determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired. In the next step S1008, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “small hit”. As a result of this determination, if the determination type is “small hit” (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the determination type is other than “small hit” (step S1008: No), step In step S1009, information indicating “waiting for change” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 117A is called and executed.

  In step S1010, basic signal information (for test) indicating the special symbol winning / not-accepting type and symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, RAM clearing in the designated range is executed. Here, the winning / notifying type, the number of operations of the special winning combination, the number of winnings of the big winning opening (variable winning opening 234), the operating pattern of the special electric winning combination, the operating state of the special electric winning combination, the total number of winnings per win, the flag relating to the abnormal winning of the large winning opening, In addition to clearing information such as the winning end display timer type, at the time of big hit, further clear the easy-to-win status and the special figure status.

  In step S1012, information indicating a “hit start display wait state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start wait process shown in FIG. 120 (a) is called and executed. In step S1013, the winning total winning number is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request for a subcommand (winning start command) is set.

  In step S1015, symbol type information is set. In step S1016, a hit start display timer is set according to the symbol type information set in step S1015. In step S1017, according to the symbol type information set in step S1015. After setting other information signal setting types, the special figure display determination wait process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 120 (a), the hit start weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 120A is a flowchart of the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process. The winning start weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the “winning start display weight state” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process. .

  In step S1101 of the winning start weight process, it is determined whether or not the winning start display timer set in step S1016 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is larger than 0. If not (step S1101: Yes), the winning start weight process is terminated. If not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, after executing a special power combination release process described later, the hit start wait process is terminated.

  Next, the special power release process (step S1102) in the winning start weight process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (b). FIG. 120B is a flowchart of the special power release process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process.

  In step S1201 of the special power combination release process, information indicating “special power combination operation state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric utility operation process shown in FIG. 121 is called and executed.

  In step S1202, the value of the number of winning prizes in the RAM 308 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operation state of the special electric character are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the subcommand (special electric power) is cleared. Set the request to release the role release command. Thereby, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special symbol display confirmation weight process is acquired. In the next step S1205, a special electric actor action pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-1) to FIG. 123 (a-3), the special electric role operation pattern data tables are prepared for the number of types of special figures that are big hits and small hits. FIG. 123 shows only a part of them as an example. The special electric combination operation pattern data table stores special electric combination operation data indicating the opening / closing pattern of the variable prize opening 234 for each round. As shown in FIG. 123 (b-1) to FIG. 123 (b-3), the special power combination operation data includes information (open timer pattern, close timer pattern) indicating the open / closed state of the variable prize opening 234, the open state or One or a plurality of timer pattern data composed of time information (special power combination opening / closing timer) for maintaining the closed state is stored. Thereby, various variations can be given to the opening / closing operation of the variable prize opening 234 in one round.

  For example, in the big hit game in the case of big hit with the special figure A, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-1), the special electric power operation data 1 shown in FIG. Then, after the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 29500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the closing timer pattern 3 is controlled so that the variable winning opening 234 is closed and the operation is ended.

  Also, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-2), the above-mentioned special electric charge operation is performed in the 1R to 4R, 6R to 8R, 10R to 15R. The data 1 is referred to perform the above-described operation, while in the 5th and 9th eyes, the special electric combination operation data 4 shown in FIG. 123 (b-3) is referred to and the opening / closing operation of the variable prize opening 234 is performed. Be controlled. That is, at the 5R and 9R, after the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, the operation that the variable winning opening 234 is kept closed by 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1 is executed four times. After that, the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 17500 ms by the opening timer pattern 3, and thereafter, the variable winning opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 and the operation is finished.

  Further, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 123 (a-3), in the first to fourth rounds, the above-mentioned special electric power operation data 1 is referred to and the above-described operation is performed. On the other hand, in the 5R to 15R, the special electric combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. 123 (b-2) is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is controlled. That is, at the 5R to 15R, after the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, the variable winning opening 234 is kept closed by 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1, and then the closing timer pattern 3, the variable prize winning opening 234 is controlled to be maintained in the closed state as it is. Note that another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closing pattern timer 3 is set.

  In step S1206, the number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is acquired. In the next step S1207, the acquired number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special power combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of operations of the special power combination (number of rounds) is read to set the operation pattern of the special power combination. In step S1209, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S1210, after the special power combination winning detection timer is cleared, the special power combination release process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the special electric power actuating process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation process executed in the special figure state update process. This special power combination operation process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates “special power combination operation state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S1301 of the special electric actor operation process, the maximum number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1302, the number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1303, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1304. If not (when the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special timer opening / closing timer corresponding to the open timer pattern or the closing timer pattern being executed, which is set in step S1208 of the special electric actor release process, is greater than zero. If the opening / closing timer has not elapsed (step S1304: Yes), the special electric power actuating process is terminated, and if not (when the special electric power opening / closing timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 is performed. Proceed to In step S1305, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In the next step S1306, a special power combination opening / closing timer pattern is acquired. In the next step S1307, a closing timer pattern among the acquired special power combination opening / closing timer patterns. , It is determined whether or not the special power combination is being operated (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

  As a result of the determination, when the special power combination is operating (when the closing timer pattern is not set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closed timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special power combination operating process is terminated. When the special power combination is not operating (when the closing timer pattern is set to information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the “remaining sphere detection state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process shown in FIG. 124 is called and executed.

  In step S1309, the special electric utility operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, other information signal transmission determination timers are cleared, and in step S1311, a transmission request for a subcommand (big prize closing command) is issued. Set.

  In step S1312, the special electric prize winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric prize winning detection timer is a timer for effectively detecting game balls remaining in the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) after the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) is closed. It is. In step S1313, after setting the drive signal (large winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) to OFF, the special electric character operation processing is ended.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 changes to the difficult entry state when the maximum number of winning balls has passed to the passing area after entering the easy entry state. It functions as an example of variable winning means.

  Next, the special power combination control process (step S1209, step S1305) executed in the special power combination release process and the special power combination activation process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the special power combination control process executed in the special power combination release process and the special power combination activation process.

  In step S1401, special power combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired from the operation patterns of the special power combination to be executed, which is read and set in step S1208 of the special power combination release process. To do. For example, when the operation pattern of the special electric combination indicated in the special electric combination operation data 1 is set and the round is started, the “open timer pattern 2 shown in“ (1) ”of FIG. 123 (b-1). ”Is acquired. In addition, after the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 123 (b-1) is completed, the “closing timer” indicated by “(2)” in FIG. 123 (b-1). The control data of “Pattern 3” is acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S1402, opening / closing information indicating whether the variable prize opening 234 is opened or closed is acquired based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric character. For example, if it is “open timer pattern”, data (opening information) for opening the variable winning opening 234 is acquired, and if it is “closed timer pattern”, data for closing the variable winning opening 234 (closed) Information).

  In step S1403, a special electric combination opening / closing timer is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination acquired in step S1401 and the opening / closing information acquired in step S1402. For example, when “open timer pattern 2” is acquired and the open / close information is “open information”, an open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. When “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “closing information”, a closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

  In step S <b> 1404, information indicating acceptance is set in the special power prize winning / impossible state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special power combination winning / impossible state is acceptable is set, it can be accepted that the game ball has passed the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 of the variable winning opening 234) provided in the variable winning opening. If there is information indicating that acceptance is not possible, even if the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1) provided in the variable winning opening, it becomes invalid. In step S1405, special electric signal information (test signal) is set. In step S1406, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, the special power combination opening / closing timer of the special power combination opening / closing timer is set, and then the special power combination control process is terminated. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the special electric power remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric character remaining sphere detection process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “remaining sphere detection state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1501 of the special power combination remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special power combination operation process is in operation. If not (step S1501: Yes), the special electric combination remaining sphere detection process is terminated. If not (when the special electric combination operation interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), the process proceeds to step S1502. move on.

  In step S1502, a special power combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating "special power combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric utility operation end process shown in FIG. 125 is called and executed. That is, it becomes a state of the interval between rounds.

  In step S1504, after the special power combination signal information (test signal) is cleared, the special power combination remaining ball detection process is terminated. Note that a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after clearing the special power signal information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric utility operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special electric utility operation end state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1601 of the special power combination operation end process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special power remaining ball detection process is in operation. If it is in operation (step S1601: Yes). ), The special electric utility operation end processing is terminated, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol win / rejection type is a small hit. If it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), the small hit is handled in step S1603. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, if the special figure win / loss type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number of times is set as the maximum winning opening number stored in the RAM 308. In step S1605, the number of times of opening the special winning opening is compared with the number of opening of the special winning combination, and it is determined whether or not the number of opening of the special winning combination is less than the maximum opening number of the large winning opening, that is, whether or not the winning is not finished. . If the winning has not ended (step S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special electric character release process, and the special electric character operation end process is ended. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, if the winning is over (step S1605: No), the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, a hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired. In step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating “hit end display wait state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display wait process shown in FIG. 126 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting a transmission request for the subcommand (hit end command), the special electric utility operation end processing is ended.

  Next, the hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of the hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit end display weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “hit end display wait state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1701 of the winning end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the winning end display timer set in step S1608 of the special electric utility operation end process is in operation (step S1701: Yes). The winning end display weight process is terminated. If not (step S1701: NO), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area. In step S1703, the basic signal information (for testing) is cleared. Information indicating "waiting state" is set. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 117A is called and executed.

  In steps S1705 to S1707, the display symbol data, symbol type information, and the total number of winning prizes are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the small hit is completed. If the small hit is completed (step S1709: Yes), the winning end display weight process is performed. When the process is finished and the process is finished with other than the small hit (when finished with the big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

  In step S1710, setting data (probability change, short time, hidden probability change) after hitting is acquired, and in step S1711, data corresponding to the setting data after hitting (probability change status (special figure probability state status, normal figure probability state status)) , Time reduction (Special figure fluctuation time reduction fluctuation frequency, Fluctuation time correction fluctuation frequency, Easy winning status fluctuation frequency), Time reduction status (Special figure fluctuation time reduction status, Normal figure fluctuation time reduction status, Open extension status), Variation time lottery The state (information for determining the variable time lottery table and the like) is set, and the setting data after clearing the hit is cleared, and then the hit end display wait process is ended.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of a game control unit that can execute a big hit game.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process in the winning opening winning process in step S508 shown in FIG. 115 will be described.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of special figure prefetch processing. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 130A to 130C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S508a). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S508b. If it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508b, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value) is stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. Read ahead. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 127 and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 128, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. A pre-determination is made prior to the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown at 117. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S508c following step S508b, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508d, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage, as in the special figure 2, for example. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S508e. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S508e, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S508f, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S508h. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S508f, the increased special figure 1 starting information (a combination of the special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value) is stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. Read ahead. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 127 and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 128, the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. A pre-determination is made prior to the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown at 117. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S508g following step S508f, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S508h, “predetermined” information indicating that start information is not prefetched without prefetching the increased special figure 1 start information is stored in place of the stop symbol information in FIG. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S405), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 129, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 130 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 130A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 130 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure 1 variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 130 (a), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 130B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 130 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 130 (b), “special drawing f” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 130 (b), the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 130 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 130 (c), “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the determination result and the special figure variation time are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and is also stored in the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch result information. Can be sent.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 131A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S4001 of FIG. 131 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S4003 following step S4001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4005. . In step S4005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S4007 following step S4005, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S4009 following step S4007, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S4007, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S4011, following step S4009, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S4009 according to the detection result is the effect data corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Process to change to.

  In step S4013 subsequent to step S4011, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S4009, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S4015 subsequent to step S4013, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the game board lamp 442 or the game table frame lamp 452 in the effect data read out in step S4009, this command is used as the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table. This is output to the frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In step S4017 following step S4015, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S4019 following step S4017, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S4009, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S4003.

  FIG. 131 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S4031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 131C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S4041 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4003 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S4003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S4043 subsequent to step S4041, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S4019) of the first sub control unit main process, and the random number value for other effects is updated. Etc.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 132 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S5001 of FIG. 132A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S5001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S5003 following step S5001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5005. . In step S5005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S5007 following step S5005, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S5009 following step S5007, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S5007, processing such as reading effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to the command from ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S5011 following step S5009, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S5009, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S5003.

  FIG. 132 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S5031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 132 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S5041 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S5003 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S5003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S5043 subsequent to step S5041, a random number value for other effects is updated.

  FIG. 132 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S5011 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S5051, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S5053 following step S5051, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S5053: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5055. If not (step S5053: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5055, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S5051, the CPU 504 sets information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 518). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5057 following step S5055, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S5059 following step S5057, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S5059: Yes), The process proceeds to step S5061, and if not (step S5059: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5061, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 133 (a) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 133 (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variation icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the variation icon h0 is displayed, the fact that the symbol variation is being displayed is informed. Note that the change icon h0 is not displayed when the symbol confirmation display is in progress. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed at all times, and specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, N look-ahead notices, notices in the symbol change display, and symbol change display holds accumulated) May be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 133 (a), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), but are displayed according to the progress of the game May change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as a variable icon or expressed as a variable icon moving. Good. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, a second decorative design (fifth design) smaller than the first decorative design is a combination of decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stop is displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative design in the second decorative design matches the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design, but the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design and the decoration in the second decorative design. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (in this case, “4” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. It should be noted that the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Also good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

  Also, a crest character 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be moved up and down or rotated depending on the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (a), the crest character 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest member 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first large board acting 224Ga with the letters “Large”, which is one of the production movable bodies, and the second with the letters “Board”. A large board behavior object 224Gb, a third large board behavior object 224Gc with the letters “behavior”, and a fourth big board behavior object 224Gd with the letters “mai” are arranged. Each of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior article 224Gd incorporate light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of effects.

  In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. . The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H incorporates light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of effects.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of these decorative symbol display device 208, family crest role 224E, first large board behavioral 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral 224Gd, and Senryo box role 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 133 (a), the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 4th symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the special symbol symbol is stopped, the LED is turned on, while the special symbol symbol variation is blinking or extinguished. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable vertically along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the rendering operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured to be able to all be performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform an effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or the directing operation that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to perform a rendering operation. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs an effect operation, and either one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. Note that the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the base hs0, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 133 (b), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 133 (b), the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode). Depending on the situation, the display mode may change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stopped in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative design in the second decorative design matches the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design, but the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design and the decoration in the second decorative design. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display a 2nd holding | maintenance number display to the decoration symbol display apparatus which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Further, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may not be displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by other effect display devices (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be frameless. Moreover, a decoration member and LED may be provided in the frame.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down or rotate depending on the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 133 (b), the crest character 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the crest character 224E shown in FIG. 133 (b) is the upper end of the crest character 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

  In addition, the above-mentioned thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. The Thousand box accessory 224H is disposed in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest role 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H. It is possible to visually recognize the operation of each effect movable body.

  In FIG. 133 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a) or FIG. 133 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects applicable in the present embodiment.

  134 (A1) to FIG. 134 (A2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 134 (A1), when the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand box action 224H operate, the mode shown in FIG. 134 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front. Each rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to an overlapping position at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand-thousand box feature 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large board behavioral feature 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role 224Gd, and the first big board behavioral feature 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral feature 224Gd Compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H, it is difficult to view. In addition, you may be comprised so that the thousand-thousand box combination 224H may not overlap with the front side of the 1st large board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral thing 224Gd. Alternatively, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-thousand box role 224H and overlap the thousand-thousand box role 224H.

  In FIG. 134 (B1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative design display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL easier to see. .

  134 (C1) to FIG. 134 (C4) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (C1) to FIG. 134 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I is provided as an effect movable body instead of the family crest character 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versatile writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 includes a lift arm and an LED array that is rotatably attached to the tip of the lift arm. The lifting arm can be lifted and lowered by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data that is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing in this way, the light emission aspect of several LED changes during rotation of an LED array, and an afterimage is visually recognized by a player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED, and a pattern is represented. In addition, the POV display 224I is disposed on the front side of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H. Can be set.

  FIG. 134 (C1) shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  FIG. 134C2 shows a state in which the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array is overlapped on the front surface side at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not overlapped.

  FIG. 134 (C3) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbols, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

  FIG. 134 (C4) shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the word “heat” is displayed, and a notice display or a pre-read notice display is being performed. Note that the image displayed on the POV display 224I is not limited to that described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative design, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is decreased to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Also good. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be dark-displayed.

  In FIG. 134 (D1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to visually recognize.

  134 (E1) to FIG. 134 (E2) show a state in which the family crest actor 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (E1), the family crest member 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than at least a part of the icons does not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (E2), the family crest actor 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Note that the present invention can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a).

  FIG. 134 (F1) shows a state in which the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is moved from the initial position to a position that overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (F1), since the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the thousand-thousand-box accessory 224H, it is more difficult to visually recognize the case than when it is not overlapped. In this production example, when the Senryo box combination 224H operates, the family crest combination 224E is not operated so that the Senryo box combination 224H and the family crest combination 224E do not interfere with each other. Note that there may be a case where both the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are operating. In addition, when the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates, a retreat operation for moving the family crest accessory 224E further downward may be performed.

  In FIG. 134 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, the background image is configured such that an area that has not been displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are slid can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that is visible when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move. Accordingly, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward. The second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward and The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 134 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the enlarged left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the enlarged right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Are displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbols may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  134 (I1) to FIG. 134 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 134 (I1) to (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided instead of the family crest character 224E. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 134 (I1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 134 (I2), the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the LED array rotates to a constant rotation. The figure shows that the speed is reached and the rotation speed is constant, and the word “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 134 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  134 (K1) to FIG. 134 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 134 (K1) to (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap with the decorative member, and the image displayed in the region is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 134 (K1) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

  FIG. 134 (K2) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is scrolled in accordance with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. The display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In other words, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the overlapping images are adjusted in accordance with the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can display with a sense of unity. As shown in FIG. 134 (K2), the family crest actor 224E moves downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is set to the retracted position. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 134 (K2 '), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. Further, the family crest character 224E may rotate at an initial position or vibrate when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. You may vibrate while rotating.

  134 (K3) to FIG. 134 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of rotating integrally in the direction (CCW direction) is shown. FIG. 134 (K4) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display that rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating, but the displayed image does not rotate.

  FIG. 134 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative design display device 208 instead of the family crest actor 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative design display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays on the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) described above are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state where the savory character SBH is walking from the right side to the left side is shown, but a part of the character is overlapped with the sub display device 208S. It is more difficult to view than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. Note that as shown in FIG. 134 (L1 '), a display image (background image, sabotani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 134 (M1), the operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are shown. In other words, the sub display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the letters “large”, “board”, “vibration”, and “mai” are in front, respectively, and then the decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position on the front side of the approximate center. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which a predetermined notice effect or a pre-read notice effect is being performed is shown. ing.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 to 138. Here, FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 136 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 136 in stages, and FIG. 138 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  135 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, and a general map hold. A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (a) is applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b) can also be applied. Also, in the following, illustration of the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, the thousand-car box function 224H, and the light guide plate IL is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 133A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” in accordance with the stop indication of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 135 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 135 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed on the second UI part 281. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 135 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. In FIG. 135 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are indicated by broken lines. However, the broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 135 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 135 (1), the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon in FIG. 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol display device by the start of variation → the start of blinking or extinction of the fourth symbol → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon → decoration Although it is performed in the order of the change start of the symbols, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 135 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design. It should be noted that the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variation display of the fourth symbol. May be started, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variation display of the fourth symbol is started.

  In FIG. 135 (3), the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and the state where the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. In addition, the update display of the second reserved number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time. The display may be started, or the updated display of the second hold number display may be performed after the second decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In FIG. 135 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 has started. Here, the movement (decrease) animation indicates that the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves toward the base hs0 of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 133). . At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 135 (5), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 135 (6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon base hs0 and is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Display starts. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the movement animation and the start of the first decorative symbol change display may be at the same timing, or after the movement animation ends, the first decorative symbol change display may be started. The moving animation may end after the display of the variation of one decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 135 (7) shows a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (8), a state in which a navigation character notice by the navigation character YM is being performed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a balloon with the word “opportunity” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed to notify that the expectation for the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (9) shows a state in which the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In the Navi character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “Opportunity” to the character display of “No”, thereby informing that the sense of expectation for the big hit is further increased. Note that the timing at which Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “NO”, or the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “NO”. In addition, there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) to be promoted from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Intense heat”) may not be performed. . In addition, the Navi character notice is not only a notice in the symbol change display, but a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, an explanation display (characters appearing in various notices, game states, and effects of the pachinko machine 100) And explanation of stage of production, etc., also referred to as tutorial display).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is constituted by. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 135 (10), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Ton-sama's conversation image is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In the Navi character notice, the balloon display changes from “No” to “Intense fever”, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of the balloon overlaps with a part of the habit conversation image CI2. It should be noted that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense heat”, or after the conversation image CI2 is displayed in the balloon. The display may be updated to “Intense fever”, or after the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense fever”, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not performed. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama does not have to be reduced (for example, the display of the same size as FIG. 135 (9) is displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is displayed. It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 135 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 135 (12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the operation valid period, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (13) A state in which the person presses the chance button 136 is shown. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (12), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon display has been deleted. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 135 (14), in the conversation image CI 2 of the cocoon, the characters “It is intense heat” are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. There is a case. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. It should be noted that the notice character display such as “It is intense heat” may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be displayed when it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (15), the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama and the conversation image CI2 of the bag are erased, the conversation notice is finished, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (16), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, and then “decoration” is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 135 (17). 7 "is stopped and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an effect that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 135 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be employed. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 135 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively. In the first UI unit 280, the variation is changed. The icon h0 is left and the frame is framed out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed on the second UI unit 281 (the hold icon h11 in the production example shown in FIG. 135 (20)) are also framed out. . Note that the start of moving display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative design and the start of frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or the first After the display of the left and right symbols of the decorative design starts, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may start, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (22), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd may not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Note that the light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both of the operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior. Only the operation of the accessory 224Gd may be performed, and the light guide plate IL may not emit light. Alternatively, only the light guide plate IL may emit light, and the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act. The operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 136 (25), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are initial. Return to position. Note that the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after each of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd returns to the initial position, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the first large board acting 224Gad. The start of the movement of the four large board acting items 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed simultaneously. Here, in FIGS. 135 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed. You may be comprised so that it may become a big hit rather than the case where an effect is not performed.

  In FIG. 136 (26), the state of development to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (27) shows a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman. The animation is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to show that the button effect has been started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (29), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 136 (30), the state in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (31), the player A state in which the chance button 136 is pressed is shown. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 136 (32), a Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . The cut-in image CI3 of Tono overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of Tono-sama may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is deleted, and a state in which the animation display of the duel scene continues is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the state where the second button effect is started after the development to super reach is shown. ing. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (35), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 136 (36), the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (37), the player A state in which the chance button 136 is pressed is shown. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 136 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and the first board The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. In addition, the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, an effect display that is lost may be performed without the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38), and further, an effect display that is lost is displayed. After being performed, a revival effect may be displayed to produce a jackpot effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 136 (38) is started, the displayed fluctuation icon h0 is hidden, but may be continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 136 (39), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavioral 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 136 (40) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  FIG. 136 (41) shows a state in which the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (42), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Thereafter, in FIG. 136 (43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (44), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd move toward the initial positions, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 136 (46). In FIG. 136 (46), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 136 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 137 (49), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure A at the timing shown in FIG. In the timing shown in FIG. 137 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol confirmation is stopped, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol continues, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, the special symbol display device 208 displays “special bonus” and the game It is notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation big hit. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (52), a mini right-handed display for instructing a right hand is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. Note that mini right-handed display may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-handed shot is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect display and displays “decoration 7” indicating a combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit is in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and “1R” that is the current round is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, you may make it display the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game, and the total number of prize balls acquired during the retreat.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 137 (55), the decorative design display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round “15R” is displayed.

  FIG. 137 (56) shows that the big hit game is over, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the big hit end effect display. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (a probability varying state with electric support). Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that effect is performed, and it is informed that the state will shift to a positive change state with electric support.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (57), a display (attention display) for calling attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 111) is performed. This warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game at the first big hit that was a big hit in a game state that is not in electric support, or it may be a big hit regardless of the situation where it was a big hit. It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 137 (58) shows a state before the big hit game is finished and the state is changed to the probability variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is a background image for the probable state with electric support, and the decorative pattern is also displayed differently from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). . In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of icons displayed. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square patternless and white display mode, and the display form (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1, and the player Can be distinguished at a glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same. In FIG. 137 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold is not actually displayed. The icon is shown with a broken line. Further, in FIG. 137 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is shown by a broken line for easy explanation, but this broken line is actually displayed. Not. Further, in the certain change state with electric support, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive homes are displayed below the display. ing. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (60) instructs the player to make a right stroke. A right-hand notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters “please right-handed” are displayed on the translucent band image. In the right-handed notification, the decorative symbol is overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state where the first big hit game is finished and shifted, but it may be displayed in the electric support state where the big hit game other than the first big hit game is finished and transferred. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game is finished and the electronic support state is entered. In addition, after shifting to the electric support state, a right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won. In such a case, it may be determined that left-handed has been made and a right-handed notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (60), the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (61) shows that the decorative symbol variation display has started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-hand notification is displayed, the right-hand notification is not displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues.

  FIG. 137 (63) shows a state where there are four suspensions of the symbol variation display of special figure 2. FIG. That is, in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special figure 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 in the special figure 2 are displayed. Are displayed. In the second hold number display, “4” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 2 is four is also displayed.

  FIG. 138 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 136 (48). In FIGS. 135 to 136, the case where “decoration 7” is reached and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol has been described. A case where “decoration 6” is displayed on the symbol will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (49a), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol is fluctuated by a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be symbol fixed stop. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 138 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that a big hit of either 5R probability big hit, 5R normal big hit, or 2R normal big hit has become.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the big hit start effect as shown in FIG. 138 (52a). Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “bonus” and the player It is reported that either the 5R probability big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit is one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 138 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 136 (37). FIG. 138 (38b) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the game is lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and then the duel scene animation display fades out, and as shown in FIG. 137 (40b), the change icon h0, the second reserved number display, and the second decorative symbol are displayed. It is left and hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 138 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from below the display area, and the holding icon And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, shaking fluctuation is started with a combination of decorative symbols in which the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the special figure I display mode. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (43b), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it is not determined to be the symbol fixed stop. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 138 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (45b), a variable icon deletion animation is displayed. In the fluctuation icon deletion animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 is gradually reduced, and finally, the animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed as shown in FIG. 138 (46b). Note that the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be started before the special drawing stops.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various customizations can be performed.

  FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is not started even after a lapse of a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) after the symbol variation display is stopped, the mode is changed to the demonstration mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is The demo screen is displayed. It should be noted that during the period from when the special symbol change display is stopped until the mode is changed to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is provided. In some cases, a special animation is displayed when you operate. In the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or a combination of a stop pattern of a decorative design (if the decorative design is composed of an image such as a character and a character image (including numbers), an image such as a character is displayed on the demo screen. Is displayed, the character image may be hidden, or both the character image and the character image may be displayed) or a movie including the model title (expectation level) May also include a presentation movie that introduces a high-priority notice or a highly anticipated reach, etc.), and there is also a period during which menu icons, volume adjustment icons, and brightness adjustment icons are displayed. . It should be noted that the demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop display of decorative symbols is displayed.

  When the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 is operated in a state where the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, an option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 108, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, such as a game board lamp 442 and / or a game platform frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. The light quantity of LED can be increased / decreased. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 133 and the like, but it may not be included. If the up / down key of the operation key unit 137 is operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed. Conversely, the operation key unit 137 is displayed while the brightness adjustment window is displayed. When the left and right keys are operated, the volume adjustment window is displayed.

  As will be described in detail later, an icon for “returning to the demo screen” is prepared in the option menu. When the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor positioned on this icon, the screen returns to the demo screen. be able to. When the special symbol variation display is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period (for example, 1 minute) with the option menu displayed, the display automatically returns to the demonstration screen.

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the display returns from the volume adjustment window to the demonstration screen, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the light amount is determined and the display returns to the demonstration screen from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the display automatically returns to the demonstration screen after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the left / right or up / down key operation. When the special symbol variation display is started, the volume adjustment window and the luminance adjustment window are automatically disappeared here, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 139 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the option menu.

  In the option menu, “production customization”, “character selection”, “hold frame selection”, “hold display selection”, and “background display selection” can be roughly divided.

  “Auto button mode” of “production customization” may be the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. Note that ON / OFF described in “Option” in FIG. 139 (b) means setting / non-setting or valid / invalid. “Long press automatic continuous hit” means that a long press is repeated for the operation means such as the chance button 136, and the press is repeated at a high speed during the long press. ) It is a function that performs the same response effect as the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The “group notice” is a kind of normal notice (notice of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expected degree) of jackpot of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation displayed in the group notice may be a big hit! ? If you want to increase the frequency at which the group notice appears as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%. Compared to when the frequency at which the group notice appears as the notice of the change is set to 50%. However, if you want to be displayed in the change as a big hit (big hit confirmed) notice, the reliability is 100%! ? Set to. “Winning sound notice” is a kind of pre-reading notice when the special figure starting point is won and the number of holds increases. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 has started and / or that the operation valid period of the operation means is not notified. When “Navigation” is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the operation valid period of the operation means, or a character display such as “It may be good to operate the operation means” is displayed. Will come to be. “No prefetching notice” is not performed for all prefetching notices other than the prefetching notice according to the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the prefetching notice other than the hold icon by the moving means (the movable movable body) or the display means). Equivalent to “ON”). “Premier up” is a setting for increasing the appearance frequency of the big hit rich or big hit finalizing effect (corresponding to “ON”). “No hold change” is a setting that does not make a pre-read notice according to the display mode of the hold icon (corresponding to “ON”). A “one-shot announcement” is a specific notice about the jackpot richness or jackpot confirmation (for example, the stage action by the stage moving body, the jackpot richness (bonus settlement confirmed) sound by the sound output means, the frame or the game board The notice by the light emission effect by some or all decoration LED is mentioned.)

  In this specification, “big hit confirmation” refers to the symbol fluctuation in which the big jackpot confirmation notice is displayed or the symbol fluctuation of the pre-read target suspension when the notice of big hit confirmation and / or the prefetch notice is displayed. If a pre-reading notice with a jackpot confirmation is displayed, it indicates that the change or the pre-reading target hold will always be a big jackpot (the same applies to the following description).

  In addition, the “big hit rich” in this specification means a state of high expectation for the big hit, and even if the notice of the big hit rich and / or the pre-reading notice is displayed, the big hit rich notice is displayed. This shows that even if a big hit rich pre-reading notice is displayed for the symbol fluctuation or the symbol fluctuation for the pre-reading target hold, it may be lost (the same applies to the following description). Further, the jackpot richness may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies to the following description).

  In addition, the description of “hot” in this specification is a state of high expectation for the jackpot, but even if the hot notice and / or the pre-read notice are displayed, the symbol change that the hot notice is displayed is displayed. Or it shows that even if a hot pre-reading notice is displayed for a change in the design of the pre-reading target hold, it may be lost (the same applies to the following description). “Hot” may indicate that the degree of expectation of jackpot is lower than the jackpot richness, and “hot” may indicate that the jackpot is rich or the jackpot is confirmed (the following explanation) The same applies to

  “Daitomo” described in FIG. 139 (b) is a member service for registering a member and accessing a Web server through an Internet line. Level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience values. The service is such that various benefits can be acquired according to the level. When this “Daitomo” member service is executed, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 do not support “Daitomo” membership service. In the model of the specification corresponding to the member service of “Daitomo”, if the user mode is set and the level of Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Further, in FIG. 139 (b), the item “Daitomo setting” is released simply by registering a member and setting the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 when joining Daitomo, it is possible to use the hold frame B only by setting the user mode, for example, if the hold frame is selected. Here, the reserved frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. 133 and the like. Note that “initial setting” means that it is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, “Daitomo” can experience the membership before the official member registration, and the member who has experienced the membership can use the samurai character in the character selection as a trial play.

  In addition, as one of the benefits of Daitomo, there is an item that cannot be selected unless the level of Daitomo is raised. That is, among “character selection”, “hold frame selection”, “hold display selection”, and “background display selection”, items whose Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in “open condition” are displayed levels. This is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

  FIG. 140 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

  By operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "Direction customization", "Character selection", "Hold frame selection", "Hold display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialization", "Return to demo screen" items connected by arrows Between each other, the cursor moves by operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “production customization” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. Also, when the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, each of the “production customization screen”, “character selection screen”, “hold frame selection screen”, “hold display selection screen”, “background display selection screen”, and “initialization confirmation screen” has a “return” icon. Is displayed, and the user can return to the option menu screen by moving the cursor to the “return” icon and pressing the chance button 136. Further, the user may be allowed to return to the option menu screen without placing the cursor on the “return” icon or by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the option menu screen, the “production customization screen” Even in the “character selection screen”, “hold frame selection screen”, “hold display selection screen”, “background display selection screen”, and “initialization confirmation screen”, the screen shifts to the decorative symbol variation display screen.

  Next, the items described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140 will be specifically described with reference to display examples on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an example of calling an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from the demonstration screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having a specification that does not support the “Daitomo” member service. The open condition in FIG. 139 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. Is possible. In the following embodiments, an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, a colorless and non-patterned icon indicates an operation unit that cannot be operated, and icons displayed in other modes (colored and / or patterned) indicate an operation unit that can be operated.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed. When a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in this state, display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 141 (1) is started. Even before a certain period of time has elapsed, the special symbol stop symbol display period has ended, and the next symbol variation display has not started (for example, the special symbol stop symbol determination in a state where there is no hold) If the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit) is operated, the icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed. These icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed on the condition that a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed symbol stop display period of the special figure has ended. Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen and volume adjustment can be performed even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds). The window and the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

  In addition, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (character display or image display) of the content being customized. For example, in the case of the menu icon MI, a character display or icon display for effect customization, in the case of the volume adjustment icon VI, a gauge display indicating the volume level, and in the case of the brightness adjustment icon BI, a gauge display indicating the light amount level is displayed. It may be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include a large item display (for example, “character selection”) shown in FIG. 139 (b), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 141 (1). Also good.

  In FIG. 141 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. It is the same even if the up key 137u is operated. The cross key is lit in white when there is no operation, but the pressed key changes to red, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

  By operating the down key 137d, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW is larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (3), the menu icon MI disappears, and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. A brightness adjustment window BW that is about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the light quantity of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 452 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest five levels.

  In FIG. 141 (4), the down key 137d is operated once again, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 141 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. Even if the up key 137u is operated in the state of 5 levels, the amount of light does not increase any more. Further, even if the lower key 137d is operated in the state of 1 level, the amount of light does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the display returns to the demonstration screen on which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. However, if the upper key 137d or the lower key 137u is operated, The count start can be updated. That is, it is possible to extend the period until returning to the demo screen. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the LED remains off.

  In FIG. 141 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same applies when the left key 137l is operated.

  When the right key is operated, the volume control window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (9). The volume adjustment window VW is larger than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI disappears and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is three levels of an intermediate volume.

  In FIG. 141 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated once more, and in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. In addition, even if the right key is operated in the state of the loudest five levels, the volume does not increase any more. Even if the left key is operated in the 1st level, the volume does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demonstration screen on which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. The period can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At the 0 level, the speaker 120 is kept muted (muted).

  When a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. I'm back.

  In FIG. 141 (14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that an option menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (15). The chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit red before being pressed. In this option menu screen, the background display, the hold frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear and appear under the “Menu” character display. Seven types of icons, such as a production customization icon, a character selection icon, a hold frame selection icon, a hold display selection icon, a background display selection icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen, are arranged in the vertical row from the top. It is displayed. A cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 141 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is lit red. In the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, a cross key pattern used for the selection operation and a chance button 136 pattern used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, the pattern of the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the chance button 136 and the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys is displayed in red. In the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  Here, even if the chance button 136 is operated during the brightness adjustment or the volume adjustment in FIGS. 141 (2) to (12), the option menu screen is not displayed but may be displayed. . The initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of the option menu screen display may be the top effect customization icon, the return icon, or other icons. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

  In FIG. 141 (16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the effect customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 141 (17), the decoration symbol display device 208 has an effect customization screen. Is displayed. On the effect customization screen, a list of five lines is displayed. In the list, five items from the display of the small items in the effect customization shown in FIG. 139 ("01 auto button mode" to "05 back Button navigation ") and respective options (for example," OFF ON ", etc.) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. Below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for returning the settings to the initial value all at once are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left. ing. In the effect customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the production customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The return icon on which the cursor display is displayed has a frame highlighted and further lit red. Of the displayed options, the currently set option is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Furthermore, the cross key image used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed in the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the effect customization screen, all of the keys 137u, d, l, and r of the cross key are displayed in red.

  In FIG. 141 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, and further, the balloon display is added, and the explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 141 (20), the right key 137r is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 141 (21), the currently set option of the auto button mode is changed to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. Note that when the currently set option is OFF and the left key 137l is operated, the key operation becomes invalid, but the same result as when the right key 137r is operated may be obtained.

  In FIG. 141 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item one lower in the auto button mode (long press auto-strike). That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (23), the frame of the item of long press auto-strike is highlighted, and further, a balloon display is added, and an explanation regarding this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmed icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the return icon when the setting is not changed. However, it may be moved to the confirmed icon with or without the setting change, or may be moved to the return icon.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the bottom button navigation item. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation about this item is displayed.

  In FIG. 141 (26), the down key 137d is operated once more, and the list of five lines is updated as shown in FIG. 141 (27). In FIG. The item of the button mode has disappeared, and the cursor display has been moved to the newly added item, which is 06 in FIG.

  In FIG. 141 (28), the lower key 137d continues to be operated.

  142 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 141.

  The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d. On the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 142 (29) following FIG. 141 (28), 09 is the last small item of effect customization in FIG. 139 (b). The cursor is moved to the item of one notification.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (30), when the down key 137d is operated once again, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon as shown in FIG. 142 (31), and the frame is highlighted in the confirmation icon. In addition, it is displayed in red.

  In FIG. 142 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as the determination operation, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (33a), a notification screen for notifying the completion of the setting of the effect customization is superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side. Displayed. In addition, a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting for rendering customization is updated may be displayed. In the notification screen shown in FIG. 142 (33a), a return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed, and a cursor display is displayed on the icon.

  In FIG. 142 (34), the chance button 136 is operated to return to the option menu screen as shown in FIG.

  Note that the return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 142 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen. By operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen is displayed. It may be possible to return.

  After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again with the option menu screen being displayed as shown in FIG. 142 (36) (see FIG. 37 (37)), FIG. ), The cursor icon cs previously displayed in the effect customization icon is moved down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

  In FIG. 142 (39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 142 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A list of five lines is also displayed on the character selection screen, and five lists ("01 Yoshimune" to "05 Hani") are displayed in the list from the display of the choices in the character selection shown in FIG. 139 (b). It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 142 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and on the left side of the character selection screen, the character design of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the symbol of Yoshimune) is previewed. Has been. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated. In the lower right of the character selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red chance used for the determination operation A picture of the button 136 is also displayed.

  The character set in the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, or appears more frequently than other characters.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (41), when the down key 137d is operated once, as shown in FIG. 142 (42), the cursor display moves to the heel of the item that is one item below Yoshimune. The picture is previewed.

  In FIG. 142 (43), the lower key 137d is further operated five times, and the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the lower key 137d. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (44), the list shown in FIG. The cursor display has moved to the item of 07 copanda which is the last choice of character selection.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (45), when the down key 137d is operated once again, as shown in FIG. 142 (46), the cursor display moves to the return icon, and the frame of the return icon is highlighted. In addition, it is displayed in red.

  Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 142 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display has moved to that Yoshimune item. In FIG. 142 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (50), an animation display indicating that the character is determined is performed in the area where the preview display has been performed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the character settings are to be updated may be displayed. In this example, however, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. Upon completion, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 142 (51).

  It should be noted that even if the animation display indicating the determination of the character is finished, the character selection screen remains, and the return to the option menu screen can be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 142 (52)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the reservation frame selection icon, and the reservation frame selection icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 142 (54), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the hold frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 142 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hold frame. A selection screen appears. A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold frame selection screen, and the list includes five options ("01 hold frame A" to "05" from the top of the display of options in the hold frame selection shown in FIG. 139 (b). Hold frame E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 142 (55), the cursor display is displayed on the item of the holding frame A, and the holding frame of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is displayed on the left window of the holding frame selection screen. With a preview. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for selecting the reserved frame is the reserved frame A. However, the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated reserved item that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. Further, in the lower right of the hold frame selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for the determination operation are displayed. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The hold frame set by the selection of the hold frame here is displayed as a first UI unit 280 and a second UI unit 281 at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 142 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 142.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (57) in response to a single operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 142 (56) continuing from FIG. 142 (55), the cursor display is 1 of the holding frame A. The screen moves to the hold frame B of the next item, and the hold frame B is previewed in the left window.

  In FIG. 143 (58), the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed. In the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (59), when the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed is generated and the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the hold frame is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains unchanged, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 143 (61)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon is lit red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and a hold display selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 143 (63). A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and the list includes five choices (“01 icon A” to “05 icon” on the display of options in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 139 (b). E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 143 (63), the cursor display is displayed on the item of the icon A, and the icon of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is previewed together with the hold frame in the left window of the hold display selection screen. Yes. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for selection of the hold display is the icon A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here. You may prepare. Also, in the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red icon used for the determination operation. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The icons set by the hold display selection here are displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the change icon h0 on the hold frame UI.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, a determination operation using the chance button 136 is performed. On the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 143 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that icon settings are to be updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen remains unchanged, and the return to the option menu screen may be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is being displayed (see FIG. 143 (67)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon is lit in red.

  In FIG. 143 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 143 (70), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background display. A selection screen appears. A list of five lines is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 139 (b) are displayed in the list. Has been. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 143 (70), the cursor display is displayed on the item of background A, and the background of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is previewed on the left window of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for background display selection is background A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here is used. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the background display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for determination operation are displayed. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as a normal background display in the decorative symbol display device 208. The background display in the normal state here does not include the background display in the look-ahead mode, the background display as a big hit notice of the change, or the background display in the electric support state. However, only the background display in the electric support state may be included.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, a determination operation using the chance button 136 is performed. On the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (72), an effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 143 (73). In addition, a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the background setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen may remain, and the return to the option menu screen may be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 143 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 143 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the return icon for returning to the demonstration screen, and the return icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 143 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the return icon, and as shown in FIG. 143 (77), a demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background has been changed to an empty background, and the holding frame UI is different from the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 141 (1), and in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen, it is set to ON by effect customization. The mode name (in this case, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, they are displayed alternately in ascending order of customization numbers. For example, if the auto button mode 01 and the back button navigation 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are alternately displayed in the upper right frame RW. In addition, when it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be displayed even if it is the same. Further, when no setting is performed, “OFF” may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, the group advance notice for setting the reliability and the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting for setting the speed of repeated hitting may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Furthermore, the set mode may not be displayed finely, but may be displayed, for example, “during production customization”.

  143 (79) includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp. 220 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are stopped. In addition, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are stopped and displayed, and the fourth decorative symbol shown in FIG. 143 (79) is displayed. The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Further, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 143 (79) are all turned off, and are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the displayed second hold number display, the hold number in FIG. 1 and the hold number in FIG. 2 are both zero. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the fixed symbol is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 143 (80), there is one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 143 (80) starts the symbol variation display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500 shown in FIG. The fourth symbol display device 284, which has not started the variable display and is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, also shows the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 143 (80), the black square indicates that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is being stopped and the gray circle indicates the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The white square represents that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, and the white circle represents that the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts to be changed and the second reserved number displayed in the upper right corner. In the display, “1” is displayed for a moment as the number of holds in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (82), the number of holds in the special figure 1, which is displayed as “1” for a moment in the second hold number display, is “0”. In addition, since the first special figure starting port 230 is won and it is digested immediately, the second hold number display may not be displayed as “1” even for a moment and may remain “0”.

  In FIG. 143 (83), an increase animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

  FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 143.

  In FIG. 144 (84) following FIG. 143 (83), the increase animation is finished and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 144 (84) is an icon newly set by the hold display selection of effect customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (rhombus pattern and white display mode). Yes.

  In FIG. 144 (85), the first decorative symbol variation display has not started yet, but after the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and Erasure of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and the display is transparent. The erasing here may be an animation tailoring, but is not necessarily an erasing animation. In FIG. 144 (86), the erasing of these three icons MI, VI, and BI is completed.

  In FIG. 144 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started to move toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area. In FIG. 144 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 has been completed. On the base hs0 in the variation icon display area, the variation icon h0 in the default display mode (diamond-shaped non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 144 (89), the display of the variation of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is changing slowly. In detail, the left symbol starts the variable display first, the middle symbol starts the variable display, and then the right symbol starts the variable display finally. However, the order of starting the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and the three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may start the variable display simultaneously. In addition, before the display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by a decorative symbol (for example, an animation that returns to the original size after the decorative symbol is displayed once large, or an image and a character such as a character that is a decorative symbol) If the image is composed of images (including numbers), an image of a character or the like may be animated before the first decorative pattern starts to change).

  In FIG. 144 (91), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, if the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 144 (92)), FIG. 144 (93) As shown in FIG. 5, a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the holding frame UI. The volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decoration symbol (the third symbol), at least a part of the variation icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. . When the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, if the left key 137l is operated, the bar display is decreased by one level and the sound is reduced, and if the right key 137r is operated, the bar display is increased by one level and the sound is increased. The volume can be adjusted.

  In the present embodiment, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, only the volume adjustment is always possible. Even if the volume adjustment is always possible, the volume adjustment bar display VB may not be displayed. Also, even during a big hit game, only volume adjustment is possible at all times. However, it may be restricted only for a certain period. For example, during the start effect of a big hit game, during an interval between rounds, during the end effect of a big hit game, during the execution of a super reach effect, during the fixed display of symbols on the special figure display devices 212 and 214, A result screen (for example, the number of balls to be played or / and / or at the end of the electric support (short time) state (for example, at the end of ST) The period during which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for production may be regulated during the display of the screen displaying the number of consecutive resorts. If the super reach production is a game production, it will be restricted until the result of the win / loss is notified, and after that, it may be adjustable, and after the three decorative symbols are aligned and start to shake, the adjustment is made. It may be possible, or all the period from the super reach production until the stop display is performed may be regulated.

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low-probability general low-accuracy state. Even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the light amount adjustment is impossible, but the light amount adjustment bar The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the light amount may be adjustable, or the light amount may be adjusted without performing the bar display. Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, it may be possible to set production customization, character selection, and the like.

  Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated in a state where the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is turned off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the volume adjustment bar display VB is not displayed as in the present embodiment. Volume adjustment may be possible. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if it is not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured to update the count start for the certain period (that is, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If an operation of the left key 137l or the right key 137r is performed during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by starting the change of the symbol, the erase animation is canceled halfway and immediately Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be displayed again without canceling the erasure animation, or the volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed after the erasure animation is performed to the end.

  Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is started, until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, whether or not the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed is determined. Regardless, the amount of light can be adjusted, or production customization, character selection, and the like can be set.

  Further, even when the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the symbol variation, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 142.

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 142 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 145 (33b1). The return icon is highlighted in red and lit red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 145 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 145 (33b3)). ). In this confirmation screen, a return icon for accepting the return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for stopping the return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 145 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the return icon (FIG. 145 (33b5-1), or the cursor display is displayed in the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 145 (33b5-2)).

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 142 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 145 (33c1). When the right key 137r is operated once more (FIG. 145 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 145 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 145 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to customize the production customization is displayed on the production customization screen from the front side (FIG. 145 (33c5)). )). In this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” for accepting initialization and a “No icon” for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 145 (33c5), the cursor display is “No icon”. ”Is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 145 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to “Yes icon” (FIG. 145 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 145 (33c8-1) When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in Fig. 2, the effect customization is initialized, and the initialization is returned to the initial values for all the settings set by the player in the effect customization. Even if it is not set, it is possible to perform initialization, but it may not be possible.When initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 145 (33c9-1)) Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 145 (33c6-2)), the effect customization screen reflecting the initialization is performed. There appears. In this example, did not specifically set anything, all the items are turned OFF of the initial value.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating another modification.

  When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 146 (74b1) instead of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 143 (74a), as shown in FIG. 146 (74b2), The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 146 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 146 (74b4), all the settings are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is overlaid on the option menu screen from the front side. In this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” for accepting initialization and a “No icon” for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 146 (74 b 4), the cursor display is “No icon”. ”Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 146 (74b5-1), the cursor display is moved to “Yes icon” by operating the right key 137r (FIG. 146 (74b6-1)) or the cursor display is displayed as “No icon”. In this state, the chance button 136 can be operated as shown in FIG. 146 (74b5-2) to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 146 (74b6-2)).

  As shown in FIG. 146 (74b6-1), when the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor displayed on the “Yes icon” (FIG. 146 (74b7-1)), all settings are initialized. The In this initialization, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. Although initialization can be performed even when nothing is set, it may be disabled. When the initialization is completed, an initialization completion screen is displayed in an overlapping manner on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 146 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 146 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 146 (74b10-1).

  If the player does not return to the option menu screen after performing various customizations, there is no operation of the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the operation of the ball launching handle 134 for a certain period (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Further, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 146 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 145 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the “Yes icon” may be removed from the confirmation screen, and the initialization may be performed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a “Yes icon”, if no operation is performed, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when “initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed as “Yes icon”). .

  In addition, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same with respect to the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and / or luminance may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized before the other. Also, if you want to initialize the volume and the brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of the various settings, do not display the confirmation screen for the initialization of the volume or the brightness. Alternatively, a confirmation screen for initializing settings of various settings, volume, and brightness may be displayed.

  Furthermore, a display for confirming whether or not to customize the effect customization setting may be automatically displayed during symbol variation. For example, it is always displayed when it is displayed once every 100 changes, after a fixed number of changes since the last display, or when a fixed number of changes have been made since the first start of change. Or may be displayed randomly (for example, when winning in the display lottery).

  FIG. 146 (I) to FIG. 146 (V ') are diagrams showing examples in which customization can be performed during the big hit round.

  In this example, for example, the player can select a music piece in the first round or the second round, and can reach a certain round after the second round and customize from the next round. Here, a certain round is a round that allows a V attacker to win a prize, and specifically, is 5 rounds. In FIG. 146 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 for the fifth round is shown, and a letter V is displayed to win the V attacker. Also, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

  FIG. 146 (II) is a period corresponding to the interval between rounds when the V attacker is closed. Even in the interval between rounds 5 and 6, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Moreover, although the attacker is closed, the right-hand notification is continued.

In FIG. 146 (III), the attacker starts opening and the sixth round is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (III), a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a picture of the chance button 136 are displayed. In other words, in this example, the effect customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the five rounds that can be awarded to the V attacker. It may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable over a plurality of rounds after the sixth round.

  In FIG. 146 (IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (V), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 and the like is reduced and a list of five lines is displayed. Yes.

  In FIG. 146 (V) as a modified example of FIG. 146 (V), a display relating to only one line (only one item) in the list of five lines (here, a display relating to the auto button mode) is displayed. Yes. In this modification, all the customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r. .

  It should be noted that, even in the example of FIG. 146 (V) or the example of FIG.

  In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V prize is won with a so-called V chance machine). Note that the customization may be performed from a certain round without being limited to the V accuracy machine.

  In addition, during the period when the music selection can be performed during the big hit game, the customization may not be performed, and the configuration in which the customization can be performed from the round in which the selected music is output may be employed. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the selected music may be output in the middle of the round. In this case, if the selected music is output even in the round in which the music is selected Customization can be performed within the round.

  In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the specific round ends. Specifically, customization may be possible at the same time as the end of a specific round, or customization may be performed from the start of the next round of a specific round, between a specific round and the next round. It may be possible to customize from the interval between rounds.

  Further, customization may be performed at any time during the jackpot round. Also, customization may be possible at any time during the jackpot game. The term “big hit game” as used herein refers to a period between the eaves from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot and including the round.

  Note that the period from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started is that, from the main control unit 300, the special electric accessory ( This is a period from when the attacker is turned on to when it is on, but includes a period in which the big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, although the display (for example, the display of the special bonus) displayed in the big hit game start effect may continue to be displayed even if one round is started, it is one round until the attacker starts the first release. This is the period until the eye starts. Further, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol is based on the confirmation display of the symbols in the special figure display devices 212 and 214, not the confirmation display of the decoration symbols. Also, if the game table is a right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit in FIG. 1 or every time a big hit is made), the timing at which this right-handed notification is started is also a big hit symbol. Is included in the period from when the message is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started.

  During the period from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started, the customization may not be performed, or the opposite may be performed.

  Further, customization may not be performed during the period from the end of the last round to the start of symbol variation in the shortest time. For example, customization may not be performed during the big hit end effect.

  Further, during the prepaid card removal forgotten warning display, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a specific production (for example, a V prize production, music selection, probability change suggestion, etc.). Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a period in which the effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Furthermore, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operating means used for customization, or customization may be restricted before the effect is started. In this way, the customization restriction functions as a notice of the effect.

  Furthermore, contrary to the example shown in FIGS. 146 (I) to (V ′), it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, 1R to 14R can be customized, but it may not be possible when 15R is reached. Alternatively, customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, but it may not be possible after 13R.

  Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is being displayed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period during a big hit game, or when a two-dimensional code is displayed by a player's operation (for example, “Press button to display two-dimensional code”) (When a two-dimensional code is output by a button operation), customization may not be performed. Or, conversely, it may be configured to allow customization even during the display of the two-dimensional code. All or part of the display related to the two-dimensional code and customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, a part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the display related to customization from the front side, and vice versa. A part or all of the code may be displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  In FIG. 146 (I) to FIG. 146 (V ′), the jackpot effect of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having the probability variation area has been described, but the big hit of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having no probability variation area has been described. It can also be applied to the so-called 1 type and 2 types of jackpots where the jackpot starts by winning the V prize.

  FIG. 146 (VI) to FIG. VIII (VIII) are diagrams showing examples in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (VI), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. In addition, in the upper right frame RW of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (VI), it is displayed that the auto button mode is currently customized, and below that, the effect customization is executed. A character display notifying that it is possible and a picture of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 146 (VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. VII, the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. 146 (V ′). Only (only one item) is displayed (here, the display regarding the auto button mode). Also in this example, all effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

  FIGS. 146 (IX) to (XI) are diagrams showing other examples that can be customized during the symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 (IX), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. Further, in FIG. 146 (IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the second display device 208P is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 146 (IX) is in an initial position and can be moved up and down. The second display device 208P partially overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position. When the second display device 208P is lowered from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 increases.

  The second display device 208P displays a model title, and a display RW ′ indicating that the auto button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. . Further, below the display RW ', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a picture of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 146 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the second display device 208P shown in FIG. XI, the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 may be displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 or the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Furthermore, the display using the second display device 208P can also be applied to a display related to customization during the big hit game.

  The customization may be executed at any time as long as the symbol variation display is in progress. For example, it may be configured so that customization can be performed even when a super reach effect is being displayed. Or, conversely, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during display of the super reach effect. The super-reach production here includes the production of the snarl and the harbinger production until the judgment production such as duel production starts after reaching the reach state. For example, an effect of changing the display position of the left design and the right design of the decorative design assumed after entering the reach state, and an effect before the character display suggesting the development to super reach are included. In addition, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a decorative symbol display screen, it is included in the super reach effect until the decorative symbol display screen is switched.

  It should be noted that customization may be performed even in the production of the roaring part or the sign production, or the opposite may not be performed. Further, after switching to the result display screen of the judge effect or from the display of the judge effect to the display screen of the decorative design, the customization may be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, customization may be performed even during simultaneous production performed on a plurality of game machines, and conversely, it may not be possible during simultaneous production. Further, customization may be performed during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or vice versa. Furthermore, during the temporary stoppage of the decorative design, customization may be performed only when it is finally a big hit, or it may not be performed in the opposite direction, and eventually it will be lost. Only in some cases, customization may be performed, or vice versa. Further, in a state where there is a hold, the customization may be performed until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts, or vice versa. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during the symbol variation display (for example, in the pre-reading mode), customization may be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, when customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. Good.

  Also, during the user mode (Daitomo) setting, player operations (for example, display with chance button, switch with arrow key, etc.), list of missions achieved and game history (number of revolutions, number of balls played, number of missions cleared) , The jackpot number of the current play, the maximum number of consecutive play times of the current play, etc.) can be displayed, or the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. set by the user can be changed May be. In addition, while setting the user mode (Daitomo), a list of missions and game history achieved by player operations (for example, display with a chance button, switch with an arrow key, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) (Number of rotations, number of balls to be played, number of missions cleared, number of big hits of current play, maximum number of consecutive games of current play, etc.) Further, it may be configured to change the hold display or the like.

  In addition, when the mission is achieved while setting the user mode, an icon for notifying that the mission has been achieved may be displayed.

  Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having specifications corresponding to “Daitomo” member service will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition of FIG. 139 (b) is adopted. The pachinko machine 100 having this specification has a top menu. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be called by simply operating the chance button 136 without going through the demonstration screen. Or, without operating the chance button 136, the display may be automatically switched from the demonstration screen. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

  The top menu includes a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon.

  FIG. 147 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

  Even on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Model customization", "Initialization", and "Return to demo screen", the upper and lower keys of the operation key unit 137 can be operated by operating the operation key unit 137. When the cursor moves and the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “Daitomo” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, a “Return” icon is displayed on each of the “Daitomo screen”, “Model customization screen”, and “Initialization confirmation screen”. Then, you can return to the top menu screen. Further, it is also possible to return to the top menu screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed without placing the cursor on the “return” icon.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the “Daitomo screen”, “ Even on the “model customization screen” and “initialization confirmation screen”, the screen shifts to a screen for displaying decorative symbols.

  FIG. 147 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

  The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 147 (2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 140 except for “return to top menu” at the bottom and “top menu screen” on the right side thereof. Therefore, a duplicate description is omitted. When the cursor is placed on the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative design display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 148 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

  Even on the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of "trial play", "password entry", "data save", "data clear", "quick start", and "return to top menu screen", the operation key units are connected between the arrows. The cursor moves by operating the upper key or the lower key of 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “trial play” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, the top menu screen is displayed to move to a new registration screen or start trial play by moving the cursor by selecting the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136. You can return to Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to move to the password input screen or to return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by selecting the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136. .

  When the cursor is placed on the “password input” item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password input screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is input. If the input password is correct, the screen is switched to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode after a certain period.

  When the cursor is placed on the “data storage” item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data storage confirmation screen. In the data saving confirmation screen, when “Yes” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136, the screen moves to the two-dimensional code issue screen, where However, if “Yes” is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to a demonstration screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, whether it is a data storage confirmation screen or a two-dimensional code issuance screen, “No” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136. In the case, each display is repeated.

  When the cursor is placed on the item “DATA CLEAR” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

  When the cursor is placed on the item “quick start” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. On the quick start start screen, the screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

  On the other hand, a “Return” icon is displayed on each of the “trial play screen”, “password entry screen”, “data save confirmation screen”, “data clear confirmation screen”, and “quick start start screen”. By moving the cursor to the “return” icon and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen. Further, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed without placing the cursor on the “return” icon.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is a Daitomo screen, the “trial pre-screen” Even if it is etc., it will transfer to the screen of the change display of a decoration symbol.

  Further, the reference numerals in parentheses shown in FIG. 148 are associated with the parenthesis drawing numbers in FIG.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

  A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. On this top menu screen, the background display, the hold frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the “Menu” character display, In the vertical row, four types of icons are displayed in order from the top, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen. In FIG. 148 (a), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the bottom return icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, while the return icon is lit red. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is a return icon. Also, on the top menu screen, a cross key (up / down keys 137u, d only red) used for the selection operation and a red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right.

  The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 (b1) is a state where the cursor button cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon on the top menu screen shown in FIG. It is a Daitomo screen displayed when pressed. This Daitomo screen returns to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in the vertical row from the top under the character display of “Daitomo”. Six types of icons, such as the back icon, are displayed. In FIG. 148 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the top trial play icon, and the trial play icon is highlighted in red and further lit in red. Further, Yoshimune's character appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation of the trial play is displayed. Also, below the display of the explanation, a cross key (up / down keys 137u, d only red) used for the selection operation and a red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, a trial play screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the trial play screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as benefits of Daitomo's membership experience. Below that display, there is a confirmation icon to save the setting change, a back icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a “start icon” to start a trial play, and a new registration to newly register as a member Icons are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left. The cursor is displayed on the “start icon”, and this position is the initial position. In this state, when the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the “new registration icon”. When the chance button 136 is pressed and a determination operation is performed there, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays FIG. A new registration screen shown in (b1-2) is displayed.

  In the new registration screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code QR1 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function. A text recommending that the user access a website (Daitomo site) with an embedded URL and obtain a password therefrom is displayed. Under the text display, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without going through the trial play screen. For example, when a new registration icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b1) in addition to the trial play icon and the chance button 136 is operated after the new registration icon is selected, FIG. 149 (b1- The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

  On the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b2), a cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and an explanation about password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1).

  On the password input screen shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and an alphabet, a symbol, and a numeric dial kw are displayed below the password input area pw. The person who enters the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 149 (b2-1-1)) using the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r, and the character specified by the cursor. Is input to the password input area pw by the determination operation by the chance button 136, one character at a time according to the password acquired from the Daitomosite (see FIG. 149 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password entry are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left side. Has been.

  When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor displayed on the completion icon. If the password input is incorrect, an input error window shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1-2) is displayed. When this window disappears, the password input operation becomes possible again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. If the input of the password is correct, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the input completion window shown in FIG. 149 (b2-1-3) for a certain period of time, and then switches to the demo screen set in the Ditomo mode. .

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3), a cursor display is displayed on the data storage icon, and an explanation about data storage is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a data saving confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If trial play or quick start is being performed, or if no password has been entered, the data save icon cannot be selected and this data save confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

  On the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b3-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting data storage and a “No” icon for not storing data are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 149 (b3-2)). The two-dimensional code QR2 includes the URL of the Daitomo site, the player ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, number of balls played, number of jackpots, number of consecutive games, level of Daitomo mode, experience Value, mission achievement information, etc.) are embedded, and this two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the URL website embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 (Ditomosite) ), The data is stored on the server at Daitomosite. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen. When reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, when the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the end confirmation screen is displayed. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 149 (b 3-2-1), an end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “Yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “No” icon that does not end are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demonstration screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

  The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be deleted from the pachinko machine after the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, such as the game history information of this time, or FIG. 149 (b3-2-1) When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, it may be erased from the pachinko machine 100, or may not be erased until data clear described later is performed.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and the explanation on the data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If trial play or quick start is being performed or if a password has not been entered, the data clear icon cannot be selected or this data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

  On the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 149 (b4-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting the deletion of data such as the current game history information and a “No” icon for not deleting the data are displayed. Yes. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine, and an erase completion screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 149 (b 4-1-1), the erasure completion screen is displayed. This erasure completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and returns to the Daitomo screen.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b5), a cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and an explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a quick start start screen shown in FIG. 149 (b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demo screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 149 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, the return to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

  When the second model customization icon is selected from the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) and the chance button 136 is operated, the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In this model customization screen, under the "model customization" character display, in order from the top in a vertical row, the production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization Seven types of icons such as an icon and a return icon for returning to the top menu screen are displayed. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 150 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, while the effect customization icon is lit red. In the model customization screen, a cross key pattern used for the selection operation and a chance button 136 pattern used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right. Furthermore, the pattern of the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the chance button 136 and the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys is displayed in red. In the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 150 (c1), an effect customization screen is displayed, but the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 141 (17) is that the choice of the input sound notice and the option of the back button navigation are unreleased. Is different. If Daitomo's password has not been entered or the level satisfying the release condition has not been reached, the screen shown in FIG. 150 (c1) is displayed.

  150 (c2) shows a character selection screen, but the character selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (40) is that all other options are unreleased except for Yoshimune's options. The difference is that even the character is not displayed as an option. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of the character image may be displayed, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which selectable characters can be recognized ( For example, a display including “Daitomo Lv.20 Princess is open” or the like may be displayed. Here, the display regarding the unreleased options can also be applied to other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display). If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 150 (c2) is displayed. On this screen, only Yoshimune can be selected.

  On the other hand, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c2 '), a password is input or trial play is selected, so that a habit character can also be selected. However, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 150 (c3), the hold frame selection screen is displayed, but the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 142 (55) is that all other options are unreleased except for the hold frame A option. There is a difference that the other options are not even displayed as the names of the reserved slots. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 150 (c3) is displayed. On this screen, only the holding frame A can be selected.

  On the other hand, on the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c3 '), the password is entered, so the hold frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 150 (c4), the hold display selection screen is displayed, but the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 143 (63) is that all other options are unreleased except for the option of icon A. The other option is different in that it does not even display the name of any pending display. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 150 (c4) is displayed. On this screen, only icon A can be selected.

  On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c4 '), since the password is entered, the icon B can also be selected. Here, however, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 150 (c5), the background display selection screen is displayed. However, the background display selection screen shown in FIG. The difference is that other options are not even displayed as background names. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 150 (c5) is displayed. On this screen, only background A can be selected.

  On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 150 (c5 '), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. Here, however, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  FIG. 150 (d1) displays a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all settings, but the description is omitted because it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 146 (74b6-1). In addition, although an initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 150 (d2), the description is omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 146 (74b8-1).

  FIG. 150 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (e1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed. Furthermore, below the second number-of-holds display, the current Daitomo mode level (here, level 1) and experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 150 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registering and shifting to the demo screen.

  Further, a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 150 (e1). For example, if Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice “Start Daitomo” is output, and if the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, When the voice “play is started” is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice “start Daitomo. Let's do our best today” is output. Note that different sound effects are output when the corresponding sound effect is started by trial play, when it is started by quick start, and when it is started by entering a password. The same sound effect may be output, or the same sound effect may be output in two cases. Also, the sound effect may vary depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Further, when returning to the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 150 (e1) through model customization, no sound effect may be output, and a dedicated sound effect may be output. An animation may be displayed together with the corresponding sound effect or instead of the corresponding sound effect. If the start of symbol variation is started while a sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) halfway, but may be output as it is.

  Also, when this demo screen is displayed with quick start set, when trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed In at least one of these cases, the fixed period may not be able to call the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c). The top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) may be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) may not be called for a certain period.

  FIG. 150 (e1-1) shows a state where a menu icon MI, a volume adjustment icon VI, and a brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 150 (e1) is displayed. FIG.

  In addition, after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) is displayed, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, one minute). Also good. In addition, if the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r are operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be valid.

  Further, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not being displayed (for example, immediately after the symbol variation display is stopped in a state where there is no hold, or immediately after it is stopped), The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in 141 can be called. In addition, when the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the screen may return to the screen shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1).

  Further, when the stop symbol is displayed in a state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period of time. The model customization screen shown in FIG.

  Further, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 are called even during a period when the top menu screen shown in FIG. 149 (a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 150 (c) cannot be called. May be possible.

  Further, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 and the screen shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also shown in FIG. 150 (e1-1). Both of them may not be displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may be executable or may be restricted so that they cannot be executed.

  FIG. 150 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen displayed via FIG. 149 (b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 149 (b3-2). The output sound from the speaker 120 here is a voice saying “Thank you for your work”. Further, the output sound effect may change depending on the state before the demonstration screen is displayed.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using a variation icon.

  Here, the fluctuation icon h0 is summarized again. The fluctuation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon h11 having the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the change icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or it is expressed that the change icon moves. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed with a display size (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon h11. Thereby, although the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be easily identified, they may be the same size. Further, the variation icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon h0 can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing. In addition to the default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), multiple types of display modes for the normal notice are prepared for the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. The jackpot reliability (expectation) is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol. In the following description, the expectation level of jackpot is expressed by the color. The default white is when “no change” is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variation icon h0. The default white variation icon does not predict the expectation level of the jackpot, but the expectation level of the jackpot may be predicted (in this case, the icon color with the lowest expectation level of the jackpot is used). White blinking has the lowest expectation level for jackpots (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the normal notice display mode is a so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in descending order of expectation of jackpot. The gold color is rich in jackpots, and the rainbow color has a higher expectation level for jackpots than that, for example, it may be said that the jackpot is confirmed. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the display mode of the pre-read notice by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when it is more than red, it means red, gold, and iridescent.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1). The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and in FIG. 151 (A1), the navigation character YM of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started simultaneously with the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may disappear temporarily or disappear. Further, the symbol variation display may be terminated, and the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed during the stop display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. And during the display of the next symbol variation display started continuously, it may be displayed continuously, or it may disappear temporarily or disappear. Alternatively, the display may end during the display of the next symbol variation display. Further, it may be displayed only during a part or all of the entire period during the display of one symbol variation display, and may not be displayed during the display of the next symbol variation display. The navigation character YM may be a so-called always-displayed character, but may not be displayed in any case. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

  In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  In FIG. 151 (a 2-1), a treasure box icon I 1 of change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that other icons may change when the display is made. Other icons include the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and a decorative symbol. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the display of the change notice display is started is an object to be changed. However, even if the display is started simultaneously with the start of the display of the change notice display or the display is started later, it may be changed. When the display of the change notice display is started, the player may or may not know what is changed. There may also be suggestions of what to change. Furthermore, even if a change notice display is displayed, there may be a fake notice that changes nothing depending on the change notice display. In addition, the change notice display may be determined as one object to be changed, or may be determined to be changed without fail.

  The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 151 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only when it appears, and when the treasure box icon I1 reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. As for the appearance timing of the icon of the change notice display, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol variation starts, when the variation icon h0 has been moved, when winning the special symbol starting point (when holding increases) , At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning a prize, at the time of success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative design, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, super reach At the start, you can list super-reaching, etc. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the change notice display icon. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Also, there may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure chest icon I1, for example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode (size, color, animation) of the treasure chest or carpet. Also good. In addition, when the display mode is different from the normal display mode, such as the carpet icon I2, when the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or the player is in an advantageous state. The probability of changing to a display mode may be high. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode with a high degree of expectation of jackpot may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but there may be a case where an effect display other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice notice of change, pre-read notice display, etc.) is changed. There may be. In addition, there are effects display other than navigation characters (holding icon, change icon, notice notice of change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), prefetch notice display (timer notice, background display for prefetch mode, etc.), etc. (1 presentation display, multiple presentation displays, or all presentation displays) may be configured so that the navigation character is not changed by the advance notice display, but the navigation character may be changed. Good. In addition, the change notice display may be configured to change the navigation character more frequently than changing the effect display other than the navigation character, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (the effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is performed by “the advance notice for changing the effect display (the change notice display, the advance notice display for changing the effect display other than the navigation character. When the change is changed, the effect display that is changed infrequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A, compared to the case where the effect display that is changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A. May be configured to be easy to hit or not.

  In FIG. 151 (A 3-1), the carpet icon I 2 disappears and the treasure box icon I 1 remains. The treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 151 (a 4-1), the display mode of the treasure chest icon I 1 changes. That is, a change animation is displayed, a treasure box is opened, and an effect smoke image appears from inside. The smoke image hides a part or all of the navigation character YM, and is clearer than before the smoke image appears. It becomes difficult to see. Note that when an icon other than the navigation character YM is displayed, the smoke image may cover a part or all of the display of the icon other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure chest may not be opened. Furthermore, even if the treasure box is opened, another notice may be given. In FIG. 151 (a-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the display mode of the navigation character YM has changed. In other words, the scarlet (default color) kimono that the navigation character YM has been wearing has changed to a red kimono. It may be in a state where it is suggested that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change due to the change of the kimono of the navigation character YM to the red kimono. It may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes when the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow kimono. Further, it may change to blinking white, blue, or green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change corresponding to the color of the hold icon and / or the variation icon (for example, when the green hold is displayed in the hold 2, the navigation character YM is green. Change into kimono). Here, in the case where the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variation icon and / or the hold icon, and when the display mode of the hold icon and / or the change icon has changed a plurality of times, the navigation character is digested first. The color of the hold icon or the variable icon to be displayed may correspond to the color of the navigation character, or the color of the hold icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character. A color with a high expectation level for jackpots may be displayed with priority, or a color with a low level of expectation for jackpots may be displayed with priority. The color of the hold icon or variable icon with a high value may be displayed, and the hold icon or The color of the moving icon may be displayed, the color of the holding icon and / or the changing icon that is changing may be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is changing It may also be displayed at random from among the colors of the variation icons. In addition, the treasure chest icon I1 with the lid still open is still displayed beside the navigation character YM whose display mode has changed. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear simultaneously with the appearance of the smoke image, or may disappear together with the smoke image. The treasure chest icon I1 disappears at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A 6-1), and only the Tono-like navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol has been displayed with high-speed fluctuation.

  In FIG. 151 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state, and “decorative 7” is displayed in a shaking manner (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the second decorative symbol, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative symbols continue to display the variation. In FIG. 151 (A 8), a super reach production (swordsman reach production) is developed, the background screen of the decorative design display device 208 is changed to a wilderness background screen, and the temporarily stopped left design is the decorative design display device. The right symbol that has also been temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the wilderness background screen h, a duel scene is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other. In addition, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear, and the first hold icon h11 also disappears. Further, although the height of the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a Tono-sama navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. Note that during the super reach production, the entire holding frame UI may be hidden. That is, the base hs0 'in the variation icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden. Further, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden during the super reach production. Further, during the super reach production, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Further, during the super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 are all hidden, and the hold frame UI (the left base icon bIl, the four stages hs1 to hs4, the base hs0 (hs0 ′)). The right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icons h0 may be displayed and the hold frame UI may be hidden.

  In FIG. 151 (A 9), Tono-sama's navigation character YM, which has been standing facing the front, changes to a pose that faces the change icon h0 and holds the sword. In FIG. 151 (A10), a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM, and in FIG. 151 (A11), the change icon h0 that has been white until then changes to red. As described above, the variation icon in the red display mode has a considerably high expectation degree for the big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. In FIG. 151 (A12), the Tono-sama navigation character YM returns to the posture of standing frontward. 151-like navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (A12) remains in the display mode of red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of scarlet kimono).

  In FIG. 151 (13), although not shown, a button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the gauge is decreased as the operation valid period starts. Thereafter, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, a decorative cut-in image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. The cut-in image of Tono-sama overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is difficult to see compared to the case where the cut-in image of Tono-sama is not displayed. The cut-in image of Tono-sama may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image of Tono-sama is deleted, the duel scene animation display is continued, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button effect for the second time after developing into super reach. Is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter, the gauge is decreased as the operation valid period starts. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and also displays the first large board act as shown in FIG. 133 (a). 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. The effects in which the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd operate may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may also be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, even when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the first big board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth big board behavioral thing 224Gd are not performed, and an effect display that is lost is performed. Furthermore, after the effect display that is lost is performed, the revival effect may be displayed and the effect display that is a big hit may be performed. In addition, when the effect which the 1st big board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th big board behavioral thing 224Gd operate | moves is displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 currently displayed will be hidden, but you may display continuously.

  Thereafter, the thousand-thousand-box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 133 (a) operates and moves downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd. . Further, thereafter, the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the thousand-car box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Thereafter, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd each start moving toward the initial position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 151 (a 14-1). In FIG. 151 (a 14-1), a scene after Tono-sama and the swordsman cut each other is displayed.

  The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 151 (A9) to (A12) corresponds to an effect (hereinafter referred to as “change effect”) that changes the display mode of the variation icon h0. This change effect can be seen as a part of the super reach effect, but can also be seen as an effect different from the super reach effect that was started when the super reach effect was started. As for the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, when the prize is awarded to the special symbol start port (hold) At the time of winning), at the start of a pre-reading notice at the time of winning a prize, at the success of a certain production, at the first stop of the first decorative design, at the temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state , And the start time of super reach can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the start timing of the change effect. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  Also, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes is not only during Super Reach production, but also when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the change icon h0 finishes moving, and wins a special figure start opening. Time (when holding increases), start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, success of a certain performance, first stop of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-continuous performance (at the start of re-variation), reach You can list the state start, super reach start, and so on. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the timing at which the change icon h0 changes. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes may overlap with the button effective period in the button effect described above. It should be noted that the display mode of the variation icon may not be changed after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach production described here is also a game production, which includes a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the result of the final judge effect is displayed, the display mode of the variation icon may not be changed. In addition, when the navigation character YM performs an animation to change the display mode of the change icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may be changed or there may be a failure. May be. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and when the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed (successful) and when it is not changed (failure). There may be.

  Further, there may be a case where the change animation of the change icon by the navigation character YM is not performed. In this case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the change icon h0 may be changed after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbols are displayed are switched by wipe. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode (display mode of scarlet kimono) after being switched by wipe, or the navigation character YM may be used as a pre-reading notice for the next symbol variation display. The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

  In FIG. 151 (A 15-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman has fallen and the main character, Tono-sama, has won is displayed, and Tono-sama's navigation character YM also takes a victory pose. However, the middle symbol is not displayed yet, and the middle symbol of “decoration 7” is displayed in FIG. 16 (A 16-1), but the red variation icon h0 is still displayed, and the second ornament is displayed. The design is also changing. Moreover, at the stage of FIG. 16A, each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation). In FIG. 151 (a 15-1), a big hit animation by the protagonist may be executed.

Here, it can be seen that FIG. 151 (a 15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed is a super reach production, but it appears that the middle symbol is displayed and the victory is confirmed (a 16-1). ) Can be regarded as a super reach production, or can be viewed as a super reach production until just before the stop display is made. Further, as described above, the super reach production here corresponds to an example of the final judge production, and the super reach production is being executed until the final judge production result is finalized (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed). Also good.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is started with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display form of special figure A. In addition, although the 1st special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, since the 1st sub-control part 400 is the state which has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control part 300, it judges that it is a symbol fixed stop. Therefore, the fluctuation variation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” respectively. In the 4 symbol display device, display is performed in a manner that the symbol is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the big win start effect display.

  During the super reach, both the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect that is the final judge effect is started, a part or all of the holding frame UI may be hidden or disappeared. For example, the right base icon bIr may have been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappeared when the final judgment effect is started. Further, when the final judgment effect is started, the variation icon h0 may be configured to be hidden or disappear, or the navigation character YM may be configured to be hidden or disappeared. Both characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. In addition, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Furthermore, when other icons and mini-characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS are displayed so far, they may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A2-2) instead of FIG. 151 (A2-1), a balloon display such as “Change !?” may be added to the Tono-sama navigation character YM, or As shown in (2-3), a balloon display such as “Preparing for change” may be added. After this, returning to FIG. 151 (A 3-1), a treasure box icon I 1 of change notice display is displayed. The balloon character YM balloon display corresponds to a notice effect (a sign effect) of the start of the change notice display. In other words, it is a notice that suggests that the navigation character itself may change, such as “Change !?”, or the navigation character will be displayed in the future (“Preparing for change” will be displayed). Within a change or after a change that is marked “Preparing for change”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 151 (A 3-1-1) instead of FIG. 151 (A 3-1), the treasure box icon I 1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS again. A carpet icon I2 may appear, and the treasure box icon I1 may fly over the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 151 (A 4-2) instead of FIG. 151 (A 4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the navigation character YM may change or change easily. In the case of FIG. 151 (A 4-2), it is predicted that there is a possibility that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono having the same color as smoke. Also, the expected degree of change or the big hit in the hold may be notified according to the type of change animation in the change notification display.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 151 (A 5-2) instead of FIG. 151 (A-5-1), the kimono color of the navigation character YM does not change, and the navigation character YM itself may become larger. . As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, a pose) in addition to a change in color. In addition, the color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (a 5-2) may be amber (default color) or may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 151 (a 5-2) overlaps a part of the treasure chest icon I1 from the front side. A part of the navigation character YM may overlap the entire treasure box icon I1 from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

  In addition, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon h0, that is, the expected degree of jackpot, is higher in the display mode larger in the default color than in the display mode smaller in the default color, and in the display mode smaller in red. The red and large display mode may be higher. Moreover, as long as it is a size and a color, the color may be prioritized, for example, the red and small display modes may be higher than the default and large display modes. Or, conversely, the size may be prioritized. For example, the display mode larger in the default color may be higher than the display mode smaller in red. Furthermore, as for the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, there may be a plurality of sizes such as an intermediate size in addition to a case where it is large and a case where it is small.

  When the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a gold kimono, the change icon h0 changes to a gold color. When the display mode is wearing a colored kimono, the variation icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 may be easily changed to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose redemption expectation is higher than red. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or higher, or the change itself to red or higher may be determined. However, even if the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the big hit expectation may change to a color below red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Furthermore, when the navigation character YM is in a display form wearing a rainbow-colored kimono that is a premier color, the color of the variation icon h0 may always be changed to the rainbow color. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display form wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the navigation character YM is informed of a big hit directly by the display form of the navigation character YM. When the display mode is such as wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variation icon changes, the result is that it is easy to win big hits. Indirect notifications can be made.

  Further, the navigation character YM may change the variation icon h0 even when the display mode is not changed. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode is changed. Furthermore, although the character of the main character is a so-called always-display character, the navigation character YM that changes the change icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the change icon h0 is changed. Further, it may be a character displayed only when a notice is given. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as a character that changes the variation icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in customization is the variation icon. You may make it usable as a character which changes h0.

  152 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 151.

  151 (A 6-1) followed by FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) to (A 6-2-3) and then returns to FIG. Until the treasure box icon I1 is hidden, the navigation character YM may change a plurality of times. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, but the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and may be newly displayed. Further, a change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of variations. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 is repeatedly opened and closed.

  In addition, following FIG. 151 (A 6-1), a change animation as shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-3-1) to (A 6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice different from the notice of change notice (here, the UFO icon UFI). In FIG. 152 (a 6-3-2) continuing from FIG. 152 (a 6-3-2), a golden beam is irradiated toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono from the flying UFO icon UFI. As shown in FIG. 152 (a 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a golden kimono is worn. Or, in the same figure (A 6-3-3b) continuing from FIG. 152 (A 6-3-2), the gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. Irradiated, as shown in FIG. 152 (a 6-3-4b), the navigation character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono.

  Although the promotion has been described here, there may be a case where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode, There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or the display mode may be reduced (downgraded).

In addition, FIG. 152 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 151 (A 14-1), which is a scene after Tono-sama and the swordsman cut each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, “decoration 6” different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is displayed large (swaying display), and in the following diagram (a 14-2-2), the left symbol, the middle symbol, the right symbol All the decorative symbols of the symbol are displayed once lighter than the normal darkness. In the same figure, a scene where Tono-sama fell is displayed. In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again at the normal density. In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed to switch between a super reach effect scene (effect display) and a normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 151 (A1)). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 152 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 once becomes a wipe display of the same color without a pattern. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. Note that the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 152 (a 14-2-6), the display is wiped out, the background returns to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing in FIG. 152 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 152 (A 14-2-7), the wiping effect is finished, and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. Yes. A hold frame UI is also displayed, and a change icon h0 and a first hold icon h11 are also displayed. The change icon h0 shown in FIG. 152 (A 14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or the change icon h0 itself may be deleted. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode with the red kimono. In this example, the display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to the default state cannot be visually recognized because the navigation character is not displayed, but the display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to the default state. May be visible. (For example, the display which switches from the state which the display mode of the navigation character changed to the default state, the animation display which returns to the default state from the state which the display mode of the navigation character changed, etc. are mentioned.)
Note that the change icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM are displayed but not displayed at the time of wipeout (FIG. 152 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. 152 (A 14-2-7)). There may be a case, and when it is displayed, it may be configured such that a rebirth effect is more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the revival effect is always performed when displayed, and the revival effect may or may not be performed when not displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 152 (a 14-2-1) to FIG. 152 (a 14-2-3), a part of the holding frame UI (pedestal hs0 ′ and the right base icon bIr) is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only a part of the UI may be hidden. Further, the variation icon h0 may be hidden, or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden when they are displayed so far.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating another modification of the example illustrated in FIG. 151.

  Subsequent to FIG. 151 (A 16-1), the display as shown in FIG. 153 (A 16-2-1) to FIG. 15 (A 16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (A 16-2-2), the entire screen is starting to become thinner. Thereafter, it disappears once in the re-drawing effect, and the screen shown in FIG. 153 (A 16-2-1) (the screen of Tono-sama win) may be displayed again, or FIG. 151 (A 14-2-3). ) (Screen of defeat of Tono-sama) may be displayed, or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a jackpot combination or a loss of combination) with a normal background as shown in the figure (A 16-2-3) A screen may be displayed with a shaking display.

  In addition, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are also displayed on the redisplayed screen. If the display mode of the navigation character YM and / or the variation icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot confirmation (for example, a probability change) is performed. A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be confirmed. Alternatively, if the display mode is not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not fixed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be fixed, and the display mode is a golden or rainbow premium. If this is the case, an advantageous jackpot may be determined.

  FIGS. 153 (ii) to (ii) are diagrams showing examples in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of variations and also functions as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 153 (1), a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 153 (ii 2), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 153 (I 3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed.

  In FIG. 153 (i4-1), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, Tono-sama's navigation character YM, which has been in a standing posture (initial posture) up to that point, changes to a pose in which the variation icon h0 is directed and the sword is pulled out. In FIG. 153 (15), a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM, but in FIG. Yes. In FIG. 153 (No. 7), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture again.

  In FIG. 153 (8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the display-type navigation character YM wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 153 (9), the change animation of the variation icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 153 (11), the change icon h0, which was white until then, has changed to red, and a normal notice has been started. In FIG. 12 (12), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture while maintaining the display mode with the red kimono. After that, although not shown, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed by the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  In addition, in FIG. 153 (ii-4-1) instead of FIG. 153 (ii4-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variation display. In FIG. (I-4-2-2), a change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be an animation, or may be an aspect in which the display position is switched instantaneously. When the navigation character YM leaves the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, “Business trip” on the signboard) is displayed at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. An icon display indicating “medium” may be displayed.

  Note that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Good. Further, a change effect may be performed only for the hold icon to be prefetched. For example, only the state where the number of holds is 1 may be performed on the first hold icon h11, or may be performed on a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons). Furthermore, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode is changed (successful) with respect to the pre-read target hold, and may not be performed again if one failure occurs. .

  Moreover, you may perform a change effect again with respect to the hold icon whose display mode changed once by the change effect. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the change icon h0.

  Further, the navigation character YM may move from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect for the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not leave the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable out of the holding frame UI.

  In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the change next to the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red to the hold-down change of the prefetch target. There may be a variation in which no change animation is performed between the variation following the variation in which the color of the navigation character YM is red and the variation of the prefetch target. In addition, a change animation may be performed for a change in which the navigation character YM is red.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of a change icon change effect and a change icon change effect by the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 154 (1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 154 (U2), an effect icon (here, UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. Note that the effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 154 (U3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12. As shown in FIG. 154 (U4), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is The display mode changes from the default display mode to the blinking white mode. In other words, the promotion is successful. There are a plurality of types of production icons, and the success probability of the promotion production may vary depending on the production icons that appear. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be successful, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. If the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 154 (U4), the UFO icon UFI disappears. In FIG. 154 (No. 5), three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In FIG. 154 (No. 6), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 154 (U7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In FIG. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 154 (No. 9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a pose that draws a bow, and the promotion effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 154 (U10), an arrow is fired and the arrow flies over the fluctuation icon h0. In FIG. 154 (U11), the first holding icon h11 that is a display mode of white blinking is hit, In FIG. 12 (12), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from white blinking to blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or may be always successful (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Moreover, it may be performed for the first hold icon h11 only for the state where the number of hold is 1, or may be performed for a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons). Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode is changed (successful) with respect to the pre-read target suspension, and may not be performed again if one time is failed. Moreover, you may perform a promotion effect again with respect to the hold icon whose display mode changed once by the promotion effect. Note that the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect that is performed only for one of the hold icons, even if a plurality of the hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the hold decreases). Alternatively, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the hold icon A.), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and / or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. . In FIG. 154 (U13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. In FIG. 154 (U14), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. Has been. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 154 (U15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 154 (U16), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The change icon h0 is an icon changed from the first hold icon h11 that has been changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is similarly displayed on the base hs0 in the blue display mode.

  In FIG. 154 (U17), the treasure box icon I1 of change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 154 (U19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image partially hides the navigation character YM or the navigation character YM. Is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 154 (U20-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed from the default display mode to a display mode with a red kimono. The treasure chest icon I1 disappears at the timing of FIG. 154 (U21), and only the Tono-sama navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM represents the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot of the currently displayed symbol variation display. Alternatively, it may represent the ease (promotion) of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon. Furthermore, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon may be expressed.

  In FIG. 154 (U 23), a reach state is entered, and in FIG. When the super reach effect is developed, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear in the hold frame UI, and the hold icon also disappears when the hold icon remains. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 154 (U24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the Tono-sama navigation character YM wearing the red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is sinking, the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 154 (25) in the super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the blue variation icon h0 is displayed on the lowered base hs0 '. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. Further, both the base hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (U27-1), as a continuation of the super reach production, a duel scene where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed on the background screen h in the wilderness. . Again, both the base hs0 'and the change icon h0 are displayed.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 154, a modification, and the like.

  In FIG. 155 (U 29), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed lighter than the normal density, and a scene in which the lord is collapsed is displayed. Again, both the base hs0 'and the change icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (U30), the super reach effect is finished, the normal background is restored, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display, the base hs0 ′ and the variation icon h0 are displayed. Yes. In FIG. 155 (U 31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol has been restored, and the pedestal that has been sunk until now is starting to rise with the change icon h0 on it. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (U32), the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a shaking manner, and the hold frame UI is also displayed again. The navigation character YM is displayed in a default display mode.

  Further, instead of FIG. 154 (U20-1), in FIG. 155 (U20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a premier rainbow-colored kimono. In this case, regardless of the display mode (color) of the variation icon h0, the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow, so that the big hit is confirmed. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premium rainbow color. When the navigation character YM functions as a prefetch notice, the display mode of the hold icon to be prefetched may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

  Further, instead of FIG. 154 (U27-1), in FIG. 155 (U27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation of the display mode wearing the red kimono is performed. Character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is only displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may independently promote its own display mode, or change the display mode of the change icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

  Here, the announcement with the effect icon (here UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice display (here treasure box icon I1) is performed before one decoration symbol (for example, the left symbol) is temporarily stopped. It is configured so that after a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, a notice icon and / or change notice is not displayed, but one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. There may be a case where an effect icon and / or a change notice display is performed later. In addition, although described as one decorative design, a plurality of decorative designs may be used, or all decorative designs may be used. In addition, in the state where the symbol (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the announcement icon and / or the change notice display is not performed, but it may be performed.

  FIGS. 155 (E1) to (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its display mode alone.

  In FIG. 155 (E1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 155 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 155 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, making it difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. ing.

  Further, in FIG. 155 (E 3-1), instead of FIG. 155 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character YM is a red kimono. The display mode changes to Thus, the change animation itself may give a notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for notifying that the display mode is changed to the red or higher display mode if the navigation character is successfully changed, and it is determined that the red smoke image is changed to the red or higher display mode. It may be a notice display.

  Further, in FIG. 155 (E 3-1) instead of FIG. 155 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the currently displayed symbol variation display or After that, the big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich) by the symbol variation display started. As described above, the normal notice or the prefetch notice may be performed by the change animation itself. Note that the rainbow-colored smoke image may be a display for notifying that the navigation character is changed to the rainbow-colored display mode if the navigation character is successfully changed. In this case, the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed. It is not necessary that the symbol variation and / or the hold in which the color smoke image is displayed be confirmed as a big hit (may be a big hit big).

  Further, in FIG. 155 (E 4-1) instead of FIG. 155 (E 4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has changed to a princess's navigation character. The character type to be changed may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

  Further, in FIG. 155 (E 4-2) instead of FIG. 155 (E 4-2), the navigation character is changed to a navigation character (for example, a long-length character) that cannot be selected by the player. It should be noted that the chief navigation character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the change icon is more easily performed than the navigation character YM, or the symbol change and / or hold that the navigation character has changed. You may be comprised so that the expectation degree of the jackpot may be high.

  In addition, the navigation character of the princess (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon is more easily performed than the navigation character YM, It may be configured so that the expectation of the jackpot on hold is high, or configured so that a princess (bancho) appears and / or a super-reach effect is likely to occur (or always occurs). It may be.

  When the navigation character YM changes to another navigation character, it may be configured to change only to a navigation character that can be selected by the player, so that the player is changed to a navigation character that cannot be selected. It may be configured, and there may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player selects the navigation character that can be selected by the player. It may be configured such that the navigation character that cannot be promoted is more likely to promote the hold icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation that the navigation character has changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high It may be configured as follows. Conversely, in both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player is more likely to play the game than the non-selectable navigation character. The navigation character that can be selected by the user may be configured to facilitate the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation that the navigation character has changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold The degree may be high.

  Further, in FIG. 155 (E 4-1) instead of FIG. 155 (E 4-1), the character does not change, and its own change effect has failed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes its display mode alone, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled, but depending on the color of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be notified in advance. For example, when the red treasure chest icon I1 appears, it may be determined that the navigation character YM changes to a display mode of red or red or higher.

  Further, the color of the treasure box icon I1 may be used to predict the expected degree of jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display or the symbol variation display started thereafter. In other words, a normal notice or a prefetch notice may be performed according to the color of the treasure box icon I1.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (1), the sea background is displayed. Further, the navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 156 (1) is a default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 156 (2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased and a third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 156 (4), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. In addition, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 156 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the sea background is still displayed.

  In FIG. 156 (6), a background change notice, which is a kind of prefetch notice, is started. The background change notice target (prefetch target hold) is the hold increased at the timing of FIG. 156 (2) (second hold at this timing). In the background change notice, an image of a cocoon appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes a cocoon image by an animation in which the cocoon is closed (see FIG. 156 (7)). For this reason, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the heel and become invisible. Instead of the bag image, an overlapping image from the front side may appear in the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and a part of the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the reservation frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may have an effect in which images do not overlap at all.

  Note that the background change notice may be started at the time of winning a pre-reading target hold (timing in FIG. 156 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In addition, in the background change notice, the expected image big hit expectation of prefetch target hold may be represented by the color of the appearance image (here, the image of the cocoon), or if the navigation character YM having the same color as the color of the cocoon appears. The navigation character YM functions as a notice of change and corresponds to a notice of change notice. Also, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to a mountain background if the color of the coral is green. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 156 (8), the bag opens, and the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. In FIG. Disappeared. By the background change notice, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the night background. The navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the character changes from Tono-sama character to robot character. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

  In FIG. 156 (11), the vehicle has entered a reach state. Further, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode between FIGS. 156 (9-1) and 11 (11). Note that the display mode of the change icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode upon reaching the reach state. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, the hold icons h11 and h12 are all disappeared. After that, it evolved into a super reach production and changed to a super reach production background (here, the wilderness background). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (13), a scene in which Tono-sama was defeated is displayed in the background of the wilderness. It should be noted that the navigation character YM of the robot overlaps the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

  In FIG. 156 (14), a wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a wipe display by wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 156 (15), in the wipe display here, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display disappear, and the model title is displayed in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 156 (16), the wipe character is wiped out, the background returns to the night background, and the navigation character YM starts to be seen.

  In FIG. 156 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed in a shaking manner on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the red change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 is resumed.

  In FIG. 156 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  Then, after the first hold is digested and the symbol of the loss is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 156 (20-1), the next symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol variation display has been started and the pre-read target pending symbol variation has ended, but the background remains the night background.

  In FIG. 156 (21), the background change notice is started again, and the image of the eyelid appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen again becomes an image of the eyelid due to the animation that the eyelid is closed (FIG. 156 (22)). reference). In FIG. 156 (23), the bag opens, and the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. In FIG. Disappeared. As shown in FIG. 156 (24), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has returned to the sea background, and the navigation character YM has also returned to the Tono-sama character.

  Further, in FIG. 156 (9-1) instead of FIG. 156 (9-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the character depending on the background may also change depending on the reliability of the big hit. Or it may have changed from the first.

  Note that the navigation character YM may change depending on the production background, regardless of the background of the pre-reading notice. For example, when a coastal background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on the background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Also, when the effect mode is changed by the player, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the production background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed in the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed in the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed in the effect background A. Here, when the navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. Alternatively, the navigation character may be configured to have a high degree of expectation of the symbol variation and / or the jackpot in the hold (or the big jackpot confirmation (may be a big jackpot richness)). It may be configured such that the occurrence frequency of the notice and / or super reach effect that the navigation character that does not match the background appears is high (or necessarily occurs).

  Or conversely, even if the background is changed, the type of the navigation character YM may not be changed, or may not be changed absolutely.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 157 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 157 (or 2-1), a speech balloon for calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to a notice that another character (roar or princess) is displayed by the currently displayed Tono-sama navigation character YM. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-1), the display of the princess's navigation character YM1 is added in addition to the lord's navigation character YM, and the princess has been successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or a mode of appearing instantaneously. In the case of animation display, an animation in which a character cannot be initially seen by a smoke image may be used, or an animation that appears by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess's navigation character YM1 is also the default display mode.

  In FIG. 157 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Tono-sama navigation character YM and princess navigation character YM1, both of which are the default display modes, are displayed in an initial posture. In FIG. 157 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 remain displayed. Thus, the display of a plurality of navigation characters may span a plurality of variations. However, the displayed navigation character YM1 may disappear in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, Tono-sama navigation character YM) is displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 157 (or 5), a speech balloon that calls 爺 is additionally displayed on the two navigation characters YM and YM1, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, the display of the navigator character YM2 is added, and the user has successfully called the bag. In other words, all three people are now ready. In this production, the probability that the variation icon h0 will change increases, the probability of changing to a premier or a color close to premier, and the expectation of hitting a big hit with the change is higher when one or more navigation characters gather. Or the degree of expectation for a big hit after the next change may be high. In addition, when all three people are together, the rainbow color of the premiere or the big hit may be confirmed. In FIG. 157 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state with all three persons in a uniform state, and “decoration 7” is displayed in a shaking manner (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given in FIG. That is, in FIG. 157 (or 2-1), the dialogue of the navigation character YM has been announced, but in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette announcement is started. . The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the appearance notice of another navigation character, or may be another notice (such as a pending change notice). In FIG. 157 (or 2-2), a princess character is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess's navigation character YM1 may appear, but no navigation character may appear (so-called failure), or a different navigation character (for example, a navy navigation character YM2) may appear. May appear. The roulette display icon RI is configured so that characters of characters that have already appeared are not displayed, but may be configured so that characters of characters that have already appeared. In this case, a plurality of the same characters may be displayed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, if the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, For example, three characters may be displayed), the promotion effect of characters already appearing may be performed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 characters of the princess are displayed on the roulette display icon RI). When the stoppage is displayed, the princess appears in the first time, the princess's kimono turns red in the second time, the princess's kimono changes to gold in the third time, etc.).

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-2), no navigation character may appear and may fail.

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), in FIG. 157 (or 3-3), not the princess's navigation character YM1, but the cocoon navigation character YM2 appears. Thus, the order of appearance is not determined, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigation characters displayed next to each other. For example, in FIG. 157 (or 3-1), Tono-sama's navigation character YM thought that the princess's navigation character YM1 would come, but the nephew's navigation character YM2 came, and a surprised animation was displayed. It may be a premiere production that comes before the princess. Also, depending on the order in which the characters appear, the probability that the variation icon h0 will change, the probability that it will change to a premier or near-premier color, the degree of expectation that will be a big hit due to the change, or a big hit after the next change will be changed. Expectations may change or may not affect them at all.

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be determined in advance by the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 157 (or 3-4-1), a Tono-sama navigation character YM is displayed at the left end, and a princess navigation character YM1 is displayed for one person. And in the production | presentation icon display area DIS shown to FIG. 157 (or 3-4-3), the navy blue navigation character YM2 is displayed in the position left for one person. In this way, even if the order of display positions (Tono-sama, niece, princess) is fixed, the order may be disrupted (dono, princess, niece). (A big hit finalizing effect) or a big hit big.

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 3-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, as shown in FIG. "), Or may be notified by voice from a speaker, or by flashing a lamp or the like. Further, in FIG. 157 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all members have gathered is notified by character display. In addition, when everyone gathered successfully, the character display of “all members gathering” is always displayed, but a different character display (for example, “It ’s super hot” or “All members gathering”) is displayed. In this case, it may be a premier effect (a big hit finalizing effect), a big jackpot rich, or a specific reach mode may be surely started. In this case as well, in addition to the notification of the character display or instead of the notification of the character display, the notification may be made by voice from a speaker, or may be notified by blinking a lamp or the like.

  Further, instead of FIG. 157 (or 6-1), as shown in FIG. 157 (or 6-2), characters other than Tono-sama, Hime, and Samurai (here, Minowa character YM3 imitating cactus) increase. In this case, it may be a premier effect (a big hit finalizing effect) or a big hit.

  In addition, if “爺” is displayed even though “Princess” is specified, it may be a premier production (a big hit finalizing production) or a big hit, and call “Princess”. However, if “が” is displayed more frequently, a big hit (or big hit is confirmed) may be given if the character (“princess”) as it is called appears. Further, depending on the display mode of a navigation character that calls another navigation character (in this example, Tono-sama), the other navigation character may be likely to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). Also, depending on the type of navigation character that calls other navigation characters, there may be cases where other navigation characters are likely to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for other navigation characters to appear (stock) when the princess's navigation character calls than the Tono-sama navigation character. The characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation characters. For example, a plurality of Tono-sama navigation characters YM may be displayed, or may be indicated as Tono-sama × 3. Moreover, even if it is the navigation character of the same kind, the display modes (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Furthermore, the presentation performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, in the case where an effect of releasing a character from the effect icon display area DIS is performed, the pseudo-continuous effect start may be started when the lord is released, the hold is promoted when the princess is released, and the timer notice start may be started when the spear is released. . A plurality of characters may be emitted. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are released simultaneously, an effect different from that of a single release may be performed. For example, if Tono-sama and Hime-sama are released at the same time, a pseudo-continuous production that is hotter than Tono-sama alone may be started.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a modification example and the like shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 158 (ki 1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture, and the princess navigation character YM1 of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture on the right side. ing. Also, a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 158 (ki 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 out of the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1 has its smoke. Wrapped in images. That is, the smoke image does not reach the Tona-sama navigation character YM. In FIG. 158 (ki 4), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess's navigation character YM1 has changed to a display mode with a red kimono. In FIG. 158 (ki 5), the treasure box icon I1 disappears.

  In FIG. 158 (ki 2-1) instead of FIG. 158 (ki 2-1), the pose of Tono-sama's navigation character YM is changed, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 158 (ki 2-2-2), the Tono-sama navigation character YM causes a smoke image to appear, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 158 (ki 2-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess's navigation character YM1 has been changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Also, Tonosama's navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture.

  In FIG. 158 (ki 3-1) instead of FIG. 158 (ki 3-1), smoke images appearing from the treasure chest icon I1 are displayed for both the Tono-sama navigation character YM and the princess navi character YM1. Wrapping the navigation character. In FIG. 158 (ki 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the Tona-sama navigator character YM and the princess navigator character YM1 are changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. That is, the display mode has changed for both of them. Here, both have changed to the same color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, although both of them are wrapped in a smoke image, only one may change and the other may remain the default.

  When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Further, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, the direction in which one of the characters (for example, princess) has changed may be hotter than the case in which the other character (for example, Yoshimune) has changed, and the expectation degree of jackpot may be the same. Moreover, the direction in which both characters have changed may be hotter than the case in which one character has changed. Moreover, the direction in which one character changes depending on the change mode may be hotter than the change in both characters. For example, a combination of the Tono-like navigation character YM in the default display mode and the Princess Navi character YM1 in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the Tono-sama navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono and the red With the combination of the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Further, both characters may be changed without fail. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or may be configured to change to a different color. Further, the meaning of the character after the change may change depending on the character that changes. For example, if the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hot, the change is hot, and if it is the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a red kimono, it is easy to develop into super reach. Also good. In addition, if the Tono-like navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot is confirmed, and if the navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a rainbow-colored kimono is confirmed, the jackpot with a probability change is confirmed ( Advantageous jackpot determination).

  In this example, there is one navigation character that is always displayed, and when another navigation character is called by the navigation character or when a plurality of navigation characters are always displayed, the navigation character YM is displayed. The present embodiment can also be applied when there is a period during which one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing.

  FIGS. 158 (<1-1>) to (<7>) show examples of effects in which button effects are involved with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 158 (<1-1>), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. In FIG. 158 (<3), the operation effective period is started, and in FIG. (<4>), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. In FIG. 158 (<5>), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. (<6>), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the ton character is visually recognized by the effect image. It has become difficult. In FIG. 158 (<7>), the display character is changed to a Tono-sama navigation character wearing a red kimono.

  In FIG. 158 (<1-2-1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture, but here, the button display icon 136D is not displayed. That is, the back button effect is performed. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 158 (<1-2-2), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in FIG. In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM is started. Thus, the display mode of the navigation character may change depending on the back button effect.

  It should be noted that both the back button effect and another button effect (with button display) may be changed, the back button effect may be given priority, or another button effect may be given priority. The same may be applied when the back button is overlapped.

  When the pre-read button notice overlaps with the change button notice (normal notice), the pre-read button notice may be given priority, or the change button notice may be given priority.

  Further, in FIG. 158 (ku 2-2) instead of FIG. 158 (ku 2-1), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM but at a position away from the navigation character YM. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and also outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed by this different notice. Note that the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be displayed constantly or before the effective period starts.

  FIG. 159 shows an effect example in which the navigation character YM is accompanied by the effect of the button hold icon.

  In FIG. 159 (ku-3-1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a first hold icon h11 is displayed. A first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 159 (ku-3-1) is a button hold icon, and a button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. The remaining period meter MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. Here, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is within the period of the change. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (<1-3-2a>), a smoke image of an effect appears as shown in FIG. Part or all of the character YM is concealed, and is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appears. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is erased, and the first hold icon h11 does not cause any change (for example, change in display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. It should be noted that when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself are not changed. However, there may be a case where the process proceeds to the later-described figure (<1-3-4) via the state shown in FIG.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (<1-3-2a>), as shown in FIG. 1 (<1-3-3-3b1), the button image 136a for the button hold icon disappears, An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11 and a change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 159 (<1-3-3b2>), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display to a blue circle display. In addition, there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (<1-3-2a>), the process goes to FIG. 159 (<1-3-3-3b2) without going through (<1-3-3-3b1). As shown, an icon that is a button hold icon may change to a blue circle display mode without a change animation.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 159 (<1-3-3-3b1>), as shown in FIG. 1 (<1-3-4), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains a white circle, but the navigation character is not changed. YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. The change of the display mode of the navigation character YM here is not a change animation when it passes through FIG. 159 (<1-3-3-3b1>), but the display mode is switched instantaneously. In the case of passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied with an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed in the case of going through FIG. 159 (<1-3-3b1). There may be a case where it changes immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or a case where the chance button 136 changes slightly later. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 159 (<1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 159 (<1-3-4) without going through (<1-3-3-3b1)>. Thus, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

  Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (FIG. 159 (ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next variation has started (the first decorative symbol variation has yet started). In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol has been started), the variation icon h0 may become a button hold icon, as shown in FIG. In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next fluctuation, and when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 159 (<1-3-2b3 '). The white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed may change to a blue circle display mode (success pattern). In the case of a change, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM is not changed, but may be changed. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the change icon h0, but there is no change (for example, change in display mode) in the white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button hold icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next button has started without operating the chance button, the button hold icon may not be changed. You may be comprised so that it may change automatically after the next fluctuation | variation is started, without operating a button.

  Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next change is started without operating the chance button (FIG. 159 (<1-3-2b1>)), FIG. -2b2 '), an effect image is applied to the variation icon h0, and a change animation may be started. In this case, there may be a case of shifting to FIG. 159 (<1-3-2b3 ') or a case of FIG. 159 (<1> -3-2b3).

  Note that the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 159 (ku-3-1) is the default display mode, but the same applies to the navigation character YM in the promoted display mode. In other words, the second promotion is performed in FIG. 159 (<1-3-4). When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the hold icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button due to the button hold icon being displayed.

  In addition, when eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N are stored, some or all of the hold icons are changed to button hold icons. Depending on the button operation, the hold icon, the change icon, and the navigation character YM are displayed. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four hold icons are displayed.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there is a period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (K1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. The decorative character display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (K1) does not display the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 160 (key 2), the hold in the special figure 1 is increased, and a third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 160 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Even during the stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 160 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode in accordance with the start of the symbol variation display. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 160 (Ken 5-1), and in FIG. 160 (Ke 6-1), the smoke image disappears, and the Tona-sama navigation character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. Tono-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 160 (K-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change) corresponding to the prefetch target hold.

  The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing in FIG. 160 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a pre-reading target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  In FIG. 160 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols for the loss. The navigation character YM in the default display mode that is displayed during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here remains displayed in the initial posture.

  Next, the next symbol variation display is started. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 160 (Ken 9-1), a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The navigation character YM changes its display mode to a display mode with a red kimono by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 151 (A 4-1) (FIG. 160 (11)). Even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Moreover, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change without the treasure chest icon I1 appearing. That is, there may be a case where the change notice display is not performed.

  In FIG. 160 (K13), the change in the prefetch target hold has started, and the change icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, but after being displayed, it is always displayed across multiple variations.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may disappear when the change in the prefetch target hold currently being performed is completed. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear after the three symbols or temporary stop (shaking display) in the variation of the decorative pattern of the pre-reading target hold until the symbol stops, or one or two decorative symbols May disappear once temporarily stopped (first stop or second stop).

  The navigation character YM disappears at the stop display timing in FIG. 160 (7) and does not have to be displayed across the variation.

  Further, instead of FIG. 160 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 160 (Ke 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the production icon display area DIS, but a hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, there may be a plurality of places where the navigation character YM is displayed, and the navigation character YM may also be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, the navigation character YM may execute different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variation icon may differ depending on the display position, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ. The location where the navigation character YM is displayed may always be only one display area (for example, the production icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  Further, instead of FIG. 160 (K5-1), as shown in FIG. 160 (K5-3), the navigation character YM can move within the hold icon display area HIS (within the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 160 (key 5-1), as shown in FIG. 160 (key 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

  Note that the navigation character may perform an animation of moving through a plurality of display areas (for example, an effect icon display area DIS, a hold icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (K 6-2-1), a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, the pending digestion continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (K6-2-3a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the swaying is swayed and displayed without any holding. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (K6-2-4), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

  In FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-6), there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 in a state where there is no hold, the symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet started variation. The second decorative design has begun to fluctuate. At this time, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (K 6-2-7), an increase animation of a hold icon representing a hold that has already been digested (a hold of a started symbol variation display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 161 (K 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and the erasing animation of the navigation character YM is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (K6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. Yes. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. In actuality, FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-6) to FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-8) are events for a moment, but an erase animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of the symbol variation display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearing timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, may be simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be after the start of. Further, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

  In addition, instead of FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3a), as shown in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b1), there is a case where the vehicle enters the reach state, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. It may be configured not to change inside, or conversely, it may change during the reach state. Further, the display mode of the variation icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

  In FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3b2), a super-reaching effect is developed. In FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman are facing each other is displayed. Also in FIG. 161 (K6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may be promoted when it is developed to super reach, and conversely, the navigation character YM is not developed to super reach, and is configured so that the display manner is not promoted in the case of normal reach. May be. Or conversely, even if it is a normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a prefetch notice after the next change. In addition, when the “navigator character promotion” symbol is stopped as a middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Furthermore, the display mode may be promoted as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  Thereafter, in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect described with reference to FIGS. 152 (A 14-2-4) to (A 14-2-6) is executed, and FIG. 161 ( In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6-2-3b5), “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which are combinations of misses, are displayed in a shaking manner. The display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-3b6), “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of misses, is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also the default. Are displayed as they are.

  When FIG. 161 (Ke 6-2-1) to (Ke 6-2-8) and (Ke 6-2-3b1) to (Ke 6-2-3b6) are put together, the symbol variation of the pre-read target suspension is completed. Even if the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as a notice corresponding to the prefetch target hold (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden, and the next change is started. When it is erased. It should be noted that the navigation character is displayed before the pre-reading target pending symbol variation ends (for example, before the decorative symbol is displayed with one or more temporary stops, simultaneously with the temporary stop, after the temporary stop, or after the decorative symbol is displayed. All symbols (3 symbols, left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in this example) are temporarily stopped before and after temporary stop. It may be deleted before or after the symbol change of the pre-read target hold is ended (at the same time when the symbol (special symbol) becomes the stop display or after the stop display).

  FIG. 162 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

  In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162, a variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and a base hs0 is arranged. An effect icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the change icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (this a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. The second hold number display shows that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “3” and the hold number of the special figure 2 is “2”, and five hold icons are displayed in total. Yes. These five hold icons are all in the default display mode.

  In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 162, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). In addition, until the third hold, the fourth stage is white, and the fifth and subsequent stages are gray. When the four holds, the fifth stage is white, and the sixth and later stages are white. The stage turns gray. As described above, the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of holds, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holds.

  In addition, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (this a1).

  In FIG. 162 (ko a2), the hold of special figure 2 is increased by 1, and in FIG. 162 (ko a3), a hold increase animation is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Are displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Further, the seventh stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage is only the eighth stage hs8.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (this a5), a navigation character YM having a default display mode appears, and a balloon “two more are full” is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of suspensions is N or more (in this example, 6 or more).

  In FIG. 162 (ko a6), the special figure 1 hold increases by one, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (ko a7) displays seven hold icons, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, a balloon “One more full” is added. The added seventh hold icon h7 is also the default display mode. In addition, the last eighth stage hs8 also changes to white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

  In FIG. 162 (this a8), the special figure 2 hold increases by one, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (this a9) displays eight hold icons, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Is added with a balloon “full tank”. The added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. In this example, the navigation character YM performs notification regarding the number of holds using a balloon, but it may not be performed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM may change when 8 holds are stored (when the tank is full). In FIG. 162 (this a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will change. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may always change when the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 162 (this a11), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode with a red kimono, and a balloon “The inside is on hold” is added to the navigation character YM, and a pre-reading notice is executed. . Note that the notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. Also, the degree of expectation for the jackpot on hold may be notified in advance by a notification displayed in a balloon. Further, in this example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the hold is full, but the navigation character may be changed in accordance with the next variation of the symbol variation in which the hold is full. In addition, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the symbol variation may be notified by changing the navigation character.

  The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, and may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. Moreover, there may be a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may vary depending on the character. For example, even if the navigation character of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigation character in the display mode wearing a red kimono, Good.

  FIG. 163 shows an example of an effect in which a usual decoration pattern is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 163 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, a special figure 1 first hold icon h11 with a circle representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the special figure 1 first hold icon h11 is a default display mode. Further, in FIG. 163 (this b1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variation display of the usual decorative pattern. As a result, in addition to “○” and “×”, “Geki” as a big hit notice of the special figure of the variation "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 163 (this b2), “○” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is notified that the normal drawing lottery has been won.

  In FIG. 163 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigation character YM is the default display mode, and appears when the player wins the regular drawing lottery. In the following FIG. 163 (this b4), since the regular drawing lottery is won, the electric Chu is released and the navigation character YM notifies that the electric Chu is being released. In FIG. 163 (this b5-1), since the electric Chu is being opened, there is a winning after the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 increases to four full. In FIG. 163 (this b6-1), the second hold number display shows that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “1” and the hold number of the special figure 2 is “4”. Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing 2 hold are displayed (see Fig. 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). The four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are all in the default display mode. The pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is designated as the special figure 1. It is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon of from the front side.

  In FIG. 163 (this b7), the notification during the release of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is completed, and in the following figure (this b8), the time for the electric chew to be released has ended, so the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. I'm talking. It should be noted that the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. In FIG. 163 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

  After that, in FIG. 163 (this b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 163 (this b12), the hold of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A rhombus variation icon is displayed on the base hs0.

  In FIG. 163 (this b14), the navigation character YM is wrapped in the smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will change. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may always change when the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 163 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode with a red kimono. A balloon “This change is hot” is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is executed. Yes. Further, the normal notice is also executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

  Further, instead of FIG. 163 (this b15-1), in FIG. 163 (this b15-2-1), the navigation character YM remains in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. In addition, a balloon “This change is” is added to the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the reservation of the special figure 2 proceeds and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (this b15-2-3) displays the last symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2. Also here, the navigation character YM is added with a balloon “This change is”, and the effect by the navigation character YM is continued from FIG. 163 (b15-2-1). In FIG. 163 (this b15-2-4), a balloon “Farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is finished. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (this b15-2-5). In addition, when it is hot, the navigation character YM does not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may continue further. On the contrary, the navigation character YM may necessarily disappear. Further, even when the super reach effect is started between FIG. 163 (this b15-2-1) and FIG. 16 (this b15-2-4), the effect by the navigation character YM is continued, and the navigation character YM is displayed. On the contrary, the effect by the navigation character YM may end and the navigation character YM may disappear.

  Note that the navigation character YM described in FIG. 163 (this b1) to FIG. 16 (this b15-1) and FIG. 163 (this b15-2-1) to FIG. Only the advance notice is performed and the prefetch notice is not made, but the prefetch notice may be made.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a change notice display is displayed on standby.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (sa1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 164 (sa 2), the hold in FIG. 1 increases and a third hold icon h13 and a fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is a prefetch target hold.

  In FIG. 164 (S3), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Even during the stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 164 (sa 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (sa5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display that changes the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, since the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, it has been notified (predicted) that the navigation character YM may also appear. The treasure box icon I1 in the change notice display is in a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The stand-by display of the treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the carpet icon I2.

  In FIG. 164 (S7), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 164 (sa 8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 164 (sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 164 (sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby. Thus, the treasure chest icon I1 may be displayed across multiple variations.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (sa11-1), and in FIG. 164 (sa12), the smoke image disappears, and the tomb-like navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. Tono-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 164 (S12) is a default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will appear. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear and may not appear. In addition, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may be displayed without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to appear whenever the smoke image is displayed.

  The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning a pre-reading target hold (timing in FIG. 164 (S2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. In addition, the navigation character YM may be displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon of the change notice display and the navigation character YM are prefetch notices for the same prefetch target hold (hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 164 (S2) in this example). However, the treasure box icon of the change notice display may be different from the prefetch target hold of the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 164 (S12), when the Tono-sama navigation character YM appears, only the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

  In FIG. 164 (sa 14), the change of the prefetch target hold is started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the prefetch target hold. In FIG. 164 (Sa 15-1), a treasure box is opened, a smoke image comes out from inside, and envelops the Tono-sama navigation character YM. In FIG. 164 (sa 16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the Tona-sama navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to a display mode with a red kimono. The navigation character YM that has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  It should be noted that the change effect of the navigation character YM using the treasure box icon I1 may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target hold (timing in FIG. 164 (S2)). In addition, the navigation character YM may be displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  In addition, in FIG. 164 (S 10-2-1) instead of FIG. 164 (S 10-2-1), no Tona-sama navigation character YM has appeared, but the carpet icon I2 has disappeared and a treasure box with a change notice display is displayed. The standby display of the icon I1 is finished. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 164 (sa 10-2-2), a smoke image is displayed. The smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variation icon h0, and the navigation character The display position of YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 164 (sa 10-2-3), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed to a red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may also change. On the contrary, the navigation character YM may not appear, and the display mode of the change icon h0 may not change.

  Further, instead of FIG. 164 (S11-1), in FIG. 11 (S21-2), the smoke icon is displayed, but the navigation icon YM is not visible, and the carpet icon I2 disappears. The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is finished. Thus, the timing when the standby display ends may be before the navigation character YM appears. The timing at which the standby display ends may be simultaneous with the appearance of the navigation character YM. Furthermore, the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the timing of stop display of the decorative symbol, or the timing of the start of variation of the decorative symbol may be used. Note that the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, but the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display is finished. (For example, a change after the next change after the standby display has ended, or within a change in which the standby display has ended). Further, the change notice display may not be displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display ends, but the change notice display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display). For example, the fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation that ended and the fluctuation within the waiting display).

  Further, instead of FIG. 164 (S13), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed in FIG. In 13-13-2), the treasure box is not opened, the navigation character YM is not changed, the display mode of the change icon h0 is not changed, and both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Disappears. Thus, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the treasure chest icon I1 and the navigation character YM icon, only the treasure chest icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. When both icons disappear, both may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using a holding frame different from the holding frame described so far.

  The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 165 (Shi 1) is a closed type that extends over the entire effect display area 208d. In other words, the hold frame UI and the components (pedestal hs0, etc.) described so far are the same, but in the state of FIG. 165 (Sh 1), the display area of the hold frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIIf1, the upper frame UIIf2, and the right frame UIIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other areas, and the sea background is displayed in the holding frame UI. Is not displayed. Note that the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 165 (Sh 1) is the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIF3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the holding frame UI. Are promoted by changing these colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (Sh 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end portion of the decorative symbol changing at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative design may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Furthermore, a first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 165 (I 2-1), the treasure box icon I 1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I 2, and in the same figure (S 3), only the carpet icon I 2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I 1 is It remains in the production icon display area DIS. In FIG. 165 (4), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and an icon with a character display of “frame promotion” appears from the inside, and the promotion of the holding frame UI is notified (notice). In FIG. 165 (5), the holding frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIIf1, the upper frame UIIf2, the right frame UIIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Note that even if the “frame promotion” icon appears, the reservation frame UI may not be promoted. Further, when the “frame promotion” icon appears, the holding frame UI may be promoted without fail.

  Also, instead of FIG. 165 (Sh 2-1), the lower body of the giant panda is displayed in the area where the sea background is displayed in FIG. Due to the lower body of this huge panda, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed in front of the lower half of the panda. This huge panda is passing from the top to the bottom and eventually enters the area of the reservation frame UI, and part or all of the reservation frame UI is overlapped from the front side by the huge panda, FIG. In the state shown in (Sh-2-2), only a part of each of the upper left and upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the panda image, but the state shown in FIG. Then, the entire holding frame UI is overlapped with the panda image. The appearance of a giant panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. Note that the entire holding frame UI is overlapped by a huge panda, but the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding frame UI.

  FIG. 165 (Sh 2-2-4) shows one mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( The navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to a display mode with a red kimono, and the hold frame UI has also been promoted to red display. Note that the display mode of the change icon may also be changed (promoted). Further, among the left frame UIf1, etc., all of the hold icon, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be changed, or only a part thereof may be changed. For example, only the left frame UIf1 or the like may change to red and the holding frame UI may only be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

  FIG. 165 (and 2-2-4 ′) shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed. In addition to the change in the holding frame UI, There is also a change outside the holding frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increased. When this level rises, the reach production is easily started, the pseudo-continuous production is easily started, or the design is switched to a design that appears when the design is a big hit with certainty. Moreover, if the reach production is started in a state where this level is high, the degree of expectation of the big hit becomes high. Note that the background may change.

  If the appearance of a giant panda is a big hit announcement, the first decorative pattern may overlap the passing panda image from the front side so that it is displayed in front of the panda image. Even if it is a notice, the 1st decoration design may be overlapped with the picture of the panda which passes.

  Further, instead of FIG. 165 (Sh 2-1), a wrinkle image for wiping effect is added to the holding frame UI in FIG. The state shown in 1) is a state where the haze image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 2 (2-3-2) is a state where the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state).

  FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a treasure chest icon I1 that has been used as a change notice notification icon appears as a hold icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (su 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, a treasure box icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 166 (su 2-1), the symbol change display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of losing. In FIG. The hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the fluctuation icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 here.

  In FIG. 166 (su4), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the change icon h0 is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image is displayed on the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Covering and changing animations are being executed. In FIG. 166 (Su 5), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode with a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to a change notice, the smoke image may not overlap the change icon h0 that is a change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

  Further, instead of FIG. 166 (su1-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed in the same drawing (su1-2-1). The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon. That is, at least a part of the hold icon with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot overlaps at least a part of the relatively low hold icon from the front side. Note that at least a part of the hold icon in the prefetch notice mode may overlap at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot, at least a part of the hold icon that is digested first may overlap at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later from the front side. In FIG. 166 (Su1-2-2), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 166 (Su 1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 where the smoke images overlap is changed.

  In addition, in FIG. 166 (Su2-1) instead of FIG. 166 (Su2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened and a change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and in FIG. (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. The aspect has changed. Here, both are changed to the same red color, but may be changed to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, although both of them are wrapped in a smoke image, only one may change and the other may remain the default.

  In addition, in FIG. 166 (Su2-1) instead of FIG. 166 (Su2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 of the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 166 (Su 2-3-2), the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the variation icon h0 where the smoke images overlap is changed.

  Note that icons that are not overlapped by the smoke image (holding icon, fluctuation icon) and / or navigation character are also icons (holding icon, fluctuation icon) and / or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (may be simultaneous with the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).

  FIG. 167 shows an effect example in which the meter character is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (Set 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW whose meter frame mf is white is displayed beside it. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 167 (Set 1-1) is in an empty state. When this meter display becomes full, the navigation character YM is promoted. It should be noted that by changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), the ease of storing the meter may be notified, or a pre-reading notification and / or a notification of the change may be performed.

  In FIG. 167 (set 2), a temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 4” is displayed in a shaking manner. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the symbol of “decoration 4”. In FIG. 167 (set 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is displayed. It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 167 (set 4), the meter rising item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by one level. In addition, the meter rising item differs in the meter rising degree depending on the color. The white meter rising item UpI is raised by one level with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In FIG. 167 (Case 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In FIG. Is suspended and symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 167 (Set 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. In this roulette production, there is a case where something happens (when there is no loss) and a case where something does not occur (when there is a loss). As an example of something, there is a change of a hold icon, a normal notice (a notice of the change), and the like. In addition, for example, when there is a character-type super reach including Tono Super Reach, Hime Super Reach, and Samurai Super Reach as one kind of super reach, as an example of the above, the type of super reach to be developed (for example, Character-type super reach), specific super reach (for example, Tono Super Reach), and the like.

  In FIG. 167 (Set 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 167 (Set 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb is moved to the white meter display MW, and the white It is displayed overlapping the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 167 (set 10), the blue meter rising item UpIb that has moved to the white meter display MW is captured (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by two levels. The blue meter rising item UpIb is raised by two levels with respect to the white meter display MW. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 167 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In FIG. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 167 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In FIG. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

  In FIG. 167 (set 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in the figure (set 15), the remaining period meter is decreased. In FIG. 167 (Set 16), the chance button 136 is operated. In FIG. 167 (Set 17), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a meter rising icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM. The meter rise icon MUI is a display form of a balloon, and a green meter rise item UpIm is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. This meter up icon MUI also overlaps with a part of white meter display MW (a part of meter frame mf), like button display icon 136D. The meter up icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes displays other than the meter up icon MUI. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter up icon MUI) is displayed. ) May be displayed as a response display only. Moreover, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, or the meter is increased only when the response display is displayed, and the meter does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured like this.

  In FIG. 167 (set 18), the green meter rising item UpIm in the meter rising icon MUI moves to the white meter display MW and is displayed overlapping the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 167 (set 19), the green meter rising item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by three levels. The white meter display MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 167 (Set 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to a character display of “promotion”, and a change animation (not shown) is started. In FIG. (Set 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. The display mode is changed (promoted). The color of the kimono of the navigation character YM changed here matches the background color of the character display “promotion” shown in FIG. 167 (set 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 167 (set 20-1). A display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is announced. Note that the change animation may be omitted. In addition, the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 (set 21) returns to the empty state, but may remain full. Further, when the meter display becomes full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may always change (promotion) or may not change (promotion) (in the case of failure).

  Instead of FIG. 167 (Case 1-1), the meter display may not always be displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 167 (Set 1-2-2), the meter rising item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter rising item UpI moves to a predetermined position in the effect icon display area DIS, as shown in FIG. 167 (Set 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (Set 1-2-4), the meter display (in this case, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Moreover, a meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be simultaneously with the appearance of the meter rising item UpI, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 167 (Set 1-2-2) and the drawing (Set 1-2-3).

  In FIG. 167 (Set 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level due to the meter rising item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 167, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises thereafter. However, even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (corresponding to false). Alternatively, there may be a case where the meter rising item does not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if a meter rising item appears.

  In addition, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a pre-reading notice that the meter may accumulate. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears or during the symbol variation, and in this case, the meter display may cause the meter to accumulate within the variation. It will be a notice that there is.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

  In place of FIG. 167 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 168 (Set 1-3-1), there is no hold, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the white meter display MW in an empty state is displayed. It is displayed. The white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 167 (Set 1-1) was full at 6 levels, whereas the white meter display displayed in FIG. 168 (Set 1-3-1). MW is full at 5th level.

  In FIG. 168 (set 1-3- 3a), a meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. A gold meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 168 (Set 1-3-4a) is filled at once due to the golden meter rising item UpIg. Thereafter, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue. However, if the meter is still stored, the blue gauge may be full. Alternatively, it may be filled with a golden gauge by being filled at a stretch by the golden meter rising item UpIg.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 168 (set 1-3-b), a meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, a rainbow colored meter rising item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 168 (Set 1-3-4b) is also filled at a stretch by the rainbow colored meter rising item UpIn. Thereafter, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. When the battery is in the accumulated state, it may be full with the blue gauge, or it may be filled with the rainbow gauge when the rainbow colored meter up item UpIn is filled at once. It may be in a tan state.

  White, blue, green, red, gold and iridescent items are prepared as meter rising items. Among these items, only the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn and the golden meter-rising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rising item UpI is increased by one level, the blue meter rising item UpIb is increased by two levels, the green meter rising item UpIm is increased by three levels, and the red meter rising item UpIr is increased by four levels.

  In addition, the rainbow meter rising item UpIn also functions as a jackpot confirmation notice. On the other hand, the golden meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is full with one rainbow meter up item UpIn, when the meter is full with one gold meter up item UpIn, or other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning differs when the meter is full with a combination of meter-up items.

  In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is a white, blue, green, red meter rising item, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

  Note that the color of the meter rising item may have a function as a normal notice or a prefetch notice. Moreover, the expectation degree of jackpot may be represented by the color.

  Moreover, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or may be linked. For example, when a golden meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is easily changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, and conversely, the navigation character YM displays a golden kimono. If it is an aspect, the golden meter rising item UpIg may easily appear or may necessarily appear.

  Further, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading notice or may function as a normal notice. Further, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of jackpot. Or, conversely, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  In this example, the meter is stored until the meter reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). In addition, in the meter display that is full at 6 levels in FIG. 167, the meter is accumulated until the meter becomes 18 (also the meter is full three times). Here, when the meter overflows due to the display of the meter rising item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are stored), the meter is set to 0 while the navigation character is promoted. You may make it save the part which is not saved. For example, when a red meter rising item UpIt is displayed when three meters are stored, the meter is full once, and the meter is further stored at two levels.

  If the meter overflows in the state where the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled up and the amount that cannot be stored may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the prefetch target variation or the variation ends, or may be displayed regardless of the prefetch target variation or the variation. Also, it may be rounded down as much as it could not be stored. For example, the meter is stored, and the meter at that time may be zero, may be full, may be specially displayed, or may not be displayed. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three are already stored, only two white meter rising items UpI or only one blue meter rising item UpIb are displayed.

  In the example starting with FIG. 168 (Set 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 167 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 168 (Set 1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI that has come. Irradiated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, the navigation character YM changes to a display mode with a red kimono as shown in FIG. "Is attached. By this “Up high probability”, it is informed that the meter rising item is in a state of being easily stored.

  Depending on the display mode of the notice that changes the navigation character YM, an “Up high probability” notification may occur or may occur. In addition, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of “Up high probability” may be performed without fail, or a plurality of types of effect display (notice display) including the notification of “Up high probability” may be performed. The effect display including the notification of “Up high probability” may not be performed.

  Further, depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may be different. For example, the red navigation character YM is notified of “Up high probability”, the gold navigation character YM is displayed with intense heat, and the rainbow colored navigation character YM is displayed with an iron plate display. May be. Note that the navigation character YM having a different display mode may give the same notice (the same kind of notice).

  Instead of FIG. 167 (Set 5-1), in FIG. 168 (Set 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is white blinking and is one level, and the kimono of the navigation character YM is also blinking white. Yes. Thereafter, after the meter is full and returns to an empty state, in FIG. 168 (Set 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode with a green kimono, The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to green and rises to 3 levels. Thereafter, after the meter is full again and returned to the empty state, in FIG. 168 (Set 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to the display mode with a rainbow-colored kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to a rainbow color and is full. In this way, the meter storage state and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. The color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may also correspond.

  In addition, when all the meters are stored, a pattern in which the big hit is confirmed or the expectation degree of the big hit is high, and a pattern in which the meters are stored and released to produce an effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is released when it is stored up to 2 levels, an effect equivalent to blue is performed, and when it is released when the meter is stored up to 4 levels, an effect equivalent to red is produced. Is done.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating still another modified example of the example described with reference to FIG.

  Instead of FIG. 167 (Set 6-1), in FIG. 169 (Set 6-2), a roulette display icon RI and a meter rising icon MUI are displayed on the white flashing meter display MW ′ in which the meter frame mf flashes white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rising icon MUI overlaps a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is difficult to see compared to the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. On the other hand, a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. It should be noted that the meter rising icon MUI may overlap the entire roulette display icon RI from the front side, and conversely, at least a part of the roulette display icon RI overlaps from the front side to at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI. May be. In addition, as a priority displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, if there is a warning that the meter rising icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is displayed, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying a white flashing meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although there is a notification that there is a possibility of being displayed, even if there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, the meter frame may not be notified. You may be comprised so that it may not alert | report that a meter raise icon may be displayed. Further, the advance notice for notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed is not limited to the meter frame, and may be performed by other display or production means.

  Instead of FIG. 167 (Set 7-1), in FIG. 169 (Set 7-2), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, since the meter rising icon MUI still overlaps, it is difficult to view. In this way, the meter rising icons may overlap. In addition, when meter rise icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, or the higher meter rise degree may be given priority, or the meter rise degree A lower value may be prioritized. Further, the meter rising icon does not overlap the navigation character YM from the front side, but may overlap.

  In addition, in FIG. 169 (Set 7-3-1) instead of FIG. 167 (Set 7-1), an image up for notifying (notifying) that the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear which color meter rise icon is displayed, and thereafter, several color meter rise icons are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is informed that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette effect, although the color is unknown, the roulette display icon RI is displayed as shown in FIG. The effect display Ed1 to which the aura is given is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 169 (Set 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 is changed, and the blue meter rising icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is not known how many meters the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may also be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

  In FIG. 169 (Set 7-3-4), a display that is an enlargement of the blue meter rising icon that overlapped the roulette display icon RI becomes a blue meter rising icon UpIb, and the white blinking meter display MW It moves to 'and is displayed overlapping with white blinking meter display MW'. Further, the roulette display icon RI fades out and the display becomes light and gradually disappears. It should be noted that the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. Thereafter, the blue meter rising item UpIb is captured (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW ', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

  Note that a blue meter rising item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and may be captured in the white blinking meter display MW ′. In this case, the blue meter rising item UpIb may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed simultaneously with the display, May have been displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, a display in which the blue meter rising item UpIb is enlarged from the blue meter rising icon may be displayed before being displayed or simultaneously with the display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed after being displayed.

  In place of FIG. 167 (Set 20-1), in FIG. 169 (Set-20-2-1), the white meter display MW in the full state is temporarily changed to the character display of “Stock”, and the empty state is displayed. When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. It should be noted that icons other than the navigation character (holding icon, variation icon) and other effects display that change only the display mode of the navigation character YM by opening the treasure chest icon I1 may be changed.

  As described above, the description relating to the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 105 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169. That is, all descriptions including the description that the rate of increase of the meter is different when the color of the meter frame is different can be applied. Alternatively, the items described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 170 shows an effect example in which a telop effect is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 170 (Part 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 170 (No. 2-1), a telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed that there is a possibility that the navigation character YM may change, and corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Probable” and a character display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Predictive” are flowed from the right to the left of the screen. In addition to this, no text is displayed on the telop display trp, and no text is displayed on the telop display. The telop display displays “XX high accuracy”, “XX & ○ high accuracy”, It may be notified in advance that there is a possibility that “preparing”, “XX or XX high-definition preparing”, “high-definition preparing”, etc. may be displayed. Even if the plain telop display trp is displayed here, “XX high accuracy”, “XX & ○○ high accuracy”, “XX high accuracy preparation”, “XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation in progress” ”,“ Preparing with high accuracy ”, etc. may not be displayed. In addition, “XX high preparation in preparation”, “XX or ○○ high preparation in preparation”, “high preparation in preparation”, etc. are displayed, and there is a possibility that a high probability state will occur for the effect displayed in the telop. You may alert | report this beforehand. “XX” and “XX” described here have various effects (for example, changes in hold (holding icon and / or variable icon), pseudo-ream, advance notice in a highly anticipated color, high expectation for jackpot This indicates the name of the notice (so-called harsh notice).

  The high-probability state for the effect described here is an effect that is notified in the telop rather than the case where the notice that is notified as the high-probability state by the telop display is not notified as the high-probability state by the telop display. This shows a state where the frequency of being performed becomes high. In other words, “Navi character change high probability in FIG. 170 (part 1) -FIG. (Part 14), FIG. (Part 2-2), FIG. (Part 2-3), FIG. "" Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than in the case where “Navi character change is highly likely” is not notified in the telop display. In addition, the “high accuracy preparation” included in “XX high accuracy preparation”, “XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation”, “high accuracy preparation”, etc. described above is displayed in a telop display. The staged display is now in a high probability state (changes after the next change that started displaying the telop that includes “Predicting high accuracy” or changes that started displaying the telop that includes “Preparing highly accurate”. )) (Or the possibility of a high probability state).

  In FIG. 170 (part 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols in a stopped manner. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end portion of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, conversely, the second decorative design may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

  In FIG. 170 (part 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is started also in FIG. 170 (Part 6). The telop display trp is continuing.

  In FIG. 170 (part 7), a change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 170 (No. 8-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode with a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing. Thereafter, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display is started also in FIG. 170 (No. 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in FIG.

  Note that the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, the change animation is started, the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and the navigation character YM may be changed. In this case, it can be said that the display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Probable” in the telop display trp notifies the appearance of the treasure chest icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

  In FIG. 170 (part 12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started again, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 170 (Part 13), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has been changed to a display mode with a golden kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

  While the telop display trp is being displayed, the change effect of the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times. However, if the navigation character YM changes once during the display of the telop display trp, then the navigation character YM is changed. It may be configured not to.

  In FIG. 170 (part 14), the leaping state is entered, but the telop display trp is still continuing. As the timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears, when the super reach starts (for example, FIG. 154 (24)), when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, when the first stop, the second stop, the third stop) , Symbol stop characters, start of next change, etc.

  In this example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. It may be configured such that only a change effect by the navigation character itself is performed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 170 (part 2-1), as shown in FIG. 170 (part 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in two stages, upper and lower. Different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

  In the telop display, a high-probability display may be displayed for other notices. For the same prefetch target hold, the displayed timing may be the same, and one may be later than the other. In addition, when one “XX high probability” telop display appears, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another prefetch target hold. In that case, a telop display (for example, “Navi-Character High Accuracy”) regarding the same notice may be displayed separately, and the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the display start order, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 170 (part 2-1), the same contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in FIG. 170 (part 2-3). That is, a plurality of the same telop display may be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to appeal that the expectation of jackpot is higher when a plurality of displays are displayed than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of items are displayed, the expectation degree of jackpot may actually be the same as when only one item is displayed. Moreover, you may repeat displaying a plurality of the same telop displays. That is, each time display of a telop display is started, a plurality of telop displays having the same contents may be displayed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 170 (No. 8-1), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times) as shown in FIG. May be notified by the telop display trp. In this example, a character display of “complete” is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may further change.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  FIG. 171 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (only 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 171 (only 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In FIG. The display shifts to reach production, and all the displays disappear from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are disappeared.

  In FIG. 171 (4a), the design of the enemy swordsman is displayed on the entire screen on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays a reduced first decorative symbol, a change icon h0, and a navigation character YM. Note that the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

  In FIG. 171 (Ta 5a), a wilderness background that is a background display of the super reach effect is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  Here, instead of FIG. 171 (only 1a-1), in FIG. 171 (only 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display region CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes with the image displayed across the frame.

  In addition, the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is enlarged, but the right base icon bIr may also be enlarged and displayed together with the navigation character YM.

  In addition, even if it is not enlarged and displayed as shown to FIG. 171 (only 1a-2), it may straddle a some display apparatus. For example, a pattern straddling from the beginning of the display, a pattern displayed straddling by moving from the original position, a pattern displaying straddling with an image change, or an image enlarged and displayed straddling Or a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the screen. In addition, when the display is enlarged as shown in FIG. 171 (only 1a-2), the expectation level of the big hit is increased, the hold icon is easily changed, the change icon is easily changed, or the navigation character YM is displayed. May be easy to change. The navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, in the case where the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices, and the display device A in the foreground partially overlaps the display area of the display device B, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display apparatus B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display apparatus A in FIG.

  As described above, the items described using FIG. 171 (1a-2) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  Further, instead of FIG. 171 (only 1a-1), in FIG. 171 (only 1a-3), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed. That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be easily changed, the expectation level of the big hit may be high, or a change in other effects (for example, holding) The change of the icon or the change icon) may be easily performed. Further, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the level of expectation of the big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, change of the hold icon and the change icon, etc.) They may be different or may be the same without any influence. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM will change may be higher when moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. The above has described the movement of the navigation character YM, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the variation icon moves to another display device.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 171 (only 1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but may be moved to another location on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 171 (1a-3) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  Also, instead of FIG. 171 (only 1a-1), in FIG. 171 (only 1a-4), the navigation character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can be regarded as an increase in the navigation character YM.

  In this way, when the navigation character YM is divided (increased), the navigation character YM may be easily changed, the expectation level of the big hit may be high, or a change in other effects (for example, a hold icon, It may be easy to change the variation icon).

  Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

  As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 171 (1a-4) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later. That is, in other production examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increased) or may be necessarily divided (increased).

  FIG. 172 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  In FIG. 172 (only 1b), the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171 (only 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 172 (T2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Further, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 172 (only 3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and a signboard icon “searching” is displayed instead. The third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared displays the same character (Mr.) YM 'as the navigation character YM and is running. On top of that, a character display indicating that a search is in progress is displayed. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with an image of the question mark on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared.

  The signboard icon “searching” may be a notification indicating that the navigation character YM is likely to succeed in the change effect (promotion effect). In addition, the success probability is higher when the signboard color is blue than white, and the success probability is higher when red than blue. If it is red, promotion may be confirmed. Moreover, although this color may change a color, a display character, etc., it may not change. Moreover, the display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

  In FIG. 172 (only 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state) so far, are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Come on. Note that this period corresponds to the period of the production effect.

  In FIG. 172 (5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, the robot moves to a fully closed position (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but may be a position before contact.

  FIG. 172 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of the promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the character (Mr. Tono) YM 'who was running took a pose with his thumb up, A character display indicating level up is displayed on the screen. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and a thousand carton box is displayed. The display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the thousand-thousand box. For example, if the carton box is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode with a blue kimono. In addition, the color box, the open / close state, and the like of this thousand box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 172 (or 7b), the character (Mr.) YM 'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono.

  In FIG. 172 (8b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state. . When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial state, a wipe effect is performed in each of the decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 172 (T9b) are in the middle of wipe-in. In FIG. 172 (T10b), the wipe-in is completed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is completed. In addition, a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (10b), a smoke image is displayed at the position where the signboard icon has been displayed.

  In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (only 11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing the red kimono is displayed. Further, the wipe-out is started in each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this example, the wipe-in animation (animation closing from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (animation opening from the inside to the outside) are different, but the same animation may be used. In FIG. 172 (Ta 12b), the wipeout is completed, and the sea background is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. In one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or more effect movable bodies that do not include a liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation). And the navigation character is promoted.)

  The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 172 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect example described later.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 173 (only 1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 173 (only 1a-3-2), a moving animation is displayed in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 173 (only 1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this case as well, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame obstructs the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. A navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (only 1a-3-3).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 173 (1a-3-2 ′), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device. 208N shows an example of enlarged display. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (only 1a-3-2 ′), only the right hand and the right foot toe of the navigation character YM are displayed, but the right hand and the right foot toe are enlarged and displayed. Thus, the navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the part that enters the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (only 1a-3-3 ′). . In this way, when the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the navigation character YM may be more easily changed than the case where the navigation character YM is not displayed in an enlarged manner. The change of the production (for example, the change of the hold icon or the change icon) may be easily performed, or may be the same without any influence. When the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner or may not be displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Note that the movement animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 173 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect example described later.

  Further, instead of FIG. 172 (it 8b), FIG. 173 (it 5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 172 (4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving so as to approach each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. It is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stopped in the middle also return to the initial state, but the notification of the change effect (promotion effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (5b-2), the character (Mr.) YM 'takes a pose in which he or she is looking backward. The failure notification may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, failure notification may be started when the vehicle stops before reaching a certain position.

  Also, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, the failure may be a failure, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Moreover, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This is also true for the productions that have been divided into successes and failures as described above.

  In addition, if the change effect (promotion effect) here fails, the navigation character YM is for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until the N times of change from the promotion failure, The change may be regulated until the change in the prefetch target hold related to the promotion failure is completed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 172 (6b-1), FIG. 173 (6b-2) shows the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol up to a certain position (for example, the fully closed position). A pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) has failed although the display device 208N has moved is shown. The third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 173 (6b-2) also displays a character (Mr.) YM 'in a pose that is depressed backward, as before. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and an orange box is displayed there.

  Thus, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Or, conversely, if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted. Moreover, even if it will be in the state shown to FIG. 173 (it 6b-2), the navigation character YM may be promoted, and conversely, if it will be in this state, failure confirmation may be sufficient.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the second display device below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the holding frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS are provided, and a base hs0 is arranged in the change icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or may be capable of moving up and down.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (1c), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Furthermore, a default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

  On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (T2c), a wrinkle image for wiping effect is displayed, and the state shown in FIG. It is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (4), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (5c), the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (5c) where the wipe effect has ended, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are not displayed. The mini game animation by is displayed. That is, by the wipe effect, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are not displayed, and the mini (fortune-telling) of betting (fortune-telling) changes (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM. The game has started. Even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach production is started. In the stage of FIG. 174 (4c), it can be seen that the mini-game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the betting (fortune-telling) mini-game is, and FIG. 174 (5c) I do not know until the stage. For this reason, there is a case where at least the second display device 208S can be focused until the explanation about the mini game (here, “Promotion of Yoshimune if entering the cup”) is performed.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (only 6c-1), the cup-in is successfully completed. When the cup-in is successful, the wiping effect is started again. In FIG. 174 (it 7c), the haze image starts to close again, and the state shown in FIG. is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (it 9c), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in the same figure (it 10c), the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 174 (or 10c) wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipeout is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 174 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 174 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM is changed to the display mode of the red kimono.

  Further, in FIG. 174 (6c-1) instead of FIG. 174 (6c-1), the cup-in fails. As described above, when the mini game in which the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet fails, the navigation character YM may never be promoted, but may be promoted. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 174 (6c-1), when the mini game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

  Note that when wiping out from FIG. 174 (8c), a wipe effect that can suggest to the player that the navigation character YM may be promoted may be used, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes may be used. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

  Moreover, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG.

  Further, the second display device 208S may perform an effect operation during the execution of the mini game. Also, when succeeding (in this example, FIG. 174 (6c-1)) and when failing (in this example, FIG. 174 (6c-2)) or indulgent production (in this example, FIG. 174 (5c)) Different presentation operations may be performed. An effect operation by an effect movable body may be performed instead of the second display device 208S.

  Note that the mini game described with reference to FIG. 174 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an example when another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. In other words, “COPANDA” of 07 is set in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 139 (b), “Holding frame B” of 02 is set in “Holding frame selection”, and “Holding display selection” “Icon C” of 03 is set, and “Background E” of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a a1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is displayed, and a co-panda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 that is a default display mode of the icon C is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a a1), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  In FIG. 175 (a a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 which is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. A co-panda navigation character YM is also displayed.

  In FIG. 175 (a a3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 175 (a a4-1), the carpet icon I2 Disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 175 (aa5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image partially or entirely hides the navigation character YM. Is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. Note that the change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, it may be a back button or an operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 175 (a a6), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed from the co-panda to the head length. The longest character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 139 (b). Note that the character may be changed to a character that can be selected by the player (for example, samurai or princess), or may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

  In FIG. 175 (a a7), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 175 (a 8), a reach state is entered. A NEXT balloon icon indicating a pseudo-continuous effect is added to the navigation character YM having the longest length shown in FIG. 175 (a a8).

  In FIG. 175 (a a9), a pseudo-continuous design (design of Tono-sama character) is temporarily stopped on the middle design of the first decorative design, and in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the easier it is to win a big hit.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (a a11), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a12), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved below the second decorative symbol.

  The next-length navigation character YM shown in FIG. 175 (aa13) is again given the “NEXT” balloon icon that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect, and the continuation of the pseudo-continuation is still expected. Then, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, or once or a plurality of times, it enters a reach state and further develops into a super reach production (swordsman reach production). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (aa15) changes to the wilderness background, which is the background display of the swordsman reach, and the main character and the enemy swordsman are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A duel scene facing each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS are disappeared. Further, the base hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed on the base hs0. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM having the longest length is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  A “chance” balloon icon that hits a big hit is added to the long-length navigation character YM shown in FIG. 175 (a a16), and the long-length navigation character YM executes a turn effect.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a a18), a scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slashed in super reach production is displayed. A “decoration 6” that is different from the design (“decoration 7”) is displayed large (swaying). Although the height of the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. In addition, the navigator character YM having the longest length is also displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Thereafter, the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a a19) is in the middle of the wipe-in. In FIG. 175 (a a20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a21), the navigation character YM of the co-panda starts to be visible while returning to the background of the background E (sky background). In FIG. 175 (a a22), the wipe effect is finished, and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0 that is the default display mode of the icon C is also resumed. In addition, a blue hold icon (prefetch hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 (E2) to (E4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change its own display mode. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has been lost, but the display mode of the navigation character YM has changed due to the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player than when changing (for example, changing by himself) without using the treasure chest icon I1. Here, the advantageous state includes a transition to a big hit gaming state, a transition to a big hit gaming state with a large number of balls, and a transition to a probable change state and an electric support state.

  In this example, even if the hold increases while the hold icon is hidden, if the hold icon changes from hidden to displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden There may be a pre-reading notice. If the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold may be consumed (until it is displayed in the variable icon display area or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area). It may be configured to regulate the pre-reading notice and / or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is not displayed, or the target with the fluctuation that the hold has increased. It may be configured such that the prefetching notice by the hold icon is restricted, and the prefetching notice and / or the notice of the change may be performed after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

  In this example, a prefetch notice with another hold icon may be performed while a prefetch notice with one hold icon is being executed. , Until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is consumed (may be until it is displayed in the variable icon display area or may be deleted from the variable icon display area) Also good.

  In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the navigation character selected by the player will give the notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. You may make it not break. Further, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by a balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may make it not break. Further, in this example, there is a case where the change notice and / or the prefetch notice is performed by the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player, but the change notice and / or the prefetch notice may not be performed. In addition, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be more easily promoted with the hold icon and / or the variable icon than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character may change. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation of the jackpot within the symbol variation and / or the hold is high (or the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot may be rich)), and / or a notice that the navigation character appears and / or It may be configured such that the occurrence frequency of the super reach effect is high (or always occurs).

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example illustrated in FIG. 175.

  In place of FIG. 175 (a 3-1), in FIG. 176 (a a 3-2), instead of the treasure box icon I 1, a change notice is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate IL. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be notified by a production means different from the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 175 (a a3-1), in FIG. 176 (a a3-3), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice is displayed by the effect operation of the movable means (here, the family crest member 224E). It is carried out. In other words, the family crest character 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position, and overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Although there is no hold icon here, if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps the hold icon. Thereafter, the family crest member 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the rendering operation of the family crest actor 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest actor 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the ease of change to the navigation character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by a light emission effect by the LED provided on the family crest character 224E.

  Further, instead of FIG. 175 (a a3-1), in FIG. 176 (a a3-4), instead of the treasure chest icon I1, a change notice is displayed by sound output from the speaker 120. Note that the change notice display may be performed by the game board lamp 442 or the game frame frame lamp 452.

  Also, instead of FIG. 175 (a a4-1), as shown in FIG. 176 (a a4-2), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, There is a case where the icon I1 jumps on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  In addition, in FIG. 176 (a a6-2) instead of FIG. 175 (a a6-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change even though the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened. Corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  In addition, in FIG. 176 (a a6-3) instead of FIG. 175 (a a6-1), the co-panda navigation character YM is the same co-panda, but a co-panda (here, red clothes) having a different clothing color. The navigation character YM has succeeded in the change effect (promotion effect).

  In addition, in FIG. 176 (a b1) instead of FIG. 175 (a a3-1), as in the example shown in FIG. 174, the second display device 208S is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). The hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided in the second display device 208S, and the base hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. . In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In addition, the navigation icon YM of the co-panda is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (ab1), a conversation notice is performed by a notice of the character of the frog and the character display “Navi character changes”, and the change notice display is performed by this conversation notice. It has been broken. In other words, the change of the navigation character YM is notified in advance by the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the production means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. Yes. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 176 (a b2), the navigation character YM is changed from a co-panda to a head length that is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

  Further, instead of FIG. 175 (a a2), a speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 176 (a c1). The volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 141 (9) and the brightness (light quantity) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 141 (3) are “user set values”. It is written on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, both are three levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed to the effect at the time of execution and output from the speaker 120, or the game board lamp 442 and / or the game frame. Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is written as “actual set value” on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is the same in the following examples. In FIG. 176 (ac2), the fact that there is a possibility that the “severe fever” notice may be performed is notified by the speaker 120, which is a stage means different from the stage means that may cause the “severe heat” notice. ing. The sound volume (actual setting value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user setting value. Thereafter, in FIG. 176 (ac3), the notice of “severe heat” is executed, the letters “severe heat” are displayed large on the decorative symbol display device 208, sound is output from the speaker 120, and the game board is used. The lamp 442 and the game frame frame lamp 452 emit light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of execution of the “hot heat” notice exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) also exceeds the user setting value and is level 5. That is, the sound is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and emits light with a luminance higher than the luminance level set by the player. In addition, at the time of production, the volume and brightness may be forcibly below the user set value in addition to exceeding the user set value (hereinafter the same). In addition, the timing at which the volume and luminance are forcibly changed is not limited to this example. For example, the luminance may change at the timing when the sound that is approaching intense heat is output, or the sound that is approaching intense heat. The volume and brightness may change during the output. In addition, when a specific effect is executed, only the volume of the volume and brightness may be output exceeding the user set value, or only the brightness may exceed the user set value and light may be emitted. In some cases, both may be exceeded.

  Note that the user setting of the volume and brightness may be possible even on a game machine that does not have a convenient volume adjustment window VW or brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. Any game console that can set the volume and brightness can be used. The technical idea here can also be applied when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color of the image, etc. (hereinafter the same).

  As described above, various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 176 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  FIG. 177 is a table summarizing music that can be output from the speaker 120.

  In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 177 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive hits. For example, unless the jackpot is 15 consecutive villas, the song “Large behavior” cannot be selected. A plurality of music pieces may be selectable. For example, if 15 jackpots are made, all the music pieces with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

  The serial number 12 is a music that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the jackpot start interval (during the jackpot start effect execution). If the back button navigation mode is set, the jackpot During the start interval, guidance about operating the chance button 136 is notified, but not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. Note that the guidance does not need to be notified when the back button navigation mode is set, and conversely, the guidance may be notified when the back button navigation mode is not set.

  The music numbers 13 and 14 are music numbers that can be selected on the condition that a big hit is made with a specific reach. “Collaboration SP” here refers to a super reach production where multiple characters co-star (for example, a super reach production where Yoshimune and Panda co-star at Swordsman Reach). “Big hit” means that the premier character “楓” appeared in the cut-in image in Super Reach and was a big hit.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 177 is performed.

  In FIG. 178 (A), the probability variation state (special figure high-probability common figure high-probability state) is occurring, and the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly. A second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (A1). The hold number in FIG. 1 is 3, and the hold number in FIG. 3. The pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and FIG. 178 shows only the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2. These three hold icons h21 to h23 are all in the default display mode. In addition, it is a big hit triple ream. Furthermore, the song title display section MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (I 1) displays the song title of the currently outputted song (in this case, the default “may be there”). Is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a song having that song name. That is, the music that is output here is the music that is output in the probability variation state. Further, on the left side of the music title display portion MN, icons of up and down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up and down keys 137u, d. In addition, a space background screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the space background screen is a background screen for a probability change state.

  In FIG. 178 (A 2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated. In FIG. 178 (A 3), the song name in the song title display section MN is changed to “Mega Giga Summer”. Note that since the music is output from the speaker 120 with a slight delay (for example, 500 milliseconds) from the music selection operation, there is a period in which the music name on the music title display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the music title displayed in the music title display unit MN may be configured so that the music actually output from the speaker 120 matches. In FIG. 178 (A4), the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is also output from the speaker 120. When a song is changed, the song is output from the beginning. For example, when the timing and time at which the song flows is determined by power-on or RTC (Real Time Clock) production, or from the continuation of the last output In such a case, the data may be output from the middle.

  In FIG. 178 (b), the special figure 2 hold increases and the special 2 fills up (the hold number display displayed in the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). The display of the fourth hold icon is slightly delayed from the update of the hold number display to 4, and in FIG. 6 (a), the fourth hold icon 24 in the pre-read notice display mode (white blinking) is displayed. Has been. After that, three suspensions of special figure 2 are digested. In FIG. 178 (b), the special symbol 2 is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Yes. In addition, the remaining number of reservations in FIG. 2 is 1, and the first reservation icon h21 is changed to a red display mode.

  In FIG. 178 (I 9), the last hold of the special figure 2 has been consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the decorative symbol variation display. Even in the state of FIG. 178 (A 10), the selected music is still “Mega Giga Summer”, and in FIG. 178 (A 11), the chief character C11 appears and a music change notice is made. The song change notice is a jackpot notice including an effect that forcibly changes the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a prefetch notice. . In this example, because the song change notice is displayed, the symbol change for which the song change notice is displayed is announced for the jackpot confirmation (or rich jackpot), but the symbol change for which the song change notice is displayed is lost. There may be cases. For example, if “Break DREAM”, which is the theme song of the chief choir of the character that appeared, is successful (the expectation of the big hit is high, or the big hit is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)), ”Is not output, it may be a failure, and there may be a case where the symbol variation displaying the music change notice is lost. In addition, even when “sound DREAM” is not output and the music change advance notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been determined by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). In addition, by displaying the music change notice, the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot richness) after the next change of the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed / or the expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where a notice other than the music change notice is made. A pre-reading notice may be made to notice that the degree is high. Further, even when the music change advance notice fails, it may be configured to be notified that the big hit is surely confirmed by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). However, the song change notice may forcibly replace the song selected by the player, which may be annoying for the player in some cases. It may be confirmed.

  From the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 178 (A12), a song change effect sound effect is output. Further, although the music of “Mega Giga Summer” output from the speaker 120 is not output, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” may be output. Note that the chief character C11 appearing in the music change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the song name display unit MN.

  In FIG. 178 (I 13), the song title in the song title display section MN is changed to “Distance”, but no song is output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that even if the output of the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is output as it is in the same figure (I 11) in all or a part of the period of FIG. 178 (I 12) to (I 15-1). Alternatively, “Distance” changed by the music change notice may be output from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 177, “Distance” is not a song released after “Mega Giga Summer”, but a song different from “Make DREAM”. However, “Distance” is the music immediately before “Make DREAM” in the opening order. In the music change notice here, such a “Distance” music is put between them, and “Breaking DREAM” is finally output. It should be noted that “sound DREAM” may be displayed on the song title display unit MN at the stage of FIG.

  In FIG. 178 (I 14), the song change effect sound is output again from the speaker 120, and the long-length character C11 raises one hand. The music piece “Distance” is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has passed since the music title in the music title display unit MN is changed to “Distance”, but may be output.

  In FIG. 178 (I 15), the song title in the song title display section MN is changed to “Make DREAM”, and a song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120 again. The music change notice may be successful at the stage where “sound DREAM” is displayed on the music name display unit MN. In FIG. 178 (a 16), the music “sound DREAM” is output from the speaker 120. That is, when “sound DREAM” is displayed on the song name display unit MN, the “sound DREAM” music is always output from the speaker 120. In addition, even when “sound DREAM” is displayed, there may be a case where the music “sound DREAM” is not output from the speaker 120 and fails.

  Further, in this example, when the music change notice is displayed, “Make DREAM” is always output. However, in FIG. 178 (b), the original “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed on the song name display unit MN. If this is the case, it is a failure (failure), and “mega giga summer” may also be output from the speaker 120 thereafter. Alternatively, the case where “Distance” is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 178 (b) is also a failure (displacement), and “Distance” may also be output from the speaker 120 thereafter. The original “Mega Giga Summer” may be displayed on the song title display unit MN selected by the player, and the output of the “Mega Giga Summer” song may be started.

  It should be noted that depending on whether “Distance” is displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 178 (b 13) or “Your Fragrance” to be released next to “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed. A jackpot expectation may be expressed for variations and / or symbol variations within the hold. In other words, the expectation of jackpot may be higher when “Distance” is displayed than when “Your Fragrance” is displayed.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot may be expressed for the change and / or the design change within the hold depending on the number of changes of the music by the music change notice. For example, it may be configured such that when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold is likely to be a big hit. . In addition, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and / or the design fluctuation within the hold may be confirmed as big hit (or rich in big hit). On the contrary, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, it is possible to confirm the loss.

  In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (I 16), an animation of “Breaking DREAM” is also displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (A19), “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7”, which is a combination of jackpots with probability variation, is displayed in a shaking manner. In 20), the combination is displayed in a definite manner. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to “Breaking DREAM”, and then the “Breaking DREAM” music is output from the speaker 120, and “Delay DREAM” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation (including lyrics display) is displayed and a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is “sound DREAM”, the music “sound DREAM” is output from the speaker 120 and / or “sound DREAM” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The animation may not be displayed in some cases. In other words, even if a music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, there may be a case where the next music is not displayed unless an effect display corresponding to the music is performed.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 178.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (a 21) displays a big hit game start screen, and the big hit start BGM is outputted from the speaker 120, during the big hit start interval (during the big hit start effect execution). It is.

  The timing in FIG. 179 (b) is the timing immediately after the first round is started. In the jackpot game effect in this example, the first round and the second round are music selection periods. On the decorative symbol display device 208, when the first round is started, a music selection screen is automatically displayed. The music selection may be started at the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even in the music selection period, when the music selection is completed, the music selection screen disappears and the round effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the first round (“1R”) and the number of balls (number of winning balls) (0 pt).

  A music release list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. Since it has achieved 4 consecutive villas with this big hit, “Kiseki no Universe” has been newly added to the music release list GR and can be selected. The “New Universe” display is marked with “New”. In this example, the newly added music is configured to be displayed in the second stage of the music release list GR, so that “may be there” and “mega giga summer” that have already been released. "Is not displayed. Here, the newly opened “miracle of miracle” is selected, and the rust portion of “miracle of miracle” is output from the speaker 120. In the music release list GR, the previous “gain DREAM” is not displayed, and “gain DREAM” cannot be selected. However, when the “profit DREAM” effect is executed, the “profit DREAM” may be released. In this case, the display position of “Make DREAM” in the song release list GR may be a position immediately below the song released up to the previous time (“Your Fragrance”) or “Kiseki no Kiseki” released this time. It may be a position directly under the “space”. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 179, since the release order is the sixth music, it may be the position of the sixth music from the top music, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. It will be sandwiched. In addition, when the production of “Dream DREAM” is executed, “Make DREAM” among the songs released according to the current number of consecutive resorts (“Space of Kiseki”) and “Make DREAM” Only one may be released, or both songs may be released.

  In FIG. 179 (b), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is aligned with a display in which three question marks below the “space of miracle” display in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks is an unreleased display, and the song title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unknown what music is scheduled to be released in the future. It should be noted that at the timing of FIG. 179 (b), the game ball is starting to win the attacker.

  When the cursor csd is placed on a display with three question marks aligned, scrolling downward automatically starts (FIG. 179 (b)), the cursor csd goes to the end, and the top “is there” Return to "Maybe". In addition, instead of automatically scrolling downward, the player may scroll by his own operation. Further, instead of displaying three question marks, the names of songs scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Or, conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, in the music release list GR, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged is not displayed, and only the opened music name may be displayed.

  Also in FIG. 179 (b), the automatic scrolling is not completed, and the rust portion of “the universe of miracle” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. During song selection, a part of each song (in this example, the rust portion) is output so as to loop, but it does not have to be looped. For example, when output for a certain period of time ends, the next song The music may not be output until the next is selected. Also, all of the music may be output from the beginning, or all of the back may be output from the middle of the music (for example, the rust portion).

  Also in FIG. 179 (A 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended and the cursor csd has not returned to the head “may be there”, but the speaker 120 replaces “the universe of miracle” with “ The output of the “rust” part may have been started. It may be configured such that the music “may be there” is not output until the cursor csd is set to “may be there”. FIG. 179 (A 30) shows that the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling. In FIG. It has returned to "I can't do it" and automatic scrolling has ended. Originally, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is positioned on the display of the target music (may be at the same time as the adjustment or before the adjustment). The output of the music is started, but “may be there” is output in the middle of the automatic scrolling, so the music that was output at the time of FIG. The continuation of is output as it is. In addition, after the cursor csd is set to “may be there” (may be at the same time as it is set or before it is set), it may be newly “may be there”. May be newly started from the beginning of the chorus portion of “may be there” (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song selection).

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is set to the display of “mega giga summer” as shown in FIG. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 179 (A 34), and “mega giga summer” is determined. In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 179 (i), the determined “mega giga summer” is displayed in red, and a music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

  When the music is determined in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (I 36), the round effect screen of the second round is displayed, and the title “Mega Giga Summer” of the selected music is displayed in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been. Also, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is output from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning when the round effect starts. In addition, when all the music is output not only from the chorus part but also from the beginning of the music when the music is selected, it may be output from the continuation at the start of the round effect.

  In addition, in FIG. 179 (I 15-2-1) instead of FIG. 178 (I 15-1), the song name “CREA” is displayed on the song title display unit MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The song with this song name is a song not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, it is a music that the player cannot select. From the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 178 (I 15-2-2), the music “CREA” is output, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the animation of the character “CREA”. The lyrics of the song “CREA” are also displayed. As described above, when a song that cannot be selected by the player is output, the expectation level of the big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, the case where it loses may be included. In the subsequent music selection by the player, the music “CREA” may be added as one of the selectable music in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Adding may be prohibited. In addition, it is possible to select the music selection during the big hit game, it may be impossible to select the music selection during the pattern change, and vice versa, the selection is not possible during the big hit game selection, and the music selection during the pattern change. It may be possible.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an example of the effect produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 133 (b).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Wa1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 180, as in FIG. 176 (ac1), “volume” and “brightness” “user set value” are written in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure, and “volume” in the lower right. And “actual setting value” of “luminance”. In addition, the types of “BGM”, “SE (sound effect)”, and “light emission” among the effects that are actually executed are also shown.

  In FIG. 180 (Wa1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 are displayed in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In order to forcibly set the volume and brightness to actual setting values, the presentation control data itself may instruct to ignore the user setting value and execute the value specified by the presentation data. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may manage themselves based on a table in which effects that ignore the values are collected, or may be managed based on commands from the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 180 (Wa3), the left symbol that has been temporarily stopped by the decorative symbol display device 208 has moved to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 and has also been temporarily stopped. The right symbol is moved to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 180 (Wa3), the super reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 according to the super reach development ramp pattern. However, it emits light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In FIG. 180 (Wa4), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are operated to advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and enter the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 180 (Wa4), the BGM disappears, and the effect sound at the time of moving the super reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three-level luminance as the user set value. In this way, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd and the light guiding plate IL perform the rendering operation, but the sound volume and the luminance remain at the user set values.

  It should be noted that the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd temporarily return to the initial position at an appropriate timing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Ua6), the scene after the main character Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman made a duel on the wilderness background screen and the Ton-sama and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed. In FIG. 180 (Wa6), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 are displayed in accordance with the super reach lamp pattern. Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Wa7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 180 (Wa8), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 180 (Wa9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreased, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (Wa10). The chance button 136 is operated at a timing within the operation effective period. During this period (FIGS. 180 (a7-1) to 180 (a11-1)), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the super reach result sound effect sound is output. Are output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. It should be noted that the button effect may correspond to an indication that the effect of changing the volume and brightness settings may start.

  In response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 180 (Ua10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Ua1-1) displays the effect image from the display of the scene after the sword and the swordsman slashed each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 180 (Wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136, BGM disappears, and the jackpot decision sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 also emit light with brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value. That is, both the volume and brightness are forcibly increased.

  Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the effect described with reference to FIG. 180 (Ua11-1) is executed. However, if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform a revival effect.

  In FIG. 180 (Wa12), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operated again and advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It overlaps with 208 from the front side. Then, in FIG. 180 (Wa13), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates to move downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd. In FIG. 9 (a14), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this time (FIG. 180 (Wa12) to 180 (Wa14)), as in FIG. 180 (Wa11-1), the jackpot sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. Then, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light with brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value in accordance with the jackpot determination lamp pattern.

  Note that even when the effect is not performed due to a failure of the accessory, the volume and brightness may be changed from the user set value, or in this case, the user set value may be left unchanged.

  Further, when the button image 136 is displayed as in FIG. 180 (Ua7-1), the volume and luminance may be forcibly changed. That is, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here becomes a notice of the button effect as a result (and hence a jackpot notice), and such a previous change may be handled as one of the jackpot final effects.

  Here, the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation of the accessory such as the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the movement of the accessory to the effect position are completed. The volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed according to the condition, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one symbol variation, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed only once at a maximum by one symbol variation. Further, here, the sound volume and the luminance are all changed, but only the sound volume may be changed, or only the luminance may be changed (the same applies hereinafter).

  Eventually, in FIG. 180 (Wa15), in response to the fact that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the sub-control unit 400, 500 side receives a command to return the thousand-thousand box role 224H to the initial position, Start moving toward and return to the initial position. Here, the jackpot sound effect from the speaker 120 is pulled down to the user set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emitting according to the jackpot determine lamp pattern also reaches the user set value. Has been lowered. This is returned to the user setting value when the sub-control unit 400, 500 side receives a command to return the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H to the initial position.

  Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and fades and gradually disappears. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the scene after the swordsman slashes fades in. In addition, at this timing, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are beginning to return to the initial positions. During this time (FIG. 180 (Wa16) to FIG. 180 (Wa17)), as in FIG. 180 (Wa15), the jackpot sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at the volume set by the user. The game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 that emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern also emit light at the brightness set by the user.

  Note that, during the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as shown in FIGS. 180 (a11-1) to (a17), the volume and / or luminance changes from the user set value, and another sound data. The volume and / or brightness may return to the user setting value when switching to the light emission data. Conversely, the volume and / or luminance may change from the user set value across a period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data is switched one or more times.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 180.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (Ua18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other is completely restored. In addition, at this timing, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are stopped at the initial position. In FIG. 181 (Wa18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 according to the super reach win use ramp pattern. However, it emits light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. Note that the timing at which the volume and the brightness return to the original is not limited to the timing in FIG. 180 (Wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (thousand box accessory 224H) starts returning from the effect position toward the initial position). Display switching timing), timing at which a duel scene victory is determined (timing in FIG. 181 (Wa19-1)), or timing at which a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. It may be.

  In FIG. 181 (Ua19-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman falls and the main character Tono-sama wins is displayed, and the Tono-sama navigation character YM also takes a victory pose. In FIG. 181 (Wa19-1), the super reach winning use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the voice of the main character “Yataze” is also the same as the user set value 3. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three-level luminance as the user set value in accordance with the super reach winning use lamp pattern.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the big winning decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 180 (Ua1-1), in FIG. 181 (Ua11-2), after Tonen and the swordsman slashed in response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 180 (Ua10). Is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is largely displayed (swaying display) as a middle symbol. This is a display suggesting that the button effect has failed, and at this time, the super reach defeat BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 according to the super reach defeat lamp pattern. And the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. As described above, when the production fails, or when the loss is dense or the loss is confirmed, the volume and / or luminance need not be changed from the user set value, but the volume and / or luminance is changed from the user set value. Also good.

  Further, instead of FIG. 180 (U11-1), the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (U11-2 ′) is the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (U11-2). In this example, the volume is lower than the user setting value, and the luminance is lower than the user setting value. As described above, the volume and / or the luminance may be reduced when the production fails or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and / or the luminance may be decreased when the production is successful, or when the big hit is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

  In FIG. 181 (U a-2-1) instead of FIG. 180 (U a-1), the button effect is not started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same drawing (U a-2-2) An enlarged display of the character of the main character, Tono, is displayed to notify that he has won. In this way, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the effect (movable means) such as the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is not involved, if a specific effect display is displayed, The volume and / or brightness may be forcibly changed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (U7-2-3), the display returns to the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman cut each other, and the sound volume and brightness return to the same level as the user set value. ing.

  It should be noted that the volume and / or the luminance may be forcibly changed not only according to the accessory or display but also according to the effect by other effect means. Examples of other rendering means include a light guide plate IL, a versatile writer (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like. The volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed even in accordance with winning in a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a start opening, an attacker) or passing through a specific gate. Furthermore, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed even in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

  Further, instead of FIG. 181 (Ua19-1), in the example continuing from FIG. 181 (Ua19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. The display of the scene where the protagonist wins fades out as shown in the figure (Ua19-2-3), and then the first decorative design is displayed as shown in the figure (Ua19-2-4). The display is swayed by a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. In this example, after forcibly changing the volume and brightness in FIG. 180 (Ua11-1), the state continues until FIG. 181 (Ua19-2-3), and then returns to the user set value. That is, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until the same three decorative symbols are lined up and the shaking display is started. Moreover, you may continue until the shaking display is complete | finished. Further, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

  Note that the volume and / or luminance is forcibly increased during the operation of the accessory, but may be decreased. Further, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or / and the luminance may not change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume and brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, even if the value is changed to a value larger than the maximum value that is the user setting value or a value that is smaller than the minimum value that is the user setting value. Good.

  Further, the luminance may increase and the volume may decrease, and conversely, the volume may increase and the luminance may decrease. Further, the luminance may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the luminance may not change. When the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain the same, or the value that is forcibly changed is displayed. May be. Further, the player may be able to adjust the volume or luminance when the volume or luminance is changed, or may not be adjustable when the volume or luminance is changed.

  FIG. 180 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. It may be when the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes. Note that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon in which the volume or / and the luminance are not forcibly changed. For example, when changing to a display mode in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is not so high, the volume and / or luminance need not be changed forcibly. For example, when the big hit expectation increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, the volume or / and the brightness will not be forcibly changed unless the change is greater than red. Also good. Or conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon changes, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed.

  FIG. 180 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed at the appearance of an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation level of jackpot. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c), a conversation notice appears in a red frame. The hot effect is an effect in which red, gold, and rainbow colors are used. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed. The amount of change may be different when red (for example, one level up), when gold (for example, two level up), or when rainbow (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. There may be.

  FIG. 180 (Ud) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the decorative pattern of the losing is temporarily stopped once. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (Ud-2), a revival effect with a wipe effect is thereafter executed. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be changed prior to the result display. That is, the volume or / and luminance may be forcibly changed simultaneously with the start of the revival effect.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in FIGS. 182 and 183, the above-described customization setting is performed. In other words, in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 139 (b), “Copanda” of 07 is set, and in “Reservation frame selection”, “Reservation frame D” of 04 to which a wrinkle image for wiping effect is added. The “hold display selection” is set to “icon C” of 03, and the background display selection is set to “background E” of 05.

  In the description here, the color used in the production represents the level of expectation of the big hit, and the degree of big hit expectation increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. For example, the color etc. as a display mode of a pending | holding icon and a fluctuation | variation icon are mention | raise | lifted. Hereinafter, the change of the color in the direction in which the degree of expectation for the big hit is increased may be referred to as promotion. This is the same in the following description. This can also be applied to the above description.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D1), the hold frame UI of the hold frame D is displayed, and a co-panda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 that is a default display mode of the icon C is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D1), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  Thereafter, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by two, and three holding icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the stop display shown in FIG. 182 (d). Here, the pre-reading notice hold is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 182 (D4), one hold is consumed and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. In addition, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not yet started.

  In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 182 (D5), the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 are started. The image appears from the left and right. Note that the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 do not have to be performed during the appearance of the wrinkle image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 182 (D6), the bag image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 182 (D7), the first decorative symbol also starts changing display, and in the same diagram (D8), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Also in FIG. 182 (D8), the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

  In FIG. 182 (D 9-1), wipe-out is started and the wrinkle image for wiping effect starts to open. In FIG. 182 (D), the wrinkle image is fully opened (wipe-out state). In the wiping effect here, the holding frame is changed. In other words, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 182 (d10) is a “hold frame R” different from the “hold frame D” selected by the player in the customization settings, and the frame is surrounded by a red frame. Become a frame. The “holding frame R” is a holding frame that cannot be selected in the customization setting, but may be selected. It should be noted that this red frame makes the navigation character YM's feet invisible. The “holding frame R” is a holding frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the holding icon is in a state of being easily changed, and a “holding change !? time” is displayed beside the co-panda of the navigation character YM. The character display is displayed. Note that the pre-reading target hold is the hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold is used in FIG. 182 (d). Here, the “pending change !? time” corresponds to the above-described “high probability state regarding production”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D12), a bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11 that is the target of the pre-reading notice. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile is changed, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 182 (D13) is changed to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not fired, the missile does not hit any of the hold icons or the variable icons, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits There may be. These all correspond to failure of promotion production.

  In FIG. 182 (D15), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 182 (D16), the reserved change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The pending change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is promoted in two stages, and when the blue pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 182 (D16), the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 18 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 182 (d17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in FIG. 18 (d18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is It has changed to a red display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (D19), the middle symbol which has been a red reserved change symbol so far changes to “decoration 2”, and “decoration 1”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 1”. Is displayed in a variable display (temporary stop). In FIG. 182 (D20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

  In FIG. 182 (D22), the red hold icon, which has been the first hold icon 11 so far, has moved to the base hs0 and is displayed as the change icon h0 in the red display mode. Even when the pre-reading notice target hold is consumed, the character display of “hold change !? time” continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 182 (D23), a golden light beam is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the variation icon h0. In FIG. 182 (D24), the variation icon that has been red until now changes to gold.

  In FIG. 182 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. In super reach production, the sky background switches to the wilderness background, and a duel scene is displayed. In the super-reach state, all of the holding frame UI remains except for the base hs0, and the holding icon also disappears. However, the fluctuation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. A pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 182 (D28) is a pedestal of the “holding frame D” before it is changed by the wipe effect. That is, the original pedestal. However, it may be a pedestal of “holding frame R” after being changed by the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the change icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or from the normal reach state (FIG. 182 (D26)). Further, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is finished, the non-displayed items such as the hold frame UI and the hold icon may be displayed, and after the super reach effect is finished, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol variation is displayed. The hold frame D may be displayed from the start of display.

  In this example, even if the reach state is reached, the color of the frame of the holding frame UI remains red. However, if the color of the frame of the holding frame UI also changes, the expectation of jackpot increases. Also good.

  It should be noted that the hold frame not selected by the player (for example, “hold frame R”) is more than the case where the pre-read hold icon is displayed on the hold frame selected by the player (for example, “hold frame D”). When the pre-read hold icon is displayed, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the pre-read hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player When the prefetch hold icon is displayed in a hold frame that is not selected by the player (for example, “hold frame R”) than when the prefetch hold icon is displayed in (for example, “hold frame D”). However, even if it is the display mode of the same prefetch hold icon, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the prefetch hold icon. It may be.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example illustrated in FIG. 182.

  In FIG. 183 (d 9-2-1) instead of FIG. 182 (d 9-1), both the hold icon and the change icon are temporarily changed to a special mode (character). Further, the navigation character YM is also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color is changed to reflect the expected degree of jackpot. Here, the ease of change to a color with a high expectation level for jackpots is determined according to the mode of the character once displayed.

  In FIG. 183 (D 9-2-2), a mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is performed. The character that has won the mini game changes to a color icon (holding icon or variable icon) with a high expectation level of jackpot. The Samurai character wins with a probability of 50%, the Princess character wins with a probability of 75%, and the Tono-sama character wins with a probability of 100%. In addition to the Tono-sama character, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to an icon of a jackpot-determined color (here, rainbow).

  In FIG. 183 (E 9-2-3), a janken game was played as a mini game, and everyone played janken at the same time. As a result, both Samurai characters lost and Tono-sama character won. A plurality of characters may win.

  In FIG. 183 (E 9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and after the state (wipe-in state) in FIG. (E 9-2-6)), in the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 9 (E 9-2-7), the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the holding frame UI remains “holding frame D”.

  FIGS. 183 (O 1) to (O 12) are diagrams showing examples in which the navigation character YM and the treasure box icon I 1 of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of variations.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (O 1), the hold frame UI of the hold frame D is displayed, and a co-panda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, which are the default display mode of the icon C, are displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (e), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  In FIG. 183 (e 2), the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by 1, and the third hold icon h 13 is increased. Here, the pre-reading notice hold is a hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 183 (O 3), the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 183 (O 4), one hold is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The variation display of the decorative design has been started. In FIG. 183 (v), a treasure box icon I1 with a change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display is displayed on standby. Thereafter, one hold is consumed, and the hold for the pre-reading notice becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 183 (O7), the combination of the decorative pattern of the lose is stopped and displayed, and the treasure box icon I1 is continuously displayed on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 183 (e 9), the hold of the first hold icon h 11, which is the hold for the pre-reading notice, is consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure chest icon I1 is still displayed while being placed on the carpet icon I2, and the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of variations. In FIG. 183 (O10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 183 (v. 11), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon I1 is widened, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigation character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 183 (O12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the co-panda selected by the player in the customization setting described above is changed to the navigation character YM of the head length. The chief navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected in the customization setting, but may be selected.

  In this example, a true symbol variation display such as a special symbol variation display is displayed, and a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed by the change, and the navigation character YM that is always displayed is changed by the change notice display for the third time in the pseudo series, or before the change. The change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the fluctuation, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo series, and the navigation character YM that is always displayed by the change notice display is displayed at the third pseudo series. It may change.

  FIG. 184 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and the fact that it is set to the auto button mode is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 184 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing background on the sea background. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 which is a default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. A chance button 136 is shown on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 184 (A1) performs normal white lighting. In this example, it is configured that the chance button lamp 138 is always lit even outside the chance button operation valid period, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button operation valid period. It may be.

  In FIG. 184 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation notice is started. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, a habit conversation image CI2 on which a button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is configured. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where it is possible. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to view. In this example, it is easier to hit the jackpot when the conversation notice is made than when the conversation notice is not made. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be displayed in a reduced size, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  After that, the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 184 (A6). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing of FIG. 184 (A6). The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A6) starts blinking in white.

  At the timing of FIG. 184 (A7), the suspension of special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not started to be displayed at this time. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced because the time has elapsed since the operation valid period was started. In FIG. 184 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. The remaining period meter MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1) changes to blue lighting and starts vibrating according to the appearance of the button hold icon.

  In FIG. 184 (A10), a certain period elapses after the operation effective period of the button effect in the conversation notice starts. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, and as shown in FIG. 184 (A11), the strawberry conversation image CI2 is updated, and the response display for the auto button is “Summer vacation still?” The character display is displayed. For the button hold icon, the auto button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 184 (A12) to (A13), as an operation promotion mode for the button hold icon, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A15), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed. In addition, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 184 (A15) has finished oscillating, and has returned from blue lighting to normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 184 (A14), the chance button 136 has finished oscillating and returned to white lighting. This is because the operation valid period of the button hold icon has ended. The operation effective period of the button hold icon may end, for example, when a predetermined effective period elapses, may end when the decorative symbol makes the first stop, It may be ended when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still a display mode of the button hold icon. In FIG. 184 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11 that is the button hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

  In FIG. 184 (A17), the hold decrease animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the button hold icon display mode starts moving toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. In FIG. In this figure (A19), the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0, and the change animation h0 of the blue display style is displayed in (A20). It has changed.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 184.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 185 (A22), the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the same diagram (A23), the first decorative symbol undergoes high-speed variation.

  In this example, the auto button mode is always set, but the chance button 136 is not operated until the symbol variation display changed to the button hold icon is confirmed and displayed regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set. In this case, the display mode is automatically changed after the hold reduction animation. That is, while the button hold icon display mode is the hold icon, the icon changes to the blue display mode hold icon according to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold decrease animation is started (the fluctuation icon h0). The display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

  Further, the auto button mode may be configured to end by operating the chance button 136 during the auto button mode. In that case, the automatic button mode may not be ended even if the chance button 136 is operated while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, or the chance button is not displayed even when the remaining period meter MT is displayed. When the button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may end.

  When the chance button 136 is not operated, the variation icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or may not be changed to the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode. The display icon may change to a change icon h0. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not end. Further, when there is no operation of the chance button 136, it does not change to the change icon h0 of the blue display mode, whether in the auto button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and may be changed during the auto button mode, but not changed during the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

  Furthermore, when the auto button mode is not set and the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the character display of “Summer vacation still?” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 184 (A11). The conversation image CI2 is not updated. However, it may be updated.

  Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-1), a meter display MW ′ is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-2), the button display icon 136D is displayed together with the habit conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes without the button operation. Yes.

  Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed in FIG. 185 (Aa5-3). In this case, it is necessary to operate the chance button 136 a plurality of times, and the auto button function does not have to work even in the production that requires the chance button 136 to be operated a plurality of times. If the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may work for the remaining button effect images.

  In addition, in FIG. 185 (Aa5-4) instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), a button effect image (button) is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). An image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 185 (Aa5-4), there is one button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S, but one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S are The button function may be disabled.

  In addition, in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-1) instead of FIG. 184 (A5-1), a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is performed. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2), a button striking effect is started, and a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and a striking meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. . The auto button function does not work for the button repeated striking effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt an operation. Eventually, in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-5), continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous hitting meter RHM shown in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-6) is raised, and a response display is performed. In FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-5), the chance button 136 is started to be repeatedly hit and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hitting meter RHM is also performed. However, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. It continues to vibrate and continues to light blue. In the examples so far, the chance button 136 has only to be operated once. However, in this example, since the continuous hitting is necessary, the vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting are continued. In the case of a long press, the operation of the chance button 136 becomes longer as in the case of continuous hitting, so the technical idea here can be applied. The timing in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation effective period has elapsed and the remaining time display meter MT has become zero. The vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. Thereafter, the chance button 136 immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. The auto button function may be configured to operate when operated once or more. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press automatic continuous hit function is configured to work, so that the same response display as when performing a continuous hit operation by performing a long press for a certain period is performed. However, when the auto button function does not work, the long press auto-strike function may not work.

  FIG. 186 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example illustrated in FIG. 184.

  In the example continued from FIG. 186 (A 8-2-1) instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), after the effective period of operation of the button hold icon has started, This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function is activated. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button hold icon is changed as a response effect of the button hold icon, and the habit conversation image CI2 is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice. The change of the button hold icon corresponds to the prefetching notice, and the update of the habit conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice corresponds to the prefetching notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. In addition, the change of the button variation icon in FIG. 184 (A20) corresponds to the normal notice.

  It should be noted that only the response effect for which the auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button hold icon may be displayed and the habit conversation image CI2 may not be updated. Or, conversely, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed.

  In addition, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function may be displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed. On the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function is displayed. It may be.

  Further, the above description using FIG. 186 (A A 8-2-1) to FIG. IA (A A 8-2-4) was an explanation during the auto button mode setting, but the auto button mode is not yet set. The same applies to.

  Further, instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3), even when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light with a special color (here, blue). Indicates. Note that different notification may be performed when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

  Further, in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3 ′) instead of FIG. 184 (A8-1), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in a normal color (here, blinking white). An example is shown.

  As another example, in FIG. 186 (Ab1), during the big hit game, a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is made. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (Ab2), a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed along with the display of the third round. May be disabled, or conversely, the auto button function may be enabled.

  FIG. 186 (Ba1-1) to FIG. (Ba5) are diagrams showing examples of effects related to the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 186 (Ba1-1), an effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 186 (Ba2), when a button hold icon (first hold icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work appears, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt an operation. In FIG. 186 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 that is the button hold icon is changed (see FIG. 186 (Ba1-5)).

  FIG. 186 (Ba1-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 186 (Ba1-1). The only difference is that in FIG. 186 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It changes to blue lighting and becomes a point reporting the back button.

  The remaining period meter MT representing the remaining period of the operation effective period described so far will be further described in detail. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the remaining period meter MT described so far is displayed. The remaining period meter MT has a remaining time display area MT1 whose display mode changes according to the passage of time (in this example, a reduced display is performed), and a display mode that is behind the remaining time display area and according to the passage of time. Is composed of two elapsed time display areas MT2 (in this example, increasing display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color and shape) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). The case where it is displayed by is mentioned. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a reduced manner as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. In this case, the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) can be noticed. On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased and displayed as time passes, Accordingly, the area displayed in the special display mode increases, so that the player who wants to see the special display mode in the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136). There are cases where variations in the way of enjoying can be increased and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. The remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 are displayed when the remaining period meter is first displayed (in the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is displayed first. (In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time after the remaining period display area MT1 decreases.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  Further, the navigation character YM described so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the presentation examples in which the navigation character YM described so far is displayed. First, the navigation character may be configured not to make various notices. Further, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navigation character B”) may be displayed while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navigation character A”) is being displayed. In that case, it may be configured such that the navigation character B that is displayed later may overlap the navigation character A that is displayed earlier, and conversely, the navigation character B that is displayed later is displayed first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions that do not overlap each other. For example, there is a case where the navigation character YM that is always displayed is overlapped by a navigation character that makes a notice of the change and / or a prefetch notice during one or more changes. Furthermore, a change notice display may be performed by performing an effect display that suggests that a change notice display may be displayed by a navigation character.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining the overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error and the other display of each of the luminance adjustment windows BW.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol change display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed, and the menu icon MI, so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. A volume adjustment icon VI and a brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. Also, a ball removal notification such as “please remove the ball” is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. This ball removal notification display is a little transparent, and when the ball removal notification display is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the rear display is slightly visible. Hereinafter, what is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, or displayed on the front layer may be simply expressed as “overlapping”. Note that the display of the ball removal notification may be a display in which the rear display is completely invisible. Further, a sound such as “please remove the sphere” is also output from the speaker 120.

  The display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the second decorative symbol at the upper left and the second reserved number display at the upper right, and does not overlap these displays. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the second decorative symbol or / and the second reserved number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the frame RW at the upper right of the screen that notifies the current setting state, and does not overlap the frame RW. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the frame RW or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the holding frame UI, and does not overlap the holding UI. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold frame UI, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 187 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed later than the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the luminance adjustment window BW is displayed on the layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, and the luminance adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the luminance adjustment icon BI are also hidden. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. One decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. However, the ball removal operation is not performed yet, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. The same applies to the case where the ball emptying operation is performed and the dish full tank error is once resolved, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and the display of the ball empty notification is newly displayed. The indication of the ball removal notification overlaps the variation display of the first decorative symbol. In FIG. 187 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed on the holding frame UI. The volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variation icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. Further, by operating the up / down keys of the operation key unit, a bar display for brightness adjustment can be displayed, and the bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. The following description of the volume adjustment bar display VB can be applied to the brightness adjustment bar display. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed simultaneously. Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB or the brightness adjustment bar display may be always displayed or may be displayed only for a certain period. Moreover, it may be possible to display only while operating the left / right key or the up / down key.

  Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB and the ball removal notification display are displayed at positions that do not overlap. The ball removal notification display may be displayed so as not to overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

  Further, the display of the ball removal notification is misaligned between the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, and does not overlap these icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold icon and / or the fluctuation icon, or may overlap. Also, the display of the ball removal notification is out of position with the display of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the navigation character YM or may overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α4), a super reach effect is performed and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. The ball removal notification display is also displayed here, and the ball removal notification display overlaps the left design of “decoration 7” moved to the upper left and the right design of “decoration 7” moved to the upper right. ing. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped with the display of the duel scene in the wilderness background. Note that volume adjustment is possible even during super reach, and the volume display bar display VB is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α4). The bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the wilderness background.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α5), the big hit game start screen is displayed, but the display of the ball removal notification overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, the volume can be adjusted even during the big hit game, and the volume display bar display VB is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α5). The bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps with the big hit start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification is different from the right-handed suggestion display at the upper left of the screen (display different from the right-handed warning, which corresponds to the mini-right-handed display in FIG. 137 (52) described above). There is no overlap with the right-hand suggestion display. The ball removal notification display may be displayed so as not to overlap the right-handed suggestion display or may overlap. The right-hand suggestion display may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α6) displays a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-hand. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is a big hit from the first big hit (normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) big hit state to the first big hit (single villa), but the latent probability change state. The big hit of the first time (single villa) from the first time (single villa) and the first one (single villa) from the sudden probability change state (high figure of high accuracy) Note that the latent probability variation state and / or the sudden probability variation state described above indicates only the state that has shifted from the normal state, and excludes those that have occurred in the probability variation state or the short time state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each jackpot. In this case, the right-handed instruction screen is overlapped with the display of the ball removal notification, while the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped with the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, a right-handed warning display (corresponding to the right-handed notification in FIG. 136 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display during the right-handed warning in FIG. 192 described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although not performed, a right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Further, while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, a left-handed warning display (corresponding to a liquid crystal display during left-handed leftward strike in FIG. 192 described later) is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, the right-hand suggestion display is performed while the right-hand instruction screen is displayed, but the right-hand suggestion display may not be performed while the right-hand instruction screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 187 (α7), the first round is started and a round effect is displayed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the round effect display. Note that the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the round number display at the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap the round number display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the round number display, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification has a different display position from the number of balls displayed (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap this number of balls displayed. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number-of-balls display, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 187 (α8) of the fourth round, a promotion effect is performed that suggests whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable prize opening will be open for a long time and easy to pass V in the fifth round. As a result, a success effect indicating that the promotion effect is successful is executed. In other words, it is reported that the game is a big hit game in which the probability change condition is easily established. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of the success effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α8), the display of the star “V Chance GET” is also started. The display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the display of “V Chance GET” indicated by the star, and does not overlap this display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the star sign “V Chance GET”, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 187 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the big hit game, and prompts the player to pass V in this round. The message “Aim at V” is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to reliably pass V. The indication of the ball removal notification overlaps the indication “Aim at V”.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (α10), there is a passing of the game ball (V passing) to the probability variation operating region in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the probability variation has been confirmed. The display of “V” is large. That is, the display of “V”, which is a notification that the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that V has passed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “V”. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (α10), the display of the star sign “V Chance GET” may be hidden.

  When the fifth round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 187 (α11). In the above jackpot game, the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, so the probability change state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times after the jackpot game ends. (High probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that the state is shifted to the probability change state (the effect during probability change) is performed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In the end effect of the big hit game, the right-hand suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α12) displays a prepaid card forgotten warning display (corresponding to the above-mentioned alert display in FIG. 137 (57)). The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the prepaid card forgotten warning display. In the end effect of the prepaid card forgotten warning display, the right-hand suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α13), the display of the number of big hits (BONUS × 3) is displayed immediately below the right-hand suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. In addition, a music title display portion MN is displayed on the upper right side of the screen, and icons of up and down keys of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side thereof. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  The display of the ball removal notification has a display position that is different from the display of the number of jackpot reams, and does not overlap this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the number of jackpot reams, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the song title display unit MN and does not overlap the song title display unit MN. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed on the song title display unit MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. Also, the display of the ball removal notification is out of position with the up / down key icons, and does not overlap the up / down key icons. The ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the up / down key icons, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap the second hold number display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the second reservation number display, or may overlap.

  Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB shown in FIG. 187 (α13) overlaps with a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

  Also, in FIG. 187 (α14), a big hit game start screen is displayed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (Α15), a music selection screen shown in FIG. 179 is displayed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the music release list GR.

  Moreover, in FIG. 187 (α16), the music selection is finished and the round effect is started. On the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (α16), the song name of the currently selected song is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the song title display, and does not overlap the song title display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the music title display, or may overlap.

  Further, in FIG. 187 (α17) in the fourth round, a display “Aim at V at the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen. In FIG. 187 (α18) in the fifth round, “ The indication “Aim at V” is displayed, and the indication of the ball removal notification overlaps these indications displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 187 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. Further, FIG. 187 (α18) is at the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to when the special electric power operating signal of the main control unit 300 is turned on from off. In this case, the period between FIG. 187 (α17) and FIG. 187 (α18) corresponds to the period of the interval between rounds from the end of the fourth round to the start of the fifth round. It is the period from on to off.

  In FIG. 187 (α19), “V” is displayed on the right side of the screen based on the fact that V has passed, and the ball removal notification display overlaps with this “V” display. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap the display of “V”.

  187 (α20) may be a state in which 5R is being executed and a certain period of time has elapsed since the passage of V, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit) (Period corresponding to the end).

  After that, the big hit game progresses to 15 rounds (FIG. 187 (α21) to FIG. 23 (23)), and in FIG. 187 (α24), as in FIG. ) Is displayed, and the ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In FIG. 187 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the interval between rounds.

  Note that there is a time lag between the timing at the main control unit 300 and the actual timing because the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 and received by the first sub control unit 400 to perform various controls.

  In FIG. 187, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the round interval. For example, “5R” is displayed during the inter-round interval between 5 and 6 rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number portion may be hidden.

  The same applies to the end of the 15th round, and the round interval period may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  In this example, a right-hand warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but a left-hand warning display may not be displayed, but a left-hand warning display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that alerting | reporting regarding a warning may not be performed.

  As described above, the display of the ball removal notification has been described as an example. However, the description here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the lists of FIGS. 190 and 191). It is applicable to the display of the notification regarding.

  FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball removal notification.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (β) is such that the display behind the ball removal notification display is completely invisible.

  The ball removal notification display shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) overlaps the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. Note that the display of the ball removal notification may overlap the entire brightness adjustment window BW or may overlap the entire volume adjustment icon VI. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display similar to the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 187, and the rear display is slightly visible. However, the display may be such that the rear display is completely invisible, such as the ball removal notification display shown in FIG. 188 (β).

  The ball removal notification display shown in FIG. 188 (γ2) overlaps the volume adjustment bar display VB displayed during the symbol variation display. This ball removal notification display does not overlap the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM overlaps the volume display bar display VB. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ1) may be a display such that the display on the back side is completely invisible, like the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. ,the same.). It should be noted that the display is not limited to the volume adjustment bar, but can be set by the player during the symbol variation, and the display related to the above-mentioned Daitomo (the above-described production customization screens shown in FIGS. 141 (V) and (V ′) A list of missions achieved by player operation regardless of the state of change of the symbol during setting of the song title display unit MN, brightness adjustment bar, user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. And game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits of current play, maximum number of extended games of current play, etc.), character and background set by user, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 188 (γ3-1) overlaps with the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. When the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 188 (γ3-1), a volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed. As shown in FIG. 188 (γ3-2), In the ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB, the ball removal notification display has priority and is displayed on the front side. Note that the volume adjustment bar display VB may be given priority and displayed on the front side. In any case, the volume adjustment bar display VB also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may overlap the hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 188 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 188 (γ3-2), the ball removal notification display is overlapped with the volume display bar display VB.

  In FIG. 188 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 188 (δ3-2), when the navigation character YM jumps by animation, the ball removal notification is made. Is overlaid on the display. Here, the ball removal notification display overlaps with the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap a part of the ball removal notification display. Further, the navigation character YM may not perform an animation that overlaps all or part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea can also be applied to displays related to other errors described later.

  In FIG. 188 (ε), the ball removal notification is not displayed in a frame but is displayed only in characters.

  FIG. 188 (ζ1) shows an example in which the ball removal notification display is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132 (see FIG. 108). By the peripheral image display 132G, the first decorative design and a part of each of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are overlapped.

  In FIG. 188 (ζ2), the surrounding image display 132G overlaps the same character display as the character display of “Aim at V” shown in FIG. 187 (α9) to hide the character display.

  In FIG. 188 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim at V at next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 187 (α17).

  In FIG. 188 (η1), the surrounding image display 132G overlaps the character display of “Aim at V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

  In FIG. 188 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the display of “Aim at V at next R” displayed on the right side.

  In FIG. 188 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the volume adjustment bar display VB and hides a part of the volume adjustment bar display VB. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap the entire volume adjustment bar display VB. In this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

  In FIG. 188 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the volume adjustment bar display VB and a part of “Aim at V at next R” on the right side.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

  An example of error A to error E shown in FIG. 189 will be described later. In these errors A to E, the ball removal notification may or may not be included.

  In FIG. 189 (ι1), an error A notification transmissive display is displayed, and a warning sound for error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 189 (ι1 ′), an opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

  In FIG. 189 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM in the same manner as in FIG. 188 (γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 188 (γ3-1).

  In FIG. 189 (ι 3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (transparent display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, a newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the error that has occurred first is error A. From the speaker 120, the warning sound of the latest error E is output. Note that warning sounds may be output in the order in which all displayed errors occur.

  In FIG. 189 (ι 3-2), since error E has been eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the error that occurred last is canceled, a warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

  In FIG. 189 (ι3-2 ′), the volume adjustment bar display VB overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification transparency display). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparency display of the lowest error E notification, and the character display of the error E is hidden. A plurality of types of error displays may overlap the volume adjustment bar display VB.

  In FIG. 189 (ι4-1), when errors occur in the order of error ABCDE, the error with the highest priority to be notified is displayed above, and the warning sound of the error with the highest priority is output from the speaker 120. Is done. An error with a high priority is an error with a high degree of importance (for example, a serious error for a game store), and specifically, the order of the list shown in FIG. 190. In FIG. 189 (ι4-1), error B is the highest priority error.

  In FIG. 189 (ι4-2), since error B has been eliminated, the transparency display of error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of error E, which has been the second so far, is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 189 (ι 5-1), error A occurs, an error A notification transmissive display is displayed, and a warning sound for error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, error Z occurs. The error Z is an error for stopping the game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (ι5-2), the display is a blue screen, and all the displays except the display related to the error Z are not displayed. ing. The error that stops the game here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) that the main control unit 300 does not perform various lotteries. That is, it is an error that prevents the main control unit 300 from performing various lotteries, or even if it can be performed. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, such as error Z, is not limited to an error that stops the game, but is, for example, an effect moving means error described later, an error that stops the payout operation, or the like. Also good. In addition, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 192 described later may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. May not be displayed in the error Z display mode. Further, if the main control unit 300 does not perform various lotteries, commands are not transmitted to the sub-control units 400 and 500, so that the sub-control units 400 and 500 do not perform various lotteries as a result.

  In FIG. 189 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, on the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opacity display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. Note that the error display in FIG. 189 (κ1) is a display in which the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but is a slightly transparent display so that the ball removal notification display overlaps from the front side. If displayed, the rear display may be slightly visible.

  In FIG. 189 (κ2), a ball removal notification display is added in the state shown in FIG. Here, the ball removal error (dish full tank error) is not included in the plural types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in the plural types of errors (error A to error E). Also good. Instead of the error of ball removal notification, an error with a high occurrence frequency may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

  A part of the ball removal notification error shown in FIG. 189 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. Note that all of the ball removal notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  On the other hand, the ball removal notification error shown in FIG. 189 (κ2) overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  It should be noted that the error notification display related to the control on the sub-control units 400 and 500 may be overlapped by the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting warning display is overlapped by the ball removal notification display, and conversely, the ball removal notification display is overlapped by the hitting warning display. Further, both error notification displays are displayed at positions where the error notification display related to the control on the sub-control units 400 and 500 and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. Also good.

  FIG. 189 (λ 1-1) is during symbol variation display, and a simultaneous effect that is executed on a plurality of game machines is started from the middle of symbol variation display. FIG. 189 (λ1-2) shows an example of a display screen of simultaneous effects at the normal time (no error has occurred and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 189 (λ1-2), in the normal time, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is replaced with the simultaneous effect background display. The volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed overlapping the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the reverse may be possible. As for error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 189 (λ2 ′), which will be described later, but it may be displayed overlapping the background display of simultaneous effects. However, the reverse may be possible.

  FIG. 189 (λ2) shows an example in which a simultaneous effect occurs during a super reach effect. During the super reach effect, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display OFD of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a display of simultaneous effects is displayed on those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. May be.

  FIG. 189 (λ2 ′) shows an example in which a simultaneous effect occurs during error notification display. Here, the situation that the super reach production is in progress also overlaps, but it may be the same even before the first stop of the decorative symbols, or in the normal reach state. The display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and a plurality of types of error display (transparent display of the error A notification to the error E notification) are displayed without any change before the simultaneous effect is generated. The simultaneous effect display in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error displays.

  Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may overlap the simultaneous effect display in the separate frame display section OFD. Alternatively, the simultaneous effect display in the separate frame display portion OFD may overlap the volume adjustment bar display VB.

  Further, in a gaming machine equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”). .) Overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter referred to as “first display means”), the first display according to the movement of the second display means. A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, an error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

  As described above, in the description using FIGS. 187 to 189, the word “error” and the word “warning” are used. However, it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is possible to notify that an error has occurred. It may also be a notification that an instruction has been given to eliminate an error that has occurred or has occurred. Moreover, what is described as an error may have a higher priority than that described as a warning.

<Error notification / Errors that can be detected by the main controller>
Next, errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 190 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) disconnection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, start opening 2 (electrical chew), large winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, large winning outlet exhaust excess error, large winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error, and the like.

  A magnetism (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on), and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms). It is an error that returns when the error occurs. Switch (sensor) disconnection error is caused when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on) and any of the special figure 1 or 2 start port, normal start port (gate), or attacker is not connected (the harness is disconnected or the connector is disconnected) Occurs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected devices (Special Figure 1 and 2 start port, general start port, attacker) are connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) This error is returned when it is detected. A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor detects a magnetic field (radio wave).

  The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormality errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 110) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when a normal electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 110) is not activated, and an error of the big prize opening Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in a big winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 110) is an abnormal value.

  The big prize exit excess error occurs when the number of discharges is greater than the number of entries during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area validity period, and the next main control unit timer that has generated a large prize exit excess error This error is returned when interrupt processing occurs.

  The extra prize winning error is generated when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric utility operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered is equal to the number of balls discharged. This error returns when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. In the return process for the extra prize winning prize excess error, the number of passes related to the probability variation area is set to zero.

  The impact abnormality error is a predetermined state in which the impact sensor level changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and the probability variation area (specific area) is valid. This error occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes outside the probability variation region validity period and outside the probability variation region validity period.

  Solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photo sensor has never performed an operation that changes from OFF to ON or an operation that changes from ON to OFF during the probability variation area valid period. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

  In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetism (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 190 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is disabled (not playable). However, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the priority may not be in the order of the list described in FIG. The details of the error occurrence conditions, the return conditions, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the return operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. The term “when the winning end display period ends” of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) means that the end display period of the big winning or the small winning end has ended.

<Errors that can be detected by the error notification / payout control unit>
Next, errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 191 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the dispensing control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a tray full tank error (bottom plate full tank error, dish full tank error), a payout number shortage error, a payout number switch error, an illegal payout error, and an excessive payout. Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, there are a magnetic abnormality error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field abnormality error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch disconnection error, an impact sensor error, etc. (not shown).

  Also, the error occurrence conditions, the return conditions, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the fire operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 191 (a). Note that “stop” described in the item “stop firing” shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

  FIG. 191 (b) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which is a condition for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is in the generated state, and enters the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are in the released state. It is an error.

<Error notification / other examples>
The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection errors include other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors, switch non-connection errors (errors related to connector disconnection or disconnection of devices controlled by the main control unit), shock abnormality errors, (Payout control communication error, switch level abnormality error, winning rate abnormality error, door opening error, upper plate full error), the priority may be higher, or the priority may be the same.

  Also, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a low priority error occur at the same time, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed. After the execution, an operation of a magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwrite data), and only one or more partial devices (eg, speaker 120) may be overwritten and others One or a plurality of devices may continue notification for a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of an error notification mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

  The liquid crystal display described in FIG. 192 indicates an error display by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and displays the character display described in “”. Here, the error display by the display means is configured to be displayed until the error is cleared and is not displayed when the error is cleared. However, after the error is cleared, a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) is set. ) It may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured not to be displayed after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been canceled. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be an error display by lighting a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

  The sound effect described in FIG. 192 may be a notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example), and the inside of “” is repeatedly output by sound. Here, the voice notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is canceled, but a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred even if the error has not been canceled. Then, it may be configured not to output sound, or may be configured to output sound for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is released.

  The error illumination LED described in FIG. 192 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (position visible to the player), and is configured to be lit only when an error relating to payout occurs. However, it may be configured so that some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, and sub-control (sub-control) are turned on, or may be configured not to be turned on in part or all. Good. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control (in this example, the impact warning and the hitting warning) is configured not to turn on the error illumination LED, but may be turned on. Note that the error illumination LED may be constantly lit, or may be informed that an error has occurred by turning off when an error occurs. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 192 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is lit during a period in which the payout device 152 is paying out. During the period when the payout device 152 is not paying out, the light is turned off. Further, the payout illumination LED is lit when some errors relating to payout (in this example, payout number shortage error) occur. It may be configured to light up when an error relating to payout occurs. The decoration LED described in FIG. 192 is a game board 200 or a frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102 is provided with the decoration LED. Or may be configured so as not to be provided), and performs a light emission effect according to various effects. Moreover, even if the decoration LED described in FIG. 192 performs a light emission effect when an error occurs, the decoration LED may stop and light up with an error light emission pattern. (As an example of recovery, it may be configured so that the lighting effect progresses in another layer even during an error and the lighting effect at the time of error recovery returns when returning from the error. However, it may be configured not to perform the light emitting effect until a timing at which it is easy to return (for example, at the start of a new light emitting effect), or may be configured to return from the effect data at the time when the error occurred. Good) Here, error notification by turning on various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and to turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared It may be configured to light up or blink for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the error occurred even if the error has not been canceled. Then it may be configured to turn off.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) errors related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) errors related to power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). Etc., and (4) warnings related to sub-controls (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / payout error>
First, an error related to payout will be described. In this example, “error related to payout (payout control unit 600)” includes a tray full tank error (hereinafter also referred to as a “plate full tank error”), a glass frame open error, a payout shortage error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, A payout number switch error, a main control communication error, a CR unit unconnected error, a CR unit communication error, and a door open error can be mentioned. Here, the 7-segment LED for payout error display is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 (transparent or highly transparent). It is visible through a payout substrate case 172 made of resin.

  In this example, when an underfill full tank error occurs, the number “2” is applied to the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). In addition to performing notification by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that the under-plate full error has occurred), and sound output means (In this example, a loudspeaker 120) is notified (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to the effect that an underfill full tank error has occurred). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, a case where a lower tray full tank error occurs when the lower plate 128 is full is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (dish full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. .

  When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Flashing of the frame lamp or panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sounding of a sound effect indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred) is performed by the speaker 120).

  When a door opening error occurs, the number “1” is set on the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification by the first light emitting means is performed, and notification by the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame Flashing lamps and panel lamps), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, Notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, output of a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed.

  Further, the notification of the door opening error may be a notification of the glass frame opening error, and different notification modes (for example, notification by the display means) of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error. Other notifications may be the same, or all notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the game ball payout may be interrupted, and the game ball payout may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

  Further, when a payout number shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the third light emitting means (LED for payout illumination in this example) (lighting LED for payout illumination is turned on in this example). Note that other error notification modes regarding payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Error notification / specific example of notification mode / power supply error>
Next, an error relating to the power supply will be described. Examples of the “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error relating to the power supply occurs, error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. In addition, about the error regarding a power supply, although alerting | reporting is not performed in this example, you may alert | report by a display means, a sound output means, and various LED. Further, a power supply state confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply board. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always lit after power-on, and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, when an error occurs when power is turned off after power-on It may be configured to be lit up.

<Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error related to main control>
Next, errors relating to main control and the like will be described. In this example, “error related to main control (main control unit 300)” includes magnetic (magnet) detection error, external clock error error, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, shock error Examples include errors, winning rate abnormality errors, winning prize excess winning errors, winning prize exhaust excess errors, solenoid error errors (large winning mouth error errors).

  In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp) Flashing of the panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetism (magnet) detection error has occurred), and sound output means ( In this example, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed.

  In addition, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) is provided by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example) is performed by the speaker 120. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  In addition, when an abnormal impact error has occurred, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) Notification (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that an abnormal shock error has occurred) is performed. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Further, when an error in excess of winning a prize opening occurs, notification by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp) in this example) (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that a big prize opening excess error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, a notification is made by the speaker 120 (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to indicate that an extra prize winning prize excess error has occurred).

  In addition, when a big prize outlet discharge excess error occurs, error notification is not performed. It should be noted that error notifications (light emitting means (in this example, decorative LEDs (frame lamps and panel lamps)) (in this example, decorative LEDs (frame lamps and panel lamps flashing)) and display means ( In this example, a notification (displaying characters indicating that a big prize mouth discharge excess error has occurred in this example) by a decorative symbol display device 208) and a notification (in this example, a speaker 120) by a notification (this example) Then, a sound effect sound indicating that an extra prize exit excess error has occurred may be performed.

  In addition, when a solenoid abnormality error (a special prize opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification (in this example, a decoration LED (decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used. Blinking of the frame lamp and the panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred), and sound output means (this In the example, notification by the speaker 120 (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Note that the winning rate error error includes the general winning opening (in this example, the general winning opening 226), the starting opening 2 (in this example, the second special figure starting opening 232), and the large winning opening (in this example, the variable winning opening). 234), the same error notification may be performed, but different error notifications may be performed depending on the winning opening where the error has occurred. Another error corresponding to the winning rate error is an abnormal winning error. The abnormal winning error is a target game (for example, the general winning port 226, the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, etc.) under certain conditions (for example, when the N-ball is launched, the big hit This is an error that occurs when more than a certain number of winnings are detected in the electric support (other than during normal high accuracy). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, and measure of the gaming machine may be the same as the winning rate abnormal error.

  Note that an error relating to main control or the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) ), Notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display that a door opening error has occurred), and notification by sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) (In this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed. Note that other error notification modes relating to the main control, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Error notification / specific example of notification mode / warning / error regarding sub-control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the “warning / error regarding the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)” in this example include an impact warning, a hitting warning, and an effect moving means error. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, notification (in this example, display of characters indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). No notification will be made.

  Further, when a hitting warning is generated, notification (display of characters indicating that a hitting warning has occurred in this example) by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and sound output means ( In this example, a notification is made by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a strike warning has occurred), but the notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

  The stage moving means error means various stage moving means (in this example, the stage movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest actor 224E, the first large board behavioral 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral 224Gd, and a thousand box). Production movable means provided on a game board such as an accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106 may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102). If there is an effect moving means for the frame, it may not be included, or the effect moving means may not be provided on the frame). Is an error that occurs. The abnormality mentioned here indicates a case where the initial operation is not normally performed. For example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect moving means (ON when in the initial position) is in an OFF state. It may indicate a case where it does not turn ON even if retry operation is performed one or more times, or a case where it is determined that the sensor is kept ON. Further, the initial operation may be configured by all or any one or two of the origin return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect moving means whose initial position sensor is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. The sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a sensor failure, and is an operation for performing a minimum operation for switching the sensor from ON to OFF. The full stroke operation is an operation in which the effect moving means moves to the maximum position where it can operate and returns to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect moving means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect moving means. (For example, when the initial movement is performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C and the production movable body B is not in the initial position, the origin of the production movable bodies A to C is the origin. After the return operation is performed (appears to operate for the production movable body B), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C. In addition, after the effect moving means that is not at the origin position is performed in the initial operation, the other operations movable means may be configured to perform the initial operation. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C, and the sensor of the initial position of the production movable body B is OFF, the production movable body B is initialized. The operation is then performed, and then the initial operation of the production movable body A → the production movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of production movement means are not in the initial position, the production is started from the production movement means having a higher priority. An operation (an initial operation including an origin return operation or an origin return operation) may be performed.

  Further, the effect moving means error may occur when the effect moving means causes various circuits (for example, the drive circuit 422 in FIG. 111, etc.) when the connector of the effect moving means is not correctly connected, or when the harness of the effect moving means is disconnected or the connector is damaged. ) Is an error that occurs even if it is not properly connected. It should be noted that “error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of effect moving means” and “error that occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormality when performing various operations moving means when power is turned on” are different errors. The notification may be divided into two.

  Further, the effect moving means error is an error that may be displayed during display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may be configured not to be displayed during display of the returning display.

  The error related to the sub-control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control and payout, and a different display mode. An error display may be displayed. Further, the warning related to the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning related to the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning related to the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

  Further, an error relating to sub-control (in this example, an effect movable means error) may be configured such that, in addition to the error display by the display means, a decoration LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 is lit or blinks. Alternatively, an error may be notified by the sound output means, or both of them may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button)) by the player. (For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the effect moving means error is occurring, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means is ended and the game is ended. The blinking display by the decoration LED on the panel is finished, part of the decoration LED on the frame is turned off, the blinking by the other part continues as it is, etc. By operating the operation means in this way, the error of the rendering means A It is conceivable that the notification is continued, the error notification of the effect means B is ended, a part of the effect means C is ended, and the other part is continued as it is.The effect means A to C are sound output means, display means, Decorative LED, etc.)
When displaying the liquid crystal loading display when the power is turned on, an error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or it may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display indicating a state in which data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is being read. When reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, a symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or symbol variation display) or a return indication (display in preparation) is displayed. The The display during return is a display that is displayed when the game control is returned during symbol fluctuation or big hit. If the symbol is changing, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer becomes 0), If the big hit is being made, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). It may be configured to return from the returning display to the symbol variation display at a specific timing during symbol variation (for example, the start of the super reach effect or the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols). Various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the jackpot (for example, the start or end of a specific round, the start or end of a jackpot start effect, the start or end of a jackpot end display). Here, during the return display, all or part of the error display described above may be displayed. However, all or part of the other error displays are not displayed. May be. Further, the above-described error display is not displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, but some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display. .

  The change effect display may be a change notice display.

  In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, the icon A is forcibly changed from the icon B to the icon G that can be selected by the player when the hold prefetch notice is started. There may be a case, and when the reservation pre-reading notice is started, the icon A may be changed to an icon that the player cannot select.

  Note that a plurality of operation means related to effects may be provided. Here, when the operation unit A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation unit B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operation unit A (or an image indicating the appearance of the operation unit A or “operation unit”). Character display such as “Press A.” Hereinafter, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B, or “ Character display such as “Press the operating means B”, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “operating means image B”) may be configured so that the big hit symbol form is finally displayed more easily than the case where it is displayed. The image relating to the operating means on which the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the big hit symbol pattern is fixed and displayed may not be changed. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not need to work for the operation means B, the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed, and the auto button functions for both operation means. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operation means. Further, the display of the operation means image B may be configured such that the change of the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to succeed than the case where the operation means image A is displayed. The success rate of the change of the display mode of the navigation character may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (In other words, it may be the same.) When the operation means image B is displayed, the display mode of the navigation character is changed to a display mode with a higher expectation degree of big hit than when the operation means image A is displayed. However, the display mode may be reversed, and the display mode in which the navigation character is easy to change may not be changed depending on the displayed operation means image. (In other words, the operation means image A may be displayed more frequently than the operation means image B is displayed, but may be reversed or the same.) Good. Further, there may be an effect (promotion effect or demoting effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the operation effective period of A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B, and during the operation effective period of the operation means A and outside the operation effective period of the operation means B. Alternatively, it may be during the operation effective period of the operation means A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B changes to the operation means image A. In the above description, the two operation means, that is, the operation means A and the operation means B have been described as examples, but the same applies to three or more operation means.

  The effects that can be selected by the player are special figure start gates, general figure start entrances, general winning entrances, and / or effect gates (entering into the gate, no prize ball will be played even if a sensor is detected, only the effect There may be a case where the number of points increases according to the points obtained by passing through the gate to be performed. Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the point obtained by passing becomes a specific point, for example, in the decorative design display device 208 It may be configured such that “display for performing an effect for drawing an effect to be acquired (gacha effect)” is performed, and the effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 is acquired.

  The player may be configured to be able to switch between display and non-display of the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). Switching between display and non-display of the navigation character may be possible at all times, or may be possible only during display of the navigation character, until a certain period of time elapses from the start of symbol variation (for example, one or more, or All decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, etc.) and may be configured so that navigation characters cannot be displayed or hidden during the super reach production, and the super reach production is in progress. The navigation character may be configured to be switched between display and non-display, or may be configured to be switched between display and non-display only when the symbol is stopped (when the special symbol is stopped).

  The effects using the navigation characters described using FIGS. 108 to 192 can be combined with the transparent effects described using FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, an accessory in which a navigation character YM is drawn is arranged on the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the navigation character described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 192 is used. The production may be executable. In this case, the navigation character YM may continue to appear by continuing the transmission effect across a plurality of continuous variation displays, or the decorative symbol is stopped and the number of holds is 0 (For example, in the state of a symbol demo in which a decorative symbol is displayed, or in the state of an animation demo started after the symbol demo), the transmission effect is executed, and the navigation character YM appears on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device. May be.

  Or, conversely, the navigation character YM is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the effect using the navigation character described with reference to FIGS. You may enable the transparency production demonstrated using FIGS. 14-45.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, for example, an encapsulated pachinko machine shown in FIG. 919 described later and a slot machine shown in FIG. 920.

In the above description,
Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S etc.],
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a change icon h0],
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter referred to as “variation icon”) relating to a symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display] being executed,
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow display mode, etc.]
When the variation icon of the second display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol mode than when the variation icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, High expectations for jackpots]
One type of the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 153 (1) to (12)],
The second icon is an effect that changes the change icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 153 (i-9) to (i11)]. Is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [e.g., Tono-sama display mode wearing a default color kimono, Tosama-s display mode, co-panda display mode]
The second icon has a fourth display mode [e.g., white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Icon that may be displayed in [Display Mode]
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in an icon display area in the display means, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. . Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be displayed simultaneously in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon displayed in the icon display area at the same time as the variable icon during the first period. Further, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

  “Straddling” means that a symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them. In addition, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the stop display of the symbol may be displayed, the icon that disappears in the middle, or the icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display It may be.

  In addition, “an icon that may be displayed across successive symbol variation displays” means “an icon that is always displayed and may be erased and then displayed again”. .

  The second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying a plurality of types of display.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition here, there are n or more holdings, there is a holding for which a pre-reading notice is performed, a player is customizing, a certain notice (for example, a timer notice, Conversation notice etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a preview notice of a pre-reading notice, the second icon is stocked, and the expectation of jackpot in the running symbol change display is You can list things that are expensive, winning the lottery. In other words, the certain conditions may be all of the above-mentioned enumerations. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon different from the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, shark character , "Conversation notice including character display" Navi character changes ", 変 化 image, 襖 image for wiping effect, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 151 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6-3-2)-FIG. (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 159 (K 1-3-1)-FIG. 165 (2-2-1) to FIG. 1 (2-2-2), FIG. 176 (ab1) to (ab2), FIG. 156 (6) to FIG. 8 (8), FIG. 183 ( D. 9-2-1) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display about a mode changing from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon. In this case, the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It may be an icon used only for the effect of changing the aspect.

  The second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

  The change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.

Also,
“When the display effect does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 151 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 159 ( (1-3-1) to ((1-3-3b2), FIG. 176 (A4-2), FIG. 176 (A6-2)] are also icons,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed is finally a jackpot symbol mode than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is likely to be confirmed [for example, the expectation of big hit is high]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed” means “the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, and the second icon is It may be “when there is no change to the fourth display mode”.

  Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode is finally a big hit symbol mode than the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. The confirmation display may be difficult.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice for a jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, FIG. 154 (U20-1), FIG. 163 (This b15-1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the second icon may be a warning display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed”, “the warning of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon It may be done by.

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode for a notice of jackpot in the symbol change display being executed.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a pre-reading notice [eg, FIG. 159 (K5-1) to FIG. (K13), FIG. 162 (Ka11)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the second icon may be a notice display of a prefetch notice” may be “a prefetch notice is performed by the second icon”.

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a pre-read notice display mode.

  The second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variation icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, than when both the icons are not displayed, Finally, the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, either one of the two icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than when only the icon is displayed.

  In addition, when any one of the change icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, neither icon is displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the case.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, than when both the icons are not displayed, Finally, the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In addition, the variation icon having a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon having a default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The second state of the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode are in the state of being displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big win symbol pattern than the state in which both icons are displayed.

  Or, conversely, the change icon of a display mode (for example, the second display mode) different from the default display mode and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The state of being displayed is the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the state where both the second icons are displayed.

  The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode. When the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always displayed in a definite manner. May be. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. The confirmation may be displayed without fail. Even though the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. Further, even though the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variation icon may be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. Good.

  Furthermore, the variation icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, advantageous jackpots are confirmed (for example, jackpot with probability change, long-round jackpot is confirmed), rare reach (for example, full rotation reach) is likely to appear, or other premier effects appear. It may be easy, or it may be easy to hit a revival. Or conversely, it may be difficult to hit the revival. Further, the mode of the operation means may be changed (for example, the button pops out, rotates, or dents, or the built-in lamp emits light in a rare light emission mode (for example, a rainbow light emission mode that changes to seven colors)). . Also, you can get special benefits for production customization, increase the number of productions that can be selected during the jackpot game, start a special super reach, or open a special jackpot round (for example, the second attacker opens) Round) may be started.

  In addition, the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach) may be suggested by the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, if the display mode of the variation icon is Tono-sama and the display mode of the second icon is a swordsman, it may be suggested to develop into a swordsman reach where Ton-sama and the swordsman battle. Alternatively, when the display mode of the change icon is 兜 and the display mode of the second icon is Tono-sama, it will function as a change notice (normal notice) only after the two icons are displayed. It may be configured.

  Further, the jackpot reliability (expected degree) may be different depending on the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the variation icon of the first display mode, the combination of the second icon of the fourth display mode, the variation icon of the second display mode, and the third display mode The jackpot reliability (expectation) may be different from the second icon combination.

Also,
“When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is displayed in the first display mode more than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. A gaming table, characterized in that it is easily changed from one display mode to the second display mode. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the probability that the variation icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is that the variation icon of the first display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. In the case of changing to the second display mode, the variation icon of the first display mode is changed to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

  Here, “than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed” means “the second icon of the third display mode is changed from the first display mode to the first icon. It may be “than the case where an effect of changing to the second display mode is performed”.

  In addition, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon may surely change from the first display mode to the second display mode. In addition, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variation icon does not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode, It may change.

  Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is displayed as the fifth icon more than when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. The display mode may be easily changed.

  As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variation icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variation icon is always changed. Also good.

  Furthermore, the change icon of the display mode that is easy to change may be different depending on the display mode of the second icon. In addition, a notice that is likely to appear (a pseudo-continuous notice, a timer notice, a pre-read notice) may be changed depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 157, the example shown in FIG. 158 (ki 1) to the same figure (ki 5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon may be easily changed.

  Further, depending on a combination of a plurality of the second icons (a combination of the second icons having the same display mode or a combination of the second icons having a different display mode), it is easy to hit a big hit, a hold icon or the variation icon The display mode may be easily changed, or a notice that is likely to appear (a pseudo-continuous notice, a timer notice, a pre-read notice) may be changed.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the second icon is an icon having a display mode [for example, examples shown in FIGS. 158 (1-1) to 158 (7)]. A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, for example, the third display mode may change to the fourth display mode in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  The second icon is a display mode related to the operation unit, and the display mode may change according to the operation of the operation unit. The display mode related to the operation unit may be a display mode imitating the operation unit, a display mode that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (operation promotion display mode), It may be a display mode related to the operation effective period of the operation means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operation means. There may be a combination of these display modes, or a display mode including at least one of these display modes.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a meter display, and the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode may be changed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which notification for prompting operation of the operation means is not made even during the operation valid period of the operation means, the display mode of the second icon May change.

  Moreover, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

  Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

Also,
“The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73 (b)],
The fourth display mode is a display mode [for example, the display mode of the number shown in FIG. 155 (E 4-3)] that is not selected by the player.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that cannot be selected by the player. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

Also,
The second icon is displayed when the display mode changes without any other display effects [for example, FIG. 155 (E1) to FIG. (E3-1), FIG. )-(Fig. 7)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display state of the second icon may change without any other display effect” means that “the display mode of the second icon depends on the effect of the second icon. May change. "

Also,
“The change icon is an icon that has a display mode [for example, FIG. 166 (3) to FIG. (4)] without any other display effects.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display state of the variation icon may change without any other display effect” may mean that the display mode of the change icon may change due to the effect of the change icon. It may be.

Also,
“One type of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter referred to as “hold icon”),
The hold icon includes a plurality of display modes [for example, icons A to G for holding display selection in FIG. 139 (b), FIGS. Default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.)
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S etc.],
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first icon,
The first icon is an icon related to a hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, a change icon h0, etc.]
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.]
One type of the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 153 (1) to (12)],
The second icon is an effect that changes the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 153 (i-9) to (11)). Etc.] is an icon that may be used for
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a Tono-sama wearing a default-colored kimono, a display mode of a Tokusama, or a display mode of a copanda]
The second icon has a fourth display mode [e.g., white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Icon that may be displayed in [Display Mode]
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The second icon is displayed when the display mode changes without any other display effects [for example, FIG. 155 (E1) to FIG. (E3-1), FIG. )-(Fig. 7)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon different from the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, shark character , "Conversation notice including character display" Navi character changes ", 変 化 image, 襖 image for wiping effect, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 151 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6-3-2)-FIG. (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 159 (K 1-3-1)-FIG. 165 (2-2-1) to FIG. 1 (2-2-2), FIG. 176 (ab1) to (ab2), FIG. 156 (6) to FIG. 8 (8), FIG. 183 ( D. 9-2-1) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the display effect does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 151 (3-2-1) to (3-2-2), FIG. 159 ( (1-3-1) to FIG. ((1-3-3b2, FIG. 176 (A4-2), FIG. 176 (A6-2))) are also icons,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice for a jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, FIG. 154 (U20-1), FIG. 163 (This b15-1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a pre-reading notice [for example, FIG. 162 (this a11)] in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 157, the example shown in FIG. 158 (ki 1) to the same figure (ki 5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the second icon is an icon having a display mode [for example, examples shown in FIGS. 158 (1-1) to 158 (7)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is an icon that has a display mode [for example, FIG. 166 (3) to FIG. 4 (4)] without any other display effects.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display mode of the first icon may change without any other display effects” means that “the display mode of the first icon is due to the advance notice by the first icon. May change. "

Also,
"The" icon related to the hold display "described above is a" concept icon that includes both a hold icon and a variable icon "
The said holding | maintenance icon is an icon [For example, the holding | maintenance icons h11-h14, h21-h24] showing unsettled holding,
The fluctuation icon is an icon representing a digested hold [for example, a fluctuation icon h0].
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

Also,
“The“ on-hold icon ”described above is a“ hold icon ”.
The said holding | maintenance icon is an icon [For example, the holding | maintenance icons h11-h14, h21-h24] showing unsettled holding,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the “icon relating to hold display” described above is a “fluctuation icon”, and the change icon may be an icon representing a reserved hold [for example, a change icon h0]. Good.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
"Production means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game table frame lamp 452, thousand carton box accessory 224H, etc.]
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.];
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a second production,
If the operation means is operated during a first period [for example, an operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is still not in FIG. 184 (A11)”. ~ "Response display] may be executed,
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (the time from FIG. 184 (A6) to immediately before (A11) in FIG. 184)] has elapsed since the first period has started, The first performance may be performed,
If the operation means is operated during a second period in the non-auto button mode [e.g., an operation effective period (period from FIG. 184 (A8-1) to (A14) in FIG. 184)], [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous hitting meter RHM in FIGS. 185 (Aa5-5-6) to (Aa5-5-7) rises) is executed. Sometimes
In the auto button mode, even if a second time [for example, auto button function activation time] has elapsed since the start of the second period, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. 184. Example, state of continuous hitting meter RHM in FIG. 185 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG. (Aa5-5-4)],
In the auto button mode, the second effect is executed when the operation means is operated until the second time elapses after the second period is started. And
The state of the operation means is configured to be changeable from one state [for example, white lighting] of the first state and the second state to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting],
When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIG. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. A14) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Explained.

  According to the described invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, the operating means is guided to prompt the user to operate the operating means. May be possible.

  Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even if the operation means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state where the auto button mode is not set.

  During the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), may or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted and the operation means B (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. Also good.

  In addition, during the period of the second period, presentation means other than the operation means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emission means, etc.) may be changed.

Also,
“When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 186 (Aa8-3) ]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  By doing so, since the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the non-auto button mode, the operation means is guided to prompt the user to operate the operation means. There are cases where it is possible. Also, regardless of whether the auto button mode is set or not, during the second period, notice that the second effect will not be executed unless the operation means is operated, and improve the willingness to operate the operation means. May be possible.

Also,
“At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [for example, immediately before FIG. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 186 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
“A period in which at least a part of the first period in the auto button mode overlaps at least a part of the second period [for example, FIG. 184 (A8-1) to FIG. 185 (Aa5-2-2) and 186 (Aa8-2-1)] in the period until immediately before, when the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect are displayed. At least one of the effects is executed [for example, FIG. 186 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. (Aa8-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Also good.

  If the operation means is operated from the start of the first period to the lapse of the first time, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Then, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

  For example, when two button displays are displayed during the auto button mode, one button display functions as the auto button mode, a response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and there is a case where a sense of incongruity that the user has to operate the button by himself / herself is generated and the interest of the game is improved.

Also,
"When the operation means is operated in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period overlap in the non-auto button mode, And at least one of the second effects is executed,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Also good.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that the first effect may be executed even if there is no operation before the end of the first period.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

In addition, even if there is no operation before the end of the second period, the second effect may be executed.
“The effect means means image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). The second display device 208S, etc.)
The multiple types of effects are multiple types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a response display,
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,
The first effect is a first response display of the response effects [for example, a response display of “Is summer vacation still?” In FIG. 184 (A11)]
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
"One type of the plurality of types of display is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1)] is displayed as the operation display, When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,
When the operation means is operated when the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1), etc.] is displayed as the operation display, the first operation display is performed. Two response displays may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  The operation display may be a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a] representing the appearance of the operation means, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, remaining time display meters MT, PUSH. Display, character display of “press”, display of an arrow indicating the operation direction, etc.].

Also,
“At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the symbol change display being executed [for example, a notice effect on the jackpot in the symbol change display (normal notice)”,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that both the first effect and the second effect may be, only the first effect may be, or only the second effect. May be.

Also,
“At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on a symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display being executed is finished [for example, a symbol variation to be started next. Display, the next symbol variation display to be started next, or the announcement effect on the jackpot in the next next symbol variation display (pre-reading notice)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that both the first effect and the second effect may be, only the first effect may be, or only the second effect. May be.

In addition, “the first period is a period during which the operation of the operation unit is validated (hereinafter referred to as“ first operation valid period ”),
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is enabled (hereinafter referred to as “second operation effective period”).
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  In addition, the meter display which shows the operation effective period of at least any one of said 1st operation effective period and said 2nd operation effective period [For example, display of remaining period meter MT shown to FIG. 184 (A5-1)] ] May also be displayed during the auto button mode. Note that the remaining period meter MT may be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 184 (A8-1).

  Further, the meter display may be a display by a gauge (a bar display that increases or decreases), or the display color changes with time, for example, a display that is grayed out when there is no remaining period. Good.

  Or, conversely, the meter indicating the operation effective period may be displayed only during the non-auto button mode, and may not be displayed during the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the frog conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 184 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 186 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

  Further, regardless of whether or not it is the auto button mode, when the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, conversation notice shown in FIGS. 184 to 186] or not [for example, FIG. 184 to FIG. There may be a button change icon and a button hold icon] shown in 186.

Also,
“The operation means is a means that may perform a production operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Further, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example, , Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

  The first state may be a state where the operation means is stopped.

  Further, the effect means is provided with effect movable means [for example, a vibrator] inside, and the effect operation is an operation [for example, vibration] in which the effect movable means operates. Good.

  In addition, the second state may be deformed (for example, protruded or recessed), or the effect moving means is operating [for example, advanced state, backward state, vibrating state, rotating state, cured state, etc. Etc.].

  The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is means capable of executing a driving operation such as lighting, blinking, or extinguishing,
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the first aspect,
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in a second mode,
The first embodiment and the second embodiment may be different embodiments.

  The first aspect may be an aspect in which the light is extinguished, and the second aspect may be an aspect in which the light is on.

  The first aspect may be an aspect that is lit in the first color, and the second aspect may be an aspect that is lit in the second color.

  The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

In the above description,
[Production means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, gaming board lamp 442, gaming table frame lamp 452, thousand carton box accessory 224H, etc.]
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, an effect by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 139 (b), (c) an effect by each option of holding frame selection, ( e) production by each choice of hold display selection, (f) production by each choice of background display selection, music output production of the song name shown in FIG. 177],
One type of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by a navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect]
When the third effect [e.g., change notice by the treasure box icon I1, music change notice, wipe effect, background change notice, etc.] is executed during execution of the first effect, In the case of changing to the second effect [For example, as shown in FIG. 175 (a a3-1) to FIG. (A a6-1), FIG. 178 (a 11) to FIG. (A 15-1), FIG. For example, when background A is selected by the player in FIG. 156 (1), the background change notice in FIG. (6) to FIG. ), The background of the look-ahead notice displayed in (8) to (21) in the same figure changes, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the third effect may be an effect of one type among the plurality of types of effects, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect that is not executed by the effect means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effect means (for example, sound output means) different from the effect means. .

  The first effect may be a customized effect that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is not started for a certain period of time, or an effect that can be selected even during the symbol variation display. Also good. Furthermore, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

  Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until a simultaneous effect such as an island simultaneous effect is started.

  As an example of the production means, display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, a projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means, and the like. Further, a light guide plate that receives light from the side and emits light forward, and a POV display capable of displaying a picture by an afterimage effect can be listed as examples. As the production means, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  Further, the effect means may be a device that performs a light emission effect, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed according to the light emission color, etc.) may differ depending on the mode. .

Also,
“The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). ), The second display device 208S, etc.]
The first effect is a first effect display [for example, an effect display by (b) character selection options in FIG. 139 (b) or (c) an effect display by each option of holding frame selection, (e) Effect display by each choice of hold display selection, (f) effect display by each option of background display selection, song name shown in FIG. 177 displayed on the song name display unit MN of FIG. 178]
The second effect is a second effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM, an effect display by the holding frame UI, the song title display section MN “Distance” in FIGS. ”, The song title display section MN“ Make DREAM ”in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the rendering means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
“The third effect is a third effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, an icon of MG, a giant panda, and a character of“ Conversation notice including a character display of “change”, a spear image, a spear image for a wiping effect, and the character C11 of the head length of FIG.
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, only a part of the third effect display may overlap with only a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. All of the third effect display and only a part of the first effect display may overlap, or all of the third effect display may be overlapped. There may be a case where all of the first effect displays overlap. Further, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), and conversely, the first effect display. There may be a case where at least a part of is overlapped with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

  In addition, the image display device displays a variation display of the decorative symbol, a stop display of the decorative symbol, an icon corresponding to the number of held balls (holding icon), and an icon regarding the symbol variation display being performed (variation icon). There is a case. The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the decorative symbol variation display, or closer to the first effect display than the decorative symbol stop display. May be displayed near the first effect display than the hold icon, or closer to the first effect display than the variation icon. It may be done.

Also,
“Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIG. 155 (E1) to FIG. FIG. 158 (<2-1> to <7>)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate may be provided, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. .

  In addition, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, Even if there is a case where a change is made according to the operation of the operation means, and a case where a change is made in response to the start of execution of a pre-reading notice (intrusion into the pre-reading mode (corresponding to the second effect display)) Good.

Also,
“When the third effect is executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [for example, in the case of FIG. 175 (a a4-1) to FIG. (A a6-1) ] Is changed from the first effect to the second effect without the execution of the third effect [e.g., FIG. 155 (E2) to FIG. Easier to transition to a state that is more advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit gaming state, a big hit gaming state with a large number of balls, a probability change state, an electric support state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Here, when the third performance is executed, a configuration in which the player is surely shifted to a state advantageous to the player may be employed. Or, conversely, even if the third performance is executed, there may be a case where the player does not shift to a state advantageous to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variation display is being displayed, a big hit gaming state can be mentioned. Moreover, a super reach state may be sufficient and a pseudo-continuous production state may be sufficient. On the other hand, as an advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, the probability change state or the electric support state after the big hit game is ended can be given. Further, it may be a round promotion state in which the number of rounds is apparently increased.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the first effect may be selected [for example, the case of FIGS. 142 (37) to (50)],
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the third effect is executed and the first effect is not changed to the second effect during execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 151 (3-2-1) to Fig. 3-2-2), Fig. 159 (K-1-3-1) to Fig. (K-1-3-3b2), Fig. 176 (A4-2), Fig. 176 (Aa6-2). If there is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, when the effect means is a display means, the third effect may not be changed from the first effect display to the second effect display even if the third effect is executed. In the case where the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light emitting effect may not be changed to the second light emitting effect. When the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

  Alternatively, on the contrary, when the third effect is executed during execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect.

Also,
The second production is one of the productions that can be selected by the player.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Alternatively, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

Also,
“Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120],
The effect means includes display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [for example, a music title display unit MN in FIG. 178 (A 15-1), (A 16) to (A 18), etc.],
The music display is a display related to the music output by the sound output means [for example, display of music title and lyrics]
The first performance is a first music display [for example, “Mega Giga Summer”],
The second performance is a second music display [for example, “gain DREAM”].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which the second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in the third display mode [for example, the default display mode]
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode]. And
The second icon is an icon that is displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, in the case of FIG. 175 (a a1) to FIG.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “stretching” is to sandwich a symbol stop display period (variable stop period). In addition, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the stop display of the symbol may be displayed, the icon that disappears in the middle, or the icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display It may be.

Also,
“The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a third icon,
The first icon is an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter referred to as “variation icon”) [for example, variation icon h0]
The second icon is an icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display,
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of held balls (hereinafter referred to as “hold icon”) [for example, hold icon h11],
The second icon is an icon different from the variation icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The variable icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, a variable icon display area CIS in a hold frame UI having a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. The icon may be
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [e.g., the production icon display area DIS in the holding frame UI],
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS in the hold frame UI]
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, “hold frame D”],
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, “hold frame R”],
The first aspect is different from the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon display area may be an area where an area icon is displayed, an area where a holding frame is displayed, or an area where a user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be. The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. The area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. The icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, navigation character icon) display area.

  The third effect may be an effect of switching the aspect of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping from the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

Also,
"One type of the multiple types of production is the fourth production,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, telop display trp shown in FIG. 170] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The third effect is a notice effect about a big hit in the symbol change display being executed [for example, a notice of a normal notice according to the color of a treasure box icon, a big hit confirmed (or a big hit big hit) notice by a bancho character C11] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[The third effect is an effect of a prefetch notice [for example, an effect of a prefetch notice by the color of a treasure box icon]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193 to FIG. 243, other game machines (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines and spinning game machines such as slot machines) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail. . Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 193 to 243 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 193 to 243 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 243, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 193 to 243 are prioritized.

  As the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 193 to 243 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 251 to 265. On the contrary, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 251 to 265 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 193 to 243. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. An upper plate 126 provided with a passage, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 126 by a player's operation is discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball removal button 130 to be discharged, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging a game ball stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a launching device 110 by a player's operation. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200 and the effect of changing the effect modes of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 193) by the player's operation. An operation button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that allows various settings and the like by operation of a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 195) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 194 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 193 as seen from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 196). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 195 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 195 is a so-called right-handed machine. In this game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, the strength of launching a game ball is changed by a player's operation, so that a normal start port 228 and a second special view start port (see FIG. 2), which will be described later. (Starting port) 232 and a first special figure starting port (special figure 1 starting port) 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N need only be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 195 has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end portion of 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 195 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 195 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position separated from the left side toward the left). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position distant from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the direction of contacting and separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Furthermore, there is no limitation on the number of decorative symbol display devices, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one, or may be a pachinko machine having only two. It may be a pachinko machine provided with two or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. For example, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device (Special Figure 1 display device) 212, and a second special symbol display device (Special Figure 2 display device). 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 194 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable prize winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in a non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc. The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N described above are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize part or all of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative design to the extent that the player can identify the game. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield everything. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both the shielding means and the effect moving means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Furthermore, a family crest member 224E (see FIG. 206, etc.) (not shown) is prepared as the effect moving means. The family crest member 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the operation starts, the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  The 4th symbol may be displayed on any of the 1st decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, or a dedicated 4th symbol lamp or the like may be displayed separately. Means may be provided.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of a common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as control means, or the main control part 300 can be regarded as the first control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative design. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and The detection signal from the detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, and the setting operation unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the setting operation unit 137. Is output to the basic circuit 402 based on the signal from the CPU 404 and the signal from the CPU 404. VDP 434 (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 406, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 436, and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N And connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of various movable means (eight-story character 224Fa, general character 224Fb, family crest character 224E) and various movable means 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E. Various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current position and a sensor circuit 518 for outputting detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502 are connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193, the first sub control unit 400 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the second sub control unit 500 performs various movable units 224Fa, 224Fb, The second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control for each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first sub-control unit 400 controls various movable units 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E. Control may be performed, or one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 196, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the 12V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is cut off and immediately restored, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically restored without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

  Next, using FIG. 197 (a) to (d), the special figure display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 197 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. 1, and FIG. 197 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 197 (a) shows seven types of special figures “Special figure A” to “Special figure G” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 1. In FIG. 197 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R, compared with “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state (see FIGS. 203A and 203B). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  In FIG. 197 (b), four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 197 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1 -decoration 1 -decoration 1” or Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

  FIG. 197 (d) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 197 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the special random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage at. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  When a winning is made at the general figure start opening 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value as a normal figure winning random number value. The common random number value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the normal random number value provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the general random number storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the combination of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 is either one of the winning symbol (general symbol A or universal symbol B shown in FIG. 197 (d)) and the off symbol (general symbol C shown in FIG. 197 (d)). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, and is executed using a pair of the first common winning random number value and the common random number value in the common random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the usual figure starting information, the value of the usual figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 201A and 201B described later). (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 201 (c)). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on When the special figure a and the 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. 197 (b) are on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b and the 7R big hit flag are on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special map 1 stop To set indicating that it is being displayed. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 202 (a) to (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 203 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 204 (a), the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, the interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 200A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 200B to 200E).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area in the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. In addition, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  200B to 200E illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 200B illustrates an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 200 (b), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (b), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart G” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 200C illustrates an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 200 (c), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (c), the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 200 (c), a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 200 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 200D, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 200 (e), in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage section, “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is not the stop symbol information but the prefetch result. May be stored. In the example shown in FIG. 200 (e), “timer 3” is stored as the timer number information in the storage area “hold 1”, “timer 5” is stored as the timer number information in the storage area “hold 2”, No timer number information is stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In FIG. 200 (e), the state in which the timer number information is not stored is expressed as “none”. In addition, when timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the success / failure result.

  In the above description, an example is given in which stop symbols and timer numbers are determined in advance, and stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. While being stored in the result storage unit, it may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetching result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 201 to 204 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 201A and 201B show an example of the determination table used for determining whether or not the lottery is related to the common drawing lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 201 (a) and 201 (b) is composed of items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 201 (a) is a normal / failure determination table used when the normal probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 201 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of loss is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 201 (b) is a normal / failure determination table used in the case where the normal probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 201 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the correct / failure determination table shown in FIG. 201 (a), the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 201 (c) shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 201 (c), in the case where the success / failure determination result of the common figure variable game is a win, the distribution ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the common figure A and 50% for the common figure B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the universal figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (c), after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is performed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 201 (c), after the general map B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is performed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. When the game state at the time of stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  202 (a) to (d) show an example of a determination table for determining whether or not the lottery is performed in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Yes. 202 (a) to 202 (d) are configured with items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates the special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 202 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (a), the probability of big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of small hit is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (c) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is low. As shown in FIG. 202 (c), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 202 (d), when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 202 (c), the jackpot probability is about 10 times.

  FIG. 203 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for the special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 203 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 30% for the special figure A (15R special big hit), and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG. 203 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 203 (b), in the big hit game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 204 (a) shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 204 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful is a big hit, the special symbol a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG. 204 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the jackpot game after special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after special figure b or special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 203 and FIG. 204, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1, and the open time of the attacker is long (or the R number is large). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 205 and FIG. 206. FIG. 205A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 205A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Of the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 205B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 205 (c) is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 205D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 206 (a) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 206 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  The electric long open effect process shown in FIG. 206 (a) is a normal symbol change start from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 205 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as an electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 206, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), an effect of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern” The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 206 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect. FIG. 206B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric-chu long opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 207 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body (224Fa, 224Fb, 224E), this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 207 (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 207 (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 228. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 will be described with reference to FIG. 208 (a). As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 195 as display means. Have. In the following, there will be a description overlapping with the description so far.

  Similarly to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are display regions smaller than the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and have a vertically long rectangular display region. If the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a main display device, it can be said that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N correspond to sub display devices. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, various effects and various game information can be displayed without using the liquid crystal display device. Others including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector The display device may be adopted.

  Here, the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N will be described. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the player side facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front” (front, front side, etc.), and the opposite is “back” (rear, rear side). And In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the vertical upper direction is “up” (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.) when viewed from the player, and the opposite is “lower” (lower, lower, Lower, lower end, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left when viewed from the player is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right, Right end).

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L is disposed substantially at the center of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 195, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The symbol display device 208N is arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position in the front-rear direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the same position. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and are in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and in a plane parallel to the display screen. It can move left and right. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are located at the initial position, and viewed in the front-rear direction, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A part of the decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Display control of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. In addition, you may provide the control part (for example, liquid crystal control part) which performs display control of the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, the 2nd decoration symbol display apparatus 208M, and the 3rd decoration symbol display apparatus 208N.

  In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. 208 to 228, the decorative design is displayed surrounded by a rectangular frame display. The display color in the frame display surrounding the odd decorative pattern (“decoration 1”, “decoration 3”, “decoration 5”, “decoration 7”, “decoration 9”) is red. 2 ”,“ decoration 4 ”,“ decoration 6 ”,“ decoration 8 ”,“ decoration 10 ”), the display color in the frame display is blue. The pachinko machine 100 displays the inside of the frame surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in red or blue, thereby determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree). It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice. In the example shown in FIG. 208A, the frame display surrounding “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red (indicated by lattice hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228). The display of the pre-reading notice displayed in red in the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is the display of the pre-reading notice of the red chance. The jackpot reliability in the pre-reading notice of the chance is set higher in red than in blue. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display the decorative symbol itself in red or blue to execute a pre-reading notice for the chance.

  A variation icon display area e is provided in the lower center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The variation icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the columnar stage (pedestal image) displayed in the variation icon display area e. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area e when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variation icon, it is possible to execute the advance notice of the variation with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure variation game is successful. In the example shown in FIG. 208A, the variation icon e1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228) circular shape. The white circular mode is a default mode and is the mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of modes.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area f is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area e. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area f, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can notify the special figure 1 on-hold icon display area f of the number of special icons 1 on-line game according to the number of the special icons on the special figure 1 and also put on hold according to the mode of each on-hold icon. It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. The special figure 1 hold icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from right to left. An elliptical stage (pedestal image) indicating the display position of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed at the lower part of each of the first to fourth areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. In the first area, the hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas, the hold icons corresponding to the second to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is two, and the holding icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area f, respectively. . The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed overlapping the upper end portion of the pedestal image. The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a white circular manner. The white circular mode is a default mode and is the mode with the lowest jackpot reliability among the multiple modes. Note that the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold whose special figure 1 prefetch result is “undecided” may be displayed in a default mode. In this case, the reliability of the default mode is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (a), the hold icon is displayed in a smaller display size than the variation icon. This may facilitate the identification of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (a), a special figure 2 hold icon display area g is provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area e. In the special figure 2 holding icon display area g, the number of holding icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 holding icon display area g, it is possible to notify the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game by the number of the holding icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 related to the holding by the mode of each holding icon. It is possible to make a pre-reading notice with a predetermined jackpot reliability as to whether or not a variable game is successful. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), since the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon in the special figure 2 is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g. When the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, a horizontally long rectangular display area h is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 hold icon display area g as shown in FIG. It is done. In the display area h, it is possible to display a tutorial display and a notice display such as a description of the way of playing, description of effects, description of characters, etc. as a character image.

  A fifth symbol is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. During execution of special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, the symbols in the middle left and right of the fifth symbol are “1” → “2” → “3” → ... → “9” → “0” → “ Fluctuation display of the fifth symbol is performed in the order of “1” →... In each figure, the variable display of the fifth symbol is represented by a downward arrow. In the fifth symbol, three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to notify the determination result of the special figure variation game.

  A horizontally-long rectangular frame image is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and information about the current stage is displayed in the frame image. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the production stage is the castle town stage, and therefore a character string image of “castle town” is displayed in the frame image.

  In the upper left part of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a number indicating the number of reserved special figures is displayed. The numbers displayed on the left side indicate the number of holds in FIG. 1, and the numbers displayed on the right side indicate the number of holds in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 208 (a), the number of reserved figures in special figure 1 is 2 and the number of reserved figures in special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, in the upper left part of the display area of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, "And" 0 "are displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has an eight generations 224Fa and a general combination 224Fb. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa is arranged at the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the general character 224Fb is arranged at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right end of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa is It is arranged adjacent to the left end of the general character 224Fb. The positions in the front-rear direction of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are the same, and are the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The Yatsushiro character 224Fa has a horizontally long rectangular plate on which a part of the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “Yatsushiro”) is written, and the general character 224Fb It has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate on which a part of the model name or the like (in this example, “general”) is written. Further, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb have full-color LEDs and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the eight generations 224Fa and the general 224Fb emit light in white (indicated by dot hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228).

  The Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can be moved in the vertical direction in a plane in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and parallel to the display screen. is there. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb are located at the initial positions.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment has a family crest member 224E. The family crest member 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest member 224E is arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. The position in the front-rear direction of the family crest member 224E is the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The family crest character 224E has a circular flat plate on which a family crest pattern is written. The family crest member 224E has a full color LED and can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the family crest character 224E emits light in blue (indicated by right-upward hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228).

  The family crest character 224E is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move in the vertical direction in a plane in front of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and parallel to the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 208 (a), the family crest actor 224E is located at the initial position.

  Drive control (movement control) of the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the shogun character 224Fb, and the family crest character 224E is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 196 performs the light emission control of the LEDs provided in the eight generations 224Fa, the generals 224Fb, and the family crest 224E.

In FIG. 208 (a) and the subsequent drawings, the configuration necessary for the description of the embodiment is extracted from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the region on the paper surface separated by the one-dot chain line. As shown in FIG. 208 (a) and subsequent figures, the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left part of the figure, the chance button 136 in the lower left part of the figure, and the operation button 710 such as the second chance button, Is schematically illustrated, and the fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are schematically illustrated in the upper right part of the drawing. A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The operation button 710 is an operation means that can be operated by a player disposed on the front side of the front frame door 106. The fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are lamps for informing the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. The fourth symbol lamp i1 has a square external shape, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special symbol 1. The fourth symbol lamp i2 has a circular appearance, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special symbol 2. The fourth symbol lamp i1 blinks white when the special figure 1 variable game is executed, and turns off when the special figure 1 variable game is not executed. Similarly, the fourth symbol lamp i2 blinks during lighting of the special figure 2 variable game and turns off when the special figure 2 variable game is not executed. The fourth symbol may be displayed on a display device such as the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.
Example 1
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 208A to 208R are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 208 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” in the case of detachment is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. "Is stopped (confirmed display, final stop display). Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-7-1” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The frame display surrounding each decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red, and a pre-reading notice for the red chance is executed. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice of the chance, the character string image “Stop the same color ...” is displayed in the display area h, and the pre-reading advance notice of the chance is being executed. Has been suggested. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice for the chance is the hold 2 in FIG.

  At the time shown in FIG. 208 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, the hold icon is not displayed, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icons f1 and f2 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the production stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. A character string image of “Castle Town” is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current stage name is informed.

  FIG. 208 (b) shows a state where the change icon e1 has been deleted. In this embodiment, the variation icon is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol. The variation icon e1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol, may be deleted simultaneously with the stop of the variation of the fourth symbol and the fifth symbol, or the variation display of the next decorative symbol may be performed. It may be erased simultaneously with the start.

  In FIG. 208 (c), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started. Shows the state. In FIG. 208 (c), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display devices 208La to 208c display a variable display at a speed that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbols. It represents the state being done. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Each arrow in the figure represents the locus of the fluctuation icon e2 and the locus of the hold icon f2. At the time shown in FIG. 208 (c), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area h. In this example, a character string image of “chance by hold change” is displayed in the display area h.

  FIG. 208 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In FIG. 208 (d), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L display a variable display at such a speed that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols. Represents the state. The decorative symbol variation display is initially displayed as a low-speed variation display, and is displayed as a high-speed variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation.

  FIG. 208 (e) shows a state in which the change notice display has started to be displayed. The change notice display j in this embodiment is a picture of a treasure box, and the display is started in such a manner that it gradually moves to the lower right from the left end of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a notice for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the change notice display j may be a prefetch notice display. Note that the change notice display j may be a notice for notifying that the mode of the variation icon changes. The change notice display j in this case may be a notice of change notice.

  FIG. 208 (f) shows a state in which the movement of the change notice display j is stopped and the display of the change notice display j is completed. A change notice display j is displayed at the center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the change notice display j represents the locus of the change notice display j.

  FIG. 208 (g) shows a state in which a treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change candidate display (change candidate icon) k appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the change notice icon k may be a prefetch notice display. Note that the change notice icon k may be a display for notifying that the mode of the change icon changes. The change notice display j in this case may be a notice of change notice.

  FIG. 208 (h) shows a state where a moving animation in which the change notice icon k moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. The target of the pre-reading notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, and the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 208 (h), the change notice icon k is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the change notice icon k is a display of the change notice, an animation in which the change notice icon k moves toward the change icon is displayed.

  FIG. 208 (i) shows a state where the change notice icon k has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f2. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 208 (j) shows a state in which the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f2, the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f2 changes is displayed. When the change notice icon k overlaps the entire hold icon f2, the change notice icon k may be deleted and the effect image m may be displayed instead. Further, when the change notice icon k overlaps at least a part of the hold icon f2, the effect image m may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the change notice icon k and the hold icon f2. Further, the effect image m may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 208 (k) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same blue as the change notice icon k. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays. When the hold change display is performed by the blue change candidate display, the hold icon may be changed to a green circle or a red circle instead of the blue circle. In addition, when the hold change display is performed by the green change candidate display, the mode of the hold icon may be changed to any one of a green circle, a red circle, and a gold circle. In addition, when the hold change display is performed by the blue change candidate display, the hold icon may not change to a golden circle. Further, when a red hold icon is displayed, a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display may be displayed. In this case, in addition to the red hold icon, a white circular hold icon may be displayed, or a white circular hold icon may not be displayed. In addition, when a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display is displayed, a mode (for example, a red circle) having a higher hit reliability than the mode of the hold icon corresponding to the change candidate complementary display is displayed. The hold icon does not change. In addition, when a green change candidate display or a blue change candidate display is displayed, if a hold change display in which a hold icon having a high hit reliability such as a red circle or a gold circle is changed is displayed, the hold change display is performed. The icon may change to a premier aspect (for example, a rainbow circle).

  FIG. 208 (l) shows a state where the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more.

  FIG. 208 (m) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 7” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 208 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 7” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of “Decoration 7” indicate that “Decoration 7” slightly fluctuates up and down. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 208 (o) shows a state immediately before the variable display speed in the right symbol display area 208c is further reduced and “decoration 6” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 208 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display is further slowed, and the state immediately before the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 208 (q) shows a state in which the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 208 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can change the mode of the hold icon to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to suggest the mode after the change of the hold icon depending on the mode of the change candidate display. (Example 2)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (p) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 209 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 209 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, so the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the production stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. A character string image of “Castle Town” is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current stage name is informed. In addition, you may alert | report that the possibility of the aspect of a holding | maintenance icon changing is high in the display area which displays production | presentation stage name.

  FIG. 209 (b) shows a state in which the change notice display j is started to be displayed. The change notice display j in this embodiment is a picture of a treasure box, and the display is started in such a manner that it gradually moves to the lower right from the left end of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a notice for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  FIG. 209 (c) shows a state where the movement of the change notice display j is stopped and the start of the display of the change notice display j is completed. A change notice display j is displayed at the lower center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the change notice display j represents the locus of the change notice display j.

  FIG. 209 (d) shows a state in which a treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change notice icon k appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes. The change notice display j is a display for causing the change notice icon k to appear, and may be deleted after the change notice icon k appears. While the change notice display j is not displayed, a new change candidate display is not displayed.

  FIG. 209 (e) shows a state in which a character display n of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune n”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 209 (f) shows a state in which a display with a change item display (hereinafter referred to as “change item”) o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 209 (g) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 209 (g). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 209 (h) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 209 (i) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire change notice icon k. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k changes is displayed.

  FIG. 209 (j) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. When the effect image m is erased, the change display ends, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k changes from a blue circle to a green circle (indicated by cross hatching in FIGS. 208 to 228). Yes. A plurality of types of change candidate displays are provided, one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a blue circular change candidate display, and one of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is green. This is a circular change candidate display. When the green circle change candidate display is displayed rather than when the blue circle change candidate display is displayed, the hold icon is set to be more easily changed to a mode with a high hit reliability. In this way, there is a case in which the blue circle change candidate display changes to the green circle change candidate display.

  FIG. 209 (k) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is deleted. When Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k is no longer performed. If Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k may be displayed again.

  FIG. 209 (l) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 209 (l), the change notice icon k is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 209 (m) shows a state where the change notice icon k has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 209 (n) shows a state in which the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 209 (o) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the mode of the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green circle as the change notice icon k. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 209 (p) shows a state in which the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

  The display means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and is blue. The circular change candidate display may change to a green circular change candidate display. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the change candidate display may change, so that the change candidate display may be enjoyed until the change candidate display is deleted.

  The mode of the hold icon is set so that the big hit reliability increases in the order of white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, and iridescent circle. Note that the jackpot reliability of the change candidate display may be set similarly. In addition, when the mode changes, the hold icon always changes to a mode with higher jackpot reliability than the mode before the change.

  The types of change candidate displays are set such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, and rainbow circle. The higher the degree of expectation here, the easier it is to set the status of the hold icon or the change icon that is the change display target. In addition, in the case of the mode of the hold icon or the variation icon, it may be set to change to the mode corresponding to the change candidate display without fail, and may change to a mode different from the mode corresponding to the change candidate display. Also good. When the change candidate display changes, the change candidate display mode always changes to a higher expectation than before the change.

In addition, when the green circle change candidate display is displayed, the hold icon in the white circle mode is configured to be more easily changed to the green circle mode than in the blue circle mode. The big hit reliability of the hold icon is set so as to increase in the order of a white circle, a blue circle, and a green circle. For this reason, the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the blue circular form is digested rather than the variation display of the decorative symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the white circular form is digested. The decorative symbol display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the blue circle is digested and started. The decorative display of the decorative symbol that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the green circular form is digested is easier to be finalized and displayed than the decorative display of the decorative pattern. It is configured as follows.
(Example 3)
Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 (a) to 210 (m) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 210 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 210 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. In FIG. 210 (a), a change notice display j is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice display j in this example is a notice for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the production stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. A character string image of “Castle Town” is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current stage name is informed.

  FIG. 210 (b) shows a state in which a treasure box change notice display j is opened and an animation in which a blue circular change notice icon k1 appears from the treasure box is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k1 in this example is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes.

  FIG. 210 (c) shows a state in which an animation in which a green circular change notice icon k2 appears from the change notice display j is displayed. In the figure, an arrow pointing to the upper right shown below the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k2 in this example is a display for notifying that the status of the hold icon changes. As in this example, the change notice icon k1 may be displayed and then the change notice icon k2 may be displayed, or the change notice icons k1 and k2 may be displayed simultaneously. When a plurality of change candidate displays are started to be displayed, the display may always be started in order from a change candidate display with a low expectation.

  FIG. 210 (d) shows a state in which the change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 are different types of change candidate displays. In this way, a plurality of different types of change candidate displays may be displayed. A plurality of blue circular change candidate displays may be displayed, or a plurality of green circular change candidate displays may be displayed. A plurality of change candidate displays of the same type may be displayed.

  FIG. 210 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the hold icon f1. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1. In the state shown in FIG. 210 (e), the change notice icon k1 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A part of k1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 210 (f) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 approaches the hold icon f1. The change notice icon k1 in this example passes the left side of the hold icon f1 without colliding with the hold icon f1.

  FIG. 210 (g) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 disappears outside the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The change notice icon k1 of this example passes through the left side of the hold icon f1 and does not collide with the hold icon f1, and is erased. As described above, the change notice icon k1 of this example is not displayed before the start of the hold change display but is displayed as a display effect display of the hold change display.

  FIG. 210 (h) shows a state where the change notice icon k1 has been deleted. The change notice icon k1 is completely erased so as to disappear from the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 210 (i) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, a right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. In the state at the time point shown in FIG. 210 (i), the change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 210 (j) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 210 (k) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 210 (l) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 210 (m) shows a state where the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

The display means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a plurality of change candidate displays. In this embodiment, the change notice icon k1 is not displayed before the start of the hold change display, but is displayed as a gasse effect display of the hold change display, and the change notice icon k2 is displayed before the start of the hold change display. The icon f1 changes to a mode corresponding to the change notice icon k2. Thus, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays. Note that the state in which only one change notice icon k1 is displayed as the change candidate display shown in FIG. 210 (b) is the first display, and the change candidate display shown in FIG. 210 (d) is the change notice icon k1. , K2 may be displayed as the second display. Further, the change notice icon k1 may be the first change candidate display, and the change notice icon k2 may be the second change candidate display.
Example 4
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 (a) to (o). Each of FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 211 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. At the time shown in FIG. 211 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the present embodiment, a castle town stage is set as the production stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N display a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage. A character string image of “Castle Town” is displayed at the lower part of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the current stage name is informed.

  FIG. 211 (b) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 211 (c) shows a state in which the display with the change item o is displayed by Yoshimune n on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 211 (d) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icons k1 and k2, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 211 (d). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 211 (e) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the state shown in FIG. 211 (e), a part of the change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k2. In this example, the change item o is an effect display that changes the type of the change notice icon k1, and is not an effect display that changes the type of the change notice icon k2, so the change item o passes through the change notice icon k2. To do. When the change item o is an effect display that changes the type of the change notice icon k2, the change display of the change notice icon k2 may be started immediately after the time shown in FIG. 211 (e). The change item o passes through the change notice icon k2. By displaying an animation in which the change item o passes through the change notice icon k2, it may not be known until the change display is started which of the change notice icons k1 and k2 changes.

  FIG. 211 (f) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k <b> 1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> M. The change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k1. As in this example, when the change item o passes the change notice icon k2 on the right side, the change notice icon k1 on the left side is likely to change. Even when the change item o is displayed, neither the change notice icon k1 nor k2 may change.

  FIG. 211 (g) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire change notice icon k1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 211 (h) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and since the change display is performed, the type of the change notice icon k1 is changed from the blue circle to the red circle. One of the multiple types of change candidate displays is a red circle change candidate display.

  FIG. 211 (i) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is deleted. When the Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is not performed any more. If Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is displayed again.

  FIG. 211 (j) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. In the state shown in FIG. 211 (j), the change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 211 (k) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. FIG. 211 (l) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 overlaps a part of the hold icon.

  FIG. 211 (m) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 211 (n) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

FIG. 211 (o) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 and the change notice display j are deleted. When the change notice icon k1 is deleted, the hold change display of the hold icon using the change notice icon k1 and the change display of the change icon are not displayed. Further, when the change notice display j is deleted, the change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 or the change icon e1 is not performed any more. In addition, when the change notice icon k1 and the change notice display j are continuously displayed, there is a possibility that a change display for the hold icon or the change icon using the change notice icon k1 may be performed. Further, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display changes from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low jackpot expectation degree (big hit reliability) among the plurality of change candidate displays. Here, the jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the held icon after the change. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g), when the blue change candidate display and the green change candidate display are displayed, the display changes from the blue change candidate display. The green change display may also change after the blue change candidate display changes.
(Example 5)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (e). 212 (a) to 212 (e) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 212, the crest character 224E and the operation buttons 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 212 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. At the time shown in FIG. 212 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Also, Yoshimune n with the change item o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 212 (b) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icons k1 and k2, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 212 (b). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 212 (c) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, even when the change item o is displayed, the change display for changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 is not performed, and the change item o is directed downward in the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change notice icons k1 and k2 do not overlap.

  FIG. 212 (d) shows a state in which the change item o has been deleted. The change item o is deleted in such a manner as to move downward in the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Disappointed Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which suggests that a failure effect was performed in which the effect of changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 was not executed.

  FIG. 212 (e) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When the Yoshimune n is deleted, the effect display for changing the change notice icons k1 and k2 by the change item o is not performed any more.

In this embodiment, a failure effect is performed in which the change notice icons k1 and k2 do not change even when the change item o is displayed. The failure effect of this example may be executed when only one change candidate display is displayed, or may be executed when three or more different types of change candidate displays are displayed. However, it may be executed when two or more change candidate displays of the same type are displayed.
(Example 6)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 (f) to (i). Each of FIGS. 212 (f) to 212 (i) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 212, the crest character 224E and the operation buttons 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 212 (f) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 212 (f), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Before the state shown in FIG. 212 (f), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change icon o is displayed, and the change icon o is a change of a part of the change item o. A part of the notice icon k2 is displayed overlapping. In the drawing, a left-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change icon o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 212 (g) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o stops between the change notice icons k1 and k2 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Targets of change display by the change item o in this example are change notice icons k1 and k2.

  FIG. 212 (h) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image M is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icons k1 and k2. When the change item o stops between the change notice icons k1 and k2, the change item o is deleted and the effect image M is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image M, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed. The effect image M may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icons k1 and k2.

  FIG. 212 (i) shows a state where the effect image M has been deleted. When the effect image M is erased, the change display ends, and the change display is performed, whereby the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from the blue circle to the red circle, and the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from the green circle to the gold color ( 208 to 228 are changed into a circle (indicated by vertical hatching).

In the present embodiment, two change notice icons k1 and k2 are changed in one change display. Even if the effect image M is displayed overlapping both of the change notice icons k1 and k2 as in this example, only the change candidate display of one of the change notice icons k1 and k2 is changed. May be.
(Example 7)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 (j) to 212 (o) and FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (c), an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 212 (j) to 213 (c) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each of FIGS. 212 and 213, the crest character 224E and the operation button 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 212 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 212 (f), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  Before the state shown in FIG. 212 (j) is reached, display of the blue circular change notice icon k1 and the green circular change notice icon k2 is started to be displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the state shown in (j), a moving animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, since the pre-reading notice target is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, a right-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1. The change notice icon k1 is displayed across two display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a part of the change notice icon k1 is a part of the change notice icon k2. Are displayed overlapping.

  FIG. 212 (k) shows a state where the change notice icon k1 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 212 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k1 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 212 (m) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold for the prefetch notice changes to the same blue color as the change notice icon k1. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 212 (n) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold to be prefetched. In the figure, a right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 212 (o) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 213 (a) shows the state continuously from FIG. 212 (o). In FIG. 213 (a), the change notice icon k2 is deleted, and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 213 (b) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from the blue circle to the green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 213 (c) shows a state where the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, the hold change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, the mode of the hold icon f1 changes twice. Thus, the mode of one hold icon may change a plurality of times.
(Example 8)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of FIGS. 213 (d) to 213 (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 213, the crest character 224E and the operation button 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 213 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 213 (d), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 213 (e) shows a state in which the display of the character display (hereinafter referred to as “轟”) p is started at the center of the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.轟 p is displayed so as to overlap almost the entire change notice display j. Even during the display of 難 p, the change notice display j is difficult to visually recognize but continues to be displayed. In this example, an animation in which the change candidate display is crushed using 轟 p is displayed.

  FIG. 213 (f) shows a state in which an animation in which the change candidate display is crushed is started.轟 p takes a pose when crushing the change candidate display.

  FIG. 213 (g) shows a state in which a cracked animation is displayed on the change notice icon k1. In this example, the blue change notice icon k2 having a lower expectation than the green change notice icon k2 is deleted. Thus, when one change candidate display among a plurality of change candidate displays is deleted, the change candidate display with a low expectation is easily deleted. When one change candidate display among a plurality of change candidate displays is deleted, a change candidate display with a low expectation may be necessarily deleted. In addition, when the change candidate display with a low expectation is deleted, the expectation of the success of the pending change display by the remaining high-expected weather change candidate display may be high.

  FIG. 213 (h) shows a state in which an animation in which the change notice icon k1 is crushed apart is displayed. In this example, the change notice icon k1 is erased in a crushed manner.

  FIG. 213 (i) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted. Note that the state in which only one change notice icon k1 is displayed as the change candidate display shown in FIG. 213 (i) is the second display, and the change candidate displays shown in FIGS. 213 (d) to (h) are shown. The case where two change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed may be the first display.

  FIG. 213 (j) shows a state in which 轟 p is erased. When 轟 p is deleted, no animation for deleting the change notice icon k2 is performed. When な お p continues to be displayed without being deleted, an animation in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted may be displayed in the same manner as the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 213 (k) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, since the change notice icon k2 is displayed for the effect display to change the aspect of the change icon, an animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the change icon e1 is displayed. In the figure, a right-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 213 (l) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 213 (m) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change icon e1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the change icon e1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the variation icon e1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 213 (n) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, whereby the aspect of the variation icon e1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the change icon e1 changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the variation icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 213 (o) shows a state in which the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is erased, the change display by the change candidate display for the change icon e1 is not performed any more.

In this embodiment, when a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays is deleted. A plurality of change candidate displays may be deleted. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 213 (e) to (i) may be performed after the effects shown in FIGS. 212 (a) to (j) are performed, and FIGS. 213 (e) to (i) are performed. The change display in which the type of the change candidate display changes may be performed after the presentation effect is performed. In this embodiment, the change icon change display is performed in FIGS. 213 (j) to 213 (n). However, the hold icon change display may be performed instead of the change icon change display. Good.
Example 9
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 214A to 214O are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 214, the crest character 224E and the operation buttons 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 214 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. In the state shown in FIG. 214 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 214 (b) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k2 starts moving toward the hold icon f1. In the drawing, an arrow pointing upward on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 214 (c) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k1 moves is started. In this example, the change notice icon k1 starts moving toward the change icon e1. In the figure, an arrow pointing upward on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 214 (d) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 214 (e) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m1 is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m1 is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m1, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 214 (e) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the change notice icon k1 represents the locus of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 214 (f) shows a state in which the change notice icon k1 is deleted and the effect image m2 is displayed overlapping the entire change icon e1. When the change notice icon k1 is overlapped with a part of the change icon e1, the change notice icon k1 is deleted and an effect image m2 is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m2, a change display in which the mode of the variation icon e1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 214 (g) shows a state where the effect image m1 has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m1 is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change notice icon k2. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 214 (h) shows a state where the effect image m2 has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m2 is the end of the change icon change display, and the change icon e1 changes the form of the change icon e1 from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the change icon e1 changes to the same blue color as the change notice icon k1. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the variation icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

  FIG. 214 (i) shows a state in which an animation in which a red circular change notice icon k3 appears from the change notice display j is displayed. In the figure, the upward arrow shown below the change notice icon k3 represents the locus of the change notice icon k3. In the present embodiment, the change notice display j1 does not disappear after the change effect of the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1 shown in FIGS. 214 (e) to 214 (g) ends, and a change candidate display appears from the change notice display j1. The animation to be displayed is displayed.

  FIG. 214 (j) shows a state where the animation in which the change notice icon k3 appears is finished. The stationary start of the change notice icon k3 is the end of the animation.

  FIG. 214 (k) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k3 moves is started. The change notice icons k and 3 are displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k3 moves between the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. This makes it difficult to understand whether the change target is the hold icon f1 or the change icon e1, or both the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1, and allows the player to focus on the change target icon. May be possible.

  FIG. 214 (l) shows a state in which the change notice icon k3 has moved between the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. The change notice icon k3 overlaps a part of the hold icon f1 and a part of the change icon e1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k represents the locus of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 214 (m) shows a state in which the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are displayed. The effect image m1 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon f1, the effect image m2 is displayed overlapping with the change notice icon k3, and the effect image m3 is displayed overlapping with the change icon e1. Due to the effect images m1, m2, and m3, the hold icon f1, the change icon e1, and the change notice icon k3 become invisible. When the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are displayed, the change notice icon k3 may be deleted.

  FIG. 214 (n) shows a state where the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are deleted. Note that the change notice icon k3 is deleted before the effect images m1, m2, and m3 are deleted. The deletion of the effect images m1, m2, and m3 is the end of the change display. Since the change display is performed, in this example, the aspect of the change icon e1 is changed from the blue circle to the red circle, and the hold icon f1. The aspect of this remains a green circle. In this example, the change notice icon k3 is a display used for change display that changes the mode of the change icon e1, and the change icon e1 changes to the same red color as the change notice icon k3. The change notice icon k3 may be a display used for a hold change display that changes the mode of the hold icon f1, and the change notice icon k3 is used for a change display that changes the mode of the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1. May be.

  FIG. 214 (o) shows a state in which the change notice display j is deleted. When the change notice display j is deleted, change display by the change candidate display for the hold icon f1 and the change icon e1 is not performed any more.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), the moving animation of the change notice icon k1 is started before the result of the change notice by the change notice icon k2 is displayed. The change display by the change notice icon k2 is for the hold icon f1, and the change display by the change notice icon k1 is for the change icon e1. When a plurality of hold icons are displayed, the change display by the change notice icon k1 may be a hold icon other than the hold icon f1. As shown in FIG. 214 (i), after the change notice icons k1 and k2 are erased, the change notice display is not erased and a new change notice icon k3 appears. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may make it difficult to understand which icon is targeted for the change display by the change candidate display, and may allow the player to pay attention to the target and result of the change display.
(Example 10)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (n) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In each drawing of FIG. 215, the crest character 224E and the operation buttons 710 are not shown.

  FIG. 215 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 215 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area g, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k1 and a green circular change notice icon k2 are displayed side by side on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 215 (b) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 7” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 215 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of “Decoration 7” indicate that “Decoration 7” slightly fluctuates up and down. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 215 (d) shows a state immediately before the variable display speed in the right symbol display area 208c is further reduced and “decoration 6” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 215 (e) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. Further, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the speed of the variable display is further slowed, and the state immediately before the “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 215 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the middle symbol display area 208 b. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. As a result, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 215 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the change notice display j and the change notice icons k1 and k2 are displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 208M during the stop display of the decorative symbols (during the symbol stop display).

  FIG. 215 (h) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is started. The variation icon e1 is deleted in such a manner that it moves downward and moves out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the drawing, a downward arrow illustrated above the variation icon e1 represents the locus of the variation icon e1. The variation icon erasing animation in this example is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped. The variation icon erasing animation may be started during the variation display of the decorative symbol and may end during the variation display of the decoration symbol, or after the variation display of the decoration symbol is terminated, You may finish in.

  FIG. 215 (i) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is displayed. The fluctuation icon e1 moves downward and is gradually erased.

  FIG. 215 (j) shows a state in which the variable icon deletion animation is finished. The completion of the deletion of the fluctuation icon e1 is the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation.

  In FIG. 215 (k), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative symbol fluctuation display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol fluctuation display are started. Shows the state. The decorative symbol variation display is initially displayed as a low-speed variation display, and is displayed as a high-speed variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation. The number of holds in the special figure 1 is 0.

  FIG. 215 (l) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is started. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and starts moving toward the change icon display area e. In the figure, an arrow pointing to the upper right illustrated in the lower left of the variation icon e2 represents the locus of the variation icon e2.

  FIG. 215 (m) shows a state where the hold icon reduction animation is completed. The completion of the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 to the fluctuation icon display area e is the end of the hold icon reduction animation.

  FIG. 215 (n) shows a state where the display size of the variation icon e2 is enlarged. The display size of the variation icon is enlarged after the movement to the variation icon display area e is completed. Note that the display size of the fluctuation icon may be enlarged during movement display (while the hold icon reduction animation is displayed).

In this embodiment, change notice icons k1 and k2 and a change notice display are displayed over a plurality of special figure variable games. The change notice icons k1, k2 and the change notice display are displayed over a plurality of special figure change games than when the change notice icons k1, k2 and the change notice display are displayed during one special figure change game. In this case, it is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon and the variation icon to be changed.
(Example 11)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 216 (a), (c) to (e), and (g) to (j) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 216 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 216 (b) shows a state immediately before the game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230. In this example, during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is increased by one.

  FIG. 216 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230. A numerical image “2” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is informed that the number of holdings in FIG. Moreover, the hold icon increase animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in such a manner that it gradually moves from below toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The start of displaying “2”, which is the number of holds of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the start of displaying the hold icon increasing animation are simultaneous, and winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is achieved. And almost at the same time. The mode of the hold icon f2 is a blue circle.

  FIG. 216 (d) shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation is finished. The completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the second area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area f is the end of the hold icon increase animation. In addition, after the hold icon increasing animation ends, the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts displaying the button image q1 and the gauge image q2. The button image q1 is an image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136. The gauge image q2 displays the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation reception period) of the chance button 136 by the length of the blue portion (shown by right-up hatching). The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time when the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are started to be displayed. The button image q1 is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light during the operation effective period. The button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are displays prompting the player to operate (press) the chance button 136. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be started before the button image q1 gauge image q2 is started to be displayed, or may be started after the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are started to be displayed. Good. It should be noted that the display of the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 and the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are simultaneously with the start of the on-hold icon increasing animation (almost simultaneously with the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230). There may be.

  FIG. 216 (e) shows a state during the operation valid period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is reported that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period elapses.

  FIG. 216 (f) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 216 (g) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button image q1 and the gauge image q2 are deleted, and instead, the effect image m4 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 216 (h) shows a state where the effect image m4 has been deleted. The second decorative symbol display device 208M displays a change notice display j instead of the effect image m4.

  FIG. 216 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In FIG. 216 (j), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative symbol fluctuation display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol fluctuation display are started. Shows the state. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon display area. e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. At the time shown in FIG. 216 (j), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

In this embodiment, a change notice display is displayed as an operation response display of the chance button 136. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the change notice display and the change candidate display may not be displayed.
(Example 12)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each of FIGS. 217 (a), (c) to (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 217 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 217 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 217 (b) shows a state immediately before the game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230. In this example, during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is increased by one.

  FIG. 217 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230. A numerical image “2” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is informed that the number of holdings in FIG. Moreover, the hold icon increase animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in such a manner that it gradually moves from below toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The start of displaying “2”, which is the number of holds of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the start of displaying the hold icon increasing animation are simultaneous, and winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is achieved. And almost at the same time. The hold icon f2 is circular and is displayed in a mode that turns white when lit (hereinafter referred to as “white flashing circular mode” (indicated by vertical vertical thin hatching in FIG. 217)). The white blinking circular form is an aspect that is more easily changed to a blue circular, green circular, red circular, or iridescent circular aspect than the white circular aspect.

  FIG. 217 (d) shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation is finished. The hold icon f2 has finished moving to the second area of the special icon 1 hold icon display area f, and the completion of the move of the hold icon f2 to the second area is the end of the hold icon increase animation. In addition, after the on-hold icon increasing animation ends, a change notice display r1 is displayed on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The change notice display r1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the left symbol display area 208a. The change notice display r1 is a display including a character display of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune”) and a display imitating a signboard (hereinafter referred to as “signboard”). A character string image of “Change with next change !?” is displayed in the signboard, suggesting that the state of the hold icon changes during the next special figure moving game. The change notice display r1 in this example is a notice for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes, similarly to the change notice display j shown in FIG. In this example, the change notice display r1 is a notice for notifying that the hold icon f2 in the form of white blinking changes. It should be noted that the hold icon subject to change notice in the change notice display r1 may be in the form of white blinking. The change notice display r1 may be displayed during the on-hold icon increase animation, or may be displayed simultaneously with the end of the on-hold icon increase animation.

  FIG. 217 (e) shows a state in which the character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 has been erased. The character string image in the signboard is erased during the final stage of the special figure variation game or during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol. Note that the change notice display r1 is displayed while being overlapped with the decorative symbol that is temporarily displayed during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 217 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. During the decorative symbol stop display, the change notice display r1 is displayed so as to overlap the “decoration 7” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the frame display surrounding it.

  In FIG. 217 (g), in response to the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon display area. e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon decreasing animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 is completed. After the decorative symbol variation display is started, the change notice display r1 is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol variation display in the left symbol display area 208a. As described above, the change notice display r1 is displayed so as to overlap the change display of the decorative symbol except when the decorative symbol is stopped. In addition, a character string image of “Take 1! Blue!” Is displayed in the signboard of the change notice display r1, suggesting that the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 may change to a blue circular form. Yes. The character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 after FIG. 217 (g) is a change candidate display. The hold icon f2 may change to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character string image in the signboard.

  FIG. 217 (h) shows a state in which Yoshimune r2 with a bow and arrow is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Yoshimune r2 is a display corresponding to Yoshimune n and change item o shown in FIG. 209 and the like, and is a display for changing the change notice display r1.

  FIG. 217 (i) shows a state where an animation in which Yoshimune r2 shoots an arrow is displayed. The arrow flies toward the signboard of the change notice display r1.

  FIG. 217 (j) shows a state in which the effect image m4 starts to be displayed so as to overlap almost the entire signboard of the change notice display r1. When an arrow is inserted into the sign of the change notice display r1, the effect image m4 is displayed. A display in which the change notice display r1 is changed by the effect image m4 is performed.

  FIG. 217 (k) shows a state where the effect image m4 has been deleted. After the effect image m4 is deleted, a change notice display r1 in which the character string image in the signboard is changed to “Take 1! Red!” Is displayed. The character string image in the signboard of the change notice display r1 suggests that the hold icon f2 corresponding to the hold 1 may change to a red circle.

  FIG. 217 (l) shows a state where Yoshimune r2 is erased. When the Yoshimune r2 is deleted, the change display for the notice change display r1 is not performed any more. If Yoshimune r2 is continuously displayed, a change display for the change notice display r1 may be displayed again.

  FIG. 217 (m) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 to be changed. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 217 (n) shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. Thus, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character string image in the signboard. Note that the mode of the hold icon f2 may be changed during the hold change display, or may be changed simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 217 (o) shows a state where the change notice display r1 is deleted. When the change notice display r1 is deleted, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. Even after the change notice display r1 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 may be performed by the effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, a change candidate display is displayed in the change notice display r3. The expected degree of change candidate display is set for each color in the same manner as the change notice icon k, etc., and is set to increase in the order of “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, “rainbow”. ing. The change candidate display including the “blue” character image shown in FIGS. 217 (g) to (i) is the first display, and the change including the “red” character image shown in FIGS. 217 (k) to (n). The candidate display may be the second display.
(Example 13)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 218 (a) to (r) and FIGS. 219 (a) to (r), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 13 of the present embodiment will be described. 218 (a) to (r) and FIGS. 219 (a) to (r) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 218 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” in the case of detachment is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. "Is stopped (confirmed display, final stop display). Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-7-1” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The frame display surrounding each decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1” is displayed in red, and a pre-reading notice for the red chance is executed. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice of the chance, the character string image “Stop the same color ...” is displayed in the display area h, and the pre-reading advance notice of the chance is being executed. Has been suggested. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice for the chance is the hold 1 in FIG. Further, since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area g is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a red circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this embodiment, Yoshimune n is a character display that is always displayed. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 218 (b) shows a state where the fluctuation icon e1 has been deleted. In this embodiment, the variation icon is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol.

  In FIG. 218 (c), in response to the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. In FIG. 218 (c), the downward white arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display devices 208La to 208c display a variable display at a speed that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbols. It represents the state being done. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon. Move to display area e. The arrow in the figure represents the locus of the fluctuation icon e2. At the time shown in FIG. 218 (c), the hold icon decreasing animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 is completed.

  FIG. 218 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the variable display is displayed at a speed at which the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbol changes in the left symbol display area 208a. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuation display.

  FIG. 218 (e) shows a state immediately before the “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the speed of the variable display in the left symbol display area 208a becomes slow. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 7” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 218 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner in which the “decoration 7” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of “Decoration 7” indicate that “Decoration 7” slightly fluctuates up and down. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display in the right symbol display area 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 218 (g) shows a state immediately before the variable display speed in the right symbol display area 208c is further reduced and “decoration 6” is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A downward arrow shown below “decoration 6” in the figure indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display that allows the player to recognize the decoration symbol is displayed.

  FIG. 218 (h) shows a state where “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 218 (i) shows a state in which the speed of the variable display is changed so that the player can recognize the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208b. The middle symbol display area 208b is immediately before the “continue” decorative symbol including the “continue” character string image is temporarily displayed. In the figure, a downward arrow shown below the “Continue” decorative symbol indicates that a low-speed fluctuation display is displayed that allows the player to recognize the decorative symbol. The “Continue” decorative symbol is displayed when a pseudo-continuous effect display is performed. The pseudo-ream is an effect of performing pseudo-variation as if the decorative symbol variation display was performed a plurality of times during one special figure variation game, and is a notice effect of the variation. The decorative display variation display shown in FIGS. 218 (c) to 218 (j) is the first pseudo variation. The greater the number of times of pseudo-variation of pseudo-continuations, the easier it is to display the big hit symbol form in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 218 (j) shows a state in which the “continue” decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly fluctuates up and down. In the figure, the two wavy lines shown in the upper left and lower right of the “Continue” decorative symbol indicate that the “Continuous” decorative symbol slightly swings up and down. A decorative symbol “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 218 (k) shows a state in which a cut-in display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the cut-in display is displayed before the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6”.

  FIG. 218 (l) shows a state immediately before the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display has been deleted, and an image of “× 2” is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that it is notified that the second pseudo fluctuation is started. The “× 2” image is displayed so as to overlap a part of “decoration 7”.

  FIG. 218 (m) shows a state in which the second pseudo fluctuation is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display is performed at such a speed that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 218 (n) shows a state in which the “× 2” image is reduced.

  FIG. 218 (o) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 218 (p) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. With the temporary stop display of “decoration 4”, reach effect display in which “decoration 4” is displayed in the decorative symbol variation display is started. In addition, a character string image of “if SP stops ...” is displayed in the display area h, and it is suggested that SP (super) reach is started when the decorative pattern of “SP” is displayed. ing.

  FIG. 218 (q) shows a state where the decorative symbol variation display in the middle symbol display area 208b is changed to a low-speed variation display.

  FIG. 218 (r) shows a state in which the decorative symbol “SP” including the character string image “SP” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The decorative pattern “SP” is displayed when the SP reach is started.

  FIG. 219 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 218 (r). In FIG. 219 (a), the SP reach is started, the left symbol display area 208a is reduced to the upper left corner of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed as the first decorative symbol display. The display is reduced to the upper right corner of the display area of the device 208L. During SP reach, the frame display surrounding the decorative design is not displayed.

  FIG. 219 (b) shows a state in which SP reach development candidates are displayed. A character string image of “What is the development destination?” Is displayed at the upper part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the candidate display s1 is displayed on the left side of the display area, and the candidate display is displayed on the right side of the display area. s2 is displayed. The candidate display s1 includes a character string image of “drinking comparison”, and the candidate display s2 informs that the development candidate is an effect of drinking comparison. The candidate display s2 includes a character string image of “bowling”, and the candidate display s2 informs that the development candidate is an effect of bowling. The number of “★” images included in the candidate displays s1 and s2 is a display suggesting the jackpot reliability of each production. In this example, one image of “★” is included in the candidate display s1, and two images of “★” are included in the candidate display s2, so that the direction of bowling rather than the effect of drinking comparison Is set to have a large hit reliability. A roulette display is displayed between the candidate displays s1 and s2.

  FIG. 219 (c) shows a state in which roulette display is started. During the roulette display, the arrow in the roulette display is rotated clockwise. In the drawing, the arrows shown above and below the roulette display indicate that the arrow in the roulette display is rotating clockwise. The third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a character string image of “Ikuzo”. The character string image is a display that suggests that change display of the candidate display is started.

  FIG. 219 (d) shows a state where the display of the change item o is started on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the present embodiment, the change item o is used for change display in which the modes of the candidate displays s1 and s2 change.

  FIG. 219 (e) shows a state where an animation in which the change item o is thrown by Yoshimune n is displayed. In this example, the change display target is the candidate display s1, and the change item o flies toward the candidate display s1. In the drawing, a left-pointing arrow illustrated to the right of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 219 (f) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed overlapping the candidate display s1. After the change item o is displayed overlapping the candidate display s1, change display in which the aspect of the candidate display s1 changes is started.

  FIG. 219 (g) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m6 is displayed instead. The effect image m6 is displayed so as to overlap the entire character and “★” portion of the candidate display s1. By displaying the effect image m6, a change display in which the mode of the candidate display s1 is changed is performed.

  FIG. 219 (h) shows a state where the change display is finished. The deletion of the effect image m6 is the end of the change display. In the candidate display s1, three character string images of “Swordsman” and “★” are displayed, and the mode of the candidate display s1 changes. The candidate display s1 after the change display is informed that the development candidate is an effect of a swordsman confrontation. In addition, three “★” are displayed in the candidate display s1, and the performance of the swordsman confrontation is set higher in the big hit reliability than the performance of the bowling.

  FIG. 219 (i) shows a state in which a blessing effect that has been successfully displayed for change is being executed. The mode of Yoshimune n displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has changed to a mode of guts pose, and the blessing effect is executed by Yoshimune n who performed guts pose. The change display effect of the candidate display s1 may be provided with a failure pattern effect in which the aspect of the candidate display s1 does not change. When the effect of the change display of the candidate display is a success pattern, the effect shown by the candidate display after the change display is higher than the effect indicated by the candidate display before the change display. Further, the effect indicated by the candidate display (candidate display s1) after the change display may have a higher degree of jackpot expectation than the effect indicated by the candidate display (candidate display s2) that is not the target of the change display.

  FIG. 219 (j) shows a state in which the development destination is informed that it is an effect of a swordsman confrontation. The arrow in the roulette display is stopped in the direction pointing to the candidate display s1 (leftward), and it is informed that the development destination is an effect of a swordsman confrontation.

  FIG. 219 (k) shows a state in which it is reported that the development destination is a swordsman showdown. An effect image m7 is displayed so as to surround the candidate display s1, and it is notified that the development destination is an effect of a swordsman confrontation.

  FIG. 219 (l) shows a state immediately before the production of the swordsman confrontation is started. Prior to the start of the production of the swordsman confrontation, the character string image “What is the development destination?”, Candidate displays s1, s2, roulette display, and Yoshimune n are deleted.

  FIG. 219 (m) shows a state where the production of the swordsman confrontation has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation in which a swordsman appears is displayed.

  FIG. 219 (n) shows a state in which a confrontation between Yoshimune and Swordsman has started. The swordsman showdown is an effect that displays an animation in which Yoshimune and swordsman make a duel. A character display of Yoshimune is displayed on the left side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a character display of a swordsman is displayed on the right side of the display area. In this example, the change icon e2 is displayed even during the production of the swordsman confrontation. Note that the pedestal display in the variation icon display area e may be displayed even during the production of the swordsman confrontation.

  FIG. 219 (o) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which Yoshimune and swordsman cut each other is displayed.

  FIG. 219 (p) shows a state in which an animation of a scene where Yoshimune won the confrontation is displayed. During the display of the scene, Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 219 (q) shows a state in which “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the effect of the swordsman confrontation has ended. The end of the production of the swordsman confrontation is the end of SP reach, and after the end of SP reach, a temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4” is started. The change icon e2 is erased during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”. Note that the change icon e2 may be displayed during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4”.

  FIG. 219 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit ("Special figure C"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4”, which is a big hit symbol form, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is stopped. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “4-4-4” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is turned on in a big hit light emission mode.

In this embodiment, the development destination candidate display changes. The candidate display changes to a display showing an effect display having a higher hit reliability than before the change. In addition, after the change display of the hold icon, the change icon, and the change candidate display shown in FIGS. 208 to 217 is performed, the effect display shown in FIGS. 218 and 219 can be performed.
(Example 14)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 220 (a) to 220 (p) and FIGS. 221 (a) to (h), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described. 220 (a), (c), (d), (f) to (p) and FIGS. 221 (a), (b), (d) to (h) are diagrams showing a pachinko machine according to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows 100 in a time series. FIG. 220 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area g is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed, and the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “1” and “0” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 220 (b) shows a state immediately before the game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230. In this example, during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is increased by one.

  FIG. 220 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230. A numerical image “2” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and it is informed that the number of holdings in FIG. Moreover, the hold icon increase animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon f2 corresponding to the increased hold appears in such a manner that it gradually moves from below toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The start of displaying “2”, which is the number of holds of the special figure 1 on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the start of displaying the hold icon increasing animation are simultaneous, and winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 is achieved. And almost at the same time. The mode of the hold icon f2 is a white circle. In the present embodiment, the button icon t1 is started to be displayed together with the hold icon f2 by the hold icon increasing animation. The button icon t1 is a display imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and is displayed in red. The button icon t1 is displayed above the hold icon f2 and moves upward together with the hold icon f2. The button icon t1 may be a part of the hold icon f2, or the button icon t1 may be displayed as the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 220 (d) shows a state in which the hold icon increase animation is finished. The hold icon f2 has been moved to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the button icon t1 has been moved. The completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the second area and the completion of the movement of the button icon t1 are the end of the hold icon increase animation. When the movement of the button icon t1 is completed, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. Thereafter, the button icon t1 is being displayed during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The button icon t1 is a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136. In addition, the chance button 136 emits red light when the operation effective period starts.

  FIG. 220 (e) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 220 (f) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and instead, an image change notice display r3 simulating a sign is started to be displayed above the hold icon f2. As described above, the change notice display may be started when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the hold icon in the form of the button icon is displayed. The change notice display r3 is displayed in contact with the hold icon f2 that is the target of the hold change display. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative symbol. A character string image of “blue or red” is displayed in the change notice display r3, and the character string image is a change candidate display. As described above, the change notice display may include a change candidate display. When the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  In FIG. 220 (g), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a at a speed at which the player can visually recognize the decorative symbol. In the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, “decoration 6” is displayed. The temporary stop display is shown. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 220 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap with “decoration 7” in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 220 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. During the decorative symbol stop display, the change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the “decoration 7” displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the frame display surrounding it.

  In FIG. 220 (j), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative pattern fluctuation display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol fluctuation display are started. Shows the state. In addition, illustration of the fluctuation icon deletion animation displayed during the non-execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is omitted. The change icon e1 is deleted by the change icon deletion animation. In addition, during the decorative symbol variation display, the change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the ornament symbol variation display.

  FIG. 220 (k) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is started. Due to the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the fluctuation icon e2 and moves to the fluctuation icon display area e, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area f The hold icon f2 displayed in the second area moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The change notice display r3 moves together with the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 220 (l) shows a state in which the hold icon reduction animation is finished. The movement of the fluctuation icon e2 and the hold icon f2 has been completed. After the on-hold icon reduction animation ends, display of a princess character display (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) r4 is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The princess r4 is a display that suggests that the change candidate display changes. The princess r4 may be displayed at the same time as the start of the decorative symbol change, may be displayed during the display of the hold icon reduction animation, or may be started at the end of the hold icon reduction animation. .

  FIG. 220 (m) illustrates a state in which change display of the change candidate display is notified. A character string image of “Change” is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M to notify that the change display is started.

  FIG. 220 (n) shows a state where change display of the change candidate display is started. In the change display, an animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is displayed. The start of the animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is the start of the change display. Note that, at the time of the change display, the player may be able to recognize the character string image (“blue or red” or “green or red”) of the change candidate display.

  FIG. 220 (o) shows a state where the change display of the change candidate display is finished. The change candidate display included in the change notice display r3 changes from “blue or red” to a character string image of “green or red”. The end of the animation in which the change notice display r3 rotates is the end of the change display.

  FIG. 220 (p) shows a state where the princess r4 has been erased. Even after the princess r4 is deleted, the change display of the change candidate display may be performed by the effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  FIG. 221 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 220 (p). In FIG. 221 (a), a button image and a gauge image are displayed overlapping the change candidate display in the change notice display r3. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time as the display of the button image and the gauge image. The button image is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 221 (b) shows a state during the operation effective period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is reported that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period elapses.

  FIG. 221 (c) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 221 (d) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button image and the gauge image are deleted, and instead, the effect image m6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change candidate display is changed by displaying the effect image m6.

  FIG. 221 (e) shows a state where the change candidate display is completed. The deletion of the effect image m6 is the end of the change display of the change candidate display. The change candidate display changes to a “red” character image. The change candidate display is a display that suggests that the hold icon f2 changes to a red circular form.

  FIG. 221 (f) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 to be changed. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 221 (g) shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. Thus, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character image in the signboard. Note that the mode of the hold icon f2 may be changed during the hold change display, or may be changed simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 221 (h) shows a state where the change notice display r3 is deleted. When the change notice display r3 is deleted, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. Even after the change notice display r3 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 (i) to (k), description will be given of an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of the present embodiment. 221 (i) to (k) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification in time series. 221 (i) to (k) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 220 (g) to 220 (i), respectively, except that the ball removal display er1 is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 221 (i) to (k), the ball removal display er1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol and the change notice display r3. The ball removal display er1 is displayed when the lower plate 128 is full of game balls and a lower plate full tank error occurs. The ball removal display er <b> 1 is a display for notifying a lower tray full tank error, and is a display for prompting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. As described above, the error display such as the ball removal display er1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display. In addition, an error display other than the ball removal display er1, for example, a door release error display for informing a door release error, an error display for informing an abnormal winning or an illegal winning, an error display for informing magnetic detection or magnetic field detection, etc. It may be displayed overlapping the symbol, change notice display r3, and change candidate display. Note that the ball removal display er1 and these error displays may be displayed so as to overlap all the effect displays other than the decorative symbol, the change notice display r3, and the change candidate display.
(Example 15)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 222A to 222E are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 222 (a) shows a state in which the display with the change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o in this example is a display used for the hold change display of the hold icon f1. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 222 (b) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the hold icon f1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the hold icon f1, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (b). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 222 (c) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the hold icon f1 is displayed. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon f1.

  FIG. 222 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon f1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 222 (e) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the mode of the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold of the target of the prefetch notice changes to the same blue circle as the change notice icon k. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the variation icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays. Note that the change notice icon k is blue, the hold icon f1 is also blue, and the change notice icon k and the hold icon f1 have the same form, so the hold change display using the change notice icon k is the hold icon. Although it is not used for the hold change display for f1, it may be used for the change display for the white circular variation icon e1.

As in the present embodiment, the change item o may be used for the change display of the hold icon. The mode of the hold icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display.
(Example 16)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 (f) to (j) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 222 (f) shows a state in which the display with the change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o in this example is a display used for changing display of the change icon e1. Further, a blue circular change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 222 (g) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the hold icon f1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change icon e1, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (g). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 222 (h) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change icon e1 is displayed. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change icon e1.

  FIG. 222 (i) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon e1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change icon e1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the variation icon e1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 222 (j) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, whereby the aspect of the variation icon e1 changes from a white circle to a blue circle. In this example, the aspect of the change icon e1 changes to the same blue circle as the change notice icon k. There are a plurality of types of change candidate displays, and the mode of the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays.

As in the present embodiment, the change item o may be used for the change display of the change icon. The mode of the variation icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display. In the present embodiment, the change notice icon k is displayed, but even when the change notice icon k is not displayed, the effect display shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to (j) may be performed.
(Example 17)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 (k) to (o). FIGS. 222 (k) to 222 (o) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 222 (k) shows a state where the display with the change item o is displayed by Yoshimune n on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 222 (l) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws a change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 222 (g). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 222 (m) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this embodiment, the change item o passes through the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 222 (n) shows a state where a display in which the change item o passes through the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k is displayed. In the case of the production of a failure pattern in which the change notice icon k is not changed, the change item o passes through the change notice icon k without colliding with the change notice icon k.

FIG. 222 (o) shows a state in which the change item o has been deleted. The change item o moves to the left and is erased in such a manner that it disappears outside the display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As in this embodiment, the change display of the change candidate display may be provided with a failure pattern in which the change candidate display does not change. Note that a failure pattern whose form does not change may be provided for the change display of the hold icon and the change icon.
(Example 18)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 223 (a) to (o). Each of FIGS. 223 (a) to (o) is a diagram showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 223 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 223 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. Further, a change notice icon k is displayed on the sub table device 700, and a princess n1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The princess n1 is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 223 (b) shows a state in which the display of the princess n1 having the change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of change candidate display.

  FIG. 223 (c) shows a state in which an animation in which the princess n1 throws the change item o toward the change notice icon k is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the change notice icon k, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 223 (c). In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 223 (d) shows a state in which the change item o is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 223 (e) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the change notice icon k is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change notice icon k.

  FIG. 223 (f) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k changes is displayed.

  FIG. 223 (g) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. When the effect image m is erased, the change display ends, and the change display is performed, whereby the type of the change notice icon k is changed from the blue circle to the red circle. In this way, there is a case where the blue circle change candidate display is changed to the red circle change candidate display.

  FIG. 223 (h) shows a state where the princess n1 is displayed even after the change display of the change candidate display. When the princess n1 is displayed continuously, the change display of the change candidate display is performed again.

  Since the effect display shown in FIGS. 223 (i) to (m) is the same effect display as the effect display shown in FIGS. 223 (a) to (f), the description thereof will be omitted. In the present embodiment, change display of the change candidate display is performed again.

  FIG. 223 (n) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and since the change display is performed, the type of the change notice icon k changes from a red circle to a gold circle. As described above, there is a case where a change candidate display of a red circle changes to a change candidate display of a gold circle.

  FIG. 223 (o) shows a state where the princess n1 is erased. When the princess n1 is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k is not performed any more.

In the present embodiment, the princess n1 is displayed when the change display of the change candidate display is performed. In this case, a change display of the change candidate display is always performed, and the change candidate display changes to a type with a high expectation. Expectation of change candidate display is higher when princess n1 is displayed when change display of change candidate display is performed than when Yoshimune n is displayed when change display of change candidate display is performed It is easy to change to a high type. For example, when the change display of the change candidate display is performed, when the change display of the change candidate display is performed, the princess n1 is displayed when the change display of the change candidate display is performed. The display is likely to change to a green change candidate display. The same applies when the change display of the hold icon or the change icon is performed, and the change of the hold icon or the change icon is greater than when Yoshimune n is displayed when the change display of the hold icon or the change icon is performed. When the display is performed, when the princess n1 is displayed, the hold icon and the change icon are more likely to change to a mode with high expectation. When the princess n1 is deleted, the change display by the princess n1 is not performed during the special figure 1 variable game, and when the princess n1 is continuously displayed, the change display using the princess n1 may be performed again. There is. In addition, when performing change display twice or more, you may change the object of change display for every change display.
(Example 19)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 (a) to (g) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 224 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the fourth symbol lamp i1 is in the fourth symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the fifth symbol. Has been done. Further, at the time shown in FIG. 224 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 1, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon f1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The special icon 2 hold icon display area g does not display the hold icon, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays the number of holds by the numbers “1” and “0”. The mode of the hold icon f1 is a white circle. In addition, a variation icon e1 is displayed in the variation icon display area e. The aspect of the fluctuation icon e1 is a white circle. The treasure chest u1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The production stage is the castle town stage.

  FIG. 224 (b) shows a state in which the treasure chest u1 is opened and an animation in which a pseudo-ream icon u2 appears from the treasure chest u1 is displayed. In the drawing, the upward arrow shown below the pseudo-continuous icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo-continuous icon u2. The pseudo-ream icon u2 in this example is a display that suggests that a pseudo-ream effect display is performed. The form of the pseudo-continuous icon u2 is a form of a white square including the letter “N”. The pseudo-ream icon u2 includes a white square, a blue square, a green square, a red square, a gold square, and a rainbow square. The expectation of the pseudo-ream icon is set to increase in the order of white square, blue square, green square, red square, gold square, and rainbow square.

  FIG. 224 (c) shows a state where the treasure chest u1 is erased. The treasure chest u1 is a display for causing the pseudo continuous icon u2 to appear, and is erased after the pseudo continuous icon u2 appears. While the treasure chest u1 is not displayed, new icons (except for the hold icon and the change icon) are not displayed.

  FIG. 224 (d) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is started. The pseudo-ream icon u2 moves upward. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the pseudo continuous icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo continuous icon u2.

  FIG. 224 (e) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is displayed. In the activation display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the pseudo continuous icon u2. The activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is a display that suggests that the pseudo-ream effect display is performed during the special figure variable game.

  FIG. 224 (f) shows a state in which the pseudo continuous icon u2 is deleted. When the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is completed, the pseudo continuous icon u2 is deleted.

  FIG. 224 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 218 (j). is there. The temporary stop display of the “continue” decorative symbol suggests that the second pseudo-variation of the pseudo-ream starts. After the time shown in FIG. 224 (g), the second pseudo fluctuation shown in FIG. 218 (k) and thereafter is performed. In this embodiment, unlike the embodiment 13 shown in FIG. 218, Yoshimune n is not displayed.

  When the activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed during the special figure variable game, the “Continue” decorative symbol is temporarily displayed during the special figure variable game. In addition, when the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is displayed during the second pseudo variation, the third pseudo variation is always performed. Note that when the activation display of the pseudo-continuous icon u2 is displayed during the third pseudo-variation, the big hit symbol mode may be surely displayed in the special figure variation game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 (h) to (l) and FIGS. 225 (a) to (o), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of Example 19 of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 224 (h) to (l) and FIGS. 225 (a) to (o) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 224 (h) shows the same state as FIG. 224 (c).

  FIG. 224 (i) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yoshimune n in this example is a display that suggests changing the mode of the pseudo-ream icon u2.

  FIG. 224 (j) shows a state in which the display with Yoshimune n having the change item display o is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o is a display that suggests changing the type of the pseudo-ream icon u2 of this example.

  FIG. 224 (k) shows a state in which an animation in which Yoshimune n throws the change item o toward the pseudo-ream icon u2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change item o flies toward the pseudo-ream icon u2 and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the right side of the change item o represents the locus of the change item o.

  FIG. 224 (l) shows a state in which a display in which the change item o collides with the pseudo continuous icon u2 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The change item o is displayed so as to overlap a part of the pseudo continuous icon u2.

  FIG. 225 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 224 (l). In the state shown in FIG. 225 (a), the change item o is deleted, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo continuous icon u2. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the pseudo continuous icon u2, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a change display in which the mode of the pseudo continuous icon u2 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 225 (b) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and the change display is performed, whereby the mode of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is changed from the white square to the red square. The red square pseudo-ream icon is a display for notifying that the “Continue” decorative symbol will be temporarily stopped more than once after the activation display, and the red square pseudo-ream icon is activated during the second pseudo-variation. When the display is displayed, the fourth pseudo-variation is necessarily executed, or the big hit symbol form may be surely displayed by full rotation reach. In addition, when the activation display of the red square pseudo-ream icon is displayed during the third pseudo-variation, the big hit symbol form may be surely displayed in the special figure variation game. Note that when the princess n1 is displayed instead of the Yoshimune n, the mode of the pseudo-ream icon may be changed.

  FIG. 225 (c) shows a state in which the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is started. The pseudo-ream icon u2 moves upward. In the drawing, an upward-pointing arrow illustrated on the left side of the pseudo continuous icon u2 represents the locus of the pseudo continuous icon u2.

  FIG. 225 (d) shows a state where the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is displayed. In the activation display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the pseudo continuous icon u2. The activation display of the pseudo-ream icon u2 is a display that suggests that the pseudo-ream effect display is performed during the special figure variable game.

  FIG. 225 (e) shows a state in which the pseudo continuous icon u2 is deleted. When the activation display of the pseudo continuous icon u2 is completed, the pseudo continuous icon u2 is deleted.

  FIG. 225 (f) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. The effect display similar to the effect display shown in FIGS. 218 (d) to 218 (m) is displayed after FIG. 225 (f). Illustration and description of the effect display similar to the effect display shown in FIGS. 218 (d) to (m) are omitted.

  FIG. 225 (g) shows a state where the second pseudo fluctuation is performed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display is displayed at such a speed that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbols.

  FIG. 225 (h) shows a state where the speed of the variable display in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is slow.

  FIG. 225 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 225 (j) shows a state in which the speed has changed to a variable display speed at which the player can recognize the decorative symbols in the middle symbol display area 208b. The middle symbol display area 208b is immediately before the “continue” decorative symbol including the “continue” character string image is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 225 (k) shows a state in which the “Continue” decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode in which the decorative symbol “continue” slightly swings up and down in the middle symbol display area 208b. A decorative symbol “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG. 225 (l) shows a state in which a cut-in display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the cut-in display is displayed before the third pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern “decoration 7-continuation-decoration 6”.

  FIG. 225 (m) shows a state immediately before the third pseudo fluctuation is started. The cut-in display has been erased, and an image of “× 3” is displayed in the lower left of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, informing that the second pseudo-variation is started. The “× 3” image is displayed so as to overlap a part of “decoration 7”.

  FIG. 225 (n) shows a state where the third pseudo fluctuation is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display is performed at such a speed that the player cannot recognize the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 225 (o) shows a state in which the “× 3” image is reduced.

In this modified example, the mode of the pseudo continuous icon is changed. It should be noted that when the third pseudo-variation is started, the SP reach may always be developed. In addition, the larger the number of pseudo fluctuations, the easier it is to display the big hit symbol form.
(Example 20)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 226 (a) shows a state similar to FIG. 211 (f). The change item o is displayed overlapping with a part of the change notice icon k1.

  FIG. 226 (b) shows a state in which the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire change notice icon k1. When the change item o is overlapped with a part of the change notice icon k1, the change item o is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. By displaying the effect image m, a change display in which the type of the change notice icon k1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 226 (c) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. Erasing the effect image m is the end of the change display, and since the change display is performed, the type of the change notice icon k1 is changed from the blue circle to the green circle.

  FIG. 226 (d) shows a state in which Yoshimune n is erased. When the Yoshimune n is deleted, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is not performed any more. If Yoshimune n is continuously displayed, the change display for the change notice icon k1 is displayed again.

  FIG. 226 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the change notice icon k2 moves is started. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Since the target of the prefetch notice is the hold 1 in FIG. 1, the change notice icon k2 moves toward the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k. The change notice icon k2 is displayed across the two display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  FIG. 226 (f) shows a state where the change notice icon k2 has moved to a position where it overlaps with a part of the hold icon f1. In the figure, the arrow pointing downward to the right on the left side of the change notice icon k2 represents the locus of the change notice icon k2.

  FIG. 226 (g) shows a state in which the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the entire hold icon f2. When the change notice icon k2 is overlapped with a part of the hold icon f1, the change notice icon k2 is deleted and the effect image m is displayed instead. With the display of the effect image m, a hold change display in which the mode of the hold icon f1 changes is displayed.

  FIG. 226 (h) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The deletion of the effect image m is the end of the hold change display, and the hold change display is performed, whereby the mode of the hold icon f1 changes from a white circle to a green circle. In this example, the hold icon f1 corresponding to the hold for the prefetch notice changes to the same green as the change candidate display 2.

  In the present embodiment, change notice icons k1 and k2 of the same type (green circle) are displayed. When all the displayed change candidate displays are of the same type, the mode of the hold icon or the change icon may be changed. For example, when the change display of the hold icon or the change icon by the change notice icon k2 is a failure effect display, the change display of the hold icon or the change icon by the change notice icon k1 becomes the success display, and the hold icon or The aspect of the fluctuation icon may change.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 (i) to (k), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modification of Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described. 226 (i) to (k) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 226 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 226 (a), and FIG. 226 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 226 (b).

FIG. 226 (k) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. When the effect image m is erased, the change display ends, and the change display is performed, so that the type of the change notice icon k1 changes from a blue circle to a rainbow color (shown by white dot hatching on a black background in FIGS. 208 to 228). It changes to a circle. It should be noted that in the symbol variation display that starts after the hold corresponding to the rainbow-colored hold icon is digested, the big hit symbol pattern is always displayed in a definite manner. In addition, when change display is performed by the rainbow-colored change candidate display, the hold icon and the change icon to be changed are always rainbow-colored circles. When the change display is performed by the change candidate display other than the rainbow circle change candidate display, the change display target hold icon or the change icon is rainbow when the change display is performed by the rainbow circle change candidate display. It tends to change to a color circle. Further, at the stage when the rainbow-colored change candidate display is displayed, the big hit symbol pattern may always be confirmed and displayed in the changing or pending symbol variation display. In addition, when the princess n1 is displayed, it is easier to change to a rainbow-colored circular change candidate display than when the Yoshimune n is displayed. A character display that is displayed only when the change candidate display is changed to a rainbow-colored change candidate display may be provided. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 213 (e) to (i) may be performed after the effects are performed in FIGS. 226 (a) and (b), or shown in FIGS. 213 (e) to (i). After the performance is performed, a change display in which the type of change candidate display changes may be performed.
(Example 21)
Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 227 (a), (c), and (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 227 (a) shows the same state as FIG. 220 (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 227 (b) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 227 (c) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and the effect image m is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon f2. When the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 227 (d) shows a state where the effect image m has been deleted. The hold change display is performed by displaying the effect image m, and the mode of the hold icon f2 changes from a white circle to a blue circle.

The jackpot reliability of the effect display by the change notice display r3 shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is set higher than the jackpot reliability of the pending change display according to the present embodiment. Note that the effect display based on the change notice display r3 shown in FIG. 220 and FIG. 221 is more likely to change the hold icon and the variation icon to a mode with higher jackpot reliability than the jackpot reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment. It should be noted that the effect display based on the change notice display r3 shown in FIGS. 220 and 221 is more likely to produce a successful effect in which the status of the hold icon or the change icon changes than the jackpot reliability of the hold change display according to the present embodiment.
(Example 22)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 (e) to (n) and FIGS. 228 (a) to (h), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 227 (e) to (l) and (n) and FIGS. 228 (a) to (h) are diagrams showing the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 227 (e) shows the same state as FIG. 220 (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this example, it is assumed that the chance button 136 is not operated during the special figure 1 variable game. Also, the illustration and explanation until “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed from FIG. 227 (e) are omitted. FIG. 227 (f) shows a state in which “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a shifted symbol form, is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c.

  FIG. 227 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is an off symbol mode, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “7-6-6” is stopped and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is interrupted at the same time as the decorative symbol variation stop display. Outside the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button icon t1 is displayed in white, and the chance button 136 does not emit red light. In the present embodiment, even if the button icon t1 is being displayed, the chance button 136 is outside the valid operation period during the fixed display of the symbol (during suspension of the change). When the next symbol variation display is started, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started again.

  FIG. 227 (h) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is started. The variation icon e1 is deleted in such a manner that it moves downward and moves out of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 227 (i) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is finished. The completion of the deletion of the fluctuation icon e1 is the end of the fluctuation icon deletion animation.

  In FIG. 227 (j), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative symbol fluctuation display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol fluctuation display are started. It shows the state. The number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. In FIG. 227 (k), the hold icon reduction animation is started. In the hold icon decreasing animation, the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes a change icon e2 and is moved toward the change icon display area e, and the special figure 1 hold icon display is displayed. The hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the area f is moved toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the figure, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the change icon e2 and the hold icon f2 represents the locus of the change icon e2 and the hold icon f2. The button icon t1 moves to the right together with the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 227 (k) shows a state where the hold icon reduction animation is completed. The completion of the movement of the fluctuation icon e2 to the fluctuation icon display area e and the completion of the movement of the hold icon f2 to the first area are the end of the hold icon reduction animation.

  FIG. 227 (l) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been resumed. During the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button icon t1 is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light.

  FIG. 227 (m) shows a state immediately before the player operates the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 227 (n) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the chance button 136 is operated by the player. When the chance button 136 is operated and the operation is accepted, the button icon t1 is deleted, and instead, an image change notice display r3 simulating a sign is started to be displayed above the hold icon f2. The change notice display r3 is displayed in contact with the hold icon f2 that is the target of the hold change display. The change notice display r3 is displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative symbol. A character string image of “blue or red” is displayed in the change notice display r3, and the character string image is a change candidate display. As described above, the change notice display may include a change candidate display. When the chance button 136 is operated once, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the red emission of the chance button 136 ends.

  FIG. 228 (a) shows a state continued from FIG. 227 (n). In FIG. 227 (a), the button image and the gauge image are displayed overlapping the change candidate display in the change notice display r3. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started at the same time as the display of the button image and the gauge image. The button image is displayed in red, and the chance button 136 emits red light during the operation effective period.

  FIG. 228 (b) shows a state during the operation valid period. The length of the blue portion of the gauge image q2 is shortened, and it is reported that the remaining time of the button reception period is shorter than the initial time. In the gauge image q2, the blue portion becomes shorter toward the left as the operation effective period elapses.

  FIG. 228 (c) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has ended. In this example, it is assumed that the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 228 (d) shows the state of the effect display immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. When the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, the button image and the gauge image are deleted.

  FIG. 228 (e) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is ongoing.

  FIG. 228 (f) shows a state in which the hold change display is started. In the hold change display of this example, the effect image m5 is displayed around the hold icon f2 to be changed. The display start of the effect image m5 is the display start of the hold change display.

  FIG. 228 (g) shows a state in which the hold change display is finished. The deletion of the effect image m5 is the end of the hold change display, and after the hold change display, the mode of the hold icon f2 changes to a red circle. Thus, the hold icon f2 changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display indicated by the character image in the signboard. The mode of the hold icon f2 changes during the hold change display, but may change simultaneously with the end of the hold change display.

  FIG. 228 (h) shows a state in which the change notice display r3 is deleted. When the change notice display r3 is deleted, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 is not performed any more. Even after the change notice display r3 is erased, the hold change display for the hold icon f2 may be performed by an effect display different from the effect display shown in FIG.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation effective period shown in FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (b), a “red” change candidate display is displayed as shown in FIG. 220 (e). Alternatively, the change notice display r3 may be deleted without performing the hold change display, or the hold icon has the least expected change candidate among a plurality of change candidate displays (in this example, green or red). It may be determined that the display changes to an aspect corresponding to the display (in this example, green).

  Note that even during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, a gauge image (meter image) indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period may not be displayed. In this case, it may be notified that the operation is valid by a button image that is an operation suggestion, an operation suggestion display mode (red display or the like), or a lamp color (red light emission) of the operation means. In addition, after the effects shown in FIGS. 227 (e) to (n) are performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 220 (l) to (o) may be performed, or in FIGS. 220 (l) to (o). The effects shown in FIGS. 228 (a) to (n) may be performed after the effects shown are performed.

  The icon change effect described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228 can be combined with the transparent effect described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, a change candidate display representing a candidate whose display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes may be displayed by a circular effect 251C shown in FIG.

  Alternatively, on the other hand, while the icon change effect described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228 is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), the description will be made with reference to FIGS. The permeation effect that has been performed may be made executable.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228 again.

(1)
Display means (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N);
A holding means (for example, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 1 hold number storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area, special figure 2 hold number storage area) capable of storing start information as a hold; An amusement machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
It is configured to notify the number of holds on the display number of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes (for example, white circle, blue circle, green circle, red circle, gold circle, rainbow circle)
The hold icon may change from one of the plurality of modes to another mode,
The display means includes a plurality of types of change candidate displays (for example, a blue circle change candidate display, a green circle change candidate display, a red circle change candidate display, a gold circle change candidate display, and a rainbow circle (Change candidate display)
The mode of the hold icon may change to a corresponding mode of one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays displayed.
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a first display (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1),
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a second display (for example, a green circular change notice icon k2),
The first display may change to the second display,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the change candidate display may change, so that the player may be able to entertain the effect display by the change candidate display until the change candidate display is deleted.

(2)
The gaming machine according to (1) above,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, a white circle),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, a blue circle),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, a green circle),
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is used more than the variable display of the decorative design that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third mode is consumed rather than the variation display of the decorative symbol which is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed,
When the second display is displayed, the hold icon displayed in the first mode is configured to be easily changed to the third mode than the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(3)
The game stand according to (2) above,
In the case where the first display (for example, a blue circle change notice icon k1) is displayed, the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode (for example, white circle) changes. , The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the second mode (for example, blue circle),
When the second display (for example, the green circular change notice icon k2) is displayed, the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode (for example, white circle) changes. , The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the third mode (for example, green circle),
A game stand characterized by that.

(4)
The game table according to (2) or (3) above,
When the second display (for example, a green circle change candidate display) is displayed and the mode of the hold icon displayed in the second mode (for example, blue circle) changes, The mode of the hold icon is configured to change to the third mode (for example, green circle),
A game stand characterized by that.

(5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first character display (for example, Yoshimune n),
The first character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The first character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is more easily changed to the second display when the first character display is displayed than when the first character display is not displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it may be possible to expect whether or not the first character is displayed.

(6)
The game stand according to (5) above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second character display (for example, princess n1),
The second character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The second character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is more easily changed to the second display when the second character display is displayed than when the first character display is displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(7)
The game stand according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The display means may display a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

(8)
The game stand according to (7) above,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to any one of the plurality of change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

(9)
The game stand according to (8) above,
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a first change candidate display (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1),
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a second change candidate display (for example, a green circular change notice icon k2),
When the first change candidate display is displayed, the second change candidate display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(10)
The game stand according to any one of (7) to (9) above,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the plurality of change candidate displays may change due to a single change display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (10) above,
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display is configured to change from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low expectation degree of jackpot among the plurality of change candidate displays.
The jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the held icon after the change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(12)
The gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (11) above,
In the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one change candidate display (for example, a blue circular change notice icon k1) of the plurality of change candidate displays is the other of the plurality of change candidate displays. Change candidate display (for example, green circular change notice icon k2) may change to the same type of change candidate display,
The hold icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display when a plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are displayed, rather than when a plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are not displayed. Configured to be easy,
A game stand characterized by that.

(13)
The game stand according to any one of (7) to (12) above,
In the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, when the display number of the change candidate displays decreases, the mode changes to the hold icon mode to the mode corresponding to the remaining change candidate display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(14)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a change notice display (for example, a change notice display j),
The change notice display is a display for notifying that the change candidate display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(15)
The game table according to (14) above,
The change notice display is a display that is displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(16)
The game stand according to any one of (1) to (15) above,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The change notice display is started by operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(17)
The gaming machine according to (16) above,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect (for example, a button icon aspect),
The fourth aspect is an aspect simulating the operation means,
The change notice display is started when the operation means is operated in a state where the hold icon of the fourth aspect is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(18)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (17) above,
The second display does not change to the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(19)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (18) above,
One display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a third display (for example, a rainbow color change candidate display),
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is confirmed in the variation display of one of the decoration symbols of the decoration symbol being executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol being held. Configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(20)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (19) above,
The display means includes a display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device 208N) that does not display the variation display of the decorative symbols.
A game stand characterized by that.

(21)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (20) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228 again.
For example, the effects shown in FIGS. 209 (k) to (o) may be displayed as a hold icon change effect display for changing the mode of the hold icon. The hold icon change effect display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 209 (e) to (j) and the like. Further, the next hold icon change effect display for the hold icon f1 may be performed after FIG. 209 (o), and in this case, the next hold icon change effect display is shown in FIGS. 209 (k) to (o). ) Etc. may be displayed for the hold icon f1 within the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display on which the pending icon change effect table is displayed. In this case, Yoshimune n may not be erased in the period between the hold icon change effect display and the next hold icon change effect display shown in FIGS. 209 (k) to (o). Yoshimune n may or may not be erased during the period between the hold icon change effect display and the next hold icon change effect display shown in FIGS. 209 (k) to (o). The target of the hold icon change effect display may be any of the hold icons having the hold ranks of the first to fourth.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j) or the like may be changed icon change effect displays for changing the change icon mode. The variation icon change effect display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to (j) and the like. In addition, the next change icon change effect display for the change icon e1 may be performed after FIG. 222 (j). In this case, Yoshimune n may not be erased in the period between the change icon change effect display and the next change icon change effect display shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to (j). Yoshimune n may or may not be erased in the period between the change icon change effect display and the next change icon change effect display shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to (j).

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (h) may be changed effect display of change candidate display that changes the mode of change candidate display. The change effect display of the change candidate display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (h). Moreover, the change effect display of the next change candidate display for the change candidate display k1 may be performed after FIG. 211 (i), and in this case, the change effect display of the next change candidate display is shown in FIG. The change candidate display k1 may be displayed within the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display on which the change candidate display variation effect display shown in a) to (h) or the like is performed. In this case, Yoshimune n may not be deleted in the period between the change effect display of the change candidate display and the change effect display of the next change candidate display shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to (h). Note that Yoshimune n does not have to be deleted in the period between the change effect display of the change candidate display shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to (h) and the change effect display of the next change candidate display. Also good.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to (k) may be changed effect display of change candidate display that changes the mode of candidate display (effect candidate display). The change effect display of the candidate display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to (k) and the like. In addition, the change effect display of the next candidate display for the candidate display s1 may be performed after FIG. 219 (k), and in this case, the change effect display of the next candidate display is shown in FIG. The candidate display s1 may be displayed within the same decorative symbol variation display as the decorative symbol variation display on which the variation candidate display shown in (k) or the like is performed. In this case, Yoshimune n may not be erased in the period between the change effect display of the candidate display shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to 219 (k) and the change effect display of the next candidate display. Yoshimune n may or may not be erased in the period between the change effect display of the candidate display shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to 219 (k) and the change effect display of the next candidate display. .

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 can display a plurality of change effect displays, and the change effect display is displayed a plurality of times (two or more times) in a certain decorative pattern change display. There is a case. The change effect display is a display including a character display (for example, Yoshimune n), and the character display may not be erased in a period between the change effect display and the next change effect display. The pachinko machine 100 continuously displays the character display while displaying the variation display of the same decorative design as the variation display of the decorative design on which the change effect display is displayed, and displays the next change effect display during the variation display of the decoration design. Can be expected to be displayed by the player. Further, the pachinko machine 100 can cause the player to expect that a change effect display is displayed a plurality of times during a variation display of a certain decorative pattern by continuously displaying the character display.

  As the change effect display, in addition to the above, a change effect display for changing the mode of the timer notice effect display shown in FIG. 53 (a5), a character string image of “castle town” shown in FIG. 208 (a), etc. Change effect display to change the aspect of the stage name display including, change effect display to change the aspect of the button image, change effect display of the meter rise shown in FIGS. 80 (10) to (12), FIGS. 9) Meter change effect display shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) to (A 6-2-3) change effect display where the navigation character YM is promoted, Curtain effect shown in FIG. 240 (p ′) There are a change effect display for changing the mode of the curtain display CH, a change effect display for changing the mode of the button image (operation means display od1) that is always displayed as shown in FIGS. There may be a case where the same type or a plurality of types of change effect displays are displayed a plurality of times within the same decorative design variation display. In addition, the character display used for the change effect display may not be deleted between the change effect display and the next change effect display.

  In addition, the hold icon in which the change effect display is displayed more than once than the change display of the decorative symbol subject to the advance notice of the display such as the hold icon, the change icon, the change candidate display, and the candidate display in which the change effect display is displayed only once. In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol subject to the advance notice of the display such as the variation icon, the variation candidate display and the candidate display, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.

  Further, Yoshimune n may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the change effect display is displayed. Yoshimune n may be displayed during the stop display of the variation display of decorative symbols. Moreover, Yoshimune n may be displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the change effect display is displayed.

(1A1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A holding means (for example, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area) capable of storing start information as a hold,
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a change candidate display, and an effect candidate display),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a change effect display (for example, a hold icon change effect display, a variation icon change effect display, a change effect display of a change candidate display, or a change effect display of an effect candidate display)
The change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The change effect display is a display that may be displayed a plurality of times (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) in one variation display of the decorative symbol.
The change effect display is a display including a character display (for example, Yoshimune n),
In the first case, the character display may not be erased in a period between the change effect display and the next change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the character display is continuously displayed while the variation display of the same decorative design as the variation display of the decorative design on which the change effect display is displayed, and the variation display of the decoration design is being displayed. The player can be expected to display the next change effect display. Further, by continuously displaying the character display, it is possible to cause the player to expect that a change effect display is displayed a plurality of times during the variation display of a certain decorative symbol.

(1A2)
The gaming machine according to (1A1) above,
The first display is a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, white),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, blue),
The change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1A3)
The game stand according to (1A1) or (1A2) above,
The character display may be deleted after the change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1A4)
The game stand according to any one of (1A1) to (1A3),
The first display is a display for notifying the result of the variable display of the decorative design,
The decoration of the notice subject of the first display in which the change effect display is displayed a plurality of times, rather than the change display of the decoration pattern in the notice of the notice of the first display in which the change effect display is displayed only once. The symbol variation display is easier to finally display the big hit symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1A5)
The game stand according to any one of (1A1) to (1A4),
The character display may be displayed before the change display of the decorative symbol on which the change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1A6)
The game stand according to any one of (1A1) to (1A5),
In the first case, the character display is not erased in a period between the change effect display and the next change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1A7)
The gaming machine according to (1A1) above,
The first display is an effect candidate display (for example, candidate displays s1, s2 shown in FIG. 219 (c)),
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “drinking comparison”),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “swordsman”),
The change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1A8)
The game stand according to (1A7) above,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1A9)
The game stand according to (1A7) or (1A8) above,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1A10)
The game stand according to any one of (1A1) to (1A9),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228 again.
For example, it is good also as a hold icon change effect display which changes the mode of the hold icon corresponding to the 1st to 4th hold. The hold icon change effect display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 209 (e) to (j) and the like. The hold icon change effect display may be displayed a plurality of times with a plurality of continuous decorative symbol change displays. In this case, Yoshimune n displays the first hold icon change effect display and the second and subsequent hold icon changes. It may not be erased between effect displays. The first hold icon change effect display target hold icon and the second and subsequent hold icon change effect display target hold icons are the same. Note that the hold icon that is the target of the first hold icon change effect display and the hold icon that is the target of the second and subsequent hold icon change effect display may be different. Yoshimune n may not be erased or may be erased once in a period between the first hold icon change effect display and the second and subsequent hold icon change effect display.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j) or the like may be changed icon change effect displays for changing the change icon mode. The variation icon change effect display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to (j) and the like. The variation icon change effect display may be displayed a plurality of times with a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays. In this case, Yoshimune n will display the first variation icon change effect display and the second and subsequent variation icon changes. It may not be erased between effect displays. Yoshimune n may not be erased or may be erased once in a period between the first variation icon change effect display and the second and subsequent variation icon change effect display.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (h) may be changed effect display of change candidate display that changes the mode of change candidate display. The change effect display of the change candidate display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (h). The change effect display of the change candidate display may be displayed a plurality of times with a variation display of a plurality of successive decorative symbols. In this case, Yoshimune n is the change effect display of the first change candidate display and the second and subsequent times. The change effect display of the change candidate display may not be erased. Note that Yoshimune n may not be deleted in the period between the change effect display of the first change candidate display and the change effect display of the second and subsequent change candidate displays, or may be temporarily deleted.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to (k) may be changed effect display of change candidate display that changes the mode of candidate display (effect candidate display). The change effect display of the candidate display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to (k) and the like. The change effect display of the candidate display may be displayed a plurality of times with a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays. In this case, Yoshimune n is the first candidate display change effect display and the second and subsequent candidates. In some cases, the display is not erased between display changes. Yoshimune n may or may not be erased in the period between the change effect display of the first candidate display and the change effect display of the second and subsequent candidate displays.

  In this way, the decorative design display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 can display a plurality of change effect displays, and the change effect display may be displayed a plurality of times in a continuous display of a variation of the decorative symbols, In this case, the character display may not be deleted between a certain change effect display and the subsequent change effect display. According to the pachinko machine 100, the character display can be continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol on which a certain change effect display is displayed. It is possible to make the player expect the next change effect display to be displayed during the variation display of the decorative pattern.

  As the change effect display, in addition to the above, a change effect display for changing the mode of the timer notice effect display shown in FIG. 53 (a5), a character string image of “castle town” shown in FIG. 208 (a), etc. Change effect display to change the aspect of the stage name display including, change effect display to change the aspect of the button image, change effect display of the meter rise shown in FIGS. 80 (10) to (12), FIGS. 9) Meter change effect display shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) to (A 6-2-3) change effect display where the navigation character YM is promoted, Curtain effect shown in FIG. 240 (p ′) There are a change effect display for changing the mode of the curtain display CH, a change effect display for changing the mode of the button image (operation means display od1) that is always displayed as shown in FIGS. There may be a case where the same type or a plurality of types of change effect displays are displayed a plurality of times within the same decorative design variation display. In addition, the character display used for the change effect display may not be deleted between the change effect display and the next change effect display.

  In addition, the hold icon in which the change effect display is displayed more than once than the change display of the decorative symbol subject to the advance notice of the display such as the hold icon, the change icon, the change candidate display, and the candidate display in which the change effect display is displayed only once. In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol subject to the advance notice of the display such as the variation icon, the variation candidate display and the candidate display, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.

  Further, Yoshimune n may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the change effect display is displayed. Yoshimune n may be displayed during the stop display of the variation display of decorative symbols. In addition, Yoshimune n may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in which the first variation effect display is displayed.

  Further, Yoshimune n may be erased after the end of the second and subsequent change effect display.

(1B1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A holding means (for example, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area) capable of storing start information as a hold,
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a change candidate display, and an effect candidate display),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a change effect display (for example, a hold icon change effect display, a variation icon change effect display, a change effect display of a change candidate display, or a change effect display of an effect candidate display)
The change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The change effect display is a display that may be displayed a plurality of times in a continuous display of the variation of the decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The change effect display is a display including a character display (for example, Yoshimune n),
In the first case, the character display includes the change effect display (hereinafter referred to as “first change effect display”) and the next change effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect display”). May not be erased between,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the character display can be continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decoration symbol following the variation display of the decoration symbol on which a certain change effect display is displayed. It is possible to make the player expect the next change effect display to be displayed during the variation display of the next and subsequent decorative symbols.

(1B2)
The gaming machine according to (1B1) above,
In the first case, the first change effect display and the second change effect display are displayed with different decorative symbol variation displays,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B3)
The game stand according to (1B1) or (1B2) above,
The first display is a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, white),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, blue),
The first change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B4)
The gaming machine according to (1B3) above,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the first mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B5)
The game stand according to (1B3) or (1B4) above,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, green),
The second change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the second mode to the third mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B6)
The game stand according to (1B5) above,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the third mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B7)
The game stand according to any one of (1B1) to (1B6) above,
The character display may be erased after the second change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B8)
The game stand according to any one of (1B1) to (1B7),
The first change effect display and the second change effect display may be displayed during the display of the same decorative design variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B9)
The game stand according to any one of (1B1) to (1B7),
The character display may be displayed before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B10)
The game stand according to any one of (1B1) to (1B9) above,
The character display may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the second change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B11)
The game stand according to any one of (1B1) to (1B10),
The second change effect display may be displayed after the first change effect display,
In the first case, the first character is not erased in a period from the end of the first change effect display to the start of the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B12)
The game stand according to (1B1) or (1B2) above,
The first display is an effect candidate display (for example, candidate displays s1, s2 shown in FIG. 219 (c)),
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “drinking comparison”),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “bowling”),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “swordsman”),
The first change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In this manner, the change effect display of the effect candidate display shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to 219 (h) is obtained by changing the candidate display from the character string image of “drinking comparison” to the character string image of “bowling”. The change effect display of the second and subsequent effect candidate displays performed after FIG. 219 (h) may be changed from the aspect including the character string image of “bowling” to the character “swordsman”. You may change to the aspect containing a column image. The jackpot reliability of the effect display corresponding to the candidate display is SP reach for drinking comparison, SP reach for bowling, and SP reach for swordsman in descending order.

(1B13)
The game stand according to (1B12) above,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. It ’s easier to display the big hit symbol in the end,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the third aspect is displayed rather than the variable display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second aspect is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B14)
The game stand according to (1B12) or (1B13) above,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1B15)
The game stand according to any one of (1B1) to (1B14) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228 again.
For example, it is good also as a hold icon change effect display which changes the mode of the hold icon corresponding to the 1st to 4th hold. The hold icon change effect display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 209 (e) to (j) and the like. The hold icon change effect display may be displayed a plurality of times with a variation display of a certain decorative pattern. In this case, Yoshimune n displays the first hold icon change effect display and the second and subsequent hold icon changes. It may not be erased between effect displays. The first hold icon change effect display target hold icon and the second and subsequent hold icon change effect display target hold icons are the same. Note that the hold icon that is the target of the first hold icon change effect display and the hold icon that is the target of the second and subsequent hold icon change effect display may be different. Yoshimune n may not be erased or may be erased once in the period between the first hold icon change effect display and the second hold icon change effect display.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j) or the like may be changed icon change effect displays for changing the change icon mode. The variation icon change effect display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to (j) and the like. The variation icon change effect display may be displayed a plurality of times with a variation display of a certain decorative pattern. In this case, Yoshimune n displays the first variation icon change effect display and the second and subsequent variation icon changes. It may not be erased between effect displays. Yoshimune n may not be erased or may be erased once in the period between the first variation icon change effect display and the second variation icon change effect display.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (h) may be changed effect display of change candidate display that changes the mode of change candidate display. The change effect display of the change candidate display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (h). The change effect display of the change candidate display may be displayed a plurality of times with a variation display of a certain decorative pattern. In this case, Yoshimune n changes the change effect display of the first change candidate display and the second and subsequent times. The change effect display of the change candidate display may not be erased. Note that Yoshimune n may not be deleted in the period between the change effect display of the first change candidate display and the change effect display of the second and subsequent change candidate displays, or may be temporarily deleted.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to (k) may be changed effect display of change candidate display that changes the mode of candidate display (effect candidate display). The change effect display of the candidate display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to (k) and the like. The change effect display of the candidate display may be displayed a plurality of times in a certain decorative pattern variation display. In this case, Yoshimune n is the first candidate display change effect display and the second and subsequent candidates. In some cases, the display is not erased between display changes. Yoshimune n may or may not be erased during the period between the first and subsequent candidate display change effect displays and the second candidate display change effect display.

  In this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 can display a plurality of change effect displays, and the change effect display may be displayed a plurality of times in a certain decorative pattern variation display, In this case, the character display may not be deleted between a certain change effect display and the subsequent change effect display. According to the pachinko machine 100, since the character display can be continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design on which a certain change effect display is displayed, the next display during the display of the variation display of the decoration design is performed. The player can be expected to display the change effect display.

  As the change effect display, in addition to the above, a change effect display for changing the mode of the timer notice effect display shown in FIG. 53 (a5), a character string image of “castle town” shown in FIG. 208 (a), etc. Change effect display to change the aspect of the stage name display including, change effect display to change the aspect of the button image, change effect display of the meter rise shown in FIGS. 80 (10) to (12), FIGS. 9) Meter change effect display shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) to (A 6-2-3) change effect display where the navigation character YM is promoted, Curtain effect shown in FIG. 240 (p ′) There are a change effect display for changing the mode of the curtain display CH, a change effect display for changing the mode of the button image (operation means display od1) that is always displayed as shown in FIGS. There may be a case where the same type or a plurality of types of change effect displays are displayed a plurality of times within the same decorative design variation display. In addition, the character display used for the change effect display may not be deleted between the change effect display and the next change effect display.

  In addition, the hold icon in which the change effect display is displayed more than once than the change display of the decorative symbol subject to the advance notice of the display such as the hold icon, the change icon, the change candidate display, and the candidate display in which the change effect display is displayed only once. In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol subject to the advance notice of the display such as the variation icon, the variation candidate display and the candidate display, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.

  Further, Yoshimune n may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the change effect display is displayed. Yoshimune n may be displayed during the stop display of the variation display of decorative symbols. In addition, Yoshimune n may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in which the first variation effect display is displayed.

  Further, Yoshimune n may be erased after the end of the second and subsequent change effect display.

(1C1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A holding means (for example, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area) capable of storing start information as a hold,
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a change candidate display, and an effect candidate display),
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of change effect display (for example, a hold icon change effect display, a change icon change effect display, a change effect display of a change candidate display, and a change effect display of an effect candidate display). ,
One effect of the plurality of types of change effect display is a first change effect display,
One effect of the plurality of types of change effect display is a second change effect display,
The first change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The second change effect display is a display that may change the second display to a display of a different mode,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display are displays that may be displayed in a single variation display of the decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). ,
The first change effect display is an effect including a character display (for example, Yoshimune n),
The second change effect display is an effect including the character display,
In the first case, the character display may not be erased in a period between the first change effect display and the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the character display can be continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design on which a certain change effect display is displayed. The player can be expected to display the next change effect display.

(1C2)
The game stand according to (1C1) above,
In the first case, the second change effect display is displayed after the first change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C3)
The game stand according to (1C1) or (1C2) above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, white),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, blue),
The first display is the hold icon of the first aspect,
The second display is the hold icon of the second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C4)
The game stand according to (1C3) above,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the first mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C5)
The game stand according to (1C3) or (1C4) above,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, green),
The second change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the second mode to the third mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C6)
The game stand according to (1C5) above,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the third mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1C1) to (1C6),
The character display may be erased after the second change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1C1) to (1C7),
The first change effect display and the second change effect display may be displayed during the display of the same decorative design variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1C1) to (1C8),
The character display may be displayed before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1C1) to (1C9),
The character display may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the second change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1C1) to (1C10),
The second change effect display may be displayed after the first change effect display,
In the first case, the first character is not erased in a period from the end of the first change effect display to the start of the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C12)
The game stand according to (1C1) or (1C2) above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an effect candidate display (for example, candidate displays s1, s2 shown in FIG. 219 (c)),
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “drinking comparison”),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “bowling”),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “swordsman”),
The first display is the effect candidate display of the first aspect,
The second display is the effect candidate display of the second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In this manner, the change effect display of the effect candidate display shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to 219 (h) is obtained by changing the candidate display from the character string image of “drinking comparison” to the character string image of “bowling”. The change effect display of the second and subsequent effect candidate displays performed after FIG. 219 (h) may be changed from the aspect including the character string image of “bowling” to the character “swordsman”. You may change to the aspect containing a column image. The jackpot reliability of the effect display corresponding to the candidate display is SP reach for drinking comparison, SP reach for bowling, and SP reach for swordsman in descending order.

(1C13)
The game stand according to (1C12) above,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. It ’s easier to display the big hit symbol in the end,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the third aspect is displayed rather than the variable display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second aspect is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C14)
The game stand according to (1C12) or (1C13) above,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1C15)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1C1) to (1C14),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 228 again.
For example, it is good also as a hold icon change effect display which changes the mode of the hold icon corresponding to the 1st to 4th hold. The hold icon change effect display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 209 (e) to (j) and the like. In some cases, the hold icon change effect display is displayed once with a variation display of the continuous decorative symbols. In this case, Yoshimune n displays the first hold icon change effect display and the second hold icon change effect display. It may not be erased between. The hold icon that is the target of the first hold icon change effect display and the hold icon that is the target of the second hold icon change effect display are the same. The hold icon that is the target of the first hold icon change effect display and the hold icon that is the target of the second hold icon change effect display may be different. Yoshimune n may not be erased or may be erased once in a period between the first hold icon change effect display and the second and subsequent hold icon change effect display.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to 222 (j) or the like may be changed icon change effect displays for changing the change icon mode. The variation icon change effect display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 222 (f) to (j) and the like. In some cases, the variation icon change effect display is displayed once in a variation display of continuous decorative symbols. In this case, Yoshimune n displays the first change icon change effect display and the second change icon change effect display. It may not be erased between. Yoshimune n may not be erased or may be erased once in the period between the first variation icon change effect display and the second variation icon change effect display.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (h) may be changed effect display of change candidate display that changes the mode of change candidate display. The change effect display of the change candidate display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (h). The change effect display of the change candidate display may be displayed once every time with the variation display of the continuous decorative symbols. In this case, Yoshimune n changes the change effect display of the first change candidate display and the second change candidate. In some cases, the display is not erased between display changes. Yoshimune n may or may not be erased in the period between the change effect display of the first change candidate display and the change effect display of the second change candidate display.

  Further, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to (k) may be changed effect display of change candidate display that changes the mode of candidate display (effect candidate display). The change effect display of the candidate display may be a display including Yoshimune n shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to (k) and the like. The change effect display of the candidate display may be displayed once by a variation display of successive decorative symbols. In this case, Yoshimune n changes the change effect display of the first candidate display and the change of the second candidate display. It may not be erased between effect displays. Yoshimune n may not be erased or may be erased once in the period between the change effect display of the first candidate display and the change effect display of the second candidate display.

  Thus, the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 can display a plurality of change effect displays, and the first change effect display (first change effect display) and the second change effect display (second time display). (Change effect display) may be displayed as a variation display of continuous decorative symbols. In this case, the character display may not be erased between the first change effect display and the second change effect display. According to the pachinko machine 100, the character display can be continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decoration symbol next to the variation display of the decoration symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed. It is possible to cause the player to expect that the second change effect display is displayed during the decorative symbol variation display.

  As the change effect display, in addition to the above, a change effect display for changing the mode of the timer notice effect display shown in FIG. 53 (a5), a character string image of “castle town” shown in FIG. 208 (a), etc. Change effect display to change the aspect of the stage name display including, change effect display to change the aspect of the button image, change effect display of the meter rise shown in FIGS. 80 (10) to (12), FIGS. 9) Meter change effect display shown in FIG. 152 (A 6-2-1) to (A 6-2-3) change effect display where the navigation character YM is promoted, Curtain effect shown in FIG. 240 (p ′) There are a change effect display for changing the mode of the curtain display CH, a change effect display for changing the mode of the button image (operation means display od1) that is always displayed as shown in FIGS. There may be a case where the same type or a plurality of types of change effect displays are displayed a plurality of times within the same decorative design variation display. In addition, the character display used for the change effect display may not be deleted between the change effect display and the next change effect display.

  In addition, the hold icon in which the change effect display is displayed more than once than the change display of the decorative symbol subject to the advance notice of the display such as the hold icon, the change icon, the change candidate display, and the candidate display in which the change effect display is displayed only once. In the case of the variation display of the decorative symbol subject to the advance notice of the display such as the variation icon, the variation candidate display and the candidate display, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.

  Further, Yoshimune n may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the change effect display is displayed. Yoshimune n may be displayed during the stop display of the variation display of decorative symbols. In addition, Yoshimune n may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display in which the first variation effect display is displayed.

  Further, Yoshimune n may be erased after the end of the second and subsequent change effect display.

(1D1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A holding means (for example, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 1 random value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area, special figure 2 random value storage area) capable of storing start information as a hold,
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a change candidate display, and an effect candidate display),
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a change candidate display, and an effect candidate display),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of change effect display,
One effect of the plurality of types of change effect display is a first change effect display (for example, the first change effect display),
One effect of the plurality of types of change effect display is a second change effect display (for example, a second change effect display),
The first change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The second change effect display is a display that may change the second display to a display of a different mode,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display are displays that may be displayed in a continuous variation display of the decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The first change effect display is a display including a character display (for example, Yoshimune n),
The second change effect display is a display including the character display,
In the first case, the character display may not be erased in a period between the first change effect display and the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the character display can be continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decoration symbol following the variation display of the decoration symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed. The player can be expected to display the second change effect display during the variation display of the next decorative symbol.

(1D2)
The gaming machine according to (1D1) above,
In the first case, the second change effect display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative design started after the variation display of the decorative design in which the first change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D3)
The game stand according to (1D1) or (1D2) above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, white),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, blue),
The first display is the hold icon of the first aspect,
The second display is the hold icon of the second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D4)
The game stand according to (1D3) above,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the first mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D5)
The game stand according to (1D3) or (1D4) above,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, green),
The second change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the second mode to the third mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D6)
The gaming machine according to (1D5) above,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the third mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D7)
The game stand according to any one of (1D1) to (1D6),
The character display may be erased after the second change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D8)
The game stand according to any one of (1D1) to (1D7) above,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display may be displayed during the display of the same decorative design variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D9)
The game stand according to any one of (1D1) to (1D8),
The character display may be displayed before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1D1) to (1D9),
The character display may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the second change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D11)
The game stand according to any one of (1D1) to (1D10),
The second change effect display may be displayed after the first change effect display,
In the first case, the first character is not erased in a period from the end of the first change effect display to the start of the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D12)
The game stand according to (1D1) or (1D2) above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an effect candidate display (for example, candidate displays s1, s2 shown in FIG. 219 (c)),
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “drinking comparison”),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “bowling”),
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect (for example, an aspect including a character string image of “swordsman”),
The first display is the effect candidate display of the first aspect,
The second display is the effect candidate display of the second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In this manner, the change effect display of the effect candidate display shown in FIGS. 219 (b) to 219 (h) is obtained by changing the candidate display from the character string image of “drinking comparison” to the character string image of “bowling”. The change effect display of the second and subsequent effect candidate displays performed after FIG. 219 (h) may be changed from the aspect including the character string image of “bowling” to the character “swordsman”. You may change to the aspect containing a column image. The jackpot reliability of the effect display corresponding to the candidate display is SP reach for drinking comparison, SP reach for bowling, and SP reach for swordsman in descending order.

(1D13)
The gaming machine according to (1D12) above,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. It ’s easier to display the big hit symbol in the end,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the third aspect is displayed rather than the variable display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second aspect is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D14)
The game stand according to (1D12) or (1D13) above,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(1D15)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1D1) to (1D14),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

When the character display is displayed across a plurality of variable displays, the character display itself is a pre-read notice display.
When a plurality of change effect displays (regardless of whether or not they are the same type of change effect display) are displayed within the same variation display, it is easier to finally win a big hit.
Each change effect display is provided with a failure pattern in which the display mode of the target does not change.
The change effect display after the second time is easier to succeed than the first time.
The character display may change between each change effect display. As the change of the character, for example, the navigation character YM (Yoshimune) shown in FIG. 155 (E1) changes to another character that changes to the princess Navi character (Princess) shown in FIG. 155 (E4-2). 155 (E1), the white (default) navigation character YM changes to the red Navi character YM shown in FIG. 155 (E4-1), or FIG. 170 (No. 8-1). In some cases, the color of the character may change from the red navigation character YM shown to the golden navigation character YM shown in FIG. 170 (Part 13). Here, the princess's navigation character has a higher jackpot reliability (hit expectation) than the navigation character YM, and the red navigation character YM has a higher jackpot reliability than the white navigation character YM. . In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 155 and 170, the character display is a navigation character that is always displayed, but the character display that appears when the change effect display starts is changed to another character display between the change effect displays. Or the color may change. For example, Yoshimune n that appeared in FIG. 211 (b) is not erased after the end of the change effect display that ends in FIG. 211 (h), and the second and subsequent change effect displays are displayed after the color of Yoshimune n changes. May be. When the character changes, a change effect display corresponding to the character after the change and the color of the character is performed. For example, when the white Yoshimune changes to the red Yoshimune, the change effect display including the red Yoshimune may always change the hold icon, the change icon, and the change candidate display to red, and the jackpot reliability is higher. The display may be changed to a candidate display corresponding to the reach effect (for example, a swordsman reach candidate display including three “★” marks shown in FIG. 219 (h), a candidate display corresponding to the premium effect, etc.).
Further, the character display may not be erased during the wipe display or the reach effect. The wipe display is an effect in which a background image changes as shown in FIGS. 156 (6) to (9-1) and a background changes, or FIGS. 156 (14) to (17). Such a wipe display may be used. In FIGS. 156 (O 6) to (9-1), the display that is not visible because it overlaps with the heel image or the wipe display is a display other than the fifth pattern (decoration pattern on the upper left) or the display of the number of reservations (number on the upper right). However, even if the hold icon or the fluctuation icon overlaps the hold icon or the wipe icon and the hold icon or the change icon disappears, the character display is displayed so that it can be seen by overlapping the hail image or the wipe display. The character display may be displayed so as to be visible so as to overlap the image of the heel or the wipe display.
The character of the change effect display is displayed when the symbol variation is started, and may be continuously displayed even after the variation is stopped in a state where there is no suspension (waiting for a pending winning prize). In addition, the character of the change effect display is continuously displayed even when the special figure is not held while the fluctuation is stopped (waiting for the pending winning prize start), and thereafter, the symbol fluctuation display is displayed by winning the game ball to the special figure starting port. When the display is started, a change effect display including the character display may be displayed while the display is continued in the started pattern change display or later.
There may be a plurality of characters used for each change effect display. For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -5, a plurality of character displays may be displayed.
A display (such as a hold icon) that is subject to change in the second change effect display may be different from the display that is subject to the first change. For example, there are a plurality of white hold icons, a hold icon changes from white to blue in the first change effect display, and a hold icon changes from white to blue (white to red may be used) in the second change effect display. May change. The second change effect display is more likely to change to a more reliable aspect than the first change effect display. The same applies to, for example, a plurality of change candidate displays, candidate displays, meter displays, a plurality of character tables, and the like other than the hold icon. Here, the first change effect display is a change effect display that is performed first after the character display of the change effect display is displayed.
A character may change another character. For example, if both Yoshimune and Ninja are characters with a change effect display, an effect display in which a ninja changes a white Yoshimune to a red Yoshimune may be displayed.
The configurations described in (1A1) to (1A10), (1B1) to (1B15), (1C1) to (1C15), and (1D1) to (1D15) can be combined.

  The hold change display of the hold icon, the change display of the change icon, and the change display of the change candidate display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be performed by an effect display other than the effect display by the effect image. There may be no instantaneous display and it may be performed instantaneously.

  Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not be provided, and the effect displays shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayed only by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, only one sub display device may be provided, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the sub display device may display the effects shown in FIGS. 208 to 228, or the first decorative symbol display device. The effect display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayed on 208L and three or more sub-display devices. The effect display shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 may be displayed on any display device on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp and illumination until now is an example of a light emission means, and if a lamp | ramp emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube, it can replace | exchange (hereinafter the same).

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the detailed description above, particularly those described in Examples 1 to 22 and the modified examples, can be combined.

  As mentioned above, although it was an example about a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) so far, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, an enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. Or a slot machine shown in FIG.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Appendix 1)
Display means;
Hold means capable of storing start information as hold;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,
It is configured to notify the number of holds on the display number of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
The hold icon may change from one of the plurality of modes to another mode,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of change candidate displays,
The mode of the hold icon may change to a corresponding mode of one change candidate display among the plurality of types of change candidate displays displayed.
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a second display,
The first display may change to the second display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is used more than the variable display of the decorative design that starts after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed,
The hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third mode is consumed rather than the variation display of the decorative symbol which is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second mode is used. The decorative symbol variation display that is started is configured so that the jackpot symbol pattern is finally easier to be confirmed and displayed,
When the second display is displayed, the hold icon displayed in the first mode is configured to be easily changed to the third mode as compared to the second mode. A game table that features

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 2,
In the case where the first display is displayed, when the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode is changed, the mode of the hold icon is changed to the second mode. Configured,
In the case where the second display is displayed, when the mode of the hold icon displayed in the first mode is changed, the mode of the hold icon is changed to the third mode. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A game machine according to appendix 2 or 3,
In the case where the second display is displayed, when the mode of the hold icon displayed in the second mode is changed, the mode of the hold icon is changed to the third mode. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first character display,
The first character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The first character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is more easily changed to the second display when the first character display is displayed than when the first character display is not displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The display means is means capable of displaying a second character display,
The second character display is a display different from the change candidate display,
The second character display is a display different from the hold icon,
The first display is more easily changed to the second display when the second character display is displayed than when the first character display is displayed. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
The display means may display a plurality of the change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the hold icon may change to a mode corresponding to any one of the plurality of change candidate displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game stand according to appendix 8,
One of the plurality of change candidate displays is a first change candidate display,
One display of the plurality of change candidate displays is a second change candidate display,
When the first change candidate display is displayed, the second change candidate display may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 7 to 9,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, the plurality of change candidate displays may change due to a single change display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 7 to 10,
When a plurality of the change candidate displays are displayed, the change candidate display is configured to change from the change candidate display corresponding to the mode of the hold icon having a low expectation degree of jackpot among the plurality of change candidate displays.
The jackpot expectation is the jackpot expectation of the held icon after the change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 7 to 11,
When a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, one change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays is the same type of change candidate display as another change candidate display among the plurality of change candidate displays. May change to
The hold icon changes to a mode corresponding to the change candidate display when a plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are displayed, rather than when a plurality of change candidate displays of the same type are not displayed. Configured to be easy,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 7 to 12,
In the case where a plurality of change candidate displays are displayed, when the display number of the change candidate displays decreases, the mode changes to the hold icon mode to the mode corresponding to the remaining change candidate display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The display means is means capable of displaying a change notice display,
The change notice display is a display for notifying that the change candidate display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
The game stand according to appendix 14,
The change notice display is a display that is displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 14 or 15,
With operating means,
The change notice display is started by operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 16,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
The fourth aspect is an aspect simulating the operation means,
The change notice display is started when the operation means is operated in a state where the hold icon of the fourth aspect is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 17,
The second display does not change to the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 18,
One of the plurality of types of change candidate displays is a third display,
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol form is confirmed in the variation display of one of the decoration symbols of the decoration symbol being executed and the variation display of the decoration symbol being held. Configured to be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 19,
The display means includes a display device that does not display a variable display of the decorative design.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 20,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 1a1)
Display means;
Hold means capable of storing start information as hold;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
The display means is means capable of displaying a change effect display,
The change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The change effect display is a display that may be displayed a plurality of times (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) in one variation display of the decorative symbol.
The change effect display is a display including a character display,
In the first case, the character display may not be erased in a period between the change effect display and the next change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a1,
The first display is a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a1 or 1a2,
The character display may be deleted after the change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a3,
The first display is a display for notifying the result of the variable display of the decorative design,
The decoration of the notice subject of the first display in which the change effect display is displayed a plurality of times, rather than the change display of the decoration pattern in the notice of the notice of the first display in which the change effect display is displayed only once. The symbol variation display is easier to finally display the big hit symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a4,
The character display may be displayed before the change display of the decorative symbol on which the change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a5,
In the first case, the character display is not erased in a period between the change effect display and the next change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a7)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a1,
The first display is an effect candidate display,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a8)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a7,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a9)
The game stand according to appendix 1a7 or 1a8,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 1b1)
Display means;
Hold means capable of storing start information as hold;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
The display means is means capable of displaying a change effect display,
The change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The change effect display is a display that may be displayed a plurality of times in a continuous display of the variation of the decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The change effect display is a display including a character display,
In the first case, the character display includes the change effect display (hereinafter referred to as “first change effect display”) and the next change effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect display”). May not be erased between,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1b1,
In the first case, the first change effect display and the second change effect display are displayed with different decorative symbol variation displays,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b3)
The game stand according to appendix 1b1 or 1b2,
The first display is a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b4)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1b3,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the first mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b5)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1b3 or 1b4,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the second mode to the third mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b6)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1b5,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the third mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1b1 to 1b6,
The character display may be erased after the second change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1b1 to 1b7,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display may be displayed during the display of the same decorative design variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1b1 to 1b8,
The character display may be displayed before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1b1 to 1b9,
The character display may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the second change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1b1 to 1b10,
The second change effect display may be displayed after the first change effect display,
In the first case, the first character is not erased in a period from the end of the first change effect display to the start of the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b12)
The game stand according to appendix 1b1 or 1b2,
The first display is an effect candidate display,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b13)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1b12,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. It ’s easier to display the big hit symbol in the end,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the third aspect is displayed rather than the variable display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second aspect is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b14)
The game stand according to appendix 1b12 or 1b13,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1b15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1b1 to 1b14,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 1c1)
Display means;
Hold means capable of storing start information as hold;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of change effect display,
One effect of the plurality of types of change effect display is a first change effect display,
One effect of the plurality of types of change effect display is a second change effect display,
The first change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The second change effect display is a display that may change the second display to a display of a different mode,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display are displays that may be displayed in a single variation display of the decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first case”). ,
The first change effect display is an effect including a character display,
The second change effect display is an effect including the character display,
In the first case, the character display may not be erased in a period between the first change effect display and the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1c1,
In the first case, the second change effect display is displayed after the first change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1c1 or 1c2,
The display means is means capable of displaying a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first display is the hold icon of the first aspect,
The second display is the hold icon of the second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c4)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1c3,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the first mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c5)
The game stand according to appendix 1c3 or 1c4,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the second mode to the third mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c6)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1c5,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the third mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1c1 to 1c6,
The character display may be erased after the second change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1c1 to 1c7,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display may be displayed during the display of the same decorative design variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1c1 to 1c8,
The character display may be displayed before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1c1 to 1c9,
The character display may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the second change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1c1 to 1c10,
The second change effect display may be displayed after the first change effect display,
In the first case, the first character is not erased in a period from the end of the first change effect display to the start of the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1c1 or 1c2,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect candidate display,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The first display is the effect candidate display of the first aspect,
The second display is the effect candidate display of the second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c13)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1c12,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. It ’s easier to display the big hit symbol in the end,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the third aspect is displayed rather than the variable display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second aspect is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c14)
The game stand according to appendix 1c12 or 1c13,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1c15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1c1 to 1c14,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 1d1)
Display means;
Hold means capable of storing start information as hold;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of change effect display,
One effect of the plurality of types of change effect display is a first change effect display,
One effect of the plurality of types of change effect display is a second change effect display,
The first change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The second change effect display is a display that may change the second display to a display of a different mode,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display are displays that may be displayed in a continuous variation display of the decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The first change effect display is a display including a character display,
The second change effect display is a display including the character display,
In the first case, the character display may not be erased in a period between the first change effect display and the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
In the first case, the second change effect display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative design started after the variation display of the decorative design in which the first change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1d1 or 1d2,
The display means is means capable of displaying a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first display is the hold icon of the first aspect,
The second display is the hold icon of the second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d4)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1d3,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the first mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d5)
The game stand according to appendix 1d3 or 1d4,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the second mode to the third mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d6)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1d5,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the third mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1d1 to 1d6,
The character display may be erased after the second change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1d1 to 1d7,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display may be displayed during the display of the same decorative design variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1d1 to 1d8,
The character display may be displayed before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1d1 to 1d9,
The character display may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the second change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1d1 to 1d10,
The second change effect display may be displayed after the first change effect display,
In the first case, the first character is not erased in a period from the end of the first change effect display to the start of the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1d1 or 1d2,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect candidate display,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The first display is the effect candidate display of the first aspect,
The second display is the effect candidate display of the second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d13)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1d12,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. It ’s easier to display the big hit symbol in the end,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the third aspect is displayed rather than the variable display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second aspect is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d14)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1d12 or 1d13,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1d15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1d1 to 1d14,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

  Subsequently, a specific example of the hold change effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 228 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 229 to 243. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 represent common components when the same reference numerals used so far are used. Even if different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as a technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 208 to 228 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 229 to 243, and conversely, in FIGS. 229 to 243. It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 208 to 228. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

  In the configuration of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIGS. 229 to 243, the holding frame UI is provided in the effect display area 208d, which is the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIGS. 208 to 228. Different from the configuration of the display screen. The hold frame UI can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface that provides various information to the player. In the hold frame UI, a variable icon display area e is arranged at the left end, and a hold icon display area is arranged on the right side thereof. In the examples in FIGS. 229 to 243, the non-electric support state is set, and only the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed as the hold icon display area. An icon display area may be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, four areas corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each area. In the fluctuation icon display area e, a holding icon display area is provided with a stage that is higher and larger than the stage provided in each area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area f. Is displayed.

  Here, the fluctuation icons are summarized again. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning prize moves from the hold icon display area (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon display area f) to the variable icon display area e, the moving icon is referred to as a variable icon. It may be expressed that the fluctuation icon moves. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (normal notice that is the change notice), and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  On the other hand, with respect to the hold icon, a notice (pre-reading notice) about whether or not the symbol variation display that is started when the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested is started depending on the display mode.

  In addition, the holding frame UI is provided with a base icon UIb extending to the left and right, and the four areas prepared in the holding icon display area are viewed as area icons that are displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side. The stage prepared in the variable icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side.

  Further, a chunklet display CR is displayed on the hold frame UI. The chunklet display CR shown in FIG. 229 (a) is displayed in a closed state, and the upper and lower frame portions CRf are in contact with each other. On the other hand, the chainlet display CR shown in FIG. 229 (r) or the like is displayed in an open state, and the upper and lower frame portions CRf are separated from each other, and a display space CRs is provided therebetween. In the Chan throughlet display CR, a variable display is performed in the display space CRs (see (s) in the figure), and a tutorial display, a notice display, and the like are displayed in the display space CRs.

  A pattern may be attached to the base icon UIb or the frame portion CRf of the channel display CR. This pattern may be attached to various icons such as a hold icon and a change icon. Moreover, it may be attached to various displays described later. In addition, the pattern may be attached to the whole and may be attached only to one part. That is, a pattern is attached to at least a part of various icons such as the base icon UIb, the frame portion CRf of the channel display CR, the hold icon and the change icon. A plurality of types of patterns are prepared as other display modes in addition to the default display mode. Other display modes include a display mode of a pre-reading notice, a display mode of a normal notice, or a display form of a notice that a notice about these jackpots (pre-reading notice or normal notice) will be performed. . If it is a display mode of the notice about the jackpot, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot differs depending on the display mode. The higher the degree of expectation for the jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol. In the following description, the level of expectation of jackpot is expressed by the pattern. The default pattern is a dot pattern, which is the display mode when “no change” is selected in the effect lottery regarding the display mode. In the default pattern, the expected degree of jackpot is not announced, but the expected degree of jackpot may be announced. In this case, the icon pattern has the lowest degree of expectation for jackpot (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The pattern of the display mode of the notice for the big hit is a diagonal line pattern, a rhombus pattern, a lattice pattern, a vertical line pattern, and a horizontal line pattern in descending order of expectation of the big hit. The hatched pattern has a higher degree of expectation for jackpot than 0%. On the other hand, the vertical line pattern is rich in big hits, and the horizontal line pattern has a higher expectation degree for big hits (for example, 100%), and may be, for example, determined to be big hit. In the following description, when it is more than a lattice pattern, it means a lattice pattern, a vertical line pattern, and a horizontal line pattern.

  Here, the expectation degree of jackpot is represented by a pattern, but the expectation degree of jackpot may be represented by a color instead of the pattern. For example, the default dot pattern may be blinking white, the diagonal line pattern is blue, the rhombus pattern is green, the lattice pattern is red, the vertical line pattern is gold, and the horizontal line pattern is rainbow. In addition, the color may also be attached to the whole, and may be attached only to one part. In other words, at least a part of various icons such as the base icon UIb, the frame portion CRf of the chunklet display CR, the hold icon and the change icon is colored.

  The same is true for the display form of the notice that the notice of jackpot is made, and the expectation (reliability) that the notice of jackpot will be made differs depending on the display form.

  FIG. 229 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending change effect.

  The background of the castle town is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 229 (a), and the effect mode display provided below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the area, “castle town” representing the castle town mode is displayed. Further, the stage SG is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but nothing is displayed on the stage SG. In FIG. 229 (a), the decorative symbols that have been displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first decorative symbol display device 208L stop at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 1”. Is displayed. On the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. 229 (a), the variation icon e1 of the default mode remains displayed. In addition, two hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a default mode.

  In FIG. 229 (b), a decoration symbol is confirmed and displayed. When the fixed display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. In 229 (c), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In FIG. 229 (d), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from “2” to “1”. However, two hold icons are displayed.

  In FIG. 229 (e), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon (first display) displayed in the first area (the area closest to the variable icon display area e) of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. The hold icon f1 has started moving toward the fluctuation icon display area e, and is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f (the second area closest to the fluctuation icon display area e). The held icon (second held icon) f2 that has been started to move toward the first area.

  In FIG. 229 (f), the moving animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 of the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. The first hold icon f1 in the default mode is displayed. That is, the display mode does not change before and after the start of the moving animation. However, it may be changed to a notice mode or a prefetch notice mode during or after the movement of the icon.

  In FIG. 229 (g), the character NJ for holding change effect jumps down on the stage SG in the third decorative symbol display device 208N while standing upright. Several types of hold change effects are prepared, and when the hold change effects here are distinguished from other hold change effects, they are referred to as “hold change first effects”. In the following FIG. 229 (h), the character NJ determines a pose, and further, a display of a balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed on the character NJ. In FIG. 229 (i), the character NJ has a shuriken in his hand, and in FIG. 229 (j), the shuriken is thrown. The on-hold change first effect may be viewed as starting from the timing at which the character NJ in FIG. 229 (g) appears, or the timing at which the character NJ in FIG. It may be seen that it has started from the beginning, or it may be seen that the character NJ in FIG. (I) has started the shuriken, or the character NJ in FIG. It may be seen that it starts from the timing of throwing.

  In FIG. 229 (k), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps with the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 1 (l), the first hold icon f1 and the shuriken are covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. The state where the shuriken overlaps the icon can be seen as the shuriken hit the icon (and so on). It may be considered that the hold change first effect is started from the timing at which the display of the effect image mf is started. In the following FIG. 229 (m), the effect image mf becomes smaller and the first hold icon f1 starts to appear. That is, the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a hatched pattern is starting to appear. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 229 (n), the first hold icon f1 in a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The character NJ shown in FIG. 229 (n) takes a successful pose when the icon display mode is successfully changed. In FIG. 229 (o), the erasing animation of the character NJ is started, and the character NJ is covered with the smoke image and cannot be seen. In FIG. 229 (p), the smoke image disappears and the character NJ disappears, returning to a state where nothing is displayed on the stage SG. The hold change first effect may be regarded as the end when the effect image mf in FIG. 229 (n) disappears, that is, when the change in the state of the hold icon is completed, or at the timing when the character NJ in FIG. You can see it as finished.

  In FIG. 229 (p), the closed channel display CR starts to vibrate, and the roulette effect is started. In the following FIG. 229 (q), the upper and lower frame portions CRf begin to open, and the display space CRs begins to appear. In FIG. 229 (r), the Chan throughlet display CR is fully opened, and the display space CRs is “probably”. The display of the roaring effect is displayed. This roaring effect corresponds to an effect of notifying that the variable display is started by the channel display CR, and can be said to be a sign effect. In FIG. 229 (s), the variable display is started in the display space CRs. In addition, even if the roaring effect is performed, the variable display may not be started. In addition, there is a case in which no stuttering effect is performed and fluctuation display is not started. Alternatively, there is a case where the fluctuation display is suddenly started without performing the roaring effect, and in this case, the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher than when the roaring effect is performed and the variable display is started. On the contrary, it may be lower. In FIG. 229 (t), the change display in the channel display CR is finished, a character display of “next expectation” is displayed, and a pre-reading notice for the next change is performed. In FIG. 229 (u), the chainlet display CR has begun to close, and in FIG. 229 (v), the chunklet display CR has returned to the closed state. The Chan throughlet effect may be seen from FIG. 229 (p) to FIG. (V) or from FIG. (R) to FIG. (T).

  In FIG. 229 (w), the decorations in the left symbol display area 208a among the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, which have been continuously displayed at high speed, are displayed. The fluctuation speed of the symbol is reduced to the extent that the symbol can be recognized. In the same figure (x), a first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and this time the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c. The fluctuation speed of has fallen to such an extent that the symbol can be recognized. In FIG. 229 (y), the second stop (temporary stop) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c, but the reach state is not reached, and the variation rate of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b recognizes the symbol. It has fallen to the extent possible. In FIG. 229 (z), a temporary stop is performed in the remaining middle symbol display area 208b, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” fluctuates (temporary display). In FIG. 229 (END), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. Similar to FIG. 229 (a), immediately after the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the variation icon e1 remains displayed.

  FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold change second effect is performed together with the hold change first effect. FIG. 230 shows two examples of the left half example and the right half example.

  First, an example of the left half will be described. FIG. 230 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the decorative symbol changes in a state where one hold icon f1 having a default dot pattern is displayed. The display is done. The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 230 (a) shows a part of the treasure chest image displayed as the change notice display j in FIG. 208 (f) and the like. That is, an appearance animation in which the treasure chest TB gradually appears from the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed. When the hold change effect related to the treasure box TB displayed as the change notice display is distinguished from other hold change effects, it is referred to as “hold change second effect”. In FIG. 230 (b), the appearance animation is completed and the entire treasure chest TB in the closed state is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the following FIG. 230 (c), the treasure chest TB is opened, A change candidate icon HKI appears. This change candidate icon HKI is a round icon having a diagonal pattern, and is displayed on the treasure chest TB. Note that the treasure chest TB shown in FIG. 230 is displayed in a dot pattern manner that is a default manner, and is not related to the variation candidate icon HKI appearance that appears from the inside, but the treasure chest TB manner The change candidate icon HKI that appears from the above may be matched with the aspect. For example, a change candidate icon HKI with a horizontal line pattern may appear in the treasure chest TB having a horizontal line pattern. Alternatively, the change candidate icon HKI does not always appear from the treasure box TB in any case, and the mode of the treasure box TB may indicate the ease with which the change candidate icon HKI appears. That is, there is a high possibility that the change candidate icon HKI appears in the order of the dot pattern, the diagonal line pattern, the rhombus pattern, the lattice pattern, the vertical line pattern, and the horizontal line pattern. If the pattern is a horizontal line pattern, the change candidate icon HKI always appears. You may do it.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 230 (d), the reserved change first effect character NJ appears on the stage SG. In FIG. 230 (e), the character NJ determines a pose and displays a balloon “Ikuzo”. In FIG. 230 (f), the character NJ holds the shuriken. In FIG. 230 (g), the character NJ throws a shuriken. Further, in FIG. 230 (g), a moving animation of the change candidate icon HKI is started. The change candidate icon HKI that has been stopped and displayed on the treasure box TB until then starts moving, and the change candidate icon HKI is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . That is, the left end portion of the change candidate icon HKI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right portion of the change candidate icon HKI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs the central portion of the change candidate icon HKI.

  The on-hold change second effect may be regarded as being started from the timing when the appearance animation of the treasure box TB is started, or as shown in FIG. 230 (b), starting from the timing when the appearance animation is completed. It may be seen that it starts from the timing when the change candidate icon HKI shown in FIG. 5C appears, or it starts from the timing when the moving animation of the change candidate icon HKI is started. You can see it.

  In FIG. 230 (h), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps the change icon e1 in the default mode (dot pattern mode). On the other hand, the change candidate icon HKI that has moved to the first decorative symbol display device 208L passes over the change icon e1. In the following FIG. 230 (i), the change icon e1 and the shuriken are covered with the effect image me and cannot be seen. In FIG. 230 (j), the effect image me becomes smaller and the fluctuation icon e1 starts to appear. That is, the effect image me is smaller than the variation icon e1, and the variation icon e1 that has changed to a hatched pattern is beginning to be visible. In FIG. 230 (j), a part of the change candidate icon HKI overlaps a part of the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 230 (k), the effect image me covering the variation icon e1 is lost, but this time, the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. 230 (j) to FIG. 230 (k), both the effect image me covering the variation icon e1 and the effect image mf covering the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed. There may be a period of time. In the following FIG. 230 (l), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to the same hatched pattern as the change candidate icon HKI starts to appear. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 230 (m), the first reserved icon f1 in a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 reserved icon display area f, and the character NJ has a success pose. Have taken. Thereafter, the treasure chest TB displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M disappears. Further, the continuation of FIG. 230 (m) leads to FIG. 229 (o).

  The hold change second effect may be regarded as the end when the effect image mf of FIG. 230 (m) disappears, that is, when the change of the state of the hold icon is completed, or as the end when the subsequent treasure box TB disappears. Also good.

  In the example of the left half described above, the change icon e1 is changed from the default mode to the normal notice mode (hatched pattern mode) by the first change effect by the ninja character NJ, and the first hold icon f1 is changed from the default mode to the pre-reading notice mode (hatched pattern mode) by the hold change second effect by the change candidate icon HKI. That is, the mode of different icons is changing.

  The change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect suggests a candidate for a mode to be changed from the time of appearance by its own mode, and corresponds to a change mode candidate display. In other words, in this example, the change candidate icon HKI has a hatched pattern from the time of appearance, and the first hold icon f1 has also finally changed to a hatched pattern. It should be noted that the change candidate icon HKI may be changed from the candidate mode of the mode to be changed to the mode of the candidate of the mode to be changed after the appearance at the present time. Further, the change candidate icon HKI suggests a change target candidate icon at the timing of FIG. 230 (j), and corresponds to a change target candidate display. Therefore, at the time of appearance, it is unclear which icon (a change icon or any hold icon if a plurality of hold icons is displayed) is a candidate for change.

  Also, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect also suggests a change target candidate icon at the timing of FIG. 230 (h), and corresponds to a change target candidate display. Similar to the change candidate icon HKI, it is also possible to suggest a candidate for a mode to be changed by its own mode by a shuriken mode (pattern). Moreover, it is possible to suggest the candidate of the aspect to change not with the aspect (pattern) of a shuriken but with the aspect (pattern) of the kimono of the ninja character NJ.

  Subsequently, an example of the right half will be described, but a description overlapping the description of the left half example may be omitted.

  FIG. 230 (1) is a continuation of FIG. 230 (c), in which a change candidate icon HKI having a hatched pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB, and a pending change number is displayed on the stage SG. A character NJ for one effect is also displayed. In FIG. 230 (2), the movement animation of the change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect is started. In FIG. 230, the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect determines the pose and “goes”. A balloon is displayed. In FIG. 230 (4), a part of the change candidate icon HKI overlaps a part of the first hold icon f1. A shuriken is thrown from the character NJ. In FIG. 230 (5), the first hold icon f1 and the change candidate icon HKI are covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. On the other hand, the shuriken thrown by the character NJ has not yet hit any icon. In the following FIG. 230 (6), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to the same hatched pattern as the change candidate icon HKI starts to be seen. In addition, a part of the shunt sword thrown by the character NJ overlaps a part of the first hold icon f1. Here, when the effect image mf becomes smaller, the state (pattern) of the first hold icon f1 after the change is visible, but the state where the effect image mf or the like keeps being invisible is maintained. There may be. For example, when a part of the shuriken overlaps, the effect image mf may be maintained as it is without reducing the effect image mf, and the effect image mf resulting from the shuriken hit may be taken over as it is. In FIG. 230 (7), the first hold icon f1 is again covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. Further, the shuriken is also hidden by the effect image mf. Note that the next effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (7) may be displayed before the effect image mf that has become smaller in FIG. 230 (6) disappears, or the effect image mf once disappears. The next effect image mf may be displayed. In FIG. 230 (8), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 230 (9), the first hold icon f1 in the form of a rhombus is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the character NJ has a success pose. Have taken. The continuation of FIG. 230 (9) leads to FIG. 229 (o). Note that the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect and the treasure chest TB in the hold change second effect will disappear thereafter, but either may disappear first or disappear simultaneously.

  In the right half example described above, the first change icon f1 is the change target icon for both the change change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the change change second effect by the change candidate icon HKI. The first hold icon f1, which was a mode, has finally changed to a rhombus pattern mode in which the reliability of the jackpot in the pre-reading notice is increased by two stages. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but it may be simultaneous. Moreover, in the example of the right half, the mode change by the hold change first effect is ahead of the mode change by the hold change first effect, but conversely, the mode change by the hold change first effect is more. , It may be ahead of the mode change by the hold change second effect.

  FIG. 231 shows an example in which the hold change first effect and the hold change second effect are combined in the left half, and an example of the hold change third effect in the right half.

  First, an example of the left half will be described, but description overlapping with the description in the example shown in FIG. 230 may be omitted.

  FIG. 231 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 230 (c), in which a change candidate icon HKI having a hatched pattern is displayed on the treasure box TB, and a pending change number is displayed on the stage SG. A character NJ for one effect is also displayed. In FIG. 231 (b), a moving animation of the change candidate icon HKI in the hold change second effect is started, and in FIG. 23 (c), the ninja character NJ in the hold change first effect determines the pose and continues. A balloon is displayed. In FIG. 231 (e), the shuriken thrown by the character NJ overlaps the change candidate icon HKI. That is, the shuriken hits the change candidate icon HKI, and the icon (change candidate icon HKI) that acts on these final change target icons is not the change target but the change icon or the hold icon that is the final change target. It has become. In FIG. 231 (f), the change candidate icon HKI is covered with the shuriken by the effect image mh and cannot be seen. In FIG. 231 (g), the effect image mh is smaller than the change candidate icon HKI, and the change candidate icon HKI that has changed to the diamond pattern in the upper stage is starting to be seen instead of the hatched pattern. In FIG. 231 (h), the effect image mh completely disappears, and a part of the change candidate icon HKI that has changed to a rhombus pattern is overlapped with a part of the first hold icon f1. The change candidate icon HKI changed to a rhombus pattern form corresponds to the change form candidate display, and the change candidate icon HKI overlapped with a part of the first hold icon f1 corresponds to the change target candidate display. In FIG. 231 (i), the first hold icon f1 is covered by the effect image mf together with the change candidate icon HKI and is not visible. In FIG. 231 (j), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. Eventually, the effect image mf disappears, and in FIG. 231 (k), the first hold icon f1 having a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the character NJ has a success pose. Have taken. The continuation of FIG. 231 (k) leads to FIG. 229 (o). In this case, the ninja character NJ in the reserved change first effect and the treasure chest TB in the reserved change second effect will disappear after this, but either may disappear first or disappear simultaneously.

  In the example of the left half described above, a rhombus pattern in which the first change effect by the ninja character NJ and the second change effect by the change candidate icon HKI are combined, and the change in the state of the hold icon is increased in two steps at a time. It has changed to the aspect. The shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ did not hit the change candidate icon HKI, and the change candidate icon HKI remained in a hatched pattern, or the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ hit the change candidate icon HKI Nevertheless, if the change candidate icon HKI remains in a hatched pattern, the first reserved icon f1 changes only to a hatched pattern having a lower jackpot expectation than the diamond pattern.

  Next, an example of the right half will be described.

  FIG. 231 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and there is one ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230. In FIG. 231 (2), the increase animation of the hold icon is started in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon gradually increases. In FIG. 231 (3), the increase animation of the hold icon is finished, and the second hold icon f2 is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  In FIG. 231 (4), the first hold icon f1 starts to vibrate, and in the following FIG. 5 (5), the enlarged display of the first hold icon f1 is started. The first hold icon f1 is enlarged until it exceeds the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. This expanded mode corresponds to a mode for notifying that the on-hold change effect is started. The enlarged first display icon f1 and the adjacent second display icon f2 may or may not overlap. In addition, the hold change effect started after this is referred to as “hold change third effect” in order to distinguish it from other hold change effects.

  In FIG. 231 (6), the number BC character for holding change third effect appears on the holding frame UI, and in FIG. Then, the enlarged first display hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf ′ (FIG. 231 (8)). The effect image mf ′ covers up to a part of the adjacent second reserved icon f2, but may cover the entire adjacent second reserved icon f2 or may not cover the adjacent second reserved icon f2. It may be.

  The hold change third effect may be seen as starting from the timing when the length-length character BC in FIG. 231 (6) appears, or from the timing when the length-length character BC in FIG. It may be seen that it has started, or it can be seen that it has started from the timing at which the effect image mf ′ in FIG.

  In FIG. 231 (9), the effect image mf ′ is smaller than the enlarged first hold icon f 1, and the first hold icon f 1 changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to be seen. Eventually, the effect image mf ′ disappears completely, and in FIG. 231 (10), the enlarged first display icon f 1 having a rhombus pattern is displayed. In the following FIG. 231 (11), the size of the first hold icon f1 returns to the original size, and in FIG. 12 (12), the length BC for the hold change third effect disappears. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display is still ongoing.

  The hold change third effect may be regarded as the end when the effect image mf ′ of FIG. 231 (10) disappears, that is, the change of the hold icon mode, or the first hold icon f1 of FIG. It may be regarded as the end when the size returns to the original size, or may be regarded as the end when the character length character BC in FIG.

  Note that the hold icon whose form is likely to be changed by the hold change third effect is the first hold icon f1 rather than the second hold icon f2, and the first hold icon f1 is most easily changed among all the hold icons. It may be easier to change as the hold is held earlier. Alternatively, only the first hold icon f1 may be changed among all the hold icons. In addition, the hold change third effect is easier to change to a mode in which the expectation (reliability) of the big hit is higher than the hold change first effect. That is, the mode of the icon is increased only by one step in the first change change effect, but is increased by two steps in the third change change effect. Similarly, the hold change third effect is more likely to be changed to a mode in which the big hit expectation (reliability) is higher than the hold change second effect.

  FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the character BC of the head length of the hold change third effect appears. FIG. 232 also shows two examples, a left half example and a right half example.

  First, an example of the left half will be described, but description overlapping with the description of the example shown in the right half of FIG. 231 may be omitted.

  FIG. 232 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and the number BC character for the hold change third effect appears on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 232 (b), the first hold icon f1 of the default mode starts to vibrate, and in the following FIG. 232 (c), the first hold icon f1 has been displayed so far. By jumping out from the first area and moving to the center of the display screen, it overlaps with the longest character BC sitting cross-legged. In the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f where the first hold icon f1 has been displayed until then, the trace of the first hold icon f1 popped out is displayed as a silhouette display Sil. Here, the silhouette display Sil is represented by a dotted line, but the silhouette display Sil may also be displayed in the same mode (in this example, the dotted pattern mode) as the first hold icon f1. The color of the first hold icon f1 may be displayed in gray on the silhouette display Sil regardless of the color of the first hold icon f1. For example, the color of the first hold icon f1 May be displayed in dark blue in the silhouette display Sil, and the color of the first hold icon f1 and the color of the silhouette display Sil may be unified in the same color system.

  In FIG. 232 (d), it appears that the longest character BC decides to pose and the longest character BC has the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 232 (e), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mb. In FIG. 232 (f), the effect image mb is smaller than the first hold icon f1 and changes to a diagonal pattern. The first hold icon f1 is starting to be visible. In FIG. 232 (g), the effect image mb disappears completely, and it seems that the longest character BC has the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a hatched pattern. When the first hold icon f1 shown in FIG. 232 (g) changes to blue, the silhouette display Sil shown in FIG. 232 (g) may also change to dark blue. In FIG. 232 (h), the longest character BC disappears, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a hatched pattern remains in the center of the display screen. Eventually, the moving animation is started, and the first hold icon f1 in the hatched pattern starts moving toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f (FIG. 232 (i)), and FIG. In j), the first hold icon f1 having a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  Next, an example of the right half will be described. The right half example is an example in which a hold change first effect by a ninja character NJ and a hold change third effect by a bancho character BC are performed.

FIG. 232 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and the character BC of the turn length for the hold change third effect is displayed on the hold frame UI, and the hold change is displayed on the stage SG. A ninja character NJ for the first performance is displayed. Whichever may be earlier or the same as the timing at which the Bancho character BC appears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ appears may be the same in FIG. 232 (2). The 1 hold icon f1 jumps out of the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f that has been displayed so far, and moves to the center of the display screen, so that it overlaps the character BC of the chief who is sitting cross-legged. . As in the left half example, in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f where the first hold icon f1 has been displayed until then, the trace of the first hold icon f1 popped out is a silhouette display Sil. It is displayed as. In FIG. 232 (3), a balloon “Now!” Is displayed after the ninja character NJ in the first stage of the on-hold change first poses. In the following FIG. 232 (4), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken, and in FIG. 5 (5), the shuriken overlaps the first hold icon f1 moved to the center of the display screen. In FIG. 232 (6), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the shuriken by the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 232 (7), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the change candidate icon HKI that has changed to a hatched pattern is beginning to be visible. In FIG. 232 (8), the effect image mf has completely disappeared, and the first hold icon f1 that has been changed to a hatched pattern is overlapped with the longest character BC. The mode change of the first hold icon f1 here is due to the hold change first effect, and the character NJ shown in FIG. 232 (8) takes a successful pose. This character NJ continues to take a successful pose until it disappears.

  In FIG. 232 (9), it appears that the number-long character BC determines the pose, and the number-long character BC has the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 232 (10) that follows, the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mb, and in FIG. 11 (11), the effect image mb becomes smaller than the first hold icon f1 and changes to a rhombus pattern. The first hold icon f1 is starting to be visible. In FIG. 232 (12), the effect image mb disappears completely, and it seems that the longest character BC has the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern. The mode change of the first hold icon f1 here is due to the hold change third effect. In FIG. 232 (13), the long character BC disappears, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern remains in the center of the display screen. Although the ninja character NJ has also disappeared, the timing at which the Bancho character BC disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be earlier or the same.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a continuation of the right half example of FIG. 232 and a diagram showing a pending change fourth effect.

  In FIG. 233 (14) following FIG. 232 (13), the movement animation of the first hold icon f1 is started, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern is the first in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In FIG. 233 (15), a first hold icon f1 having a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  In the example of the right half of FIG. 232 described above, the first hold icon f1 is used as the change target icon for both the hold change first effect by the ninja character NJ and the hold change third effect by the bancho character BC. The first hold icon f1, which was the default mode, has finally changed to a rhombus pattern mode in which the reliability of the jackpot in the pre-reading notice is increased by two stages. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but it may be simultaneous. Further, the mode change by the hold change first effect is ahead of the mode change by the hold change third effect, but conversely, the mode change by the hold change third effect is the hold change first effect. It may be ahead of the mode change due to.

  Subsequently, the pending change fourth effect will be described.

  FIG. 233 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and there is a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230. FIG. In FIG. 233 (b), the second hold icon f2 is newly displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. This second hold icon is a roulette icon of the hold change fourth effect, and the roulette icon which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. The roulette icon of the mode during the variable display corresponds to the change target candidate display. In other words, this is a mode for notifying that the player himself / herself will change thereafter after winning (when appearing). In FIG. 233 (b), a holding increase sound is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 233 (c), the decorative symbol variation display performed in FIG. 233 (b) is terminated, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. Note that immediately after the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the variation icon e1 remains displayed. In addition, the roulette icon that is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. 233 (c) remains in the state of the variable display. In FIG. 233 (d), a decoration symbol is confirmed and displayed. When the decoration display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. In 233 (e), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. Even during the fixed display, the roulette icon as the second hold icon f2 remains in the state of the variable display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 233 (f), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from “2” to “1”. However, two hold icons are displayed, and the roulette icon that is the second hold icon f2 remains in the state of the variable display.

  In FIG. 233 (g), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves toward the variable icon display area e. The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, moves toward the first area in the state of the variable display. Has started.

  In FIG. 233 (h), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 in the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. Shows a roulette icon in the form of variable display as the special figure 1 hold icon f1. In this example, the roulette icon in the variation display mode is continuously displayed across the variation display of the decorative pattern (also referred to as the special symbol variation display). The roulette icon (holding icon) may disappear once, and the roulette icon (holding icon) may be displayed when the next decorative symbol variation display (also referred to as the special symbol variation display) is started.

  In FIG. 233 (i), the roulette icon, which has been in the state of variable display until now, has been changed to a mode in which the variable display is terminated and the characters “lattice” are stopped. The roulette icon in the form in which the characters “lattice” are stopped and displayed corresponds to the change form candidate display. That is, it is a mode for notifying that it will change to a grid pattern mode.

  In FIG. 233 (j), the roulette icon that is the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 233 (k), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In FIG. 233 (l), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. That is, the mode change of the hold icon has been completed, and the hold change fourth effect ends at the timing of FIG. 233 (l). In addition, it may be considered that the hold change fourth effect starts from the timing when the roulette icon appears as shown in FIG. 233 (b), and the roulette icon stops as shown in FIG. It may be seen that it is started from the timing when the displayed mode is changed.

  As described above, the roulette icon corresponds to the hold change notice display for itself.

  FIG. 233 (i ′) is a diagram showing an example different from FIG. 233 (i). In FIG. 233 (i ′), the roulette icon, which was in the form of the variable display, ends the variable display and changes to the form in which the characters “lattice” are stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the base icon UIb and the channel through display The pattern of the CR frame portion CRf is changed to a lattice pattern. Further, the word “chance up” is displayed above the first hold icon f1. Even if the roulette icon changes to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are stopped and displayed, the roulette icon itself does not always change to a grid pattern. However, when the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the channel display CR changes to a lattice pattern in this way, the roulette icon itself has a lattice pattern rather than the case where it does not change (see FIG. 233 (i)). It becomes easy to change into an aspect. Or you may make it change always.

  The timing at which the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the channel display CR changes to a lattice pattern may be after the roulette icon has changed to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are stopped. Alternatively, when the roulette icon changes at the stage of the variably displayed state and the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the channel display CR changes, characters representing the pattern are likely to be stopped and displayed on the roulette icon. It may be.

  Note that only one of the base icon UIb pattern and the frame portion CRf pattern of the Chan-Sullet display CR may be changed. In this case, the roulette is more effective than the case where both are changed. The icon itself may be less likely to change to a lattice pattern. Or, if it changes before the stop display of the roulette icon, the character representing that pattern is stopped and displayed on the roulette icon when only one of the patterns changes than when both change. It may be difficult.

  FIG. 233 (l ′) is a diagram illustrating an example different from FIG. 233 (l). This FIG. 233 (l ′) is an example continued from the previous FIG. 233 (i ′), and the roulette despite the fact that the pattern of the frame portion CRf of the base icon UIb and the Chan throughlet display CR has changed to a lattice pattern. This is an example in which the icon itself has changed to the default mode without changing to the grid pattern mode. However, as described above, when the pattern of the base icon UIb and the frame portion CRf of the channel display CR changes to a lattice pattern, the roulette icon itself may necessarily change to the lattice pattern. In addition, the roulette icon has changed to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are displayed in a stopped manner, not foreseeing a change in the mode of the roulette icon, but other indications and icons (here, the base icon UIb and There may be a case in which a change in the mode of at least one pattern of the frame portion CRf of the display CR is predicted.

  It should be noted that when the roulette icon changes to a mode in which the characters “lattice” are stopped and displayed, the roulette icon itself may necessarily change to a grid pattern.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating an example of the pending change fifth effect.

  In FIG. 234 (1), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a state where the two hold icons f1 and f2 in the default mode are displayed. In FIG. 234 (2), the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI starts to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this appearance animation, the target icon TI gradually descends, and in FIG. 234 (3), the target icon TI passes through the central portion of the display screen. Eventually, the target icon TI is attached to the second reserved icon f2, and the appearance animation ends (FIG. 234 (4)). The hold icon with the target icon TI is more likely to change its state than the hold icon without the target icon TI. Even with the hold icon with the target icon TI, the mode change does not always occur and may not occur. Alternatively, the hold icon with the target icon TI may be changed in form. The target icon TI attached to the icon corresponds to a change target candidate display.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 234 (5), the character YM of Yoshimune, who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect, appears, and in the same FIG. I'm ready. In FIG. 234 (6), an arrow icon YI indicating that the Yoshimune character YM is aiming at the target icon TI is displayed. The arrow icon YI has a slight rear end on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the tip of the arrow icon YI may or may not touch the target (here, the target icon YI), but it is only necessary to know that it is determined as an aim. The arrow icon YI is one type of aiming icon or designation icon, and the aiming icon or designation icon is not limited to the arrow, and may be a light irradiation mode. An aiming icon or a designated icon such as an arrow icon YI corresponds to a change target candidate display. Furthermore, the aiming icon or the designation icon such as the arrow icon YI may be displayed in a pattern in which the aiming or designated icon changes after this. That is, the display itself of the aiming icon such as the arrow icon YI or the designated icon may correspond to the change mode candidate display.

  Eventually, the decorative symbol variation display performed in FIG. 234 (1) is terminated, and in FIG. 234 (7), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in FIG. The final display of the decorative design has started. When the definite display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. 234 (8). In 234 (9), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. The target icon TI is still attached to the second hold icon f2 even after the decorative symbol variation display is finished, and the same holds during the final display. Also, the Yoshimune character YM continues to hold the bow, the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed, and the same applies during the final display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 234 (10), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced from “2” to “1”. However, two hold icons are displayed, the target icon TI remains attached to the second hold icon f2, the Yoshimune character YM continues to hold the bow, and the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed.

  In FIG. 234 (11), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves toward the variable icon display area e. The second hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f starts moving toward the first area with the target icon TI attached. ing.

  In FIG. 234 (12), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 of the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. Is displayed as a special figure 1 hold icon f1, which is a default hold icon with the target icon TI attached. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the Yoshimune character YM continues to hold a bow, and the arrow icon YI continues to be displayed. However, since the target icon TI moves together with the hold icon, the direction of the arrow icon YI slightly changes and the length is slightly shortened.

  After the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, as shown in FIG. 234 (13), the Yoshimune character YM has a bow, but the arrow icon YI disappears. The disappearance of the display of the arrow icon YI can also be regarded as a preliminary operation of the hold change effect. Then, when the display of the arrow icon YI disappears, an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune, and in FIG. It is displayed straddling.

  It may be seen that the hold change fifth effect starts when the Yoshimune character YM in FIG. 234 (5) appears, or starts when the arrow icon YI disappears in FIG. It may be seen that it is made, or it may be seen that it is started from the timing when an arrow is fired from the character YM of Yoshimune.

  In FIG. 234 (15), an arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in the following FIG. 16 (16), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. Yes. Note that the target icon TI and the arrow that hits the target icon TI are not covered by the effect image mf and are visible. However, the target icon TI and the arrow that hits the target icon TI may be covered with the effect image mf.

  In FIG. 234 (17), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 234 (18), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect changes the pose, takes the thumb, and takes the success pose taken when the icon display mode change is successful. In FIG. 234 (19), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared, but the target icon TI is still attached to the first held icon f1 after the change of mode, and an arrow is hit to the target icon TI. It remains. The hold change fifth effect may be regarded as the end when the effect image mf of FIG. 234 (18) disappears, that is, the change of the state of the hold icon, or the Yoshimune character YM of FIG. You may see it as finished at the timing.

  Eventually, the decorative pattern change display started in FIG. 234 (10) is finished, the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped in FIG. 234 (20), and in FIG. The symbol display has been started. When the fixed display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. 234 (21). In 234 (22), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. Even when the decorative symbol variation display is finished, the target icon TI where the arrow has hit is still attached to the first reserved icon f1 in the rhombus pattern, and the same applies during the fixed display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started. In FIG. 234 (23), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed on the first ornament symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has decreased from “1” to “0”. However, the first hold icon is displayed, and the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains attached to the first hold icon f1.

  In FIG. 234 (24), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the arrow is displayed in the variable icon display area e with the target icon TI attached. The movement has started.

  In FIG. 234 (25), the moving animation of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon e1 having a rhombus pattern is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e with the target icon TI hit by the arrow. ing. Note that the arrow that hits the target icon TI shown in FIG. 234 (25) is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  As described above, the target icon TI hit by the arrow does not disappear even after the mode of the hold icon changes, and remains attached to the hold icon whose mode has changed. By doing so, it is also possible to display a history of which type of hold change effect has been performed. For example, even if the icon mode changes to the same mode, if it changes due to the hold change fifth effect, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is higher than if it changes due to other hold change effects If the arrow icon is low or vice versa, it is useful information that the target icon TI that the arrow has hit remains.

  In addition, even if the icon whose form has changed, that is, the icon with the target icon TI hit by the arrow changes from the hold icon f1 to the change icon e1, the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains attached to the change icon e1. There is. In this case as well, the target icon TI hit by the arrow is displayed as a history, and also serves as information notifying that the big hit is approaching.

  In addition, when the aspect of the target icon TI changes when the arrow hits (for example, when the target icon TI changes from white to red or when a large hole is formed), the arrow may be deleted. The target icon TI hit by the arrow may disappear, and in this case, if the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains, the expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where the target icon TI has disappeared. The degree (reliability) may be high, or when the target icon TI hit by the arrow remains, the big hit may be confirmed. For example, even if the icon changes to the change icon e1, if the target icon TI that the arrow hits still remains attached, the currently displayed symbol change display may be a big hit confirmation.

  In addition, although the illustration after FIG. 234 (25) is omitted, it may be developed into a super reach effect thereafter. For example, even if it changes to the change icon e1, if the target icon TI where the arrow hits is still attached, it may be easier to develop a super reach production compared to the case where the arrow is not attached. It may develop. Further, the target icon TI hit by the arrow may disappear together with the change icon during the confirmation display, or may disappear before the confirmation display. For example, it may disappear when the reach state is reached, or it may disappear when the super reach production is started. When the super reach production is started, the variation icon e1 may disappear or the variation icon e1 may not disappear.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating an example relating to the pending change fifth effect.

  FIG. 235 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 234 (15), and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the arrow is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In this example, the effect image mf is enlarged, and in FIG. 235 (b), the target icon TI is also covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen, and part of the arrow is also covered with the effect image mf. ing.

  In FIG. 235 (c), the effect image mf becomes smaller, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. At the same time as the effect image mf disappears, the target icon TI and the arrow that hits the target icon TI also disappear. In FIG. 235 (c), the target icon TI and the arrow hitting the target icon TI have already disappeared.

  In FIG. 235 (d), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the second decorative design is displayed. In display device 208M, Yoshimune's character YM, which is the character of the reserved change fifth effect, changes the pose and takes a successful pose with a thumb. In FIG. 235 (e), the Yoshimune character YM disappears.

  The fifth change effect in FIG. 235 may be viewed as ending when the target icon TI and the arrow hitting the target icon TI in FIG. 235 (c) disappear, or the effect image mf in FIG. May be regarded as the end when the state change of the hold icon is completed, or may be regarded as the end when the Yoshimune character YM in FIG.

  Next, an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fifth effect will be described.

  FIG. 235 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 234 (12), and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the ninja character NJ for the pending change first effect appears on the stage SG. In this example, the target icon TI, the Yoshimune character YM, and the ninja character NJ appear in this order. However, the ninja character NJ, the target icon TI, and the Yoshimune character YM may appear in this order. The target icon TI, the ninja character NJ, and the Yoshimune character YM may appear in this order, or may appear at the same time.

  In FIG. 235 (2), a ninja character NJ decides a pose and displays a balloon “Ikuzo”. In FIG. 3 (3), the character NJ throws a shuriken. The shuriken hits the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 235 (4), the first hold icon f1 hit by the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 235 (5), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a hatched pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 235 (6), the effect image mf has completely disappeared, and the first hold icon f1 that has been changed to a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this way, the target icon TI is displayed, but in the hold change first effect, the hold icon itself is directly changed without aiming at the target icon TI. The ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 235 (6) is in a successful pose. In FIG. 235 (7), the ninja character NJ has disappeared, but until now, the Yoshimune character YM has continued to hold a bow and the arrow icon YI has also been displayed.

  Eventually, the arrow icon YI disappears and an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune character YM. The fired arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 235 (8), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen.

  In FIG. 235 (9), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In FIG. 235 (10), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Moreover, the character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect changes the pose and takes a successful pose with a thumb. This is followed by FIG. 234 (19).

  In the example described above, the first change icon 1 is the change target icon in both the first change effect by the ninja character NJ and the fifth change change effect by the Yoshimune character YM. The first hold icon f1 finally changes to a lattice pattern in which the jackpot reliability in the pre-reading notice is increased by three levels instead of two levels. However, in this example, the timing of the mode change of the hold icon is shifted, but it may be simultaneous. As described above, when a plurality of hold change effects are performed in combination for the same target, the state changes to a higher mode (a mode in which three steps are raised rather than two steps) than when the hold change effects are separately performed. . Here, the combination of the hold change fifth effect and the hold change first effect is used, but the combination of the hold change fifth effect and the hold change second effect may be used, and the hold change fifth effect and the hold change. It may be a combination of the third effects, a combination of the hold change fifth effect and the hold change fourth effect, or any other combination.

  FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating another example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fifth effect.

  FIG. 236 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 235 (1), and the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appearing on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N determines the pose, A balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 2B, the character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 236 (3), the shuriken overlaps with the target icon TI attached to the first holding icon f1 instead of the first holding icon f1, and in FIG. 236 (4), the target icon TI hit by the shuriken is displayed. The attached first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 236 (5), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 that has changed to a hatched pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 236 (6), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f 1 changed to a hatched pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the ninja character NJ Has a success pose. As described above, the shuriken may hit the target icon TI even in the first change change effect.

  In FIG. 236 (7), the ninja character NJ has disappeared, but until now, the Yoshimune character YM has continued to hold the bow and the arrow icon YI has also been displayed. Moreover, the target icon TI is still attached to the first hold icon f1 that has finished changing the mode, and the shuriken is still hit on the target icon TI.

  Eventually, the arrow icon YI disappears and an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune character YM. The fired arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1. That is, the arrow also hits the target icon TI that the shuriken had previously hit. In FIG. 236 (8), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen.

  In FIG. 236 (9), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In FIG. 236 (10), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Moreover, the character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect changes the pose and takes a successful pose with a thumb.

  In FIG. 236 (11), the character YM of Yoshimune has disappeared, but the target icon TI is still attached to the first held icon f1 after the mode change, and the target icon TI has a shuriken and an arrow. Is still hit. By doing so, it is also possible to display a history of which type of hold change effect has been performed. That is, a history display in which the hold change first effect is performed by the shuriken becomes a history display in which the hold change fifth effect is performed by the arrow.

  Eventually, the display of variation of the decorative pattern that has been performed so far is finished, the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped in FIG. 236 (12), and the decoration symbol is confirmed in FIG. Display has started. When the fixed display of the decorative symbol is started, the erasing animation of the variation icon e1 is started, and the variation icon e1 is considerably small in the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. 236 (13). In 236 (14), the erase animation of the variation icon e1 is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. Even when the decorative symbol variation display is finished, the target icon TI where the shuriken and the arrow hit is still attached to the first hold icon f1 in the lattice pattern mode, and the same applies during the fixed display.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 236 (15), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has decreased from “1” to “0”. However, the first hold icon is displayed, and the target icon TI hit with the shuriken and the arrow remains attached to the first hold icon f1.

  In FIG. 236 (16), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon f1 with the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow is displayed in the variable icon display area with the target icon TI attached. The movement is started toward e.

  In FIG. 236 (17), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon e1 in the checkered pattern is left with the target icon TI hit by the shuriken and the arrow on the stage in the change icon display area e. It is displayed. Note that the arrow that hits the target icon TI shown in FIG. 235 (17) is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In the example described above, the shuriken and the arrow hit the target icon TI at different timings, but they may hit at the same timing. In addition, only one of the shuriken and the arrow may hit and the other may come off.

  FIG. 237 is a diagram showing another example of the pending change fourth effect shown in FIG. 233.

  FIG. 237 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and the decorative symbol changes in a state where the moving animation of the holding icon is completed and one holding icon f1 having a default dot pattern is displayed. The display is done. In FIG. 237 (2), there is a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and in FIG. 237 (3), the animation of increasing the hold icon in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Will start and the hold icon will gradually increase. The hold icon that gradually increases due to the increase animation is a roulette icon of the hold change fourth effect, and becomes large in a state in which the change is being displayed. In addition, a hold increase sound is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 237 (4), the increase animation of the hold icon is finished, and the second hold icon f2 is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The roulette icon, which is the second hold icon f2 shown in FIG. 237 (4), is in a state of being variably displayed, and corresponds to a change target candidate display. It should be noted that in the increase animation of the hold icon, it may be enlarged in a default mode, and may be changed to a roulette icon in a mode of variable display at the same time or after the expansion is completed.

  After that, the decorative symbol variation display ends, the next hold is consumed, and a hold icon moving animation is performed. In FIG. 237 (5), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, the change icon e1 of the default mode is displayed on the stage in the change icon display area e, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed. Shows a roulette icon in the form of variable display as the special figure 1 hold icon f1. Also in this example, the roulette icon of the mode in which the variation is displayed is continuously displayed across the variation display of the continuous decorative symbols (also referred to as the special symbol variation display).

  In this example, the roulette icon in the variation display mode is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen without changing from the variation display mode to the mode in which characters representing the pattern are stopped and displayed (FIG. 237). (6)). In FIG. 237 (7), the effect image mf becomes smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In FIG. 237 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this example, the mode of the first hold icon f1 is changed without displaying the change mode candidate display.

  Next, an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change fourth effect will be described.

  FIG. 237 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 237 (3), the increase animation of the hold icon is finished, and the roulette icon in the state of the variable display is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Is displayed as the second hold icon f2.

  In FIG. 237 (b), the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in FIG. A pose is decided and a balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 237 (d), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 237 (e), the shuriken overlaps the second hold icon f2. That is, the shuriken hits the roulette icon in the mode of the variable display. In FIG. 237 (f), the second hold icon f2 hit by the shuriken is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 237 (g), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the roulette icon in the variation display mode changed to the rhombus pattern mode is starting to be seen. In FIG. 237 (h), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the roulette icon of the variation display state changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the second region of the special figure 1 reservation icon display region f. It is displayed as f2. Further, the character NJ shown in FIG. 237 (h) takes a success pose taken when the icon display mode change is successful.

  In FIG. 237 (i), the ninja character NJ has disappeared. Also in this example, the roulette icon does not change from the mode in which the variation is displayed to another mode, and the roulette icon in the mode in which the variation is displayed is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen (FIG. 237 (j )). In FIG. 237 (k), the effect image mf is smaller than the second hold icon f2, and the second hold icon f2 changed to a vertical line pattern is starting to be visible. In FIG. 237 (l), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the second hold icon f2 changed to a vertical line pattern is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The frequency of the change to the vertical line pattern is low, and the change to the vertical line pattern is more likely to change from the roulette icon than from the normal hold icon.

  In this example, the roulette icon in the variation display mode changed to the rhombus pattern mode shown in FIG. 237 (h) corresponds to the change target candidate display. As a result, the second reserved icon f2 has a rhombus pattern. Since the mode has not changed, the roulette icon shown in FIG. 237 (h) does not correspond to the change mode candidate display. The roulette icon in the variation display mode changed to the rhombus pattern mode merely notifies the change to the rhombus pattern mode by the hold change first effect, and changes according to the hold change fourth effect. This is because it does not represent. Therefore, when the hold change fourth effect is a false effect, the second hold icon f2 finally changes to a rhombus pattern. Also, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ does not hit the roulette icon which is the second hold icon f2, and the aspect of the second hold icon f2 (roulette icon) does not change, or the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ If the second hold icon f2 does not change in spite of hitting the second hold icon f2 (roulette icon), the second hold icon f2 is expected to be a big hit than the vertical line pattern. May be changed only to a low mode (lattice pattern mode, rhombus pattern mode, or diagonal pattern mode), or the mode may not change.

  In this example, the hold change first effect is performed first, and the hold change fourth effect is performed later. Conversely, the hold change fourth effect is performed first, and the hold change first effect is performed later. An effect may be performed, or the hold change first effect and the hold change fourth effect may be performed simultaneously. Further, the hold change second effect may be performed together with the hold change fourth effect, and the hold change third effect may be performed together with the hold change fourth effect.

  In addition, after the second hold icon f2 that is a roulette icon changes to a hold icon in a rhombus pattern at a certain timing in FIGS. 237 (b) to (d), the second hold icon in the rhombus pattern form. There may be a case where a shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ for holding change first effect hits f2, and the second holding icon f2 changes to a holding icon in a vertical line pattern. That is, the mode may be changed in two stages.

  FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold change fifth effect is performed together with the hold change fourth effect and an example of the hold change sixth effect.

  FIG. 238 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 237 (5), and in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, a roulette icon in the form of variable display as the special figure 1 hold icon f 1. Is displayed. In addition, the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI starts to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 238 (2), the appearance animation continues, the target icon TI continues to fall, and eventually the target icon TI is attached to the first hold icon f1, which is the roulette icon in the form of variation display, and the appearance animation ends. (FIG. 238 (3)).

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 238 (4), the character YM of Yoshimune, who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect, appears, and in the following FIG. An arrow icon YI is displayed. Thereafter, the arrow icon YI disappears and an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune character YM.

  In FIG. 238 (6), an arrow hits the target icon TI attached to the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 7 (7), the first hold icon f1 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. Yes. In FIG. 238 (8), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and in FIG. 238 (9), the effect image mf disappears completely and appears in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The roulette icon in the mode of change display changed to the rhombus pattern mode is displayed as the first hold icon f1. Moreover, the character YM of Yoshimune who is the character of the reserved change fifth effect changes the pose and takes a successful pose with a thumb. In FIG. 238 (10), the Yoshimune character YM disappears, but the target icon TI is still attached to the first reserved icon f1, and an arrow remains on the target icon TI.

  Also in this example, the roulette icon does not change from the mode in which the variation is displayed to another mode. In FIG. 238 (11), the roulette icon in the mode in which the variation is displayed is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. ing. Also, the target image TI and part of the arrow are covered by the effect image mf and cannot be seen. In FIG. 238 (12), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a vertical line pattern is starting to be visible. In FIG. 238 (13), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the first hold icon f1 changed to a vertical line pattern is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  It should be noted that the arrow fired by the Yoshimune character YM does not hit the target icon TI, and the aspect of the first reserved icon f1 with the target icon TI does not change, or the arrow fired by the Yoshimune character YM is the target icon. If the aspect of the first reserved icon f1 with the target icon TI does not change in spite of hitting the TI, the first reserved icon f1 is expected to be a big hit than the vertical line pattern. There may be a case where the degree changes only to a low degree (a lattice pattern aspect, a rhombus pattern aspect, or a diagonal pattern aspect), or the aspect does not change.

  Next, the pending change sixth effect will be described.

  FIG. 238 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), in which one hold icon f1 having a default dot pattern is displayed and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 238 (b), there is an increase in the hold icon in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, and the hold icon of the default mode is displayed. Gradually grows. Before the increase animation is finished, there is again a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230 (FIG. 238 (c)), and in FIG. 238 (d), the special figure 1 holding icon display area f is displayed. In the third area, a countdown icon is displayed as the third hold icon f3. This countdown icon is due to the pending change sixth effect. Even if the increase animation is not performed or not, the increase animation of the countdown icon is shorter than the increase animation of the hold icon in the default mode. Become an animation. Accordingly, in FIG. 238 (d), the second reserved icon f2 in the default mode that has been won first is still in the middle of the increasing animation, but the countdown icon that has been won later has been displayed. The countdown icon is an unfinished gray form with numbers that decrease with the passage of time. The countdown icon at the time of appearance in FIG. 238 (d) is marked with the numeral “3”. Further, the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound for the third hold icon f3.

  In FIG. 238 (e), the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends, the display of the second hold icon f2 is completed, and the hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2 is output from the speaker 120. In the following FIG. 238 (f), the number of the countdown icon is “2”. Further, in FIG. 238 (g), the number becomes “1”, and finally in FIG. 238 (g), it finally becomes “0”. Then, the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen (FIG. 238 (i)). In FIG. 238 (j), the effect image mf is smaller than the third hold icon f3, and the third hold icon f3 that has changed to a rhombus pattern is starting to appear. In FIG. 238 (k), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a rhombus pattern is displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  Note that the timing at which the number of the countdown icon becomes “0” varies, but the interval between countdowns (decrease in the number according to the passage of time) is constant. However, the interval may be limited to exactly 1 second, but it may not be limited, in some cases it is unified at 2 seconds, and in some cases it is unified at 0.5 seconds. May be. In addition, in the variation display of the decorative pattern performed when the countdown icon appears, the number of the countdown icon is not “0”, and the number of the countdown icon is “ Although the value may be 0, the number does not decrease when a new decorative symbol variation display is started. Further, the hold icon of the countdown icon corresponds to a change target candidate display. The countdown icon hold icon also corresponds to a hold icon in the form of a prefetch notice, and the number is always “0” before the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice is started. However, there may be a case where the number does not become “0” (for example, a case where the number changes to a default mode before becoming “0”). In addition, when the number becomes “0”, the mode change of the hold icon may be caused, and even when the number becomes “0”, the mode change of the hold icon is changed. You may make it not occur.

  FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating another example of the pending change sixth effect. In FIG. 239, three examples are shown.

  First, the first example will be described. This first example is an example in which the hold change first effect is performed together with the hold change sixth effect. FIG. 239 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 238 (d), and when the display of the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 has been completed, the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends. The display of the second hold icon f <b> 2 is completed, and a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f <b> 2 is output from the speaker 120. In FIG. 239 (2), the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in FIG. A pose is decided and a balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 239 (4), a ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In addition, the number of the countdown icon of the third hold icon is “2”. In FIG. 239 (5), the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ overlaps with the third hold icon f3. In FIG. 239 (6), the third hold icon f3 is covered with the effect image mf and cannot be seen. Yes.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 229 and subsequent figures, a number of effect images are displayed. However, all of these effect images have no pattern. However, the effect image described so far may be displayed in the form of an icon pattern that changes thereafter. That is, the effect image display itself may correspond to the change mode candidate display. Alternatively, the effect image described so far may be displayed in the form of a pattern representing the magnitude (reliability) of the possibility that the form of the icon will change thereafter. In other words, there is a high possibility that the icon mode changes in the order of dot pattern, diagonal line pattern, rhombus pattern, lattice pattern, vertical line pattern, and horizontal line pattern. You may do it.

  In FIG. 239 (7), the effect image mf is smaller than the third hold icon f3, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a lattice pattern is starting to be seen. In this example, before the countdown icon number becomes “0”, the mode of the target hold icon is changed. In FIG. 239 (8), the effect image mf disappears completely, and the third hold icon f3 changed to a lattice pattern is displayed in the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In addition, the character NJ shown in FIG. 239 (8) takes a successful pose when the icon display mode change is successful. Although the number of the countdown icon has disappeared, the aspect of the third hold icon f3 may change once again at the timing when the number becomes “0”, but in this example, in FIG. At the timing of 7), a change corresponding to the pending change sixth effect is also made. Therefore, the aspect of the third hold icon f3 does not change any more. As described above, when the aspect of the target hold icon is changed by the two types of hold change effects of the hold change first effect and the hold change sixth effect, the case is changed by one type of hold change effect. Compared to the above, it is easy to change to a mode in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is high (for example, a mode in which the level of jackpot is higher than 3 steps), or it may be changed to a mode in which the expectation level of jackpot is high. . In other words, if the mode of the hold icon that was a countdown icon changes before the countdown icon number becomes “0”, it is likely to change to a mode in which the big hit expectation is high, or the big hit expectation You may make it change to a high aspect.

  Here, the combination of the hold change sixth effect and the hold change first effect is used, but the combination of the hold change sixth effect and the hold change second effect may be used, and the hold change sixth effect and the hold change. It may be a combination of the third effect, a combination of the sixth change on hold and the fourth change on hold, or a combination of the sixth change on hold and the fifth change on hold, Other combinations may be used.

  Next, a second example will be described. This second example is an example of simultaneous change effects. FIG. 239 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 238 (d), and when the display of the countdown icon as the third hold icon f3 has been completed, the increase animation of the second hold icon f2 ends. The display of the second hold icon f <b> 2 is completed, and a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f <b> 2 is output from the speaker 120. In the following FIG. 239 (b), the number of the countdown icon is “2”. Further, in FIG. 239 (c), the number becomes “1”, and finally in FIG. 239 (d), it finally becomes “0”. Then, a simultaneous change effect is started, and an effect image mfn covering all the held icons displayed at this stage is displayed (FIG. 239 (e)). The effect image mfn here is a collection of a plurality of effect images, and is an effect image that covers all of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. One large effect image may be used. In addition, the simultaneous change effect here is started in response to the countdown icon number being “0”, but the simultaneous change effect may be started when the hold is accumulated up to a certain hold number. May be. That is, there may be a case where a simultaneous change effect is started in response to a winning at the special figure starting port. For example, in the third hold or the fourth hold which is the maximum hold number, or the special figure starting point where the hold is accumulated until the eighth hold which is the maximum hold number combining the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 A simultaneous change effect may be started accordingly. Also, if the number of the decorative symbol variation display reaches a certain number of times, if the hold is accumulated, the simultaneous change effect may be started, or the decorative symbol variation display frequency may be a certain number of times. If n or more holds are stored when the number reaches, the simultaneous change effect may be started. For example, the simultaneous change effect may be started every 15th change, and more specifically, the simultaneous change effect is started in response to the start of the display of the change display of the decorative pattern which becomes the 15th change. There may be a case where the simultaneous change effect may be started after the display of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol which becomes the fifteenth change is started. In FIG. 239 (f), each of the effect images mfn becomes small, and in FIG. 239 (g), the effect image mfn disappears completely, and there are three hold icons f1, f2, and f3 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. Is displayed. Of these three hold icons f1, f2, and f3, the second hold icon f2 remains in the default mode, but the first hold icon f1 has changed to a hatched pattern and is a countdown icon. The 3-hold icon f3 changes to a lattice pattern. In the simultaneous change effect, the mode of all displayed hold icons may change, the mode of only the hold icon that was a countdown icon may change, or one hold icon may have a mode. It may not change.

  Finally, the third example will be described. FIG. 239 (d ′) shows the state shown in FIG. 4 (d), that is, three hold icons are displayed, and the number of one countdown icon among them is “0”. At the same time that becomes “0”, there is also a single winning at the first special figure starting port 230. It should be noted that the same is true even if there is a winning of one ball at the first special figure starting port 230 immediately before the number of the countdown icon becomes “0”. Also in FIG. 239 (d ′) following FIG. 239 (d ′), the simultaneous change effect is started, the effect image mnf covering all of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is displayed, and the fourth hold icon f4 is increased. The animation is no longer visible. Eventually, in the figure (f '), the effect image mfn disappears, and four hold icons f1 to f4 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In this example, the increase animation of the fourth hold icon f4 is canceled from the beginning and is not executed. However, as shown in FIG. 239 (f ′), the speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound of the fourth hold icon f4. If the number of the countdown icon becomes “0” during the display of the increase animation of the hold icon, the increase animation is canceled halfway or is not visible by the effect image mnf even if it is not canceled. If the increase animation is not canceled halfway, after the effect image mnf disappears, if the remaining scene of the increase animation remains, that scene is displayed. Of the four hold icons f1 to f4 shown in FIG. 239 (f ′), the first hold icon f1 to the third hold icon f3 are the same as those hold icons f1 to f3 shown in FIG. 239 (f), The fourth hold icon f4 shown only in FIG. 239 (f ′) is displayed in a hatched pattern. That is, the increased fourth hold icon f4 is displayed in a manner that is changed by the simultaneous change effect. Note that the fourth hold icon f4 may be displayed in a default manner even when the simultaneous change effect is performed.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the hold change first effect is performed in a state where the curtain effect is being executed.

  The curtain effect is an effect that is executed by the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is one of the overlap effects that overlaps the display that has been displayed so far. At least a part of the display changes to a silhouette display due to the curtain effect, and the existence and outline can be understood, but the pattern and color are not understood.

  FIG. 240 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 229 (f), and the decorative symbol changes in a state in which the hold icon moving animation is completed and one hold icon f1 having a default dot pattern is displayed. The display is done. In FIG. 240 (a), the curtain effect is started, and the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH appears at the lower end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This upper edge portion CHu overlaps the base icon UIb from the front side, in a diagonal pattern, just below the stage prepared in the variable icon display region e and the four regions prepared in the hold icon display region f. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 240 (b), the curtain display CH is rising, and the stage prepared in the fluctuation icon display area e and the lower part of the hold icon (here, the first hold icon f1) are overlapped with the curtain part CHc. The silhouette is displayed. The silhouette display in the curtain effect is displayed in a black pattern with no pattern. Note that the frames of the four areas prepared in the hold icon display area f are not displayed as silhouettes, but these frames may also be displayed as silhouettes.

  In FIG. 240 (c), the curtain display CH rises to the upper end of the base icon UIb, the entire change icon e1 is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc, and the entire first hold icon f1 is also overlapped with the curtain portion CHc. Both icons e1 and f1 are displayed in silhouette. Further, the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH overlaps a part of the lower frame portion CRf in the closed channel display CR in the closed state from the front side.

  In FIG. 240 (d), the curtain display CH has risen to a height that exceeds the channel display CR, and a portion of the closed channel display CR (frame portion CRf) is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc. The silhouette is not displayed and part of it is not visible.

  In FIG. 240 (e), the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect appears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and in FIG. 240 (f), the ninja character NJ A pose is decided and a balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. In FIG. 240 (g), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken. In FIG. 240 (h), the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is displayed behind the curtain portion CHc, and the shuriken is displayed in silhouette. In addition, three lines representing the power of the shuriken are displayed across the curtain part CHc. In FIG. 240 (i), the shuriken flies to a position where it comes into contact with the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s. In FIG. 240 (j), the first hold icon f1s is visible, but the shuriken is visible. I can't see it. However, the three lines representing the power of the shuriken are displayed as silhouettes. In FIG. 240 (j), the shuriken displayed in silhouette overlaps the first hold icon f1s also displayed in silhouette. That is, the shuriken hits the first hold icon f1, as shown in FIG. 229 (k). In FIG. 240 (k), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1s has been displayed so far. In FIG. 240 (l), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly reduced. ing. In the following FIG. 240 (m), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is not visible, and instead, the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is displayed. In FIG. 240 (m), as shown in FIG. 229 (m), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 240 (n), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first held icon f1s. However, the character NJ shown in FIG. Have taken.

  In FIG. 240 (o), the erasing animation of the character NJ is started, and the character NJ is covered with the smoke image and cannot be seen. In FIG. 240 (p), the smoke image disappears and the character NJ disappears, returning to a state where nothing is displayed on the stage SG.

  After the character NJ disappears, the curtain display CH starts to descend, and in FIG. 240 (q), the curtain display CH descends to the upper end of the base icon UIb. However, at this stage, the mode of the first hold icon f1 cannot be confirmed yet. In FIG. 240 (r), the curtain display CH has been lowered to a position where the upper part of the first reserved icon f1 can be seen, and the mode of the first held icon f1 has changed from the default dot pattern mode to the diagonal pattern mode. You can see it changing. That is, before the descent of the curtain display CH is completed (before the curtain effect ends), it is possible to confirm the mode of the hold icon and the change icon. In FIG. 240 (s), the curtain display CH is completely lowered and the curtain display CH disappears. In this example, the curtain effect is executed from immediately before FIG. 240A to immediately before FIG. Note that the timing when the curtain icon CHc starts to overlap the entire holding icon or the entire variation icon may be the timing when the character NJ throws the shuriken, or the timing shown in FIG. 240 (h). The timing shown in FIG. Further, the timing at which part of the overlapped hold icon or part of the variation icon starts to appear may be the timing shown in FIG. 240 (n) or the timing shown in FIG. 240 (o). However, the timing shown in FIG.

  In the curtain effect described above, the pattern and color are not known, but it can be seen to which hold icon the hold change effect is performed. Further, when the curtain effect is executed, the hold change effect may be easily performed or may be necessarily performed as compared with the case where the curtain effect is not executed.

  FIG. 240 (p ′) is a diagram showing an example different from FIG. 240 (p). In FIG. 233 (p ′), the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH is displayed in a lattice pattern. The upper edge part CHu of the curtain display CH may be displayed in a pattern form representing the magnitude (reliability) of the possibility that the icon form has changed. That is, there is a high possibility that the icon mode changes in the order of dot pattern, diagonal line pattern, rhombus pattern, lattice pattern, vertical line pattern, horizontal line pattern. It may be changed. The mode of the upper edge portion CHu may continue to be displayed in the same mode from the time of appearance shown in FIG. Alternatively, the mode of the upper edge CHu is a default dot pattern mode at the time of appearance of FIG. 240 (a), and the mode may change at the timing of FIG. 240 (n). That is, the aspect of the upper edge portion CHu may also change to an aspect that represents the possibility that the aspect of the icon has changed at a timing when the aspect of the first hold icon f1 may have changed. In this case, the character NJ may not take a successful pose, or the icon form may not change even if the successful pose is taken. In addition, there may be a case where the aspect of the upper edge portion CHu changes at the timing immediately before the icon becomes visible as shown in FIG. 240 (q). Moreover, the aspect of upper edge part CHu may be displayed with the aspect of the pattern of the icon to change. That is, the display itself of the upper edge CHu may correspond to the change mode candidate display. Also in this case, the mode of the upper edge CHu may continue to be displayed in the same mode from the appearance shown in FIG. 240 (a), or the mode of the first hold icon f1 changes with the character NJ taking a successful pose. The mode may change at the timing of FIG. 240 (n), or the mode may change at the timing immediately before the icon becomes visible as shown in FIG. 240 (q). The mode of the upper edge portion CHu shown in FIG. 240 (a) to FIG. 240 (q) is a hatched pattern mode, and the mode of the first reserved icon f1 that has begun to be seen from FIG. 240 (r) is also a hatched pattern mode. is there. In addition, since the mode of the upper edge portion CHu shown in FIG. 240 (p ′) is a grid pattern mode, the mode of the first reserved icon f1 that starts to appear thereafter is also a grid pattern mode.

  FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating another example in which the curtain effect and the hold change first effect are combined.

  The example of FIGS. 241 (a) to (e) shown at the left end of FIG. 241 is an example in which a portion overlapping the curtain portion CHc is displayed as a silhouette in the channel display CR. The notice that at least a part (or all) of the channel display CR may be displayed in silhouette in this way may indicate that the roulette effect may be started (the channel display CR may be opened). It corresponds to. However, the roulette effect is not necessarily started just because the silhouette is displayed, and it may not be started, or the roulette effect is always started when the silhouette is displayed. May be. FIG. 241 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 241 (b), the curtain display CH has risen to a height that exceeds the Chan throughlet display CR, and the closed through display CR is shown. A part of (frame part CRf) is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and a part thereof is displayed in silhouette. In this example, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the curtain display CH further rises, and the upper edge portion CHu has reached a position where the lower end of the decorative symbol variation display is hidden.

  In FIG. 241 (c), the closed channel display CR starts to vibrate, and the roulette effect is started. In FIG. 241 (d), the upper and lower frame portions CRf begin to open and the display space CRs begins to appear, but the portion overlapping the curtain portion CHc is a silhouette display, and the displayed content is unknown. In FIG. 241 (d), only the question mark at the right end is visible. In FIG. 241 (e), the chainlet display CR is fully opened, and the upper frame portion CRf is displayed at a position beyond the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH. Here again, the portion still overlapped with the curtain part CHc is a silhouette display, and only the question mark at the right end is visible. Thereafter, similarly to FIG. 229 (s), the variable display is started in the display space CRs. Eventually, as in FIG. 229 (t), the change display in the channel display CR is finished, and the character display such as the pre-reading notice is displayed in the display space CRs. The removed part cannot be seen by the silhouette display. Thereafter, as in FIG. 229 (v), the chunklet display CR returns to the closed state.

  The example of FIGS. 241 (1) to (5) is an example in which the success history display of the pending change effect is displayed. FIG. 241 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (j). In FIG. 241 (1), a silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1 has been displayed. In FIG. (2), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller. In the following FIG. 241 (3), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is not visible, and instead, the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is displayed. In FIG. 241 (3), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1 as in FIG. 229 (m). In FIG. 241 (4), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first held icon f1s, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 241 (4) takes a successful pose when it succeeds in changing the icon display mode. It is also possible to confirm that the hold change effect has been successfully displayed by displaying on the character NJ in this successful pose. Next, in FIG. 241 (5), a success history display SRH indicating that the on-hold change effect is successful is displayed on the curtain display CH. This success history display SRH is a display in which the characters “success” are displayed on a plain background, and not a silhouette display, but a silhouette display just above the first hold icon f1s that is a silhouette display. The change icon e1s displayed and the first hold icon f1s displayed in silhouette are displayed directly above.

  The example of FIGS. 241A to H is an example in which the hold change effect is performed once more while the success history display SRH of the hold change effect is displayed. FIG. 241 (A) is a continuation from the state after the ninja character NJ displayed in FIG. 241 (5) disappears. In FIG. 241 (A), the success history display SRH is displayed on the curtain display CH. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 241 (B), the ninja character NJ for the reserved change first effect reappears on the stage SG of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 241 (C), the ninja character NJ Has decided the pose, and the speech balloon “Ikuzo” is displayed. Thereafter, although not shown in the figure, as in FIGS. 240 (g) to 240 (j), the ninja character NJ throws a shuriken and hits the first hold icon f1s in the silhouette display, and FIG. In D), the silhouette display of the effect image mf is displayed at the position where the first hold icon f1s has been displayed so far. In FIG. 241 (E), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller. In FIG. 241 (F) that follows, the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is not visible, and instead, the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s is displayed. In FIG. 241 (F), as shown in FIG. 229 (m), the effect image mf is smaller than the first hold icon f1. In FIG. 241 (G), no change is seen in the silhouette-displayed first hold icon f1s, but the character NJ shown in FIG. 241 (G) has a success pose that is taken when the icon display mode is successfully changed. It is confirmed that the hold change effect has succeeded again. Next, in FIG. 241 (H), another success history display SRH is displayed on the success history display SRH displayed so far, and two success history displays SRH are displayed in total. That is, the number of success history displays SRH corresponding to the number of successes of the hold change effect is displayed.

  In addition, the display number of the success history display SRH may be displayed in a plurality by the success of one hold change effect. In this case, the display number of the success history display SRH represents the expected degree of jackpot of the aspect in which the icon changes. For example, when a default dot pattern icon (here, the first hold icon f1) is targeted, if one success history display SRH is displayed, the change in one step is performed once and the icon is a diagonal pattern. If two success history displays SRH are displayed, the change in one step is performed twice or the change for two steps is performed once and the icon is changed into a rhombus pattern. If three success history displays SRH are displayed, the change in one step is performed three times or the change for three steps is performed once and the icon is changed to a lattice pattern. If four success history displays SRH are displayed, the change in one step is performed four times or the change for four steps is performed once and the icon is changed to a vertical line pattern. If 5 SRHs are displayed, there will be one level change. Once done by icon is either out content changes once performed is changed to an aspect of the horizontal line pattern.

  FIG. 241 (H-1) is a diagram illustrating another example in which the success history display SRH is displayed. In this example, the success history display SRH is displayed immediately above the corresponding icon. That is, two success history displays SRH indicating that the mode change of the variation icon e1 is successful are displayed immediately above the variation icon e1, and the success history indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 is successful. One display SRH is displayed immediately above the first hold icon f1. All of the success history displays SRH have the same display mode, and are displayed with the characters “success” displayed on a plain background.

  FIG. 241 (H-2) is a diagram illustrating another example in which the success history display SRH is displayed. In this example, one success history display SRH4 indicating that the mode change of the variation icon e1 is successful is displayed immediately above the variation icon e1, indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 is successful. One success history display SRH2 is displayed immediately above the first hold icon f1. The success history display SRH4 indicating that the mode change of the variation icon e1 is successful is a display in which the letters “success” are displayed on the background of the lattice pattern, and the variation icon e1 has the same lattice pattern as the background pattern. It may be a fixed display indicating that it is changing. Alternatively, it may be a confirmation display indicating that the aspect has been changed to four or more levels. For example, when the change icon e1 before the change is a default dot pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that it has changed to a vertical line pattern or a horizontal line pattern. When the icon e1 is an icon with a diagonal line pattern, a confirmation display indicating that the icon e1 is changed to a horizontal line pattern may be used. In addition, the success history display SRH2 indicating that the mode change of the first hold icon f1 is successful is a display in which the characters “success” are displayed on the background of the diagonal line pattern, and the first hold icon f1 has a background pattern. It may be a fixed display indicating that the pattern changes to the same diagonal pattern. Alternatively, it may be a definite display indicating that the state has changed to two or more levels. For example, when the first hold icon f1 before the change is a default dot pattern icon, it may be a definite display indicating that it has changed to a mode higher than the rhombus pattern. When the hold icon f1 is an icon with a diagonal line pattern, it may be a fixed display indicating that the state is changed to a lattice pattern or more.

  FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of a curtain effect and a hold change effect.

  FIGS. 242 (a) to (e) are examples in which the appearance animation of the target icon TI described with reference to FIG. 234 is performed during execution of the curtain effect. FIG. 242 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (a), the curtain display CH has risen to a height that exceeds the Chan throughlet display CR. In this example, the portion overlapped with the curtain portion CHc in the channel display CR is not displayed as a silhouette and is not visible. In the following FIG. 242 (b), the appearance animation of the target icon TI is started, and a part of the target icon TI starts to be seen at the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this appearance animation, the target icon TI gradually falls, and in FIG. 242 (c), the target icon TI is quite close to the curtain display CH. In FIG. 242 (d), the target icon TI is displayed across the curtain display CH, and the lower end portion of the target icon TI is overlapped with the curtain portion CHc to form a silhouette display, while the upper end portion of the target icon TI is displayed. Is displayed normally. The intermediate portion of the target icon TI is overlapped with the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH and cannot be seen. In FIG. 242 (e), the target icon TIs also displayed in silhouette is attached to the first hold icon f1s displayed in silhouette. In the silhouette display, when other icons such as target icons TIs are attached and the shape is changed or the shape of the icon itself is deformed, it can be determined from the outline, but the pattern, color, character and symbol Etc. (for example, roulette display mode) change, it is impossible to judge.

  FIGS. 242 (1) to (5) are examples in which the countdown icon described with reference to FIG. 238 is displayed during execution of the curtain effect. FIG. 242 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (1), the curtain display CH has risen to a height that exceeds the Chan throughlet display CR. In FIG. 242 (2), there is a single winning at the first special figure start port 230, and the increase animation of the hold icon in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f is not performed, and FIG. The speaker 120 outputs a hold increase sound for the second hold icon f2, and the second hold icon f2s displayed in silhouette is displayed. The hold increase sound here may be a dedicated hold increase sound that is output only when the countdown icon is displayed due to the hold increase. In the second hold icon f2s displayed in silhouette, the pattern, color, characters, symbols, and the like are unknown, but a dedicated hold increase sound is not output from the speaker 120, or the hold icon increase animation is not performed. Therefore, it can be inferred that the countdown icon is displayed due to the increase in the hold. Actually, here, the second hold icon f2 is displayed as a countdown icon, but since the number indicating the countdown is not visible at all, the countdown display is omitted. A person who can guess that the countdown icon has been displayed can wait for when the second hold icon f2 changes, which may improve the fun of the game. Eventually, when the number of the countdown icon that is the second hold icon f2 becomes “0”, as shown in FIG. 242 (4), the silhouette of the effect image mf at the position where the second hold icon f2s was displayed. The display is displayed, and in the subsequent FIG. 242 (5), the silhouette-displayed effect image mfs is slightly smaller.

  FIG. 242 (A) to FIG. 242 (H) are examples in which the display is performed across the variable display of decorative symbols in which curtain effects are continuous. FIG. 242 (A) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), and in FIG. 242 (A), the curtain display CH has risen to a height that exceeds the Chan throughlet display CR. Thereafter, as long as the silhouette display is seen through the curtain part CHc, the on-hold change effect is not started and is omitted. However, the first stop (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol display area 208c Then, the second stop (temporary stop) is performed, and as shown in FIG. 242B, the last remaining middle symbol display area 208b is also temporarily stopped, and the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” Swings (temporary display). In FIG. 242 (C), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and the confirmation display is started. In FIG. 242 (D), the decoration symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the animation for erasing the variation icon e1s is started while the silhouette is displayed. On the stage in the variation icon display area e shown in FIG. The display variation icon e1s is considerably small. In FIG. 242 (E), the erase animation of the variation icon e1s, which has been a silhouette display, is completed, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variation icon display area e. Absent.

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in FIG. 242 (F), the ornamental symbol variation display is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variation display of the fifth symbol is performed, and the fourth symbol lamp i1 of the special symbol 1 is lit in white. Further, the number indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 displayed on the upper part of the third decorative symbol display device 208N has decreased from “1” to “0”. However, one hold icon is displayed in the silhouette display, and nothing is displayed on the stage in the variable icon display area e. The curtain effect is still continued, and is executed across the continuous display of decorative symbols. Subsequently, although the movement animation of the hold icon is started, the illustration is omitted here, and in FIG. 242 (G), the movement animation of the hold icon is completed, and no hold icon is displayed. A silhouette display variation icon e1s is also displayed on the silhouette display stage in the display area e. Further, the curtain display CH starts to descend, and the curtain display CH descends to the upper end of the base icon UIb. However, at this stage, the mode of the fluctuation icon e1 cannot be confirmed yet. In FIG. 242 (H), the curtain display CH has been lowered to a position where the entire variation icon e1 can be seen, and the aspect of the variation icon e1 has changed from the default dot pattern aspect to the lattice pattern aspect. Can be confirmed. As described above, as long as the silhouette display is viewed over the curtain part CHc, the change change effect e1 is changed, although the on-hold change effect is not started. In this example, the curtain effect itself corresponds to the hold change effect. Note that, as described above, the change icon e1 can be considered as a kind of the hold icon, and hence the change icon e.g. When the hold change effect is performed by the curtain effect itself, any one or a plurality of hold change effects from the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect, or all the hold changes You may comprise so that it may change to the aspect with a high expectation degree of jackpot compared with an effect.

  FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating another example of the curtain effect.

  FIGS. 243 (a) to (b) are examples in which the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. 243 (a) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (d), and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. In FIG. 243 (a), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH rises to near the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol The display area 208c is completely covered by the curtain part CHc. The decorative symbol variation display performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is a state in which no silhouette is displayed and nothing can be seen.

  After this, although not shown, the first symbol (temporary stop) is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the second symbol (temporary stop) is performed in the right symbol display area 208c. Temporary stop is also performed in the display area 208b, and the combination of decorative symbols fluctuates (temporary display). In FIG. 243 (b), the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the final display of the combination of decorative symbols is started. When the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, combinations of decorative symbols that have not been seen until then are displayed on the curtain portion CHc. That is, instead of the silhouette display, the decorative symbols displayed on the back side of the curtain part CHc are preferentially displayed on the front side. In FIG. 243 (b), the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed on the curtain portion CHc. Therefore, the player can know whether it is a big hit or a loss by combining the decorative symbols. Note that the variation icon e1 and the hold icon f1 remain in silhouette display.

  FIGS. 243 (1) to (3) are examples in which the curtain effect and the meter effect described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 92 are combined. FIG. 243 (1) is a continuation from FIG. 240 (c), in which the curtain display CH is raised to the upper end of the base icon UIb, and the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH is closed. A portion of the lower frame portion CRf of the CR overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 243 (1), a meter display appears at the upper left of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The meter display here has a white meter frame mf and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. In the following description, white is treated as a dot pattern, blue as a diagonal pattern, green as a diamond pattern, red as a grid pattern, gold as a vertical line pattern, and rainbow as a horizontal line pattern. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 243 (1) is an increase type, and is provided with five scales, and is full at the sixth stage. The meter of the white meter display MW has risen up to two scales. The appearance timing of the meter display varies as described in detail in the description with reference to FIGS. 80 to 92. For example, in the variable display of the decorative pattern executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is For example, when high-speed fluctuation occurs or when the symbol fluctuation starts. Further, the meter display may start in an empty state (the meter is 0), or the meter is stored halfway as in the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 243 (1). Display may be started in the state.

  The effect by the meter display here may be a kind of hold change effect in which the state of the hold icon or the change icon changes when the meter is full. The color (pattern) of the meter frame mf and the color (pattern) of the meter may indicate the ease of success in changing the mode of the held icon or the variable icon. That is, the mode changes easily in the order of white (dot pattern), blue (hatched pattern), green (diamond pattern), red (lattice pattern), gold (vertical line pattern), and iridescent (horizontal line pattern). If it is a color (horizontal line pattern), it may be successful if the meter is full. Alternatively, the color (pattern) of the meter frame mf or the color (pattern) of the meter may represent a color (pattern) in which the mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. For example, when the meter frame mf or the meter is red (lattice pattern), the state of the hold icon or the change icon may change to red (lattice pattern) when the meter is full. Further, when the meter is full and the meter frame mf or the meter is white (dotted pattern), the status of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a mode one level higher, and blue (hatched pattern) If it is green (diamond pattern), it will change to a three-level top, if it is red (lattice pattern), it will change to a four-level top, gold (vertical line) If it is a pattern), it may be changed to a mode of five steps, and if it is a rainbow color (horizontal line pattern), it may be changed to a mode of six steps.

  In FIG. 243 (2), the curtain display CH continues to rise, and in FIG. 3 (3), the upper edge CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the vicinity of the upper end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. doing. The upper half of the white meter display MW is not visible because it is overlapped with the upper edge portion CHu, but the lower half of the white meter display MW is covered by the curtain portion CHc, and is displayed in a black pattern with a black pattern. It is displayed. That is, the meter frame mf, the portion filled with the meter, and the portion not filled with the meter are all displayed in a single black color without distinction. For this reason, the player cannot grasp how much the meter has accumulated. On the other hand, even in the same silhouette display, as shown in FIG. 243 (3 ′), the portion buried with the meter and the portion not buried with the meter can be distinguished and displayed. The player can grasp how far the meter has accumulated. Although the scale is displayed up to the scale in the white meter display MWs displayed in silhouette shown in FIG. 243 (3 '), the scale may not be displayed.

  FIGS. 243 (A) to (E) are examples in which the curtain effect is executed by display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The curtain effect may be executed by display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any two of the first decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. It may be executed by display on the symbol display device, or may be executed by display on all three decorative symbol display devices.

  FIG. 243 (A) is a continuation from FIG. 230 (c), and a change candidate icon HKI having a hatched pattern is displayed on the treasure chest TB. In FIG. 243 (B), the curtain effect is started, and the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH appears at the lower end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The upper edge portion CHu is displayed in a hatched pattern so as to overlap the character display of “castle town” representing the castle town mode from the front side.

  In FIG. 243 (C), the curtain display CH is rising, the character display of “Castle Town” is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and a black silhouette is displayed without any pattern, making it impossible to read the characters.

  In FIG. 243 (D), the curtain display CH is raised until it exceeds the treasure box TB, the entire treasure box TB is overlapped with the curtain part CHc, and the entire treasure box TB is displayed as a black silhouette with no pattern.

  In FIG. 243 (E), the upper edge portion CHu of the curtain display CH rises to the upper end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the change candidate icon HKI displayed on the treasure chest TB is displayed on the curtain portion CHc. Overlapping and even the change candidate icon HKI is displayed in a solid black silhouette. For this reason, it is impossible to confirm the mode of the change candidate icon HKI. In the state where the change candidate icon HKI is displayed in silhouette, it may be configured to change to a mode in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is higher than in the state where no silhouette is displayed, and before the curtain effect is started. The change candidate icon HKI displayed in a diagonal pattern may change to a rhombus pattern or more after the curtain effect, or it must change to a rhombus pattern or more. May be. On the other hand, the change display of the fifth symbol displayed on the upper end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the upper edge CHu. That is, instead of the silhouette display, the fifth symbol that is displayed in a variable manner that is displayed just behind the upper edge CHu is preferentially displayed on the front side.

  The display start timing of the curtain display CH may be before the treasure chest TB is displayed. In this case, the aspect such as the pattern and color of the treasure chest TB cannot be grasped from the beginning. Further, the display start timing of the curtain display CH may be after the treasure chest TB is displayed and before the change candidate icon HKI appears in the treasure chest TB. In this case, the change candidate is displayed. The aspect such as the pattern and color of the icon HKI cannot be grasped from the beginning.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 described above, the shuriken and the arrow are not shown in the example, but the shuriken and the arrow are removed without hitting the icon, or the hitting icon TI is released. There are times when it gets stuck. Moreover, even if it hits, the aspect of an icon may not change. Alternatively, even if the watcher character BC appears to have an icon, the mode of the icon may not change, or even if the roulette icon changes to a mode in which characters representing a pattern are stopped, The roulette icon mode may not change. On the other hand, when a shuriken or arrow hits, the mode of the icon may be changed, or when the Bancho character BC appears to have an icon, or the roulette icon represents a pattern. Even when the character is changed to the stopped display mode, the icon mode may be changed.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 described in this specification will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 244 (a) is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and FIG. 244 (b) is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the effect device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 244 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variation icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the variation icon h0 is displayed, the fact that the symbol variation is being displayed is informed. Note that the variation icon h0 is not displayed when the symbol confirmation display is in progress (the symbol is stopped). A navigation character NC is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. A navigation character NC shown in FIG. 244 (a) is a standing Yoshimune character. The navigation character NC is a character that is normally displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate a pedestal for the hold icon. In addition, the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character NC does not have to be displayed at all times, and there are accumulated specific notices and effects using the navigation character NC (for example, N look-ahead notices, notices in the symbol variation display, and symbol variation display holds). May be displayed when the navigation character NC is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 244 (a), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), but are displayed according to the progress of the game May change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display. Here, the variation icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display. The fluctuation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as a variable icon or expressed as a variable icon moving. Good. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, a second decorative design (fifth design) smaller than the first decorative design is a combination of decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stop is displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative design in the second decorative design matches the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design, but the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design and the decoration in the second decorative design. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (in this case, “4” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. It should be noted that the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Also good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

  Also, a crest character 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be moved up and down or rotated depending on the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 244 (a), the family crest character 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest member 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first large board acting 224Ga with the letters “Large”, which is one of the production movable bodies, and the second with the letters “Board”. A large board behavior object 224Gb, a third large board behavior object 224Gc with the letters “behavior”, and a fourth big board behavior object 224Gd with the letters “mai” are arranged. Each of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior article 224Gd incorporate light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of effects.

  In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. . The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H incorporates light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of effects.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of these decorative symbol display device 208, family crest role 224E, first large board behavioral 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral 224Gd, and Senryo box role 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 244 (a), the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 4th symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the special symbol symbol is stopped, the LED is turned on, while the special symbol symbol variation is blinking or extinguished. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 244 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The configurations of these decorative symbol display devices are the same as the configurations of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable vertically along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the rendering operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured to be able to all be performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform an effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or the directing operation that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to perform a rendering operation. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs an effect operation, and either one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. Note that the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. The first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. A navigation character NC, which is a standing Yoshimune character, is displayed on the right side of the change icon h0. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 244 (b), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 244 (b), the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode). Depending on the situation, the display mode may change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stopped in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative design in the second decorative design matches the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design, but the combination of the decorative design in the first decorative design and the decoration in the second decorative design. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display a 2nd holding | maintenance number display to the decoration symbol display apparatus which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Further, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may not be displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by other effect display devices (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be frameless. Moreover, a decoration member and LED may be provided in the frame.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down or rotate depending on the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 244 (b), the crest character 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the crest character 224E shown in FIG. 244 (b) is the upper end of the crest character 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

  In addition, the above-mentioned thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. The Thousand box accessory 224H is disposed in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest role 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H. It is possible to visually recognize the operation of each effect movable body.

  In FIG. 244 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 245 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of decorative symbol variation display executed in the present embodiment. FIG. 245 is a flow of decorative symbol variation display that is out of reach without being reached. FIG. 4B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variation display of the decorative symbol that becomes a big hit or loses after reaching the reach state.

  In FIG. 245 (a), after the decorative symbol variation display is started (variation start), the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped through the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. The flow is shown. In the following description, the stop order of decorative symbols is, in principle, left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol, but is not limited to this. In addition, the first stop and the second stop may be performed at the same time depending on the notice (the change notice or the pre-read notice), the mini-game, the pseudo-ream, etc. The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the start of change to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are respectively “( 11) "in some cases. In the following explanation, “Diagram XX (11) -1”, “Diagram XX (11) -2”... Etc. may be used, and the examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. In addition, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 245 (a), there are cases where effects that can be combined as various effects can be performed during the period indicated by “(11)” (for example, a gusset notice). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or the period from the third stop to the final stop, pseudo-gap staging, chance notices by the same color (same type) symbol stop (pre-reading notice), etc. There are cases where it is possible. This is a concept that can be applied to each effect example of the embodiments described above.

  FIG. 245 (b) shows that after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol (start of variation), the decorative symbol is lost or a big hit through formation of reach state, transition to super reach (SP reach), and derivation of the result of reach production. It shows the flow from the final stop in the manner of, until the end of the jackpot game. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation until the reach state is formed is represented by the period “(1)”, and the period from the reach state is formed to the transition to the SP reach is represented by the period “(2)”. The period from the transition to SP reach to the time when the reach effect is derived is represented by the period “(3)”, and the period from the time when the reach effect is derived until the final stop is indicated by “(4)”. The period from the final stop to the end of the big hit game may be represented by the period “(5)”. In the following description, “Diagram XX (2) -1”, “Diagram XX (2) -2”, as branch numbers in the drawings, for the effects performed in the example of a big hit or loss after reaching the reach state, "Fig. XX (3) -1", "Fig. XX (3) -2", etc. may be used, and examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. In the description of the present embodiment, during the period “(1)”, various notices including a mini-game, a pre-reading notice, and the like, and effects such as pseudo-reams may be performed, and during the period “(2)”. In some cases, notices or group notices may be given by displaying normal reach or cut-in images, and during the period of “(3)”, chances advance notices during SP reach, notices by displaying cut-in images, etc. In the period of “(4)”, there may be fluctuation fluctuation, revival jackpot effect, wipe display, etc., and in the period of “(5)”, the effect during the jackpot game is performed, There is a case where a probability change notification, a reserved resort notification, or the like is performed during a game. In the above-described embodiment and the embodiment described below, each executed notice and effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice and effect are executed. Moreover, it may be configured such that these notices and effects may be performed in combination. In this case, even if one notice (effect) is overlapped with the other notice (effect). Good. Moreover, in the embodiment described so far and the embodiment described below, the portions described by the same branch number can be appropriately replaced.

  FIGS. 246 to 250 are diagrams showing step-by-step changing effects centered on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effect referred to here is an effect that changes aspects such as the hold icon (for example, the first hold icon h1), the change icon h0, and the character icon. Further, the change effects shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 are effects executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the change effects shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 is shown in other drawings. Various effects can also be executed. Further, in FIGS. 246 to 250, although the second decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> N are also provided, these are not shown, but the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 are It may be an effect example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not provided. Further, in FIGS. 246 to 250, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 represent common components when the same reference numerals used so far are used. Even if different codes are used, they may be common as technical ideas. That is, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 and the technical idea shown in other drawings can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. Conversely, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 246 to 250 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 229 to 243 and the technical idea shown in other drawings. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of a change effect including a hold icon change effect. FIG. 247 shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 246 up to (4) -2 in FIG. These are figures which show an example of the change effect including a timer notice effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. That is, a state before the start of fluctuation is shown. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. A navigation character NC, which is a standing Yoshimune character, is displayed on the lower right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, since the symbol is fixedly displayed, the variation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 246 is a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state (non-electric support state). On the lower left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the non-electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the non-electric support state.

  In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -1, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and these three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of FIG. Are also displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 246 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -1, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed. Not. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the special symbol variation display is performed in the order of the variation start in the special diagram display device → the movement animation of the hold icon starts or disappears → the decorative symbol variation start. Also good. The same applies to the following description.

  When the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is started, as shown in FIG. 246 (11) -2, the first decorative symbol is displayed. On display device 208L, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In addition, a movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is moved to the fluctuation icon display area formed at the lower center of the screen and displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is set as the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 is moved to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, the display representing the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 among the second number of held numbers displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed to a display of “2”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -3, the decorative symbol variation display is continued. The decorative symbol variation display started at the timing of FIG. 246 (11) -2 continues thereafter until FIG. 246 (11) -17.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -4, a Yoshimune character YM with a bow appears in the upper left corner. This Yoshimune character YM corresponds to a character of change effect. More specifically, it corresponds to a character that may change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, which is a generic name of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -5, a ninja character NJ appears in the upper right corner. This ninja character NJ also corresponds to a character of change effect. More specifically, the ninja character NJ may change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, or may change the display mode of another character (for example, Yoshimune character YM holding a bow). Corresponds to a certain character. Note that the Yoshimune character YM that appeared in FIG. 246 (11) -4 may also be a character that may change the display mode of other characters (for example, the ninja character NJ). In FIG. 246 (11) -5, both the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow and the ninja character NJ are displayed.

  When one display (for example, the display of one character) changes the display of the other (for example, the display of one character), the one displayed first is the one displayed later. Or vice versa, there is a case where the one displayed later or the one displayed earlier is changed. Alternatively, the one displayed later may not change the one displayed earlier, and if displayed at the same time, one may change the other, and at the same time Even when displayed, one may not change the other. Further, the larger display may change the smaller display, and conversely, the smaller display may change the larger display. Also, the display with the higher reliability of the jackpot may change the display with the lower reliability of the jackpot, and conversely, the display with the lower reliability will display the higher display. It may be changed. The jackpot reliability may be the player's advantage (same throughout this specification) and is represented by a difference in color, pattern, size, number, or the like.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -6, the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow has not started moving, but the ninja character NJ has started moving and throws a shuriken. Note that the operation in the “start operation” here does not include a repetitive operation or a standby operation, and means a new operation different from the previous operation (the same applies to the following). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -6, a scene where the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon is displayed. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -7, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ suddenly turns and flies toward the Yoshimune character YM holding a bow. The scene that can be seen is displayed. The Yoshimune character YM holding the bow has not yet started moving, and the shuriken eventually hit the Yoshimune character YM. In FIG. 246 (11) -8, at least a part of the Yoshimune character YM is an effect image. Covered by mα, Yoshimune's character YM is more difficult to see than before being covered by the effect image mα. Note that the effect image mα may cover only a part of the Yoshimune character YM, or may cover the whole.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -9, the effect image mα disappears and the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling appears. That is, the character YM of Yoshimune has changed from a display mode having a bow and arrow to a display mode in which bowling is performed. The Yoshimune character YM who performs this bowling also corresponds to the character of the change effect. More specifically, it corresponds to a character that may change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, which is a generic name of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon. The change in the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM is that the production has changed, more specifically, the type of production is the same, but the mode has changed. In other words, the change effect is continued, but it can be considered that the change effect has changed to another effect. Note that the change effect may be temporarily interrupted. For example, while the effect image mα is displayed, it can be seen that the change effect is temporarily interrupted. In addition, before and after the change of the effect, for example, the type of effect may be different, such as a change effect and an accessory action effect.

  The period when the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow, in other words, the change effect where the character YM of the Yoshimune holding the bow is displayed, is executed at the start timing and end timing shown below. It can be represented by all combinations starting first and ending later. In other words, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM holding a bow appears (FIG. 246 (11) -4), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts moving (shuriken) Or the timing at which the effect image mα appears. On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when the shuriken hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8), or the effect image mα disappears. May be the timing (the timing when the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM has changed).

  In FIG. 246 (11) -10, the ninja character NJ displayed so far disappears. The period when the change effect using the ninja character NJ, in other words, the change effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed, is executed, the start timing and the end timing shown below start first and end later. Can be expressed in all combinations. In other words, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the ninja character NJ appears (FIG. 246 (11) -5), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts moving (timing when throwing a shuriken). ), The timing when the shuriken hits, or the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears (FIG. 246 (11) -10), or the timing at which the ninja character NJ ends the movement (timing at which the shuriken is finished). ), The timing at which the shuriken hits, the timing at which the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8), or the timing at which the effect image mα disappears. (Timing when the display mode of the character YM of Yoshimune has changed) may be used.

  Further, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ has failed to change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, and has succeeded in changing other effects instead. . However, changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense or changing other effects may fail, or both may be successful. Or you may be sure to succeed in changing any one of changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense and changing other effects, or changing both You may be sure to succeed.

  At the same time or after the ninja character NJ disappears, the Yoshimune character YM with the bowling ball starts to move and throws the bowling ball. Note that there may be a case where the Yoshimune character YM starts to move before the ninja character NJ disappears. Further, the ninja character NJ may be displayed as it is without disappearing. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -12 displays a scene in which the bowling ball thrown by the Yoshimune character YM appears to roll toward the hold icon or the change icon. Yes. The bowling ball eventually hits the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 246 (11) -13, the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 is covered before the effect image mβ. It has become difficult to see. Note that the effect image mβ may cover only a part of the first hold icon h11 or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may cover all the held icons that are displayed, or may cover up to the variation icon h0. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the whole or a part of the holding frame (the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

  In FIG. 246 (11) -14, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the character (here, the character of Sabohani). Note that a plurality of types of hold icon display modes are prepared, and the display mode may change to a display mode of other characters (for example, Yoshimune or Samurai), or may change to a red or rainbow color display mode. A display mode different from the default display mode is a display mode of a prefetch notice, and the reliability of the jackpot varies depending on the display mode. For example, the display style of the Yoshimune character is higher in the reliability of the big hit than the display style of the Sabohani character, and the big hit may be confirmed in the rainbow color display mode. The reliability of the jackpot represents the ease with which the jackpot symbol can be displayed. Also, in FIG. 246 (11) -14, the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling disappears.

  The period when it is assumed that the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling, in other words, the change effect in which the character YM of bowling is displayed, is executed at the start timing and the end timing shown below. It can be represented by all combinations that finish first and later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the shuriken hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 246 (11) -8), or Yoshimune who performs bowling. It may be the timing when the character YM appears (FIG. 246 (11) -9), or the timing when the Yoshimune character YM performing bowling starts (timing the bowling ball thrown out). The timing when the ball of the bowling hits may be used, or the timing when the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (11) -13). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling disappears (FIG. 246 (11) -14), or the timing when the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling ends ( The timing at which the bowling ball has been thrown), the timing at which the bowling ball has hit, or the timing at which the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (11) -13). It may be the timing when the effect image mβ disappears (the timing when the display mode of the hold icon changes).

  Further, in this example, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling has succeeded in changing the display mode of the hold icon in the broad sense, but it may fail. Further, in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed, but the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may be changed, or the display mode of the third hold icon h13 is changed. The display mode of a plurality of hold icons (may be all the hold icons that are displayed) may be changed. Alternatively, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change, or the display mode of both the hold icon and the change icon may change. Further, when the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM changes, it may be determined that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes at the stage of change. That is, in this example, it may be determined that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes in the stage of FIG. 246 (11) -9.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -15, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -16, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (11) -17, the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “decoration 7—decoration 2—decoration 2” is lost. The temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols, and in the following FIG. (11) -18, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 2—decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. The change icon h0 is erased at the timing of the final display.

  Subsequently, the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, the special figure display of special figure 1 is started, and the special figure display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -1, the decorative symbol variable display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of the sabotani that is the subject of the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It moves to the fluctuation icon display area and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the display representing the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 among the second number of reserved numbers displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed to a display of “1”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2, a Yoshimune character YM holding a bow corresponding to the character of the change effect appears in the upper left corner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -3, a ninja character NJ corresponding to the character of change effect appears in the upper right corner.

  In FIG. 246 (1) -4, the Yoshimune character YM holding the bow has not started to move, but the ninja character NJ has started moving and throws a shuriken. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -4 displays a scene where the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -5, a scene in which the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is likely to hit the change icon h0 of the display mode of Sabohani is displayed. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -6, the scene where the shuriken suddenly changed direction and did not hit the variation icon h0, but passed over the first hold icon h11. In (1) -7, the shuriken disappears and the ninja character NJ disappears. After all, the change effect here has been unsuccessful, and neither the hold icon nor the change icon has changed in display mode. The timing at which the shuriken disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be the timing at which the shuriken disappears, or the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears.

  The period during which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed can be expressed by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below that start first and end later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the ninja character NJ appears (FIG. 246 (1) -3), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts moving (timing when throwing a shuriken). ). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears (FIG. 246 (1) -7), or the timing at which the ninja character NJ ends the movement (timing at which the shuriken is finished). ), Or when the shuriken is not hit and the shuriken disappears.

  Also, from the appearance of the ninja character NJ (FIG. 246 (1) -3) to the scene (FIG. 246 (1) -4) where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon. From the appearance of the ninja character NJ in FIG. 246 (11) -5 to the scene (FIG. 246 (11) -6) where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon. The same. That is, in the case where the change effect is unsuccessful and the case where the change effect is successful, a part including the first part is the same mode and is different from the middle. In other words, when the change effect fails and when the change effect is successful, the first part of the change effect animation using the ninja character NJ is the same, and the scene changes from the middle. . In this way, if the introduction part is the same, it is difficult for the player to determine which will develop at first, but it will soon be possible to see whether it will fail or succeed, and even after the production starts May be noticed. In addition, when the change effect fails and when the change effect is successful, the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon after the Ninja character NJ starts moving. Can be said to be the same. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the way is the same in the case where the change effect has failed and in the case where the change effect has succeeded. Even in this case, attention may be paid to the branching of the effects.

  At the same time as or after the disappearance of the ninja character NJ, the Yoshimune character YM with a bow who had not operated until then starts to move and fires an arrow. Note that there may be a case where the Yoshimune character YM starts to move before the ninja character NJ disappears. Further, the ninja character NJ may be displayed as it is without disappearing. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -8, a scene is displayed in which the arrow fired by the Yoshimune character YM is likely to hit the change icon h0 in the display mode of Sabohani. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -9, the arrow hits the variation icon h0, the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image mβ, and the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image mβ. It is harder to see than before. Note that the effect image mβ may cover only a part of the fluctuation icon h0 or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may be covered by including part or all of the displayed hold icon. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the whole or a part of the holding frame (the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

  In FIG. 246 (1) -10, the effect image mβ disappears, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 is not changed. That is, a plurality of types of display modes of the variation icon h0 are prepared as with the hold icon, and display modes of other characters (for example, Yoshimune and Samurai) and display modes of red and rainbow colors are facilitated. The display mode different from the default display mode is a so-called normal notification display mode in which the currently displayed variable display is the target of notification, and the jackpot reliability varies depending on the display mode. For example, the display style of the Yoshimune character is higher in the reliability of the big hit than the display style of the Sabohani character, and the big hit may be confirmed in the rainbow color display mode. After all, the change effect here has been unsuccessful, and neither the hold icon nor the change icon has changed in display mode. Thus, the display mode may not change even if the arrow hits. However, if the arrow hits, the display mode may be changed (successfully), or the arrow may hit. However, the display mode may or may not change depending on whether or not the effect image mβ appears. That is, when the effect image mβ does not appear, the display mode does not always change (fails), and when the effect image mβ appears, the display mode always changes (success). Good. Further, if the display mode of the variation icon changes (success), the big hit may be confirmed. Furthermore, here, the change icon h0 is the target, but the hold icon may be the target.

  In FIG. 246 (1) -11, the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow disappears.

  The period when it is assumed that a change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow is being executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and end timing shown below that start first and end later. . That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM appears (FIG. 246 (1) -2), or the timing when the Yoshimune character YM starts moving (the timing when the arrow is fired). ), The timing when the arrow hits, or the timing when the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (1) -9). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the Yoshimune character YM disappears (FIG. 246 (1) -11), or the timing at which the Yoshimune character YM has finished moving (finished firing the arrow). Timing), the timing when the arrow hits, the timing when the effect image mβ appears (FIG. 246 (1) -9), or the effect image mβ disappears. It may be timing (FIG. 246 (1) -10).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -12, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (1) -13, the second stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 246 (2)-1, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character NC to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started, “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and the super-reach is developed. Informed. When the savory group notice is started, the hold icon disappears together with the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI unit 281 and is prepared in the first UI unit 280. The change icon h0 disappears along with the pedestal hs0. Note that the display of the navigation character NC remains, but the display of the navigation character NC may also disappear. In addition, the decorative symbol display is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 246 (3) -1, the screen is developed into super reach (swordsman reach), and the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman face each other. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, a character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed, and it is notified that the character has been developed into a swordsman reach. Subsequently, in FIG. 246 (3) -2, the button effect is started in a state where the swordsman reach is continued, and a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 is displayed. The button image 136a overlaps at least part of the opposing Yoshimune and swordsman. In addition, a “push” character that facilitates the operation is displayed. In FIG. 246 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -4, weak cut-in image CIw is displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, although the character “Swordsman Reach” is still displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, the characters “Weak Cut-in” may be displayed instead of the characters “Swordsman Reach”.

  Normally, an operation effective period for receiving the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and a response effect (here, display of the weak cut-in image CIw is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. ), Or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the operation effective period elapses. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene where the main character Yoshimune collapsed is displayed together with the characters “losing”, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Is displayed in the middle of the symbol “decoration 3” that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the ornament symbol “decoration 2 -decoration 3 -decoration 2”. .

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second reserved number display is restored. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is displayed in a temporarily stopped state due to fluctuations in shaking. . At this time, the word “sorry” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is informed that it will be lost. In addition, the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) and the hold icon in the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon that have disappeared until now, and the display icon f0 of the display mode of the pedestal hs0 and the sabotani in the first UI unit 280 are also restored. It is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -2, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3—decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. The change icon h0 of the display mode of the sabotani is deleted at the timing of the final display.

  In the example described above, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling shown in FIG. 246 (11) -9 is a change effect for the hold icon, and the bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2. The change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with the character was a change effect for the change icon. Moreover, although the change effect using the ninja character NJ shown in FIG. 246 (1) -3 is a failure effect, even if it is a change effect for a variable icon, a change effect for a hold icon is used. It may be. Further, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling shown in FIG. 246 (11) -9 may be a change effect for the change icon, and all the change effects performed in this example are changed. You may unify into the change production for the icon. Alternatively, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM having the bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2 may be a change effect for the hold icon, and all the change effects performed in this example are You may unify into the change production for the hold icon.

  Moreover, in the Yoshimune character YM and the Ninja character NJ, the Yoshimune character YM appears first, but the Yoshimune character YM and the Ninja character NJ may appear at the same time. On the contrary, the ninja character NJ may appear first. That is, in the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM and the change effect using the ninja character NJ, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM may be started at the same time. Or, a change effect using the ninja character NJ may be started first.

  In the example described above, the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow is used for the change icon h0 changed from the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed due to the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM who is bowling. Although the change effect was executed, it ended in failure and eventually lost, but the character YM of bowling Yoshimune is better than the change effect using the character YM of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow. When the used change effect is performed, it tends to be advantageous development for the player. The term “prone to easily develop” here means that an advantageous control state (for example, a probability change state and / or a short time state) is likely to occur, a premier effect is likely to start, It may be easy to start, or it may be easy to finally display the big hit symbol. For example, Yoshimune's character YM with a bow and arrow changed the display mode of the change icon h0 in the default display mode to the display mode of the Sabohani character. Yoshimune's character YM appears from the beginning, and the bowling Yoshimune character YM changes the display mode of the change icon h0 of the default display mode to the display mode of the Yoshimune character, and the change display makes a big hit Become. This is the same even when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this case, the pre-reading notice is executed, and the change display of the pre-reading notice object is a big hit. In this way, the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling may not appear unless the Yoshimune character YM with the bow and arrow changes, but may appear from the beginning. In this case, furthermore, the Yoshimune character YM who does bowling, which appeared from the beginning, is not likely to be advantageous development for the player. It may be easy for the player to develop a favorable development. Or, conversely, the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling may have a mode (direction) that appears only by a change from the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow, or limited to the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow. It may be an aspect (production) that appears only by a change from some production.

  Also, when the production using the Ninja character NJ is started first, and then the production using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow or the change production using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling is started. There may be. In this case, the effect using the ninja character NJ does not change the effect using the Yoshimune character YM. In addition, after the presentation using the ninja character NJ is finished, there may be a change production using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow, or a change production using the Yoshimune character YM performing bowling. Good.

  Also, the effect using the Yoshimune character YM with the bow and arrow that appeared in FIG. 246 (1) -2 and the effect using the ninja character NJ that appeared in FIG. It can be seen that it was a failure production (gase production) among the common types of production such as a change production directed at. Note that the two effects may be a change effect for the hold icon, which is a different type of effect from the change effect for the variable icon h0. In addition, only the effect using the Yoshimune character YM of both effects may be a successful effect that succeeds in changing the icon display mode, or only the effect using the ninja character NJ is a successful effect. Or both productions may be successful productions. If both effects are successful effects, the display mode of the icon changes twice, or if it changes simultaneously, the player's advantage changes to a display mode that increases by two or more stages.

  Next, an example in which an effect using a timer display and a change effect are performed will be described.

  Since FIG. 247 (11) -1 and FIG. 11 (2) -2 are the same as FIG. 246 (11) -1 and FIG. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3 where the decorative symbol variation display is started, the timer display TMα appears on the upper left. In the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3, “03:00” is displayed, which indicates that a certain effect starts when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown started. . That is, the timer display TMα displayed as “03:00” is a timer notice effect in which the countdown starts from 3.00 seconds. Note that the timer display in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a fractional part of less than 1 second. Further, under the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (11) -3, a character “Preparing Timer” is displayed, and it is notified that the countdown has not yet started. Even if the timer display appears, while this “Preparing Timer” is displayed, the timer notice effect has not yet started, and the preparation notice effect is executed to notify that the timer notice effect will start. Although it can be seen that the timer has been displayed, it can also be seen that the timer notice effect has started with the appearance of the timer display. Further, a character icon may be attached to the timer display TMα, and the same applies to another timer display described below.

  In the subsequent first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -4, a ninja character NJ corresponding to the character of change effect appears in the upper right corner. This ninja character NJ corresponds to a character that may change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense or change other effects (for example, changing the effect mode or the contents of the effect). . In FIG. 247 (11) -4, both the timer display TMα and the ninja character NJ are displayed.

  In FIG. 247 (11) -5, the characters “Preparing Timer” are still displayed, and the countdown has not yet started in the timer display TMα, but the ninja character NJ starts to move and throws a shuriken. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -5 displays a scene where the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon. Here, after the appearance of the ninja character NJ, the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon (FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -5) is After the appearance of the ninja character NJ described above, the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon (FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11) -6, FIG. 246 (1) -3 to 3 (1) -4).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -6, a scene in which the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -7, the shuriken hits the first hold icon h11, the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 , It is more difficult to see than before being covered with the effect image mβ. Note that the effect image mβ may cover only a part of the first hold icon h11 or may cover the whole. Alternatively, the effect image mβ may cover all the held icons that are displayed, or may cover up to the variation icon h0. That is, the second UI unit 281 may be covered, or the whole or a part of the holding frame (the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281) may be covered. When the first UI unit 280 is covered, the navigation character NC may be covered.

  In FIG. 247 (11) -8, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the character (here, the character of Sabohani). As described above, a plurality of types of pre-reading notice display modes having different jackpot reliability are prepared as the display mode of the hold icon, and the display mode of other characters (for example, Yoshimune and Samurai) can be changed. In some cases, the display mode changes to red or rainbow. In FIG. 247 (11) -9, the ninja character NJ has disappeared.

  The period in which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed can also be expressed by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing described above that start first and end later.

  Further, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ has succeeded in changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, but it may fail. Further, in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed, but the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may be changed, or the display mode of the third hold icon h13 is changed. The display mode of a plurality of hold icons (may be all the hold icons that are displayed) may be changed. Alternatively, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change, or the display mode of both the hold icon and the change icon may change. When a ninja character NJ appears, it may be determined that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes at the appearance stage. That is, in this example, it may be determined that the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes in the stage of FIG. 247 (11) -4.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -10, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -11, the second stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (11) -12, the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and “decoration 7-decoration 2—decoration 2” is lost. The temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed for the combination of the decorative symbols, and in the following (11) -13, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 2—decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. The change icon h0 is erased at the timing of the final display. Although the display of the timer display TMα continues even after the decorative symbol variation display is completed, the characters “Preparing the timer” are still displayed, and the countdown has not yet started in the timer display TMα.

  Subsequently, the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, the special figure display of special figure 1 is started, and the special figure display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of the sabotani that is the subject of the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It moves to the fluctuation icon display area and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the display representing the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 among the second number of reserved numbers displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed to a display of “1”. On the other hand, even when the decorative symbol variation display is newly started, the timer display TMα continues to be displayed, but the characters “Preparing the timer” are still displayed, and the timer display TMα starts the countdown. Not. The timer display TMα whose display has been started in FIG. 247 (11) -3 is displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays, with the display of “03:00”. In addition, although the change effect using the ninja character NJ has been completed, this change effect may be performed across a plurality of continuous decorative pattern variation displays. Both the timer display TMα (timer notice effect) and the display (change effect) of the ninja character NJ may be displayed (executed) across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. In addition, the display (change effect) of the Yoshimune character YM with bow and arrow and the display (change effect) of the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling are displayed (execution) across a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variations. It may be done. Note that “displaying over a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays” may disappear once during decorative symbol variation display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (1) -2, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (1) -3, the second stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (2)-1, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character NC to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (2) -2, the savory group notice is started, the character display of “timer preparation”, the reach character display, and at least a part of each of the navigation characters NC There are overlapping Sabohani. The navigation character NC may not overlap the navigation character NC, and the navigation character NC may overlap at least a part of the navigation character NC. Similarly, the character display may overlap with at least a part of the savory. In the following FIG. 247 (2) -3, “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is informed that it will develop into super reach. When the savory group notice is started, the hold icon disappears together with the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI unit 281 and is prepared in the first UI unit 280. The change icon h0 disappears along with the pedestal hs0. Note that the display of the navigation character NC remains, but the display of the navigation character NC may also disappear. In addition, the decorative symbol display is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (3) -1, the screen is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman confront each other. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, a character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed, and it is notified that the character has been developed into a swordsman reach. With the development of super reach, the character display “Preparing timer” disappears and the timer display TMα starts to count down. That is, the countdown of the timer display TMα is started simultaneously with the start of the super reach effect. However, the countdown of the timer display TMα may be started after the start of the super reach effect. In the timer display TMα shown in FIG. 247 (3) -2, “02:67” is displayed, and it is informed that 0.33 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -3, “00:00” is displayed on the timer display TMα, and when the countdown is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a large image imitating the chance button 136. A certain big button image 136ab is displayed. The decabutton image 136ab overlaps all of the opposing Yoshimune and the swordsman displayed as the super reach effect display, and the Yoshimune and the swordsman are invisible. In addition, the character “push” that promotes the operation is displayed in large size in accordance with the size of the big button image 136ab. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, a character “deca button” is displayed in place of the character “swordsman reach”. The timer display TMα here indicates that the button effect is started. When the countdown of the timer display TMα is completed, the button effect may always be started, or an effect other than the button effect may be started.

  In FIG. 247 (3) -4, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the big button image 136ab disappears, and the timer display TMα of “00:00” that has been displayed so far also disappears. The display is switched to the display of the cut-in image CIs. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, the character “swordsman reach” is displayed again instead of the character “deca button”, but the character “strong cut-in” may be displayed.

  Normally, an operation effective period for receiving the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and a response effect (here, display of the strong cut-in image CIs is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period. ), Or even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the operation effective period elapses. It may be.

  In this example, the timer display TMα is displayed until the chance button 136 is operated. However, the timer display TMα may disappear when it becomes “00:00”, or disappear when the decabutton image 136ab appears. Also good.

  The period in which the effect using the timer display TMα (timer notice effect) is being executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and end timing shown below, starting first and ending later. That is, the start timing of the change effect is the timing when the timer display TMα appears (FIG. 247 (11) -3). However, it may be the timing when the countdown is started (immediately after FIG. 247 (3) -1). On the other hand, the end timing of the timer notice effect may be the timing when the timer display TMα becomes “00:00” (FIG. 247 (3) -3), or the timing when the deca button image 136ab appears (FIG. 247). (3) -3), timing when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 247 (3) -4), or timing when the timer display TMα disappears (FIG. 247 (3)) -4).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 247 (3) -6, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy swordsman is displayed with the letters “win”. At the approximate center of the symbol display device 208L, the “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is displayed, and the symbol display device 208L is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2”. Is notified.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed under the second reserved number display is restored. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed in a temporarily stopped state due to fluctuations in shaking. . At this time, the character “big hit” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. In addition, the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) and the hold icon in the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon that have disappeared until now, and the display icon f0 of the display mode of the pedestal hs0 and the sabotani in the first UI unit 280 are also restored. It is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 247 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. The change icon h0 of the display mode of the sabotani is deleted at the timing of the final display.

  In the example described above, the effect using the timer display TMα and the change effect using the ninja character NJ are effects performed independently and are different effects, but the timer display TMα has appeared. Both effects are common in that it is an effect related to a notice for the variable display that was the first hold in FIG. 1 at the stage. In other words, the change effect using the ninja character NJ is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon representing the first hold in FIG. 1 to the display mode of the pre-reading notice when the timer display TMα appears. TMα is a notice display of a button effect, which is a notice effect, which is performed with a variable display that is performed by digesting the hold that was the first hold in FIG. 1 when the timer display TMα appears.

  FIG. 248 is a diagram showing an example in which the effect using the timer display and the change effect are combined.

  FIGS. 248 (11) -1 to (11) -5 are the same as FIGS. 247 (11) -1 to (11) -5 described above. Since the appearance of the Ninja character NJ, the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon (FIGS. 248 (11) -4 to (11) -5) has been described so far. After the appearance of the ninja character NJ, the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon (FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11) -6, 246 (1) ) -3 to (1) -4, and 247 (11) -4 to (11) -5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -6, the shuriken thrown by the ninja character NJ suddenly changes its direction and the characters “Preparing Timer” are still displayed, and the countdown A scene that appears to fly toward the timer display TMα that has not yet started is displayed. “03:00” is still displayed on the timer display TMα, and the shuriken eventually hits the timer display TMα displayed as “03:00”. In FIG. 248 (11) -7, the timer display At least a part of TMα is covered with a plurality of effect images mα, and the timer display TMα is more difficult to view than before being covered with the effect images mα. Note that the effect image mα may cover only a part of the timer display TMα or may cover the whole.

  In FIG. 248 (11) -8, the effect image mα disappears and the timer display TMβ displayed as “07:77” appears. That is, the timer display is changed from the mode (contents) of “03:00” to the mode (contents) of “07:77”. The timer display TMβ displayed as “07:77” is a timer notice effect in which the countdown starts from 7.77 seconds. However, the timer display TMβ displayed as “07:77” shown in FIG. 248 (11) -8 also displays the characters “Preparing timer” and the countdown has not yet started.

  The change in the mode (content) of the timer display means that the production has changed, more specifically, the type of production is the same, but the mode (content) has changed. In other words, although the effect using the timer display is continued, it can be considered that the aspect (contents) of the effect has changed and another effect has been achieved. In the timer display, the larger the displayed time, the more likely it will be a big hit in the end. For example, the timer display is a display for notifying that the button effect will be started, and in the button effect that is started after the countdown is completed, an effect with different jackpot reliability is executed according to the button operation. The effects with different jackpot reliability are associated with the time displayed on the timer display, and the larger the displayed time, the higher the performance of the jackpot reliability is executed. . For example, the time “07:77” is associated with the premier effect, and when “07:77” is displayed on the timer display, the big hit or the big hit may be determined. Also, between the button image 136a shown in FIG. 246 (3) -2 and the big button image 136ab shown in FIG. 247 (3) -3, the big button image 136ab has higher reliability in the big hit, and is shown in FIG. In the example, when an effect using a timer display is executed instead of an effect using the Yoshimune character YM, a time of “01:00” may be displayed as the timer display. Further, in addition to “size”, “color”, “pattern”, and “number” may represent the level of reliability of the big hit. For example, the reliability of the jackpot is “white” is the lowest, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold” is higher in this order, “rainbow” may be the highest, ”Is the lowest, it becomes higher in the order of“ diagonal pattern ”,“ diamond pattern ”,“ lattice pattern ”,“ vertical line pattern ”,“ horizontal line pattern ”may be the highest, and the higher the number, the higher But you can.

  The period in which the effect using the timer display TMα of “03:00” is considered to be executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and end timing shown below, starting first and ending later. . In other words, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the timer display TMα of “03:00” appears (FIG. 248 (11) -3), or the timing when the ninja character NJ starts the action ( The timing at which the shuriken is thrown) or the timing at which the effect image mα appears. On the other hand, the end timing of the effect using the timer display TMα may be the timing when the shuriken hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 248 (11) -7), or the effect The timing at which the image mα disappears (timing at which the timer display mode changes) may be used.

  In FIG. 248 (11) -9, the ninja character NJ displayed so far disappears. The period in which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed can also be expressed by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing described above that start first and end later.

  Further, in this example, the change effect using the ninja character NJ has failed to change the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense, and has succeeded in changing other effects instead. . However, changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense or changing other effects may fail, or both may be successful. Or you may be sure to succeed in changing any one of changing the display mode of the hold icon in a broad sense and changing other effects, or changing both You may be sure to succeed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -10, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed. In addition, the first hold icon h11, which has been the default display mode until now, has changed to the display mode of Sabohani by the pre-reading advance notice effect after the next change that changes to the pre-reading notice form during the change display started after winning a prize. . In the pre-reading notice effect after the next change here, the display mode is changed and the pre-reading notice is started in response to the first stop, but the timing of changing the display mode (timing to start the pre-reading notice) is changed. It may be at the same time as the start, or any timing as long as it is during variable display. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon may change in addition to the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM and the change effect using the ninja character NJ, and the same applies to the change icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -11, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (11) -12, the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “decoration 7—decoration 2—decoration 2” is lost. The temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed for the combination of the decorative symbols, and in the following (11) -13, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 2—decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. The change icon h0 is erased at the timing of the final display. Although the display of the timer display TMβ continues even after the decorative symbol variation display is finished, the characters “Preparing the timer” are still displayed, and the countdown has not yet started in the timer display TMβ.

  Subsequently, the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, the special figure display of special figure 1 is started, and the special figure display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -1, the decorative symbol variable display is started. Moreover, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon of the display mode of the sabotani that is the subject of the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is It moves to the fluctuation icon display area and is displayed as the fluctuation icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, the display representing the number of reserved figures in the special figure 1 among the second number of reserved numbers displayed in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed to a display of “1”. On the other hand, even if the decorative symbol variation display is newly started, the timer display TMβ is still displayed, but the characters “Preparing the timer” are still displayed, and the timer display TMβ starts the countdown. Not. The timer display TMβ started to be displayed in FIG. 248 (11) -8 is displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays while displaying “07:77”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -2, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (1) -3, the second stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (2)-1, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character NC to notify that it has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (2) -2, the savory group notice is started, and in FIG. 248 (2) -3, “SP development” is displayed near the navigation character NC. It has been announced that it will develop into a super reach. When “SP development” is displayed and it is informed that the development will be super reach, the character display “Preparing timer” disappears and the timer display TMβ starts to count down. In the timer display TMβ shown in FIG. 248 (2) -3, “07:40” is displayed. That is, it is notified that 0.37 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

  In this example, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started before the super reach effect is actually started, in other words, before the display of the effect display of the super reach effect is started. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 247, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started in response to the start of the super reach production. In this example, the timer display is displayed at the stage when the notification for the advancement to the super reach is started. TMβ countdown is started. In other words, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started after the normal reach is started (after entering the reach state) until the super reach effect is started.

  Also in this example, when the savory group notice is started, the hold icon disappears together with the four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) prepared in the second UI unit 281 and the first UI unit 280 The change icon h0 disappears together with the prepared base hs0. Note that the display of the navigation character NC remains, but the display of the navigation character NC may also disappear. In addition, the decorative symbol display is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 248 (3) -1, the screen is developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman face each other. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, a character “Swordsman Reach” is displayed, and it is notified that the character has been developed into a swordsman reach. The timer display TMβ is “05:45” in FIG. 248 (3) -1 and is “02:67” in FIG. 248 (3) -2 where the super reach effect is continuing, and the countdown is progressing. .

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 248 (3) -3, “00:00” is displayed on the timer display TMα, and when the countdown is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts displaying a premium button effect display. The That is, a button image 136as is displayed together with an image of a character riding on a motorcycle, and overlaps at least a part of the opposing Yoshimune and swordsman. The button image 136as here also displays “push” characters that facilitate the operation. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, a character “Premier” is displayed instead of a character “Swordsman Reach”. A premier effect is an effect with a very low appearance rate. When this premier effect is executed, the jackpot is confirmed or the jackpot is confirmed with certainty.

  In this example, the timer display TMβ disappears in response to the start of the premier button effect, but it may disappear at the time of “00:00”, or the start of the premier button effect. It may disappear at the same time.

  In FIG. 248 (3) -4, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 248 (3) -5, the first decorative symbol display device 208L switches from the display of the premier button effect to the display of the strong cut-in image CIs. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, the character “swordsman reach” is displayed again instead of the character “premier”, but the character “strong cut-in” may be displayed.

  In this example as well, a response effect (in this case, display of the strong cut-in image CIs) may be performed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect may be performed after the operation effective period elapses.

  The example after (3) -6 in FIG. 248 (3) -5 is the same as the example after (3) -6 in FIG. 247, and the description is omitted.

  The period during which an effect using the timer display TMβ (timer notice effect) is being executed can be represented by all combinations of the start timing and end timing shown below, starting first and ending later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the shuriken hits, the timing when the effect image mα appears (FIG. 248 (11) -7), or “07:77”. The timing at which the timer display TMβ appears (FIG. 248 (11) -8) may be used. Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the countdown is started (immediately after FIG. 248 (2) -2). On the other hand, the end timing of the timer notice effect may be the timing when the timer display TMβ becomes “00:00” (FIG. 248 (3) -3), or the timing when the button image 136as appears (FIG. 248). (3) -3), the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 248 (3) -4), or the timing when the timer display TMβ disappears (FIG. 248 (3)) -4).

  When the example shown after (11) -1 in FIG. 247 is compared with the example shown in FIG. 248, both are big hits, but in the example shown after (11) -1 in FIG. , In the example shown in FIG. 248, the timer notice effect that appears in the “03:00” mode is changed to “07:77”. It was a timer notice effect that appeared in the form of "." When the timer notice effect that appears in the form “07:77” is performed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the timer notice effect that appears in the form “03:00” is performed. Prone. The term “prone to easily develop” here means that an advantageous control state (for example, a probability change state and / or a short time state) is likely to occur, a premier effect is likely to start, It may be easy to start, or it may be easy to finally display the big hit symbol. For example, when the timer notice effect that appeared in the mode of “03:00” becomes “00:00”, the button effect is started. After all, the change display is lost, but “07:77” When the timer notice effect that appears from the beginning in the aspect becomes “00:00”, the button effect is started, and the variation display makes a big hit. The same applies to the case where the button effect is a pre-reading notice, and in this case, the change display of the pre-reading notice object is a big hit. As described above, the timer notice effect in the form “07:77” may not appear unless the timer notice effect in the form “03:00” changes, but may appear from the beginning. In this case, the timer notice effect in the form of “07:77” that appears from the beginning is not likely to be advantageous development for the player, and the aspect of “07:77” that appears in a changed form. It may be easy for the player to develop an advantageous development only for the timer notice effect. Alternatively, the timer notice effect in the form “07:77” may be an aspect (effect) that appears only when the timer notice effect in the form “03:00” changes, or “03:00”. It is not limited to the timer notice effect of this aspect, It may be an aspect (effect) that appears only by a change from some effect.

  FIG. 249 is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 248 in which the effect using the timer display and the change effect are combined.

  Since FIG. 249 (11) -1 to FIG. 3 (3) -1 are the same as FIG. 248 (11) -1 to FIG. However, the aspect (contents) of the effect using the timer display is changed by the change effect using the ninja character NJ. That is, the effect that was in the “03:00” mode is changed to the effect in the “07:77” mode. In addition, the timer display TMβ of “07:77” after the change is displayed across a plurality of variations (FIGS. 249 (11) 13 to 249 (1) -1). Then, the countdown of the timer display TMβ is started at the stage where the notification of advancement to super reach is started, and the timer display TMβ shown in FIG. 249 (2) -3 is subtracted to “07:40”. . Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 249 (3) -1 has developed into super reach (swordsman reach), and the characters “swordsman reach” are displayed near the navigation character NC. The timer display TMβ continues to be subtracted during the super reach production, and is “05:45” in FIG. 249 (3) -1, is “04:37” in FIG. 249 (3) -2, and continues to FIG. In 3) -3, it is “00:50”. In the example shown in FIG. 248, a premier button effect is started when the timer display TMβ reaches “00:00” (FIG. 248 (3) -3). In this example, the timer display TMβ is “00:00”. The button effect is not started even when “00” is reached, but the premier effect is started. In FIG. 249 (3) -2, it is “04:37”, and in the following FIG. 249 (3) -3, it is “00:50”. Thus, the timer display TMβ that continues to count down eventually becomes “00:00” during the super reach production. When the timer display TMβ is “00:00”, a display of a premier effect in which four samurai characters are arranged in a V shape is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character NC, instead of the characters “swordsman reach” The word “Premier” is displayed. The premier effect here is also an effect with a very low appearance rate of the effect. When this premier effect is executed, it is a big hit decision or a big hit decision with certainty. In addition, the display of the premier effect in which the characters of the four nieces are arranged in a V shape overlaps at least a part of the timer display TMβ which is “00:00”.

  The example after (3) -6 in FIG. 249 (3) -5 is the same as the example after (3) -6 in FIG. 247, and the description is omitted.

  When the example shown in FIG. 249 described above is compared with the example shown after (11) -1 in FIG. 247, the effect (effect that develops) that follows the effect using the timer display (timer notice effect) The example shown in FIG. 247 is a button effect, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 249, the effect is different from the button effect. In the two examples, the effect is the same until the effect using the timer display changes. However, the types of effects that are started in relation to the effects using the timer display after that are different.

  In addition, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow that appeared in FIG. 246 (11) -5 is a change effect using the Yoshimune character YM that performs bowling as shown in FIG. In addition to changing to an effect, there may be a change to a timer notice effect using the timer display TMβ displayed as “07:77”. In this case, although it changes depending on the type of effect, the timer notice effect of “07:77” tends to be more advantageous for the player than the change effect of Yoshimune's character YM. . In addition, the timer notice effect using the timer display TMα displayed as “03:00” may be changed to a change effect using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling. The change effect of Yoshimune's character YM tends to be more advantageous for the player than the timer notice effect of “03:00”. The term “prone to be easily developed” here is the same as described above, which means that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probability variation state or / and a short time state), or that a premier effect is likely to be started. Or, it may be that the big hit finalizing effect is likely to be started, or finally the big hit symbol may be easily displayed. Further, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM with the bow and arrow may change to the timer notice effect using the timer display TMα displayed as “03:00”, and conversely, The timer notice effect of “03:00” may change to a change effect of Yoshimune's character YM. In this case, the effect after the change is more advantageous for the player than before the change. Easy to expand. In addition, the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling may change to the timer notice effect using the timer display TMβ displayed as “07:77”, and conversely, “07 : 77 ”timer notice effect may change to a change effect of Yoshimune character YM, and in this case, the effect after the change is more advantageous for the player than before the change. Prone. The change effect of Yoshimune's character YM is a kind of pre-reading notice effect when the reserved icon is targeted, and a kind of normal notice effect when the variable icon is targeted. In addition, the timer notice effect described so far is an effect related to the normal notice, but it may be an effect of the normal notice, an effect related to the prefetch notice, or an effect of the prefetch notice. The effect of normal notice here is the effect that the cut-in normal notice image appears without the button effect when the countdown is completed, and the effect related to the pre-read notice is the effect of the button effect when the countdown is completed. The pre-reading notice image is an effect in which the cut-in pre-reading notice image appears, and when the countdown is completed, the cut-in pre-reading notice image appears without interposing the button effect.

  In addition, an effect using the ninja character NJ may be started first, and then a timer notice effect may be started. In this case, the effect using the ninja character NJ does not change the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 250 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is performed in a different manner.

  FIGS. 250 (11) -1 to (11) -6 are the same as FIGS. 246 (11) -1 to (11) -6 described above, and are not described here. Since the appearance of the Ninja character NJ, the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon (FIGS. 250 (11) -5 to (11) -6) has been described so far. After the appearance of the ninja character NJ, the scene where the shuriken appears to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon (FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11) -6, 246 (1) ) -3 to (1) -4, FIG. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -5, FIG. 248 (11) -4 to (11) -5, FIG. 248 (11)- 4 to (11) -5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -7, a scene in which the shuriken does not hit the variation icon h0 but passes over the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed. 11) -8, the shuriken disappears and the ninja character NJ disappears. After all, the change production here has been unsuccessful, and neither the character YM of Yoshimune nor the hold icon nor the change icon has changed the display mode. The timing at which the shuriken disappears and the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears may be the timing at which the shuriken disappears, or the timing at which the ninja character NJ disappears.

  The period during which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed is also the same as the period described in the change effect using the ninja character NJ that appears in FIG. 246 (11) -5.

  On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -9, an arrow is fired from the Yoshimune character YM, and a scene is displayed in which the arrow is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 or the variation icon h0. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -10, the arrow does not hit the first hold icon h11 or the fluctuation icon h0, and FIG. Then, as the arrows disappear, the Yoshimune character YM disappears. Eventually, the change effect here has also failed, and the display mode of neither the hold icon nor the change icon has changed. The timing at which the arrow disappears and the timing at which the Yoshimune character YM disappears may be the timing at which the arrow disappears, or the timing at which the Yoshimune character YM disappears.

  The period when the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM is displayed is expressed by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below that start first and end later. Can do. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when the Yoshimune character YM appears (FIG. 250 (11) -4), or the timing when the Yoshimune character YM starts moving (the timing when the arrow is fired). ). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which the Yoshimune character YM disappears (FIG. 250 (11) -11), or the timing at which the Yoshimune character YM ends the movement (the arrow has been fired). Timing) or the timing when the arrow did not hit (FIG. 250 (11) -10).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -12, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -13, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -14, the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “decoration 7—decoration 2—decoration 2” is lost. The temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed for the combination of decorative symbols, and in the following (11) -15, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7—decoration 2—decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. The change icon h0 is erased at the timing of the final display.

  Next, a change effect produced by two Ninja characters NJ, which is a ninja character NJ, will be described with reference to an example shown on the right side of FIG.

  250 (11) -1 to (11) -5 shown on the right side of FIG. 250 are the same as FIGS. 250 (11) -1 to (11) -5 shown on the left side, and thus description thereof is omitted. However, in FIG. 250 (11) -5 shown on the right side of FIG. 250, a single ninja character NJ appears on the upper right.

  In the following FIG. 250 (11) -6, the ninja character NJ is split and two ninja characters NJ appear, and both the two ninja characters NJ are throwing shurikens. FIG. 250 (11) -6 The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 3 displays a scene where two shurikens appear to fly toward the hold icon or the change icon.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -7, one shuriken of two shurikens suddenly changes direction and flies toward the Yoshimune character YM holding a bow. A visible scene is displayed. In addition, the other shuriken is displayed with a scene that is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 by glancing over the variation icon h0.

  Thereafter, one shuriken hits Yoshimune character YM, and the other shuriken hits the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 250 (11) -8, at least a part of the Yoshimune character YM is covered with the effect image mα, and the Yoshimune character YM is more difficult to see than before being covered with the effect image mα. In addition, at least a part of the first hold icon h1 is covered with the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 is more difficult to view than before being covered with the effect image mβ.

  In the following FIG. 250 (11) -9, the effect image mα covering the Yoshimune character YM disappears, and the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling appears. That is, the character YM of Yoshimune has changed from a display mode having a bow and arrow to a display mode in which bowling is performed. Also, the effect image mβ covering the first hold icon h11 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the character (here, a scary panda character). Note that the display mode of this scary panda character has a lower jackpot reliability than the display mode of the Sabohani character.

  The timing at which the shuriken hits the Yoshimune character YM and the timing at which the other shuriken hits the first hold icon h11 may be simultaneous, or the timing at which the shuriken hits the Yoshimune character YM is earlier. Alternatively, the timing of hitting the first hold icon h11 may be earlier. Further, after the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM has changed, the shuriken may hit the first hold icon h11, and after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed, the shuriken to the Yoshimune character YM. May hit.

  In FIG. 250 (11) -10, the two Ninja characters NJ that have been displayed until then disappear together. The two Ninja characters NJ may disappear at different timings, or may disappear after returning to the form of one person.

  The period during which the change effect using the ninja character NJ is executed can be expressed by all combinations of the start timing and the end timing shown below that start first and end later. That is, the start timing of the change effect may be the timing when one ninja character NJ appears (FIG. 250 (11) -5), or the timing when the ninja character NJ separates (the two ninjas' The timing when the character NJ appears) (FIG. 250 (11) -6), or the timing when the character NJ of one of the two ninjas starts moving (the timing when the shuriken is thrown) It may be the timing when both Ninja characters NJ start to move (the timing when the shuriken is thrown), the timing when one shuriken hits, or the timing when both shurikens hit May be the timing at which one of the effect images appears, or the timing at which both effect images appear. Timing may be a (FIG. 250 (11) -8). On the other hand, the end timing of the change effect may be the timing at which one of the two ninja characters NJ disappears, or the timing at which both the ninja characters NJ disappear (FIG. 246 (11) -10). It may be the timing when the character NJ of one of the two ninjas finishes the movement (timing when the shuriken is finished), or the timing when the characters NJ of both ninjas finish the movement (Timing when throwing the shuriken), timing when one shuriken hits, timing when both shuriken hits, or one effect image appeared It may be the timing, the timing at which both effect images appear (FIG. 250 (11) -8), or one of the effects. May be a timing at which the image disappears, the timing at which both effect image disappears may be (Fig. 250 (11) -9).

  At the same time or after the disappearance of the two Ninja characters NJ, the Yoshimune character YM with the bowling ball starts to move and throws the bowling ball. Note that the Yoshimune character YM may start to move before the two Ninja characters NJ disappear. Furthermore, the two Ninja characters NJ may not be erased and may continue to be displayed, or only the Ninja character NJ of the two Ninja characters NJ whose holding icon has been changed. The ninja character NJ who changed the character YM of Yoshimune may continue to be displayed, and conversely, only the ninja character NJ who changed the character YM of Yoshimune will disappear, and the hold icon The character NJ of the ninja who changes the position may continue to be displayed.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -12 displays a scene where the bowling ball thrown by the Yoshimune character YM appears to roll toward the hold icon or the change icon. Yes. The bowling ball eventually hits the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the scary panda character. In FIG. 250 (11) -13, the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image mβ, and the first hold icon h11 is , It is more difficult to see than before being covered with the effect image mβ.

  In FIG. 250 (11) -14, the effect image mβ disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the scary panda character to the display mode of the Sabohani character. That is, the change production here is successful and corresponds to the promotion production. In FIG. 250 (11) -14, the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling disappears.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -15, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbols are continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -16, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle symbol, the decorative symbol fluctuates continuously.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 250 (11) -17, the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the “decoration 7—decoration 2—decoration 2” is lost. The temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols, and in the following FIG. (11) -18, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 2—decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. The change icon h0 is erased at the timing of the final display.

  As described above, the change effect pattern using the two separated Ninja characters NJ described in the example shown on the right side of FIG. In addition, the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM is changed, but the display mode of the hold icon is not changed (hereinafter referred to as “B pattern”), and the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM is A pattern that does not change but changes the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “C pattern”), a pattern that does not change the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM and the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “D pattern”). There is. Note that changing the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM means that the shuriken thrown by one of the two Ninja characters NJ hits the Yoshimune character YM and changes its display mode. To change the display mode of the hold icon means that the shuriken thrown by the other Ninja character NJ out of the two Ninja characters NJ hits the hold icon and changes its display mode. That is. Note that the shuriken thrown by one Ninja character NJ of the two Ninja characters NJ may change the display mode of the Yoshimune character YM and the display mode of the hold icon. This may not be the case. Here, the A pattern tends to be more advantageous for the player than the D pattern. Further, the A pattern tends to be more advantageous for the player than the B pattern, and the A pattern tends to be more advantageous for the player than the C pattern. Further, the B pattern tends to be more advantageous for the player than the D pattern, and the C pattern tends to be more advantageous for the player than the D pattern. Further, the C pattern may be more advantageous for the player than the B pattern, or conversely, the B pattern may be more advantageous for the player than the C pattern. The term “prone to be easily developed” here is the same as described above, which means that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probability variation state or / and a short time state), or that a premier effect is likely to be started. Or, it may be that the big hit finalizing effect is likely to be started, or finally the big hit symbol may be easily displayed. Moreover, although each said pattern was a pattern for the hold icon, it is the same even if it is a variable icon instead of a hold icon. Furthermore, in the case where the change is not made, the case where the arrow or shuriken comes off and the case where it does not change even if it hits are included.

  In addition, both the production using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling and the production using the separated Ninja characters NJ are both of the common types such as the change production for the first hold icon h11. It can be seen that the production was a successful production. Note that the two effects may be a change effect for the variable icon h0, which is a different type of effect from the change effect for the first hold icon h11, or the second hold icon h12. It may be a change effect. In addition, only the effect using the Yoshimune character YM of both effects may be a successful effect that succeeds in changing the icon display mode, or only the effect using the ninja character NJ is a successful effect. Or both effects may be failure effects.

  As described above, two types of change effects such as the example shown on the left side of FIG. 250 and the example shown on the right side of FIG. 250 have been described as change effects using the ninja character NJ. In the change effect of the aspect in which only one ninja character NJ appears on the left side of FIG. 250, the change effect of Yoshimune character YM has failed, whereas on the right side of FIG. In the change effect of the aspect in which the character NJ of a human ninja appears, the change effect of the Yoshimune character YM has been successful, and the change effect using the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling has started. In other words, the change effect of the mode in which the two Ninja characters NJ appear in the other direction is different from the change effect of the mode in which only one Ninja character NJ appears. The change effect used) is easy to change.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 250, the change effect of the first hold icon h11 using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow has failed, whereas in the example shown on the right side of FIG. Has succeeded in changing the first hold icon h11 using the character YM of Yoshimune, and the hold indicated by the first hold icon which is the default display mode shown in FIG. 250 (11) -15 on the left side is digested. In the change display started in this way, the change is lost, whereas the change indicated by the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the Sabohani character, shown in FIG. The display is a big hit.

  In addition, the effect that changes the effect is only the effect that uses the ninja character NJ, but as the effect that changes the effect, an effect that changes the display screen (wipe effect), a stage change effect that changes the background image, etc. Etc. Also, the effect that changes the effect may be an effect that may make the Yoshimune character YM with the bow and arrow invisible, and the Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling while the Yoshimune character YM is not visible. There may be cases where the production changes.

  Moreover, it may replace with a timer notice effect and the notice regarding a mini item may be performed. More specifically, it may be an effect in which a mini item is stocked or the stocked mini item increases or changes, and a normal notice is given depending on the number, mode and type of mini items, or a pre-read notice is given. Is called. The notice regarding the mini item may change the stock status of the mini item due to the change effect. For example, the number of stocked mini items may change (for example, increase), the type may change, or the aspect may change.

  The example in which a plurality of effects described using FIGS. 229 to 250 are combined can be combined with the transparency effects described using FIGS. 14 to 45. For example, the role of the Yoshimune character YM with a bow displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 234 or the like, or the role of the ninja character NJ displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. The object is disposed on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N). You may enable it to produce the effect which the some icon change effect demonstrated using FIGS. 229-250 combined.

  Or, conversely, in a transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N), FIG. While performing an effect obtained by combining a plurality of effects described using, the transparent effect described using FIGS. 14 to 45 may be executable.

  As mentioned above, although it was an example about a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) so far, the game stand of the present invention is not limited to this, for example, an enclosed pachinko machine shown in FIG. Or a slot machine shown in FIG.

In the above explanation,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons [for example, a first hold icon f1 to a fourth hold icon f4]
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of hold icons displayed,
The hold icon has a plurality of modes [e.g., a default dot pattern (blinking white), a diagonal pattern (blue color) of the prefetching notice mode, a rhombus pattern (green) of the prefetching notice mode, and a grid pattern (red) of the prefetching notice mode. , Vertical line pattern (gold color) of prefetch notice mode, horizontal line pattern (rainbow color) of prefetch notice mode]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, any one of the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect]
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect [e.g., an effect different from the first effect among the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect]
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
Either one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may be displayed during the display of the other effect [for example, FIG. 230 and FIG. During the display of the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started. While the hold change third effect is displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started, or the Yoshimune character YM shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 is displayed. While the hold change fifth effect is being displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed or the roulette icon shown in FIG. 237 is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the hold change first effect in which the character NJ of the ninja is displayed or the character YM of Yoshimune is displayed during the display of the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. The hold change fifth effect is started, or the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is displayed during the display of the hold change sixth effect in which the countdown icon is displayed as shown in FIG. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the second effect may be an effect that may be displayed during the display of the first effect, and the first effect may be during the display of the second effect. An effect that may be displayed may be used.

  In addition, the first effect may be an effect that may be performed when the mode of the hold icon is changed, or may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon. In addition, the second effect may be an effect that may be performed when the mode of the hold icon is changed, or may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon.

  The first effect may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect that does not change the mode of the hold icon. The second effect may be an effect that always changes the mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect that does not change the mode of the hold icon. Furthermore, any one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect that always starts to be displayed while the other effect is being displayed, or when the display is not started. There may be a production.

Also,
When the first effect and the second effect are effects for the same hold icon [for example, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 230, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 232, or the example shown on the right side of FIG. 235 236, the example shown on the right side of FIG. 237, the example shown on the left side of FIG. 238, and the example shown on the left side of FIG. 239].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, one icon of the plurality of hold icons may be a first hold icon, the first effect may be an effect on the first hold icon, and the second effect may be provided. May be directed to the first hold icon.

  The first effect and the second effect may always be effects for the same hold icon, or may be effects for different hold icons.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which a change notice display may be displayed.
The change notice display is a display [for example, a change target candidate display or a change form candidate display] for making a notice about a change in the state of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One hold icon of the plurality of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, the second hold icon f2 in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 237],
The first effect [for example, the hold change fourth effect] may be an effect for the first hold icon,
The second effect [for example, hold change first effect] may be an effect for the first hold icon,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect [e.g., an aspect in which a roulette icon is variably displayed]
The hold icon displayed in the first mode is an icon for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes,
As the change notice display, there are cases in which the first hold icon is displayed in the first mode [for example, FIG. 237 (a) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that, as the change notice display, the first hold icon may be always displayed in the first mode, or the first hold icon may not be displayed in the first mode. .

Also,
“The second effect is configured to be displayed on the first hold icon displayed in the first mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the mode of the first hold icon [for example, the second hold icon f2 in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 237] displayed in the first mode changes as the notice of the first mode changes. [For example, the mode of the second hold icon f2 has changed as an object to be changed although the mode of change is unknown], then the mode of the first hold icon is changed to the second effect [eg, change of hold It may be configured such that there is a case of changing again according to the first effect [for example, changing to a vertical stripe pattern].

  The second effect may be configured to always start to be displayed with respect to the first hold icon displayed in the first mode, and the second effect is started to be displayed. It may be configured not to be performed.

Also,
`` Change target candidate display may be displayed as the change notice display,
The change target candidate display is a display that suggests which hold icon is a hold icon whose form may change [for example, a shuriken thrown by a ninja character NJ and hits the icon, overlapping the icon Change candidate icon HKI, target icon TI attached to icon, arrow icon YI, hold icon for roulette icon, hold icon for countdown icon]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
"The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of decorative symbols,
The change target candidate display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays [for example, FIG. 233 (b) to FIG. )-(2), FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the change target candidate display may be a display that is always displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays, or a plurality of consecutive decorative symbol variation displays. Display may not be displayed.

Also,
“While the change target candidate display is being displayed, the second effect [for example, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed] for the hold icon suggested in the change target candidate display is started. The case [for example, FIG. 235 (2) to FIG. 6 (6)] is configured,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, during the display of the change target candidate display, the second effect for the hold icon suggested in the change target candidate display may be surely started. You may be comprised so that this 2nd production with respect to the hold icon suggested may not be started.

Also,
`` Change mode candidate display may be displayed as the change notice display,
The change mode candidate display is a display that suggests which mode of the hold icon may be changed [for example, the change candidate icon HKI, “lattice” shown in FIG. 233 (i). It is a roulette icon in a state where characters are stopped and displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
”It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the display of the one effect is started during the display of the other effect than when only the one effect is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, if it describes collectively once again, as a combination of a 1st effect and a 2nd effect, a hold change 1st effect and a hold change 2nd effect, a hold change 1st effect and a hold change 3rd effect, a hold change 1st One production and the fourth change of the hold change, the first change of the hold change and the fifth change of the hold change, the first change of the hold change and the sixth change of the hold change, the second change of the hold change and the third change of the hold change, the second change of the hold change And hold change fourth effect, hold change second effect and hold change fifth effect, hold change second effect and hold change sixth effect, hold change third effect and hold change fourth effect, hold change third effect and hold Change 5th effect, Hold change 3rd effect and Hold change 6th effect, Hold change 4th effect and Hold change 5th effect, Hold change 4th effect and Hold change 6th effect, Hold change 5th effect and Hold change 1st There are six productions. And, in any combination of these combinations, when one of the effects starts to be displayed while the other effect is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined and displayed more easily. May be. In other words, when two types of effects are combined (when they are overlapped), it is easier to hit a big hit than when they are not combined (when they are not overlapped).

Also,
“The one effect [for example, the first change change effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 235 or FIG. 236 is displayed and the fifth change effect in which the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 238 is displayed] Production [For example, the hold change fifth effect in which the Yoshimune character YM in FIGS. 235 and 236 is displayed, the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon in FIG. 237 is displayed, and the hold change in which the roulette icon in FIG. 238 is displayed. Although the display is started later than the display of the fourth effect, the display may end before the other effect [for example, FIG. 235 (7) and FIG. 236 (7 ), FIG. 237 (i), FIG. 238 (10)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The one effect may be an effect in which the display always ends before the other effect although the display is started later than the display of the other effect. It may be an effect that the display may not end before the effect.

Also,
“Even if the appearance of the hold icon does not change due to the one effect started during the display of the other effect, the one effect is not started during the display of the other effect. The case where the display of the one effect is started while the display of the other effect is displayed is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed and displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, in any example of the combination of the first effect and the second effect described above, the mode of the hold icon did not change due to one effect that was started during the display of the other effect. Even when the one effect is not displayed during the display of the other effect, the last effect is displayed when the one effect is displayed while the other effect is displayed. In other words, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be easily displayed. In other words, when two types of effects are combined (overlapping), even if the status of the hold icon does not change, it is a big hit than when it is not combined (when it does not overlap) Cheap.

Also,
“The one effect [for example, the hold where the ninja character NJ in FIG. 231 is displayed] the other effect that is started during the display of the other effect [for example, the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 231 is displayed]. Depending on the first change effect, the mode of the hold icon [for example, the first hold icon f1] may change to the third mode [for example, a rhombus pattern],
When the display of the other effect is not started during the display of the other effect, the mode of the hold icon may change to the second mode [for example, the mode of the rhombus pattern] due to the other effect. ,
The third aspect is an aspect with higher expectation of jackpot than the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The other effect [for example, the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 231 is displayed, the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed in FIG. 237, and the hold change in which the roulette icon in FIG. 238 is displayed. One of the effects started during the display of [four effects] [for example, a first change change effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 231 is displayed and a first change effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 237 is displayed. Due to the effect, the fifth change effect in which the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 238 is displayed], the other effect that changes the mode of the held icon may change even if the mode of the held icon does not change. [For example, FIG. 231 (h), FIG. 237 (h), FIG. 238 (10)],
The other effect is an effect that makes it easier to change the mode of the hold icon to a mode with a high expectation of jackpot after the change than before the change.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means [e.g., all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. One or two],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons [for example, a first hold icon f1 to a fourth hold icon f4]
It is configured to notify the number of holds by the number of hold icons displayed,
The hold icon has a plurality of modes [e.g., a default dot pattern (blinking white), a diagonal pattern (blue color) of the prefetching notice mode, a rhombus pattern (green) of the prefetching notice mode, and a grid pattern (red) of the prefetching notice mode. , Vertical line pattern (gold color) of prefetch notice mode, horizontal line pattern (rainbow color) of prefetch notice mode]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, any one of the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect]
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect [e.g., an effect different from the first effect among the hold change first effect to the hold change sixth effect]
The first effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
The second effect is an effect that may change the mode of the hold icon,
Any one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect that may be displayed during the display of the other effect [for example, in FIGS. 230 and 231] During the display of the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB and the change candidate icon HKI are displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started, or the roulette icon shown in FIG. While the displayed hold change fourth effect is displayed, the display of the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ is displayed is started, or the display of the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon is displayed as shown in FIG. In the middle, the fifth change on hold change in which Yoshimune's character YM is displayed starts.]
The other effect [for example, the hold change second effect in which the treasure box TB in FIG. 231 is displayed, the hold change fourth effect in which the roulette icon in FIG. 237 is displayed, and the hold change fourth in which the roulette icon in FIG. 238 is displayed. One of the effects started during the display of the [effect] [for example, the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 231 is displayed, and the hold change first effect in which the ninja character NJ in FIG. 237 is displayed. , The other change that changes the mode of the hold icon may change even if the mode of the hold icon does not change, for example, by the hold change fifth effect in which the character YM of Yoshimune in FIG. 238 is displayed [for example, 231 (h), 237 (h), 238 (9)],
The other effect is an effect that makes it easier to change the mode of the hold icon to a mode with a high expectation of jackpot after the change than before the change.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
“The one effect is an effect using a character [for example, Ninja character NJ or Yoshimune character YM]
The one effect is an effect that starts when the character starts displaying [for example, FIG. 230 (1), FIG. 231 (a), FIG. 237 (b), FIG. 238 (4)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The one effect is an effect using a character [for example, Ninja character NJ or Yoshimune character YM]
The one effect is an effect that starts when the character starts moving [for example, FIG. 230 (3), FIG. 231 (c), FIG. 237 (c), FIG. 238 (5)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The one effect is an effect that ends when the display of the character ends [eg, FIG. 229 (p), FIG. 237 (i), FIG. 238 (10)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The one effect is displayed as a first effect image [for example, the effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (7), the effect image mh shown in FIG. 231 (f), the effect image mf shown in FIG. 237 (f)]. Is the production
The one effect is an effect that starts when the first effect image starts to be displayed [eg, FIG. 230 (7), FIG. 231 (f), FIG. 237 (f)]
The one effect is an effect that ends when display of the first effect image ends [eg, FIG. 230 (9), FIG. 231 (h), FIG. 237 (h)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The other effect is an effect in which an icon [for example, an icon of a treasure chest TB, a roulette icon] is displayed,
The other effect is an effect that starts when the icon starts displaying [for example, FIG. 230 (1), FIG. 230 (b), FIG. 237 (a), FIG. 237 (4)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The other effect is an effect that ends when the icon ends (for example, FIG. 229 (o)).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The other effect is a second effect image [for example, the effect image mf shown in FIG. 230 (5), the effect image mf shown in FIG. 231 (i), the effect image mf shown in FIG. 237 (j), FIG. The effect image mf] shown in (11) is displayed.
The other effect is the display end of the second effect image [for example, between FIG. 230 (6) and FIG. 7 (7), FIG. 231 (k), FIG. 237 (l), FIG. 238 (13)]. ] To end the production,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
`` A game stand with directing means capable of performing multiple directing,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a timer notice effect shown in FIG. 247 that starts a countdown from 3.00 seconds]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using a ninja character NJ shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a timer notice effect in which a countdown starts from 7.77 seconds shown in FIG. 248]
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect is changed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, in the case of FIG. 248 (11) -7].
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed [for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to immediately before (3) -3 in FIG.
When the third effect is performed, it is easier for the player to develop than when the first effect is performed [for example, determination of the jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 248 (4) -2] display],
At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to (3) -3 in FIG. Until just before],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the production means. In some cases, the second effect can be expected to change the first effect to the third effect.

  Here, “prone to advantageous development” means that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probable change state and / or a short time state), a premier production is likely to be started, or a big hit is confirmed. It may be that the production is easily started. Moreover, even if it does not connect directly to the big hit, it includes that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. For example, an SP reach production with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be likely to appear.

  The second effect may be an effect that may change the aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or may be an effect that may change the type of effect. .

  The first effect and the third effect may be different effects. Further, the first effect and the second effect may be different effects, and the third effect and the second effect may be different effects.

  The second effect may be started after the first effect is started first.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect including an effect of making the display of the first effect invisible, or an effect including an effect of hiding the display of the first effect. There may be. In other words, there may be a period in which the display of the first effect is not visible due to the second effect, or there may be a period in which the display of the first effect is not displayed.

  Also, the first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before (3) -3 in FIG. 247, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before (11) -7 in FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. 11 (7), FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. ) -3 to (3) -4 in FIG. 3 (until there is a button operation, or until the operation valid period elapses), and includes the effects corresponding to the button operation, as in FIG. 247 (11) -3. It may be up to Figure (3) -5. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before (11) -8, FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. (11) -8, FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. ) -9.

  Further, the second effect may be, for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -8 from when the ninja character NJ appears until it disappears, or when the ninja character NJ is It may be immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -7 from the start of the operation to the end of the operation, or a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7)). ).

  The third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. 3 (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. 248 (11) -8 to (3) -4 in FIG. 248 (11) -8 (including button operation or until the operation valid period elapses) may be included. However, it may be from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. 3 (3) -5 including effects according to button operations. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before (11) -13, FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. (11) -13, FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. ) -14 may be a period (FIG. 246 (11) -13) in which the effect image mf is displayed.

  The effect means may be means for surely executing a plurality of effects.

  The second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

  In addition, the effects of both the first effect and the second effect may be effects performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays, or only the first effect is performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. An effect may be provided, or an effect executed in a plurality of symbol variation displays only for the second effect.

Also,
The first effect is one effect [for example, a bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2 to FIG. Production using the character YM of Yoshimune]
The second effect is an effect that does not change the first effect (hereinafter referred to as “second case”) [for example, FIG. 246 (1) -3 to FIG. Production using the ninja character NJ shown]
As the second effect in the second case, one effect among the certain types of effects [for example, an effect that fails to change the change icon h0 (gaze effect)] may be performed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since a plurality of effects (for example, the fourth effect and the fifth effect) are performed as the certain kind of effects, there are cases where expectations can be expected.

  Here, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be a different effect. There may be.

  Further, the certain type of effect may be an effect of changing the mode of an icon (for example, a hold icon or a variable icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case. One of the types of effects may be an effect that changes the mode of one of the hold icon and the variation icon, and the first effect is one of the hold icon and the change icon The effect which changes the other aspect may be sufficient. In addition, one effect of the certain types of effects and the first effect, which are performed as the second effect in the second case, are effects that change the mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, it may be an effect that changes the mode of the same hold icon, or an effect that changes the mode of a different hold icon.

  The second effect may be an effect that may not change the aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or may be an effect that may not change the type of effect. .

  Further, the certain type of effect may be a notice regarding a mini item. More specifically, it may be an effect in which a mini item is stocked or the stocked mini item increases or changes, and a normal notice is given depending on the number, mode and type of mini items, or a pre-read notice is given. Is called.

  As the second effect in the second case, one effect of the certain types of effects may be necessarily performed.

Also,
“As the second effect in the second case, one effect [for example, the hold icon change effect] [for example, FIG. 247 (11) − 4 to 247 (11) -8 shown in FIG. 247 may be performed].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, the certain kind of effect is a notice effect that a certain effect is started (for example, a timer notice effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started. A button effect notice effect for notifying the user), and the different kind of effect may be an effect of changing an icon mode.

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one effect of a type different from the certain type of effect may be performed without fail.

In the above description,
`` A game stand with directing means capable of performing multiple directing,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect using a Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow from FIGS. 246 (11) -4 to (11) -8 in FIG. 246]. Yes,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using a ninja character NJ from FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. 11 (9) -9, or FIG. 246 (1). -3 to (1) -6 using the ninja character NJ]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, an effect using a Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. 11 (11) -14]. And
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect is changed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed,
The case where the third effect is performed more easily than the case where the first effect is performed tends to be advantageous development for the player,
The second effect is an effect that does not change the first effect (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are partly performed in the same manner [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -5 to FIG. 11 (11)- 6 and FIG. 246 (1) -3 to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the production means. In some cases, the second effect can be expected to change the first effect to the third effect. Furthermore, it may be possible to expect which effect will be performed by the second effect.

  Here, “prone to advantageous development” means that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probable change state and / or a short time state), a premier production is likely to be started, or a big hit is confirmed. It may be that the production is easily started. Moreover, even if it does not connect directly to the big hit, it includes that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. For example, an SP reach production with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be likely to appear.

  The second effect may be an effect that may change the aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or may be an effect that may change the type of effect. .

  The second effect may be an effect that may not change the aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or may be an effect that may not change the type of effect. .

  In addition, the “partly the same aspect” means, for example, that a certain period part of the animation is the same, and the second effect in the first case is It means that it cannot be distinguished from the second performance in the second case, or it is difficult to distinguish.

  In the second case, the first effect may not be started, or the first effect may not be executed.

  Furthermore, the start timing of the first effect and the start timing of the second effect may be earlier than the start timing of the first effect, or the start timing of the second effect. The direction may be earlier, or both may be at the same timing.

  Also, the first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before (3) -3 in FIG. 247, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before (11) -7 in FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. 11 (7), FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. ) -3 to (3) -4 in FIG. 3 (until there is a button operation, or until the operation valid period elapses), and includes the effects corresponding to the button operation, as in FIG. 247 (11) -3. It may be up to Figure (3) -5. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before (11) -8, FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. (11) -8, FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. ) -9.

  Further, the second effect may be, for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -8 from when the ninja character NJ appears until it disappears, or when the ninja character NJ is It may be immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -7 from the start of the operation to the end of the operation, or a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7)). ).

  The third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. 3 (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. 248 (11) -8 to (3) -4 in FIG. 248 (11) -8 (including button operation or until the operation valid period elapses) may be included. However, it may be from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. 3 (3) -5 including effects according to button operations. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before (11) -13, FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. (11) -13, FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. ) -14 may be a period (FIG. 246 (11) -13) in which the effect image mf is displayed.

  The effect means may be means for surely executing a plurality of effects.

Also,
“The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are performed in the same manner with a part including the first part [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -5]. ~ (11) -6 and Figure 246 (1) -3 ~ (1) -4],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the introduction portion is the same, there is a time when it is difficult for the player to determine which one will develop, and there are cases where it is possible to make the production interesting.

  Here, the first portion may be performed in the same manner, the next portion may be performed in a different manner, the last portion may be performed in the same manner, or the same manner and the different manner may be alternately repeated a plurality of times. May be.

Also,
The first effect is one effect [for example, a bow and arrow shown in FIG. 246 (1) -2 to FIG. Production using the character YM of Yoshimune]
As the second effect in the second case, one effect among the certain types of effects [for example, an effect that fails to change the change icon h0 (gaze effect)] may be performed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since a plurality of effects (for example, the fourth effect and the fifth effect) are performed as the certain kind of effects, there are cases where expectations can be expected.

  Here, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be a different effect. There may be.

  Further, the certain type of effect may be an effect of changing the mode of an icon (for example, a hold icon or a variable icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case. One of the types of effects may be an effect that changes the mode of one of the hold icon and the variation icon, and the first effect is one of the hold icon and the change icon The effect which changes the other aspect may be sufficient. In addition, one effect of the certain types of effects and the first effect, which are performed as the second effect in the second case, are effects that change the mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, it may be an effect that changes the mode of the same hold icon, or an effect that changes the mode of a different hold icon.

  The second effect may be an effect that may not change the aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or may be an effect that may not change the type of effect. .

  As the second effect in the second case, one effect of the certain types of effects may be necessarily performed.

Also,
“As the second effect in the second case, one effect [for example, the hold icon change effect] [for example, FIG. 247 (11) − 4 to 247 (11) -8 shown in FIG. 247 may be performed].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, the certain kind of effect is a notice effect that a certain effect is started (for example, a timer notice effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started. A button effect notice effect for notifying the user), and the different kind of effect may be an effect of changing an icon mode.

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one effect of a type different from the certain type of effect may be performed without fail.

Also,
“The second effect in the first case and the second effect in the second case are performed in a partly different manner,
The second effect in the first case [for example, the effect using the ninja character NJ] is the first mode [for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11) -9]. ]
The second effect in the second case [for example, the effect using the ninja character NJ] is the second mode [for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 246 (1) -3 to 3 (1) -6]. ]
The first aspect and the second aspect include a part including the first part [for example, FIGS. 246 (11) -5 to (11) -6 and 246 (1) -3 to FIG. 1) -4] is the same embodiment,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different from each other in the middle [for example, FIG. 246 (11) -7 to FIG. (11) -9 and FIG. 246 (1) -5 to FIG. 6],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where attention can be paid to the branching of the effects. In other words, at the start of the production, even if you do not know whether it will be the first case or the second case, you will know whether it will eventually be the first case or the second case. In some cases, it is possible to focus attention on the production even after the start.

  Further, “a different aspect from the middle” may be a different aspect from the middle to the last, or a different aspect only in the middle, and the last may be the same aspect.

In the above description,
`` A game stand with directing means capable of performing multiple directing,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [e.g., using the character YJ of Yoshimune with a bow and arrow shown in FIG. 250 (11) -4 to FIG. (11) -10 on the left side of FIG. 250). The production using the character YJ of Yoshimune with the bow and arrow shown in (11) -4 to (11) -7 on the right side of FIG.
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using one ninja character NJ shown in (11) -5 to (11) -7 on the left side of FIG. 250) , Production using two Ninja characters NJ shown in (11) -6 to (11) -9 on the right side of FIG.
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, the Yoshimune character YJ performing bowling as shown in FIG. 250 (11) -9 to FIG. (11) -13 on the right side of FIG. 250). Directing],
The second effect is an effect in which the first effect is changed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed,
The case where the third effect is performed more easily than the case where the first effect is performed tends to be advantageous development for the player,
The second effect is an effect that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a mode in which only one ninja character NJ shown in (11) -5 to (11) -7 on the left side of FIG. ],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, two Ninja characters NJ as shown in FIG. 250 (11) -6 to (11) -9 on the right side of FIG. 250). Is an appearance]
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The case where the second effect is started in the second aspect is more likely to be the first case than the case where the second effect is started in the first aspect. To play. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the production means. In some cases, the second effect can be expected to change the first effect to the third effect. Furthermore, it may be possible to expect which effect will be performed depending on the aspect of the second effect.

  Here, “prone to advantageous development” means that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probable change state and / or a short time state), a premier production is likely to be started, or a big hit is confirmed. It may be that the production is easily started. Moreover, even if it does not connect directly to the big hit, it includes that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. For example, an SP reach production with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be likely to appear.

  The second effect may be an effect that may change the aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or may be an effect that may change the type of effect. .

  Also, the first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before (3) -3 in FIG. 247, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before (11) -7 in FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. 11 (7), FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. ) -3 to (3) -4 in FIG. 3 (until there is a button operation, or until the operation valid period elapses), and includes the effects corresponding to the button operation, as in FIG. 247 (11) -3. It may be up to Figure (3) -5. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before (11) -8, FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. (11) -8, FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. ) -9.

  Further, the second effect may be, for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -8 from when the ninja character NJ appears until it disappears, or when the ninja character NJ is It may be immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -7 from the start of the operation to the end of the operation, or a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7)). ).

  The third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. 3 (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. 248 (11) -8 to (3) -4 in FIG. 248 (11) -8 (including button operation or until the operation valid period elapses) may be included. However, it may be from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. 3 (3) -5 including effects according to button operations. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before (11) -13, FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. (11) -13, FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. ) -14 may be a period (FIG. 246 (11) -13) in which the effect image mf is displayed.

  The effect means may be means for surely executing a plurality of effects.

  The second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

  The second effect may be an effect that is always executed in a plurality of modes.

“The first effect is one effect of a certain type of effect [for example, a hold icon change effect] [for example, (11) -4 to (11) on the left side of FIG. -10 using Yoshimune's character YJ with the bow and arrow shown in -10, an effect that fails to change the first hold icon h1 (gase effect)]
The second effect is an effect that does not change the first effect (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
As the second effect in the second case, one effect of the certain types of effects [e.g., shown in (11) -5 to (11) -7 on the left side of FIG. 250] There is a case where an effect using the character NJ of one ninja that fails to change the first hold icon h1 (gase effect)] is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since a plurality of effects (for example, the fourth effect and the fifth effect) are performed as the certain kind of effects, there are cases where expectations can be expected.

  Here, one of the certain types of effects performed as the second effect in the second case may be the same effect as the first effect, or may be a different effect. There may be.

  Further, the certain type of effect may be an effect of changing the mode of an icon (for example, a hold icon or a variable icon), and is performed as the second effect in the second case. One of the types of effects may be an effect that changes the mode of one of the hold icon and the variation icon, and the first effect is one of the hold icon and the change icon The effect which changes the other aspect may be sufficient. In addition, one effect of the certain types of effects and the first effect, which are performed as the second effect in the second case, are effects that change the mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, it may be an effect that changes the mode of the same hold icon, or an effect that changes the mode of a different hold icon.

  The second effect may be an effect that may not change the aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or may be an effect that may not change the type of effect. .

  As the second effect in the second case, one effect of the certain types of effects may be necessarily performed.

Also,
"As the second effect in the second case, one effect of a different type of effect [for example, a variable icon change effect] may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, the certain kind of effect is a notice effect that a certain effect is started (for example, a timer notice effect in which a certain effect is started when the remaining time display becomes 0, or a button effect is started. A button effect notice effect for notifying the user), and the different kind of effect may be an effect of changing an icon mode.

  Note that, as the second effect in the second case, one effect of a type different from the certain type of effect may be performed without fail.

Also,
“The second effect according to the second aspect [for example, the effect of the aspect shown in FIGS. 250 (11) -6 to (11) -9 in which two Ninja characters NJ appear] , Which can be performed in multiple patterns,
One of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern [for example, a shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and a shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ is a holding icon. pattern that does not hit h1]
One of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern [for example, a shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ hits the Yoshimune character YM, and a shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ hits the hold icon h1. Pattern]
When the second performance according to the second mode is performed in the second pattern, it is likely to be advantageous development for the player than in the first pattern.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  As a result, the second effect performed in the second mode is more easily performed in the second pattern than the second effect performed in the first mode.

  The second effect according to the second aspect may be an effect that is always executed in a plurality of patterns.

Also,
“One of the patterns is the third pattern [for example, the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ is held The pattern hitting the icon h1]
One of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern [for example, a shuriken thrown by one Ninja character NJ hits the Yoshimune character YM, and a shuriken thrown by the other Ninja character NJ hits the holding icon h1. Unmatched pattern]
When the second performance according to the second aspect is performed with the fourth pattern, it is likely to be more advantageous for the player than when the second pattern is performed with the third pattern.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  As a result, the second effect performed in the second mode is more easily performed by the fourth pattern than the second effect performed in the first mode.

  The second pattern is a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ hits the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ hits the hold icon h1. May be a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one Ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other Ninja character NJ hits the hold icon h1, or the Ninja character NJ The throwing shuriken may hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ may not hit the hold icon h1. The third pattern is a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one Ninja character NJ hits the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other Ninja character NJ does not hit the hold icon h1, and the fourth pattern The shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ may not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ may hit the holding icon h1.

In addition, the second effect according to the second aspect in the second case is an effect that can be executed in a plurality of patterns.
One of the plurality of patterns is a fifth pattern [for example, a shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and a shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ is a holding icon. pattern that does not hit h1]
One of the plurality of patterns is a sixth pattern [for example, the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ is a holding icon. pattern that hits h1],
When the second performance according to the second mode in the second case is performed in the sixth pattern, it is more advantageous for the player than in the case where the second pattern is performed in the fifth pattern. It may be easy.

  The fifth pattern is a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ does not hit the variation icon h0] The sixth pattern may be a pattern in which the shuriken thrown by one ninja character NJ does not hit the Yoshimune character YM, and the shuriken thrown by the other ninja character NJ hits the variation icon h0.

  Further, the second effect according to the second aspect in the second case may be an effect that is always executed in a plurality of patterns.

In the above description,
`` A game stand with directing means capable of performing multiple directing,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, an icon change effect using a Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow from FIG. 246 (1) -2 to FIG. 1 (1) -10. ],
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect using a ninja character NJ shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a timer notice effect in which a countdown starts from 7.77 seconds shown in FIG. 248]
The second effect is when the first effect is changed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, when the effect image mα shown in FIG. 248 (11) -7 is displayed]. It is a certain direction,
In the first case, the first effect is changed and the third effect is performed [for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to immediately before (3) -3 in FIG.
The case where the third effect is performed more easily than the case where the first effect is performed tends to be advantageous development for the player,
The first effect is a certain type of effect [for example, an icon change effect that is a hold icon change effect or a variable icon change effect]
The third effect may be a different type of effect than the certain type of effect [for example, a timer notice effect]
In the first case, the different type of effect may be executed as the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine characterized by the production means. In some cases, the second effect can be expected to change the first effect to the third effect. Furthermore, it may be possible to expect which type of production will be performed.

  Here, “prone to advantageous development” means that it is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probable change state and / or a short time state), a premier production is likely to be started, or a big hit is confirmed. It may be that the production is easily started. Moreover, even if it does not connect directly to the big hit, it includes that an effect indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. For example, an SP reach production with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be started, or another notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit may be likely to appear.

  The second effect may be an effect that may change the aspect of the effect with respect to the first effect, or may be an effect that may change the type of effect. .

  Also, the first effect is, for example, from FIG. 247 (11) -3 to immediately before (3) -3 in FIG. 247, or from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before (11) -7 in FIG. It may be from FIG. 248 (11) -3 to FIG. 11 (7), FIG. 248 (11) -3 to immediately before FIG. ) -3 to (3) -4 in FIG. 3 (until there is a button operation, or until the operation valid period elapses), and includes the effects corresponding to the button operation, as in FIG. 247 (11) -3. It may be up to Figure (3) -5. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -4 to immediately before (11) -8, FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. (11) -8, FIG. 246 (11) -4 to FIG. ) -9.

  Further, the second effect may be, for example, FIGS. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -8 from when the ninja character NJ appears until it disappears, or when the ninja character NJ is It may be immediately after FIG. 247 (11) -4 to (11) -7 from the start of the operation to the end of the operation, or a period during which the effect image mf is displayed (FIG. 247 (7)). ).

  The third effect may be, for example, from FIG. 248 (11) -7 to immediately before FIG. 3 (3) -3, or from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. 248 (11) -8 to (3) -4 in FIG. 248 (11) -8 (including button operation or until the operation valid period elapses) may be included. However, it may be from FIG. 248 (11) -8 to FIG. 3 (3) -5 including effects according to button operations. Also, from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before (11) -13, FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. (11) -13, FIG. 246 (11) -9 to FIG. ) -14 may be a period (FIG. 246 (11) -13) in which the effect image mf is displayed.

  The effect means may be means for surely executing a plurality of effects.

  The second effect may be an effect that always changes the first effect.

  The third effect may be a different type of effect than the certain type of effect, and in the first case, the other type of effect is always the third effect. May be executed.

Also,
“The third effect may be the certain effect.
In the first case, the certain type of effect may be executed as the third effect [for example, boring from FIG. 246 (11) -9 to immediately before FIG. 11 (11) -14. Icon change effect using Yoshimune's character YM]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“At least one of the one kind of effect [for example, the reserved icon change effect] and the other type of effect [for example, the timer notice effect] [for example, the reserved icon change effect] Which is the production of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the prefetching notice includes a case where a loss occurs (false prefetching notice).

  Further, both of the certain type of effect and the different type of effect may be a pre-reading notice effect, or the certain type of effect is a pre-reading notice effect, Another type of effect may be a normal notice effect.

  Moreover, a timer notice effect can be mentioned as an example of said another kind of effect. Here, the timer notice effect may be an effect for notifying that a certain effect (for example, a button effect, a super reach effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect) is started.

Also,
“At least one effect [for example, variable icon change effect] of the certain type [for example, change icon change effect] and the other type of effect [for example, timer notice effect] Which is the production of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the normal notice is an effect of giving a notice that a big hit will be given by the decorative display of the decorative symbols, which is performed when the normal notice starts. In addition, the normal notice includes a case of losing (fake normal notice).

  Further, both of the certain type of effect and the different type of effect may be a normal notice effect, or the certain type effect is a normal notice effect, Another type of effect may be an effect of a prefetch notice.

  Further, as an example of the another kind of effect, a series of effects from timer notice effect → button effect → strong cut-in display effect can be given. The display effect of strong cut-in is usually a notice of advance notice, a notice of development to super reach, or a look-ahead notice.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which an icon [for example, the first hold icon h1] may be displayed,
The third effect is also an effect in which an icon [for example, the first hold icon h1] may be displayed.
The jackpot symbol is better when the icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the display mode of the character (savohani)] than when the icon is displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode]. Is easy to confirm,
The third effect [for example, FIG. 246] rather than the first effect [for example, the effect using the Yoshimune character YM with the bow and arrow shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -4 to 11- (10)]. (11) -9 to production using Yoshimune character YM who performs bowling shown in FIG. 11- (13)], the icon of the second display mode is more likely to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the icon may be a hold icon or a variable icon. Note that the hold icon includes a variable icon in a broad sense. The icon may be a small display that can be distinguished from other displays, and may be a mini-item icon or a character icon.

The first effect may be an effect in which an icon is always displayed, and the third effect may also be an effect in which an icon is always displayed.

Also,
“The second effect is also an effect in which an icon may be displayed.
The first effect and the second effect are effects for the same icon [for example, the first hold icon h1].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect and the second effect may be effects for different icons [for example, the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2, or the first hold icon h1 and the change icon h0]. Good.

  The second effect may also be an effect in which icons are always displayed.

Also,
The first effect is an effect that may change the display mode of the icon [for example, the hold icon h1]
The third effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon [for example, the hold icon h1],
The jackpot symbol is better when the icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, the display mode of the character (savohani)] than when the icon is displayed in the first display mode [for example, the default display mode]. Is easy to confirm,
The third effect [for example, FIG. 246] rather than the first effect [for example, the effect using the Yoshimune character YM with the bow and arrow shown in FIGS. 246 (11) -4 to 11- (10)]. (11) -9 to production using Yoshimune character YM performing bowling shown in FIG. 11- (13)], the icon is more easily changed to the second display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon may be a hold icon or a variable icon. Note that the hold icon includes a variable icon in a broad sense. The icon may be a mini-item icon or a character icon.

  The first effect may be an effect that always changes the icon display mode, and the third effect may be an effect that always changes the icon display mode.

Also,
"The second effect is also an effect that may change the display mode of the icon,
The game stage characterized in that the first effect and the second effect are effects for the same icon [for example, the first hold icon h1]. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect and the second effect may be effects for different icons [for example, the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2, or the first hold icon h1 and the change icon h0]. Good.

  The second effect may also be an effect that always changes the icon display mode.

Also,
“One effect of the first effect and the second effect [for example, the effect using the ninja character NJ] is the other effect [for example, the effect using the Yoshimune character YM with a bow and arrow] ] Which may start during the execution of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect that may be started during execution of the second effect, and the second effect is started during execution of the first effect. It may be an effect that may be performed. Alternatively, the first effect and the second effect may be effects that may be started when moving.

  In addition, after the second effect is completed, the first effect or the third effect may be started or performed.

Also,
“The above-mentioned“ when the third effect is performed is more likely to be advantageous for the player than when the first effect is performed. ” The case where the third effect is performed rather than the case where the effect is performed is a jackpot symbol [for example, decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2, or FIG. 197 (a) or FIG. The big hit symbol] is easy to confirm and display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
The first effect is an effect including a display of a first character [for example, Yoshimune character YM].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first character can also be viewed as an icon display.

Also,
The second effect is an effect including a display of a second character [for example, a ninja character NJ].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the second character can also be regarded as an icon display.

  Further, the second character may be different from the first character, or may be the same character.

Also,
“The effect means is a display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Next, an effect in which the operation means display is displayed will be described. The game machine used in the description here is the same pachinko machine 100 as the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13, and as a technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. The present invention can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 193 to 243, and vice versa. FIGS. 1 to 105, 108 to 192, and 193 are also possible. The technical idea shown in FIG. 243 can also be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 251 to 265. At that time, components having the same reference numerals may be handled as the same constituent elements and may be replaced.

  FIG. 251 is a diagram showing an example in which the operation means display is displayed step by step across the continuous symbol variation display.

  FIG. 251 (a) shows the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 251, the family crest character that has been disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L so far is slightly larger in size than the upper portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged in. That is, in the family crest character 224E 'shown in FIG. 251, the lower half overlaps the upper part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position corresponds to the initial position. The family crest member 224E 'shown in FIG. 251 can be dropped from the initial position. When the dropping operation is performed, the whole family crest member 224E' overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. The family crest character 224E ′ and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N have a front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction), with the crest character 224E ′ being the foremost side, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is the rearmost side, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest character 224E ′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 251, it is executed in a variable display pattern (special drawing) executed in the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 193, etc.) and in the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 193, etc.). The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Also, a variable display symbol (ordinary symbol) executed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 (see FIG. 193, etc.) (not shown) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. That is, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 197 (b) displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol representing the first symbol (not shown) with an enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. As described above, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag is generated for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the sub-control unit 400, 500 side. When the symbol pd3 also starts to be changed and the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. The following description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3. However, the same thing can be said even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

  The fourth symbol pd4 is displayed at the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Here, the fourth symbol pd4 indicates that the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle is a variable display of the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol), and the display mode of the combination of the black square and the white circle is the third symbol pd3. Indicates that the stop is being displayed. In addition, you may distinguish and display during change display and stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of a board surface. Further, on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a mini decorative symbol obtained by reducing and displaying the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display pattern of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The 5th symbol pd5 also performs a variable display and a stop display, and, like the 4th symbol pd4, plays a role of clearly indicating the variation display and the stop display of the 3rd symbol pd3. Accordingly, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 251 (1), the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a variable display, the fourth symbol pd4 is a combination of a white square and a black circle, and the fifth symbol pd5 is also displayed in a variable manner. It is being displayed.

  In addition, two hold icons h1 and h2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 251 (1), and it is notified that the number of hold of the current special figure is two. Has been. That is, the hold icon is displayed for the number of the hold balls of the special figure. The first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 with the old winning timing is displayed in the white display mode which is the default display mode, but the second hold icon (second hold icon) with the new winning timing is displayed. ) H2 is displayed in a red display mode which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition to this, the hold icon may be displayed in a character or pattern display mode, and represents the big hit expectation in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold for each display mode. However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is not necessarily a big hit, and there may be a loss. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. In addition, the timing at which the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or changes to the pre-reading notice mode includes the start of change, during change, at the time of stoppage, and at the time of winning the pre-read target hold. In the example shown in FIG. 251, only four areas hs for displaying the hold icon are prepared. However, only the number (for example, eight) of the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 and the number of reserved balls in FIG. It may be prepared. In addition, an area cs for displaying a variation icon is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and this area cs is a stage higher than the area hs for displaying the hold icon. The variation icon c is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon is started. The fluctuation icon c shown in FIG. 251 (1) is displayed in a white display mode which is a default display mode. The variation icon c may also be displayed in a display mode having a different color or a character or pattern display mode, and represents the expectation degree of jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed for each display mode. However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is high, it is not always a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed, and there may be a case where the big hit is lost.

  In addition, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. 251 (1). This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol (decorative symbol) is being displayed or not, and in the example shown in FIG. 251, the display Cd of the character image of the main character as the main character, It consists of a combination of a character display Lv representing a name and level (here Lv3) and a gauge display Gm. Of these displays, the character display Lv and the gauge display Gm are displayed to the Internet cooperative service user. In other words, it is a service for members registered on the Web, and the gauge increases according to the number of symbol variation display and the number of jackpots, and the level is increased when the gauge is full. A notice effect using a mini character may be performed. For example, the big hit expectation degree (here, the big hit expectation degree in the currently displayed symbol variation display) may be indicated by the action or dialogue of Tono-sama character. Further, the change in how the gauge is increased in the gauge display Gm and the color of the gauge may indicate the expected degree of jackpot in the hold (that is, equivalent to a pre-reading notice). Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed or the display mode of the operation means display to be described later may be changed by an animation using the Tono-sama character.

  Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 251 (1), the wipe display Wd is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the name of the background stage is displayed on the wipe display Wd. Here, it is a castle town stage, and “wisdom town” is displayed on the wipe display Wd, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common in the background of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Note that the effect display mode may be displayed on the wipe display Wd, the current control state (for example, during probability change) may be displayed, a pre-reading notice may be displayed, and the current symbol variation is being performed. A notice (normal notice) for display may be displayed.

  In addition, an operation means display is displayed below the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 251 (1). In the example shown in FIG. 251, the display imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 193 is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol (decorative symbol) is being displayed or stopped. There are four types of display in the operation means display, which are hereinafter referred to as a first operation means display, a second operation means display, a third operation means display, and a fourth operation means display. In FIG. 251 (1), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. The first operation means display Od1 is a display in which PUSH characters are added to a display that imitates the chance button 136 that emits white light. For example, a display that imitates the chance button 136 that is turned off. It may be a display in which the PUSH characters are omitted. The first operation unit display Od1 may be a default operation unit display among a plurality of types of operation unit displays. Further, the operation means display only needs to be an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is not limited to the chance button 136. The transparent portion 191 shown in FIG. Each key in 181 or a second chance button may be used. The operation means display may be a display related to the operation means. For example, an operation such as a display indicating the operation means, a display associated with the operation means, for example, a PUSH character display or an arrow indicating the operation direction. Display for prompting operation of the means (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”), for example, display of the remaining period of the operation effective period of the operation means such as meter display, numerical display, and number display (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period display”). Can be enumerated. That is, as the operation means display, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used, or a combination thereof may be appropriately made. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the operation means display is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the second decorative symbol display device 208M. May be displayed on a plurality of decorative symbol display devices, or may be displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Further, the display number of the operation means display is not limited to one, and may be plural.

  Note that the button image 136a and the button meter also correspond to examples of operation means display. Whether the button image 136a or the button meter in each figure is classified into the first operation means display to the fourth operation means display will be described below in order from the first operation means display to the fourth operation means. Depending on the characteristics of the display, it is classified appropriately.

  In addition, the display position, size, and display number of various displays described here are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when the movable means such as the family crest member 224E ′ overlaps the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, a plurality of the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 is displayed from the beginning. Alternatively, the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  In FIG. 251 (2), the first operation means display Od1 displayed in FIG. 251 is changed to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 may be a display developed from the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The second operation means display Od2 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The different display referred to here may be a display in which the display mode is changed. That is, the display may have the same shape and at least one of color, size, pattern, etc., or the shape, color, size, pattern, etc. may be the same, The display may be different in operation modes such as vibration and rotation. In these cases, the operation means itself is not changed, and the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 are displays for the common operation means (here, the chance button 136). Moreover, the display from which a shape differs may be sufficient. When the shape is different, the operating means is the same, but when the operating means itself is deformed (for example, advanced display, reverse display, open display, closed display, display deformed by operation, etc.) It may be a case where the display changes from the display imitating the operation means to the character display “PUSH” as the operation promotion display, or the meter display indicating the remaining period as the remaining period display. It may be a case where it has changed. Furthermore, the operation means itself may be replaced (for example, when the display imitating the chance button 136 is replaced with the display imitating the second chance button). The matter described in this paragraph is the same in the following description.

  However, the second operation means display Od2 may have the same display mode as the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the difference between the second operation means display Od2 and the first operation means display Od1 is that the second operation means display Od2 is displayed in the second operation means display Od2, as will be described later. When the corresponding operation means is operated in the state, the display mode changes, whereas the first operation means display Od1 is the state in which the first operation means display Od1 is displayed and the corresponding operation means. Even if is operated, the display mode does not change. In addition, the second operation means display Od2 enables the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state, whereas the first operation means display Od1 disables the operation of the corresponding operation means in the display state. There may be a difference.

  The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 251 (2) is a display in which PUSH characters as an operation promotion display are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light.

  The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 is during the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3. This change timing is that the display of the first operation means display Od1 is determined from the stage determined by the effect lottery or the like, and the third symbol at which the display of the first operation means display Od1 is started. There may be a case where the change display of the third symbol pd3 is started next and the change display of the third symbol pd3 is started next. In this case, the first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 (during the actual stop), and the second operation means simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the next third symbol pd3. The first operation means display Od1 continues to be displayed even when the display changes to the display Od2 or when the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 starts, and the second variation after the variation display of the next third symbol pd3 is started. You may change to operation means display Od2. That is, the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays of the third symbol pd3. The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 may be during the stop display of the third symbol pd3 (during the actual stop).

  In addition, FIG. 251 (2) shows the speaker 120, and a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 has changed. Further, the actual chance button 136 itself changes from the white light emission state to the red light emission state. Note that the output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2, and the change of the chance button 136 itself may be simultaneous, any one may be started first, or any one One may start later. In addition to the output of the sound effect, the change to the second operation means display Od2 may be notified by lighting or blinking of the LED lamp on the board or the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 251 (3), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) with a combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1"). On the other hand, the changing state is displayed in the fifth symbol pd5, and the fourth symbol pd4 remains the display mode of the combination of the white square and the black circle indicating that the variable symbol is being displayed.

  In FIG. 251 (4), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (the main symbol is stopped) by a combination of the decorative symbols lost. Similarly to the third symbol pd3, the fifth symbol pd5 also displays the combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop), and the fourth symbol pd4 is a display form of a combination of a black square and a white circle indicating that the symbol is stopped. It has switched to. The period of FIG. 251 (4) to FIG. 6 (6) is a fixed display period of the first symbol (not shown), and the same display is continued for the third symbol pd3 to the fifth symbol pd5. It is displayed. The second operation means display Od2 is also continuously displayed. That is, the display is continued without returning to the first operation means display Od1 before the change. In FIG. 251 (5), the number of symbol variation display has increased due to the end of symbol variation display (the third symbol pd3 has been completely stopped), and the gauge display Gm has increased. (See the arrow pointing to the right shown in FIG. 251 (5)). However, the gauge may increase due to the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3. In FIG. 251 (6), the variation icon c disappears from the region cs where the variation icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 251 (7), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and also in the fifth symbol pd5, the variation symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed as in the case of the third symbol pd3, and the variation symbol of the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed. The display mode is switched to a combination of a white square and a black circle representing the inside. However, the shift movement of the hold icon is not started, and the change icon is not displayed in the region cs where the change icon is displayed. Further, even when the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 extends over the continuous variable display of the third symbol pd3. Is displayed. Further, in FIG. 251 (8), the shift movement of the hold icon has started, and the hold icon h1 that has been displayed in the area hs that displays the first hold icon until now changes to the area cs that displays the variable icon. The hold icon h2 displayed in the area hs displaying the second hold icon is starting to move toward the area hs displaying the first hold icon. The order of the start of shift movement of the hold icon, the start of the variation display of the third symbol pd3, the switching of the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4, the start of the variation display of the fifth symbol pd5 at the start of the variation of the first symbol, It may be simultaneous, or one of them may be first. However, the timing of switching the display mode of the fourth symbol pd4 coincides with the timing of starting the variable display of the fifth symbol pd5.

  In FIG. 251 (9), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed, and the variable icon c of the white display mode that is the default display mode is displayed in the area cs that displays the change icon, and the hold icon of the first hold is displayed. A hold icon h1 having a red display mode, which is a display mode of a prefetch notice, is displayed in the display area hs.

  Also in FIG. 251 (10), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, and the display of the second operation means display Od2 is also continued. Here, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes, and a meter display Tm representing the remaining period which is the remaining period display is added. In other words, the second operation means display Od2 is a combination of the display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm. In addition, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 has changed. Either the change of the display mode or the output of the sound effect may be first or may be simultaneous. The meter display Tm is a display different from the second operation means display Od2, and the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 does not change, and it can be said that the meter display Tm is added. Further, instead of adding the meter display Tm, or together with the addition of the meter display Tm, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 may be changed. For example, the display may be blinked, the color may be changed, or the display may be enlarged.

  Also in FIG. 251 (11), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, the meter of the meter display Tm slightly decreases, and in FIG. 251 (12), the operation means corresponds to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 251 (13), the display returns to the first operation means display Od1. That is, the display mode in which the PUSH character is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is changed to the display mode in which the PUSH character is added to the display that imitates the white chance button 136. Yes. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, a pre-reading notice (corresponding to the first notice effect) may be started. That is, the wipe display Wd, which has previously displayed “castle town” as the name of the background stage, displays “heat” as a pre-reading notice, and the wipe is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An effect image Ed is added to the display Wd. The effect image Ed is an effect for conspicuously indicating that the pre-reading notice has been started. Here, the pre-reading notice is also started by the output of the sound effect from the speaker 120, the emission of various lamps, and other displays. You may notify that. Note that the output of sound effects, the light emission of various lamps, and other displays can be regarded as one of the pre-reading notices (corresponding to the first notice effect). In the state of FIG. 251 (13), since there is only one special figure hold, the target of the pre-reading notice with the characters “heat” displayed on the wipe display Wd is the hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 251 (13). The symbol change display corresponding to the first hold indicated by. Since the hold icon h1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice, two types of pre-reading notices such as the pre-reading notice by the wipe display Wd and the pre-reading notice by the display mode of the hold icon are executed. Become. In addition, the change in the display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the switching to the pre-reading notice display in the wipe display Wd, and the addition of the effect image Ed shown in FIG. 251 (13) may be performed simultaneously. Any one may be started first, and any one may be started later. The effect image Ed may be light emission of the effect image pattern by the light guide plate.

  Here, another possible example will be described in detail. First, even if the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1 is operated in the state where the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 251 (1) is displayed, nothing changes. Does not happen. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, a notice effect) is started. Not. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is invalidated, and the first operation means display Od1 is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. it can. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation unit is invalid, including that the operation of the operation unit is not accepted and that the operation is invalidated as accepted.

  Next, during the period of variation display of the third symbol pd3 being executed when the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 (FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. 3 (3)). Even when the chance button 136 which is the operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is operated, the “heat” which is the pre-reading notice on the wipe display Wd as described with reference to FIG. And the effect image Ed are added, and the pre-reading notice is started. Further, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1. In this case, the second operation means display Od2 in a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. It can be said.

  On the other hand, the prefetch notice may not be started. That is, until the meter display Tm with the display added in FIG. 251 (10) is displayed, even if the chance button 136 is operated, as in the state where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. No change may occur. In this case, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 including the meter display Tm is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective, and FIGS. 251 (2) to (9). It can be said that the second operation means display Od2 having no meter display Tm is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. It can also be said that the meter display Tm itself is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. Further, the pre-reading notice may not be started even if the chance button 136 is operated unless the stop display of the third symbol pd3 is performed after the change to the second operation means display Od2. That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to (6) is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid. Further, the pre-reading notice may be started when the chance button 136 is operated only during the variation display of the third symbol pd3 being executed when the second operation means display Od2 is changed. . That is, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to (3) is a display indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is valid, and the chance button 136 is operated. If not, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 at the timing of FIG. 251 (4). Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may not be started unless the chance button 136 is operated before the display of the third symbol pd3 after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed (temporary stop). If the chance button 136 is not operated, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1 at the timing of the shaking display (temporary stop) shown in FIG. 251 (3). Also good. Further, even when the third symbol pd3 is being stopped (mainly stopped), if the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice is started. There may be.

  Further, the meter with the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 251 (10) becomes 0 at the timing of FIG. 251 (14), for example, when the chance button 136 is not operated. That is, it becomes 0 before the symbol variation display subject to the prefetch notice is started. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, it is assumed that the operation has been performed. After the meter on the meter display Tm becomes 0, the word “heat” which is a pre-reading notice on the wipe display Wd is displayed. Is displayed and an effect image Ed is added, and a pre-reading notice is started. When there is no operation, the aspect of the pre-reading notice effect may be changed. For example, when the effect image Ed is not displayed or there is an operation, sound output such as a sound effect is executed, but when there is no operation, the sound output may not be executed.

  Although various aspects have been described above, the second operation means display Od2 returns to the first operation means display Od1 when the prefetching notice is started. However, it may not return. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, the second operation means display Od2 may return to the first operation means display Od1 even if the pre-reading notice is not started. However, as long as the pre-reading notice is not started, the operation of the chance button 136 may be accepted thereafter, and the pre-reading notice may be started. In this case, the second operation is performed until the pre-reading notice is started. The means display Od2 may continue to be displayed as the second operation means display Od2 without returning to the first operation means display Od1.

  The fact that the pre-reading notice may be executed after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed means that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect). I can say that.

  In FIG. 251 (14), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) due to the combination of the decorative symbols being lost, but, as in FIG. The fourth symbol pd4 remains in the display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed. Further, although the effect image Ed has disappeared, the pre-reading notice display (character display of “heat”) on the wipe display Wd continues.

  In FIG. 251 (15), the third symbol pd3 stops and displays the combination of decorative symbols, and the fifth symbol pd5 also displays the combination of decorative symbols and stops (mainly stops). The 4 symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode indicating that the stop display is being performed, and the fixed display period (FIGS. 251 (15) to (17)) of the first symbol (not shown) is started. Even during this fixed display period (during the actual stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 251 (16), the number of symbol variation display has increased due to the termination of symbol variation display, and the gauge in the gauge display Gm has increased (see the arrow pointing to the right in FIG. 251 (16)). ). In FIG. 251 (17), the variation icon c disappears from the region cs where the variation icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 251 (18), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started again, and the fifth symbol pd5 displays the variation symbol of the decorative symbol as well as the third symbol pd3, and the fourth symbol pd4 The display mode is switched to the display mode. However, the shift movement of the hold icon has not started. Further, even when the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the first operation means display Od1 is continuously displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 is also displayed a plurality of variations of the third symbol pd3. Are displayed.

  FIG. 252 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example in which the operation unit display is displayed following FIG.

  In FIG. 252 (19) following FIG. 251 (18), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon h1 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice starts moving toward the area cs displaying the variation icon. In FIG. 252 (20), the shift movement of the hold icon is completed and the hold icon is no longer displayed, but the change icon c in the red display mode is displayed in the area cs where the change icon is displayed. The symbol variation display started in FIG. 251 (18) is a symbol variation display that is a target of the above-described two types of prefetching advance notices (prefetching advance notices by the wipe display Wd and prefetching advance notices by the display mode of the hold icon h1). Even if the symbol variation display that was the subject of the pre-reading notice is started, the “heat” character is displayed on the wipe display Wd, but the symbol variation display that was the subject of the pre-fetching notice has been started. Therefore, the character “heat” in the wipe display Wd becomes a so-called normal notice (the change notice) for the currently displayed symbol change display. Further, the change icon c in the red display mode is also displayed in the display mode of the normal notice (the change notice). That is, the pre-reading notice is switched to the normal notice at the start of the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice. By switching from the pre-reading notice to the normal notice and continuing the normal notice, many players may be able to notice that the started symbol change display is hot.

  In FIG. 252 (21), the reach effect of “decoration 7” is started in the variation display of the third symbol pd3. In FIG. 252 (22), “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120. In addition to the sound, it may be notified that the reach effect has been started by light emission or display of various lamps. In this state, the reach effect is a normal reach effect, but the reach effect of “decoration 7” may be a reach effect with a higher degree of expectation of a big hit than a reach effect with other numbers. In FIG. 252 (23), a balloon display is added to the character display Cd displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The display of the balloon is a character display of “development” that suggests or notifies the advancement to super reach, and is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the display of this balloon overlaps the variable display of the third symbol pd3 in the reach state displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third symbol pd3 is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the visual recognition difficulty here means the relative thing that it is difficult to visually recognize compared with the state before that (the same hereafter).

  The display of the area cs for displaying the variation icon, the display of the variation icon c, the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display Cd of the character in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. , Character display Lv, gauge display Gm, “heat” character display of wipe display Wd, and first operation means display Od1 in the third decorative symbol display device 208N are all displayed up to FIG. 252 (23). However, in FIG. 252 (24) in which the display of the balloon “development” disappears, the character display Cd, the character display Lv, and the gauge display Gm in the second decorative symbol display device 208M are displayed together with the balloon display. All disappear, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the area hs for displaying the hold icon is all gone. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the region cs for displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c are continuously displayed because they represent the degree of expectation of the symbol variation display currently being performed. ing. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the “heat” character display of the wipe display Wd and the first operation means display Od1 are still being displayed, and the third symbol pd3 is also being visibly displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 and the 5th symbol pd5 are also being displayed. If the hold icon is displayed in FIG. 252 (23), the display of the hold icon also disappears. The display of the balloon hiding, the character picture display Cd, the character display Lv, the gauge display Gm, and the display of the holding icon hs may all be erased at the same time, or the timing of disappearance is different. May be. Alternatively, a part of the display (for example, balloon display, character picture display Cd, character display Lv, gauge display Gm) disappears at the same time, and the remaining display (display of the area hs displaying the hold icon, display of the hold icon) ) May disappear at different times.

  In FIG. 252 (25), an animation in which the display of the region cs displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L move toward the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 252 (26), the animation ends, and the display of the region cs for displaying the variation icon and the display of the variation icon c are displayed by the mini character until then on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is displayed at the position where it was done. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect (here, a super reach effect) with a high degree of expectation of a big hit using the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L widely. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (26), dark display is displayed except for the display area of the fifth symbol pd5, and the third symbol pd3 and the background display of the castle town are not visible. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is always displayed so that it can be seen that the variable display is being performed. Note that the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed surrounded by a frame. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 252 (26), the wipe display Wd is changed from the characters “Heat” to the characters “Swordsman” representing the name of the super-reaching production (swordsman reach). ing. Therefore, it can be said that the normal notice by the wipe display Wd is ended here. On the other hand, the variation icon c moved to the second decorative symbol display device 208M continues to be displayed in a red display mode which is a display mode of a normal notice (the change notice). In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a reduced display pd3 'of the third symbol pd3 is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 252 (27), the swordsman reach production of the super reach production is started, and the main character Tono is displayed on the full screen, but the fifth design pd5 is visible without being hidden. It is. In FIG. 252 (28), the display switches to the wilderness background display, and the main character and the enemy swordsman have started a confrontation, and the scene after slashing from FIG. (29) to FIG. (36) continues to be displayed. . In addition, as shown in FIGS. 252 (30) to (32), the first operation means display Od1 that has been continuously displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N until now is displayed as the third decorative symbol display. An animation popping out from the device 208N and moving to the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. In FIG. 252 (32), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Next, in FIG. 252 (33) where the swordsman reach production continues, the first operation means display Od1 changes to the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, the display changes to the fourth operation means display Od4 during the variation display of the third symbol pd3. The fourth operation means display Od4 may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. The fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIG. 252 (33) is a display in which an enlarged display, a change in display mode, and a meter display indicating the remaining period which is the remaining period display are added. That is, a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is enlarged, and a large meter display Tm ′ is additionally displayed below the display. As described above, the fourth operation means display Od4 changes in size and size as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 changes, and the display position also changes. The large meter display Tm ′ can also be viewed as a display different from the fourth operation means display Od4. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 252 (33), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character “swordsman” to the character “press” that is the operation promotion display.

  In FIG. 252 (34), the swordsman reach production continues, the meter of the meter display Tm ′ is slightly reduced, the meter is further reduced in FIG. (35), and the meter is shown in FIG. Decrease to 1/4 remaining. This meter display Tm ′ hides a chance-up display (character display of “chance”), and the display gradually appears as the meter decreases. Here, “up chance” means that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display is increased.

  FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example in which the operation unit display continues from FIG. 252 in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 253 (37) following FIG. 252 (36), the chance button 136 which is an operation means corresponding to the fourth operation means display Od4 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, a normal notice (corresponding to the second notice effect) for notifying a big hit in the current symbol variation display is started. The Further, the fourth operation means display Od4 returns to the first operation means display Od1. In FIG. 253 (38), the crest character 224E ′ that has been in the initial position so far performs a drop operation, and the whole crest character 224E ′ overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and further, the first decoration. The effect image Ed1 is displayed large on the symbol display device 208L. The effect image Ed1 is displayed so as to almost hide the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman in the wilderness background image, making it difficult for both the swordsman and the swordsman to see. The tip portion of the effect image Ed1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the effect image Ed1 is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Has been. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 returned from the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed again, and above that, the wipe display Wd is a character “press”. Changes to “Victory” and the tip of the effect image Ed1 overlaps the wipe display Wd. However, the character “Victory” is visible, and the tip portion of the effect image Ed1 makes the character “Victory” in the wipe display Wd conspicuous. It should be noted that the effect image Ed1 does not overlap with the fifth symbol pd5 that continuously represents the variable display, and the fact that the variable symbol display continues is clearly shown in the fifth symbol pd5 together with the fourth symbol pd4. It is displayed. As described above, in this example, the crest character 224E 'performs the drop operation and the effect image Ed1 is displayed as the effect of the normal notice, and the wipe display Wd is changed to the characters "win". The effect of the normal notice here is an effect with high expectation level of the jackpot, and when the expectation level of the jackpot is low, the family crest member 224E ′ does not fall or the effect image Ed1 is not displayed even if it falls. Or the wipe display Wd changes to “defeat” or changes to a question mark. Further, simultaneously with the fall of the family crest character 224E ′, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 253 (38), the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3 is a combination of the big symbols of the decorative symbols (“decoration 7”). -"Decoration 7"-"Decoration 7") starts shaking display (temporary stop).

  In FIG. 253 (39), the crest character 224E 'that has been in the fall position has risen to the initial position, but the effect image Ed1 is still displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.

  In FIG. 253 (40), the effect image Ed1 disappears, and the result of the swordsman reach effect which is the super reach effect is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the scene where the protagonist wins is displayed. Therefore, the super reach production is the production from FIG. 252 (26) to FIG. 253 (40). Note that the scene where the main character wins as shown in FIG. 253 (40) is seen as a part of the normal notice started when the chance button 136 is operated while the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed. You can also

  In FIG. 253 (41), the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3 displayed on the second ornamental symbol display device 208M returns to the first ornamental symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. “Decoration 7” is displayed in any of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Here, any “decoration 7” is displayed in a shaking manner (temporarily stopped), but the 5th symbol pd5 continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and the 4th symbol pd4 remains in a display mode indicating that the variable display is being displayed. . Further, the normal notice display (character display of “win”) in the wipe display Wd is continued.

  In FIG. 253 (42), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed (main stop) with the combination of the ornament symbols (“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”), and the fifth symbol pd5 is also displayed. The combination of the big symbols of the decorative symbols is stopped (mainly stopped), and the fourth symbol pd4 is switched to the display mode indicating that the stop symbol is being displayed, and the fixed display of the first symbol (special symbol) not shown is started. During this fixed display period (during the actual stop of the third symbol pd3), the first operation means display Od1 and the normal notice display (“win” character display) on the wipe display Wd are continuously displayed. Yes.

  Here, another possible example will be described in detail. First, in FIG. 251 (13) to FIG. 252 (32) after returning to the first operation means display Od1, even if the chance button 136 as the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1 is operated, No change occurs as in the state of FIG. 251 (1). That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, a notice effect) is started. Not.

  On the other hand, when the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the fourth operation means display Od4, as described above, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and the normal notice is started. Here, the series of effects in FIGS. 252 (33) to 253 (40) including the display of the fourth operation means display Od4 is the last to determine whether or not the big hit is made in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It can be said that this is equivalent to the so-called production (the so-called final judge production). The fact that the normal notice may be executed after the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed means that the fourth operation means display Od4 itself corresponds to the display of the normal notice (second notice effect). I can say that.

  Further, in this example, the first operation means display Od1 is changed and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed. However, the fourth operation means display Od1 is not displayed. The display Od4 may start to be displayed alone, or even if the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, the first operation means display Od1 does not change, but the fourth operation means display Od4 alone. It may begin to be displayed. However, when the first operation means display Od1 is changed and the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the fourth operation means display Od4 starts to be displayed alone. .

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated, in FIG. 253 (38), the fourth operation means display Od4 returns to the first operation means display Od1, but the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, Nothing is displayed on the operation means display, and the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed again after the big hit game is ended or when the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. . Alternatively, the first operation means display Od1 may not be displayed even when the big hit game ends, or the first operation means display Od1 is not displayed even if the next variable display of the third symbol pd3 is disclosed. You may make it not display.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ shown in FIG. 252 (33) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ is assumed to have been operated. After reaching 0, the normal notice effect of FIGS. 253 (38) to (40) may be executed.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 251, when the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the pre-reading notice is started, but the chance button 136 is operated. The normal notice for the symbol variation display performed at the time may be started instead of the prefetch notice.

  FIG. 254 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in a pachinko machine having a game board having a configuration different from the configuration of the game board shown in FIG. It is.

  The description here will focus on differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 251 to 253, and the description of the same points as in the examples shown in FIGS. 251 to 253 may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 254, instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are arranged on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is disposed in the screen. The fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also movable means, like the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the size of the display screen is smaller than that of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 254 (a), the upper portion overlaps the center portion of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side), and this position is the initial position. Correspondingly, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is a display device capable of moving up and down. In the example shown in FIG. 254, the background image of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is also the townscape of the castle town, and four areas hs for displaying the hold icon are displayed. In FIG. 254 (a), all the areas hs are displayed. The hold icons h1 to h4 in the white display mode, which is the default display mode, are displayed.

  A region cs for displaying a variation icon is prepared at the left end of the effect display region 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and this region cs is the same low stage as the region hs for displaying the hold icon. In FIG. 254 (a), the change icon c of the white display mode which is the default display mode is displayed in the area cs, and the variable display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. . In this example, the fourth symbol pd4 is displayed on the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 254 (a), the fourth symbol pd4 is a display mode indicating that the variable display is being performed.

  Furthermore, a first operation means display Od1 is displayed at the right end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 254 (b), the display Cd1 of the hero's character picture appears on the variation icon c, and in FIG. It is displayed in an upright position on the area cs displaying the icon. Then, an animation is displayed in which the character of the protagonist carries the variation icon c (FIG. 254 (d)) and throws away the variation icon c carried (FIG. 254 (e)). That is, the animation here is a moving animation of the fluctuation icon c. The variation icon c that has been thrown off crosses the third symbol pd3 during the variation display (FIG. 254 (f)) and hits the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 254 (g)). Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (h), the effect image Ed2 appears so as to hide a part of the change icon c and the first operation means display Od1, and the change icon c disappears in the following FIG. 254 (i). A change occurs in the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. 254 (j), the effect image Ed2 disappears, and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 was displayed. ing. The second operation means display Od2 here is a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light. The actual chance button 136 itself also changes from the white light emission state to the blue light emission state. As the light emission mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the second operation means display Od2, the red mode and the blue mode have a higher expectation level for the big hit than the white mode. As shown in FIGS. 251 (1) to (2), the first operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2. In the case where the one operation means display Od1 is changed to the second operation means display Od2, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher. The character of Tono-sama after throwing away the variation icon c continues the same pose until FIG. 254 (j). In FIG. 254 (k), the character is displayed in an upright position on the region cs displaying the variation icon. Yes.

  In FIG. 254 (k), a balloon display “chance is” is added to the character display Cd1. This balloon display of “chance is” can be said to be a kind of operation promotion display or a kind of pre-reading notice. Also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  In FIG. 254 (l), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the second operation means display Od2, is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 also changes in this example, as shown in FIG. 254 (m). The display returns to the first operation means display Od1. In addition, a pre-reading notice (corresponding to the first notice effect) is started. In FIG. 254 (m), a change animation is started in which the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice, and a part or all of the second hold icon h2 is displayed. The effect image Ed3 appears so as to be hidden, and in the subsequent FIG. 254 (n), the second hold icon h2 that has been changed to the display pattern of the fan picture is displayed in front of the effect image Ed3. Then, in FIG. 254 (o), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the second hold icon h2 of the display pattern of the fan picture, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, is displayed. Will continue to be displayed until the second hold is consumed.

  Other possible examples will be described in detail. First, in this example, the chance button 136 is operated quickly after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. However, even if the operation timing is delayed, if the operation is within the operation effective period, FIG. m) to the effect of the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. In addition, the chance button 136 is displayed until the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which is being executed when the display of the second operation means display Od2, is started, and the next variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started. If not operated, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed. That is, when the display of the second operation means display Od2 is started, the variation display of the third symbol pd3, which is being executed when the display is started, is continued and the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed during the stop display. Even if the next variation display of the three symbols pd3 is started, the second operation means display Od2 is continuously displayed, and the second manipulation means display Od2 is displayed across the variation variation of the continuous third symbol pd3. The Furthermore, the second operation means display Od2 may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 254 is completed at the longest unless the chance button 136 is operated.

  The display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light may correspond to an example of a third operation means display. The third operation means display here is an operation means display in a mode different from the first operation means display Od1, and the third operation means display is in a state where the third operation means display is displayed. This means an operation means display in which the display mode does not change even when the operation means corresponding to the display (here, the chance button 136) is operated. When the operation means corresponding to the third operation means display is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, the notice effect may be started or may not be started. . Hereinafter, the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light will be referred to as blue third operation means display, and the description will be continued. For example, until the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 251 (10) is added to the blue third operation means display, or until the PUSH character is added, the operation of the chance button 136 is disabled and the meter display is displayed. If the chance button 136 is operated after Tm is added or PUSH is added, the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIGS. 254 (m) to (o) may be executed. May be. In other words, there may be a case where the period for disabling the operation of the chance button 136 is switched to the period for enabling it. In this case, when the meter display Tm is added to the blue third operation means display or the chance button 136 is operated after the PUSH character is added, the first display as shown in FIG. 254 (m). When the meter display Tm is added to the blue third operation means display or the PUSH character is added to the third operation means display Od1, the third operation means display is changed to the second operation means display Od1. It can be said that it has changed to means display. Moreover, there may be a case where the blue third operation means display changes to the first operation means display Od1, and in this case, the operation of the chance button 136 is always invalidated. If the player does not start the pre-reading notice even if the chance button 136 is operated in the state where the blue third operation means display is displayed, Or it waits, expecting switching effectively, whether it returns to 1st operation means display Od1 without switching. The degree of expectation that is effectively switched may be expressed by the light emission mode of the chance button 136 itself or the display mode of the third operation means display. For example, the expectation may be higher in the blue mode than in the red mode, and in the 7-color change mode (rainbow mode) than in the blue mode. When the operation of the chance button 136 is switched effectively, the prefetching notice is executed, and the expectation of the big hit becomes higher than the case where the operation returns to the first operation means display Od1 without switching. Further, during the period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid, the display mode of the third operation means display may be changed to increase the level of expectation for effective switching, or to decrease it.

  In this example, the remaining period display of the chance button 136 is not displayed. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, it is assumed that the operation has been performed. After the expiration of the effective period, the pre-reading notice effects shown in FIGS. 254 (m) to (o) may be executed.

  Further, in FIG. 254 (j), the display changes to the second operation means display Od2, but may change to the fourth operation means display Od4. In this case, the chance button 136 is disabled until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 to be notified starts, and the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h2 is started. If there is an operation of the button 136, the normal notice may be started.

  FIG. 255 is a diagram showing stepwise modifications of the example shown in FIG.

  The description here will focus on points that are different from the example shown in FIG. 254, and description of the same points as in the example shown in FIG. 254 may be omitted.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 255, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O shown in FIG. 255 (a), four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed, and any of the hold icons h1 to h4 is a white display mode which is a default display mode. is there. In addition, a change icon c of a white display mode, which is a default display mode, is displayed on the left end of the effect display area 208d in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The first operation means display Od1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 255 (b), the display Cd1 of the hero's character pattern appears on the first operation means display Od1, and in FIG. 255 (c), the character's character displays the first operation means display. It descends behind Od1 and is displayed in an upright position. Then, an animation is displayed in which the character of the main character takes on the first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 255 (d)) and throws away the carried first operation means display Od1 (FIG. 255 (e)). That is, the animation here is a moving animation of the first operation means display Od. The first operation means display Od1 thrown away passes in front of the third symbol pd3 being variably displayed, and in FIG. 255 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. Just displayed on the border. That is, the upper half of the first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the lower half of the first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O. The first operation means display Od1 falls into the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O as it is (see the arrow extending downward from the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 255 (f)), FIG. In g), four icons are displayed on the hold icons h1 to h4 displayed side by side. Next, as shown in FIG. 255 (h), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the second operation means display Od2 at that location. That is, the display mode is changed to a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits blue light. Further, the actual chance button 136 itself also changes to a blue light emitting state.

  In FIG. 255 (i), a Tono-sama character display Cd1 is displayed at the position where the first operation means display Od1 was displayed, and the character display Cd1 says “Press the button”. A balloon display is added. The display of the balloon “Don't press a button” can be said to be a kind of operation promotion display or a kind of pre-reading notice. Also in this example, it can be said that the second operation means display Od2 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 255, the arrival point of the thrown first operation means display Od1 is in the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, but may be in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . In the example shown in FIG. 255, the operation means display is moved (thrown away) while the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid, but the operation means display is displayed while the operation of the chance button 136 is valid. You may move. That is, the display itself may move after changing to the second operation means display Od2 which is also a pre-reading notice display (third notice effect). However, the pre-reading notice is not started even if the chance button 136 is operated during the movement. As other possible examples, various examples described as other examples considered in FIG. 254 can be applied.

  FIG. 256 is a diagram showing step by step an example of changing from the first operation means display Od1 to the third operation means display Od3 and further changing from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2. is there.

  The example after FIG. 256 is an example in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 195. In the explanation after FIG. 256, the points different from the examples shown in FIG. Description of the same points as in the examples illustrated in FIGS. 251 to 253 may be omitted.

  The state of FIG. 256 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 251 (a), and the variable display is performed in each of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is a display mode representing that the variable display is being performed. Further, a first operation means display Od1 is displayed below the wipe display Wd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In FIG. 256 (b), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3. The third operation means display Od3 may be a display obtained by developing the first operation means display Od1, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display Od1. The third operation means display Od3 is a display different from the first operation means display Od1. A third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 256 (b) is a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating a state in which the chance button 136 emitting white light vibrates. In addition to changing to a display of a different color, the display may change to a display having a different operation mode such as vibration. Note that the actual chance button 136 itself vibrates while emitting white light. Furthermore, the characters “Preparing” are displayed on the wipe display Wd where “castle town” as the name of the background stage has been displayed. The character under preparation here is a character indicating that it is a period of waiting until the operation of the chance button 136 becomes effective. That is, it becomes a character indicating that the operation of the chance button 136 is invalid (hereinafter the same). Therefore, even if the chance button 136 is operated while the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed as it is, and an effect (for example, a notice effect, etc.) in response to the operation of the chance button 136 is started. Not. When the characters “in preparation” are displayed, the third operation means display Od3 is displayed (hereinafter the same). By displaying the characters “in preparation” on the wipe display Wd, it may be possible to focus attention on changes in the third operation means display Od3 and future development.

  In FIG. 256 (c), the third symbol pd3 is swayed (temporarily stopped) with a combination of the decorative symbols lost ("decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 1"). ), The third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop), and this main stop continues until FIG. In FIG. 256 (g), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started. The third operation means display Od3 is displayed continuously from FIG. 256 (b), is displayed during the stop display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3. Yes.

  In FIG. 256 (h), the shift movement of the hold icon is started, and in the next figure (i), the shift movement is completed. As a result, the first hold icon h1 is a hold icon with a red display mode, which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed from the start to the completion of the shift of the hold icon. From FIG. 256 (b) to FIG. 256 (i), the letters “Preparing” are continuously displayed on the wipe display Wd.

  In FIG. 256 (j), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues. Here, the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 256 (j) is a combination of the display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 256 (j), the wipe display Wd is changed from the character “Preparing” to the character “Press” that is the operation promotion display.

  Also in FIG. 256 (k), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 continues, the meter of the meter display Tm slightly decreases, and in FIG. 256 (l), the operation means corresponds to the second operation means display Od2. The chance button 136 is operated. When the chance button 136 is operated while the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the display mode of the second operation means display Od2 changes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 256 (m), the display changes to the first operation means display Od1. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 256 (m), a change in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. The animation is started and the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide all of the first hold icon h1 that has been displayed in red until now. In FIG. 256 (n), the effect image Ed4 disappears and the first hold icon h1 is changed to a holding icon in a seven-color change mode (rainbow mode). In the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the rainbow mode than in the red display mode. Therefore, by operating the chance button 136 in a state where the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, the prefetching notice that has been performed so far is changed to a prefetching notice that has a high expectation of the big hit.

  In the example of FIG. 256 described above, the pre-reading notice is started when the third operation means display Od3 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 and the chance button 136 is operated. The means display Od2 itself is also a pre-read notice display (third notice effect), and the pre-read notice may be executed after the third operation means display Od3 is displayed. It can be said that the means display Od3 itself corresponds to the display of the pre-reading notice (third notice effect).

  It should be noted that even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 256 (j) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0. After that, the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIGS. 256 (m) to (n) may be executed.

  FIG. 257 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which there are periods during which two types of operation means display are displayed simultaneously.

  The first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 257 (b) is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. In FIG. 257 (d), the reach effect of “decoration 4” is started in the third symbol pd3 that is being displayed in a variable manner. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 257 (e), the third symbol pd3 The reach character image is displayed so as to hide. However, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are not hidden, and it is well understood that the variable display is still continued.

  Next, in FIG. 257 (f), the button effect is started, and a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is displayed in the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Below that, a meter display Tm ′ representing the remaining period, which is a remaining period display, is also displayed. These displays are part of the button effect display, and correspond to the fourth operation means display Od4. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second operation means display Od2 displayed from FIG. 257 (c) is continuously displayed, and at the timing of FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operation means is displayed. The display Od4 and the second operation means display Od2 are displayed at the same time. Note that “displayed simultaneously” does not need to be simultaneous until the display start time, in other words, means that they are displayed overlapping in time (in parallel in time) (in the following, The same).

  Also in FIG. 257 (g), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the second operation means display Od2 are displayed simultaneously. In FIG. 257 (g), as in FIG. 252 (35), the meter display Tm ′ is reduced to some extent, but in FIG. 257 (g), unlike in FIG. I can't see it.

  In FIG. 257 (h), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to both the second operation means display Od2 and the fourth operation means display Od4. Here, the fourth operation means display Od4 has priority, and FIG. As shown in (i), the fourth operation means display Od4 disappears, a decorative symbol “continue” that is a pseudo-continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the third symbol pd3 is the first time in the pseudo-continuous effect. Is temporarily stopped. The pseudo-continuous effect is a notice effect (ordinary notice effect) for the currently displayed symbol variation display and corresponds to a second notice effect. On the other hand, there is no change in the second operation means display Od2, and it continues to be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The chance button 136 is operated again almost immediately after the operation of the chance button 136 at the timing of FIG. 257 (h) (FIG. 257 (j)). As shown in FIG. 257 (k), the operation of the chance button 136 here is changed from the second operation means display Od2 to the first operation means display Od1 as in FIG. 251 (13). In the wipe display Wd displayed on the one operation means display Od1, the word “heat” is displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd. In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 257 (k), the first temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect is continued.

  In FIG. 257 (l), re-change of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the effect image Ed disappears, but the pre-reading notice display in the wipe display Wd. (Character display of “heat”) continues.

  In the example described above, the normal notice effect has priority over the normal notice effect and the prefetch notice effect. The normal notice is associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 on which the meter display Tm ′ indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period is displayed, and the operation effective period is the period of the currently displayed symbol variation display. Limited to within. On the other hand, the pre-reading notice is associated with the second operation means display Od2 that can be displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3, and there is a time margin. Therefore, the normal notice associated with the fourth operation means display Od4 is preferentially started. As shown in this example, by providing a start order (priority order) of the notice effects, a plurality of notice effects are not performed at a time, and it is possible to clearly inform the player what happened. There are advantages.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 257 (d), the effect of the pre-reading notice as shown in FIG. 257 (k) is immediately started, and the second operation means display Od2 is displayed as the first operation means display Od2. Changes to the operation means display Od1. Therefore, in this case, in FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the first operation means display Od1 are displayed simultaneously. In the example shown in FIG. 257, the display changes to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 257 (c), but changes to the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 256 (b) and the like. The timing may change from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2 at the timing (g) or the timing (i) in FIG. In this case, in FIG. 257 (f), the fourth operation means display Od4 and the third operation means display Od3 are displayed simultaneously.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm ′ shown in FIG. 257 (f) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is 0. After that, the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. Further, the remaining operation period display is not displayed in the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136. Even in this case, it may be assumed that the operation has been performed, and the pre-reading notice effect in FIG. 257 (k) may be executed after the operation effective period has elapsed.

  Further, even if the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. 257 (h) is not a single operation such as a single press or a short press, but a so-called long press operation, a normal notice effect by a pseudo-continuous effect is provided. However, the operation of the chance button 136 is temporarily stopped and the operation is performed again, whereby the pre-reading notice effect by the character display of “heat” and the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd is started.

  Furthermore, for one operation of the chance button 136, there is only one effect of the normal notice effect by the pseudo-continuous effect, and the “heat” character display in the wipe display Wd and the pre-read notice effect by the effect image Ed. Instead of being started, both effects may be started or may be started without fail.

  FIG. 258 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 256, and is a diagram showing step by step an example in which there is a period in which displays simulating the operating means are simultaneously displayed.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 256, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 258 (a) is changed to the third operation means display Od3 in FIG. In the wipe display Wd, the characters “Preparing” are displayed.

  Also in FIG. 258 (i), the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, and at the timing of the next figure (j), there is one ball winning at the first special figure starting port 230, and in FIG. Two hold icons that were only displayed are now displayed. In FIG. 258 (k), the second hold icon h2 is increased. This second hold icon h2 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini-item MI in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is added to the hold icon hd in the white display mode. is there. The button hold icon here refers to a hold icon whose display mode changes when the corresponding operation unit is operated, and does not necessarily have to be a display imitating the operation unit, and may be only an operation promotion display mode. Further, only the remaining period display mode or a combination of these modes may be used. Corresponding operating means may be displayed as a picture on the icon, and here is a chance button 136. The button hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k) is different from the first operation means display Od1, the second operation means display Od2, the third operation means display Od3, and the fourth operation means display Od4. That is, although the display is different from the operation means display, the mini item MI is a reduced display of the operation means display (here, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N). ing. In other words, the display mode of the second hold icon (button hold icon) h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k) is a display mode in which the second operation means display Od2 is reduced. Note that the size of the mini item MI may change according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot, or depending on the size of the displayed operation means display, the display mode of the button hold icon may be the operation means display (for example, A display mode in which the second operation means display Od2) is enlarged may be used. Further, the button hold icon is displayed only during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. That is, while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation of the chance button 136 is treated as valid. However, when the button hold icon is displayed at the same time as the operation means display, even if the chance button 136 is operated, an effect relating to the operation means display is performed first, and when the chance button 136 is operated again, the button There may be an effect related to the hold icon. Also in the following examples, the description here can be applied to the button hold icon, and the description here can also be applied to the button change icon. In addition, as a display mode that changes, a display mode of a pre-reading notice that varies depending on the level of expectation of jackpot, and a display mode that has a low level of expectation of jackpot includes a default display mode. The display mode of a symbol is also included. The button hold icon itself can be regarded as a pre-read notice display. The button hold icon is a display different from the operation means display. A third operation means display Od3 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N of FIG. 258 (k), and the chance button 136 that emits white light in the third operation means display Od3 vibrates. A display imitating a state of being present and a display imitating a chance button 136 that emits red light in the second hold icon h2 (button hold icon) are simultaneously displayed. Note that a mode in which the hold icon in the white display mode is omitted and only the mini item MI is set as the hold icon may be used. Alternatively, the second hold icon h2 is only a hold icon in a white display mode, and can be seen as a mode in which the mini item MI is added to the second hold icon h2, but in any case, it emits white light The display imitating the state that the chance button 136 is vibrating and the display imitating the chance button 136 emitting red light are displayed at the same time.

  In FIG. 258 (l), the third operation means display Od3 is changed to the second operation means display Od2 as in FIG. 256 (j). The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 257 (j) is also a display in which the PUSH character is added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and the meter display Tm. In addition, the wipe display Wd also changes from “preparing” to “pressing” as an operation promotion display. In FIGS. 258 (l) to (n), two displays imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed at the same time. Here, the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the hold indicated by the first hold icon h1.

  In FIG. 258 (o), the chance button 136 is operated in a state where two displays simulating the chance button 136 that emits red light are displayed at the same time. The chance button 136 is an operation means corresponding to both the second operation means display Od2 and the second hold icon h2 which is a button hold icon, and here, pre-reading notice for both is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 258 (p), the effect image Ed4 appears so as to hide all of the second hold icon h2 that is the button hold icon, and the symbol that is the target of the prefetching notice of the second operation means display Od2. The effect image Ed5 also appears so as to hide the entire first hold icon h1 representing the hold of the variable display. In FIG. 258 (q), the effect images Ed4 and Ed5 disappear and the first hold icon h1 is 7 It changes to the hold icon of the color change mode (rainbow mode). In addition, the second hold icon h2 is changed from a button hold icon to a hold icon in a display mode representing the face of the character of Tonosama. Therefore, the mini item MI in which the characters PUSH are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light disappears. On the other hand, at the stage of FIG. 258 (p), the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1. In the display mode of the hold icon, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character than in the rainbow mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 258, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 related to the second operation means display Od2 overlap (FIG. 258 (l) to FIG. In this overlapping period, it is possible to see the change of the hold icon at a time by one operation of the chance button 136, which may surprise the player. In this example, two notice effects are performed simultaneously, but three or more notice effects may be performed simultaneously. For example, when a plurality of button hold icons appear due to winning of a plurality of balls, or when a plurality of second operation means display Od2 is displayed (for example, one changes from the first operation means display Od1 and another For example, there may be a case where the third operation means display Od3 changes. The greater the number of announcements performed at the same time, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit. If the pre-announcement effect to be performed at the same time is an effect of the pre-reading notice, the target of the pre-reading notice may be different or the same. Alternatively, the fourth operation means display Od4 is also displayed at the same time, and unlike the example shown in FIG. 257, the normal notice may be performed simultaneously with the prefetch notice. Further, a plurality of fourth operation means displays Od4 may be displayed, and a plurality of normal notices may be simultaneously performed by a single operation. In this case, the greater the number of normal announcements being made at the same time, the higher the probability of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In this example, the appearance timing of the button hold icon is FIG. 258 (k), which is earlier than the change timing to the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 258 (k) before the change from the third operation means display Od3 to the second operation means display Od2, the button that is the second hold icon h2 is first displayed. If only the hold icon changes, and then the chance button 136 is operated again after the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 is changed this time. In contrast to this example, the change timing to the second operation means display Od2 may be earlier than the appearance timing of the button hold icon. In this case, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the second operation means display Od2 is displayed, only the first hold icon h1 changes first, and then the chance that the button hold icon appears and then the chance. If the button 136 is operated again, only the button hold icon changes this time. Therefore, the player can choose whether to change two hold icons at a time or one at a time waiting for the appearance of the button hold icon, and to entertain the player There is.

  Even when the second operation means display Od2 and the button hold icon are displayed at the same time, only the button hold icon that is the second hold icon h2 is changed by the first operation of the chance button 136, Only the first hold icon h1 may change in the second operation, or conversely, only the first hold icon h1 changes in the first operation, and the second hold icon h2 in the second operation. Only certain button hold icons may change.

  Further, in this example, the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice of the second operation means display Od2 is the hold indicated by the first hold icon h1, but is indicated by the second hold icon h2. It may be put on hold. In this case, it overlaps with the pre-reading notice by the button hold icon. However, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the second hold icon h2 is hidden by the effect image and then changed to a rainbow-type hold icon. When the chance button 136 is operated once more, the second hold icon h2 is hidden by the effect image again, and then changed to a hold icon having a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. It may be a change. The twice operation here may be a continuous hitting operation in addition to the normal operation being performed twice at intervals, or may be limited to an operation in which the normal operation is performed twice at intervals, or limited to a continuous hitting operation. May be. Alternatively, the above two-stage change may be performed by operating the chance button 136 once. The single operation here may be a normal operation, may be a long press operation, may be limited to a normal operation, or may be limited to a long press operation.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 258 (l) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0 because it has been operated. After that, the pre-reading notice effects shown in FIGS. 258 (p) to (q) may be executed.

  FIG. 259 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which operation means display is displayed on each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  The example shown in FIG. 259 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 256, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 (a) displays the Tono-like character displayed in FIG. 256 (a). The mini character composed of the combination of the pattern display Cd, the character display Lv, and the gauge display Gm is not displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 is displayed instead. Further, the first operation means display Od1 is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 259 (a).

  In FIG. 259 (b), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the third operation means display Od3, and the wipe display on the third operation means display Od3 is displayed. In Wd, a character “in preparation” is displayed. On the other hand, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 259 (b), the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, and the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 are displayed simultaneously. Will be. Both the first operation means display Od1 and the third operation means display Od3 continue to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, and are displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 259 (i), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the second operation means display Od2. On the other hand, on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 259 (i), the third operation means display Od3 is still displayed, and the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3 are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed.

  In FIG. 259 (j), the third operation means display Od3 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M also has the third operation means display Od3. The second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is only a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. The second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is a display in which a meter display Tm is added to the same display as that on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed between the two. The embodiment is different. However, the display mode may be the same.

  In FIG. 259 (k), the chance button 136 is operated. The chance button 136 is an operation unit corresponding to any second operation unit display Od2, and in FIG. 259 (l), the second operation unit display Od2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is The display mode is changed so that the fan pattern Fd overlaps the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light. The fan picture Fd is a display of a pre-reading notice, and is a picture with a high expectation degree of jackpot. Here, since only one hold remains, it can be seen that the target of the pre-reading notice is the symbol change display of the first hold. In the notice, the symbol change display subject to notice is unknown. In addition, instead of the pre-reading notice by the fan picture Fd, a normal notice by the fan picture Fd may be used. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 259 (l), the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and the entire first hold icon h1 is displayed. An effect image Ed4 appears to hide. The appearance timing of the fan pattern Fd on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after operating the chance button 136 may coincide with the appearance timing of the effect image Ed4 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be shifted. For example, in this example, both are pre-reading notices and the notice target is also common, so the appearance timing is the same, and when the pre-reading notice object is different, the one with the higher expectation of jackpot appears first. Or it may appear later. In addition, when one is a pre-reading notice and the other is a normal notice, the normal notice may appear first in the same manner as in the example shown in FIG. 257. May appear. Furthermore, the priority order may be determined by a decorative symbol display device on which an operation means display is displayed. For example, the operation means display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be started prior to the operation means display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Or vice versa.

  In FIG. 259 (m), the picture Fd of the fan that appears on the second decorative design display device 208M rises (see the upward arrow shown in FIG. 259 (m)), and the first operation means display Od1 is visible. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect image Ed4 disappears, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character.

  In FIG. 259 (n), the effect image Ed is applied to the fan picture Fd on the first operation means display Od1, and then the fan picture Fd disappears together with the effect image Ed (FIG. 259 (o)). That is, before the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice starts, the fan picture Fd disappears, and the prefetching notice with the fan picture Fd ends in a short time. On the other hand, in both FIG. 259 (n) and FIG. 25 (o), the first hold icon h1 continues to be displayed in a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. Note that the fan design Fd may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice starts, or may continue to be displayed until the symbol variation display subject to the prefetching notice ends.

  In this example, as in the example of FIG. 258, two types of notices are started by one operation of the chance button 136, but only one notice may be started by one operation of the chance button 136. There may be a case where two types of notice are started by one operation, and the expectation of jackpot may be higher than the case where only one notice is started by one operation. In addition, in the operation means display, the period displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the period displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not overlap with each other. The expected degree of jackpot may be determined by the decorative symbol display device on which the operation means display is displayed. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the operation means display is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the operation means display is displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The expectation of jackpot may be higher than when the chance button 136 is operated, or vice versa.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 259 (j) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is set to 0 because it has been operated. After that, the notice effect of FIGS. 259 (l) to (o) may be executed.

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the effects differ before and after the change of the operation means display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 260, as shown in FIG. 260 (c), the chance button 136, which is an operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, in a state where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. Is operated, an operation sound such as “pico” is output from the speaker 120. That is, the operation of the chance button 136 at this timing is not accepted, or even if accepted, the operation is not invalidated, the operation is accepted as valid, and as a result, an operation sound is output. Yes. Although the operation of the chance button 136 is valid, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 260 (d), the first operation means display Od1 changes to the third operation means display Od3 regardless of the operation of the chance button 136 in FIG. The third operation means display Od3 is a display form in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light, and is the same as the display form of the second operation means display Od2. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish between the second operation means display Od2 and the third operation means display Od3, but when the operation means (here the chance button 136) is operated, the second operation means display Od2 is displayed. If so, the display mode changes, and if it is the third operation means display Od3, the display mode does not change.

  After changing to the third operation means display Od3, when the chance button 136 is operated again as shown in FIG. 260 (e), a sound such as “pico-pico” is output from the speaker 120 this time. This sound is different from the operation sound output in FIG. 260 (c), but may be an operation sound corresponding to the third operation means display Od3, or a pre-reading notice sound. May be. In this case as well, the display mode of the third operation means display Od3 does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136. The third operation means display Od3 continues to be displayed until the next variation display of the third symbol pd3, and is displayed across the continuous variation display of the third symbol pd3.

  Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the third operation means display Od3 is displayed, when the pre-reading notice sound is output, the third operation means display Od3 itself is pre-read. It can also be said that it corresponds to a notice display (fourth notice effect).

  In FIG. 260 (n), the third operation means display Od3 changes to the second operation means display Od2. In other words, a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light is enlarged, and a large meter display Tm is additionally displayed below the display. However, the display position is not changed, and the second operation means display Od2 is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the operation means display has changed.

  In FIG. 260 (o), the meter display Tm is slightly reduced, and in the following FIG. 260 (p), the chance button 136 is operated. As shown in FIG. 260 (q), the operation of the chance button 136 here changes from the second operation means display Od2 to the first operation means display Od1, and on the changed first operation means display Od1. In the wipe display Wd displayed on the screen, the word “heat” is displayed as a pre-read notice display (first notice effect), and the effect image Ed is displayed on the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Have been added. The look-ahead notice in FIG. 260 (q) is a notice with a high expectation of a big hit. In this example, the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 260 (f) is different from the output sound from the speaker 120 in FIG. 260 (c). That is, the operation sound is a kind of effect, and the effect is different before the change of the operation means display (FIG. 260 (c)) and after the change (FIG. 260 (f)). When the effect after the change of the operation means display is different from the effect before the change, the expectation of the big hit in FIG. 260 (q) is obtained through the output of the sound effect in FIG. High notice may be executed. The player does not know the output timing of the sound effect, and the player's attention can be directed to the output of the sound effect and the change in the operation means display. ) May be disappointing.

  Note that even if the presentation differs between before and after the change of the display of the operation means, there may be a case where a warning with a low degree of expectation of jackpot is executed.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated once again during the period of FIG. 260 (g) to FIG. Is only output again.

  Further, even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the meter displayed on the meter display Tm shown in FIG. 260 (n) becomes 0, the meter displayed on the meter display Tm is reset to 0. After that, the effect of the pre-reading notice in FIG. 260 (q) may be executed.

  FIG. 261 is a diagram illustrating an example of the case where the effects are the same before and after the change of the display of the operation means. In the following, the description will focus on differences from the example shown in FIG.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 261, in FIG. 261 (c), the chance button 136, which is the operation means corresponding to the first operation means display Od1, is operated in the state where the first operation means display Od1 is displayed. As a result, an operation sound such as “pico” is output from the speaker 120.

  Further, in FIG. 261 (f), when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the third operation means display Od3 in which the first operation means display Od1 is changed is displayed, “pico” is output from the speaker 120. Is output. That is, the same sound is output before and after the change of the operation means display.

  In FIG. 261 (n), the third operation means display Od3 is changed to the second operation means display Od2. The second operation means display Od2 here also includes a display in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light, as in the case of FIG. 260 (n). This display is not an enlarged display but a normal size. Also included is a normal size meter display Tm. Furthermore, a sound effect is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the operation means display has changed.

  In FIG. 261 (o), when the chance button 136 is operated, the operation means display which has been the second operation means display Od2 so far is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and the changed first operation means is displayed. In the wipe display Wd displayed on the display Od1, characters “slight fever” are displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect). Here, the effect image Ed as shown in FIG. 260 (q) is not added, and the pre-reading notice of “slight heat” in FIG. 261 (p) is replaced with the pre-reading notice of “heat” shown in FIG. 261 (q). In comparison, the expectation of jackpot is low. In this example, the production (in this case, the output sound from the speaker 120) is the same before and after the change of the operation means display (FIG. 261 (c)) and after the change (FIG. 261 (f)). In such a case, after that, through the output of the sound effect in FIG. 261 (n), a notice with a low expectation level for jackpot in FIG. 261 (p) may be executed. Note that even if the production is the same before and after the change of the display of the operation means, a notice with a high expectation of jackpot (notice shown in FIG. 260 (q)), or “a certain thick” or “large board behavior” instead of “slight fever”. A notice with a very high expectation level for jackpot may be executed, but a notice with a low expectation level for jackpot is more likely to be executed.

  It should be noted that even if the chance button 136 is operated again during the period from FIG. 261 (g) to FIG. Is only output again.

  FIG. 262 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which the chance button 136 is operated during the execution of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, which was performed at the timing when the holding increased.

  In FIG. 262 (a), the third symbol pd3 is variably displayed in a state where there is no hold, and the first operation means display Od1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Then, at the timing of the next figure (b), there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and in the figure (c), the first hold icon h1 is displayed. The first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold icon in which a mini item MI ′ in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light is added to the hold icon hd in a white display mode. It is. The display mode of the mini item MI 'here is the same as the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Even if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 262 (c), no change occurs. That is, the display mode of the first operation means display Od1 does not change, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed as it is, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is not started. This effect in response to the operation of the chance button 136 includes a change animation of the button hold icon, and the display mode of the button hold icon does not change at all.

  In FIG. 262 (d), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is changed to the second operation means display Od2, and the chance button 136 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Operated. That is, the chance button 136 is operated before the third symbol pd3, which has been displayed at the timing of FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (f1), the second operation means display Od2 changes to the first operation means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed on the changed first operation means display Od1. Is displayed as a pre-reading notice display (first notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. On the other hand, the first hold icon h1 is a display mode including the mini item MI 'and does not change at all.

  In FIG. 262 (g1), the third symbol pd3 is stopped (present stop). Even if the chance button 136 is not operated before the main stop, it is assumed that the operation has been performed, and the pre-reading notice shown in FIG. 262 (f1) is executed before or during the main stop. You may make it do.

  In FIG. 262 (h1), the first hold indicated by the first hold icon h1 is consumed, and the third symbol pd3 starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In the wipe display Wd, the characters “Next” displayed as the pre-read notice display disappear, and “Castle Town” as the name of the background stage is displayed. Further, the button hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 until then starts moving toward the area cs displaying the change icon while including the mini item MI ′. In FIG. 262 (i1), the change icon Is displayed as a fluctuation icon c including the mini item MI ′. It should be noted that the icon that has been the first hold icon h1 until then becomes a variable icon when it reaches the area cs where the variable icon is displayed, and at the time when the first symbol (special figure) starts the variable display. It may be considered as a fluctuation icon, or may be regarded as a fluctuation icon at a point away from the area hs where the hold icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 262 (j1), the mini item MI ′ included in the change icon c changes to a mini item MI in a display mode in which PUSH characters are added to the display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light. The display mode of the mini item MI here is the same as the display mode of the second operation means display Od2.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 262 (k1), as shown in FIG. 262 (l1), the effect image Ed6 appears so as to hide the entire variation icon c, and in FIG. 262 (m1), The effect image Ed6 disappears, and the change icon c has changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. The display form representing the face of the Tono-sama character corresponds to the display form of the normal notice with a very high expectation degree of jackpot, and the normal notice using the change icon c is started.

  In this example, the remaining display of the chance button 136 is not displayed on the mini item MI. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period of the chance button 136, there is no operation. For example, the normal notice using the change icon c may be started after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  FIG. 263 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the operation of the chance button is delayed in the example illustrated in FIG. 262. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 262 will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 263, the chance button 136 is not operated during the execution of the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3, which has been performed at the timing when the holding increases, and the next fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3 starts. Then, the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 263 (i2)). That is, a state in which the second operation means display Od2 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the mini-item MI having the same display form as the display form of the second operation means display Od2 is included in the variation icon c. Then, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 263 (j2), the second operation means display Od2 is changed to the first operation means display Od1, and the wipe display Wd displayed on the changed first operation means display Od1. Is displayed as a normal notice display (second notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character symbol “CHANCE” is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 during the variable display from the front side. On the other hand, an effect image Ed6 that hides the entire variation icon c appears in the region cs that displays the variation icon.

  In FIG. 263 (k2), the effect image Ed6 disappears, and the change icon c is changed to a display mode representing the face of the Tono-sama character. Further, the effect image Ed in the wipe display Wd also disappears.

  In FIG. 263 (l2), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 started in FIG. 263 (f2) is continued, and the variation icon c continues to be displayed in a display mode representing the face of the character, and the wipe display The display of the normal notice in Wd (character display of “hot”) continues to be displayed. Note that the character symbol “CHANCE” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L disappears, and the third symbol pd3 being displayed in a variable manner is visible. In addition, the display of the normal notice on the wipe display Wd (character display of “hot”) is also changed to “castle town” as the name of the background stage, and the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is ended early. May be. Thereafter, the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is ended, and the stop display (main stop) is performed with the combination of big hits. In addition, even if a normal advance notice is executed, a stop display (main stop) may be made by a combination of misses.

  In the example of FIG. 262 and FIG. 263 described above, the operation of the chance button 136 can be accepted from the time when the second operation means display Od2 is changed. If the operation of the chance button 136 is detected before the display is started, the pre-reading notice data corresponding to the second operation means display Od2 is used to produce the data shown in FIGS. 262 (f1) to (g1). If the operation of the chance button 136 is detected after the symbol change display to be notified is started (for example, after receiving the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300), On the control units 400 and 500 side, the effect data for changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon c is used while using the effect data for the normal notice corresponding to the second operation means display Od2. Using performs normal notice shown in FIG. 263 (j2) or later. For this reason, the player may be given pleasure to select when to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the operation means display once disappears after the chance button 136 is operated.

  The first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 264 (a) is changed to the second operation means display Od2 in FIG. 264 (b), and sound effects are output from the speaker 120. Here, the second operation means display Od2 is a combination of a display in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light and a meter display Tm.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 264 (d) during the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3, as shown in FIG. The “next” character is displayed as the notice effect), and the effect image Ed is added to the wipe display Wd in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second operation means display Od2 displayed under the wipe display Wd disappears, and no operation means display is displayed under the wipe display Wd.

  In FIG. 264 (f), the effect image Ed disappears, but the “next” character continues to be displayed on the wipe display Wd. After the display of the variation of the third symbol pd3 continues for a while, in FIG. 264 (i), the third symbol pd3 sways (temporarily stops) due to the combination of the decorative symbol loss, and in FIG. The 3 symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed by a combination of the decorative symbols lost (main stop). The stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues until FIG. 264 (m). During this stop display (main stop), as shown in FIG. 264 (k), the wipe display Wd is changed from “next” as the pre-reading notice display to “castle town” as the name of the background stage. . Until this time of FIG. 264 (k), the operation means display is not displayed.

  While the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3 continues, as shown in FIGS. 264 (l) to (m), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed from the bottom. An animation that gradually appears (display start animation) is displayed, and finally the first operation means display Od1 is displayed below the wipe display Wd during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3. Is done.

  In this way, the second operation means display Od2 does not have to be immediately switched to the first operation means display Od1 when the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated, and once it disappears. The first operation means display Od1 may be displayed.

  The timing at which the first operation means display Od1 is displayed may be during the fluctuation display when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the fluctuation display of the third symbol pd3. The next variation display start of the third symbol pd3 may be started, or the next variation display may be in progress. The timing may be during the stop display (main stop) when the second operation means display Od2 disappears during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3. The next variation display start of the symbol pd3 may be started, or the next variation display may be in progress.

  Further, in this example, the first operation means display Od1 is displayed, but it may be the third operation means display Od3, the fourth operation means display Od4, or first. The second operation means display Od2 may be different from the displayed second operation means display Od2.

  Further, the fourth operation means display Od4 does not immediately switch to the first operation means display Od1 as shown in FIG. 253 (38) when the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136) is operated. Alternatively, it may be displayed after it disappears and becomes the first operation means display Od1. Further, when the corresponding operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display Od4 is displayed, an operation means display other than the first operation means display Od1 may be displayed.

  The various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may be hidden during the big hit game, and may be suddenly displayed without the display start animation when the display is started after the big hit game ends.

  Further, the various operation means displays Od1 to Od4 may disappear once during the display and be displayed again. For example, it may disappear once during the variation display of the third symbol pd3, and may be redisplayed during the variation display, may be redisplayed at the start of the next variation display, or redisplayed during the next variation display. May be. Alternatively, it may disappear once during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, and may be displayed again during the stop display (main stop), or may be displayed again at the start of the next variable display, It may be redisplayed during the next variation display.

  FIG. 265 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of how to display the operation unit display.

  In FIG. 265 (a), the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side displays the reduced display pd3 ′ of the third symbol pd3, the area cs for displaying the variation icon, and the variation icon c. The first operating means display Od1 is displayed on the three decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that a super reach effect is being executed, and the scene after the swordsman and swordsman slash are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In FIG. 265 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts moving to the right side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N starts moving to the left side. That is, the movements 208M and 208N start to move toward each other.

  FIG. 265 (c) shows a moment when the right end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the left end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the moment when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed is shown. At this stage, there is no change in the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. When the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed, the lower part of the family crest member 224E ′ is the upper right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration. The symbol display device 208N overlaps with the upper left corner from the front side. Further, both the lord and the swordsman displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is not hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and is visible.

  In FIG. 265 (d), the first operation means display Od1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed. It changes to the second operation means display Od2. In other words, as the second operation means display Od2, a display in which PUSH characters are added to a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits red light straddles the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, a large meter display Tm ′ is also displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the first operation means display Od1 disappears from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, in order to make the first operation means display Od1 stand out, the region cs and the variation icon c for displaying the variation icon disappear.

  In this example, the second operation means display Od2 is enlarged and displayed so as to straddle two decorative symbol display devices, but may be enlarged and displayed so as to straddle three decorative symbol display devices. Further, the display size is not limited to the enlarged display, and may be the same as the size before the change (here, the first operation means display Od1). Furthermore, the same applies to other operation means displays other than the second operation means display Od2. That is, the operation means display may be displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices.

  As described above, in the example described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265, since the operation means display is displayed even during the stop display (main stop) of the third symbol pd3, the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is still displayed. You can make the player feel as if it has not ended.

  In the example described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265, the operation means display is a display corresponding to the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 193 and the chance button 136 is operated. The means display may be a display corresponding to another operation means such as the second chance button, the transparent portion 191 and the operation key unit 181.

  Further, the operation of the chance button 136 may be a normal operation called single press or short press or a single press, a long press operation, a continuous hit operation, or a normal operation. The operation may be an operation that is performed a plurality of times at intervals.

  In addition, the above-described advance notice such as the pre-read notice and the normal notice is not always a big hit even if the notice is executed, and may be lost. That is, the higher the expectation level of jackpot, the lower the chance of losing and the higher the chance of hitting.

  In FIGS. 252 (26) to 253 (40), the first operation means display Od1 and the fourth operation means display Od4 are displayed during the execution of the super reach effect. In some cases, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all of the operation means display may not be displayed. It may be displayed. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of super-reach effects, only one or a plurality of types of super-reach effects may be hidden or may not be displayed. In FIG. 257 (i), the second operation means display Od2 is displayed during the execution of the pseudo-continuous effects. Of the operation means display Od4, at least one of the operation means display or all of the operation means display may or may not be displayed. Furthermore, not only the super reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect but during the execution of the specific effect, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operation means display is displayed. , It may be hidden or it may be hidden.

  Further, during the execution of the jackpot game that the attacker opens, at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operation means display is not displayed. There may be, and it may be hidden. On the other hand, during the non-hit game that is not being executed, all the operation means displays Od1 to Od4 can be displayed. However, even during a non-hit game, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state), at least one of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 or all the operations are displayed. The means display may or may not be displayed. Even during a non-hit game, in the electric support state (ordinary high probability state), at least one operation means display or all of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are displayed. The operation means display may be hidden or may not be displayed.

  The second operation means display Od2 may be a display having a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 in at least one of color and size. For example, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 251 (2) to (9) is different from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 only in color, but the color is the same and only the size is different. May be. On the other hand, the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIGS. 260 (n) to (o) has a different color and size from the display form of the first operation means display Od1, and a meter display Tm is added. Yes.

  Further, the third operation means display Od3 may also be a display having a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display Od1 in at least one of color and size. For example, the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIGS. 260 (d) to (m) differs only in color from the display mode of the first operation means display Od1, but the color is the same and only the size is different. Alternatively, both the color and size may be different, and the pattern and shape may be different.

  In addition, all of the operation means displays of the first operation means display Od1 to the fourth operation means display Od4 are displays including a display imitating the corresponding operation means (here, the chance button 136). The display imitating the button 136 is not necessarily included, and all the operation means display may not be included, or only a part of the operation means display (for example, the second operation means display Od2) is included. It does not have to be.

  In addition, the effects that are started when the operation means is operated while the operation means display is displayed include the effects related to the current symbol variation, the effects related to prefetching, and the effects in which the change is stopped (for example, variations) It is possible to list the effects in a state where there is no suspension and there is no hold (a demonstration effect may or may not be included). That is, the effects that are started when the operating means is operated may be all of the above-listed effects, or may not be applied among the above-listed effects.

  In addition, in FIG. 258 (k), FIG. 1 (l), and the like, a button hold icon which is a display related to the operation means but is different from the operation means display is displayed together. In addition to the button holding icon, the display other than the operation means displays Od1 to Od4 includes a button display in the judgment effect, a button display in the pseudo-joint effect, a button display in the conversation notice, and the like. These displays may be displayed together with the operation means displays Od1 to Od4. In addition, the display related to the hold icon such as the button hold icon is different, but the button display in the judgment effect, the button display in the pseudo-joint effect, the button display in the conversation notice can be regarded as a kind of operation means display. There is also. For example, the fourth operation means display Od4 shown in FIGS. 252 (33) to 252 (36) can be regarded as a button display in the judgment effect.

  The button effects described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265 can be combined with the transparent effects described with reference to FIGS. For example, the various operating means display roles shown in FIGS. 251 to 265 are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and FIGS. 251 to 265 are used. The described button effect may be executable. Even in this case, the transmission effect may continue across a plurality of continuous variation displays, so that the accessory of the operation means display may continue to appear, or the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In the state where the number of holds is 0 (for example, the state of the symbol demo in which the decorative symbol is displayed or the state of the animation demo started after the symbol demo), the transmission effect is executed and the transmission liquid crystal display device An accessory indicating operation means may appear on the back side.

  Or, conversely, the operation means display is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal display device (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L), and the button effect described with reference to FIGS. 251 to 265 is executed, while FIGS. You may make it possible to perform the permeation effect explained using.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 266 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 266, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 193 are not provided.

  FIG. 267 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 267), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by attaching the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited thereto.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 267) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the rear surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of 3 cards are inserted. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, 2 cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 193 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 267, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title or the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 267 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“Display means [for example, any one of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O, etc. One or more],
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, any one or more of a chance button 136, a second chance button, a transparent portion 191, an operation key unit 181 and the like];
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol [for example, a decorative symbol (third symbol pd3), a fourth symbol pd4, or a fifth symbol pd5 shown in FIG. 197 (b)],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, hold icons h1 to h4, button hold icons MI, hd] according to the number of held balls,
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a first operation means display [for example, first operation means display Od1],
One of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a second operation means display [for example, second operation means display Od2],
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display [for example, a display, shape, color, size, etc. having the same shape and different colors, sizes, patterns, etc. Display with the same pattern, etc., with different operation modes such as vibration, rotation, etc., and display with different shapes (from the display that simulates the operation means, the operation promotion display, the remaining period display, etc. A different type of display, a display with a different operating means, etc.]
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The first operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 251 (13) to FIG. 252 (29)] that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous display variations of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the “decorative display of the decorative pattern” means that the decorative display of the variable display is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started with the stop display interposed therebetween. Moreover, it can also be regarded as 1 fluctuation | variation from the start of a fluctuation display to a fixed display. Furthermore, “stretching” means that a decorative symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them.

  The second operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, or may be a display switched from the first operation means display.

  Further, the operation means display is a display related to the operation means, for example, a display prompting to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation promotion display”), or an operation effective period of the operation means. Display of the remaining period (hereinafter referred to as “remaining period display”) or a display reminiscent of the operation means.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display. In addition, the second operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. In addition, the first operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may be a display that may not end.

  The second operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. Further, the second operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may be a display that may not end.

  Further, the second operation means display may be the same display mode as the first operation means display or may be a different display mode.

  Note that the operation means may be means that must be operated by a player. In addition, the display means may be means for always displaying a plurality of types of operation means display, may be means for always displaying decorative symbols, or always displays a hold display according to the number of balls on hold. It may be a means to do.

Also,
“The first operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 260 (b)] [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (c), the first operation means display. Od1 has not changed],
When the operation means is operated in the state where the first operation means display is displayed, a response action corresponding to the operation means being operated [For example, as shown in FIG. Output of operation sound such as “pico” may occur,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this aspect, although the operation means display (first operation means display) does not change even if the operation means is operated, the response operation is performed, giving the player a sense of incongruity and interest. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the first operation means display may be a default operation means display among the plurality of types of operation means displays.

In addition to the output from the speaker, the response operation may be any display, light emission of the light emitting means, operation of the movable means, etc., or a combination thereof (hereinafter the same) .)
When the operation means is operated in the state where the first operation means display is displayed, a response operation according to the operation of the operation means may be performed without fail.

Also,
“One of the plural types of operation means displays is a third operation means display [for example, third operation means display Od3],
The third operation means display is different from the first operation means display [for example, a display mode including a display imitating the chance button 136 that emits white light] [for example, the chance button 136 that emits red light is displayed. Display mode including simulated display],
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The third operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated [for example, the third operation means display Od3 does not change as shown in FIG. 260 (f)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this aspect, since the third operation means display different from the first operation means display is displayed, when the player operates the operation means, there is some change in the third operation means display. There is a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of incongruity and interest because there is no change.

  The third operation means display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be a display that once disappears in the middle. Further, during the display of the stop display of the decorative design, it may be a display that is continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears in the middle, or may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be displayed. The third operation means display may end during the display of the stop display, but may also be a display that may not end.

  The third operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, a display switched from the first operation means display, or the first operation means display. The operation means display may be changed.

  In addition, the third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed, and the first operation means display is the third operation means during display of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may change.

  The third operation means display may be the same display form as the second operation means display, or may be a different display form.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the third operation means display is displayed, a response action corresponding to the operation means being operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 260 (f) [Operation sound output such as “pico-pico”] may be performed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  When the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, a response operation corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed without fail.

Also,
The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed.
There may be a case where the first operation means display is changed to the third operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the first operation means display may be changed to the third operation means display.

Also,
The third operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 260 (d) to FIG.
The third operation means display is a display in which there is a case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 260 (h) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of times the decorative symbol variation display. The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the third operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 260 (e)], when the first notice effect is started [for example, FIG. 260 (f) ), When the output of the pre-notification effect sound such as “pico-pico” is started]
The first notice effect is a notice effect of a pre-read notice,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect may be surely started.

  Here, the third operation means display itself may be a display of a pre-reading notice (fourth notice effect).

Also,
The display means includes first display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L] and one or more second display means [for example, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device. 208N, any one or more of the fourth decorative symbol display device 208O].
The second display means is a means having a display screen smaller than the first display means,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 251 (1)],
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed on the second display means [for example, FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. 11 (11)],
Said 3rd operation means display is a display which may be displayed on said 2nd display means [for example, FIG. 256 (b)-the same figure (i)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed on the first display means, or a display that may be displayed on the second display means. Also good.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed on the second display means, and the second operation means display is a display that is always displayed on the second display means. The third operation means display may be a display that is always displayed on the second display means.

  The display means may be a means including only the first display means and one or a plurality of second display means, or may be a means including a third display means.

Also,
“It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that an attacker [for example, variable prize opening 234, 235] opens,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed in a non-hit game [for example, a normal game state in which a variation display of decorative symbols can be executed]
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game,
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in the non-hit game.

  Note that the jackpot game that is opened by the attacker may be executed without fail.

Also,
The first operation means display may be hidden during execution of a certain effect [for example, super reach effect or pseudo-continuous effect, etc.] even when the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Display,
The second operation means display is a display that may be hidden during execution of the certain effect, even if the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed.
The third operation means display is a display that may be hidden during execution of the certain effect even when the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the certain effect may be a super reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect. That is, the certain effect may be both a super reach effect and a pseudo-ream effect, or only one of them. Here, the super reach production refers to various reach productions other than the normal reach production (including special reach such as special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc.). Further, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, which is different from the stop display of the decorative symbol, is displayed. If the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display is displayed, the fourth operation means display may disappear and the second notice effect may be started. The second notice effect may be a pseudo-continuous effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect may be an effect in which a temporary stop display of the decorative symbol different from the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

  The first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game, and the second operation means display may be hidden during the big hit game. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden during the big hit game.

  The first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probability change state, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the probability change state. Alternatively, the third operation means display may be a display that may not be displayed in the probability variation state.

  Further, the first operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state, and the second operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state. The third operation means display may be a display that may be hidden in the electric support state.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the super reach, even during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, and the second operation means display may be Even during display of the decorative symbol variation display, it may be a display that is always hidden during the super reach, and the third operation means display is during the decoration symbol variation display display. Even in such a case, the display may be always hidden during the super reach.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during a big hit game, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during a big hit game. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden during the big hit game.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability change state, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability change state. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the probability variation state.

  The first operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state, and the second operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state. The third operation means display may be a display that is always hidden in the electric support state.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display of a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color or size [for example, FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. ), The second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. 260 (n) to the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG.
The third operation means display is a display having a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color and size [for example, FIG. 260 (d) to FIG. The third operation means display Od3] shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the second operation means may be a display having the same display form as the display of the third operation means. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of these differs may be sufficient.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be a display form in which at least one of color or size is different from the display form of the first operation means display.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the display form of the second operation means display, and the display form, color or size of the second operation means display. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of these differs may be sufficient.

  Further, the fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the third operation means display, or the display form, color or size of the third operation means display. The display of the display mode from which at least any one of these differs may be sufficient.

  The second operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The third operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size.

  The second operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the third operation means display in both color and size, or only the color or only the size. The fourth operation means display may be a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display, both in color and size, only in color, or only in size.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display form different from the display form of the second operation means display, both in color and size, or only in color, or only in size. The display mode of the third operation means display and the display mode may be different in both color and size, or only in color or only in size.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 252 (33) to FIG. 36 (36)] that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 253 (37)], a second notice effect may be started.
The second notice effect is a notice effect related to a big hit by a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed at the start [for example, a family crest member shown in FIGS. 253 (38) to (40) 224E 'operation etc. of normal notice]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth operation means display may be a display developed from the first operation means display, a display switched from the first operation means display, or the first operation means display. One operation means display may be changed.

  Further, the fourth operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed, and the first operation means display is the fourth operation means during display of the decorative symbol variation display. The display may change.

  In addition, the fourth operation means display may be a display in which display is started regardless of other types of operation means display (for example, the first operation means display).

  The fourth operation means display may be a display mode different from the first operation means display. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the first operation means display, or larger than the size of the first operation means display. It may be a display that is displayed, or may be a display that is displayed smaller than the size of the first operation means display.

  The fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the second operation means display, or may be a different display form. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the second operation means display, or larger than the size of the second operation means display. The display may be displayed, or the display may be smaller than the size of the second operation means display.

  The fourth operation means display may be the same display form as the third operation means display, or may be a different display form. The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed at a display position different from the display position of the third operation means display, or larger than the size of the third operation means display. It may be a display that is displayed, or may be a display that is displayed smaller than the size of the third operation means display.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed, the second notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
“The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in 40 (f) to FIG.
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation means display does not change [for example, FIG. 257 (i ) As shown in the second operation means display Od2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display may be different.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display.

  Further, when the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed [for example, FIG. 257 (h)], the fourth operation means is displayed. Of the second notice effect corresponding to the display and the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display, the second notice effect [for example, by the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 257 (i) Only the normal notice effect] may be started, or only the second notice effect may always be started.

  When the operation means is operated again after the second notice effect is started, the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display [for example, as shown in FIG. 257 (k)]. In the wipe display Wd, there may be a case where the character display of “heat” and the pre-reading notice effect by the effect image Ed] may be started, or the first notice effect may always be started. The second operation means display may change [for example, change to the first operation means display Od1 as shown in FIG. 257 (k)].

  Here, when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously displayed, the second operation means display corresponding to the fourth operation means display. Both the notice effect and the first notice effect corresponding to the second operation means display may or may not be started. In this case, the second operation means display changes.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display [for example, a fourth operation means display Od4],
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display [for example, FIG. 252 (33) to FIG. 36 (36)] that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display.
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 253 (37)], a second notice effect may be started.
The second notice effect is a notice effect related to a big hit by a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed at the start [for example, a family crest member shown in FIGS. 253 (38) to (40) 224E ', etc.
When the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the first operation means display [For example, the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 257 (d) and the second operation means display Od2 is the first display. 257 (f) to (g) in FIG. 257 after the change to the operation means display Od1 in FIG.
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 257 (f) to (g)],
When the fourth operation means display is displayed simultaneously with the third operation means display [For example, in FIGS. 257 (f) to (g), the second operation means display Od2 is the third operation means display. If the operation means display is Od3], there is a display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the first operation means display may be different, and the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed. The start timing may be different, and the display timing of the fourth operation means display and the third operation means display may be different.

  The fourth operation means display may be displayed in parallel with the first operation means display, and the fourth operation means display is in parallel with the second operation means display. The fourth operation means display may be a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is displayed, the second notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
“Even if the operation means is operated in the state where the first operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect is not started [for example, an operation sound is output as shown in FIG. 260 (c) Will not start the announcement]
The first notice effect is a notice effect of a prefetch notice,
When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 251 (12)], when the first notice effect is started [for example, FIG. 13), the display of the character “heat” in the wipe display Wd, the display of the effect image Ed, and the output of the sound effect may be started]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second operation means display itself may be a prefetch notice display (third notice effect).

  When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed, the first notice effect may be surely started.

Also,
The second operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display is changed,
There may be a case [for example, a case shown in FIG. 251 (2)] in which the first operation means display changes to the second operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first operation means display may be changed to the second operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
“When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed [for example, FIG. 251 (12)], the second operation means display may change [for example, As shown in FIG. 251 (13), there is a case where the first operation means display Od1 may be changed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that when the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may be changed.

Also,
“The case where the second operation means display changes” described above is “the case where the second operation means display changes to the first operation means display”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the second operation means display may always change to the first operation means display.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second operation means display changes” described above, “the second operation means display has once disappeared [for example, FIGS. 264 (e) to (k) Then, when the first operation means display is displayed [for example, in the case of FIGS. 264 (l) to (m)] ”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The first operation means display may always be displayed after the second operation means display once disappears.

Also,
“The second operation means display is a display [e.g., FIG. 251 (2) to FIG. 251 (11)] that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol.
The first operating means display is a display that may continue to be displayed even during display of the stop display of the decorative symbol [for example, the case shown in FIG. 251 (15) to FIG. 17 (17)],
The second operation means display is a display in which there is a case [for example, the case shown in FIG. 251 (4) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The first operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol,
The second operation means display may be a display that is always displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
“The first operation means display is a display [for example, the first operation means display Od1 shown in FIG. 263 (a)] that may be displayed even when the hold display is not displayed. A game table that features ]
Also explained.

Also,
“At least one of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a display imitating the operation means [for example, the first operation means display Od1 and the second operation means display Od2 shown in FIG. The fourth operation means display Od4 shown in 252 and the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 256].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, all the displays of the plurality of types of operation means display may include a display imitating the operation means, or only a part of the plurality of types of operation means displays. However, the display may include a display imitating the operation means.

Also,
“The display means displays the hold display [for example, the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 258 (k)] and the operation means display form [for example, the white display form, the chance button 136 that emits red light. It is a means that can be displayed in a display mode in which a mini item MI in which PUSH characters are added to the imitated display is added,
The operation means display mode is a display mode in which the second operation means display [for example, the second operation means display Od2 displayed on the third operation means display Od3 shown in FIG. 258 (l)] is enlarged or reduced. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation unit display mode may be a display mode in which the second operation unit display is enlarged or reduced only during the operation effective period of the operation unit.

  Further, the operation means display mode is not limited to the second operation means display, but other operation means display (for example, the first operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means display). It may be a display mode in which (display) is enlarged or reduced. Alternatively, the operation unit display mode may be a display mode in which part or all of the operation unit display is enlarged or reduced. The operation means display mode may be different in color and pattern from the operation means display. Further, depending on the case, the operation means display mode may be the same size as the operation means display, or the shape may be different from the operation means display. As long as the display mode is related to the same operation means, it may be different from the display mode of the operation means display.

  In addition, the hold display of the operation means display mode may be displayed at a time different from the operation effective period of the operation means, and the operation operation effective period of the operation means is always displayed during the display. It may be.

  Further, when the operation unit is operated in a state where the hold display is displayed in the operation unit display mode, the hold display displayed in the operation unit display mode may change, It may change. For example, the display mode may change to a display mode (including a default display mode in which the expected level is 0) that represents the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  Furthermore, various limitations described below are recognized.

  The fourth operation means display may be a display displayed closer to the hold display (hold icon) than the first operation means display, or the hold may be displayed more than the second operation means display. It may be a display displayed near the display (hold icon), or may be a display displayed near the hold display (hold icon) rather than the third operation means display.

  The display means is display means capable of displaying the hold display as a variation icon corresponding to the variation display of the decoration symbol after the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the fourth operation unit display includes: The display may be displayed closer to the variation icon than the first operation means display, or may be display closer to the variation icon than the second operation means display. However, the display may be displayed closer to the variation icon than the third operation means display.

  The first operation means display may be a display closer to the specific display than the fourth operation means display, and the second operation means display may be the fourth operation means display. May be a display that is displayed closer to the specific display, and the third operation means display may be a display that is displayed closer to the specific display than the fourth operation means display. . As an example of the specific display here, the display of the presentation mode, the display of the stage name, the display of the pre-reading notice (display of the first notice notice effect), the display of the notice of the change (display of the second notice notice effect) ), Display of special effects such as super reach, display of operation means (the above-mentioned operation promotion display, operation invalidation display (for example, display during preparation), etc.), control state display (for example, display during probability change), effect, etc. Display and the like can be enumerated. That is, as the specific display, all of the above-described enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The first operation means display and the second operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions. The first operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions. The second operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed at the same display position, or may be displayed at different display positions.

  The hold display may be displayed in an operation means display mode related to the operation means, and the first operation means display is displayed simultaneously over the entire display period or a part of the hold display of the operation means display mode. The second operation means display may be displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation means display mode for the entire period or a part of the period. The third operation unit display may be displayed simultaneously with the hold display of the operation unit display mode for the entire period or a part of the period.

  The variation icon may be displayed in an operation unit display mode related to the operation unit, and the fourth operation unit display is displayed simultaneously with the variation icon of the operation unit display mode over a whole period or a part of the period. It may be done.

  The display in the operation means display mode referred to here means that the hold display itself is displayed in a display mode imitating the operation means, or an icon (for example, a display form imitating the operation means in the hold display) , A display as a mini item) may be added and displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the operation promotion display, or the operation promotion display (for example, as a mini item) may be displayed on the hold display. Display) may be displayed, the hold display itself may be displayed in the remaining period display, or the remaining period display (for example, display as a mini item) may be displayed in the hold display. It may be added and displayed, or may be a combination of two or all of the display imitating the operation means, the operation promotion display, and the remaining period display.

  The first operation means display, the second operation means display, the third operation means display, the fourth operation means display, and the hold display or the display of the fluctuation icon are displayed as imitations of the operation means. When displayed, the remaining period display may be displayed at intervals from each display (display imitating the operation means) (for example, displayed at intervals below), or each display (the operation means). And the remaining period display may be displayed together.

  While the decoration symbol stop display is being displayed, the first operation means display, the second operation means display, and the third operation means display may be displayed. During the display, there may be a case where a notification that allows setting change or a specific effect is executed. Further, when the decorative design is stopped and the number of reserved balls is 0, operating the operating means may cause some animation display, some sound output, or some light emission. The animation display, sound output, and light emission are performed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display. More specifically, the display may be performed during the display of the so-called demonstration display. It may be performed after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed until the demonstration display is started.

  The operation means may be capable of changing the aspect. As an example of the change in the mode, a change in the color, a change in the light emission mode, a change in the movement of the operation surface (for example, a change in the protrusion amount), a rotation of a frame surrounding the operation surface, and the like can be listed. That is, the above-described changes in the mode of the operation means may be all of those listed above. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The operation means may be a button type or a lever type. If it is a button type, the operation surface may be movable in the vertical direction or the front-back direction. Moreover, as long as it is a lever type, it may be able to be tilted in one or a plurality of directions.

  When the first operation means display changes to the fourth operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means. The movement may be started and displayed as the fourth operation means display on the first display means. The movement here may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

  When the first operation means display changes to the second operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is displayed on the first display means. May be displayed as the second operation means display on the first display means, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be The movement toward the second display unit may be started and displayed as the second operation unit display on the second display unit.

  Further, when the first operation means display changes to the third operation means display, the first operation means display displayed on the second display means is changed to the first display. The movement toward the means may be started and displayed as the third operation means display on the first display means, or the first operation means display displayed on the first display means may be displayed. The movement toward the second display means may be started and displayed as the third operation means display on the second display means.

  When the notice target (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is the same, or when the corresponding notice effect mode is the same, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are simultaneously performed. The first operation means display and the third operation means display are not displayed at the same time, and the second operation means display and the third operation means display are also displayed at the same time. You may not make it. On the other hand, when the notice target (for example, a certain symbol variation display) is different, or when the corresponding notice effect mode is different, the first operation means display and the second operation means display are In some cases, it may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period, or the first operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed over the entire period or a part of the period, The second operation means display and the third operation means display may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period.

  In addition, the first operation means display and the fourth operation means display may be displayed simultaneously over the whole period or a part of the period, and the second operation means display and the fourth operation means display are also included. In some cases, the third operation unit display and the fourth operation unit display may be displayed simultaneously over the entire period or a part of the period.

  In the following, including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 3-1)
Display means;
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of held balls,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice effects,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a first operation unit display,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a second operation unit display,
The second operation unit display is a display different from the first operation unit display,
The first operation unit display and the second operation unit display are different from the hold display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display for changing the first operation means display to the second operation means display (hereinafter referred to as “first change display”),
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decoration symbol variation is stopped (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative design is changing (hereinafter referred to as “second state”),
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first change display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
The second operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is effective.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine described in appendix 3-1, there is a case where it is possible to make it seem that the fluctuation has not stopped yet by performing the effect by displaying the display means even while the fluctuation is stopped.

(Appendix 3-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1,
The first operation means display is a display in which the display may not be ended even if it is shifted from one of the first state and the second state to the other,
The second operation means display is a display in which the display may not be ended even when shifting from one of the first state and the second state to the other.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1 or 3-2,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed even in a state where the hold display is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-3,
An effect can be displayed by operating the operation means of the player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-4,
One notice effect of the plurality of kinds of notice effects is a first notice effect,
The display means is means capable of starting display of the first notice effect by an operation of the operation means of a player.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a prefetch notice effect,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a third operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display for changing the first operation means display to the third operation means display (hereinafter referred to as “second change display”),
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed as the prefetch notice,
The third operating means display is a display that may not end the display even when the state is shifted from one of the first state and the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3-7)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-6,
The third operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is invalid,
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The third operation means display is a display in which the operation means is invalid as in the case of the first operation means display. However, the third operation means display may have the same mode as the second operation means display. Further, the third operation means display may be different from the second operation means display.

(Appendix 3-8)
The game stand according to appendix 3-6 or 3-7,
The first operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display,
The first operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display,
The second operation means display is a display that may not be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In one display means, two operation means displays (first, second and third) may not be displayed at the same time. Further, the operation means display related to the operation of another operation means may be displayed at the same time.

  Further, if the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may return to the first operation means display or until just before the fluctuation stop. It may disappear completely.

(Appendix 3-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-6 to 3-8,
One operation means display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is valid,
If the player operates the operation means while the fourth operation means display is displayed, the first notice display may be displayed.
The fourth operation means display is a display that can be displayed in the second state,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the first operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the second operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed in parallel with the third operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the operation means display may be displayed at the same time as normal button effects other than the operation means display (including judgment effects, pseudo-linking, button hold, conversation notice button display).

  Further, the effect performed by the operation during display of the fourth operation means may be the first notice effect.

(Appendix 3-10)
A game machine according to appendix 3-9,
In the case where the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed in parallel, when the player operates the operation means once, only the first notice effect is provided. Will be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first notice effect may be a display related to an operation performed during the display of the fourth operation means.

  Further, the effect (notice) displayed by operating the operation means when the second operation means display is displayed may be the second notice effect.

(Appendix 3-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-10,
The operation means display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-1)
Display means;
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of operation means display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display according to the number of held balls,
One of the plurality of types of operation means display is a first operation means display,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a second operation means display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display,
The first operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The second operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The first operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous variation display of the decorative symbol,
The second operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the first operation means display may change to the second operation means display,
The first operation means display may be displayed in a certain period,
The certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the number of reserved balls is zero.
When the operation means is operated while the first operation means display is displayed during the certain period, a response display may be performed in response to the operation means being operated. Has been
When the operation means is operated while the second operation means display is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice effect other than reach may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-2)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A3-1,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the first operation means display is displayed, the first operation means display is configured not to change,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the second operation means display is displayed, the second operation means display may be changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-3)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A3-2,
“When the second operation means display changes” as described in appendix A3-2 is “when the second operation means display changes to the first operation means display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-4)
A game machine as set forth in Appendix A3-2,
“When the second operation means display changes” described in Appendix A3-2 is “when the first operation means display is displayed after the second operation means display once disappears” Is,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-4,
The second operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a continuous display of the decorative pattern multiple times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-5,
The response display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-6,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a third operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the first operation means display,
The third operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The third operation means display is a display that does not change even when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-8)
A gaming machine according to appendix A3-7,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the third operation means display is displayed, a response action may be performed in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-9)
A gaming table according to appendix A3-7 or A3-8,
The third operation means display is a display in which the first operation means display has changed,
The first operation means display may be changed to the third operation means display during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-7 to A3-9,
The third operation means display is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
The third operation means display is a display that may continue to be displayed even during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-7 to A3-10,
The second operation means display is a display of a display form that is different from the display form of the first operation means display in at least one of color or size,
The third operation means display is a display in a display form in which at least one of color or size is different from the display form of the first operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-11,
One display of the plurality of types of operation means display is a fourth operation means display,
The fourth operation means display is a display different from the hold display,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed during the display of the stop display of the decorative design,
The fourth operation means display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of variations of the decorative symbol display,
When the operation means is operated in a state where the fourth operation means display is being displayed, a normal notice effect may be started.
The effect of the normal notice is an effect related to a big hit with a variation display of the decorative symbol displayed when it is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-13)
A gaming machine according to appendix A3-12,
The fourth operation means display is a display that may be displayed simultaneously with the second operation means display,
When the operation means is operated while the fourth operation means display and the second operation means display are displayed at the same time, the second operation means display does not change.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-13,
The second operation means display is a display including a display indicating an operation effective period of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-14,
At least one display of the plurality of types of operation means displays is a display including a display imitating the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-16)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A-15,
The display means is means capable of displaying the hold display in a mode including operation means display,
The operation means display is an enlarged or reduced display of the second operation means display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix A3-17)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices A3-1 to A3-16,
The certain period is a period from when the decorative design is stopped and displayed until the demonstration display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the operation means display may be displayed only during normal games.

  Further, the operation means display may not be displayed during a specific effect (for example, during super reach).

  Further, the second operation means display may be a color change with respect to the first operation means display, or may be an enlarged display of the first operation means display.

  In addition, the third operation means display may be a color change with respect to the first operation means display, or may be an enlarged display of the first operation means display.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 181 Operation key unit 191 Transmission part 208 Decorative design display device 208L First decorative design display device 208M Second decorative design display device 208N Third decorative design display device 208O Fourth decorative design display device 224E Family crest character 251 First movable means 2521, 2522 Second movable means 253 Third movable means 254 Fourth movable means 255 Fixed stationary means 256 Movable means IL light guide plate 300 main control section 400 first sub control section 500 second sub Control unit 600 Dispensing control unit 1000 Slot machine pd3 3rd symbol pd4 4th symbol pd5 5th symbol h1 to h4 Hold icon c Fluctuation icon Wd Wipe display Od1 First operation means display Od2 Second operation means display Od3 Third Operation means display Od4 Fourth operation hand Display

Claims (15)

Display means;
Hold means capable of storing start information as hold;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
The display means is means capable of displaying a change effect display,
The change effect display is a display that may change the first display to a display of a different mode,
The change effect display is a display that may be displayed a plurality of times in a continuous display of the variation of the decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The change effect display is a display including a character display,
In the first case, the character display includes the change effect display (hereinafter referred to as “first change effect display”) and the next change effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second change effect display”). May not be erased between,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
In the first case, the first change effect display and the second change effect display are displayed with different decorative symbol variation displays,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first display is a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold by the number of display of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the first mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3 or 4,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the hold icon from the second mode to the third mode.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5,
The variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the third mode is finally determined as the big hit symbol than the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the second mode. Easy to display,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The character display may be erased after the second change effect display ends.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The first change effect display and the second change effect display may be displayed during the display of the same decorative design variation display,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The character display may be displayed before the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol on which the first change effect display is displayed,
The character display may be displayed during stop display of the variation display of the decorative symbol,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The character display may be displayed before the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol on which the second change effect display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
The second change effect display may be displayed after the first change effect display,
In the first case, the first character is not erased in a period from the end of the first change effect display to the start of the second change effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first display is an effect candidate display,
The display means is means capable of displaying an effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display displayed on the display means,
The effect candidate display can be displayed in a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The first change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode,
The second change effect display is a display for changing the effect candidate display from the first mode to the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that. A game table according to claim 12,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second mode is displayed rather than the variation display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the first mode is displayed. It ’s easier to display the big hit symbol in the end,
The decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the third aspect is displayed rather than the variable display of the decoration symbol in which the effect display corresponding to the effect candidate display in the second aspect is displayed. The fluctuation display of is easier to finalize the jackpot symbol in the end,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 12 or 13,
When one of the plurality of effect candidate displays is displayed, the other may be displayed.
When a plurality of the effect candidate displays are displayed, the change effect display in which one of the effect candidate displays is changed may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.